Fiat Hitachi Fb90 2 Fb100 2 Fb110 2 Fb200 2 Service Manual PDF

MODELS
FB90.2 FB100.2 FB110.2

FB200.2 4WS
WORKSHOP MANUAL
19900
Print 604.13.028 edition 09/2000

TO THE READER
• This manual has been written for a skilled content, please contact:
technician, in order to give him the
information necessary to repair this FIAT-HITACHI EXCAVATORS S.p.A.
machine. Strada Settimo, 323
San Mauro Torinese (TO)
- Read this manual carefully for correct 10099 ITALIA
information about repair procedures. PRODUCT SUPPORT
DOCUMENTATION CENTER
- For any question or comment, or in case Fax. ++39 011 6877357
you notice a mistake in this manual
ADDITIONAL REFERENCE MANUALS
• In addition to this Workshop Manual, refer also

to the following:
- Operation and maintenance instruction

manual
- Spare parts catalog
DESCRIPTION OF THE COMPLETE

WORKSHOP MANUAL
• The complete repair manual consists of one remove and install procedures, disassembly
volume: and assembly procedures.
FB90.2 FB100.2 FB110.2FB200.2 4WS - • The complete Workshop Manual FB90.2

Workshop Manual "Terna" FB100.2 FB110.2FB200.2 4WS - Workshop
Manual "Terna" consists of the following volu-
• “Terne" Workshop Manual contains the me identified by print number as shown
technical information necessary for machine/ herebelow:
engine service and repair, service equipment,
information on maintenance standards,
VOLUME MACHINE TYPE PRINT No.

- Workshop Manual FB90.2 FB100.2 FB110.2 604.13.028
"TERNA" FB200.2 4WS
AVOID ACCIDENTS
Most accidents, whether they occur in industry, on the farm, at home or

on the highway, are caused by the failure of some individuals to follow
simple and fundamental safety rules or precautions. For this reason
MOST ACCIDENTS CAN BE PREVENTED by recognising the real
cause and doing something about it before the accident occurs.
Regardless of the care used in the design and construction of any type
of equipment there are conditions that cannot be completely safeguarded
against without interfering with reasonable accessibility and efficient
operation.
Carefully read indications, cautions and safety warning quoted in the
“SAFETY RULES” section.
A careful operator is the best insurance against an accident.
The complete observance of one simple rule would prevent many
thousand serious injuries each year.
That rule is:
Never attempt to clean, oil or adjust a machine while it is in motion.
ATTENTION
On machines having hydraulically, mechanically and/or cable

controlled equipment (such as showels, loaders, dozers, scrapers
etc.) be certain the equipment is lowered to the ground before
servicing, adjusting and/or repairing.
If it is necessary to have the equipment partially or fully raised to
gain access to certain items, be sure the equipment is suitably
supported by means other than the hydraulic lift cylinders, cable
and/or mechanical device used for controlling the equipment.
COPYRIGHT BY FIAT-HITACHI EXCAVATORS S.p.A.

Product Support - Documentation Centre
Strada di Settimo, 323 - S. Mauro T.SE (TO) ITALY
All rights reserved. Reproduction of text and illustrations in whole or in part,

is strictly prohibited.
CONTENTS
SECTION 00 – HEALTH, SAFETY, MAINTENANCE

CHAPTER 1 – General
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page
General Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

CHAPTER 2 – General Specifications
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CHAPTER 3 – Tooling
Tooling and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
.............................................................................
.............................................................................
.............................................................................
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 CONTENTS
.............................................................................
SECTION 10 – ENGINE – NEW HOLLAND 92 to 108 hp

CHAPTER 1 – Engine
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
CHAPTER 2 – Fuel System
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Lift Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
CHAPTER 3 – Turbocharger
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
CHAPTER 4 – Lubrication System
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
CHAPTER 5 – Cooling System
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

CONTENTS 3
SECTION 17 – TORQUE CONVERTER

CHAPTER 1 – With Powershuttle Transmission
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
CHAPTER 2 – With Powershift Transmission
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SECTION 21 – TRANSMISSIONS
CHAPTER 1 – 4x4 Compact Shuttle
Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
CHAPTER 2 – Powershift Introduction
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
CHAPTER 3 – Powershift Operating Lever
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
CHAPTER 4 – Powershift Overhaul (includes 4 Wheel Steer)
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

4 CONTENTS
SECTION 25 – FRONT AXLES

CHAPTER 1 – Front Axle (2 and 4 Wheel Drive Only)
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CHAPTER 2 – Front Axle (4 Wheel Steer Only)
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
SECTION 27 – REAR AXLES

CHAPTER 1 – Rear Axle with Foot Operated Diff Lock (2 and 4 Wheel Drive Only)
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
CHAPTER 2 – Rear Axle with Electrically Operated Diff Lock (2 and 4 Wheel Drive
Only)
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
CHAPTER 3 – Rear Axle (4 Wheel Steer Only)
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SECTION 33 – BRAKE SYSTEMS

CHAPTER 1 – Brakes (2 and 4 Wheel Drive Only)
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
CHAPTER 2 – Brakes (4 Wheel Steer Only)
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

CONTENTS 5
SECTION 35 – HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS

CHAPTER 1– Hydraulic Circuits and Components (REXROTH ONLY)
Hydraulic Circuits ................................................................. 9
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
CHAPTER 2 – Fault Finding, Pressure and Flow Testing

Preliminary Checks ......................................................................2

Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Pressure Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Flow Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
.............................................................................
CHAPTER 3 – Hydraulic Cylinders

General Specifications
......................................................................... 1
Description and
. . .Operation
............................................................................ 3
Removal and Installation
........................................................................... 9
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
.............................................................................
.............................................................................
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

6 CONTENTS
SECTION 39 – VEHICLE CHASSIS

CHAPTER 1 – CHASSIS COMPONENTS
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SECTION 41 – STEERING SYSTEMS

CHAPTER 1 – Steering (2 and 4 Wheel Drive Only)
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
CHAPTER 2 – Steering (4 Wheel Steer Only)
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
SECTION 50 – CAB HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

CHAPTER 1 – Cab Heating
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
CHAPTER 2 – Air Conditioning
Description & operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

CONTENTS 7
SECTION 55 – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

CHAPTER 1 – System General
Controls & Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Fuse Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
CHAPTER 2 – Wiring Diagrams
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Wiring Diagrams (outside of N/America) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CHAPTER 3 – Starter Motor

Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
CHAPTER 4 – Alternator
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CHAPTER 5 – Battery
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Maintenance & Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
CHAPTER 6 – Service Diagnostics, Calibration and Immobiliser
Service Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Instrument Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
CHAPTER 7 – Component Testing
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

8 CONTENTS
SECTION 82 – LOADER REMOVAL

CHAPTER 1 – OVERHAUL (2 and 4 Wheel Drive Only)
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
CHAPTER 2 – OVERHAUL (4 Wheel Steer Only)

Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SECTION 84 – BACKHOE REMOVAL

CHAPTER 1 – OVERHAUL
Backhoe Control Linkage Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Component Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Extendible Dipperstick Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
.............................................................................
SECTION 90 – CAB PARTS

CHAPTER 1 –

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cab Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 00 – MAINTENANCE – CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 00 – MAINTENANCE
Chapter 1 – General Instructions
IMPORTANT NOTICE
All maintenance and repair operations described in this manual should be carried out exclusively by authorised
workshops. All instructions detailed should be carefully observed and special equipment indicated should be
used if necessary.
Everyone who carries out service operations described without carefully observing these prescriptions will be
directly responsible of deriving damages.
SHIMMING
At each adjustment, select adjusting shims, measure them individually using a micrometer and then sum up
recorded values. Do not rely on measuring the whole shimming set, which may be incorrect, or on rated value
indicated for each shim.
ROTATING SHAFT SEALS

To correctly install rotating shaft seals, observe the following instructions:
– Let the seal soak into the same oil as it will seal for at least half an hour before mounting;
– Thoroughly clean the shaft and ensure that the shaft working surface is not damaged;
– Place the sealing lip towards the fluid. In case of a hydrodynamic lip, consider the shaft rotation direction and
orient grooves in order that they deviate the fluid towards the inner side of the seal;
– Coat the sealing lip with a thin layer of lubricant (oil rather than grease) and fill with grease the gap between
the sealing lip and the dust lip of double lip seals;
– Insert the seal into its seat and press it down using a flat punch. Do no tap the seal with a hammer or a drift;
– Take care to insert the seal perpendicularly to its seat while you are pressing it. Once the seal is settled,
ensure that it contacts the thrust element if required.;
– To prevent damaging the sealing lip against the shaft, place a suitable protection during installation.
‘O’ RINGS
Lubricate the ‘O’ rings before inserting them into their seats. This will prevent the ‘O’ rings from rolling over and
twine during mounting which will jeopardise sealing.
SEALERS
Apply FLEXIBLE GASKET SEALANT 82995770 or a suitable equivalent, over the mating surfaces marked with
an X.
Before applying the sealer, prepare the surface as follows:
– remove possible scales using a metal brush;
– thoroughly degrease the surfaces using DEGREASER 82995779, or a suitable equivalent.
BEARINGS
It is advisable to heat the bearings to 80 to 90°C before mounting them on their shafts and cool them down before
inserting them into their seats with external tapping.
SPRING PINS
When mounting split socket spring pins, ensure that the pin notch is oriented in the direction of the effort to stress
the pin.
Spiral spring pins should not be oriented during installation.
FB 90.2–200.2 604.13.028
2 SECTION 00 – MAINTENANCE – CHAPTER 1
NOTES FOR SPARE PARTS
USE EXCLUSIVELY GENUINE SPARE PARTS

Only genuine parts guarantee same quality, life, safety as original components as they are the same as mounted
in production.
Only the genuine spare parts can offer this guarantee.
All spare parts orders should be complete with the following data:
– Machine model (commercial name) and frame number;
– engine type and number;
– part number of the ordered part, which can be found on the “Microfiches” or the “Spare Parts Catalogue”,
which is the base for order processing.
NOTES FOR EQUIPMENT

Equipment which proposes and shows in this manual are as follows:
– studied and designed expressly for use on company machines;
– necessary to make a reliable repair;
– accurately built and strictly tested to offer efficient and long–lasting working means.
– we also remind the Repair Personnel that having these equipment means:
– work in optimal technical conditions;
– obtain best results;
– save time and effort;
– work more safely.
NOTICES
Wear limits indicated for some details should be intended as advised, but not binding values. The words “front”,
“rear”, “right hand”, and “left hand” referred to the different parts should be intended as seen from the operator’s
seat oriented to the normal sense of movement of the Machine.
HOW TO MOVE THE MACHINE WITH THE BATTERY REMOVED

Cables from the external power supply should be connected exclusively to the respective terminals of the Ma-
chine positive and negative cables using pliers in good condition which allow proper and steady contact.
Disconnect all services (lights, wind–shield wipers, etc.) before starting the Machine.
If it is necessary to check the Machine electrical system, check it only with the power supply connected. At check
end, disconnect all services and switch the power supply off before disconnecting the cables.
604.13.028 FB 90.2–200.2
SAFETY RULES
PAY ATTENTION TO THIS SYMBOL

This warning symbol points out important messages involving personal safety.
Carefully read the safety rules contained herein and follow advised precautions to
avoid potential hazards and safeguard your safety and personal integrity.
In this manual you will find this symbol together with the following key–words:
WARNING (ATTENZIONE) – it gives warning about improper repair operations and
deriving potential consequences affecting the service technician’s personal safety.
DANGER (PERICOLO) – it gives specific warning about potential dangers for person-
al safety of the operator or other persons directly or indirectly involved.
TO PREVENT ACCIDENTS • Stop the engine and ensure that all pressure is
Most accidents and personal injuries taking place in relieved from hydraulic circuits before removing
workshops are due from non–observance of some caps, covers, valves, etc.
simple and essential prudential rule and safety pre- • All repair and maintenance operations should be
cautions. For this reason, IN MOST CASES THEY carried out with the greatest care and attention.
CAN BE AVOIDED. It suffices to foresee possible • Service stairs and platforms used in a workshop
causes and act consequently with necessary caution or in the field should be built in compliance with
and care. the safety rules in force.
The possibility that an accident might occur with any • Disconnect the batteries and label all controls to
type of machines should not be disregarded, no mat- warn that the Machine is being serviced. Block
ter how well the machine in question was designed the machine and all equipment which should be
and built. raised.
A wise and careful service technician is the best pre- • Never check or fill fuel tanks and accumulator
cautions against accidents. batteries, nor use starting liquid if you are smok-
Careful observance of this only basic precaution ing or near open flames as such fluids are flam-
would be enough to avoid many severe accidents. mable.
DANGER: Never carry out any cleaning, lubrication • Brakes are inoperative when they are manually
or maintenance operations when the engine is run- released for maintenance purposes. In such
ning. cases, the machine should be kept constantly
under control using blocks or similar devices.
SAFETY RULES • The fuel filling gun should remain always in con-
• Carefully follow specified repair and mainte- tact with the filler neck. Maintain this contact until
nance procedures. the fuel stops flowing into the tank to avoid pos-
sible sparks due to static electricity buildup.
• Do not wear rings, wristwatches, jewels, unbut-
toned or flapping clothing such as ties, torn • Use exclusively specified towing points for tow-
clothes, scarves, open jackets or shirts with open ing the Machine. Connect parts carefully. Ensure
zips which could get hold into moving parts. We that foreseen pins and/or locks are steadily fixed
advise to use approved safety clothing such as before applying traction. Do not stop near towing
anti–slipping footwear, gloves, safety goggles, bars, cables or chains working under load.
helmets, etc. • To transfer a failed Machine, use a trailer or a low
• Never carry out any repair on the machine if loading platform trolley if available.
someone is sitting on the operator’s seat, except • To load and unload the machine from the trans-
if they are certified operators to assist in the op- portation mean, select a flat area providing a firm
eration to be carried out. support to the trailer or truck wheels. Firmly tie
• Never operate the machine or use attachments the machine to the truck or trailer platform and
from a place other than sitting at the operator’s block wheels as required by the forwarder.
seat. • For electrical heaters, battery–chargers and sim-
• Never carry out any operation on the machine ilar equipment use exclusive auxiliary power
when the engine is running, except when specifi- supplies with a efficient ground to avoid electrical
cally indicated. shock hazard.
FB 90.2–200.2 604.13.028
• Always use lifting equipment and similar of ap- ensure that there are no persons within the Ma-
propriate capacity to lift or move heavy compo- chine or attachment operating range.
nents. • Do not keep into your pockets any object which
• Pay special attention to bystanders. might fall unobserved into the Machine’s inner
• Never pour gasoline or diesel oil into open, wide compartments.
and low containers. • Whenever there is the possibility of being
• Never use gasoline, diesel oil or other flammable reached by ejected metal parts or similar, use
liquids as cleaning agents. Use non–flammable protection eye mask or goggles with side guards,
non–toxic proprietary solvents. helmets, special footwear and heavy gloves.
• Wear protection goggles with side guards when • Wear suitable protection such as tinted eye
cleaning parts using compressed air. protection, helmets, special clothing, gloves and
footwear whenever it is necessary to carry out
• Do not exceed a pressure of 2.1 bar, in accor-
welding procedures. All persons standing in the
dance with local regulations.
vicinity of the welding process should wear tinted
• Do not run the engine in a closed building without eye protection. NEVER LOOK AT THE WELD-
proper ventilation. ING ARC IF YOUR EYES ARE NOT SUITABLY
• Do not smoke, use open flames, cause sparks in PROTECTED.
the nearby area when filling fuel or handling high- • Metal cables with the use get frayed. Always
ly flammable liquids. wear adequate protections (heavy gloves, eye
• Do not use flames as light sources when working protection, etc.)
on a machine or checking for leaks. • Handle all parts with the greatest caution. Keep
• Move with caution when working under a Ma- your hands and fingers far from gaps, moving
chine, and also on or near a Machine. Wear prop- gears and similar. Always use approved protec-
er safety accessories: helmets, goggles and spe- tive equipment, such as eye protection, heavy
cial footwear. gloves and protective footwear.
• During checks which should be carried out with
the engine running, ask an assistant to seat at the START UP
operator’s seat and keep the service technician • Never run the engine in confined spaces which
under visual control at any moment. are not equipped with adequate ventilation for
• In case of operations outside the workshop, drive exhaust gas extraction.
the Machine to a flat area and block it. If working • Never bring your head, body, arms, legs, feet,
on an incline cannot be avoided, first block the hands, fingers near fans or rotating belts.
Machine carefully. Move it to a flat area as soon
as possible with a certain extent of safety.
ENGINE
• Ruined or plied cables and chains are unreliable.
Do not use them for lifting or trailing. Always han- • Always loosen the radiator cap very slowly be-
dle them wearing gloves of proper thickness. fore removing it to allow pressure in the system
to dissipate. Coolant should be topped up only
• Chains should always be safely fastened. En- when the engine is stopped or idle if hot.
sure that fastening device is strong enough to
hold the load foreseen. No persons should stop • Do not fill up fuel tank when the engine is running,
near the fastening point, trailing chains or cables. mainly if it is hot, to avoid ignition of fires in case
of fuel spilling.
• The working area should be always kept CLEAN
and DRY. Immediately clean any spillage of wa- • Never check or adjust the fan belt tension when
ter or oil. the engine is running.
Never adjust the fuel injection pump when the
• Do not pile up grease or oil soaked rags, as they Machine is moving.
constitute a great fire hazard. Always place them
into a metal container. • Never lubricate the Machine when the engine is
Before starting the Machine or its attachments, running.
check, adjust and block the operator’s seat. Also
604.13.028 FB 90.2–200.2
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS • To remove the wheels, block both front and rear
• If it is necessary to use auxiliary batteries, cables Machine wheels. Raise the Machine and install
must be connected at both sides as follows: (+) safe and stable supports under the Machine in
to (+) and (–) to (–). Avoid short–circuiting the ter- accordance with regulations in force.
minals. GAS RELEASED FROM BATTERIES IS • Deflate the tyre before removing any object
HIGHLY FLAMMABLE. During charging, leave caught into the tyre tread.
the battery compartment uncovered to improve • Never inflate tyres using flammable gases as
ventilation. Avoid checking the battery charge by they may originate explosions and cause injuries
means of “jumpers” made by placing metallic ob- to bystanders.
jects across the terminals. Avoid sparks or
flames near the battery area. Do no smoke to
prevent explosion hazards.
• Prior to any service, check for fuel or coolant REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
leaks. Remove these leaks before going on with • Lift and handle all heavy components using lifting
the work. equipment of adequate capacity. Ensure that
• Do not charge batteries in confined spaces. En- parts are supported by appropriate slings and
sure that ventilation is appropriate to prevent hooks. Use lifting eyes provided to this purpose.
accidental explosion hazard due to build–up of Take care of the persons near the loads to be
gasses relieved during charging. lifted.
• Always disconnect the batteries before perform- • Handle all parts with great care. Do not place
ing any type of service on the electrical system. your hands or fingers between two parts. Wear
approved protective clothing such as safety
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS goggles, gloves and footwear.
• Some fluid slowly coming out from a very small • Do not twine chains or metal cables. Always wear
port can be almost invisible and be strong protection gloves to handle cables or chains.
enough to penetrate the skin. For this reason,
NEVER USE YOUR HANDS TO CHECK FOR
LEAKS, but use a piece of cardboard or a piece
of wood to this purpose. If any fluid is injected
into the skin, seek medical aid immediately. Lack
of immediate medical attention, serious infec-
tions or dermatosis may result.
• Always take system pressure readings using the
appropriate gauges.
WHEELS AND TYRES

• Check that the tyres are correctly inflated at the
pressure specified by the manufacturer. Periodi-
cally check possible damages to the rims and
tyres.
• Keep off and stay at the tyre side when correcting
the inflation pressure.
• Check the pressure only when the Machine is un-
loaded and tyres are cold to avoid wrong read-
ings due to over–pressure. Do not reuse parts of
recovered wheels as improper welding, brazing
or heating may weaken the wheel and make it
fail.
• Never cut, nor weld a rim with the inflated tyre as-
sembled.
FB 90.2–200.2 604.13.028
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
The Backhoe Loader and its major components are
identified by serial numbers and letters for recogni- 1
tion in After Sales Service. The following information
provides the locations of these identification plates,
stamped numbers and examples of what can be
found on the machine.
VEHICLE SERIAL NUMBER (1), Figure 1.

The Serial Number is stamped on the top of the right
hand main frame, in front of the right hand loader
post, in position (1). . . . . . . . . . . 2
Example: *000005017*
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE’S (2), Figure

1.
The machine identification plate’s are located on the
right–hand loader post, as shown at position (2). Re-
cord the data of your machine below.
MODEL/TECHNICAL TYPE
Example: *699.510.700*
UNIT SERIAL NO.

Example: *000005017*
YEAR
Example: *1995*
1
ENGINE IDENTIFICATION, Figure 2.
The engine identification information is located on
the right hand engine sump rail. Record the informa-
tion below for quick reference.
MODEL NO.
Example: *EA5*
SERIAL NO.
Example: *57018*
DATE CODE. 1
Example:*5J25*=5(1995),J(September),25(Day)
2
604.13.028 FB 90.2–200.2
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE IDENTIFICATION

The serial number and axle type is printed on the
plate (1), located on the front of the axle housing. Re-
cord the information below for quick reference.
AXLE TYPE
Example: *26–18*
SERIAL NO.
Example: *000102*
ROTATION
Example: LH = Left Hand RH = Right Hand
RATIO
Example: 12.33 to 1 – 12.8 to 1 1
TAP424011
3
TRANSMISSION, P/SHUTTLE
The serial number and type is printed on the plate (1),
on the lower right side of the transmission. Record
the information below for quick reference.
MODEL NO.
Example: *COM–T4–2025*
SERIAL NO.
Example: *15647 E95 01*
4
TRANSMISSION, P/SHIFT Figure 5
The serial number and type is printed on the plate (1),
on the lower right side of the transmission. Record
the information below for quick reference.
MODEL NO.
Example: *GT PRODUCTION *
SERIAL NO.
Example: *TBEA 419323 09/96*
5
REAR AXLE IDENTIFICATION, Figure 6
The serial number (1) is stamped on the left side of
the rear axle housing. Record the serial number
below for quick reference.
MODEL NO.
Example: *85801201*
DATE CODE
Example: 5D05=5(1995), D(APRIL), 05(DAY) 1
FB 90.2–200.2 604.13.028
CAB IDENTIFICATION PLATES, Figure 7
The cab serial number and details are printed on the

certification plate‘s (1) on the rear left hand window.
Record the serial number below for quick reference.
Serial No.
Date Code
IMPORTANT ECOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS

The following are recommendations which may be of oils, brake fluids, etc. Do not mix drained brake
assistance: fluids or fuels with lubricants. Store them safely
• Become acquainted with and ensure that you un- until they can be disposed of in a proper way to
derstand the relative legislation applicable to comply with local legislation and available re-
your country. sources.
• Where no legislation exists, obtain information 5. Modern coolant mixtures, i.e. antifreeze and
from suppliers of oils, fuels, antifreeze, cleaning other additives, should be replaced every two
agents, etc., with regard to their effect on man years. They should not be allowed to get into the
and nature and how to safely store, use and dis- soil but should be collected and disposed of safe-
pose of these substances. ly.
6. Do not open the Air–Conditioning system your-
HELPFUL HINTS self. It may contain gasses which should not be re-
leased into the atmosphere. Your air conditioning
1. Avoid filling tanks using jerry cans or inappropri-
specialist has a special equipment for discharging
ate pressurised fuel delivery systems which may
and charging the system.
cause considerable spillage.
7. Repair any leaks or defects in the engine cooling
2. In general, avoid skin contact with all fuels, oils,
or hydraulic system immediately.
acids, solvents, etc. Most of them contain sub-
stances which can be harmful to your health. 8. Do not increase the pressure in a pressurised cir-
cuit as this may lead to a catastrophic failure of
3. Modern oils contain additives. Do not burn con-
the system components.
taminated fuels and/or waste oils in ordinary
heating systems. 9. Protect hoses during welding as penetrating
weld splatter may burn a hole or weaken them,
4. Avoid spillage when draining off used engine
causing the loss of oils, coolant, etc.
coolant mixtures, engine, gearbox and hydraulic
604.13.028 FB 90.2–200.2
SERVICE TECHNIQUES
GENERAL A hose with a chafed outer cover will allow water

Clean the exterior of all components before carrying entry. Concealed corrosion of the wire reinforcement
out any form of repair. Dirt and abrasive dust can re- will subsequently occur along the hose length with
duce the efficient working life of a component and resultant hose failure.
lead to costly replacement. Ballooning of the hose indicates an internal leakage
Time spent on the preparation and cleanliness of due to structural failure. This condition rapidly de-
working surfaces will pay dividends in making the job teriorates and total hose failure soon occurs.
easier and safer and will result in overhauled compo- Kinked, crushed, stretched or deformed hoses gen-
nents being more reliable and efficient in operation. erally suffer internal structural damage which can re-
Use cleaning fluids which are known to be safe. Cer- sult in oil restriction, a reduction in the speed of oper-
tain types of fluid can cause damage to ‘O’ rings and ation and ultimate hose failure.
cause skin irritation. Solvents should be checked that Free-moving, unsupported hoses must never be al-
they are suitable for the cleaning of components and lowed to touch each other or related working sur-
also that they do not risk the personal safety of the faces. This causes chafing which reduces hose life.
user.
Replace ‘O’ rings, seals or gaskets whenever they
are disturbed. Never mix new and old seals or ‘O’
rings, regardless of condition. Always lubricate new ‘O’ RING FLAT FACE SEAL FITTINGS
seals and ‘O’ rings with hydraulic oil before installa-
When repairing ‘O’ ring face seal connectors, the fol-
tion.
lowing procedures should be observed.
When replacing component parts, use the correct
tool for the job. WARNING
NEVER DISCONNECT OR TIGHTEN A HOSE OR
HOSES AND TUBES TUBE THAT IS UNDER PRESSURE. IF IN DOUBT,
ACTUATE THE OPERATING LEVERS SEVERAL
Always replace hoses and tubes if the cone end or TIMES WITH THE ENGINE SWITCHED OFF
the end connections on the hose are damaged. PRIOR TO DISCONNECTING A HOSE OR TUBE.
When installing a new hose, loosely connect each
end and make sure the hose takes up the designed 1. Release the fittings and separate the hose or
position before tightening the connection. Clamps tube assembly, then remove and discard the ‘O’
should be tightened sufficiently to hold the hose with- ring seal from the fitting.
out crushing and to prevent chafing.
2. Dip a new ‘O’ ring seal into clean hydraulic oil
After hose replacement to a moving component, prior to installation. Install a new ‘O’ ring into the
check that the hose does not foul by moving the com- fitting and, if necessary, retain in position using
ponent through the complete range of travel. petroleum jelly.
Be sure any hose which has been installed is not 3. Assemble the new hose or tube assembly and
kinked or twisted. tighten the fitting finger tight, while holding the
Hose connections which are damaged, dented, tube or hose assembly to prevent it from turning.
crushed or leaking, restrict oil flow and the productiv- 4. Use two suitable wrenches and tighten the fitting
ity of the components being served. Connectors to the specified torque according to the size of the
which show signs of movement from the original fitting. Refer to the following torque chart.
swagged position have failed and will ultimately sep-
NOTE: To ensure a leak-free joint is obtained, it is im-
arate completely.
portant that the fittings are not over or under torqued.
FB 90.2–200.2 604.13.028
‘O’ RING FLAT FACE SEAL FITTING TORQUE VALUES
Nominal Thread Swivel Nut

O.D Tube Dash Size Torque
(in.) (mm) Size In. lbf. Ft Nm
0.250 6.35 -4 9/16-18 12 16
0.375 9.52 -6 11/16-16 18 24
0.500 12.70 -8 13/16-16 37 50
0.625 15.88 -10 1-14 51 69
0.750 19.05 -12 1 3/16-12 75 102
0.875 22.22 -14 1 3/16-12 75 102
1.000 25.40 -16 1 7/16-12 105 142
1.250 31.75 -20 1 11/16-12 140 190
1.500 38.10 -24 2-12 160 217
SEALER SPECIFICATIONS
The following sealers should be used as directed in the manual:
SEALERS PART NUMBER TRADE DESCRIPTION

Anaerobic sealer 82995770/1 LOCTITE GASKET ELIMINATOR 518
RTV silicone sealer 82995775/6 LOCTITE SUPERFLEX 593, 595 or 596
LOCTITE ULTRA BLUE 587 DOW CORNING
SILASTIC 732 GENERAL ELECTRIC RTV 103
OR 108
Pipe sealant 82995768 PST 592 PIPE SEALANT WITH TEFLON
Thread-locking compound 82995773 LOCTITE 271 THREADLOCKER/SEALANT (red)
HARDWARE TORQUE VALUES cedure is specified in this manual for a specific ap-
Check the tightness of hardware periodically. plication. Torque values listed are for general use
only.
Use the following charts to determine the correct
torque when checking, adjusting or replacing hard- Make sure fastener threads are clean and not dam-
ware on the Backhoe Loader. aged.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the values listed in the NOTE: A torque wrench is necessary to properly
charts if a different torque value or tightening pro- torque hardware.
604.13.028 FB 90.2–200.2
MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES

IN FOOT POUNDS – LBF. FT (NEWTON-METRES – Nm)
FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS
METRIC HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS

CLASS 5.8 CLASS 8.8 CLASS 10.9 LOCKNUT
NOMINAL CL.8
SIZE UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED W/CL8.8
W/ZnCr W/ZnCr W/ZnCr BOLT
M4 15* (1.7) 19* (2.2) 23* (2.6) 30* (3.4) 33* (3.7) 42* (4.8) 16* (1.8)
M6 51* (5.8) 67* (7.6) 79* (8.9) 102* (12) 115* (13) 150* (17) 56* (6.3)
M8 124* (14) 159* (18) 195* (22) 248* (28) 274* (31) 354* (40) 133* (15)
M10 21 (28) 27 (36) 32 (43) 41 (56) 45 (61) 58 (79) 22 (30)
M12 36 (49) 46 (63) 55 (75) 72 (97) 79 (107) 102 (138) 39 (53)
M16 89 (121) 117 (158) 137 (186) 177 (240) 196 (266) 254 (344) 97 (131)
M20 175 (237) 226 (307) 277 (375) 358 (485) 383 (519) 495 (671) 195 (265)
M24 303 (411) 392 (531) 478 (648) 619 (839) 662 (897) 855 (1160) 338 (458)
NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.

IDENTIFICATION
HEX CAP SCREW AND CARRIAGE BOLTS
CLASSES 5.6 AND UP
MANUFACTURER’S IDENTIFICATION
PROPERTY CLASS
HEX NUTS AND LOCKNUTS

CLASSES 05 AND UP
MANUFACTURER’S IDENTIFICATION
PROPERTY CLASS CLOCK MARKING
FB 90.2–200.2 604.13.028

IN FOOT POUNDS – LBF. FT (NEWTON-METRES – Nm)
FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS
INCH HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS

SAE GRADE 2 SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8 LOCKNUTS
NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED GR.B GR.C NOMINAL
SIZE or W/ZnCr or W/ZnCr or W/ZnCr w/GR5 w/GR8 SIZE
PLATED PLATED PLATED BOLT BOLT
SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD
1/4 55* (6.2) 72* (8.1) 86* (9.7) 112* (13) 121* (14) 157* (18) 61* (6.9) 86* (9.8) 1/4
5/16 115* (13) 149* (17) 178* (20) 229* (26) 250* (28) 324* (37) 125* (14) 176* (20) 5/16
3/8 17 (23) 22 (30) 26 (35) 34 (46) 37 (50) 48 (65) 19 (26) 26 (35) 3/8
7/16 27 (37) 35 (47) 42 (57) 54 (73) 59 (80) 77 (104) 30 (41) 42 (57) 7/16
1/2 42 (57) 54 (73) 64 (87) 83 (113) 91 (123) 117 (159) 45 (61) 64 (88) 1/2
9/16 60 (81) 77 (104) 92 (125) 120 (163) 130 (176) 169 (229) 65 (88) 92 (125) 9/16
5/8 83 (112) 107 (145) 128 (174) 165 (224) 180 (244) 233 (316) 90 (122) 127 (172) 5/8
3/4 146 (198) 189 (256) 226 (306) 293 (397) 319 (432) 413 (560) 160 (217) 226 (306) 3/4
7/8 142 (193) 183 (248) 365 (495) 473 (641) 515 (698) 667 (904) 258 (350) 364 (494) 7/8
1 213 (289) 275 (373) 547 (742) 708 (960) 773 (1048) 1000 (1356) 386 (523) 545 (739) 1

IDENTIFICATION
CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS
SAE GRADE 2 SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8
REGULAR NUTS SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8

HEX NUTS HEX NUTS
LOCKNUTS
GRADE IDENTIFICATION GRADE IDENTIFICATION

GRADE A NO NOTCHES GRADE A NO MARKS
GRADE B ONE CIRCUMFERENTIAL NOTCH GRADE B THREE MARKS
GRADE C TWO CIRCUMFERENTIAL NOTCHES GRADE C SIX MARKS

MARKS NEED NOT BE LOCATED
AT CORNERS
GRADE A NO MARK
GRADE B LETTER B
GRADE C LETTER C
GRADE IDENTIFICATION
604.13.028 FB 90.2–200.2
SECTION 00 – SPECIFICATIONS – CHAPTER 2 1
SECTION 00 – SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter 2 – GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
This section is divided into parts which itemise the

specifications for the various models:
NOTE: All performance figures in this section are
based on machines with standard buckets, and will
vary dependant upon the type of machine and any
options that may be fitted.
Models FB90.2
Refer to pages 3 to 12
Models FB100.2, FB110.2

Models 115, 200.2 (4WS)

604.13.028
2 SECTION 00 – SPECIFICATIONS – CHAPTER 2
LUBRICANTS –30 °C –25 °C –15 °C +20 °C +40 °C

Choose the correct oil viscosity grade from the chart
on the right to suit the conditions.
SAE 5W–30
NOTE: In areas where prolonged periods of extreme
temperatures are encountered, local engine
lubricant practices are acceptable; such as the use of SAE 10W–30
SAE 5W in extreme low temperatures or SAE 50 in
extreme high temperatures.
Sulphur in Fuel SAE 15W–40
The engine oil change period is shown in the
maintenance section. However, locally available fuel
may have a high sulphur content, in which case the –22 °F –13 °F +5 °F +68 °F +104 °F
engine oil change period should be adjusted.
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS NEW HOLLAND INTERNATIONAL MODELS APPROXIMATE

AND APPLICATION SPECIFICATION SPECIFICATION QUANTITY
ENGINE – OIL Litres (US gals)

Ambra Super Gold (15W40) NH 330 G API CF-4/SG 75 to 108 hp 12 (3.2)
Ambra Super Gold (10W30) NH 324 G CCMC D4 75 to 108 hp 12 (3.2)
COOLING SYSTEM Litres (US gals)

Ambra Agriflu 50% NH 900 A Antifreeze 75 to 108 hp 24 (6.36)
Water 50% H2O 75 to 108 hp 24 (6.36)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM API GL4,ISO 32/46 Litres (US gals)

Ambra Multi G (10W30) NH 410 B MIL–L–2105 D 75 to 108 hp 137 (36.3)
Hydrosystem Biodegradable NH 646 H BS 75 to 108 hp 137 (36.3)
POWERSHUTTLE TRANS Litres (US gals)

Ambra Multi G (10W30) NH 410 B API GL4,ISO 32/46 75 to 108 hp 18 (4.7)
POWERSHIFT TRANS Litres (US gals)

Ambra Hydrodex 3 NH 530 B ATF 75 to 108 hp 18 (4.7)
FRONT & REAR AXLE Litres (US gals)

Ambra Multi G (10W30) NH 410 B API GL4,ISO 32/46 75 to 92 hp 5.5 (1.5)
108 hp 4WS 10 (2.6)
2WD/4WD, 4WS AXLE HUBS Litres (US Pint)

Ambra Multi G (10W30) NH 410 B API GL4,ISO 32/46 75 to 108 hp 1.0 (0.3)
BRAKE OIL litres (US Pint)

Ambra LHM NH 610 A 75 to 108 hp 1.0 (0.3)
FUEL Litres (US gals)

Diesel Cetane40 (minimum) 75 to 108 hp 128 (28)
GREASE GENERAL
Ambra GR 75MD NH 720 A NLGI 2 75 to 108 hp As required
Dry Molycoat Grease NLGI 00 75 to 108 hp As required
604.13.028
SIDESHIFT LOADER – DIMENSIONS AND PERFORMANCE – MODELS 85, 90, 90.2
(PER SAE J 732 C) WITH TYRES 2WD FRONT = 11L–16 F REAR = 18.4–26
With Two or Four wheel drive and 1.0m3 bucket. 4WD FRONT = 12.5/80–18 REAR = 18.4–26
A. Overall Operating height 2WD 4240mm (13ft 9in) – 4WD 4359mm (14ft 3in)
Lift Capacity at Maximum Height 2WD 3425 kg (7550 lbs) – 4WD 3553 kg (7833 lbs)
Breakout Force 2WD 6314 kg (13920 lbs) – 4WD 6296 kg (13880 lbs)
B. Height to Hinge Pin 2WD 3411mm (11ft 2in) – 4WD 3530mm (11ft 6in)
C. Dump Height 2WD 2649mm (8ft 7in) – 4WD 2785mm (9ft 1in)
D. Maximum Roll back at ground level 40°
E. Dump Angle 45°
F. Reach fully raised 2WD 830mm (2ft 7in) – 4WD 786mm (2ft 6in)
G. Height to Top Of Cab 2950mm (9ft 7in)
H. Digging Depth 2WD 181mm (7.1in) – 4WD 55mm (2.2in)
I. Centre line of axle to Bucket Lip, at ground level 2WD 2030mm (6.6in) – 4WD 1942mm (6ft 4in)
J. Wheelbase 2WD 2175mm (7ft 1in) – 4WD 2175mm (7ft 1in)
K. Rear axle to Centre of swing post 1325mm (4ft 3in)
L. Rear axle to edge of backhoe bucket 1630mm (5ft 3in)
M. Overall Length with bucket at ground level 2WD 5849mm (19ft 2in) – 4WD 5747mm (18.8in)
N. Lip of Bucket to top of Boom 4000mm (13ft 1in)
P. Width of Bucket 2250mm (7ft 4in)
Maximum Transport Width 2250mm (7ft 4in)
Weight of machine Loader/Backhoe*
example (4WD, 4 in 1 bucket, counterweights) 7840 kg (17248 lbs)
FB 90.2 604.13.028
SIDESHIFT BACKHOE – DIMENSIONS AND PERFORMANCE
(PER SAE J 732 C) WITH TYRES 4WD FRONT = 12.5/80–18 REAR = 18.4–26
Standard Dipper H.E.D. (Extended)
A. Loading Reach 1600mm (5ft 2in) 2573mm (8ft 4in)
B. Bucket Rotation 204° 204°
C. Operating Height, Fully Raised 5550mm (18ft 0in) 6290mm (20ft 7in)
D. Loading Height Maximum 3740mm (12ft.3in) 4550mm (14ft.9in)
E. Reach from swing post 5564mm (18ft.3in) 6675mm (21ft.9in)
F. Reach from rear axle centre line 6890mm (22ft 6in) 8000mm (26ft 3in)
G. Maximum Length of Surface Excavation 5950mm (19ft 5in) 7092mm (23ft 3in)
H. Maximum Digging Depth
To Achieve a 0.6m (2ft). Flat Bottom Trench 4230mm (13ft 9in) 5450mm (17ft 9in)
J. Maximum Digging Depth 4270mm (14ft 0in) 5485mm (18ft)
K. Stabilizer Spread – Transport 2280mm (7ft 5in) 2280mm (7ft 5in)
L. Stabilizer Spread – Working (pads reversed) 2790mm (9ft 2in) 2790mm (9ft 2in)
M. Stabiliser Pad Levelling Angle 14° 14°
– Swing Arc 180° 180°
– Maximum digging force (general purpose bucket) –
crowd cylinder 4119 kg (9080 lbs) 2792 kg (6155 lbs)
bucket cylinder 5630 kg (12412 lbs) 5630 kg (12408 lbs)
– Lift capacity through dipper arc – (SAE) 2105 kg (4640 lbs) 1515 kg (3345 lbs)
– Lift capacity, dipper 3.66m (12ft) above ground (SAE) 2180 kg (4805 lbs) 1535 kg (3390 lbs)
– Lift capacity at 4.2m (14ft) above ground (SAE) 1515 kg (3340 lbs) 975 kg (2150 lbs)
– Extendible dipper extension length – 1.05m (3ft.4in)
604.13.028 FB 90.2

LIFTING CAPACITIES DURING NORMAL
OPERATION – SAE RATED kgs (lbs)
The following tables reflect the lifting capacities of
the Backhoe Dipper (A) and Boom (B) on a typical
4WD Sideshift machine.
NOTE: Capacities shown may vary slightly between
machines dependant upon options fitted, pressure
A
settings and market requirements. B
Lifting capacities – kgs (lbs) are shown with Standard

Dipper, Extendible Dipper (HED) in retracted position
and Extendible dipper in full extended position.
Standard HED (Retracted) HED (Extended) Height/ Depth:

m (ft)
Dipper – A Boom – B Dipper – A Boom – B Dipper – A Boom – B
590 (1305) +5.4 (18)
1230 (2710) 1035 (2285) 830 (1830) +4.9 (16)
1515 (3340) 1345 (2970) 1610 (3550) 975 (2150) +4.3 (14)
2180 (4805) 1670 (3690) 1920 (4240) 1455 (3205) 1535 (3390) 1040 (2290) +3.6 (12)
2105 (4640) 1690 (3730) 1855 (4090) 1465 (3230) 1515 (3345) 1065 (2350) +3.0 (10)
2165 (4770) 1690 (3730) 1895 (4175) 1445 (3185) 1545 (3405) 1075 (2370) + 2.4 (8)
2425 (5365) 1600 (3525) 2070 (4565) 1410 (3110) 1625 (3585) 1075 (2370) + 1.8 (6)
3620 (7980) 1540 (3400) 2725 (6015) 1355 (2990) 1800 (3970) 1065 (2355) + 1.2 (4)
1520 (3350) 3495 (7705) 1330 (2940) 2215 (4885) 1060 (2335) + 0.6 (2)
1525 (3360) 1305 (2880) 3635 (8020) 1050 (2315) 0 Ground
1495 (3295) 1275 (2815) 1040 (2300) – 0.6 (2)
1470 (3245) 1255 (2765) 1040 (2300) – 1.2 (4)
1465 (3230) 1240 (2740) 1040 (2300) – 1.8 (6)
1485 (3275) 1250 (2760) 1050 (2320) – 2.4 (8)
1590 (3510) 1315 (2900) 1080 (2385) – 3.0 (10)
1735 (3825) 1500 (3310) 1155 (2545) – 3.6 (12)
1385 (3055) – 4.2 (14)
1725 (3800) – 4.8 (16)
FB 90.2 604.13.028
CENTRE PIVOT LOADER – DIMENSIONS AND PERFORMANCE
10
(PER SAE J 732 C) WITH TYRES 2WD FRONT = 11L–16SLF3 REAR = 19.5–24 R4
4WD FRONT = 12–16.5 REAR = 19.5L–24 R4
With Four Wheel Drive (Bucket 1.0m3)
Breakout Force 2WD 6324kg (13938 lbs) –4WD 6355 kg (13981 lbs)
B. Height to Hinge Pin Full Raise 2WD 3442mm (11ft 3in) – 4WD 3456mm (11ft 2in)
E. Dump Angle 45°
I. Centre line of axle to Bucket Lip at ground level 2WD 2007mm (6ft 5in) – 4WD 1997mm (6ft 5in)
J. Wheelbase 2175mm (7ft 1in)
K. Centre Line of rear axle to Centre line of swing post 1120mm (3ft 6in)
L. Centre Line of rear axle to edge of backhoe bucket 2934mm (9ft 5in)
M. Overall Length 2WD 7040mm (23ft 1in) – 4WD 7040mm (23ft 1in)
N. Overall Height Lip of Bucket to top of Boom 3973mm (12ft 9in)
P– Overall Width With Bucket 2250mm (7ft 3in)
P– Overall Width Less Bucket 2170mm (7ft 1in)
– Weight of machine Loader/Backhoe*
*example (4WD, 6 in 1 Bucket, Counterweights) 7800 kg (17191 lbs)
604.13.028 FB 90.2
CENTRE PIVOT BACKHOE – DIMENSIONS AND PERFORMANCE
11
(PER SAE J 49) WITH TYRES FWD FRONT = 12–16.5 REAR = 19.5L–28 R4
Standard Dipper H.E.D. Extended
C. Operating Height, Fully Raised 5504mm (17ft.9in) 6250mm (20ft 3in)
D. Loading Height Maximum 3705mm (12ft.0in) 4453mm (14ft 5in)
E. Reach from Swing Post Pivot 5540mm (18ft.0in) 6651mm (21ft 6in)
F. Reach from Rear Axle C/L 6660mm (21ft.6in) 7771mm (25ft.3in)
G. Maximum Length of Surface Excavation 6050mm (19ft.7in) 7190mm (23ft 4in)
To Achieve a 0.6m (2ft) Flat Bottom Trench 4234mm (13ft.8in) 5447mm (17ft 7in)
J. Maximum Digging Depth 4265mm (15ft.0in) 5482mm (17ft 8in)
K. Stabilizer Spread – Transport 2230mm (7ft.4in) 2230mm (7ft.4in)
– Swing Arc 180° 180°
– Maximum digging force (general purpose bucket)
crowd cylinder (ICED) 4181 kg (9217 lbs) 2822 kg (6221 lbs)
bucket cylinder (ICED) 5810 kg (12808 lbs) 5810 kg (12808 lbs)
– Extendible dipper extension length – 1.05m (3ft 5in)
CENTRE PIVOT BACKHOE – DIMENSIONS AND PERFORMANCE
FB 90.2 604.13.028

OPERATION – SAE RATED kgs (lbs)
A
4WD Centre Pivot machine.
settings and market requirements.
B
12

m (ft)
580 (1275) +5.4 (18)
1225 (2700) 1030 (2270) 810 (1785) +4.9 (16
1495 (3295) 1330 (2930) 1680 (3710) 955 (2110) +4.3 (14)
2700 (5955) 1655 (3655) 2435 (5370) 1440 (3175) 1585 (3500) 1020 (2250) +3.6 (12)
2575 (5680) 1675 (3700) 2325 (5125) 1450 (3195) 1555 (3435) 1045 (2310) +3.0 (10)
2660 (5870) 1655 (3655) 2380 (5245) 1425 (3145) 1590 (3505) 1055 (2330) + 2.4 (8)
3070 (6770) 1615 (3565) 2650 (5850) 1390 (3070) 1690 (3730) 1055 (2330) + 1.8 (6)
5365 (11830) 1575 (3475) 3745 (8265) 1355 (2990) 1915 (4225) 1045 (2310) + 1.2 (4)
1535 (3390) 5405 (11920) 1315 (2905) 2475 (5460) 1035 (2290) + 0.6 (2)
1500 (3310) 1280 (2830) 4960 (10935) 1030 (2270) 0 Ground
1470 (3240) 1250 (2760) 1020 (2250) – 0.6 (2)
1445 (3190) 1230 (2710) 1015 (2240) – 1.2 (4)
1435 (3170) 1215 (2680) 1015 (2240) – 1.8 (6)
1455 (3205) 1220 (2695) 1025 (2265) – 2.4 (8)
1545 (3410) 1275 (2875) 1055 (2330) – 3.0 (10)
1690 (3725) 1460 (3220) 1120 (2470) – 3.6 (12)
1325 (2925) – 4.2 (14)
1670 (3680) – 4.8 (16)
604.13.028 FB 90.2
ENGINE
DATA ISO 92 hp / 69 kw Naturally Aspirated
CEE 84 hp / 63 kw Naturally Aspirated
DATA ISO 108 hp / 80.5 kw Turbocharged
CEE 106 hp / 79 kw Turbocharged
Type Diesel
No. of cylinders 4
Bore mm 111.8
(in) (4.4)
Stroke mm 127.0
(in) (5.0)
Displacement cm3 4987
(in3) (304)
Compression Ratio 17.5:1
Firing Order 1.3.4.2
Idle Speed rev/min 750–800
Maximum ‘No–Load’ Speed rev/min 2325–2375 Naturally Aspirated
Maximum ‘No–Load’ Speed rev/min 2195–2245 turbocharged
Maximum ‘Full Load’ Speed rev/min 2200 Naturally Aspirated
Maximum ‘Full Load’ Speed rev/min 2070 Turbocharged
Maximum Torque ISO Nm 355 Naturally Aspirated
lb ft 262 Naturally Aspirated
Maximum Torque ISO Nm 445 Turbocharged
lb ft 328 Turbocharged
Tappet Clearance (cold)
Intake 0.36 – 0.46mm (0.014 – 0.018 in)
Exhaust 0.43 – 0.53mm (0.017 – 0.021 in)
COOLING SYSTEM
Type: Pressurized Full Flow By–pass with Expansion Chamber
Fan Belt Deflection:
Naturally Aspirated 13 – 19mm (0.50 – 0.75 in)
Turbocharged 10 – 16mm (0.38 – 0.62 in)
Air Conditioning Compressor Tensioner
Thermostat:
Start to Open at 82°C (180°F)
Fully Open at 95°C (203°F)
Radiator Cap 0.90 bar (13 lb in2)
FUEL SYSTEM
Injection Pump Type Lucas 1300 DPS Rotary Naturally Aspirated
Cold Start Device Thermostart
Excess Fuel Device Automatic
Fuel Shut Off Solenoid
Lift Pump Electric
Injection Pump Type Lucas DPS 203 Rotary Turbocharged
Excess Fuel Device Automatic Governor
Lift Pump Electric
Timing 29° B.T.D.C Naturally Aspirated
28° B.T.D.C Turbocharged
Injectors LP 054B Naturally Aspirated
LO 67PP Turbocharged
FB 90.2 604.13.028
TRANSMISSION
POWER SHUTTLE 4x4= 4 Forward and 4 Reverse Gears Non Turbo
Torque Convertor Ratio 2.63:1
POWER SHIFT 4X2= 4 Forward and 2 Reverse Gears Turbocharged
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Alternator 70 amp
Battery Type 12 volt Negative Earth
95 amp hr (12v/580A/900 CCA) SAE
Battery Disconnect via the Isolator Switch on Negative / chassis cable
Regulator Transistorised
Ground (Earth) Negative
Starting Motor Positive Engagement, Solenoid Operated (3.1 kw)
Headlight Bulb 55/60W H4 Halogen
Stop/Tail Light Bulb 5/21W Bayonet Cap
Interior Light Bulb 10W Festoon and 10W Bayonet Cap
Flasher Light Bulb 21W Bayonet Cap
Work Light Bulbs 55W H3 Halogen
Instrument/Warning Light Bulbs 1.2W Capless
Rocker Switch Bulbs 1.2W Capless
BRAKES
Type Wet Multi–Discs x8 per Axle (x4 per half Axle)
Disc Diameter 203.2mm (8 in)
Parking Type Single Disc on Driveline
STEERING
Power Steering Type Hydrostatic
Turns Lock to Lock
2WD 2.9
FWD Left 3.1
Right 3.0
Pump Type Gear
System Pressure 140 bar (2030 psi)
Front Wheel Toe–in 2WD 0 – 6mm (0 – 0.24 in)
REAR AXLE
Type Double Reduction, Inboard Planetary
Differential Lock (Power Shuttle Transmission) Mechanical
Differential Lock (Power Shift Transmission) Electrically Operated
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Twin Gear Pump Hydraulic System and Steering System
Hydraulic System Pressure:
Main Relief Valve Pressure (All Models) Pressure196.5– 202.5 bar (2849–2936 lbs/in2)
Stabiliser Relief Valve Pressure (All Models) Pressure187–194 bar (2711–2813 lbs/in2)
604.13.028 FB 90.2
TORQUES Nm lbf.ft Kgf.m

Front Wheel Nuts – 2WD 176 130 17.9
– FWD 270 200 27.5
Rear Wheel Nuts 540 400 55.3
Backhoe Attaching Bolts 970 715 98.9
Cab/ROPS Attaching Bolts 380 280 38.7
Hydraulic Hoses/Tubes/ ORS Connections
Thread Size: 9/ – 18 13.5 – 16.5 10 – 12 1.4 – 1.7
16
11/ – 16 23 – 28 17 – 20 2.4 – 5.4
16
13/ – 16 45 – 53 32 – 39 4.4 – 5.4
16
1 – 14 62 – 77 46 – 57 6.3 – 7.8
13/16 – 12 86 – 107 63 – 79 8.8 – 10.9
17/16 – 12 125 – 142 93 – 105 12.7 – 14.5
111/16 – 12 169 – 190 125 – 140 17.2 – 19.4
2 – 12 203 – 246 150 – 182 20.7 – 25.1
FRONT WEIGHTS
Chin Weight 136 kg 300 lb
RADIATOR COOLANTS
Anti–freeze should be changed every 1200 hours or 24 months.
NOTE: In order to reduce deposits and corrosion, water in the cooling system should not exceed the following
limits:
Total hardness Chloride Sulphates
300 parts per million 100 parts per million 100 parts per million
FRONT WHEEL TYRE PRESSURES AND PERMISSIBLE LOADS

The following charts give the approximate carrying capacity of the axle at the tyre pressures indicated up to, 30
kph (20 mph).
Inflation Pressures in Bar

Tyre Ply 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.1 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.6 3.9
size rating
Permissible Load Capacity at the Axle (kg)
10.5/80–18 10 2240 2420 2620 2770 2850 3000 3140 3320 3420 3610 3800 3870
11L – 16 10 1400 1480 1620 1720 1790 1880 2000 2080 2210 2340 2460 –
12.5/80–18 10 1550 1665 1790 1890 1940 2040 2140 2265 2330 2425 2575 2720
14–17.5 8 2780 3000 3205 3335 3465 3650 3830 3925 – – – –
Inflation Pressures in lbf/in2

Tyre Ply 22 25 28 30 32 35 38 41 44 48 52 57
size rating
Permissible Load Capacity at the Axle (lbs)
10.5/80–18 10 4440 5335 5775 6105 6285 6615 6920 7320 7690 7960 8375 8530
11L – 16 10 3086 3262 3571 3791 3946 4144 4409 4585 4872 5158 5423 –
12.5/80–18 10 3416 3669 3945 4165 4275 4496 4716 4992 5135 5344 5675 5994
14–17.5 8 6130 6615 7065 7360 7640 8045 8445 8700 – – – –
The above tables are for guidance only. For exact information regarding inflation pressures and loads for your
particular tyres consult your Dealer.
FB 90.2 604.13.028
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE TYRE COMBINATIONS

The tyres fitted to machines with optional four wheel drive have been carefully selected to match the gearing
of the transmission and axles. When renewing worn or damaged tyres, always install tyres of the same make,
model and size as those removed. The installation of other tyre combinations may result in excessive tyre wear,
loss of usable power or severe damage to drive line components. If in doubt, consult your Dealer.
REAR WHEEL TYRE PRESSURES AND PERMISSIBLE LOADS

kph (20 mph).
Inflation Pressures in bar

Tyre Ply 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.6
size rating
Permissible Load Capacity Per Axle (kg)
16.9–24 10 3556 3675 4040 4260 4408 4625 4890 5100 5300 5470 5810
16.9–28–R4 10 3800 4000 4200 4460 4780 4900 5090 5380 5660 5800 6190 – – –
17.5L–24 10 3430 3740 3995 4160 4275 4530 4675 4780 4950 5200 5450 5610 5820
18.4/15–26 12 4490 4720 4950 5180 5420 5654 5890 6140 6380 6630 7100 7320 7540 –
19.5–24–R4 10 3990 4245 4610 4220 5150 5300 5580 5805 5990 6170 6710 6710 7120 –

Tyre Ply 16 17 19 20 22 23 25 26 28 29 32 33 35 38
size rating
Permissible Load Capacity Per Axle (lb)
16.9–24 10 7823 8085 8888 9372 9698 10175 10758 11220 11660 12034 12782
16.9–28–R4 10 8380 8820 9260 10275 10540 10805 11220 11860 12480 12785 13465 – – –
17.5L–24 10 7546 8228 8789 9152 9405 9966 10285 10516 10890 11440 11990 12342 12804
18.4/15–26 12 9896 10402 10909 11416 11946 12461 12981 13532 14061 14612 15648 16133 16618 –
19.5–24–R4 10 8800 9360 10160 10400 11360 11680 12300 12800 13200 13600 14800 14800 15700
ROAD SPEEDS
The following tables show the approximate ground speeds in km/h and miles/h at rated engine speed.
# = Tyres used outside of North America, ## = Tyres used in North America
Naturally Aspirated Engine with Powershuttle Transmission

Gear Rear Tyre Rear Tyre Rear Tyre Rear Tyre
Ratio 16.9 – 28 ## 19.5L – 24 ## 16.9 – 24 ## 17.5L – 24 ##
km/h miles/h km/h miles/h km/h miles/h km/h miles/h
1st Forward 5.39 3.34 5.12 3.18 4.99 3.1 4.82 2.99
2nd Forward 8.68 5.39 8.24 5.12 8.03 4.98 7.76 4.82
3rd Forward 18.47 11.47 17.54 10.89 17.09 10.6 16.53 10.2
4th Forward 32.84 20.4 31.19 19.3 30.38 18.87 29.83 18.5
1st Reverse 6.47 3.97 6.14 3.8 5.99 3.7 5.79 3.59
2nd Reverse 10.41 6.48 8.19 5.1 9.63 5.98 9.32 5.8
3rd Reverse 22.16 13.7 21.04 13.07 20.5 12.7 19.82 12.3
4th Reverse 39.41 24.48 37.42 23.25 36.46 22.6 35.26 21.9
Turbocharged Engine with Powershuttle transmission
604.13.028 FB 90.2

Ratio 16.9 – 28 ## 19.5L – 24 ## 16.9 – 24 ## 17.5L – 24 ##
1st Forward 5.16 3.2 4.9 3.04 4.78 2.97 4.62 2.87
2nd Forward 8.31 5.16 7.89 4.9 7.69 4.77 7.43 4.61
3rd Forward 17.69 11.0 16.8 10.4 16.37 10.17 15.83 9.8
4th Forward 31.45 19.5 29.86 18.6 29.1 18.1 28.13 17.48
1st Reverse 6.2 3.8 5.88 3.65 5.73 3.54 5.54 3.44
2nd Reverse 9.97 6.19 9.47 5.88 9.22 5.73 8.92 5.54
3rd Reverse 21.22 13.17 20.15 12.5 19.63 12.2 18.98 11.8
4th Reverse 37.74 23.45 35.84 22.26 34.91 21.69 33.76 21.0

Gear Rear Tyre Rear Tyre
Ratio 16.9–28 # 18.4–26 #
km/h miles/h km/h miles/h
1st Forward 6.26 3.89 6.39 3.97
2nd Forward 10.07 6.26 10.28 6.39
3rd Forward 21.44 13.3 21.88 13.6
4th Forward 38.11 23.06 38.9 24.17
1st Reverse 7.51 4.66 7.66 4.76
2nd Reverse 12.08 7.5 12.33 7.66
3rd Reverse 25.71 15.97 26.24 16.3
4th Reverse 45.73 28.4 46.48 28.9
Turbocharged Engine with Powershuttle Transmission
Ratio 16.9 – 28 # 18.4–26 #
1st Forward 5.99 3.66 6.12 3.8
2nd Forward 9.64 5.99 9.84 6.11
3rd Forward 20.53 12.75 20.95 13.01
4th Forward 36.49 22.67 37.25 23.14
1st Reverse 7.19 4.46 7.34 4.56
2nd Reverse 11.57 7.18 11.81 7.34
3rd Reverse 24.62 15.3 25.13 15.6
4th Reverse 43.79 27.2 44.7 27.7
Turbocharged Engine with Powershift Transmission
Ratio 16.9 – 28 #, ## 18.4–26 #, ##
1st Forward 5.9 3.66 6.0 3.7
2nd Forward 11.2 6.95 11.2 7.0
3rd Forward 22.2 13.79 21.8 13.5
4th Forward 39.2 24.41 39.2 24.35
1st Reverse 7.1 4.4 7.1 4.4
2nd Reverse 13.3 8.26 13.2 8.2
FB 90.2 604.13.028
NOTES
604.13.028 FB 90.2
SIDESHIFT LOADER – DIMENSIONS AND PERFORMANCE – MODELS FB 100.2, 110.2
13
(PER SAE J 732 C) WITH TYRES 2WD FRONT = 11L–16 F3 REAR = 18.4–26 R4
With Two or Four wheel drive & 1.0m3 bucket. 4WD FRONT = 12.5/80–18 REAR = 18.4–26 R4
E. Dump Angle 45°
LB 95 / FB 100.2, 110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SIDESHIFT BACKHOE – PERFORMANCE AND GENERAL DIMENSIONS
14
F. Reach from rear axle centre line 7913mm (25ft 7in) 8278mm (26ft 9in)
J. Maximum Digging Depth 4594mm (14ft 9in) 5778mm (18ft 8in)
– Swing Arc 180° 180°
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 95 / FB 100.2, 110.2

SIDESHIFT BACKHOE
OPERATION – SAE RATED kg (lbs)
4WD Sideshift machine.
A
settings and market requirements. B

15

m (ft)
600 (1325) +5.4 (18)
1165 (2575) 1090 (2400) 900 (1985) +4.9 (16)
1560 (3445) 1460 (3220) 1455 (3215) 1030 (2275) +4.3 (14)
1925 (4250) 1680 (3710) 1815 (4005) 1570 (3460) 1400 (3085) 1095 (2415) +3.6 (12)
1865 (4115) 1700 (3745) 1755 (3875) 1585 (3495) 1380 (3045) 1125 (2485) +3.0 (10)
1900 (4185) 1560 (3440) 1785 (3940) 1440 (3180) 1400 (3085) 1115 (2460) + 2.4 (8)
2045 (4510) 1475 (3250) 1925 (4250) 1355 (2985) 1460 (3220) 1065 (2350) + 1.8 (6)
2480 (5470) 1425 (3140) 2345 (5175) 1300 (2870) 1585 (3495) 1035 (2280) + 1.2 (4)
3645 (8045) 1405 (3100) 3475 (8065) 1280 (2825) 1835 (4045) 1020 (2245) + 0.6 (2)
1415 (3115) 1285 (2835) 2615 (5770) 1020 (2245) 0 Ground
1450 (3200) 1320 (2915) 3625 (7995) 1035 (2280) – 0.6 (2)
1525 (3370) 1395 (3075) 1070 (2360) – 1.2 (4)
1550 (3420) 1395 (3075) 1130 (2490) – 1.8 (6)
1570 (3465) 1410 (3110) 1150 (2535) – 2.4 (8)
1645 (3630) 1470 (3250) 1180 (2600) – 3.0 (10)
1965 (4340) 1755 (3875) 1240 (2760) – 3.6 (12)
1395 (3080) – 4.2 (14)
2055 (4530) – 4.8 (16)
LB 95 / FB 100.2, 110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CENTRE PIVOT LOADER DIMENSIONS AND PERFORMANCE
16
(PER SAE J 732 C) WITH TYRES 2WD FRONT = 11L–16SLF3 REAR = 19.5–24 R4
4WD FRONT = 12–16.5 REAR = 19.5L–24 R4
With Four Wheel Drive (Bucket 1.0m3)
Lift Capacity at Maximum Height 3530 kg (7780 lbs)
Breakout Force 6324 kg (13938 lbs)
B. Height to Hinge Pin Full Raise 2WD 3442mm (11ft 3in) – 4WD 3456mm (11ft 2in)
E. Dump Angle 45°
I. Centre line of axle to Bucket Lip at ground level 2WD 2007mm (6ft 5in) – 4WD 1997mm (6ft 5in)
J. Wheelbase 2175mm (7ft 1in)
K. Centre Line of rear axle to Centre line of swing post 1120mm (3ft 6in)
L. Centre Line of rear axle to edge of backhoe bucket 2934mm (9ft 5in)
M. Overall Length 2WD 7040mm (23ft 1in) – 4WD 7040mm (23ft 1in)
N. Overall Height Lip of Bucket to top of Boom 3973mm (12ft 9in)
P– Overall Width With Bucket 2250mm (7ft 3in)
P– Overall Width Less Bucket 2170mm (7ft 1in)
– Weight of machine Loader/Backhoe*
*example (4WD, 6 in 1 Bucket, Counterweights) 7800 kg (17191 lbs)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 95 / FB 100.2, 110.2

CENTRE PIVOT BACKHOE
17
(PER SAE J 49) WITH TYRES FWD FRONT = 12–16.5 REAR = 19.5L–28 R4
Standard Dipper H.E.D. Extended
C. Operating Height, Fully Raised 5728mm (18ft.6in) 6425mm (20ft 9in)
D. Loading Height Maximum 3910mm (12ft.7in) 4628mm (15ft 0in)
E. Reach from Swing Post Pivot 5843mm (18ft.10in) 6927mm (22ft 5in)
F. Reach from Rear Axle C/L 6963mm (22ft.6in) 8047mm (26ft.1in)
G. Maximum Length of Surface Excavation 6000mm (19ft.5in) 7400mm (24ft 0in)
J. Maximum Digging Depth 4592mm (14ft.9in) 5776mm (18ft 8in)
K. Stabilizer Spread – Transport 2230mm (7ft.4in) 2230mm (7ft.4in)
– Swing Arc 180° 180°
– Maximum digging force (general purpose bucket)
– Extendible dipper extension length – 1.20m (3ft 9in)
LB 95 / FB 100.2, 110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


A
B
Lifting capacities – kg (lbs) are shown with Standard
18

m (ft)
590 (1300) +5.4 (18)
1160 (2560) 1085 (2390) 880 (1945) +4.9 (16
1545 (3405) 1445 (3185) 1510 (3330) 1015 (2235) +4.3 (14)
2640 (5820) 1665 (3675) 2585 (5705) 1555 (3430) 1605 (3540) 1080 (2380) +3.6 (12)
2615 (5770) 1695 (3735) 2505 (5520) 1575 (3470) 1655 (3655) 1110 (2450) +3.0 (10)
2665 (5880) 1680 (3710) 2550 (5625) 1560 (3440) 1680 (3705) 1125 (2480) + 2.4 (8)
2915 (6425) 1660 (3665) 2790 (6155) 1530 (3375) 1755 (3865) 1125 (2480) + 1.8 (6)
3700 (8155) 1630 (3590) 3555 (7840) 1495 (3300) 1850 (4080) 1125 (2480) + 1.2 (4)
6080 (13410) 1600 (3525) 5910 (13038) 1460 (3225) 2075 (4575) 1120 (2470) + 0.6 (2)
1570. (3460) 1430 (3155) 3235 (7135) 1115 (2455) 0 Ground
1545 (3410) 1400 (3090) 5787 (12755) 1110 (2450) – 0.6 (2)
1530 (3370) 1380 (3045) 1110 (2450) – 1.2 (4)
1525 (3360) 1370 (3025) 1115 (2455) – 1.8 (6)
1540 (3400) 1380 (3045) 1125 (2480) – 2.4 (8)
1610 (3550) 1435 (3170) 1150 (2540) – 3.0 (10)
1920 (4230) 1710 (3770) 1210 (2670) – 3.6 (12)
1350 (2985) – 4.2 (14)
1990 (4390) – 4.8 (16)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 95 / FB 100.2, 110.2

ENGINE
DATA ISO 92 hp / 69 kw Naturally Aspirated
CEE 84 hp / 63 kw Naturally Aspirated
DATA ISO 108 hp / 80.5 kw Turbocharged
CEE 106 hp / 79 kw Turbocharged
Type Diesel
No. of cylinders 4
Bore mm 111.8
(in) (4.4)
Stroke mm 127.0
(in) (5.0)
(in3) (304)
Maximum ‘No–Load’ Speed rev/min 2325–2375 Naturally Aspirated
Maximum ‘No–Load’ Speed rev/min 2195–2245 Turbocharged
Maximum ‘Full Load’ Speed rev/min 2200 Naturally Aspirated
Maximum ‘Full Load’ Speed rev/min 2070 Turbocharged
Maximum Torque ISO Nm 355 Naturally Aspirated
lb ft 262 Naturally Aspirated
Maximum Torque ISO Nm 445 Turbocharged
lb ft 328 Turbocharged
Intake 0.36 – 0.46mm (0.014 – 0.018 in)
Exhaust 0.43 – 0.53mm (0.017 – 0.021 in)
COOLING SYSTEM
Naturally Aspirated 13 – 19mm (0.50 – 0.75 in)
Thermostat:
FUEL SYSTEM
Injection Pump Type Lucas 1300 DPS Rotary Naturally Aspirated
Excess Fuel Device Automatic
Lift Pump Electric
Lift Pump Electric
Timing 29° B.T.D.C Naturally Aspirated
28° B.T.D.C Turbocharged
Injectors LP 054B Naturally Aspirated
LO 67PP Turbocharged
LB 95 / FB 100.2, 110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

TRANSMISSION
POWER SHUTTLE 4x4= 4 Forward and 4 Reverse Gears Non Turbo
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Alternator 70 amp
BRAKES
Type Wet Multi–Discs x8 per Axle (x4 per half Axle)
STEERING
Turns Lock to Lock
2WD 2.9
FWD Left 3.1
Right 3.0
Pump Type Gear
REAR AXLE
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 95 / FB 100.2, 110.2

TORQUES Nm. lbf.ft. Kgf.m

Front Wheel Nuts – 2WD 176 130 17.9
– FWD 270 200 27.5
Rear Wheel Nuts 540 400 55.3
Backhoe Attaching Bolts 970 715 98.9
Cab/ROPS Attaching Bolts 380 280 38.7
Thread Size: 9/ – 18 13.5 – 16.5 10 – 12 1.4 – 1.7
16
11/ – 16 23 – 28 17 – 20 2.4 – 5.4
16
13/ – 16 45 – 53 32 – 39 4.4 – 5.4
16
1 – 14 62 – 77 46 – 57 6.3 – 7.8
13/16 – 12 86 – 107 63 – 79 8.8 – 10.9
17/16 – 12 125 – 142 93 – 105 12.7 – 14.5
111/16 – 12 169 – 190 125 – 140 17.2 – 19.4
2 – 12 203 – 246 150 – 182 20.7 – 25.1
FRONT WEIGHTS
Chin Weight 136 kg. 300 lb.
RADIATOR COOLANTS
limits:
FRONT WHEEL TYRE PRESSURES AND PERMISSIBLE LOADS

kph (20 mph).
Inflation Pressures in Bar

Tyre Ply 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.1 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.6 3.9
size rating
Permissible Load Capacity at the Axle (kg)
10.5/80–18 10 2240 2420 2620 2770 2850 3000 3140 3320 3420 3610 3800 3870
11L – 16 10 1400 1480 1620 1720 1790 1880 2000 2080 2210 2340 2460 –
12.5/80–18 10 1550 1665 1790 1890 1940 2040 2140 2265 2330 2425 2575 2720
14–17.5 8 2780 3000 3205 3335 3465 3650 3830 3925 – – – –

Tyre Ply 22 25 28 30 32 35 38 41 44 48 52 57
size rating
Permissible Load Capacity at the Axle (lbs)
10.5/80–18 10 4440 5335 5775 6105 6285 6615 6920 7320 7690 7960 8375 8530
11L – 16 10 3086 3262 3571 3791 3946 4144 4409 4585 4872 5158 5423 –
12.5/80–18 10 3416 3669 3945 4165 4275 4496 4716 4992 5135 5344 5675 5994
14–17.5 8 6130 6615 7065 7360 7640 8045 8445 8700 – – – –
The above tables are for guidance only. For exact information regarding inflation pressures and loads for your
particular tyres consult your Dealer.
LB 95 / FB 100.2, 110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


The tyres fitted to machines with optional four wheel drive have been carefully selected to match the gearing
of the transmission and axles. When renewing worn or damaged tyres, always install tyres of the same make,
model and size as those removed. The installation of other tyre combinations may result in excessive tyre wear,
loss of usable power or severe damage to drive line components. If in doubt, consult your Dealer.
REAR WHEEL TYRE PRESSURES AND PERMISSIBLE LOADS

kph (20 mph).

Tyre Ply 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.6
size rating
16.9–24 10 3556 3675 4040 4260 4408 4625 4890 5100 5300 5470 5810
16.9–28–R4 10 3800 4000 4200 4460 4780 4900 5090 5380 5660 5800 6190 – – –
17.5L–24 10 3430 3740 3995 4160 4275 4530 4675 4780 4950 5200 5450 5610 5820
18.4/15–26 12 4490 4720 4950 5180 5420 5654 5890 6140 6380 6630 7100 7320 7540 –
19.5–24–R4 10 3990 4245 4610 4220 5150 5300 5580 5805 5990 6170 6710 6710 7120 –

Tyre Ply 16 17 19 20 22 23 25 26 28 29 32 33 35 38
size rating
Permissible Load Capacity Per Axle (lb)
16.9–24 10 7823 8085 8888 9372 9698 10175 10758 11220 11660 12034 12782
16.9–28–R4 10 8380 8820 9260 10275 10540 10805 11220 11860 12480 12785 13465 – – –
17.5L–24 10 7546 8228 8789 9152 9405 9966 10285 10516 10890 11440 11990 12342 12804
18.4/15–26 12 9896 10402 10909 11416 11946 12461 12981 13532 14061 14612 15648 16133 16618 –
19.5–24–R4 10 8800 9360 10160 10400 11360 11680 12300 12800 13200 13600 14800 14800 15700
ROAD SPEEDS
The following tables show the approximate ground speeds in km/h and miles/h at rated engine speed.

Ratio 16.9 – 28 ## 19.5L – 24 ## 16.9 – 24 ## 17.5L – 24 ##
1st Forward 5.39 3.34 5.12 3.18 4.99 3.1 4.82 2.99
2nd Forward 8.68 5.39 8.24 5.12 8.03 4.98 7.76 4.82
3rd Forward 18.47 11.47 17.54 10.89 17.09 10.6 16.53 10.2
4th Forward 32.84 20.4 31.19 19.3 30.38 18.87 29.83 18.5
1st Reverse 6.47 3.97 6.14 3.8 5.99 3.7 5.79 3.59
2nd Reverse 10.41 6.48 8.19 5.1 9.63 5.98 9.32 5.8
3rd Reverse 22.16 13.7 21.04 13.07 20.5 12.7 19.82 12.3
4th Reverse 39.41 24.48 37.42 23.25 36.46 22.6 35.26 21.9
Turbocharged Engine with Powershuttle transmission
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 95 / FB 100.2, 110.2


Ratio 16.9 – 28 ## 19.5L – 24 ## 16.9 – 24 ## 17.5L – 24 ##
1st Forward 5.16 3.2 4.9 3.04 4.78 2.97 4.62 2.87
2nd Forward 8.31 5.16 7.89 4.9 7.69 4.77 7.43 4.61
3rd Forward 17.69 11.0 16.8 10.4 16.37 10.17 15.83 9.8
4th Forward 31.45 19.5 29.86 18.6 29.1 18.1 28.13 17.48
1st Reverse 6.2 3.8 5.88 3.65 5.73 3.54 5.54 3.44
2nd Reverse 9.97 6.19 9.47 5.88 9.22 5.73 8.92 5.54
3rd Reverse 21.22 13.17 20.15 12.5 19.63 12.2 18.98 11.8
4th Reverse 37.74 23.45 35.84 22.26 34.91 21.69 33.76 21.0

Ratio 16.9–28 # 18.4–26 #
1st Forward 6.26 3.89 6.39 3.97
2nd Forward 10.07 6.26 10.28 6.39
3rd Forward 21.44 13.3 21.88 13.6
4th Forward 38.11 23.06 38.9 24.17
1st Reverse 7.51 4.66 7.66 4.76
2nd Reverse 12.08 7.5 12.33 7.66
3rd Reverse 25.71 15.97 26.24 16.3
4th Reverse 45.73 28.4 46.48 28.9
Turbocharged Engine with Powershuttle Transmission
Ratio 16.9 – 28 # 18.4–26 #
1st Forward 5.99 3.66 6.12 3.8
2nd Forward 9.64 5.99 9.84 6.11
3rd Forward 20.53 12.75 20.95 13.01
4th Forward 36.49 22.67 37.25 23.14
1st Reverse 7.19 4.46 7.34 4.56
2nd Reverse 11.57 7.18 11.81 7.34
3rd Reverse 24.62 15.3 25.13 15.6
4th Reverse 43.79 27.2 44.7 27.7
Ratio 16.9 – 28 #, ## 18.4–26 #, ##
1st Forward 5.9 3.66 6.0 3.7
2nd Forward 11.2 6.95 11.2 7.0
3rd Forward 22.2 13.79 21.8 13.5
4th Forward 39.2 24.41 39.2 24.35
1st Reverse 7.1 4.4 7.1 4.4
2nd Reverse 13.3 8.26 13.2 8.2
LB 95 / FB 100.2, 110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 95 / FB 100.2, 110.2

SIDESHIFT LOADER – DIMENSIONS AND PERFORMANCE – MODELS 200.2
19
(PER SAE J 732 C) WITH TYRES FRONT AND REAR = 440/80 R28
With Bucket m3 1.15m3 1.15m3 1.15m3
(with clam) (with clam and forks)
A. Overall Operating Height 4347mm (14ft 1in) 4653mm (15ft 1in) 4653 (15ft 1in)
Lift Capacity at Maximum Height 3386 kg (7464 lbs) 3151 kg (6944 lbs) 3021 kg (6658 lbs)
Breakout Force 5518 kg (12161 lbs) 5518 kg (12161 lbs) 5518 kg (12161 lbs)
B. Height to Hinge Pin Full Raise 3491mm (11ft 3in) 3491mm (11ft 3in) 3491mm (11ft 3in)
C. Dump Height 2717mm (8.8 ft) 2717mm (8.8 ft) 2717mm (8.8 ft)
D. Maximum Roll back at ground level 45° 45° 45°
E. Dump Angle 45° 45° 45°
F. Reach fully raised 744mm (2ft 4in) 744mm (2ft 4in) 744mm (2ft 4in)
G. Height to Top Of Cab 2900mm (9ft 4in) 2900mm (9ft 4in) 2900mm (9ft 4in)
H. Peel Depth 113mm (4.4 in) 113mm (4.4 in) 113mm (4.4 in)
I. Centre line of axle to Bucket Lip 1975mm (6ft 4in) 1975mm (6ft 4in) 1975mm (6ft 4in)
I. Centre line of axle to Lift Fork Tip at ground level – 1.375 m (4.5 ft)
J. Wheelbase 2200mm (7ft 2in) 2200mm (7ft 2in) 2200mm (7ft 2in)
K. Rear axle to Centre of swing post 1324mm (4ft 3in) 1324mm (4ft 3in) 1324mm (4ft 3in)
L. Rear axle to edge of backhoe bucket 1630mm (5ft 3in) 1630mm (5ft 3in) 1630mm (5ft 3in)
M. Overall Length 5783mm (18.8 ft) 5783mm (18.8 ft) 5783mm (18.8 ft)
N. Overall height to top of boom 3935mm (12ft 9in) 3935mm (12ft 9in) 3935mm (12ft 9in)
P. Overall Width With Bucket 2400mm (7ft 8in) 2400mm (7ft 8in) 2400mm (7ft 8in)
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

(Per SAE J 49) WITH TYRES FRONT AND REAR = 440/80R28

Backhoe Standard Dipper HED Extended
A. Loading Reach 1877mm (6ft .1in) 2818mm (9ft 2in)
D. Loading Height Maximum 3905mm (12ft 7in) 4593mm (14ft 9in)
E. Reach from Swing Post Pivot 5867mm (19ft 1in) 6952mm (22ft 6in)
F. Reach from Rear Axle C/L 7193mm (23ft 4in) 8278mm (26ft 9in)
G. Max Length Surface Excavation 6492mm (21ft 1in) 7500mm (25ft 0in)
To Achieve a 0.6m Flat Bottom Trench 4598mm (15ft 1in) 5771mm (18ft 9in)
J. Maximum Digging Depth 4302mm (14ft 1) 5527mm (18ft 1in)
L. Stabilizer Spread (pads reversed) 2790mm (9ft 2in) 2790mm (9ft 2in)
– Swing Arc 180° 180°
– Max digging force (general purpose bucket)
crowd cylinder (ICED) 3621 kg (7983 lbs) 2592 (5714 lbs)
– Lift capacity through dipper arc – 2350 kg (5190 lbs) 1625 kg (3585 lbs)
– Lift capacity, dipper 3.66m above ground 2425 kg (5945 lbs) 1625 kg (2409 lbs)
– Lift capacity at 4.2m (14ft) above ground 1500 kg (3305 lbs) 995 kg (2195 lbs)
– Extendible dipper extension length– 1.2m (3.9 ft)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2


BACKHOE LIFTING CAPACITIES DURING
NORMAL OPERATION – SAE RATED kgs (lbs)

A
4WD machine.
B
Lifting capacities are shown with Standard Dipper,
Extendible Dipper (HED) in retracted position and
Extendible dipper in full extended position.
20
m (ft)
565 (1245) +5.4 (18)
1110 (2445) 1025 (2260) 850 (1875) +4.9 (16
1500 (3305) 1395 (3075) 1525 (3365) 995 (2195) +4.3 (14)
2425 (5345) 1645 (3625) 2315 (5105) 1530 (3370) 1625 (3585) 1070 (2360) +3.6 (12)
2350 (5190) 1685 (3715) 2245 (4950) 1565 (3450) 1625 (3585) 1110 (2415) +3.0 (10)
2395 (5280) 1685 (3715) 2280 (5030) 1560 (3440) 1650 (3645) 1130 (2490) + 2.4 (8)
2575 (5675) 1670 (3680) 2455 (5415) 1540 (3395) 1735 (3830) 1135 (2510) + 1.8 (6)
3115 (6875) 1645 (3630) 2980 (6580) 1515 (3335) 1885 (4160) 1140 (2515) + 1.2 (4)
4555 (10045) 1620 (3375) 4385 (9665) 1485 (3275) 2125 (4690) 1140 (2515) + 0.6 (2)
1600 (3525) 1460 (3220) 3315 (7310) 1135 (2510) 0 Ground Level
1580 (3485) 1435 (3615) 4565 (10065) 1135 (2510) – 0.6 (2)
1570 (3460) 1420 (3135) 1140 (2515) – 1.2 (4)
1575 (3670) 1420 (3130) 1145 (2530) – 1.8 (6)
1600 (3530) 1440 (3175) 1165 (2570) – 2.4 (8)
1690 (3725) 1515 (3340) 1200 (2645) – 3.0 (10)
2095 (4620) 1875 (4135) 1270 (2800) – 3.6 (12)
1440 (3175) – 4.2 (14)
2255 (4970) – 4.8 (16)
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CENTRE PIVOT LOADER – DIMENSIONS AND PERFORMANCE
(PER SAE J 732 C) WITH TYRES FRONT = 16.9–28 REAR = 16.9–28

A. Overall Operating Height 4347mm (14ft 1in) 4653mm (15ft 1in) 4653mm (15ft 1in)
B. Height to Hinge Pin Full Raise 3491m m (11ft 3in) 3491mm (11ft 3in) 3491mm (11ft 3in)
C. Dump Height 2717mm (8ft 8in) 2717mm (8ft 8in) 2717mm (8ft 8in)
H. Peel Depth 113mm (4ft 4in) 113mm (4ft 4in) 113mm (4ft 4in)
I. Centre line of axle to Lift Fork Tip at ground level– – 1.375 m (4.5 ft)
K. Rear axle to Centre of swing post 1324mm (4ft.3in) 1324mm (4ft.3in) 1324mm (4ft.3in)
M. Overall Length 5783mm (18 ft 8in) 5783mm (18 ft 8in) 5783mm (18 ft 8in)
P. Overall Width With Bucket 2400mm (7ft 8in) 2400mm (7ft 8in) 2400mm (7ft 8in)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

CENTRE PIVOT BACKHOE – PERFORMANCE AND GENERAL DIMENSIONS
(PER SAE J 49) WITH TYRES FRONT = 16.9–28 REAR = 16.9–28

Backhoe Standard Dipper Extendible Dipper
L. Stabilizer Spread – (pads reversed) 3000mm (9ft 7in) 3000mm (9ft 7in)
– Swing Arc 180° 180°
– Maximum digging force
– Lift capacity at 4.2m above ground 1458 kg (3213 lbs) 975 kg (2149 lbs)
– Extendible dipper extension length – 1.2 m (3.95 ft)
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


A
B
21
Standard HED HED Height/ Depth:

(Retracted) (Extended) m (ft)
545 (1205) +5.4 (18)
1085 (2390) 1005 (2215) 835 (1840) +4.9 (16
1485 (3275) 1385 (3050) 1500 (3305) 975 (2150) +4.3 (14)
2620 (5775) 1625 (3580) 2425 (5610) 1510 (3330) 1600 (3525) 1050 (2315) +3.6 (12)
2560 (5645) 1660 (3660) 2450 (5400) 1540 (3395) 1615 (3560) 1090 (2400) +3.0 (10)
2620 (5775) 1660 (3660) 2505 (5525) 1535 (3385) 1640 (3615) 1105 (2435) + 2.4 (8)
2875 (6340) 1645 (3625) 2750 (6065) 1515 (3340) 1730 (3815) 1115 (2460) + 1.8 (6)
3700 (8155) 1620 (3570) 3550 (7825) 1490 (3285) 1870 (4120) 1120 (2470) + 1.2 (4)
6280 (13845) 1600 (3525) 6075 (13395) 1460 (3220) 2120 (4675) 1120 (2470) + 0.6 (2)
1575 (3475) 1435 (3165) 3660 (8070) 1115 (2460) 0 Ground
1555 (3430) 1410 (3110) 5745 (12665) 1115 (2460) – 0.6 (2)
1545 (3405) 1400 (3085) 1120 (2470) – 1.2 (4)
1550 (3415) 1395 (3075) 1125 (2480) – 1.8 (6)
1580 (3485) 1415 (3120) 1145 (2525) – 2.4 (8)
1670 (3680) 1500 (3305) 1180 (2600) – 3.0 (10)
2070 (4565) 1855 (4090) 1250 (2755) – 3.6 (12)
1430 (3150) – 4.2 (14)
2230 (4915) – 4.8 (16)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

ENGINE
DATA ISO 108 hp / 80.5 kw
CEE 106 hp / 79 kw
Type Diesel and Turbocharged
No. of cylinders 4
Bore mm 111.8
(in) (4.4)
Stroke mm 127.0
(in) (5.0)
(in3) (304)

Maximum ‘No–Load’ Speed rev/min 2195–2245
Maximum ‘Full Load’ Speed rev/min 2070
Maximum Torque ISO Nm 445
lb ft 328
Intake 0.36 – 0.46mm (0.014 – 0.018 in)
Exhaust 0.43 – 0.53mm (0.017 – 0.021 in)
COOLING SYSTEM
Thermostat:
FUEL SYSTEM
Lift Pump Electric
Timing 28° B.T.D.C Turbocharged
Injectors LO 67PP Turbocharged
TRANSMISSION
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Alternator 70 amp
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


BRAKES
Type Wet Multi–Discs 4 per Axle
STEERING
Turns Lock to Lock
Left 3.1
Right 3.0
Pump Type Gear
Front Wheel Toe–in +0 to –2mm (0 to – 0.078in)
REAR AXLE
Rear Wheel Toe–in +0 to –2mm (0 to – 0.078in)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
TORQUES Nm. lbf.ft.
Front and Rear Wheel Nuts 800 590
Backhoe Attaching Bolts 970 715
Cab/ROPS Attaching Bolts 380 280
Turbocharger – Oil Inlet Pipe 20 15
– Oil Outlet Pipe 34 25

Thread Size: 9/ – 18 13.5 – 16.5 10 – 12
16
11/ – 16 23 – 28 17 – 20
16
13/ – 16 45 – 53 32 – 39
16
1 – 14 62 – 77 46 – 57
13/16 – 12 86 – 107 63 – 79
17/16 – 12 125 – 142 93 – 105
111/16 – 12 169 – 190 125 – 140
2 – 12 203 – 246 150 – 182
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

The tyres fitted to your machine with four wheel drive have been carefully selected to match the gearing of the
transmission and axles. When renewing worn or damaged tyres, always install tyres of the same make, model
and size as those removed. The installation of other tyre combinations may result in excessive tyre wear, loss
of usable power or severe damage to drive line components. If in doubt, consult your Dealer.
FRONT AND REAR TYRE PRESSURES AND PERMISSIBLE LOADS
The following charts give the carry capacity of the axle at the tyre pressures indicated.
These charts are for guidance only. For exact information regarding inflation pressures and loads for your
particular tyres, consult your Dealer.

Tyre 1.0 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
size
16.9–24–R4 1650 1775 2020 2130 2240 2445 2550 2650 2735 2820 2905 2990 3080 3165 3250
16.9–28–R4 1760 1895 2155 2775 2390 2610 2720 2830 2920 3005 3095 3190 3280 3370 3465
440/80 R28 1770 1975 2089 2205 2225 2580 2680 2720 2910 2995 3120 3080 3275 3250 3590

Tyre 14.5 16.0 18.9 20.3 21.8 24.7 26.1 27.6 29.0 30.5 31.9 33.4 34.8 36.3 37.7
size
Permissible Load Capacity Per Axle (lbs)
16.9–24–R4 3630 3905 4444 4686 4849 5379 5610 5830 6017 6204 6391 6578 6776 6963 7150
16.9–28–R4 3872 4169 4741 6105 5258 5742 5984 6226 6424 6611 6809 7018 7216 7414 7623
440/80 R28 3894 4345 4595 4851 4895 5676 5896 5984 6402 6589 6864 6776 7205 7150 7898
FRONT WEIGHTS
Chin Weight 180 kg (396 lbs)
RADIATOR COOLANTS
limits:

ROAD SPEEDS
The following table shows the approximate ground speeds in km/h and miles/h at rated engine speed (2070
rev/min).

Gear Rear Tyre Rear Tyre Tire 440/80R 28 ##
Ratio 16.9 – 28 #, ## 18.4–26 #, ##
km/h miles/h km/h miles/h km/h miles/h
1st Forward 5.9 3.66 6.0 3.7 5.9 3.6
2nd Forward 11.2 6.95 11.2 7.0 11.2 6.95
3rd Forward 22.2 13.79 21.8 13.5 22.2 13.79
4th Forward 39.2 24.41 39.2 24.35 39.2 24.35
1st Reverse 7.1 4.4 7.1 4.4 7.1 4.4
2nd Reverse 13.3 8.26 13.2 8.2 13.3 8.26
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

SECTION 00 – TOOLING 75 TO 108HP – CHAPTER 3 1
SECTION 00 000 – TOOLING
Chapter 3 – 75 to 108hp MACHINES
CONTENT
Section Description Page

00 000 Tooling and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
The following data is for general guidance. Where specific data or dimensions are required and not quoted in
this section, refer to the section in the Repair Manual relating to the component under repair.
IMPORTANT: The following Tool listing is for all applications (unless otherwise stated)
GENERAL TOOLS AND APPLICATION

1. Multi Meter for general Electrics testing
1
2. Internal Micrometer for Bore measurement
TA6010040
2
3. Dial Indicator Eccentricity checking Valve Seats,
guides and bores
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 00 – TOOLING 75 TO 108HP – CHAPTER 3
4. Pressure Tester Fuel Injectors
4
5. Dial Indicator for checking Concentricity, End
Floats, Crankshaft Seal seating.
TA6010056
5
6. Internal Bore Gauge for Valve Guides and gen-
eral measurement
TA6010018
6
7. Bearing Heater
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

8. Pressure Test Hand Pump, Hydraulics General

206 bar (3000 psi) capability
8
9. 3 Legged Puller for general application
9
10. Spring Compressor Valve Springs
TA6010011
10
11. Square Valve Springs
11
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

12. Bearing Puller general use
12
13. Piston Ring Remover Pistons
13
14. Puller General
TA6010027
14
15. ALL MODELS – Splitting Kit for Machine Disassembly
15
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

16. POWER SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION (tools for local manufacture) – Lifting Transmission End Cover
10mm
15cm 9cm 20mm
O = 18mm x 3
12cm 35mm
18mm
11.5cm
9cm
1
17. Spring Retainer Gear Shift Detent Springs
23mm
18mm
2
18. Bearing Installer 35mm Transmission Idler and Output Shaft Bearing Installation
45mm
150mm
35mm
3
19. Bearing Installer 4WD, Counter Shaft, Transmission Input Shaft Front
50mm
300mm
40mm
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

20. POWER SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION – Bearing Installer 50mm Transmission Input Shaft Rear
60mm
50mm 150mm
5
21. Oil Pump Seal Transmission Oil Pump Seal Installation
70mm
6
22. Bush Installer Transmission Input Shaft Bush Installation
22mm
7
23. REAR AXLE – Holding Bracket Rear Axle Pinion Nut Removal Aid
1. 46mm (1.811in)
2. 65mm (2.559in)
3. 9mm (0.354)
4. 40mm (1.575in)
5. 220mm (8.66in)
6. 140mm (5.51in)
7. 95mm (3.74in)
8. 10mm (0.394in)
9. 110mm (4.33in)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

24. REAR AXLE (for local manufacture) – Torque Fixture Axle Pinion Rolling Resistance Setting
110 mm
95 mm
45 mm
65 mm 10 mm (x4)
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
5 mm
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
9
25. ENGINE – Camshaft Bush Removal / Installation #297117
TA6010071
10
26. Step Plates, Front cover Seal Installation #297108
11
27. ENGINE & TRANSMISSION (not 75hp) – Lifting Bracket #297392
12
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

28. ENGINE (not 75hp) – Rear Cover Seal Installer#297194
TA6010055
13
29. FUEL PUMP (not 75hp) – Timing tool C.A.V Injection Pump Timing #297119,#297512,#297513
14
30. POWER SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION – Compression Transmission Clutch Pack #297394
15
31. Gauge Tool Bolt Aid Measurement Of Shaft End Floats #297395
16
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

32. POWER SHIFT TRANSMISSION – Lifting Bracket Transmission only #297399
17
33. Locking Tool Holds output couplings solid to remove attaching nut #297397
18
34. *60mm Thin wall socket Remove output couplings attaching nut #297400
19
35. Lift Hook Clutch Shaft 1st Reverse Shaft or 2nd Forward Shaft lifting tool #297398
20
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

36. POWER SHIFT TRANSMISSION – Compression Tool Transmission Clutch Packs #297401
21
37. Seal Installer Front and rear cover seal installer #297402
22
38. Pressure Gauge Adapter Torque Convertor Pressure Test #297403
7/
16 x 20 UNF
M10 x 1.0
NB (some Transmissions may have a 3/8 x 24 –6 JIC instead of M10 x 1.0)

23
39. Pressure Gauge Adapter General Gauge Testing #297404
7/
16 x 20 UNF
7/ x 20 UNF
16
M10 x 1.0
NB (some Transmissions may have a 3/8 x 24 –6 JIC instead of M10 x 1.0)
24
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

40. POWER SHIFT TRANSMISSION – Pressure Gauge 20 bar (290 psi) general
25
41. 100 ohm Test Lead Testing Speed Sender #297405
26
42. Limp home lead Total Failure Microprocessor Override #297406
27
43. FRONT AXLE – Seal Removal Axle #297111
28
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

44. FRONT AXLE – Seal Insertion Tool #297103
29
45. Seal Removal Tool Hub #297101, #297504
30
46. Seal Insertion Tool Hub #297103
31
47. Bush Removal Tool Axle #297111
32
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

48. FRONT AXLE – Bush Insertion Tool Axle #297103
33
49. Pinion Socket Tool #297511
34
50. Gauge Tool Differential Setting #297132
35
51. REAR AXLE – Lifting Bracket Half Shaft #297413
36
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

52. REAR AXLE – Removal and Installation Tool Ring Gear #297326
37
53. Bearing Cup Removal Tool Half shaft, #297101, #297504
38
54. Bearing removal Axle #297390, #297391
39
55. Bearing Pre Load Differential #297146
40
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

56. STEERING MOTOR – Seal Insertion Tool Danfos #294056
41
57. HYDRAULIC – Pressure Test Valve to Check and Adjust all Relief Valves #297418
42
58. Seal Installer Tool Seal Installation, Hydraulic Valve #297149
43
59. Flow Test Fittings #297166
44
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

60. HYDRAULIC – Pressure Test Gauge 250 bar Hydraulic System/Steering 2 – 20bar Trans/Four Wheel Drive
x 2 = 250 bar 4000 psi x 2 = 20 bar 290 psi
45
61. Quick Release Fitting Steering and Hydraulic Relief Valve Testing #291924
46
62. Fitting * 13/16in ORFS Hand pump to rod end of bucket cylinder to test relief valve rod end.
47
63. POWER SHUTTLE – Fitting * 9/16in ORFS to test Transmission clutch, and Torque Convertor.
48
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

64. CYLINDERS – x3 Peg Spanner #297190 Lift Crowd, #297191 Bucket & Swing, #297192 Stabilisers
49
65. x4 Peg Spanner
80mm 90°
80mm
x4 Pins 8.0mm O/D by 7mm depth
50
66. ‘C’ Spanner #297185 Dipperstick, #297185 Stabilisers, #297188 Bucket, #297193 Swing & Dipstick
51
67. Locking Tool Loader Pivot Pin #297189
52
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

68. Lead – Diagnostic Lead 85820162 (NH – ENG), 85820164 (FH – ENG ), 85820163 (ITA)
PC
53
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 10 – ENGINE 92 TO 108HP – CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 10 – ENGINE
Chapter 1 – Engine Overhaul – New Holland
CONTENT
10 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Tightening Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SPECIFICATIONS
Type Diesel Diesel
Output 92hp 108 hpT
No. of cylinders 4
Bore in. 4.4
(mm) (111.8)
Stroke in. 5.0
(mm) (127.0)
Displacement in3 304
(cm3) (4987)
Compression @ Cranking Speed bar 25.5
lbs in2 375
Maximum ‘No–Load’ Speed rev/min 2320 2195–2245
Engine Speed at Maximum Torque rev/min 1600 1400
Rated Speed rev/min 2200 2070
Tappet Clearance (cold) Intake 0.36 – 0.46mm (0.014 – 0.018 in)
Exhaust 0.43 – 0.53mm (0.017 – 0.021 in)
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 10 – ENGINE 92 TO 108HP – CHAPTER 1
CYLINDER BLOCK
Taper of Cylinder Bore 0.025mm (0.001 in) Repair Limit
0.127mm (0.005 in) Wear Limit
Cylinder Bore out of Round 0.03mm (0.0015 in) Repair Limit
0.127mm (0.005 in) Wear Limit
Cylinder Bore Diameters 111.778–111.841mm (4.4007–4.4032 in)
Rear Oil Seal Bore Diameter 140.77–140.87mm (5.542–5.546 in)
Block to Head Surface Flatness 0.08mm (0.003 in) in any 152mm (6 in)
0.03mm (0.001 in) in any 25.40mm (1 in)
CYLINDER HEAD
Valve Guide Bore Diameter 9.469–9.495mm (0.3728–0.3738 in)
Head to Block Surface Flatness 0.0127mm (0.0005in) in any 25.4mm (1 in),
or 0.0254mm (0.001in) in any 152mm (6 in)
0.06mm (0.0025in) overall
EXHAUST VALVES
Face Angle 44°15’–44°30’ Relative to the Head of Valve
Stem Diameter Std :9.401–9.421mm (0.3701–0.3709 in)
0.076mm (0.003 in)
Oversize :9.477–9.497mm (0.3731–0.3739 in)
0.38mm (0.015 in)
Oversize :9.781–9.802mm (0.3851–0.3859 in)
0.030 in (0.76mm)
Oversize :10.163–10.183mm (0.4001–0.4009 in)
Head Diameter 42.88–43.13mm (1.688–1.698 in)
Stem to Guide Clearance 0.048–0.094mm (0.0019–0.0037 in)
Lash Clearance (Cold) 0.43–0.53mm (0.017–0.021 in)
INTAKE VALVES
Face Angle 29°15’–29°30’ Relative to Head of Valve
Stem Diameter Std :9.426–9.446mm (0.3711–0.3719 in)
0.076mm (0.003 in)
Oversize :9.502–9.522mm (0.3741–0.3749 in)
0.381mm (0.015 in)
Oversize :9.807–9.827mm (0.3861–0.3869 in)
0.762mm (0.030 in)
Oversize :10.188–10.208mm (0.4011–0.4019 in)
Head Diameter 47.37–47.63mm (1.865–1.875 in)
Stem to Guide Clearance 0.023–0.069mm (0.0009–0.0027 in)
Lash Clearance (Cold) 0.36–0.46mm (0.014–0.018 in)
VALVE SPRINGS
Number per Valve 1
Free Length 60.7mm (2.39 in)
Length, loaded at 27.7–31.3kg (61.69 lb) 48.26mm (1.900 in)
Length, loaded at 61–69kg (135–153 lb) 35.69mm (1.405 in)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

VALVE TIMING
Intake Opening 12° Before Top Dead Centre
Intake Closing 38° After Bottom Dead Centre
Exhaust Opening 48° Before Bottom Dead Centre
Exhaust Closing 12° After Top Dead Centre
VALVE INSERTS
Exhaust Valve Insert Intake Valve Seat Insert

Insert Oversize Counter bore Diameter Counter bore Diameter
in Cylinder Head in Cylinder Head
0.254mm (0.010 in) 44.17–44.20mm (1.739–1.740 in) 50.01–50.04mm (1.969–1.970 in)
0.508mm (0.020 in) 44.42–44.45mm (1.749–1.750 in) 50.27–50.29mm (1.979–1.980 in)
0.762mm (0.030 in) 44.68–44.70mm (1.759–1.760 in) 50.52–50.55mm (1.989–1.990 in)
VALVE SEATS
Exhaust Valve Seat Angle 45°00’ – 45°30’
Intake Valve Seat Angle 30°00’ – 30°30’
Interference Valve Face Angle
to Valve Seat Angle 0°30’ – 1°15’
Concentricity With Guide
Diameter 0.051mm (0.002 in) Total Indicator Reading Max
Seat Width Exhaust Valve 1.8–2.3mm (0.072–0.092 in)
Intake Valve 1.9–2.5mm (0.078–0.098 in)
CAMSHAFT IDLER GEAR
Number of teeth 47
End Play 0.076–0.35mm (0.003–0.014 in)
Bushing Inside Diameter 50.813–50.838mm (2.0005–2.0015 in)
Adaptor Outside Diameter 50.757–50.770mm (1.9983–1.9988 in)
Backlash with Crankshaft Gear 0.15–0.46mm (0.006–0.018 in)
Backlash with Camshaft Gear 0.15–0.46mm (0.006–0. 018 in)
Backlash with Fuel Injection Pump 0.10–0.53mm (0.004–0.021 in)
CAMSHAFT GEAR
Number of Teeth 52
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

ROCKER ARM SHAFT

Shaft Diameter 25.40–25.43mm (1.000–1.001 in)
Shaft Support Internal Diameter 25.45–25.20mm (1.002–1.004 in)
ROCKER ARM
Inside Diameter 25.48–25.50mm (1.003–1.004 in)
TAPPETS
Clearance to Bore 0.015–0.053mm (0.0006–0.0021 in)
Tappet Diameter 25.118–25.130mm (0.9889–0.9894 in)
Tappet Bore Diameter 25.15–25.17mm (0.9900–0.9910 in)
CAMSHAFT
Bearing Journal Diameter 60.693–60.719mm (2.3895–2.3905 in)
Bearing Clearance 0.025–0.076mm (0.0010–0.0030 in)
End Play 0.051–0.18mm (0.0020–0.0070 in)
CONNECTING RODS
Small End Bushing (Internal Diameter)
Normally Aspirated 38.113–38.120mm (1.5005–1.5008 in)
Turbocharged 41.288–41.295mm (1.6255–1.6270 in)
Clearance Bushing to Piston Pin 0.013–0.025mm (0.0005–0.0010 in)
Side Float 0.13–0.33mm (0.0050–0.0130 in)
Maximum Twist 0.30mm (0.0120 in)
Maximum Bend 0.10mm (0.0040 in)
PISTON PIN
Outside Diameter
Normally Aspirated Engine 38.095–38.100mm (1.4998–1.5000 in)
Turbocharged Engine 41.270–41.275mm (1.6248–1.6250 in)
PISTONS
Skirt to Cylinder Clearance
Naturally Aspirated 0.140–0.171mm (0.0055–0.0067 in)
– New, unrun engines
0.140–0.28mm (0.0055–0.011 in) – Run engines
Skirt to Cylinder Clearance
– New, unrun engines
0.165–0.28mm (0.0064–0.011 in) – Run engines
Piston Pin Clearance 0.0030–0.0140mm (0.00012–0.00055 in)
at 21°C (70°F)
Piston Crown to Block Face,
Naturally Aspirated 0.28–0.58mm (0.011–0.023 in)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

PISTON RINGS
Compression rings,
Number and Location 2 off –1st and 2nd from the top of the piston
Naturally Aspirated,
Top Compression Ring Parallel Sides–Inner Chamfer or no Chamfer
2nd Compression Ring Straight Face–Inner Step
Turbocharged,
Top Compression Ring Keystone Tapered With Internal Chamfer to Top
2nd Compression Ring Straight Face–Inner Step
Oil Control,
Number and Location 1 off,–Directly above the Piston Pin,
Type Slotted With Expander
Side Face Clearance To Ring Groove,

Top Compression Ring 0.103–0.153mm (0.0041–0.0060 in)
2nd Compression Ring (Turbocharged) 0.075–0.125mm (0.0030–0.0049 in)
2nd Compression Ring (Naturally Aspirated) 0.055–0.105mm (0.0022–0.0042 in)
Oil Control Ring 0.040–0.90mm (0.0016–0.0035 in)
Gap Width,
Top Compression Ring 0.38–0.84mm (0.015–0.033 in)
2nd Compression Ring 0.66–1.12mm (0.026–0.044 in)
Oil Control Ring 0.38–0.84mm (0.015–0.033 in)
CRANKSHAFT
Main Journal Diameter– 85.631mm (3.3713 in) 85.656mm (3.3723 in)
Main Journal Length
(except thrust, rear, or intermediate) 36.91–37.26mm (1.453–1.467 in)
Maximum permitted wear limits 0.127mm (0.005 in) Maximum
Thrust Bearing Journal Length 37.06–37.16mm (1.459–1.4628 in)
Intermediate Bearing Journal Length 36.91–37.26m (1.453–1.467 in)
Rear Bearing Journal Length 37.97–38.48mm (1.495–1.515 in)
Crankpin Journal Length 42.60–42.93mm (1.677–1.690 in)
Crankpin Diameter 69.840–69.860mm (2.749–2.7504 in)
End Play 0.10–0.356mm (0.004–0.014 in)
Crankpin Out of Round 0.005mm (0.0002 in) Total Indicator Reading
Taper Surface Parallel to Centre Line
of Main Journal 0.005mm (0.0002 in)
Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Journal Diameter 122.12–122.28mm (4.808–4.814 in)
Crankshaft Pulley Journal Diameter 44.45–44.48mm (1.750–1.751 in)
Crankshaft Timing Gear Journal Diameter 46.264–46.289mm (1.8214–1.8224 in)
Crankshaft Flange Runout 0.038mm (0.0015 in) Maximum
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CRANKSHAFT DRIVE GEAR

Number of teeth 26
MAIN BEARING
Liner length (except thrust liner) 27.94–28.19mm (1.10–1.11 in)
Liner Length (Thrust Liner) 36.74–36.86mm (1.446–1.451 in)
Vertical Assembled Bearing Clearance 0.055–0.117mm (0.0021–0.0046 in)

CRANKPIN BEARINGS
Liner Length 31.50–31.75mm (1.240–1.250 in)
Vertical Assembled Bearing Clearance 0.035–0.094mm (0.0014–0.0037 in)
CRANKSHAFT RE–GRINDING
When re–grinding a crankshaft the main and crankpin journal diameters should be reduced the same amount
as the undersize bearings used, and the following dimensions apply. The rear end of the crankshaft should be
located on the 60° Chamfer of the pilot bearing bore.
UNDERSIZE BEARING AVAILABLE MAIN JOURNAL DIAMETERS

0.051mm (0.002 in) 85.580–85.606mm (3.3693–3.3703 in)
0.254mm (0.010 in) 85.377–85.402mm (3.3613–3.3623 in)
0.508mm (0.020 in) 85.123–85.148mm (3.3513–3.3523 in)
0.762mm (0.030 in) 84.869–84.894mm (3.3413–3.3423 in)
1.016mm (0.040 in) 84.615–84.640mm (3.3313–3.3323 in)
UNDERSIZE BEARING AVAILABLE CRANKPIN JOURNAL DIAMETERS

0.051mm (0.002 in) 69.789–69.809mm (2.7476–2.7484 in)
0.254mm (0.010 in) 69.586–69.606mm (2.7396–2.7404 in)
0.508mm (0.020 in) 69.332–69.352mm (2.7296–2.7304 in)
0.762mm (0.030 in) 69.078–69.098mm (2.7196–2.7204 in)
1.016mm (0.040 in) 68.824–68.844mm (2.7096–2.7104 in)
BALANCER
Gear Backlash 0.05–0.20mm (0.002–0.008 in)
Shaft to bushing clearance 0.0762.0–0.114mm (0.0030–0.0045in)
Shaft Diameter 25.387–25.40mm (0.9995–1.000 in)
Backlash between balancer / crankshaft gear 0.05–0.31mm (0.002–0.012 in)
End float balancer gear to support 0.20–0.56mm (0.008–0.022 in)
FLYWHEEL
Ring Gear Runout 0.635mm (0.025 in)
Flywheel Runout 0.127mm (0.005 in)
Maximum depth to be skimmed from face 3 mm (0.118 in)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

OIL PUMP
Rotor Clearance 0.025–0.15mm (0.001–0.006 in)
Rotor to Pump Housing Clearance 0.15–0.28mm (0.006–0.011 in)
Rotor End Play 0.025–0.089mm (0.001–0.0035 in)
Oil Pressure 1.24 bar (18 lbs in2) minimum at idle speed,
2.76 bar (40 lbs in2) minimum at rated speed
Pump Gear to Camshaft Gear Backlash 0.41–0.56mm (0.016–0.022 in)
OIL FILTER SUPPORT
Relief Valve, Operating Pressure 4.0 bar (59 lb in2)
Flow Rate 68 litres/min (18 US gals/min)
Relief Valve, Spring Free Length 52.8mm (2.08 in)
API Engine Oil & Filter
Temperature Oil Viscosity and Type Classification Change Period (hours)
Low Ash , SAE 5W 150
–12°C or Low Ash SAE 5W/20 SF/CD / CF–4 150
(Below 10°F) or SAE 10W–30 150
–12°C to 4°C Low Ash , SAE 10W Series 3 SF/CD / CF–4 150
(10°F to 40°F ) or SAE 10W–30 300
0°C to 32°C Low Ash , SAE 30W Series 3 SF/CD / CF–4 300
(32°F to 90°F) or SAE 10W–40 300
Above 24°C Low Ash , SAE 30W Series 3 SF/CD / CF–4 300
( 75°F ) or SAE 15W–40
NOTE: When using diesel fuel with a sulphur content below 1.0%, Series 3 diesel engine oil with an A.P.I. classi-
fication of CD may be used instead of CF–4 oil , but the oil and filter interval must be reduced to 150 hours .
When using diesel fuel with a sulphur content between 1% and 1.3% use only oils listed above but reduce the
oil and filter change period to every 50 hours .
ENGINE OIL CAPACITIES (WITH OIL FILTER)

Model Litres US Gals
92 to 108hp 12 3.17
THERMOSTAT
Opening Temperature 79–83°C (174–181°F)
Fully Open 93–96°C (199–205°F)
RADIATOR CAP
Opening Pressure 0.9 bar (13 lbs in2)
WATER PUMP
Type Centrifugal
Drive V Belt
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITIES
Model Litres U.S. gals
92 to 108hp 16 4.2
COOLING FLUID
Content Mixture – Use Anti–freeze (50%) plus clean, soft water (50%)
Type Ambra Agriflu (NH 900 A)
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


IN FOOT POUNDS (NEWTON-METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS
INCH HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS

SAE GRADE 2 SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8 LOCKNUTS
NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED GR.B GR.C NOMINAL
SIZE or W/ZnCr or W/ZnCr or W/ZnCr w/GR5 w/GR8 SIZE
PLATED PLATED PLATED BOLT BOLT
SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD
1/4 55* (6.2) 72* (8.1) 86* (9.7) 112* (13) 121* (14) 157* (18) 61* (6.9) 86* (9.8) 1/4
5/16 115* (13) 149* (17) 178* (20) 229* (26) 250* (28) 324* (37) 125* (14) 176* (20) 5/16
3/8 17 (23) 22 (30) 26 (35) 34 (46) 37 (50) 48 (65) 19 (26) 26 (35) 3/8
7/16 27 (37) 35 (47) 42 (57) 54 (73) 59 (80) 77 (104) 30 (41) 42 (57) 7/16
1/2 42 (57) 54 (73) 64 (87) 83 (113) 91 (123) 117 (159) 45 (61) 64 (88) 1/2
9/16 60 (81) 77 (104) 92 (125) 120 (163) 130 (176) 169 (229) 65 (88) 92 (125) 9/16
5/8 83 (112) 107 (145) 128 (174) 165 (224) 180 (244) 233 (316) 90 (122) 127 (172) 5/8
3/4 146 (198) 189 (256) 226 (306) 293 (397) 319 (432) 413 (560) 160 (217) 226 (306) 3/4
7/8 142 (193) 183 (248) 365 (495) 473 (641) 515 (698) 667 (904) 258 (350) 364 (494) 7/8
1 213 (289) 275 (373) 547 (742) 708 (960) 773 (1048) 1000 (1356) 386 (523) 545 (739) 1

IDENTIFICATION
CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS
SAE GRADE 2 SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8
REGULAR NUTS SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8

HEX NUTS HEX NUTS
LOCKNUTS
GRADE IDENTIFICATION GRADE IDENTIFICATION GRADE IDENTIFICATION

GRADE A NO MARKS GRADE A NO MARKS
GRADE A NO NOTCHES
GRADE B LETTER B GRADE B THREE MARKS
GRADE B ONE CIRCUMFERENTIAL NOTCH GRADE C LETTER C GRADE C SIX MARKS
GRADE C TWO CIRCUMFERENTIAL NOTCHES MARKS NEED NOT BE LOCATED
AT CORNERS
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

TORQUE VALUES – VARIOUS Nm lbf ft Kgf m
Main Bearing Bolts 197 145 20.0

Connecting Rod Bolts 149 110 15.2
Cylinder Head Bolts (with Engine Cold) 217 160 22.0
Intake Manifold–to–Cylinder Head 35 26 3.5
Exhaust Manifold–to–Cylinder Head 38 28 3.9
Exhaust Pipe–to–Flange 31 23 3.2
Flywheel–to–Crankshaft 197 145 20.0
Oil Pan Drain Plug 41 30 4.2
Valve Rocker Cover Bolts 24 18 2.4
Crankshaft Pulley–to–Crankshaft 224 210 23.0
Self–Locking Screw – Valve Rocker Arm 24 18 2.4
Injector Attachment Bolts 23 17 2.3
Cover Bolts 31 23 3.1
Oil Pump to Block 23 17 2.3
Water Pump–to–Cylinder Block 48 35 3.6
Water Pump Cover–to–Pump 27 20 2.8
Oil Pan–to–Cylinder Block (Cast) 38 28 3.9
Injector Line Nuts 24 18 2.4
Leak–off Tube Banjo Fitting Bolts 11 8 1.1
Injection Pump–to–Front Cover 24 18 2.4
Camshaft Idler Drive Gear–to–Block 237 175 24.0
Front Cover–to–Cylinder Block 24 18 2.4
Thermostat Housing Bolts 24 18 2.4
Camshaft Gear Bolt 69 51 7.0
Camshaft Rear Gear Plate Bolts 47 35 4.8
Oil Filter Adaptor Bolts 42 31 4.2
Oil Filter Mounting Bolt Insert 34 25 3.5
Starting Motor–to–Rear Adaptor Plate 31 23 3.2
Injection Pump–to–Gear Nut 79 58 8.0
Oil Pressure Switch Assembly 31 23 3.2
Turbocharger–to–Exhaust Manifold Nut 44 33 4.5
Fan Blade to Support Body 27 21 2.8
Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Retainer –
Initial Tightening 12 9 1.2
Final Tightening 23 17 2.3
Temperature Senders 20 15 2.0
Idler Pulley Bolt 54 40 5.5
Pump Connector to Block 24 18 2.4
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CYLINDER BLOCK PLUG TORQUES Nm lbf ft Kgf m
1/4 in–27 NPT 11 8 1.1

1/4 in–18 NPT 29.8 22 3.0
3/4 in–18 NPT 38 28 3.8
3/4 in–14 NPT 27 20 2.7
SPECIAL TOOLS
DESCRIPTION TOOL No.
Adjustable Bridge Puller 297102
Shaft Protectors 297107
Step Plate Adaptors 297108
Bushing Kit 297466
Valve Guide Reamer Kit 295006
Camshaft Bearings – Remover/Installer 297117
Water Pump Seal Replacer 295007
Crankshaft Seal Replacer

Front Seal 297116
Rear Seal 297194
GREASE AND SEALANTS
PART NUMBER TYPE NAME
Ambra GR9 NH 1 710 A Grease –General Purpose

Ambra GR75MD NH 1 720 A Grease–Molybdenum Disulphide
82995768 ESE–M4G194–B Sealer–Anaerobic Low strength
82995776 ESE–M4G195–A Sealer–Silicone
82995774 SP–M4G9112–A Sealer–Polyester Urethane
82995773 SP–M4G9112–C Sealer–Polyester Urethane
82995772 ESE–M4G217–A Sealer–Anaerobic
82995771 SP–M2G9121–B Sealer–RTV Silicone rubber
82995782 Gasket Removal – Spray
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

FAULT FINDING
IMPORTANT: When effecting a repair the cause of
the problem must be investigated and corrected to
avoid repeat failures.
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES REMEDY
Engine does not 1. Clogged air cleaner 1. Clean or renew element

develop full power
2. Fuel line obstructed 2. Clean
3. Faulty injectors 3. Clean and reset
4. Incorrect valve lash 4. Check and reset

adjustment
5. Burnt, worn or sticking valves 5. Replace valves with new or

oversize, and/or machine the
valve guide bores
6. Blown head gasket 6. Check head flatness and fit

new gasket
7. Incorrect fuel delivery 7. Check injectors and pump
8. Low cylinder compression 8. Renew piston rings or

re–bore/re–sleeve as
necessary
Oil pressure warning 1. Bulb burnt out 1. Renew bulb
light fails to operate
2. Warning Light pressure 2. Renew pressure switch
switch faulty
3. Warning light circuit faulty 3. Check and renew wiring
Excessive exhaust 1. Oil leak on compressor or 1. Overhaul turbocharger

smoke turbine side of turbocharger,
where fitted
2. Exhaust leak on exhaust 2. Fit new gasket

manifold side of turbocharger,
where fitted
3. Air cleaner dirty or restricted 3. clean
4. Excessive fuel delivery 4. Overhaul injection pump and

injectors
Water temperature 1. Faulty temperature sender 1. Renew sender switch

gauge fails to reach
normal operating 2. Incorrect or faulty thermostat 2. Renew thermostat
temperature
3. Faulty water temperature 3. Renew temperature gauge
gauge
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Engine knocks 1. Diluted or thin oil 1. Check crankshaft bearings for

damage, change as required.
Drain and refill with specified
oil and renew filter. Ascertain
cause of dilution
2. Insufficient oil supply 2. Check oil level and top up as

necessary. Overhaul or renew
pump as necessary. Check oil
filter is not clogged
3. Low oil pressure 3. Overhaul pump or relief valve

as necessary
4. Excessive crankshaft end 4. Install new thrust bearing liner

play
5. Flywheel or ring gear run–out 5. Skim flywheel or fit new ring

excessive gear
6. Excessive connecting rod or 6. Install new bearing inserts

main bearing clearance and/or re–grind crankshaft
7. Bent or twisted connecting 7. Renew connecting rods

rods
8. Crankshaft journals out– 8. Re–grind crankshaft and fit

of–round undersize bearing inserts
9. Excessive piston–to– 9. Re–bore/re–sleeve block and

cylinder bore clearance fit new pistons
10. Excessive piston ring 10. Fit new pistons and rings
clearance
11. Broken rings 11. Fit new rings, check bore and
pistons for damage
12. Excessive piston pin 12. Fit new piston or pin

clearance
13. Piston pin retainer loose or 13. Install new retainer, and check
missing bore/pistons for damage
14. Excessive camshaft play 14. Install new thrust plate
15. Imperfections on timing gear 15. Renew timing gear

teeth
16. Excessive timing gear 16. Renew timing gear

backlash
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Engine overheats
1. Hose connection leaking or 1. Tighten hose connection,
collapsed renew hose if damaged
2. Radiator cap defective or not 2. Renew radiator cap

sealing
3. Radiator leakage 3. Repair/renew radiator
4. Improper fan belt adjustment 4. Re–adjust fan belt
5. Radiator fins restricted 5. Clean with compressed air
6. Faulty thermostat 6. Renew thermostat
7. Internal engine leakage 7. Check for source of leakage,

renew gasket or defective
parts
8. Water pump faulty 8. Overhaul water pump
9. Exhaust gas leakage into 9. Renew cylinder head gasket,

cooling system check head for damage or
distortion
10. Coolant aeration 10. Tighten all connections and

check coolant level is correct.
Ensure cylinder head gasket
has not blown
11. Cylinder head gasket 11. Renew cylinder head gasket

improperly installed
12. Hot spot due to rust and scale 12. Reverse flush entire cooling
or clogged water jackets system
13. Obstruction to radiator air 13. Remove the obstruction

flow
14. Extended engine idling 14. Do not allow engine to idle for
long periods
15. Oil cooler tube blocked 15.Clean
16. Radiator core tubes blocked 16. Check free flow
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Low oil pressure 1. Engine oil level low 1. Top up, as necessary
2. Wrong grade of oil 2. Drain and refill with correct
grade of oil
3. Blocked oil pump sump 3. Clean pump screen

screen
4. Oil pressure relief valve faulty 4. Fit new relief valve
5. Oil pump worn 5. Renew Oil Pump
6. Excessive oil pump rotor and 6. Overhaul pump

shaft assembly clearance
7. Excessive main or 7. Install new bearings inserts

connecting rod bearing and / or re–grind crankshaft
clearance
Excessive oil 1. Engine oil level too high 1. Reduce oil level
consumption
2. External oil leaks 2. Renew gaskets and seals,
where necessary. Check
mating surfaces for damage
or distortion
3. Worn valves, valve guides or 3. Renew

bores
4. Cylinder head gasket leaking 4. Renew gasket. Check head

for damage or distortion
5. Oil loss past the pistons and 5. Renew rings and/or rebore/
rings re–sleeve block as necessary
6. Oil cooler leak 6. Repair/renew oil cooler

assembly
7. Rocker cover oil filter blocked 7. Change filter
Engine tends to 1. Air cleaner dirty or 1. Clean or renew element

keep firing after fuel restricted
is shut off
2. Oil leak on compressor side of 2. Overhaul turbocharger
turbocharger where fitted
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CONNECTING RODS (OP NO 10 105)

The engine is a 4 cylinder and Turbocharged. Connecting rods (wedge) shaped at the small end
The engine features a cross flow cylinder head, with have been designed to reduce the reciprocating
the inlet and exhaust manifolds on opposite sides of weight at the piston end. The connecting rods are of
the cylinder head. The fuel and air combustion pro- a heavy beam construction and are assembled as a
cess, takes place in the specially designed bowl in matched set to each engine, attached to the crank-
the crown of the pistons. shaft, by means of insert–type bearings.
They are retained in position by the connecting rod
CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY (OP NO 10 101) big end cap and secured by two bolts per rod. The
small end of the connecting rod is fitted with a re-
The cylinder head incorporates valves and springs,
placeable bronze bushing, through which the free
with the valve rocker arm shaft assembly bolted to
floating piston pin is fitted. The steel pin being held
the cylinder block through the cylinder head. Cylinder
in place within the piston by two snap rings.
head retaining bolts are evenly spaced with a six
point pattern around each cylinder, this ensures an
even clamping load across the cylinder head area. PISTONS (OP NO 10 105)
The intake and exhaust manifolds are bolted to the Pistons are constructed of an aluminium silicon alloy
head, the intake manifold is mounted on the right with an iron insert for the top ring. The combustion
hand side of the engine, with the diesel injectors chamber being recessed into the piston crowns.
mounted outside the rocker cover. The exhaust Each piston has two compression rings and one oil
manifold is mounted on the left hand side of the en- control ring, to reduce friction and increase positive
gine. Water outlet connections and thermostat being sealing. All rings are located above the piston pin.
attached to the front of the cylinder block directly be-
hind the radiator. MANIFOLDS (OP NO 10 254)
Valve guides are integral in the cylinder head, and The cross flow design aluminium intake, and cast
valves with oversize stems are available in service. iron exhaust manifolds, are on opposite sides of the
Special replaceable cast alloy valve seats are cylinder head. This is designed to maintain balanced
pressed into each valve port during manufacture, heat distribution within the cylinder head. The con-
with oversize valve seats also available in service. figuration of the manifolds also ensures minimum
The exhaust valves are fitted with positive valve rota- heat transfer to the intake manifold.
tors with all valves using umbrella type oil seals. The intake manifold is connected to the Turbo-
Valve lash is maintained by adjustment of the self charger and in the rear end of the manifold a tapped
locking adjusting screw, mounted in each of the hole is provided for installation of a thermostart or an
rocker arms. ether cold starting aid (North America Only).
NOTE: On tractors where cold start equipment is not
CAMSHAFT ASSEMBLY (OP NO 10 106) installed ensure the plug in the intake manifold is kept
The camshaft runs in 3 replaceable bearings. The tight at all times. Considerable damage to the cylin-
camshaft drive gear is in mesh with and driven by the der bores, may be incurred by entry of dust or other
camshaft idler gear and crankshaft timing gear. foreign material if the plug is left loose or missing.
Also dirt and grit may be drawn through the air
Camshaft end thrust is controlled by a thrust plate cleaner connections if they are not properly secured.
bolted to the block, and located between the cam-
shaft gear and the front camshaft journal.
CYLINDER BLOCK ASSEMBLY (OP NO 10 001)
A helical gear is mounted on the rear of the camshaft,
and drives the engine oil lubrication pump mounted The cylinder block is an alloy cast iron with deep cyl-
forward of the flywheel. inder skirts, and water jackets for cooling the cylin-
ders. The cylinder bores are machined integral with
the cylinder block, during the manufacturing pro-
CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY (OP NO 10 103) cess.
The crankshaft is supported in the cylinder block by Cylinders are in line and vertical and numbered from
5 main bearings. The crankshaft is manufactured 1 to 4 from the front to the rear of the engine. They
from nodular cast iron with machined finished crank can be bored oversize for the fitment of sleeves,
webs. End thrust is controlled by a thrust bearing in- which are available in service.
corporated in the centre main bearing of the crank-
shaft. The oil pan which is attached to the bottom of the cyl-
inder block, is the reservoir for the engine oil lubrica-
Front and rear crankshaft oil sealing is effected by tion system. An aluminium engine front cover and
one piece seals that are designed for long and dur-
able service life.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

front plate is attached to the front of the engine and An integral radiator/engine oil cooler is fitted. Oil
covers all of the timing gear assembly. flows from the filter to main oil gallery, which runs the
length of the block and intersects the camshaft fol-
TIMING GEARS (OP NO 10 106) lower chamber.
The crankshaft timing gear is heated and press fitted The main gallery also supplies oil to the crankshaft
on to the front of the crankshaft, to a high degree of main bearings, connecting rods, big ends, small
accuracy during manufacturing. This enables pre- ends. The underside of the pistons and pins, are lu-
cise timing being maintained during the life of the en- bricated by oil pressure jets mounted adjacent to
gine. The crankshaft gear drives the camshaft idler each main journal housing.
gear which is attached to the front of the cylinder The camshaft drive gear bushing is pressure lubri-
block. The idler gear then drives the camshaft and cated through a drilled passage from the front main
the injection pump via meshing helical gears. The bearing. The gear has small oil passages machined
camshaft gear is bolted to the front of the camshaft, on both sides allowing excess oil to escape.
and is keyed to maintain position of the gear on the Timing gears are lubricated by splashed oil from the
camshaft. cam follower chamber, and the pressure lubricated
camshaft drive gear bushing.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM (OP NO 10 304) An intermittent flow of oil is directed to the valve
Lubrication of the engine is maintained by a rotor rocker arm shaft assembly via a drilled passage in
type oil pump mounted in the rear of the engine block, the cylinder block. This is located vertically above
behind the flywheel. The oil pump is driven from the above No 1 camshaft bearing, and aligns to a hole in
rear of the camshaft and draws oil from the engine oil the cylinder head. The rotation of the camshaft al-
pan through a tube and screen assembly. lows a controlled intermediate flow of lubrication.
A spring loaded relief valve is integral with the oil filter
body mounted on the left hand side of the engine The turbocharger is supplied with oil from the oil filter
block, and prevents over pressurisation of the sys- support housing, mounted on the left hand side of the
tem. engine.
1
Engine Oil Flow
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

COOLING SYSTEM (OP NO 10 400)

NOTE: Do not operate an engine without a thermo-
stat. It is recommended that a solution of a 50% clean
water, and 50% recommended antifreeze, see speci-
fications, is used. When the recommended Anti-
freeze is not used, a 5% solution of the recom-
mended inhibitor must be added to the cooling
system.
The function of the water pump mounted at the front
of the engine, is to maintain a continuous flow of
water around the cooling system. This is essential to
ensure correct engine temperature, and perform-
ance, during vehicle operation.
The pump is driven by a belt from the crankshaft pul-
ley, when the engine is running.
The cooling system for the new generation engines,
is of the recirculating by–pass type with full length
water jackets for each cylinder. The coolant is drawn
from the bottom tank of the radiator by the water
pump, which passes the coolant to the cylinder
block. This coolant then cools the cylinder walls.
Passages in the cylinder head gasket allow coolant
to flow from the cylinder block, into the cylinder head.
Cored passages also conduct the coolant to the fuel
injector nozzle locations, before re–entering the
water pump below the thermostat. AP101002
2
The thermostat is located in the top of the water
pump body, and controls the flow of the water as re-
quired by temperature changes.
NOTE: A faulty thermostat may cause the engine to
operate at too hot, or cold, an operating temperature.
If not replaced this could result in a damaged engine,
or impaired engine performance.
When the thermostat is closed Figure 2, a recirculat-
ing by–pass is provided to allow the coolant to recir-
culate from the head to the block to effect a faster
warm–up.
AP101003
3
Once the engine has reached its normal operating
temperature, the thermostat will open Figure 3 and
allow water to be drawn through the radiator by the
pump action. Cooled water then returns to the en-
gine system.
Cooling occurs as the coolant passes down through
the radiator cores, which are exposed to the air as it
is drawn through the radiator by the fan.
The cooling system incorporates a drain plug on the
right hand side of the cylinder block (1), Figure 4.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

5
Right Hand View of Engine
1. Thermostat 8. Fuel Filter with Electric Lift Pump
2. Coolant Radiator 9. Cold Start Electro Valve
3. Air Conditioning Condenser (when fitted) 10. Air Cleaner
4. Water Pump 11. Coolant Recovery Tank
5. Transmission OIl Cooler 12. Muffler
6. Battery 13. Fuel Sedimenter/Separator
7. Engine Oil Level Dipstick
WARNING • Water pump, thermostat, and associated com-
ponents.
Allow the engine to cool too ambient temperature be-
fore cleaning. Cleaning a hot engine in cool water • Oil pump relief valve.
could result in damage to the Fuel Pump and other • Oil pan and gasket.
components. • Turbocharger.
• Front timing cover/timing gear removal.
In the following procedures and illustrations the en-
gine in the main is shown removed from the tractor. • Oil pan removal for access to crankshaft, bearing
shells, piston removal, and oil pump suction tub-
The engine overhaul procedure initially describes the
ing.
assembly process for rebuilding an engine using all
new components. Following this section are defined • Front pulley and damper assembly.
headings which describe detailed repair specifica-
tions and procedures, where components are suit- Operations or repairs that can be per-
able for re–use. Refer to the specifications section to formed with the engine removed from the
ensure components are serviceable. vehicle and separated from the transmis-
Where overhaul of components is required without sion housing, with oil pan removed.
engine being removed from the tractor refer to the • Crankshaft rear oil seal and carrier removal,
following headings, and the relevant paragraphs, in (with oil pan removed).
the main overhaul procedure.
• Oil pump and drive gear removal.
NOTE: All gaskets, seals, and ‘O’ rings must be re-
Operations or repairs that can be per- placed with new upon re–assembly. Where new
formed with the engine still in the tractor. sealant is to be applied refer to ‘‘Engine Specifica-
• Cylinder head and associated components. tions”.
• Fuel injection pump and related parts.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

6
Left Hand View of Engine
1. Oil Filter Head Assembly 4. Oil Filter
(Incorporating the Pressure Relief Valve) 5. Battery
2. Engine Oil (Modine) Cooler 6. Alternator
3. Engine Block Coolant Drain Plug
Removal of Engine / transmission from
the Vehicle
WARNING 5. Remove all fixing bolts and move radiator for-
ward
Before performing any service or maintenance on
the machine ensure the wheels are chocked / 6. Disconnect transmission cooler pipes.
blocked to prevent the machine from moving. 7. Remove radiator, taking care not to damage the
fan or hydraulic oil cooler.
1. Remove all engine panels. 8. Remove Air Cleaner assembly
2. Remove front cast cowling 9. Disconnect all electrical connections
3. Drain engine coolant and remove hoses 10. Disconnect cable and hydraulic pipe clamp
4. Pull main hydraulic cooler over radiator tabs
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

11. Disconnect the heater and Air Conditioning

hoses.
IMPORTANT: If air conditioning is fitted, disconnect 1
at the air conditioning quick release couplings only.
If it is necessary to disassemble the air conditioning
at any other point, it will be necessary to discharge
the system using a suitable reclaim/recharging sta-
tion.
12. Disconnect the fuel tank feed and return pipes
pipes
13. Disconnect the foot throttle cable at the injection
pump.
AP101007
7
14. Remove the cab mat
15. Remove the cab floor access panel
16. Disconnect the electrical connections
– Forward Reverse solenoids (on top of the
transmission)
– Transmission lever at base of lever
– FWD solenoid
17. Disconnect the transmission to lock out valve
pipe
18. Disconnect lock out return pipe and plug the hole
(oil will leak out of transmission)
AP101008
8
19. Remove front drive shaft and remove rear drive
shaft
20. Disconnect the hand brake cable
21. Disconnect the gear lever
22. Pull back hydraulic pumps (leaving all pipes at-
tached). Check that the oil pump drive shaft does
not slide out with the pump
23. Check return from steering motor is on the out-
side of transmission oil level tube.
AP101009
9
24. With the engine supported and using a ‘hoist’ ca-
pable of supporting a total weight of 800 kgs
1760 lbs loosen and remove the Engine and
Transmission mounting bolts
25. Using lifting tool 297392 very carefully raise the
hoist and guide the engine/transmission assem-
bly from the vehicle
10
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Separating Engine From Transmission with

assembly removed from the vehicle
1. Place the engine/transmission assembly on a
suitable splitting stand
11
2. Remove the starter motor assembly
3. Remove the torque convertor attaching bolts ac-
cessed through the starter motor aperture (1)
4. Remove the engine timing tab (2)
12
5. Remove the bell housing bolts
6. Gently slide the transmission with the torque
convertor from the engine 1
Engine Installation
Installation of the engine is the reversal of the
removal procedure, noting the following points: 2
AP10012
13
• Ensure all attaching hardware is tightened to the
correct torque value as detailed in the specifica-
tions.
• Ensure after installation that all fluid levels are
correct prior to start up. Start and run the engine
until correct operating temperature is achieved to
purge air from cooling system. Stop engine,
check for leaks, rectify as required and recheck
fluid levels.
14
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

ENGINE DISASSEMBLY
Cylinder Head, Valves, And Related Parts

(Op. 10 101)
Cylinder head removal

NOTE: The cylinder head can be removed with the
engine installed in the tractor.
Remove or disconnect the following components to
allow removal of the cylinder head:–
• Drain the engine coolant into a clean receptacle.
• Drain any fuel from the filter (3) into a clean re-
ceptacle.
IMPORTANT: Refer to the fuel section relevant to
your machine for correct setting procedures
Example 92hp, or 108hp
• Disconnect/remove the air cleaner, air cleaner

tubes and muffler assembly.
S Disconnect low pressure fuel lines to the filters,
injector leak off tube, Thermostart feed tube, lift
pump and filter(1) and (4), injector to injection 1
pump high pressure tubes, (cap all exposed
openings), and sedimentation/water separator
(2) .
NOTE: 108hp fuel pump shown

4
S Disconnect and remove the rocker cover

ventilation tube.
NOTE: Removal of the radiator will greatly assist

15
water pump removal.
S Remove the engine fan belt guards, the fan belt,

alternator and water pump.
Clean around the injectors and remove the injector/
washer assembly
NOTE: Ensure injectors and washers have been re-
moved prior to placing the cylinder head on to a
bench as they protrude below the head face.
• Remove the turbocharger oil pipes where fitted.
16
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

• Remove the rocker cover and gasket.

• Remove the cylinder head bolts (1) which pass 1
through the rocker shaft supports and remove
the rocker shaft assembly as an assembly. Re-
move the push rods (2), check for concentricity
and place in a numbered rack for re–assembly.
• Remove remaining cylinder head bolts working
inwards from the end of the cylinder head, alter-
nately to the centre of the cylinder head.
• Using a crane carefully lift the cylinder head as- 2
sembly with inlet and exhaust manifold away
from the engine block.
AP101018
17
CYLINDER HEAD DISASSEMBLY (10 101)
1 2 3
Rocker Shaft Disassembly
NOTE: Leave bolts (1), in the rocker shaft supports
during removal as they retain the support on the shaft
(5).
1. Remove the cylinder head bolts (3) and withdraw
the supports (2), springs (1), rockers (4) and
spacers (6).
6 5 4
TA6010010
18
Valve and Spring Assembly Removal
2. Using a valve spring compressor (1) remove the 1
retainer locks (2), springs (3), seals, rotators and
place in a numbered rack.
2
3
TA6010011
19
NOTE: The exhaust valves are fitted with inner (1)
and outer (2) rotators
Inspection and Repair, Cylinder Head
IMPORTANT: Before cleaning the cylinder head in-

spect for signs of discolouration, leaking or cracks,
once cleaned concerns may not be apparent.
20
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

1. Clean the cylinder head, and remove carbon de-

posits from around the valve heads.
2. Cylinder head core plugs if discoloured (rusty), or
leaking will require changing. Before fitting new
plugs remove all old sealer from the cylinder
head. Apply sealant (82995772), refer to ‘Speci-
fications’, to the new plug mating faces, and drive
the new plugs into location, .
21
Core plugs required in the Cylinder Head:–
4 off, In the top of the cylinder head

1 off, in the rear of the cylinder head.
3 off, are mounted in the intake face.
3. Scrape all gasket surfaces clean and wash cylin-
der head in a suitable solvent, also cleaning
valve guide bores.
4. Inspect cylinder head for nicks and burrs on mat-
ing face, Remove using a suitable abrasive and
ensure faces are clean after repair.
5. Using a straight edge, and feeler gauge, check

flatness of cylinder head in all directions does not
exceed,
0.03mm (0.001 in) in any 25.4mm (1 in), or
0.127mm (0.005 in), overall limit.
6. If the cylinder head has been resurfaced, deter-
mine all head bolt faces will seat. By placing the 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8
cylinder head less gasket, on the cylinder block
and installing bolts hand tight.
TA6010012
22
7. Ensure rocker shaft supports are fitted with long
bolts (1). Using a feeler gauge (2), check clear-
ance between underside of bolt heads and cylin-
der head or rocker shaft support.
8. If a 0.25mm (0.010 in) feeler gauge can be in-
serted under the bolt head the bolt has bottomed.
Therefore the cylinder block thread must be in-
creased using a 9/16–13 UNC–2A Thread tap.
Identify the bolt heads and ensure they are rein-
stalled in the bolt holes they were checked in.
23
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Valve Inserts
Counter Bore in Cylinder Head

Insert Oversize Exhaust valve insert Intake valve insert
0.25mm (0.010 in) 44.17–44.20mm (1.739–1.740 in) 50.01–50.04mm (1.969–1.970 in)

0.58mm (0.020 in) 44.42–44.45mm (1.749–1.750 in) 50.27–50.29mm (1.979–1.980 in)
0.76mm (0.030 in) 44.68–44.70mm (1.759–1.760 in) 50.52–50.55mm (1.989–1.990 in)
NOTE: Refacing the valve seat should always be

co–ordinated with refacing of the valve to ensure a
compression tight fit.
1. Examine the valve seat inserts and reface if pit-
ted, renew if loose or damaged.
2. To install a new valve insert, the cylinder head
must be counter bored, as described in the
above chart. The new insert must be chilled in dry
ice prior to installation.
Valve Seat Specifications.

Valve seat angle (1),
Intake =30.0°–30.30° 3
Exhaust =45.0°–45.30° 1
Valve seat width (2),

Intake =1.9–2.4mm (0.078–0.098 in)
Exhaust =1.8–2.3mm (0.072–0.092 in)
Valve Head Face to Cylinder Head Face Depth (3),
Intake =0.86–1.32mm (0.034–0.052 in) 2

Exhaust =1.2–1.6mm (0.047–0.065 in) TA6010013
24
NOTE: Valve inserts of 0.25mm (0.010 in) and
0.5mm (0.020 in) oversize on diameter are some-
times installed during manufacture. Cylinder Heads
with oversize inserts are stamped SO15OS,
SO20OS, on the exhaust manifold side in line with
the valve seat concerned.
3. Check the width of the valve seat inserts, and as
required reface by grinding.
4. Measure the concentricity of valve seats, using
a dial indicator and measure concentricity of seat
to the valve guide bore.
Total Indicator Reading should not exceed
0.051mm (0.002 in).
25
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

5. Use a seat cutter to correct any seat eccentricity,

or clean up of pits and grooves. Ensure after any
rework that seat width is within specified limits.
6. Rotate a new or refaced valve in the seat using
engineering blue, ensure all the blue is trans-
ferred to the valve head protrusion, If any blue re-
mains below or around the seat raise or lower the
seat accordingly, in the following manner.
Lower, the valve seats, by removing material from
the top of seat (1) by using:–
30° grinding wheel for, Exhaust valves and a 15°
grinding wheel for, Intake valves.
TA6010016
26
Raise, the valve seats, by removing material from the
bottom of seat (2) by using:–
60° grinding wheel for, Exhaust valves and a 45°
grinding wheel for, Intake valves.
Valve Guides
1. Using a telescopic gauge (1), and micrometer
(2), measure the valve guide bore clearance, and
ensure it does not exceed,
0.023–0.069mm (0.0009–0.0027 in),
on the intake valve stem,
0.048–0.094mm (0.0019–0.0037 in),
on the exhaust valve stem. TA6010018
27
NOTE: Production cylinder heads may have one or
more machined, oversize valve guide bores, or
valves installed, 0.38mm (0.015 in). Such cylinder
heads have 15 or VO15OS stamped on the cylinder
head exhaust manifold side adjacent to the valve
concerned.
2. Using a suitable reamer, ream out the valve stem
guide, with three reamer and pilot combinations
as follows:–
3. When going from a standard valve stem to an
oversize, always use reamers in sequence.
0.076mm (0.003 in) oversize reamer, and standard
diameter pilot.
0.38mm (0.015 in) oversize reamer, and
0.076mm (0.003 in) oversize pilot.
0.76mm (0.030 in) oversize reamer, and
0.38mm (0.015 in) oversize pilot.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Valve Springs
1. Checked on a flat surface squareness, should
not exceed 1.52mm (0.060 in), between the
square, and spring at the top edge.
Length of valve springs should be checked on both
free length, and loaded length.
Free length = 60.7mm (2.39 in)
Installed length = 47.2–49.6mm (1.86–1.95 in)
28
Loaded length = 48.26mm (1.9 in) using a weight of
28–31 kg (61–69 lb)
Loaded length = 35.69mm (1.4 in) using a weight of
61–69 kg (135–153 lb)
Ensure the valve spring retainer locks are in good
condition, and replace if worn or damaged.
Rocker Shaft Inspection and Re–assembly

1. Inspect rocker arm adjusting screws, and push
rod ends of the rocker arm, including the ball end
of the screws for nicks, damage, or excess wear.
2. Also inspect the inside diameter of the rocker
arm for damage or wear. If any of these charac-
teristics are not to specification replace with new
parts.
3. Check the ends of the push rods for damage or
wear. If not to specification or push rods were
found not to be straight during dismantling install
new rods.
NOTE: Do not attempt to straighten bent push rods,
replace with new.
TA6010023
29
4. Check the rocker shaft for signs of wear or dam-
age, on internal and external diameters respec-
tively. If not to specification replace with new. If
re–used, before re–assembly clean thoroughly
in solvent making sure all oil passages are clear.
5. Position the shaft identification groove, Fig-
ure 31, forwards and upwards. This ensures oil
grooves and holes face downwards.
6. Assemble rocker shaft support with long head
bolts, ensuring springs and spacers are re–as-
sembled and torque to 217 Nm (160 lbf ft).
TA6010024
30
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CYLINDER HEAD RE–ASSEMBLY

2 1
1. Insert the valves into the guide bores from which
they were removed and lap with a suitable paste,
ensure all traces of paste are removed after lap-
ping.
2. Lubricate all components with clean engine oil on
re–assembly. Use a spring compressor to reas-
semble the valves, valve springs, rotators, and
collets, with new umbrella seals.
NOTE: Exhaust valves are fitted with inner (1) and
outer (2) rotators, Figure 32
TA6010014
31
3. Coat all components with clean engine oil prior to
assembly, and insert each push rod into its origi-
nal position, ensuring each ball end is seated in
its cam follower.
CYLINDER HEAD INSTALLATION

Installation of the cylinder head assembly and com-
ponents is the reverse of the removal procedure, ob-
serving the following,
1. Install new cylinder head, intake and exhaust
manifold gaskets.
NOTE: Ensure exhaust manifold gasket is fitted cor-
rectly to suit profile of exhaust ports.
2. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in sequence from
the centre of the head, progressively in three
stages.
Stage 1, 156 Nm (115 lbf ft) 15.6 kgf m
32
NOTE: Bolts to be lubricated prior to assembly, and
should be tightened to torque specification, with the
engine cold.
3. Adjust valve lash setting with each piston in turn
at Top Dead Centre, and rockers free to move, by
adjusting the rocker bolt.
Intake Valve Lash,
0.36–0.46mm (0.014–0.018 in).
Exhaust Valve Lash,
0.43–0.53mm (0.017–0.021 in).
NOTE: Valve lash is to be set, only when the engine
is cold.
33
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

4. Install the injectors with new seat washers, cork

seals, and torque to 23Nm (17 lbf ft).
5. Install the injector lines, and leak off pipes with
new washers, and torque the leak off banjo bolts
to, 10Nm (8 lbf ft).
NOTE: Hold the leak off plastic tubing when tighten-
ing to prevent the pipes pivoting, during torque up.
34
6. Exhaust manifold bolts are to be refitted and
tightened to a torque of, 38Nm (28 lbf ft).
7. Refit intake manifold bolts and tightened to a
torque of, 38Nm (28 lbf ft).
ENGINE FRONT COVER AND TIMING GEAR

REMOVAL (Op. 10 102 & 10 106)
NOTE: Timing cover and gears can only be serviced
after removing the radiator.
1. Remove the fan belt and withdraw the bolt and
washer, from the crankshaft pulley.
2. Using puller, 297102 or 297498, and shaft pro-
tector 297107 or 297261, remove pulley, spacer
and O–ring from the shaft.
TA6010027
35
3. Withdraw the bolts retaining the front cover plate,
and remove the front plate.
IMPORTANT: The crankshaft timing gear must not
be removed. The gear is heat shrunk on to the crank-
shaft and aligned to the crankshaft No1 pin, to within
0.10mm (0.004 in). If the gear is damaged a new
crankshaft is required.
4. Before removing the timing gears, use a dial indi-
cator or feeler gauge, to measure the backlash
between each set of gears.
TA6010029
36
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

5. Rotate the gears and check the backlash, using

a feeler gauge, or dial indicator at four equal
points on the gears. Renew if the backlash ex-
ceeds the following.
Backlash to camshaft gear (1),
0.15–0.46mm (0.006–0.018 in)
Backlash to crankshaft gear (2),
0.15–0.46mm (0.006–0.018 in)
Backlash to fuel injection pump gear(3),
0.10–0.15mm (0.004–0.006 in)
37
CAMSHAFT DRIVE GEAR
1. Pry the camshaft gear using a lever (1), away
from thrust plate. Using a dial indicator or feeler
gauge (2), check the clearance, if outside of
0.076–0.35mm (0.002–0.007 in) limit, fit a new
camshaft thrust plate.
2. Remove the camshaft idler gear retaining bolt,
gear, and adaptor from the block, then remove
the camshaft gear bolt and disassemble.
38
3. Wash the gears using a suitable solvent, and ex-
amine gear teeth for wear, burrs, or scratches.
Minor marks can be removed using a fine abra-
sive, thoroughly clean before re–assembly.
4. Ensure the camshaft idler gear adaptor is free
from obstruction and bushing is not damaged.
Camshaft key and key–way should be checked
for damage and repaired as required.
Installation
1. Position piston no.1 at Top Dead Centre, set us-
ing flywheel timing marks, install the camshaft
gear, and tighten bolt to 69 Nm (51 lbf ft) 7.0
kgf m.
2. Install the camshaft idler gear to the block, align-
ing the timing marks to the crankshaft and cam-
shaft gears and torque to 250 Nm (184lbf ft).
39
IMPORTANT: Refer to the fuel section relevant to
your machine for correct setting procedures
Example 92hp, or 108hp
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

DP 203 FUEL PUMP (108HP SHOWN

ONLY)
NOTE: Emissionised Engine and fuel pump, correct
timing procedure must be followed.
With engine at 28 BTDC compression stroke, set us-
ing flywheel timing marks, assemble the ’LOCKED’
(2) Figure 41 pre–timed fuel injection pump with a
new ’O’ ring,, to the front cover. Torque pump retain-
ing bolts to 24 Nm (18 lbf ft). Install the pump gear
over the pump shaft. Assemble the washer and nut 1
to the shaft, leaving loose at this stage to allow the
gear to rotate freely on the pump shaft.
APB10008
40
NOTE: DO NOT TIGHTEN THE INJECTION PUMP
SHAFT NUT AT THIS STAGE. PROCEED TO
REASSEMBLE THE FRONT COVER.
3. Initially tighten the injection pump gear nut to a
torque of 20 Nm, (14.7 lbf.ft.) while holding the
gear in a counter clockwise position to remove
backlash from gears. ’UNLOCK’ the pump by re-
leasing the locking bolt and installing the spacer
between the pump body and bolt head (1), Fig-
ure 41 . The pump gear retaining nut can now be
fully tightened to a torque value of 81 Nm, (60
lbf.ft.)
41
TIMING COVER CRANKSHAFT SEAL
1. The front oil seal should be replaced, every time
the front plate is removed. Drive out the old seal
using a punch, taking care not to damage the
front plate. Assemble the front too Engine as de-
scribed below and then install the seal
2. Ensure the front cover mating face and cylinder
block face are thoroughly clean before re–as-
sembly. Apply a 2mm (0.078in) wide bead of
sealer 82995774 along the centre of each mating
face. Position a new gasket on the front cover.
42
3. Install the front cover ensuring alignment with
dowel pins and tighten the bolts in order of se-
quence, Figure 42.
5/16 in–18 UNC bolts tighten to 18–24 Nm
(13–18 lbf ft).
3/8 in–16 UNC bolts tighten to 24–34 Nm
(18–25 lbf ft).
4. Clean all parts and install new ’O’ ring.
43
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Seal Installation
1. Lubricate a new seal (1) and push onto the seal
installer, (3). Special tool 297116
2. Press seal into front cover using tool Install the
seal sleeve into the seal.
44
3. Install the Access cover for the injection pump
gear nut. Clean surfaces and apply a 3mm bead
of flexible gasket sealant. Tighten the retaining
bolts to 37 Nm (28 lbf.ft.)
45
OIL PAN REMOVAL (Op. 10 102)
1. Drain engine oil through oil pan plug (1) and into
a suitable clean receptacle and remove oil level
indicator. 2
NOTE: To facilitate the oil pan (2) removal it may be
necessary to first remove the propshaft.
2. Remove oil pan bolts and lower to ground.
46
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Inspection and repair

1. Clean gasket material from sump face, clean
sump in a suitable solvent, inspect sump for
cracks damaged threads or damaged sump
face.
Installation
2. Installation is the reverse of removal but with the
following requirements.
3. Ensure block face is clean and free of gasket ma-
terial. Install a new gasket to the front cover, and
oil pan. Ensure sealer 82995774 is applied to the
front plate, and rear oil seal return joints.
4. Position the oil pan and install a bolt at each cor-
ner finger tight to hold in position, install remain-
ing bolts, and torque from the centre of the pan
to the end to 38 Nm (28 lbf ft) 3.9 kgf m.
CONNECTING RODS, BEARINGS, PISTONS,

AND RINGS, REMOVAL. (Op. 10 105)
NOTE: The connecting rods and pistons can be re-
moved with the engine installed after removal of the
cylinder head and oil pan sump.
1. With cylinder head removed clean off any ridge
from the top of the cylinder bores, with a ridge re-
mover to enable removal of the pistons, this is es-
sential if old pistons are to be re–used as failure
to do so could result in ring land damage.
2. With the piston at the bottom of the stroke re-
move the end cap bolts, cap, and liner. Using the
handle end of a hammer push the piston assem-
bly out through the top of the block, and remove
the bearing liner from the connecting rod.
47
NOTE: Bearing caps and liners must be kept with
their respective connecting rods.
3. Turn the crankshaft again and repeat the proc-
ess for the remaining pistons.
4. Remove piston pin snap rings from each side of
piston and remove pin. Using an expander, re-
move the piston rings.
5. Ensure each piston and rod assembly, remains
matched together for re–assembly into the same
location within the cylinder block.
48
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Inspection and Repair

1. Clean the piston, and connecting rod assembly,
in a suitable solvent and inspect for damage to
ring lands, skirts, or pin bosses.
2. Check connecting rod components for damage,
and place in an alignment fixture to check for dis-
tortion, and ensure that any distortion, is within
specification as follows.
Maximum Twist ‘A’ 0.30mm (0.012 in).
Maximum Bend ‘B’ 0.10mm (0.004 in).
49
3. Check piston pin bushing for damage or wear in
the following manner.
Measure the outside diameter of the piston pin, and
inside diameter of the connecting rod bushing, to the
following,
Piston Pin Outside Diameter
38.095–38.100mm (1.4998–1.500 in).
Turbocharged,
41.270–41.275mm (1.6248–1.625 in).
Connecting Rod Bush Internal Diameter
38.113–38.120mm (1.5005–1.5008 in).
Turbocharged,
41.288–41.295mm (1.6255–1.6258 in)
50
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

CONNECTING ROD BUSH
T1B10029
51
Connecting Rod Bush Installation
1. Washer 8. Connecting Rod Facing up
2. Collar 9. Remover Insert 1
3. Installation Insert 1 10. Remover Insert 2
4. Bush 11. Remover Insert 3
5. Installation Insert 2 12. Connecting Rod Location
6. Pins 13. Washer
7. Fixture 14. Location Plate
4. If not to specification use a suitable tool and

press out the old bush using a fixture as shown.
Press fit a new bush through the fixture using the
installation detail, and into the connecting rod.
After fitting a new bush ensure all sharp edges
and burrs are removed.
IMPORTANT: Ensure the split in the small end bush
is at right angles to centre line of connecting rod.
Connecting rods should only be changed as

matched sets.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

5. Where special tooling is not available for the re-

moval or fitment of the connecting rod bush, a
standard bush can be fitted in the following man-
ner.
6. Place the connecting rod securely in a bench
press. Manufacture from suitable bar stock, a
press tool with the end face ground at an angle,
to suit the connecting rod bush side face. Posi-
tion the tool on the bush, and gently drive the
bush from its position. It is recommended a guide
is manufactured to assist alignment of the bar
stock during this operation.
7. A new bush can then be fitted in a similar manner,
by using a suitable piece of bar stock, with an end
face machined flat to suit the standard parallel
bush. Use a guide as described, and gently drive
in the new bush into the connecting rod.
NOTE: The seam of the new bush must be placed at
90° to the centre line of the connecting rod.
8. After installation, grind the side faces of the new
bush to match the side faces of the connecting
rod. Ensure all sharp edges are removed, and
loose chippings are cleaned from the connecting
rod before re–assembly into the engine.
6010035
52
9. With a new bush fitted drill a hole through the top
of the connecting rod using a 4.6mm (0.187 in)
bit. Drill through the existing oil hole.
10. Use an expanding reamer to obtain correct bush-
ing to piston pin clearance referring to specifica-
tion section. Remove burrs, and chippings, be-
fore refitting.
TA6010036
53
CYLINDER BLOCK OVERHAUL. (Op. 10 105)
1. Cylinder block plugs, and senders, require
changing if leaking or rusty, and must be re-
placed. Clean the old sealant off the block, and
fit new plugs with sealer, figure 46 refers to the
front and left hand side of the cylinder block.
NOTE: New part mating faces, and threads, should
be coated in sealant, refer to ‘‘Specifications”. As-
semble in the following manner.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Front and left hand side of the engine block.

1
Plug (1) Apply sealant 82995772 and drive in to
block.
Plug (2) Apply sealant 82995768 and torque to

8–14 Nm (6–10 lbf ft).
Fitting (3) Apply sealant 82995768 and torque to

24–34 Nm (18–25 lbf ft).

68–95 Nm (50–70 lbf ft).
Fitting (5) Apply sealant 82995768 and torque to 5 6

2
24–34 Nm (18–25 lbf ft).

27–47 Nm (20–35 lbf ft).
4 3
APB10052
54
Rear and right hand side of the engine block.
Plug (1) Apply sealant 82995772 and drive in to

block. 1 1
Oil Jets (2) replace with new if damaged, apply en-

gine oil only on re–assembly ‘‘Do not use sealant”.
Fitting (3) Apply sealant 82995768 and torque to

8–14 Nm (6–10 lbf ft).
Plug (4) Apply sealant 82995768 and torque to 2

54–81 Nm (40–60 lbf ft)
1 3
APB10053
55
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CYLINDER BORE
1. Check the cylinder bore for scuffing or rings
around the ring travel area. Irregularities can be
felt by running a finger over the surface. To check
ovality, wear, or taper, use a telescopic gauge.
Measure lengthwise,
A, to B, and C, to D, and compare dimensions. Vari-
ances between the readings will indicate ‘‘taper”.
Measure crosswise,
C, to D, and compare dimensions lengthwise. A, to
B. Variances will indicate ovality.
TA6010040
56
NOTE: ‘Repair Limit’ refers to the tolerance allowed
after a repair has been performed. The ‘Wear Limit’ C
is the tolerance prior to repair.
Taper of cylinder bore, A
repair limit–0.025mm (0.001 in)
wear limit –0.127mm (0.005 in)
Cylinder bore out of round,
repair limit–0.03mm (0.0015 in)
wear limit–0.127mm (0.005 in)
Cylinder bore diameter, B
111.778–111.841mm (4.4007–4.4032 in).
TA6010041
D
57
2. Where only minor imperfections exist and bores
are to specification, hone the bores prior to in-
stalling new piston rings, provided piston to bore
clearance, is less than 0.250mm (0.011 in)
3. Sleeving of the cylinder bores becomes expedi-
ent when.
– Cylinder bore is beyond specification limits.

– Replacing sleeves already installed in service.
SLEEVING – BORING AND HONING

1. Measure the outside diameter of the sleeve in
several places, and average the dimension.
Counter bore the cylinder block (see step 2) us-
ing the average dimension to obtain a press fit,
between bore and sleeve. Interference of sleeve
to the cylinder bore is to be:
0.025–0.076mm (0.001–0.003 in).
2. Counter bore (1), Figure 57, to a depth of
204.7mm (8.06 in), from the block face, surface
finish of the bore is not to exceed (80 microns).
Leave a step at the bottom of the bore a minimum
of 9.60–10.16mm (0.38–0.400 in), allowing for
run out of chamfers. 58
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

3. Bore through diameter, to the diameter of,

113.13–113.18mm (4.454–4.456in). 0.127
45°
4. Clean the cylinder bores and thoroughly dry. 1.0
5. Grease the sleeve with Ambra GR75MD, and
É ÉÉ
É ÉÉ
press the sleeve home to the lip in the bore. The 1.5
É ÉÉ
top of the sleeve should protrude through the top
of the block, 0.127–1.0mm (0.005–0.040in).
É ÉÉ
210.8
6. Bore the sleeve to,
111.7–111.76mm (4.3985–4.400in).
É 1
ÉÉ
É ÉÉ
7. Skim the block face, and top of sleeves, to 215 204.7
É ÉÉ
achieve the specified flatness of,
0.08mm (0.003 in) in any 6 in (152mm)
É ÉÉ
0.001 in (0.03mm) in any 1 in (25.4mm). 9.6
É ÉÉ
10.16
A chamfer in the internal diameter at the top of
É ÉÉ
the sleeve to 45°x0.020 in (0.5mm) should be
maintained, to prevent piston damage on re–as-
sembly. 113.13–113.18
APB10057
59
8. Break the sharp edge at the bottom of the sleeve
prior to honing.
9. Hone the cylinder bore to give the correct cylin-
der to bore clearance.
NOTE: Surface finish to be an average of 20 to 30
Microns, cross hatched at 355–555.
Maximum Taper,
0.025mm (0.001in) through to bottom of the bore.
Maximum Ovality,
0.038mm (0.0015in) through to bottom of the bore.
Re–Assembly
NOTE: Pistons that are replaced must be of the
same type that were removed and have the same
identification letters and numbers, as embossed on
the underside of the old piston.
1. Upon re–assembly with the piston at Top Dead
Centre, ensure the piston to block height is cor-
rect using a dial indicator.
0.28–0.58mm (0.011–0.023 in)
TA6010043
Turbocharged,
60
0–0.3mm (00.00–0.012 in)
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2. Check the piston to bore clearance in the follow-

ing manner:–Measure the cylinder bore diameter
from the top of the block to point
‘‘A’’, 82.6mm (3.25 in.)
Measure the diameter of the piston at point:– A

‘‘B’’, 97.28mm (3.83 in) for 5.0 in
Naturally Aspirated engine

‘‘B’’, 97.28mm (3.83 in) for 5.0 in Turbocharged en- B
gine
TA6010044
61
Subtract piston diameter from the bore diameter and
the resultant figure for a new, unrun engine should
be:–
0.140–0.171 mm (0.0055–0.0067 in )
Naturally Aspirated
0.166–0.196 mm (0.0064–0.0077 in)
Turbocharged engines.
After an engine has run and settled down the maxi-
mum bore to piston clearance allowed is 0.250mm
(0.011in)
NOTE: Pistons are only available as standard. New
pistons should always be fitted if the clearance ex-
ceeds specification.
If clearance is ‘‘greater” try a similar new piston, if
limit is still exceeded it will be necessary to rebore
and re–sleeve.
If the clearance is ‘‘less” hone bore to obtain desired
clearance.
IMPORTANT: Prior to re–assembly ensure the letter
or grade mark on the piston is aligned to the pip on
the connecting rod and installed facing to the front of
the engine.
62
3. Lubricate all of the components with engine oil
and assemble the connecting rod/piston.
4. Check the piston ring gap width, using a feeler
gauge, in a vertical position at the top, middle,
and bottom of the bore to:–
Top compression ring.

0.38–0.84mm (0.015–0.033 in),
2nd compression ring.
0.66–1.12mm (0.026–0.044 in),
Oil control ring.
0.38–0.84mm (0.015–0.033 in),
TA6010046
63
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

5. Using a new piston ring, check with a feeler

gauge, the gap between the ring and groove.
Top compression ring
0.103–0.153mm (0.0041–0.0060 in)
2nd compression ring (Naturally Aspirated)

0.055–0.105mm (0.0022–0.0042 in)
2nd compression ring (Turbocharged)

0.075–0.125mm (0.0030–0.0049 in)
Oil control ring. 6010048

0.040–0.090mm (0.0016–0.0035 in)
64
6. Ensure the correct expander is used to remove
or install rings.
7. Install new piston rings but note the following,
6010047
65
8. Install the top and second compression rings
with the word top towards the top of the piston.
A
A = Turbocharged
B = Naturally Aspirated
NOTE: Before installing new pistons and rings into
a used cylinder bore , remove the high polish from
the cylinder walls by honing as previously de-
scribed.
TA6010049A
66
Ensure the ring gaps are staggered equally around
the piston circumference. B
TA6010049B
67
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Piston Assembly Installation, Into Block

1. Select the correct bearing liners as in the follow-
ing crankshaft section, and install in the rod and
cap, ensure the liner tang locates in the slots of
the rod and cap.
2. Turn the crankshaft to position No 1 crankpin at
the bottom of the stroke, and lubricate all parts
with new engine oil. Using a ring compressor,
and a soft drive, slide pistons into bores, ensur-
ing grade letter on pistons, is towards the front of
the engine.
6010050
68
NOTE: Replaceable bearing liners are installed in
production, to ensure correct crankshaft journal to
bearing clearance is maintained in service. The main
bearings can be overhauled with the engine in the
tractor. The crankshaft can only be serviced after re-
moval from the tractor.
69
3. Ensure the connecting rod bearing liner, seats on
the crankpin with the bearing cap fitted, to the
connecting rod as a matched assembly. It is rec-
ommended that new bolts are fitted and lubri-
cated with oil and tightened to a torque value of
149Nm (110 lbf ft).
4. Using feeler gauges, check the side clearance of
each connecting rod to crankshaft and continue
for remaining assemblies.
0.13–0.33mm (0.005–0.013 in)
70
BALANCER / VIBRATION DAMPER
(OP NO 10 110)
Removal
1. Remove the oil pan to expose the balancer, and
using a dial indicator gauge, check backlash be-
tween crankshaft gear, and balancer drive gear.
Position the dial plunger to the face of one of the
drive gear teeth, then rock the gear to measure
backlash. Readings should be taken at 90° inter-
vals around the drive gear, to
0.05–0.30mm (0.002–0.012 in). If the specifica-
tion is exceeded, install new balancer gears.
71
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

72
Balancer Assembly
1. Roll Pins 4. Balancer Gears
2. Balancer Housing 5. Washers
3. Washers 6. Balancer Gear Shafts
Disassembly
1. Extract the roll pins (1), securing the shafts to the
housing and disassemble the balancer.
1. Measure the outside diameter of shafts (6) and
the inside diameter of the gear bushings (4), and
establish if clearance is to specification
0.0762–0.114mm (0.0030–0.0045 in). If ex-
ceeded replace shaft and or gear assembly.
Re–Assembly
1. Position balancer gears and thrust washers in
the housing, with timing marks aligned, and fac-
ing the roll pin side of the balancer. Install shafts
from the opposite side and secure with roll pins.
2. Using a feeler gauge measure end float, of as-

sembled gears is to the specification of,
0.20–0.56mm (0.008–0.022 in).
3. Position a dial indicator gauge to the tooth of one
gear, and hold the other firmly. Rocking the free
gear measure backlash at 90° intervals, around
the gears to, 0.05–0.20mm (0.002–0.008 in).
4. Examine shafts and balancer gear teeth for wear 73
and damage, and replace as necessary. Ensure
lubrication holes in the shafts are free from ob-
struction upon reassembly.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Installation
1
1. Clean all the mating surfaces, and install a new
seal around the lubrication passage.
2. Rotate crankshaft until timing mark on crank-
shaft gear aligns with timing mark on balancer
drive gear, position balancer on dowels install the
bolts and torque to 108–120 Nm (80–90 lbf ft)
3. Recheck the gear backlash between crankshaft
and balancer gear, as previously described and
replace the oil pan.
APB10072
74
MAIN BEARING REMOVAL
1. Remove oil pan, and balancer, to gain access to
the crankshaft. Remove the main bearing caps,
and install one set at a time.
1. Thoroughly clean bearing liners, journals, caps,
and inspect for wear, scores, or damage replace
as required.
TA6010033
75
Installation
2. Coat all parts in new engine oil prior to assembly.
Position bearing cap with locking tang, towards
camshaft side of engine and fit the bolts,
190–203Nm (140–150 lbf ft) 19.3–20.1 kgm
3. If fitting a new thrust bearing liner it must be
aligned as in the following crankshaft chapter.
FLYWHEEL REMOVAL
NOTE: To remove the flywheel, the engine requires
to be split from the transmission housing refer to
”Separating the Unit’’.
1. To gain access to the flywheel separate the en-
gine to transmission.
NOTE: Prior to removal and using a dial indicator, ro-
tate the flywheel and measure to specification
0.127mm (0.005 in) Total Indicator Reading. If not to
specification check crankshaft to flywheel seating.
Inspection and Repair TA6010053

Ring Gear
76
1. Inspect the flywheel ring gear, and if damaged
renew in the following manner,
Cut old ring gear free from the flywheel.
Clean the mating surfaces of the new ring gear, and
flywheel.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

2. Use temperature indicating crayons to mark the

side face of the ring gear in six equal places,
mark with a 204°C (400°F) crayon at a point
13mm (0.5 in) below the root of the teeth, and
mark with a 212°C ( 450°) crayon at a point just
below root of the teeth.
3. Use an oxy–acetylene torch with a tip size of No
2 maximum, and direct the flame against the in-
ternal face of the gear.
4. Stop applying heat when the 204°C (400°F)
crayon mark melts but before the 212°C (450°F)
crayon mark melts.
77
5. Quickly place the hot gear on the flywheel, with
flat face against the shoulder on the flywheel.
The gear to flywheel runout should be checked
using a dial indicator and should not exceed a To-
tal Indicator Reading of 0.63mm (0.025 in).
Flywheel Surface
1. In the event of flywheel surface damage due to
excessive clutch wear the surface may be
skimmed. A maximum of 3 mm (0.118 in) is to be
removed from the face of the flywheel.
Installation
1. Clean the crankshaft rear flange and mating sur-
APB10076
face of the flywheel, install the flywheel, and
torque the bolts to,197N m (145 lbf ft) 20 kgf m. 78
REAR COVER PLATE REMOVAL (Op. 10 102)
To gain access to the engine oil pump, camshaft 1

gear, or end of crankshaft remove the oil pan as pre-
viously described along with the rear cover, in the fol-
lowing manner.
1. With rear of engine exposed loosen and remove
the 12 attaching bolts, and gently pry off cover
plate.
2. Clean off all sealer, remove crankshaft oil seal,
and check for damage or distortion around the
sealing faces.
P396–E–54
79
Installation
1. Ensure rear of block face is clean and install a
new gasket. With the plate in the recess install
and leave the bolts loose.
2. Apply a liberal coating of new engine oil on a new 1
oil seal and position the rear seal over the end of
the crankshaft. Locate tool, No 297194, on the
end of the crankshaft using the three attaching
bolts. Tighten evenly, and squarely, until the seal
is fully seated.
TA6010054
80
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

As an alternative the rear crankshaft oil seal can be

installed using the following installation tool.
3. Apply a liberal coating of clean engine oil to the
rear seal retainer, seal, and journal. A new seal
should be mounted on the crankshaft, then bolt
to crankshaft end and install the new seal
squarely.
4. Secure centre stock of tool to crankshaft flange
with two screws. Assemble cylinder end plate to
centre stock and secure with nut and washer.
1
Tighten the nut until outer diameter of tool abuts
retainer. Tool must not be over tightened as
stress and distortion could be imposed on the re-
tainer.
5. Remove the tool after assembly and check the
crankshaft seal run out as shown in Figure 83.
NOTE: The first seal replacement should be pushed
into retainer with plain end of tool and subsequent
seals with stepped end of tool which will reposition
seal 1.52mm (0.060 in) further in. TA6010055
81
6. Tighten the twelve bolts, in sequence (1) to:
Step 1: Initial Torque 11–14 Nm (8–10 lbf ft)

Step 2: Final Torque 16–23 Nm (12–17 lbf ft)
11 9
2 7
5
4 3
6
8 1
10 12
TA6010128
82
7. With new crankshaft seal installed, place a dial
indicator, on the end of the crankshaft and en-
sure seal runout is within 0.51mm (0.020 in) Full
Indicator Movement.
TA6010056
83
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

OIL PUMP REMOVAL (10 304)

NOTE: The oil pump can only be removed with the
engine split from the transmission, and the flywheel, 1
back plate, engine oil pan, and oil pump tube re-
moved.
1. Prior to pump removal check pump gear to cam- 1
shaft gear backlash, does not ex-
ceed, 0.40–0.56mm (0.016–0.022 in).
TA6010057
84
2. Loosen and remove the camshaft gear, to ex-
pose the oil pump, detach the 3 pump mounting
bolts, and withdraw the pump from the block.
TA6010058
85
Installation
1. Clean and coat parts in new engine oil.
2. Fit a new O–Ring to the pump output tube and
into suction port. lubricate and insert the pump
into the block tightening the bolts, to,
23.0–28.4N m (17–21lbf ft) 2.3–2.9kgfm
TA6010059
86
3. Insert tube/screen assembly into pump through
bottom of engine. Fitting a new gasket, and
torque the attaching bolts to,
27–34N m (20–25 lbf ft) 2.7–3.4 kgf m.
TA6010062
87
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Oil Filter Support Assembly

Removal
1. Unscrew and discard the old filter (1). Loosen the
attaching bolts and oil connections and remove
the filter support assembly from the block. Dis-
carding the O–Rings.
2. Clean assembly in a suitable solvent and ensure
all ports are free of dirt.
Installation
1. Lubricate the pressure relief valve and spring 1
and insert into housing, ensuring free movement.
TA6010063
Fit a new ‘O’–Ring to the plug and torque to,
88
55N m (42 lbf ft ).
NOTE: On some models including the turbocharged
version the pressure relief valve ‘‘end plug’’ is re-
placed by an oil return tube from the engine block.
Where this pipe is fitted a plug is used to blank the oil
return port to the engine block.
2. Fit tube to the connector and torque to 27Nm
(20 lbf ft).
2 1
3. Refit the oil filter head to the engine block with
new O–rings and plug where required as above
and torque the bolts to, 34–47 Nm (26–35 lbf ft)
APB10087
89
CRANKSHAFT REMOVAL (Op. 10 103)
1. Remove the engine from the tractor and place on
an engine stand.
2. Remove the flywheel, rear cover plate, crank-
shaft pulley and engine front cover.
NOTE: If crankshaft is removed with cylinder head
in position ensure all timing marks are realigned prior
to re–assembly. This action will prevent possible in-
terference between valves and pistons during reas-
sembly.
3. Remove the oil pan and oil pump.
4. Remove the connecting rod caps, main bearing TI
APB10088
caps and liners, and identify to facilitate re–as-
90
sembly.
5. Carefully remove crankshaft from cylinder block.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2


1. If crankshaft timing gear teeth are worn or dam-
aged replace as necessary as described.
2. Wash the crankshaft and drilled passages in a
suitable solvent. Dress minor imperfections us-
ing an oil stone but for severely marked journals,
machine to the next size to suit available service B
bearings. A D
C
3. Measure diameter of each journal in four places
to determine out–of–round, taper, or wear.
Measuring, A, compared with B, indicates verti-
cal taper.
TA6010067
Measuring, C, compared with D, indicates hori-
zontal taper. 91
Measuring, A and B, compared with C and D, in-
dicates journal out–of–round.
4. If the journal exceeds specified limits refer to
‘‘specifications” and refinish journal to the next
service bearing available.
5. Examine the rear oil seal journal for score marks,
remove minor imperfections with fine emery
cloth, and if severely damaged renew the crank-
shaft.
With the crankshaft removed check the oil lubrication
jets situated in the block journals are clear and free
of contaminates.
If replacing the oil jets gently tap out the old ones and
replace with new.
396–E–26 TI
92
CRANKSHAFT RE–ASSEMBLY
NOTE: Normally main bearing journals wear evenly
and will not be out–of–round, but if a liner which is to
specification is fitted to an out–of round journal, en-
sure liner suits maximum diameter of journal
1. If these combinations of liners do not produce
specified clearance refinish crankshaft and fit
suitable service bearings.
IMPORTANT: Engines may be assembled with lin-
ers of different material, but liners of the same mate-
rial must be used on the same journal.
396–E–9 TI
93
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2. Position the bearing liners and caps in the block

and coat with oil. If the crankshaft has been refin-
ished, fit the correct service bearing liners.
3. Ensure the bearing surfaces are clean and bear-
ing liner tangs, align with slots in the block and
cap.
4. Align the timing mark on the crankshaft gear, with
that of the camshaft idler gear and install the
crankshaft. Install a thrust bearing cap with
flange type bearing liner first, installing remaining
bearing caps to their original location.
5. Tighten all bearing caps (except thrust bearing
cap, leave finger tight) to a torque of 197 Nm
(145 lbf ft) 19.5 kgf m.
6. Pry the crankshaft forward against thrust surface
of bearing, hold crankshaft forward and pry bear-
ing cap rearwards taking care not to pry against
flange of bearing liner. This will align thrust sur-
faces of both halves of bearing, hold forward 6010069
pressure on crankshaft and tighten bearing cap 94
bolts to a torque of 197 Nm
(145 lbf ft) 19.5 kgf m.
NOTE: Do not pre–install seal into retainer. To en-
sure seal concentricity, it must be assembled with
rear plate and installation tool when fitted to crank-
shaft.
7. Check crankshaft end play with a dial indicator
gauge, pry crankshaft towards front of engine
and set dial indicator to zero. Pry crankshaft to-
wards rear of engine and note reading on dial if
end play exceeds 0.10–0.36mm
(0.004–0.014 in) fit a new thrust bearing liner.
8. If the end play is less than specification check
thrust bearing for burrs, scratches, or dirt, and
re–align thrust bearing as in operation12.
9. Install rear crankshaft oil seal as previously de-
scribed in back plate removal.
TA6010070
95
CAMSHAFT REMOVAL (Op. 10 106)
NOTE: The camshaft bearings and tappets can only
be serviced with engine removed from the tractor. 1
1. Remove the engine front cover, and cylinder
head.
2. Check the camshaft end play, see timing gears
section, and remove gear, or remove the thrust
plate bolts for removal of gear and camshaft as
an assembly.
3. After removal of the flywheel, and rear cover, re-
move the camshaft oil pump drive gear.
4. Invert the engine on the stand, if camshaft bear-
ings are to be replaced, and remove the oil pan. APB10094
5. Carefully withdraw the camshaft from the rear of
96
engine.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

6. Lift out the tappets and place in a numbered rack

for reassembly.
396–E–23 TI
97
1. Inspect the camshaft journals, lobes, for dam-
age, pitting, or heat discolouration. If any of these
conditions exist install a new camshaft.
2. Inspect the oil pump drive gear on camshaft for
broken or worn teeth, and mating gear on oil
pump. If any wear or damage is apparent fit new
gears.
3. Check each tappet for wear or damage and
check diameters, if not to specification renew,
25.15–25.17mm (0.9900–0.9910 in).
4. Measure the diameter and out–of–round condi-
tion of bearing journals, if exceeded fit a new
camshaft,
60.693–60.719mm (2.389–2.390 in).
CAMSHAFT BEARINGS
1. Inspect the camshaft bearings for wear or dam-
age. Measure the clearance between the internal
diameter of bearing and outside diameter of re-
spective journal, 0.025–0.076mm
(0.001–0.003 in).
2. If specification is exceeded install new bearings
using, Remover/Replacer tool.
3. To remove, Position tool against bearing to be re-
moved and attach handle, driving bearing from
bore.
4. To install, Align oil holes of new bearing with TA6010071
holes in block, and drive bearing into bore using
tools as described. 98
NOTE: A positive alignment check can only be made
with crankshaft removed when an 4.6mm (0.018 in)
rod can be passed down the oil passage from the
crankshaft main bearing. Liner is correctly positioned
when end of rod passes through oil hole in the liner.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Installation TEST CONCLUSION

1. Apply petroleum jelly to each tappet foot, and To determine whether the rings or the valves are at
coat tappet body with oil. Install tappets in bores fault, squirt the equivalent of a tablespoon of heavy
from which they were removed. oil into the combustion chamber. Crank the engine to
2. Oil camshaft journals and apply petroleum jelly to distribute the oil and repeat the compression test.
the cam lobes, and install camshaft into engine. The oil will temporarily seal any leakage past the
3. Install new spacer and keyway on end of cam- rings. If approximately the same reading is obtained,
shaft. the rings are satisfactory, but the valves are leaking.
4. Install a new thrust plate prior and torque If compression has increased over the original read-
41–54 Nm (30–40 lbf ft). ing, there is leakage past the rings.
5. Install camshaft gear, and align the camshaft During a compression test, if the pressure fails to
gear timing mark and torque bolt to 55–77 Nm climb steadily and remains the same during the first
(43–58 lbf ft), and recheck end play. two successive strokes, but climbs higher on the
succeeding strokes, or fails to climb during the entire
6. Apply sealant 82995782 to the sealing flange of
test, suspect a sticking valve.
the front cover plate on re–assembly.
ENGINE COMPRESSION TEST ( Op. 10 001)
TEST PROCEDURE
1. Be sure battery performance meets specifica-
tions.
2. Warm up the engine by operating for a minimum
of half an hour at 1200 rev / min
3. Stop the engine and remove the injector and seat
washer from no1 cylinder.
4. Clean the injector bore and crank the engine to
blow out any loose carbon particles.
5. Install a proprietary engine compression test
gauge into the injector bore, using a new seat
washer and the injector mounting bolts.
6. Connect the gauge and hose to the adapter.
7. Crank the engine at 200 rev/min with the engine
stop cable pulled out where fitted, or the electric
fuel shut off wire disconnected to prevent engine
start up.
8. Observe the gauge reading, and repeat the com-
pression test, steps 5–7 for each cylinder.
9. All cylinder compressions should be uniformly
within 1.7 bar (25 psi) of each other.
10. A reading of more than the 1.7 bar (25 psi) below
the other cylinders indicates leakage at the cylin-
der head gasket, piston rings or valves.
11. A reading of more than 1.7 bar (25 psi) above the
other cylinders indicates excessive carbon de-
posits on the piston and cylinder head.
12. A low even compression in two adjacent cylin-
ders indicates a cylinder head gasket leak.
Check this item before condemning the rings or
valves.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 10 – FUELING 92 TO 108HP – CHAPTER 2 1
Chapter 2– Fuel General
CONTENT
10 200 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Tightening Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Overhaul ................................................................... 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel Diesel
Fuel Tank capacity 106 Litres (28 US. gals)
Injection Pump Type Lucas C.A.V Rotary
DP 203 Series, integral speed governor and advance device
Lift Pump Electric
Turbocharger type: Garrett T250
LUCAS C.A.V. pump

Type DP 203 Distributor type, integral speed governor and advance device
Pump rotation Clockwise
Firing order 1342
Injection pump timing 3° Before Top Dead Centre (Dynamic)
LUCAS C.A.V.Injectors
Adjustment Variable
Quantity, nozzle holes 5 Hole
Pressure Setting (all) 292–300 bar (4235 – 4350 psi)
Injector change interval 1200 hours
Fuel Filter Single Disposable Element
Fuel Filter Change Interval 600 Hours
Fuel Sedimentor Single and Serviceable
Maximum No-Load Speed 2195–2245 Rev/min
Idle Speed 700–800 Rev/min
Rated Speed 2070 Rev/min
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 10 – FUELING 92 TO 108HP – CHAPTER 2
TORQUE VALUES
DESCRIPTION N·m ft. lbs. kgf/m
Throttle Cable Locknuts 50 37 5.1
Throttle Lever Stop Bolt Locknut 10 7 1.0
Fuel Tank Strap Retaining Nut 2.5 1.8 0.25
Fuel Tank Strap Locknut 25 18 2.5
Fuel Tank Shutoff Valve 14 10 1.4
Fuel Tank Leak-Off Elbow 14 10 1.4
Leak-Off Pipe to Elbow 24 18 2.4
Thermostart Plug 37 27 3.8
Thermostart Pipe Union 10 7 1.0
Leak-Off Pipe to Injector Line 24 18 2.4
Fuel Tank Sender Retaining Screws 2.5 1.8 0.25
Fuel Filter Element Retaining Bolt 10 7 1.0
Fuel Filter Retaining Bolts 30 22 3.1
Exhaust Muffler Retaining Clamp 35 26 3.6
Air Cleaner Retaining Bolts 55 40 5.6
Air Cleaner Hose Clamps 2.5 1.8 0.25
Air Cleaner Restriction Indicator Switch 12 9 1.2
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1
Right Hand View of Engine
1. Thermostat 8. Fuel Filter with Electric Lift Pump
2. Coolant Radiator 9. Cold Start Electro Valve
3. Air Conditioning Condenser (when fitted) 10. Air Cleaner
4. Water Pump 11. Coolant Recovery Tank
5. Transmission OIl Cooler 12. Muffler
6. Battery 13. Fuel Sedimenter/Separator
7. Engine Oil Level Dipstick
FUEL SYSTEM (OP NO 10 200) The transfer pump delivers fuel to the injection pump
The diesel fuel system consists of a fuel tank, mech- to supply fuel at high pressure to each injector and
anical or electric lift pump, fuel filter/sediment separ- also provides extra fuel which lubricates and cools
ator, D.P. 200 series fuel injection pump, fuel injec- the injection pump. This extra fuel is recirculated via
tors and inter-connecting fuel lines. A dry type air a fitting on the fuel injection pump governor control
cleaner removes dirt and contaminants from the air housing to the fuel tank by means of the injector leak-
intake. off line.
On all models the excess fuel that leaks past the
DP203 needle valve of the injectors is directed back into the
fuel tank at the filler neck by means of the injection
The fuel is drawn from the fuel tank, through the sedi-
leak-off line.
ment separator and fuel filter by the electric lift pump,
and then fed into the injector pump.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FUEL TANK (OP NO 10 216)

All models have a ”Plastic” fuel tank located on the
left of the vehicle below the driver platform. The tank
is vented through the breather and has a lockable fill-
er cap (1).
2
LIFT PUMP ELECTRIC (OP NO 10 210)
Mounted on the right hand side of the engine above
the fuel filter is an electrical lift pump (1). The pump
draws fuel through the sediment separator (2) and
the fuel filter (4). The fuel is then pressurised and fed
into the fuel injection pump.
3
SEDIMENT SEPARATOR (OP NO 10 206)
Positioned on the right hand side of the engine is the
fuel sediment separator. The assembly consists of a
cast head which is bolted to the engine, and a glass
sediment separator.
The fuel is drawn into the sediment separator side of
the head to be directed down and around the edges
of the separator cone, the larger particles of dirt and
water (which are heavier than fuel oil) are separated
out and sink to the collecting bowl. The cleaned fuel
is then drawn into the fuel filter.
4
FUEL FILTER (OP NO 10 206)
The filter (3) positioned on the right hand side of the
engine behind the fuel pump directs the fuel through
the filter head (2) to be directed down through the fil-
ter paper (3) into the base chamber. The filtered fuel
then flows up the center tube of the element to the
filter head outlet and flows onto the injection pump.
The drain plug (4) permits contaminated fuel to be
drained from the filter.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

THERMOSTART (OP NO 10 210)

To aid engine starting in cold weather conditions, a
thermostart system incorporating an integral reser-
voir system is available on all models.
The thermostart system is made up of a plug assem-
bly screwed into the intake manifold, a fuel line con-
nected to the injector leak-off tube and an electrical
circuit, connected to the ignition switch.
The plug assembly consists of a check valve and
electrically heated element.
6
Fuel is gravity fed to the plug assembly and, when
operating the key start/stop switch and the thermos-
tart switch, the heater and “igniter” coils are both en-
ergized. The “heater” coil opens a check valve which
allows diesel fuel to flow through the thermostart.
The fuel is ignited by the “igniter” coil in the manifold,
heating the intake manifold air prior to it entering the
combustion chamber.
When the thermostart switch is released to the off po-
sition, the electrical current is disconnected from the
thermostart and the check valve closes.
FUEL PUMP (OP NO 10 210)
The fuel injection pump fitted to these engines is the
Lucas/CAV DP203. The fuel pump which is fed by an
electric lift pump draws fuel into itself via the transfer
pump and supplies fuel at high pressure to the fuel
injectors.
7
INJECTORS
The fuel injectors mounted in the cylinder head sup-
ply fuel in the form of a spray pattern into the cylinder
bores. The controlled amounts of fuel ensure opti-
mum engine performance throughout the operating
range.Emissionised and non emissionised injectors
have different characteristics and are not inter-
changeable.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FAULT FINDING
DIESEL ENGINES
IMPORTANT: Whenever making a repair, the reason for the cause of the problem must be investigated and cor-
rected to avoid repeat failures.
The following tables list problems and their possible causes with recommended corrective action.
GENERAL
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION
Fuel not reaching injection pump 1. Restricted fuel filters 1. Check and flush the fuel
filters clean.
2. Air in system 2. Bleed the fuel filters.
3. Fuel leakage 3. Check the fuel lines and
connectors for damage.
Fuel reaching nozzles but engine 1. Low cranking speed 1. Check the cranking speed
will not start
2. Incorrect throttle 2. Check the throttle control
adjustment rod travel
3. Incorrect pump timing 3. Check the pump timing
4. Fuel leakage 4. Check the fuel lines and
connectors for leakage
5. Faulty injectors 5. See injector
troubleshooting
6. Low compression 6. Check the engine
compression
Engine hard to start 1. Low cranking speed 1. Check the cranking speed
3. Restricted fuel filters 3. Replace filters
4. Contaminated fuel 4. Check for water in the fuel
compression
6. Air in system 6. Check for air leaks on the
suction side of the system
Engine starts and stops 1. Fuel starvation 1. Check and flush clean
restricted fuel lines or fuel
filters
3. Restricted air intake 3. Check for restrictions in the
air intake
4. Engine overheating 4. Check cooling system
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Erratic engine operation (surge, 1. Fuel leakage 1. Check the injector lines and
misfiring, poor governor connectors for leakage
regulation)
2. Fuel starvation 2. Check and flush clean
restricted fuel lines or
filters
5. Air in system 5. Bleed the fuel system
6. Faulty or sticking injector 6. See injector
nozzles troubleshooting
7. Incorrect engine timing 7. Check for faulty engine
valves
Engine emits black smoke 1. Restricted air intake 1. Check for restricted air
intake
2. Engine overheating 2. Check cooling system
3. Incorrect timing 3. Check the pump timing
4. Faulty injectors 4. See injector
troubleshooting
compression
6. Incorrect engine timing 6. Check the engine valves
Engine does not develop full 1. Incorrect throttle 1. Check for insufficient
power or speed adjustment throttle control movement
2. Incorrect maximum no-load 2. Check maximum no-load
speed speed adjustment
3. Fuel starvation 3. Check and flush clean
restricted fuel lines and
filters
5. Incorrect timing 5. Check pump timing
6. Low compression 6. Check engine compression
7. Incorrect engine timing 7. Check for improper valve
adjustment or faulty valves
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

ADJUSTMENTS FUEL INJECTION PUMP

(OP NO 210)
PRIMING THE FUEL SYSTEM
NOTE: The fuel system should be primed whenever

fuel system components are removed or discon-
nected in order to expel any air in the system.
1. Make sure there is sufficient fuel in the tank and
all connections are tight.
2. Operate key start switch to activate the electric
fuel pump. An audible difference is detectable
when the system is primed, and may take up to
5 minutes.
NOTE: The bleed screw in the filter head is on the in-
take side and must be kept closed during priming
Attempt to start the engine. If it does not start, con-
tinue through Step 4.
10
3. With the throttle in the maximum no-load speed
position, operate the starting motor to crank the
engine. The fuel injection pump is self-venting
and does not require bleeding.
IMPORTANT: Do not crank the starting motor con-

tinuously for more than 60 seconds as doing so may
cause starting motor failure.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

4. If the engine fails to start after 60 seconds, repeat

the priming procedure outlined above.
5. Run the engine and check for leaks.
NOTE: Turbocharged engines only - The high oper-
ating speed of the turbocharger makes it essential
that adequate lubrication is assured when the engine
is started. Therefore, idle the engine at 1000 RPM for
one minute before driving the tractor.
IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT

1. With the engine running and at normal tempera-
ture, disconnect the throttle cable at the injection
pump.
2. Loosen the locknut and adjust the idle speed stop
screw (1) until the specified idle speed of 1
700–800 RPM is obtained. Tighten the locknut
and reconnect the throttle cable.
3. Operate the throttle lever several times and
check that the idle speed is correct. If excessive
free play is felt in either the foot or hand throttle
after adjustment, proceed to “Throttle Linkage
Adjustments” in this section.
11
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

THROTTLE LINKAGE ADJUSTMENTS

(OP NO 10 220)
NOTE: If the throttle cables have been removed from
the tractor, it is necessary to install and adjust the
hand throttle cable prior to the installation of the foot
throttle cable. The following procedures assume that
the fuel injection pump idle and maximum no-load
speeds are correctly adjusted.
1. Loosen the locknut at the ball stud connector (1),
on the throttle cable at the fuel injection pump.
Retract the retaining sleeve and disconnect the
cable from the pump throttle lever. 3
2. Remove the access cover below the hand 4
throttle and verify the the cable locknut (2) is tight
against the throttle lever assembly.
3. Set the hand throttle lever in the idle position by
placing against the rubber boot at the rear of the
lever slot (3).
4. Adjust the ball stud connector at the pump end of
the throttle cable so that it fits on the ball stud of 1
the pump throttle lever when the lever is in low 2
idle position. Tighten the locknut against the re-
taining sleeve at the pump end.
5. Remove the rubber boot from the lever slot.
Move the hand throttle lever to the maximum
speed position. Check that the lever stops as the
pump throttle lever touches the maximum speed
stop screw. Adjust the hand lever stop as re-
quired. Replace the rubber boot.
6. Check the adjustment of the foot throttle by
pressing the pedal against the stop bolt (4). Ad-
justment is correct when the pedal is firmly
against the stop bolt and the pump throttle lever
gently touches the maximum speed stop screw.
Adjust the pedal stop bolt as required.
12
13
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

FUEL TANK REMOVAL, (Op No 10 216)

NOTE: Prior to removing the fuel tank from the trac-
tor, first determine the quantity of fuel left in the tank.
It will be necessary to drain the tank of fuel.
1. Disconnect the battery, earth lead first, or at the

isolator switch where fitted.
14
2. With the tank drained of fuel disconnect the fuel
line to the lift pump. Plug the exposed pipes to
prevent contamination.
3. Loosen and remove the tank to frame attaching
bolts and lower the tank to the ground
15
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FUEL FILTER/SEDIMENT SEPARATOR

(OP NO 10 206)
Removal
1. Drain the filter and sediment separator of fuel, by
removing the bowl drain screw (3).
2. Disconnect and remove the fuel lines from the
head of the filter/sediment separator assembly
and plug the exposed openings to prevent con-
tamination.
3. Remove the retaining bolts, then remove the as-
sembly from the tractor.
16
Disassembly
1. Remove the center retaining bolts and separate
the filter components.
2. Using clean fuel, wash out the filter bowl and the
glass bowl on the sediment separator.
Reassembly
Reassembly of the fuel filter/sediment separator fol-
lows the disassembly procedure in reverse. On reas-
sembly, observe the following requirements:
3. Install a new filter element and sealing rings, be
sure the sealing rings are correctly positioned.
4. Tighten the center retaining bolts.
Installation
Installation of the fuel filter/sediment separator as-
sembly follows the removal procedure in reverse. On
installation, observe the following requirements:
5. Tighten the retaining bolts.
6. Assemble the fuel pipes to the connectors in the
head and tighten the nuts until the stop is
reached (metal to metal contact).
7. Bleed the fuel system as previously described.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 10 – FUEL
Air Cleaners
CONTENT
10 202 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Tightening Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SPECIFICATIONS
AIR CLEANER
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry, Dual Element
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 hours (or more frequently when operating in adverse conditions)
TORQUE VALUES
DESCRIPTION ft. lbs. N·m kgf/m
Air Cleaner Retaining Bolts 40 55 5.6

Air Cleaner Hose Clamps 1.8 2.5 0.25
Air Cleaner Restriction Indicator Switch 9 12 1.2
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


The tractors feature a dry element type air cleaner lo-
cated beneath the engine top hood panel.
Air enters the cleaner in a circular direction and cen-
trifugal force results in heavier particles being thrown
to the outside of the container and collecting in the
bottom of the cleaner. The lighter particles are col-
lected on the (outer) primary element.
The inner (secondary) element is located within the
outer element. The element protects the engine from
the finer dust particles that may have passed through
the outer element.
17
A vacuum indicator switch is mounted in the air
cleaner outlet tube and illuminates a warning light on
the instrument console when the air cleaner requires
servicing.
If the air cleaner restriction warning light illuminates
when the engine is running, stop the engine and ser-
vice the air cleaner.
18
IMPORTANT: The safety element must be replaced
if damaged or clogged with dust, or if, after cleaning 1
or installing a new outer element, the warning light re-
mains on when the engine is running.
If the warning light remains on after installation of
both inner and outer elements, check the switch for
faulty operation by replacing with a switch known to
function correctly.
19
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

FAULT FINDING
Air Cleaner Warning Light 1. Clogged Air Cleaner 1. Clean or renew

illuminates outer element
Air Cleaner Warning Light 2. Vacuum Switch Faulty 2. Replace switch with
illuminates, after filter service a new one
Air Cleaner Warning Light 3. Aspirator tube not 3. Clear Aspirator tube,
illuminates, before service working, debris in check muffler, clean
intervals. filter body element and refit.
OVERHAUL
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine side panels and lift off the
pre-cleaner assembly.
2. Loosen the outlet hose clamp.
3. Remove the attaching bolts and withdraw the air 1
cleaner assembly.
20
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the wing nut and extract the outer el-
ement.
2. With the outer element removed extract the inner
element.
21
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

INSPECTION AND REPAIR

1. Clean and examine the outer canister. Repair
any damaged seams.
2. Check the condition and fit of the rubber dust col-
lector.
3. If dust is present inside the outer element, it must
be replaced. If satisfactory, clean the element.
4. Wearing safety goggles and using compressed
air not exceeding 2 bar (29 psi) clean the el-
ement. Insert the air line nozzle inside the el-
ement and blow the dust from the inside to the
outside. Blow loose particles from the outside of
the element by holding the nozzle at least 150
mm (5.9in) from the element. 22
5. If undamaged, wash the element every 300
hours or after five dry cleanings, whichever oc-
curs first, using the following procedure:
IMPORTANT: Never use fuel oil, solvent, or water
hotter than the hand can stand, otherwise the el-
ement may be damaged.
A Seal the small hole at the closed end of the
filter with a strip of adhesive tape and place
the filter, open end up, in a deep flat-bot-
tomed container or tub. Add a small amount
of non-sudsing washing powder (automatic
washing machine type) to the inside of the
filter element. Add warm water35° C (100° F)
to the inside of the element until the level in
the container is just below the open end of
the element. Allow the element to soak for at
least 15 minutes (but never more than 24
23
hours) in the cleaning solution.
B After soaking, gently agitate the element,
being careful not to allow dirty cleaning sol-
ution from the container to splash into the in-
side of the element.
C Rinse the element in clean cold water, allow-
ing water to flow from the inside through the
element until the water comes through clear.
If using a hose do not use a pressured flow,
a slow trickle is sufficient. Make sure water is
allowed to flow through the entire element.
24
D Remove the adhesive tape and shake ex-
cess water from the filter element and allow
to dry naturally. The element will need 24-48
hours to dry thoroughly. Install a new el-
ement at this stage, retaining the washed el-
ement for the next service.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to dry the element with

compressed air or install before thoroughly dry as it
may rupture. It is recommended that a new element
is installed at this service and the washed element al-
lowed to dry and retained for installation at the next
service.
6. When dry, check the element for damage by in-
serting a lamp into the middle of the element and
observing the element surface. An even, fine
pattern of light indicates the element is clean, un-
damaged and suitable for further service.
7. Every 600 hours the element must be replaced.
INSTALLATION
Installation of the dry type air cleaner is the removal
procedure in reverse, on installation observe the fol-
lowing requirements:
1. Tighten the retaining bolts.
2. Tighten the outlet hose clamp.
REASSEMBLY
Reassembly of the dry type air cleaner is the disas-
sembly procedure in reverse.
On reassembly, make sure the outer element sealing
ring is secure.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES PAGE
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 10 – FUEL
Electric Lift Pump
CONTENT
10 210 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
SPECIFICATIONS
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter head mounted 12 volt supply Electric Lift Pump
Pump operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanically Actuated
Output Pressure at 2000 revs/min . . . . . . . . . . . 0.27–0.47 bar (3–6 psi)
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


(OP NO 10 210)
The electric lift pump is installed on all models fitted
with the DP203 fuel injection pump engines.
The pump (1) is mounted into the head of the fuel fil-
ter and is activated via the key–start switch.
The fuel is drawn up from the tank through he separa-
tor and filter assemblies and then out to the FIP inlet.
25
1. If there is no/little delivery, and voltage and fuel
are present at the pump, the pump should be re-
placed.1.
2. With the key start on is there 12V between the
terminals of the pump (1)? If 12V is not present
check fuses, relay and wiring.
26
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

FAULT FINDING
Low pressure at pump outlet 1. Low or no fuel in tank 1. Refill tank

2. Blocked filter in lift pump 2. Clean filter
3. Actuating Shaft Worn 3. Replace Shaft
4. Pump Worn 4. Replace Pump
Air in the fuel from pump outlet 1. Blocked fuel tank breather 1. Clear blockage
2. Loose fuel connections 2. Check and tighten
3. Fuel Pump Diaphragm 3. Replace Pump
Perforated
4. Fuel pump body seam 4. Replace Pump
Leaking
5. Pump Worn 5. Replace Pump
Removal of Electric Pump

1. Disconnect battery
2. Remove the two wires from the pump.
3. Unscrew the filter head/pump assembly connec-
tion and lift away from filter assembly.
Installation is reverse procedure, ensure ’O’ rings (1)
are serviceable
27
Pump Testing
Fuel pump may be checked on the vehicle.
Ensure initially that the filter is serviceable and there
are no other restrictions between the fuel tank and fil-
ters (2).
Disconnect the filter outlet to pump tube and recon-
nect to the filter, allowing the outlet to be positioned
into a suitable measuring jar.
Turn the key start to the first position for a measured
amount of time and record the fuel delivered (1).
Compare against specification
28
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 10 – FUEL
Injectors
CONTENT

10 218 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
SPECIFICATIONS
INJECTORS LUCAS C.A.V.
Adjustment Variable
Quantity, nozzle holes 5 Hole
Pressure Setting 292–300 bar (4234–4350 psi)
Injector change interval 1200 hours
TORQUE VALUES
Application Nm ft. lbs. kgf/m
Injector Nozzle Retaining Nut 48 35 4.9
Injector Retaining Bolts 22 17 2.2
Injector Leak-Off Line Banjo Bolts 12 10 1.2
High Pressure Gland Nuts at Injector 32 23 3.3
High Pressure Gland Nuts at Fuel Pump 33 23 3.3
TOOLS
Application TOOLS
Injector Cleaning Kit* 29367
Includes Nozzle Cleaning Wires – Pressure Chamber Drills – Pressure Chamber Scraper – Valve Seat Scraper
– Brass Wire Brush – Pin Vise.
Tallow Obtain Locally Obtain Locally
Polishing Sticks Obtain Locally Obtain Locally
Pump Timing Tools 297119 / 297194
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Description and Operation spring. The fuel is then forced, in an atomized state,
The engine injector function is to inject fuel into a through the five holes in the nozzle tip. When the
pressurized cylinder in a fully atomized condition so pressure from the injection pump drops, the needle
as to burn efficiently with a minimum of smoke. valve snaps back onto the seat under pressure from
the spring.
Each injector consists of a nozzle assembly, contain-
ing a needle valve, and an injector body assembly
housing the injector needle valve regulating spring. To provide lubrication of the injector, a small amount
of fuel is permitted to leak up between the needle
Fuel from the fuel injection pump enters the injector
valve and the nozzle body. The excess fuel rises to
fuel inlet and passes down through a drilling in the in-
the top of the injector and returns to the fuel tank via
jector body to the needle valve seat.
an injector leak-off line.
The fuel, pressurized by the injection pump, lifts the
needle valve off the seat against the action of a
FAULT FINDING
Engine emits black smoke 1. Faulty injectors 1. Overhaul or replace
injectors
Nozzle does not “buzz” while 1. Dirty or sticking needle 1. Clean or replace needle
injecting valve valve and nozzle holder
2. Valve seat leakage 2. Clean or replace valve and
nozzle assembly
3. Damaged nozzle retaining 3. Replace retaining nut
nut
Nozzle leak back 1. Worn needle valve 1. Replace needle valve and
nozzle holder
2. Dirty nozzle and/or holder 2. Clean or replace nozzle
and holder
3. Loose nozzle retaining nut 3. Tighten nut
Nozzle opening pressure 1. Adjusting nut loose 1. Tighten nut
incorrect
2. Damaged nozzle or seized 2. Replace needle valve and
needle valve nozzle holder
3. Blocked nozzle holes 3. Clean nozzle
4. Incorrect shims fitted 4. Adjust shim pack
Nozzle seat leakage 1. Dirty nozzle and/or nozzle 1. Clean or replace nozzle
holder and nozzle holder
2. Sticking needle valve 2. Clean or replace needle
valve and nozzle holder
Incorrect spray pattern 1. Dirty nozzle and/or nozzle 1. Clean or replace nozzle
holder and nozzle holder
2. Restricted nozzle holes 2. Clean or replace nozzle
and nozzle holder
3. Damaged needle valve or 3. Replace needle valve and
nozzle nozzle holder
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

OVERHAUL
1. Loosen the high pressure fuel pipe gland nuts at
the injection pump.
2. Clean the area around the injectors.
3. Remove the banjo bolts (1) and discard the two
copper washers from each bolt. Remove the
leak-off pipe (3).
4. Unscrew the gland nuts and disconnect the high
pressure pipes (2) from the injectors.
5. Remove the two retaining bolts from each injec-
tor and withdraw from cylinder head.
6. If a replacement set of injectors is not immediate-
ly available, cover the ends of the pipes and the 29
cylinder head openings to prevent the entry of
dirt and foreign material.
7. Discard the cork dust washer (1) and the copper
sealing washer(2).
NOTE: The copper sealing washer may have to be

extracted from the bore in the cylinder head.
8. To establish if overhaul or replacement is
necessary, test the injectors according to the fol-
lowing procedure. Before testing, install a protec-
tive cap to the inlet union and clean the outside
of the injectors with a soft wire brush and a car-
bon solvent.
30
TESTING
WARNING
The spray from a fuel injector tester can pierce
human skin with fatal results. When an injector is
spraying, the nozzle holder should be turned away
from the operator and any other persons.
During the Nozzle Opening Pressure and Spray Pat-

tern Tests, collect the spray in a container partly filled
with rags to absorb the spray.
When conducting the Nozzle Seat Leakage Test, re-
lease the injector tester pump pressure before touch-
ing the nozzle tip with a sheet of blotting paper.
WARNING
The spray is flammable make sure no open flames
are in the area of the tester and do not generate ex-
cessive vapor.
1. Fill the injector tester with a calibrating type fuel TA6010115

oil and leave the filler cap loose to prevent a vac-
uum forming during testing. 31
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2. Prime the tester until oil is emitted from the tester

line, then connect the injector.
3. Make sure the control knob on the tester is
screwed in to prevent the gauge being over-pres-
surized if the injector nozzle is blocked.
4. Pump the tester and check the nozzle is free to
open. Open the pressure gauge valve and begin
injector testing. If the nozzle is blocked or the
needle jammed, disassemble the injector.
5. Nozzle Opening Pressure Setting - Slowly pump
the injector tester and observe the pressure at
which the needle valve lifts and fuel is injected
from the nozzle tip. By rotating clockwise or anti
clockwise the adjuster located in the top of the in-
jector, the pressure setting can be varied.
6. Spray Pattern - Pump the tester rapidly (80 to 90
strokes per/min.) and observe the spray pattern
from the holes. An atomized spray free from dis-
tortion and irregular streaks of fuel should be ob-
served. The tester is not regarded as providing
a suitable test for atomization under working
conditions, but gives an indication of the working APB10004
of the nozzle.
32
7. Nozzle Seat Leakage - Wipe the nozzle tip dry
and apply a pressure to 282 bar (4089 psi), i.e.,
10 bar (145 psi) below the opening pressure. The
nozzle tip and bottom face must remain essen-
tially dry and there must be no tendency for blobs
of fuel to collect or drip. A slight dampness can
be ignored. If there is any leakage from the
nozzle seat, the nozzle assembly must be
scrapped.
8. Nozzle Back Leakage - Apply a pressure of 282
bar (4089 psi) 10 bar (145 psi) below the opening
pressure, then release the handle and the time/
pressure drop should be between 148-99 bar)
within 45 to 6 seconds, if below 6 seconds, the
33
nozzle assembly must be scrapped. If above 45
seconds, check for carbon on the valve and/or
blocked back leak drillings.
NOTE: If the injectors meet the tests carried out then
refit the injectors to the engine.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

DISASSEMBLY
1. Place the injector in a holding fixture with the
nozzle uppermost. Do not clamp the injector
body in a vise. Use a socket tool to loosen the
nozzle retaining nut.
2. Remove the nozzle retaining nut, complete with
the nozzle body and needle valve.
3. Remove the injector body from the holding fixture
and invert, carefully remove the top nut, spring
tensioner and seat. To avoid damage, place all
dismantled components in suitable baths of
clean fuel oil.
34
NOTE: To prevent corrosion of injector components
after cleaning, rinse in clean fuel oil and place in a
suitable bath of clean fuel oil.

1. Clean the injector body by soaking in a carbon
solvent and brushing with a brass wire brush. In-
spect the body for damaged threads and pres-
sure face, making sure the holes in the injector
nozzle are thoroughly clean with no signs of cor-
rosion or pitting.
35
2. Clean the spring and spring seat using a brass
wire brush and check for scoring, pitting or cor-
rosion.
3. Clean the dowelled adaptor plate using a brass
wire brush. Inspect the plate for loose or bent do-
wels, a damaged pressure face or corrosion.
4. Clean the needle valve and body by soaking in a
carbon solvent and brushing with a brass wire
brush. Using the tools included in the Injector
Nozzle Cleaning Kit, clean the nozzle as follows:
36
NOTE: If the needle valve is in any way damaged or
blued, it must be discarded and a new matched
needle valve and nozzle body assembly obtained. It
is not possible to grind or lap the three special angles
on the valve point.
37
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

A Clean the spray holes with a nozzle cleaning

wire held in a pin vise so that it protrudes for
only 1.5 mm (0.06 in.), thereby giving maxi-
mum resistance to bending. Insert the wire
into each hole, pushing and rotating gently
until each hole is cleared.
38
B Clean the needle valve seat using the valve
seat scraper by rotating and pushing the tool
onto the valve seating.
C Clean the fuel port using the fuel port
scraper. Insert the scraper into the port,
press hard against the side of the cavity and
rotate to clear all carbon deposits from this
area.
39
5. Use a Reverse Flush Nozzle Adaptor, on an in-
jector tester and reverse flush the nozzle to re-
move the carbon loosened during cleaning, Step
4.
6. After flushing the nozzle, polish the valve seat by
placing a very small amount of tallow on the end
of a polishing stick and rotate in the nozzle.
40
7. Clean the top of the needle valve using a needle
valve scraper.
8. Clean the nozzle retaining nut using a brass wire
brush and check to see that the threads are not
damaged and are free from carbon deposits.
APB10013
41
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

RE–ASSEMBLY
1. Make sure all parts are absolutely clean and un-
damaged prior to re–assembly. Rinse all parts in
clean fuel oil and assemble the components
while still wet.
2. Place the spring and spring seat into the injector
body bore. Place the injector body into the hold-
ing fixture.
3. Refit spring tensioner and top nut then invert in-
jector in holding fixture
42
4. Carefully locate nozzle assembly onto dowels
and retighten nozzle retaining nut to 48 Nm
(35 lbf ft)
To set the nozzle opening pressure, connect the in-
jector to the test rig as described in ‘‘Testing’’ and
alter the adjusting nut until the specified opening
pressure is achieved.
INSTALLATION
1. Remove any blanking plugs from cylinder head
openings and pipe ends.
2. Insert the new/replacement injector in the cylin-
der head, having used a new cork dust washer
and a new copper sealing washer. 43
3. Secure each injector with the two retaining bolts
and tighten to 22 Nm (17 ft. lbs).
4. Reconnect the leak-off pipe using new washers
either side of the banjo fittings and tighten banjo
bolts to the 12 Nm (10 ft. lbs).
5. Reconnect high pressure fuel pipes to injectors
and tighten gland nuts to 32 Nm (23 ft. lbs).
6. Tighten high pressure fuel pipe gland nuts at the
injection pump to 32 Nm (23 ft. lbs).
7. Bleed the fuel system as detailed previously.
8. If the injectors are to be stored before installation,
clean in calibrating oil. Storage for longer than 6
months may result in the necessity of disassem-
bling and cleaning the injectors before installa-
tion.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES PAGE
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 10 – FUEL
Injection Pump
CONTENT
10 248 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Pump Removal, Timing and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
SPECIFICATIONS
LUCAS C.A.V. pump DPS/DP203
Type Series Distributor type, integral speed governor and advance device
Pump rotation Clockwise
Model 4 Cylinder 4 Cylinder

N/Asp Turbo
Pump Type DPS DPS
Engine Timing BTDC Engine 29° 28°
Position
Pump Timing, Locking Bolt Position 29° 28°
Overcheck
IMPORTANT: The above table shows several types of engine application, some of which will not be available
for your type of machine
TORQUE VALUES
DESCRIPTION Nm lbf.ft
Fuel Inlet Connection 59 43
Delivery Valve Holders 41 30
Fuel Injection Pump to Front Plate 20–24 15–18
Front Plate Bolts Cover Bolts 22 16
Pump Locking Bolt DP203 13 10
Drive Gear 75–81 55–60
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

TOOLS
Fuel Injection Pump Drive Gear Puller

If the pump drive gear is tight It may be necessary to
manufacture a gear puller, this can be achieved by
following the guidlines as shown: 56.87mm
1. Use a plate of (HRLC P&O Steel material) with
a Diameter 80mm (3.15in) and a thickness of
10mm (0.394 in).
Drill x3 Holes (A) 9.5mm (0.375 in) equally
spaced with a diameter 56.87mm (2.2 in) on the A
plate.
44
2. Drill and tap a thread into the centre of the plate
3/4 x 16 – UNC (B) and attach a bolt 51mm ( 2 in) C
in length.
3. Attach 3 bolts 5/16 – UNF x 2 in (51mm) with
washers (C) through the plate and into the pump
face.
Apply a gradual torque to the centre bolt (B) and re-
move the pump gear.
45
DP200 fuel injection pump timing TOOLS
V.L. Churchill Ltd tools are available and recom-
mended, to check the fuel injection pump timing of all
Lucas CAV D.P.S. type fuel injection pumps. These
tools are used for:
• Engine front plate timing marks in relation to fly-
wheel timing marks.
• Fuel injection pump internal timing.
IMPORTANT: Whenever a replacement fuel injec- 297119

tion pump is being installed or poor engine perform-
ance is evident, the use of the following timing tool is
recommended.
1. Timing gauge, splined shaft and slotted arm
Tool #297119
46
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

2. Timing gauge, adaptor for D.P.S. fuel injection

297512
pump Tool #297512
47
3. D.P.S. Fuel injection pump timing mark, check-
297513
ing fixture Tool # 297513
48
A suitable woodruff key will be required to be installed
on the pump shaft when attaching the timing tools
49
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

DESCRIPTION DP203 (OP NO 10 210)

The pump is flange mounted at the front right hand
side of the engine and gear driven from the crank-
shaft via an idler gear.
During operation all moving parts are lubricated by
fuel oil under pressure preventing dust, water and
other foreign matter from entering.
50
The DP203 fuel pumps are basically sealed items
with only minimal parts being supplied in service.
Components that are replaceable during normal ser-
vice are the Fuel Shut off Solenoid (1).
If the fuel injection pump is suspected of being faulty
the pump assembly should be taken to a specialist
Lucas/CAV agent for repair. Without specialist
equipment these pumps cannot be correctly set up.
Unauthorised repair will also invalidate warranty and
may cause the vehicle to break local emission re-
gulations.
51
SOLENOID SHUTOFF VALVE
The electrically operated fuel shutoff valve is fitted
into the top of the fuel pump. The unit consists of a
solenoid, which controls a spring loaded piston and
is located between the transfer pump outlet and the
metering valve.
When the valve is energized on starting the solenoid
lifts the piston against spring pressure and allows
fuel at transfer pressure to pass to the metering
valve.
52
When the solenoid is de-energized, by cutting the
electrical supply, the return spring pushes the piston
back against its seat and prevents the rotor from fill-
ing thereby stopping the engine.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

PUMP REMOVAL
NOTE: Dismantling, assembly, testing and adjust-
ment of the pump must be carried out by an author-
ized CAV Dealer.
1. Clean all dirt from the injection pump and the sur-
rounding parts.
WARNING
When pressure washing, ensure the engine and fuel
pump have cooled to ambient temperature. Cleaning
a hot engine with cold water can damage the fuel
pump and engine components
2. Disconnect and remove all fuel lines from the in-

jection pump and cap all openings to prevent
entry of dirt.
3. Disconnect the throttle cable, fuel shutoff sole-
noid wire and wax motor wire, where fitted.
4. Remove the pulley guard.
5. Remove the fan drive belt.
6. Remove the idler pulley
7. Remove the rocker cover breather tube.
8. Remove the engine timing cover from the engine
front cover.
9. If the pump is to be reinstalled without being ser-
viced, rotate the engine to approximately 40°
BTDC compression stroke, loosen the pump tim-
ing gear bolt. DO NOT REMOVE GEAR. Rotate
the engine in the direction of rotation to (BTDC as
shown in the table on page 1) and lock the pump
locking tag using the bolt 13–15Nm ( lbsft). Lock-
ing tab location 1 is unlocked, Location 2 is
locked.
10. Remove the pump timing gear bolt.
11. Fabricate a puller (see tools) and Install the puller
to the drive gear using three bolts and remove
the gear.
12. Remove the pump retaining bolts, then remove 53
the pump from the engine front cover plate. Cap
all openings to prevent entry of dirt.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

DP203 Fuel injection Pump Timing

If the DP203 pump has been removed from the trac-
tor ’UNLOCKED’ or the pump timing needs verifying
the following procedure should be followed, with the
pump removed from the vehicle.
54
Obtain a suitable woodruff key and install the tool to
the pump and engage the timing gauge on to the
checking fixture with the slotted arm (1) over the
pump flange.
55
With the tool set to the correct ( ° ) lock the pump at
this point. 2
56
Rotate the gauge until the slotted arm aligns with the
scribed mark on the pump (1).
Lock the pump at this point and remove the timing
tools.
57
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Rotate the engine to the correct position, (° BTDC),

and install the pump on the engine, with a new ’O’ ring
installed onto the front of the pump, torque the pump
bolts to 20–24Nm (15–18 lbs ft)
Initially tighten the pump gear retaining nut to 20 Nm
(15 lbf.ft) and ’unlock the pump.
Fully tighten the nut to 75–81 Nm (55–60 lbf.ft)
APB10008
58
INSTALLATION
1. Install a new pump to front engine plate O-ring on
the pump mounting flange.
2. Install the three injection pump to engine front
plate mounting bolts.
3. Tighten the mounting bolts.
4. Pump Mounting Bolts: 40 Nm (29 lbf.ft)
5. Install the pump drive gear
6. Install the lock washer and retaining nut to the
pump drive shaft and tighten.
Tighten the Gear Nut.
Gear Retaining Nut: 75–81 Nm (55–60 lbf.ft)
7. Position a new inspection cover gasket and in-
stall the inspection cover to the engine front
cover. Tighten the retaining bolts.
8. Connect the fuel lines to the injection pump and
tighten.
9. Reconnect the throttle and fuel shutoff controls
to the injection pump.
10. Turn on the key start and prime the system using
the electric lift pump or hand primer. Start the
tractor and adjust the engine idle and maximum
no-load speeds, see “Adjustments for the DPS
Distributor Type Fuel Injection Pump” earlier in
this section.
INJECTION PUMP STORAGE

If, after overhaul, an injection pump is being stored,
the body should be filled with calibrating oil and all the
connections sealed with dust plugs and caps.
If the pump is stored for a period of six months or
more, the unit should be re-tested according to the
Test Plan before use in service.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES PAGE
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 10 – FUELING 108HP EMMISSIONISED – CHAPTER 3 1
SECTION 10 – FUEL
Chapter 3 – Turbocharger
CONTENT
10 250 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
SPECIFICATIONS
TURBOCHARGER
Compressor Shaft Axial End Play 0.025 mm - 0.10 mm (0.001in - 0.004in)
Bearing Radial Clearance 0.4 mm - 0.5 mm (0.016in - 0.021in)
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 10 – FUELING 108HP EMMISSIONISED – CHAPTER 3
TORQUE VALUES
GENERAL TORQUES Nm lbf ft kgf m
Turbine Housing Bolts 20–25 15–18 2.0–2.5
Turbocharger to Manifold 41–47 30–35 4.1–4.7
Oil Feed Tube to Turbocharger 30–40 22–30 3.0–4.0
(Banjo Bolt)
Oil Feed Tube to Filter Head 18–20 13–15 1.8–2.0
Connector
Connector to Filter Head 54–81 40–60 5.4–8.1
Oil Return Tube bolts from 20–25 15–18 2.0–2.5
Turbocharger
Oil Return Tube to 60–70 45–50 6.0–7.0
Block Connector
Oil Return Connector to Block 27 20 2.7
Inlet Hose Clamps 1.7–2.3 (15–20 lbs in)
TOOLS
SEALER
Type Sealer Anaerobic Low Strength Part No 82995768
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2


The turbocharger consists of gas turbine and air
compressor wheels mounted on opposite ends of a
common shaft. The wheels are enclosed by a hous-
ing, and the shaft by a center housing.
The exhaust turbine is a centripetal (from outside to
center), radial inflow designed mechanism consist-
ing of a cast turbine wheel, wheel shroud, and a
specially designed housing that encloses the wheel
and directs the flow of gas through the turbine.
The intake compressor is a centrifugal, radial outflow
mechanism consisting of a cast compressor wheel,
a backplate assembly, and a specially designed
housing that encloses the wheel and directs the flow
of air through the compressor.
The center housing supports the compressor and
turbine wheel shaft in a pair of identical bearings
which contain oil holes for directing oil to the bearing
bores and shaft journals. Passages drilled in the
center housing provide for directing oil, supplied by
the engine, from the inlet port to oil grooves ma-
chined in the bearing bores, which align with holes in
the bearings.
Piston rings are installed at each end of the shaft be-
tween the bearing and the adjacent turbine or com-
pressor wheel to prevent lubricating oil from entering
the turbine and the compressor area.
The turbocharger is mounted on the engine exhaust
manifold.
During operation of a turbocharged engine, exhaust
gas from the engine exhaust manifold flows into the A
turbine (B). The exhaust gas pressure and the heat
energy extracted from the gas cause the turbine
wheel to rotate which, in turn, causes the com-
pressor wheel to rotate.
The cooled and expanded exhaust gas leaving the
turbine wheel is directed by the turbine housing to the B
engine exhaust system, which expels it to the atmos-
phere. APB10501
Rotation of the compressor wheel causes ambient
air (A) from the engine air cleaner to be drawn into the 1
compressor housing, where it is compressed and de-
livered to the engine intake manifold.
A B
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

The increased volume and density of the air To allow the turbocharger and exhaust manifold to
delivered to the engine cylinders permit a cool down and present any possible distortion of
corresponding increase in the volume of fuel that can components, idle the engine at 1000 RPM for ap-
be introduced into the cylinders while maintaining the proximately one minute before stopping the engine.
air/fuel ratio required for proper combustion. Since IMPORTANT: To ensure adequate lubrication of the
engine power output is a function of the volume of turbocharger, allow the engine to idle at 1000 RPM
fuel burned, the increase in the volume of fuel for approximately one minute after starting the
introduced as a result of turbocharger operation engine.
results in an increase in engine power output.
TURBOCHARGER FAULT FINDING

It is important when troubleshooting a suspected Furthermore, failure to take appropriate steps to en-
turbocharger malfunction to keep in mind that a sure correct installation, such as repairing or replac-
turbocharger cannot compensate for incorrect en- ing defective clamps or ducting, could cause the re-
gine operating procedures; deficiencies of the en- placement unit to fail in a similar manner.
gine air intake, fuel, or exhaust systems; or for dam- The follow chart contains information pertaining to
aged engine components such as valves, pistons, probable failure modes of turbocharged engines,
rings, liners, etc. Replacing a good turbocharger with possible causes for such failures, and the mainten-
another will not correct engine deficiencies. ance action required to remedy each possible cause.
Consequently, systematic troubleshooting of a sus- It is not represented that this information is all-inclus-
pected turbocharger failure is essential for two very ive. On the contrary, this information should be con-
important reasons. First, it must be determined what, sidered primarily as representative of the methods or
if anything, is wrong with the turbocharger so that it techniques that should be employed in troubleshoot-
can be repaired. Second, it must be determined what ing a turbocharged engine malfunction.
action will prevent a recurrence of the failure. In general, those troubleshooting procedures that
In many cases, the evidence required to determine can be performed with the least effort and in the least
the cause of a malfunction is destroyed in the pro- amount of time should be performed first. No re-
cess of removing the turbocharger from the engine. moval or disassembly procedures should be per-
For example, if a turbocharger failed as the result of formed until all visual inspections and sensory tests
a faulty installation (such as loose duct connections (sight and feel) that can be accomplished with the
that permitted ingestion of dirt by the compressor), turbocharger installed have been performed. The
this fact would not be evident once the turbocharger possible causes and procedure are generally ar-
was removed from the engine. ranged in the order of ease of accomplishment.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

FAULT FINDING
PROBLEMS POSSIBLE CAUSES

1. Engine lacks power or emits black Dirty air cleaner
smoke
Loose compressor-to-intake manifold connections
Leak at engine intake at turbocharger mounting flange
Turbo rotating assembly binding
Air cleaner to turbocharger duct restricted
Compressor to intake manifold duct restricted
Engine exhaust system restricted
Engine malfunction (rings, pistons, valves and associated
parts).
2. Engine exhaust emits blue smoke Dirty air cleaner
Loose compressor-to-intake manifold connections
Leak at engine intake manifold
Plugged engine oil filter
Restricted duct between air cleaner and turbocharger
compressor
Seal leak at compressor end of turbocharger
Engine malfunction (rings, pistons, valves
3. Excessive engine oil consumption Wrong type or viscosity of engine lubricating oil
Seal leaks at compressor end of turbocharger (indicated by
oil in housing or on wheel)
Oil in engine exhaust manifold (caused by malfunction of
rings, pistons, valves and associated parts).
4. Noisy turbocharger Dirty air cleaner
Foreign material or object in compressor-to-intake manifold
duct
Foreign object in engine exhaust system
Carbon buildup in turbine housing
Turbocharger rotating assembly binding or dragging
5. Turbocharger rotating assembly Damaged compressor wheel
binding or dragging
Damaged turbine wheel
Compressor or turbine wheel rubbing on housing due to
worn bearings, shaft journals or bearing bores
Excessive dirt buildup in compressor (housing or wheel)
Excessive carbon buildup behind turbine wheel (overhaul
turbine)
Slugged or coked center housing (check engine lube
system, overhaul turbocharger)
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES

6. Seal leaks at compressor end of Dirty air cleaner
turbocharger
Restricted duct between air cleaner and turbocharger
Loose compressor-to-intake manifold dust connections
Leaks at engine intake manifold
Restricted turbocharger oil drain line
Plugged engine crankcase breather
Worn or damaged compressor wheel (worn bearings, bores
or journals)
Excessive piston blowby or high internal crankcase
pressure
7. Seal leaks at turbine end of Excessive pre-oiling

turbocharger
Plugged engine crankcase breather
Restricted turbocharger oil drain line
Sludged or coked center housing
Worn turbocharger bearings, bearing bores, or shaft
journals.
8. Worn turbocharger bearings, bores Inadequate pre-oiling following turbocharger installation or
or journals engine lube servicing
Contaminated or improper grade of engine oil used in
engine
Insufficient oil supplied to turbocharger due to “oil lag”
Restricted turbocharger oil feed line
Plugged engine oil filter
Abrasive wear due to flaking of “coked” particles from
center housing interior surface
Insufficient lube oil supplied to turbocharger due to engine
oil pump malfunction
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

NOTES: plugged air cleaner, a restriction in the air

A Refer to Engine portion of Service Manual for cleaner- to-compressor duct, or a heavy buil-
servicing procedures. dup of dirt in the compressor housing or on
the compressor wheel.
B With engine stopped, check duct clamping
devices for tightness. I Internal inspection of the center housing can
be accomplished by removing the oil drain
WARNING line and looking through the oil drain opening.
Always start the engine from the tractor seat. never When a sludged or coked condition exists, a
start the engine from the ground. heavy sludge build–up will be seen on the
shaft between the bearing journals and in the
C With engine running at idle speed, lightly center housing from the oil drain opening
spray duct connections with starting fluid. back of the turbine end.
Leaks at connections will be indicated by an J Thorough cleaning of the air induction sys-
increase in engine speed due to the starting tem is essential following compressor wheel
fluid being drawn into the compressor and damage due to foreign object impact. In
pumped into the engine combustion many cases, metal pieces from the wheel be-
chambers. come imbedded in the air cleaner element. If
D With engine running at idle speed, check the element is not changed in such cases,
duct connections for leaks by applying light- these metal pieces can be drawn into the re-
weight oil or soap suds to areas of possible placement turbocharger and cause it to fail in
leakage and looking for bubbles. Exhaust the same manner as the original unit.
gas leakage between the cylinder head, ex- K With the air inlet and exhaust gas ducting re-
haust manifold and the turbocharger inlet will moved from the turbocharger, examine both
also create a noise level change. the compressor and turbine wheels for blade
E With engine running at idle speed, check for damage. Examine the outer blade tip edges
unusual noise and vibration. If either condi- for evidence of rubbing on adjacent housing
tion is noted, shut down the engine immedi- surfaces.
ately to protect the turbocharger and engine NOTE: A light is required for examining the turbine
from further damage. With the engine wheel blade tips, which are positioned inside the tur-
stopped, check the turbocharger shaft steel bine housing. The surfaces requiring inspection can
assembly for damage as outlined in Note I, be viewed from the outlet end of the turbine housing.
below. Rotate the rotating assembly by hand and feel for
F With engine running, a change in the noise smooth turning, dragging or binding. Push the rotat-
level to a higher pitch can indicate air leakage ing assembly sideways while rotating to feel for
between the air cleaner and the engine, or a wheel rub. If there is any indication of rubbing, per-
gas leak between the engine block and the form the bearing clearance inspection procedures
turbocharger inlet. outlined in this manual under Preventive Mainten-
G Exhaust gas leakage may be indicated by ance. If the rotating assembly rotates freely and
heat discoloration in the area of the leak. there is not evidence of binding or rubbing, it can be
H With the engine running, noise level cycling assumed that the turbocharger is serviceable.
from one level to another can indicate a
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

OVERHAUL – REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine side covers (1), release the 2
exhaust muffler pipe clamp and remove the pipe.
2. Remove the exhaust muffler by removing the
turbocharger to exhaust muffler clamp (2). 1
3. Disconnect the air cleaner to turbocharger tube
and the turbocharger to intake manifold tube (4)
by loosening the tube hose clamps.
4. Disconnect the oil supply and return tubes from
the turbocharger (3). Cap the ends of the tubes
and the oil ports of the turbocharger to prevent fu-
ture bearing failures due to entry of foreign ma-
terial.
3
5. Remove the turbocharger and gasket from the
exhaust manifold. Cover the opening in the ex-
haust manifold to prevent the entry of dirt which
could cause damage to the turbine wheel blades
after installation and start-up.
NOTE: Before removing and cleaning the charger 4
look for signs of oil or gas leakage or wear to the
wheel that may not be evident after cleaning.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Clean the exterior of the turbocharger using a
non-caustic cleaning solvent to remove outside 3
dirt before disassembly.
4
2. Mark the compressor housing, turbine housing
and center housing with a punch or scribe (1) to
ensure proper reassembly.
NOTE: Exercise care when removing the com-
pressor housing to avoid damaging the compressor
wheel blades. Tap the turbine housing with a soft
faced hammer if force is needed for removal.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

3. Remove compressor housing ‘C’ clip from centre

housing intake side (1).
NOTE: Exercise care when removing the com-

pressor housing to avoid damaging the compressor
wheel blades. Tap the turbine housing with a soft
faced hammer if force is needed to remove
6
4. Loosen and remove bolts from the turbine hous-
ing exhaust side, and lockplates
CLEANING
Before cleaning inspect all parts for burning, rubbing,
or impact damage that may not be evident after
cleaning. Clean all parts in a non caustic solution,
using a soft bristle brush, a plastic blade scraper, and
dry compressed air to remove residue.
DO NOT– use abrasive cleaning methods which
might damage or destroy machined surfaces.
DO NOT– immerse CHRA in solvent.
DO NOT– blow under compressor wheel with com-
pressed air.
DO NOT– permit wheel/shaft assembly to spin when 7
blowing off solvent and residue.
INSPECTION
1. Inspect the compressor housing assembly for
the following defects,
Wheel rub damage in the contour area that cannot be
polished out with 80 grit silicon carbide abrasive
cloth.
Worn, broken, or corroded snap ring grooves
Nicks, dents, or distortion that could prevent proper
sealing between the compressor housing and the
CHRA.
NOTE: Replace the compressor housing if any of the
above defects are found.
2. Inspect the turbine housing assembly for the fol-
lowing defects,
Wheel rub damage in the contour area that cannot be
polished out with 60 grit silicon carbide abrasive
cloth.
Worn, broken, or corroded snap ring grooves (snap
ring turbine housing models).
Nicks, dents, or warpage that could prevent proper
sealing between the turbine housing and the CHRA.
NOTE: If there is any compressor or turbine wheel
blade damage, the CHRA must be replaced. Operat-
ing a turbocharger with damaged blades will result in
further damage to component parts or the engine.
Blades cannot be straightened in service.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CENTRE HOUSING and ROTATING ASSEMBLY

(CHRA)
IMPORTANT: The CHRA as an assembly, has been
balanced at the factory, under precision conditions.
As such it must not be disassembled in any way. If
disassembled the balance will be destroyed, and a
new CHRA must be fitted.
CENTRE SHAFT RADIAL CHECK
Check the journal bearing radial clearance, when-
ever there is reason to suspect that the bearings are
worn enough to allow either the compressor wheel,
or the turbine wheel, to rub on its housing. This may
be heard as a high pitched whine.
1. With the turbocharger removed attach an indica-
tor with a dog leg probe to the centre housing.
The indicator plunger should extend through the
oil outlet port, and contact the shaft of the turbine
wheel assembly.
2. Manually apply equal and simultaneous pres-
sure, to the compressor and turbine wheels to
move the shaft as far as it will go away from the
dial indicator probe.
8
3. Set the dial indicator to zero.
4. Manually apply equal and simultaneous pres-
sure to the wheels to move the shaft as far as it
will go toward the plunger. Make a note of the
shaft movement shown on the indicator dial.
NOTE: To make sure the reading indicated is the
maximum possible, roll the wheels slightly in both
directions while applying pressure.
5. Manually apply equal, and simultaneous pres-
sure to the compressor, and turbine wheels, to
move the shaft away from the plunger again.
Note that the indicator pointer returns exactly to
zero.
6. Repeat the steps 2 to 5 several times, to ensure
that maximum radial clearance is indicated by
maximum shaft movement, has been measured
7. If the maximum clearance is less than
0.056mm (0.0022 in), or greater than
0.127mm (0.0050 in), replace the CHRA.
Trouble shoot the engine to find the cause of the
bearing failure, and correct the problem before re-
suming operations.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

AXLE CLEARANCE CHECK

Check the thrust bearing axial clearance as follows,
1. Place a dial indicator with the probe on the com-
pressor end of the turbocharger shaft assembly.
2. Manually move the compressor/turbine wheel
assembly, as far as it will go away from the
plunger.
3. Set the dial indicator at zero
assembly as far as it will go toward the dial indica-
tor plunger. Make a note of the shaft movement
shown on the indicator dial.
assembly as far as it will go away from the
plunger. Note that the indicator plunger returns to
zero. 9
6.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 5, several times to make sure
that the maximum axial clearance, as indicated
by maximum shaft movement, has been
measured.
8. If the maximum clearance is less than
0.0254mm (0.0010 in), or greater than
0.084mm (0.0039 in), replace the CHRA
RE–ASSEMBLY
1. It is recommended replacing the following with
factory authorized parts only, at each overhaul or
whenever parts are removed.
Snap ring, compressor housing retainer
O–Ring seal, compressor housing
Retainer Plates, turbine housing
Bolts, turbine housing retainers
2. Parts that require changing if faulty or damaged,
CHRA, turbine assembly
Compressor Housing
Turbine Housing
3. Inspect all mating surfaces and snap ring groove,
to insure that they are free of burrs, foreign
matter and corrosion deposits.
4. Transfer scribe marks from old snap rings to new,
and coat with a light coating of new engine oil.
5. Install oiled snap ring on compressor end of
CHRA , with beveled face toward the turbine end.
6. Install an ‘O’ ring on the centre housing com-
pressor end flange and place compressor hous-
ing assembly in position. Be careful not to dam-
age the compressor wheel blades.
7. Carefully rotate the compressor housing onto the
CHRA to line up scribed marks.
8. Install the oiled snap ring, lug first, into the com-
pressor housing groove. Be sure that the be-
veled side faces the turbine end and the scribe
marks are aligned. 10
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

9. Tap the inner circumference or lug ends of the

ring with an appropriately sized drift to ensure
proper seating.
NOTE: When installing a new CHRA or turbine hous-
ing, transfer scribed alignment marks from the old, to
the new parts.
10. Position the turbine housing discharge side
down, on a flat, level surface. Place the CHRA
turbine wheel end into the housing, use care to
avoid damaging the wheel blades. Check vis-
ually for proper alignment.
11
11. Carefully rotate the CHRA in the turbine housing
to line up the scribed marks. Recheck for proper
alignment and position the locking plates.
12. Coat the bolts (1) in a suitable anti seize com-
pound, and tighten to 20–25Nm (15–18 lbf ft).
12
Installation
1. Prior to installation fill the turbocharger centre
housing with new clean oil, and rotate the main
shaft to lubricate the bearings.
2. Installation of the turbocharger follows the re-
moval procedure in reverse. Install a new mani-
fold gasket, and tighten manifold bolts to,
41–47Nm (30–35 lbf ft).
Hose connections torque to 6–7 Nm (50–65 lb in)

3. Replace the washers and re–connect the oil
Feed tube banjo bolt and torque to 30–40Nm
(22–30 lbf ft).
13
4. The oil feed tube connector, to oil filter head as-
sembly if disturbed should be refitted. Apply
sealer to connector ‘‘See Specifications and
torque to, 54–81Nm (40–60 lbf ft).
14
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

5. Apply sealer ‘‘See Specifications”, assemble the

oil feed tube to the oil filter head connector and
tighten, 18–20Nm (13–15 lbf ft)
6. Place a suitable receptacle below the oil outlet
port and, WITH THE ELECTRICAL SOLENOID
WIRE DISCONNECTED AT THE FUEL INJEC-
TION PUMP, crank the engine until oil flows from
the outlet port.
7. Reconnect the oil outlet tube using a new gasket
and tighten the retaining bolts at the turbo-
charger to 20–25Nm (15–18 lbf ft).
8. Tighten the oil return tube to cylinder block con-
nector,to 54–81Nm (45–50 lbf ft).
9. If disturbed the oil return tube to block connector
should have sealer applied ‘‘See Specifications”
and torqued to 27Nm (20 lbf ft).
10. Re–connect the air inlet, and outlet tubes, with
the hose clamps, torque to 1.7–2.3
Nm (15–20 lbs in).
11. Reconnect the fuel injection pump solenoid wire.
12. Check the engine oil level and add oil if required.
Idle the engine and check all tubes and gaskets
for leaks.
13. Run the engine at rated speed and listen for
sounds of metallic contact from the turbocharger.
If any noise is apparent, stop the engine immedi-
ately and correct the cause.
NOTE: After the unit has obtained operating tem-
peratures, the rotating assembly should coast freely
to a stop after the engine is stopped. If the rotating
assembly jerks to a sudden stop, the cause should
be corrected immediately.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES PAGE
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 10 – FUEL
Manifolds
CONTENT
10 254 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SPECIFICATIONS
Inlet Manifold Aluminium – with Plenum Chamber
Exhaust Manifold Cast Iron
TORQUE VALUES
Intake Manifold–to–Cylinder Head 35 26 3.5
Exhaust Manifold–to–Cylinder Head 38 28 3.9
Exhaust Pipe–to–Flange 31 23 3.2
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION tight at all times. Considerable damage to the cylin-
der bores, may be incurred by entry of grit or other
MANIFOLDS (OP NO 10 254) foreign material if the plug is left loose or missing.
Also dirt and grit may be drawn through the air
The cross flow design aluminium intake, and cast cleaner connections if they are not properly secured.
iron exhaust manifolds, are on opposite sides of the
cylinder head. This is designed to maintain balanced The inlet manifold attached to the left hand side of the
heat distribution within the cylinder head. The con- engine block is a one piece cast aluminium plenum
figuration of the manifolds also ensures minimum chamber that directs the air from the air cleaner and
heat transfer to the intake manifold. into the cylinder head.
The intake manifold is connected through tubing to The exhaust manifold attached to the right hand side
the air cleaner and in the rear end of the manifold a of the engine block is a one piece cast iron unit that
tapped hole is provided for installation of a thermo- channels the spent exhaust fumes into the muffler by
start or an ether cold starting aid. way of tubing and clamps.
NOTE: On tractors where cold start equipment is not
installed ensure the plug in the intake manifold is kept
FAULT FINDING
IMPORTANT: When effecting a repair the cause of The following table lists problems and their possible
the problem must be investigated and corrected to causes with recommended remedial action.
Engine power poor or 3.Intake manifold leaking at joint 1. Fit new gasket or fit new
runs roughly face or cracked manifold
Excessive exhaust 4. Exhaust leak on exhaust

smoke manifold side of turbocharger, 2. Fit new gasket
where fitted
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

OVERHAUL
IMPORTANT: Whenever it is necessary to remove
the intake or exhaust manifolds from the engine new
sealing gaskets must be fitted upon re–assembly.
INSPECTION
1. Clean the intake manifold in a solvent that is suit-
able for aluminium and check for cracks or dam-
age repair where practical. Small imperfections
on the joint face can be dressed with a stone, but
where they exceed a stone repair the manifold
must be changed.
2. Clean the exhaust manifold in a suitable solvent
removing the carbon deposits with a wire brush. 15
check for cracks or damage to the joint face that
could create an air leakage. Small imperfections
can be dressed with a stone, but where they ex-
ceed a stone repair the manifold must be
changed.
INSTALLATION
1. Prior to refitting the manifolds clean the cylinder
head faces with light grit paper to remove any
trace of old gaskets that may have remained on
the head face during disassembly.
2. Place the bolts through the manifold to be fitted
and through a new gasket, attach the manifold
and gasket onto the cylinder head and torque the
bolts on the:
Intake manifold to 35Nm (26 lbf ft)
Exhaust manifold bolts to 38Nm (28 lbf ft)
16
17
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES PAGE
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 10 – LUBRICATION 92 TO 108HP – CHAPTER 4 1
Chapter 4 – Lubrication
CONTENT
10 304 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SPECIFICATIONS
Oil Pump
Rotor Clearance 0.025–0.15mm (0.001–0.006 in)
Rotor to Pump Housing Clearance 0.15–0.28mm (0.006–0.011 in)
Rotor End Play 0.025–0.089mm (0.001–0.0035 in)
Oil Pressure 1.24 bar (18 psi) minimum at idle speed,
2.76 bar (40 psi) minimum at rated speed
Pump Gear to Camshaft Gear Backlash 0.40–0.56mm (0.016–0.022 in)
Oil Filter Support

Relief Valve, Operating Pressure 4.0 bar (59 psi)
Flow Rate 68 litres/min (18 US. gals/min)
Oil Type
Temperature Oil Viscosity and Type API Engine Oil & Filter
Classification Change Period (hours)
Low Ash, SAE 5W 150
–12°C or Low Ash SAE 5W/20 SF/CD/CF–4 150
(Below 10°F) or SAE 10W–30 150
–12°C to 4°C Low Ash, SAE 10W Series 3 SF/CD/CF–4 150
(10°F to 40°F) or SAE 10W–30 300
0°C to 32°C Low Ash, SAE 30W Series 3 SF/CD/CF–4 300
(32°F to 90°F) or SAE 10W–40 300
Above 24°C Low Ash, SAE 30W Series 3 SF/CD/CF–4 300
(75°C) or SAE 15W–40
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 10 – LUBRICATION 92 TO 108HP – CHAPTER 4
NOTE: When using diesel fuel with a sulphur content below 1.0%, Series 3 diesel engine oil with an A.P.I. classi-
fication of CD may be used instead of CF–4 oil , but the oil and filter interval must be reduced to 150 hours .
When using diesel fuel with a sulphur content between 1% and 1.3% use only oils listed above but reduce the
oil and filter change period to every 50 hours .
ENGINE OIL CAPACITIES (LESS OIL FILTER)
Model Litres U.S Gals
4 CYL 17.5 4.5
ENGINE OIL CAPACITIES (WITH OIL FILTER)

Model Litres U.S Gals
4 CYL 18.5 4.8
TORQUE VALUES
Oil Pan Drain Plug 41 30 4.2

Oil Pump to Block 23 17 2.3
Oil Filter Adaptor Bolts 42 31 4.2
Oil Filter Mounting Bolt Insert 34 25 3.5
Oil Pressure Switch Assembly 31 23 3.2
Idler Pulley Bolt 54 40 5.5
Pump Connector to Block 24 18 2.4
SPECIAL TOOLS
AS REQUIRED REFER TO SECTION 00 – CHAPTER 4
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION bricated by oil pressure jets mounted adjacent to

each main journal housing.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM (OP NO 10 304) The camshaft drive gear bushing is pressure lubri-
Lubrication of the engine, is maintained by a rotor cated through a drilled passage from the front main
type oil pump mounted in the rear of the engine block, bearing. The gear has small oil passages machined
behind the flywheel. The oil pump is driven from the on both sides allowing excess oil to escape.
rear of the camshaft and draws oil from the engine oil Timing gears are lubricated by splashed oil from the
pan through a tube and screen assembly. cam follower chamber, and the pressure lubricated
A spring loaded relief valve is integral with the oil filter camshaft drive gear bushing.
body mounted on the left hand side of the engine An intermittent flow of oil is directed to the valve
block, and prevents over pressurisation of the sys- rocker arm shaft assembly via a drilled passage in
tem. the cylinder block. This is located vertically above
A spin on type oil filter is mounted externally to its above No 1 camshaft bearing, and aligns to a hole in
support housing, on the left hand side of the engine. the cylinder head. The rotation of the camshaft al-
Oil flows from the filter to the main oil gallery, which lows a controlled intermediate flow of lubrication.
runs the length of the cylinder block, which also inter-
sects the camshaft follower chamber. The turbocharger, is supplied with oil from the oil filter
The main gallery also supplies oil to the crankshaft support housing, mounted on the left hand side of the
main bearings, connecting rods, big ends, small engine.
ends. The underside of the pistons and pins, are lu-
1
Engine Lubrication System With Turbocharger Fitted
Engine Oil Flow
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FAULT FINDING
Oil pressure warning 1. Bulb burnt out 1. Renew bulb

light fails to operate
2. Warning Light pressure 2. Renew pressure switch
switch faulty
3. Warning light circuit faulty 3. Check and renew wiring
Engine knocks 1. Diluted or thin oil 1. Check crankshaft bearings for

damage, change as required.
Drain and refill with specified
oil and renew filter. Ascertain
cause of dilution
2. Insufficient oil supply 2. Check oil level and top up as

necessary. Overhaul or renew
pump as necessary. Check oil
filter is not clogged
3. Low oil pressure 3. Overhaul pump or relief valve

as necessary
4. Excessive timing gear 4. Install new thrust bearing liner

backlash
Engine overheats 1. Oil cooler tube blocked 1. Check free flow
Excessive oil con- 1. Engine oil level too high 1. Reduce oil level
sumption
2. External oil leaks 2. Renew gaskets and seals,
where necessary. Check
mating surfaces for damage
or distortion
3. Worn valves, valve guides or 3. Renew

bores
4. Cylinder head gasket leaking 4. Renew gasket. Check head

for damage or distortion
5. Oil loss past the pistons and 5. Renew rings and/or rebore/
rings re–sleeve block as necessary
6. Oil cooler leak 6. Repair/renew oil cooler

assembly
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Low oil pressure 1. Engine oil level low 1. Top up, as necessary
2. Wrong grade of oil 2. Drain and refill with correct
grade of oil
3. Blocked oil pump sump 3. Clean pump screen

screen
4. Oil pressure relief valve faulty 4. Fit new relief valve
5. Oil pump worn 5. Renew Oil Pump
6. Excessive oil pump rotor and 6. Overhaul pump

shaft assembly clearance
7. Excessive main or 7. Install new bearings inserts

connecting rod bearing and / or re–grind crankshaft
clearance
OIL PUMP OVERHAUL
NOTE: The oil pump can only be removed with the

engine split from the transmission, and the flywheel,
back plate, engine oil pan, and oil pump tube re-
moved.
1. Prior to pump removal check pump gear to cam-
shaft gear backlash, does not ex-
ceed, 0.41–0.56mm (0.016–0.022 in).
2
2. Loosen and remove the camshaft gear, to ex-
pose the oil pump, detach the 3 pump mounting
bolts, and withdraw the pump from the block.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Disassembly
1. Loosen and remove the pump face plate to body
bolts (1). Disassemble the pump and discard the
O–rings (2).
4
1. Wash all parts in a suitable solvent and inspect
inside of pump plate, and body, for excessive
wear or damage. If visually okay check in the fol-
lowing manner.
2. Invert pump plate/rotor assembly, and place
outer rotor over inner rotor. Placing a ruler (1)
across top of both, slide a feeler gauge (2), be-
tween ruler and inner rotor, to
0.025–0.089mm (0.001–0.0035 in).
NOTE: If not to specification replace the oil pump, as
reduced pump pressure through wear could result in
reduced engine life.
5
3. Place outer rotor in pump body and check clear-
ance, by inserting a feeler gauge (1) between the
rotor and body. Check to a max of
0.55mm (0.022 in). If exceeded a new pump is
required.
6
Installation
1. Clean and coat parts in new engine oil. Place
outer rotor in pump body, and ensure free rota-
tion. Insert inner rotor, and pump plate assembly,
into the body and ensure that shaft is fully seated
into bushing.
2. Assemble the front plate to the body
bolts,and torque to,
23.0–28.4Nm (17–21 lbf ft) 2.3–2.9kgf m.
IMPORTANT: After tightening ensure the drive gear
rotates freely by hand, at least 5 revolutions, if not
‘‘disassemble” and repeat the exercise.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

3. Fit a new O–Ring to the output tube, lubricate

and insert the pump into the block tightening to,
23.0–28.4Nm (17–21lbf ft).
4. Fit a new O–Ring into suction port. Lubricate and
insert tube/screen assembly (1) into pump
through bottom of engine. Fitting a new gasket
(2), torque the attaching bolts (3) to,
27–34Nm (20–25 lbf ft).
5. Refit gears and check backlash as previously de-
scribed, refer to chapter 1.
8
6. Ensure the engine backplate is fitted correctly
and the bolts are torqued up in sequence. Refer
to chapter 1.
9
Oil Filter Support Assembly
Removal
1. Unscrew and discard the old filter, place to one
side the modine oil cooler body. Loosen the 4 at-
taching bolts and oil connections and remove the
filter support assembly from the block. Discard-
ing the O–Rings.
2. Clean the filter support in a suitable solvent.
10
3. Remove pressure relief valve plug (3), removing
valve (1) and spring (2). To ensure correct oper-
ation of the pressure relief valve, check spring
length,
Free length = 52.8mm (2.08 in).
Compressed length = 37.0mm (1.46 in) using a
weight of 15.6 kgs (34.3 lbs).
4. Check the parts for damage, wear, and replace
as necessary. Failure to do so could result in pre-
mature wear to the engine, due to oil bypassing
the filter and returning back to the system.
11
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Installation
1. Lubricate the pressure relief valve and spring
and insert into housing, ensuring free movement.
Fit a new ‘O’–Ring to the plug and torque to,

55N m (42 lbf ft).
NOTE: On some models including the turbocharged
version the pressure relief valve ‘‘end plug’’ is re-
placed by an oil return tube from the engine block.
Where this pipe is fitted a plug is used to blank the oil
return port to the engine block.
2. Fit tube (1) to the connector and torque to 27Nm
(20 lbf ft).
3. Refit the oil filter head to the engine block with
new O–rings (2) and plug where required as
above and torque the bolts to,
34–47Nm (26–35 lbf ft)
2
1
APB10011
12
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 10 – COOLING 92 TO 108HP – CHAPTER 5 1
Chapter 5 – Cooling
CONTENT
10 400 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SPECIFICATIONS
THERMOSTAT
Opening Temperature 79–83°C (174–181°F)
Fully Open 93–96°C (199–205°F)
RADIATOR CAP
Opening Pressure 0.9 bar (13 lbs in2)
WATER PUMP
Type Centrifugal
Drive V Belt
FAN BELT
Belt Tension 10mm (0.4 in) freeplay at longest point
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITIES

Model Litres U.S. Gals
4 CYL 22.0 5.8
COOLING FLUID
Content Mixture – Water 50%, Antifreeze 50% . If the recommended antifreeze is not used, a heavy duty anti-
freeze must be used with a 5% solution of Inhibitor. This inhibitor must be added to the cooling system and is
available from Dealers Part No FW 15.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 10 – COOLING 92 TO 108HP – CHAPTER 5
TORQUES
Water Pump–to–Cylinder Block 48 35 3.6

Water Pump Cover–to–Pump 27 20 2.8
Thermostat Housing Bolts 24 18 2.4
Fan Blade to Support Body 27 21 2.8
Temperature Senders 20 15 2.0
SPECIAL TOOLS
AS REQUIRED REFER TO SECTION 00 – CHAPTER 4
SEALANTS
Code Name
82995768 Sealer–Anaerobic Low strength
82995776 Sealer–Silicone
82995774 Sealer–Polyester Urethane
82995773 Sealer–Anaerobic
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

COOLING SYSTEM (OP NO 10 400)

NOTE: Do not operate an engine without a thermo-
stat. It is recommended that a solution of a 50% clean
water, and 50% recommended antifreeze, see spec-
ifications, is used. When the recommended Anti-
freeze is not used, a 5% solution of the recom-
mended inhibitor must be added to the cooling
system.
The cooling system for the new generation of en-
gines, is of the recirculating by–pass type with full
length water jackets for each cylinder. The coolant is
drawn from the bottom tank of the radiator by the
water pump, which passes the coolant to the cylinder
block. This coolant then flows through cored pass-
ages to cool the cylinder walls.
The thermostat is located in the top of the water
pump body, and controls the flow of the water as re-
quired by temperature changes.
NOTE: A faulty thermostat may cause the engine to
operate at too hot, or cold, an operating temperature.
If not replaced this could result in a damaged engine,
or impaired engine performance.
When the thermostat is closed a recirculating by–
pass is provided to allow the coolant to recirculate
from the head to the block to effect a faster warm–up.
1
Once the engine has reached its normal operating
temperature, the thermostat will open and allow
water to be drawn through the radiator by the pump
action. Cooled water then returns to the engine sys-
tem.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FAULT FINDING
Engine overheats
1. Hose connection leaking or 1. Tighten hose connection,
collapsed renew hose if damaged
2. Radiator cap defective or not 2. Renew radiator cap

sealing
3. Radiator leakage 3. Repair/renew radiator
4. Improper fan belt adjustment 4. Re–adjust fan belt
5. Radiator fins restricted 5. Clean with compressed air
6. Faulty thermostat 6. Renew thermostat
7. Internal engine leakage 7. Check for source of leakage,

renew gasket or defective
parts
8. Water pump faulty 8. Overhaul water pump
9. Exhaust gas leakage into 9. Renew cylinder head gasket,

cooling system check head for damage or
distortion
10. Coolant aeration 10. Tighten all connections and

check coolant level is correct.
Ensure cylinder head gasket
has not blown
11. Cylinder head gasket 11. Renew cylinder head gasket

improperly installed
12. Hot spot due to rust and scale 12. Reverse flush entire cooling
or clogged water jackets system
13. Obstruction to radiator air 13. Remove the obstruction

flow
14. Extended engine idling 14. Do not allow engine to idle for
long periods
15. Oil cooler tube blocked 15.Clean
16. Radiator core tubes blocked 16. Check free flow
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Water temperature 1. Faulty temperature sender 1. Renew sender switch

gauge fails to reach
normal operating tem- 2. Incorrect or faulty thermostat 2. Renew thermostat
perature
3. Faulty water temperature 3. Renew temperature gauge
gauge
OVERHAUL
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Radiator Removal
Raise the Loader to full height and secure with the
loader arm support.
4. Detach the right and left hand engine side pan-
els.
Switch of battery at the isolator key
5. Remove the engine coolant drain plug (1) situ-
ated behind the oil filter body on the left hand side
of the engine and drain the coolant into a suitable
clean container.
4
Remove:
1
Muffler Stack Pipe
Pre Cleaner
Engine Top Hood
Front Nose Grille
Front Nose
6. Loosen the radiator lower hose at the rear of the

radiator and drain the coolant off into a suitable
clean container. Remove the expansion radiator
cap to speed up the draining, using caution if the
system is hot.
5
7. Attached in front of the radiator is the hydraulic
system oil cooler (1). 1
6
8. The air–conditioning condenser (when fitted) is
mounted in front of the radiator.
9. Ensure all pipes are disconnected, looms are un-
clipped, and away from the radiator assembly.
10. Remove the attaching bolts and lift the radiator
up and clear of the vehicle.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2


1. Inspect the fins for damage and repair as re-
quired, ensuring they are free from any obstruc-
tion.
2. Check the radiator for leaks, and repair as re-
quired. The radiator is fitted with an engine oil
heat exchanger in the lower tank which should be
checked for leaks.
Installation
Installation of the radiator follows the removal pro-
cedure in reverse, but upon installation observe the
following requirements.
1. Refill the system through the coolant recovery
radiator pressure cap until completely full. Re–in-
stall the 0.9bar (13 psi) radiator cap and continue
filling through the expansion tank until full. Refit
expansion cap.
2. If engine oil cooler tubes have been disturbed
check the engine oil level.
3. Run the engine for several minutes checking for
leaks, topping up any fluid levels that may have
settled during testing.
THERMOSTAT REMOVAL
1. Drain the coolant system below that of the level
of the thermostat housing.
2. Remove the thermostat housing retaining bolts
(1), and move the housing with tube attached to
one side.
7
3. Withdraw the thermostat (2) from the housing,
along with the gasket. 1
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


1. Place the thermostat in a container of water, and
raise the temperature to 100°C (212°F). If the
thermostat fails to open when hot, or close
properly when cooled, it must be replaced.
9
Installation
Installation of the thermostat is the reverse of the re-
moval procedure but observing the following:
1. Prior to re–assembly ensure the thermostat
housing faces are clean and free of old sealer or
gasket material. Clean the faces with a small
stone or fine grit paper.
2. Coat a new gasket with sealer 82995774 and
position in the recess on the thermostat housing,
prior to installing the thermostat.
3. Coat the edge of the thermostat with grease and
install, with the heat element located in the cylin-
der head.
4. Refit the thermostat housing and torque the two
bolts to 20–28Nm (15–21 lbs ft).
5. Ensure the correct grade, and quantity of anti-
freeze, is added to the coolant. Recommended
content mixture is Water 50%, with 50% Anti-
freeze to WSN–M97B18–D specification.
TEMPERATURE WARNING SENDER
1. The engine temperature sender for the gauge
(1), and the temperature warning light (2), (where
fitted), are located on the thermostat housing.
Installation
1. If a fault occurs fit a new sender and apply seal-
ant to the threaded portion of the sender body
and torque to, 16–24Nm (12–18 lbf ft).
10
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

FAN BLADE REMOVAL

1. Removal of the fan blade from the water pump
spigot, can be achieved in the following manner.
Secure the fan blade in a fixed position and re-
move the four attaching screws.
2. Withdraw the fan blade
Re–Assembly
1. Re–assemble the fan blade using the four at-
taching bolts, loctite and torque the bolts to,
20–25Nm (15–18 lbf ft)
11
WATER PUMP– Removal
1. Drain the cooling system.
2. Remove the radiator as detailed previously.
3. Remove the alternator drive belt.
4. Disconnect the bypass hose at the outlet con-
nection.
5. Remove the four bolts which pass through the
water pump into the block and remove the pump.
12
Disassembly
1. Withdraw the attaching bolts and remove the fan
from the pump pulley.
2. Use Puller (1) and a sleeve slightly smaller in di-
ameter than the pulley shaft to remove the pump
pulley.
3. Remove the retaining bolts, then separate the
pump covers and discard the gasket.
13
4. Using a press and an adaptor with a diameter
slightly smaller than the bearing shaft, press the
bearing assembly out of the pump housing and
discard the bearing.
5. Use a suitable sleeve and press the seal assembly
out of the impeller side of the pump housing. Dis-
card the seal assembly.
14
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Inspection and Wear

1. Check the impeller (2) for worn or damaged
vanes. Install a new impeller if the vanes are
damaged.
15
2. Check both parts of the pump housing (1) and (3)
for cracks or signs of leakage. Replace any de-
fective parts, figures 10 and 11.
16
Re–assembly
1. Use a sleeve, which passes over the shaft and
rests on the outside diameter of the bearing.
Press the bearing and shaft assembly into the
housing until the bearing is flush with the face of
the housing or within 0.08mm (0.003in). Use a
straightedge to check the final position.
2. Turn the pump housing over and position in a
press with the seal bore facing upwards.
3. Place Tool (1) over the shaft and onto the seal as-
sembly. Press the seal into the bore until the
flange is flush with the top of the housing.
17
4. Coat the outer diameter of the seal flange with a
thin application of thread sealer and position the
seal assembly over the shaft in the center bore 1
of the housing.
18
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

1. Pulley
2. Front housing
3. Rear housing
4. Attaching bolts
5. Impellor
6. Bearing seal
7. Bearing shaft
19
5. Support the shaft on a block of wood and use a
length of pipe of suitable internal diameter to
press the impeller onto the shaft and flush with
the rear face of the housing. Check the final posi-
tion with a straightedge to 0–0.38mm
(0–0.014in).
20
6. Support the shaft on a block of wood and press
the pulley onto the shaft to the dimension (1) of
62.484–63.144mm (2.460–2.486in). This di-
mension is from the rear face of the front cover
to the center of the 1st pulley V-groove (closest
to the water pump). After installation, be sure that
the pulley runs true on the shaft. 1
21
7. Install a new gasket and assemble the front and
rear halves of the pump together and tighten the
bolts to 27Nm (20 lbf ft) torque.
8. Install the fan on the pulley and tighten the bolts
to the 27Nm (21lbf ft) torque.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Engine Oil Cooling

Engine oil cooling is assisted by a cooler (1) fitted be-
tween the oil filter head (2) and oil filter (3).
With the oil filter removed the cooler can be removed
and cleaned.
NOTE: The cooler is a sealed unit and therefore can
only be cleaned. If any internal leakage or damage
is apparent replace with a new cooler.
22
Installation
Installation of the water pump follows the removal
procedure in reverse. On installation observe the fol-
lowing requirements:
1. Install a new pump gasket.
2. Adjust the alternator drive belt tension. Deflec-
tion of the V-Belt should be:
10mm (0.4in) Midway between pulleys.
3. After installation of the radiator, fill the cooling
system and run the engine to check for leaks.
23
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 17 – TORQUE CONVERTOR WITH POWERSHUTTLE – CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 17 – TORQUE CONVERTOR
Chapter 1 – With Powershuttle Transmission
CONTENT
17 100 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine Stall Speeds
Power Shuttle Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2009–2065 revs/min
Torque Convertor Ratio

Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34 : 1
Lubricant
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Litres (3.4 US. gals) (Transmission only) – Two wheel Drive
.......................................... 14 Litres (3.7 US. gals) (Transmission only) – Four wheel Drive
.......................................... 17 Litres (4.5 US. gals) System –Two Wheel Drive
.......................................... 18 Litres (4.7 US. gals) System – Four Wheel Drive
Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MULTI G 10W30 – A.P.I. GL4 – ISO 32/46
Hydraulic Tests
Tachometer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2000 revs/min
Test temperature, oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80–85°C (176–185°F)
Cold Start Valve (For reference only) . . . . . . . . . 26 bar (377 psi)
System Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7–15.2 bar (198–220 psi)
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11 bar (101–159 psi)
Sealant
Gasket sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82995774
Thread sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82995768
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Item Description N·m ft. lbs.
Cooler return pipe union 49-78 36-58
Cooler return pipe elbow 49-78 36-58
Stator support retaining bolt 26 19
Flywheel to flex plate 43 32
Flex plate to converter 43 32
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 17 – TORQUE CONVERTOR WITH POWER SHUTTLE – CHAPTER 1
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2


The main parts of the torque converter (1) are the im-
peller (pump), the turbine, the stator and the front
and rear covers. The impeller is integral with the rear
cover and is driven by the engine flywheel by means
of a drive plate.
The turbine (2), splined to the front input shaft, is
splined to a stationary shaft (stator support) through
a one-way clutch that permits the stator (3) to rotate
only in the same direction as the impeller (1). All of
the converter parts are enclosed in an oil-filled hous-
ing. The front and rear cover, welded together, form
the housing.
The stator (3), is splined to a stationary shaft (stator
support) through a one-way clutch that permits the
stator to rotate only in the same direction as the im-
peller. All of the converter parts are enclosed in an oil-
filled housing. The front and rear cover, being welded
together, form the housing.
When the engine is running, the oil in the converter
flows from the impeller (1) to the turbine (2) and back
to the impeller through the stator (3). This flow pro-
duces a maximum torque increase. When enough oil
flow is developed by the impeller, the turbine begins
to rotate, driving the front input shaft. The torque
multiplication gradually decreases as turbine speed
approaches impeller speed, and becomes 1 to 1
when the turbine is being driven at nine tenths im-
peller speed.
2
When the turbine (1) is rotating at approximately nine
tenths impeller speed, the converter stops multiply-
ing torque because the oil is now acting on the rear
face of the stator blades (2). The action of the oil on
the rear face of the stator unlocks the one-way clutch
(3), permitting the stator to rotate in the same direc-
tion as the turbine and impeller. Through this action
the converter becomes an efficient fluid coupling by
transmitting engine torque from the impeller to the
turbine.
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FAULT FINDING
IMPORTANT: When effecting a repair the cause of the problem must be investigated and corrected to avoid
repeat failures.
The following table lists problems and their possible causes with recommended remedial action.

1. Low stall speed Hydraulic clutch not releasing. Replace Torque Convertor
Stator support broken. Replace Torque Convertor
Defective torque converter. Replace Torque Convertor
Low engine power. Check and correct output
2. High stall speed Hydraulic clutch not applying or
is slipping. Replace
Low line pressure. Check pump output
Sealing rings on rear input
shaft broken.
Replace seals
Defective torque converter.
Replace Torque Convertor
OVERHAUL
NOTE: To remove the torque convertor refer to the
transmission section 21 000 for disassembly pro-
cedure.
The torque converter, is a welded unit and cannot be
disassembled. The only maintenance performed on
the converter, other than the stall test, is cleaning and
visual inspection. A commercial torque converter
cleaner may be used to clean the converter. How-
ever, if a commercial cleaner is not available, the
converter should be cleaned as outlined below.
4
1. Drain as much oil as possible from the hub of the
converter by tilting the converter in all directions.
2. Fill the converter about half full, through the hub
(1), with paraffin base solvent or any cleaning
solvent specified for cleaning transmissions.
3. Plug the opening in the hub, then circulate the
solvent inside the converter by rotating and shak-
ing.
4. Drain the solvent from the converter.
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4, as required, until the solvent
that is drained from the converter is clean.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

INSPECTION
Inspect the splines on the converter hub for wear or
damage and the weld joints for cracks. If the hub is
worn or damaged and/or the weld joints cracked, a
new converter must be installed. A new drive plate
should also be installed if it is warped.
RE–ASSEMBLY
1. Secure the drive plate to the torque converter,
with the attaching bolts and flat washers (1) .
Tighten bolts to 41 Nm (30 lbf ft).
2. Prior to fitting the transmission place the torque
convertor carefully over the transmission shaft
and into the transmission housing.
3. With the transmission bolted to the engine se-
cure the drive plate to the flywheel accessed
through the starter motor aperture, with the at-
taching bolts and washers (2). Tighten bolts to 41
Nm (30 lbf ft).
6
STALL TEST
The purpose of this test is to determine if the torque
converter and hydraulic clutch assemblies are oper-
ating satisfactorily. For the test to be conclusive, the
transmission hydraulic pump and pressure regulat-
ing valve must be operating correctly. They can be
checked by performing the “Line Pressure Test”. The
engine and brakes must also be in good working
order.
1. Check the coolant level in the radiator and the oil
level in the transmission. If low, add fluid as re-
quired to bring to the proper level.
2. With the gearshift lever and the shuttle lever in
neutral, start the engine and run at 800-1000
revs/min until the transmission temperature re-
aches 85° - 95° F (29° - 35° C).
3. Lock the brakes and shift into fourth gear, in-
crease engine speed to approximately 900 revs/
min, then shift the power reversing lever to the
forward position. This will position the control
valve so as to direct high pressure oil to the front
clutch.
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

4. Ensure the brakes are firmly locked so the unit

will not move, gradually depress the foot acceler-
ator and note the maximum engine speed ob-
tained. Move the power reversing lever to the
neutral position. The stall speed should be:
STALL SPEED:
Power Shuttle Transmission Models 90.2 (Outside of N/America) 1980

. . . . revs/min
.
Power Shuttle Transmission Models 100.2 (Outside of N/America) . . 2082
. . . . revs/min
IMPORTANT: To prevent the transmission from

overheating, do not allow the engine to operate at
wide open throttle for more than fifteen seconds.
5. Allow the transmission oil to cool to 29°-35° C
(85°-95° F). Check the rear hydraulic clutch by
repeating Steps 3 and 4, but with the power re-
versing lever in the rearward position. Again,
cool the transmission oil by allowing the engine
to run at approximately 1000 revs/min for one
minute.
6. The engine speed noted in Step 4 (stall speed)
for both the front and rear clutch assemblies
should be within 150 revs/min of each other. If the
stall speed is not within these limits, refer to the
diagnosis guide for possible causes.
7. With the gearshift lever and power reversing
lever in neutral, set the engine speed at 600-800
revs/min, then shift into any gear ratio. If the
gears clash, either the front or rear hydraulic
clutch assembly is transmitting power, even
though the power reversing lever is in neutral.
NOTE:If the unit creeps forward and the gears clash,
the front clutch is at fault. The rear clutch is at fault
if the unit creeps backward. If the unit does not creep
and the gears still clash, use the stabilizers to raise
the rear wheels off the ground, move the power re-
versing lever to neutral and shift into first gear. Check
the rear wheels for rotational direction - if the wheel
rotate rearward, then the rear clutch is at fault.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

SECTION 17 – TORQUE CONVERTOR WITH POWERSHIFT – CHAPTER 2 1
SECTION 17 – TORQUE CONVERTOR
Chapter 2 – WITH POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION
CONTENT
17 200 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine Stall Speeds
95 PS Turbocharged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2009–2065 revs/min

Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54 : 1
Lubricant
Oil Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ambra Hydrodex 3
Hydraulic Tests
Torque Converter relief valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 bar (101–159 psi)
Oil temperature converter out,
Normal operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80–90°C (175–193°F)
Maximum temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120°C (284°F)
Sealant
Gasket sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82995774
Thread sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82995768
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 17 – TORQUE CONVERTOR WITH POWERSHIFT – CHAPTER 2
1
Torque converter and lubrication pressure test ports.
1. System pressure port. 4. Oil temperature converter out port.
2. Torque converter in port. 5. Oil temperature cooler out port.
3. Torque converter out port. 6. Lubrication pressure port.
2
Left Hand Side View
1. Pressure test port Convertor in 5–11 bar (73–159
psi)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2


The main parts of the torque converter (1) are the im-
peller (pump), the turbine, the stator and the front
and rear covers. The impeller is integral with the rear
cover and is driven by the engine flywheel by means
of a drive plate.
the housing.
The stator (3), is splined to a stationary shaft (stator
support) through a one-way clutch that permits the
stator to rotate only in the same direction as the im-
peller. All of the converter parts are enclosed in an oil-
filled housing. The front and rear cover, being welded
together, form the housing.
peller speed.
3
When the turbine (1) is rotating at approximately nine
the rear face of the stator unlocks the one-way clutch
(3), permitting the stator to rotate in the same direc-
tion as the turbine and impeller. Through this action
the converter becomes an efficient fluid coupling by
transmitting engine torque from the impeller to the
turbine.
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FAULT FINDING
IMPORTANT: When effecting a repair the cause of the problem must be investigated and corrected to avoid
repeat failures.
The following table lists problems and their possible causes with recommended remedial action.

1. Low stall speed Hydraulic clutch not releasing. Replace Torque Convertor
Stator support broken. Replace Torque Convertor
Defective torque converter. Replace Torque Convertor
Low engine power. Check and correct output
is slipping. Replace
Low line pressure. Check pump output
Sealing rings on rear input
shaft broken.
Replace seals
Replace Torque Convertor
OVERHAUL
NOTE: To remove the torque convertor refer to the
transmission section 21 000 for disassembly pro-
cedure.
The torque converter, is a welded unit and cannot be
disassembled. The only maintenance performed on
the converter, other than the stall test, is cleaning and
visual inspection. A commercial torque converter
cleaner may be used to clean the converter. How-
ever, if a commercial cleaner is not available, the
converter should be cleaned as outlined below.
5
1. Drain as much oil as possible from the hub of the
converter by tilting the converter in all directions.
2. Fill the converter about half full, through the hub
(1), with paraffin base solvent or any cleaning
solvent specified for cleaning transmissions.
3. Plug the opening in the hub, then circulate the
solvent inside the converter by rotating and shak-
ing.
4. Drain the solvent from the converter.
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4, as required, until the solvent
that is drained from the converter is clean.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

INSPECTION
Inspect the splines on the converter hub for wear or
damage and the weld joints for cracks. If the hub is
worn or damaged and/or the weld joints cracked, a
new converter must be installed. A new drive plate
should also be installed if it is warped.
RE–ASSEMBLY
1. Secure the drive plate to the torque converter,
with the attaching bolts and flat washers (1) .
Tighten bolts to 41 Nm (30 lbf ft).
2. Prior to fitting the transmission place the torque
convertor carefully over the transmission shaft
and into the transmission housing.
3. With the transmission bolted to the engine se-
cure the drive plate to the flywheel accessed
through the starter motor aperture, with the at-
taching bolts and washers (2). Tighten bolts to 41
Nm (30 lbf ft).
7
STALL TEST
The purpose of this test is to determine if the torque
converter and hydraulic clutch assemblies are oper-
ating satisfactorily. For the test to be conclusive, the
transmission hydraulic pump and pressure regulat-
ing valve must be operating correctly. They can be
checked by performing the “Line Pressure Test”. The
engine and brakes must also be in good working
order.
1. Check the coolant level in the radiator and the oil
level in the transmission. If low, add fluid as re-
quired to bring to the proper level.
2. With the gearshift lever and the shuttle lever in
neutral, start the engine and run at 800-1000
revs/min until the transmission temperature re-
aches 85° - 95° F (29° - 35° C).
3. Lock the brakes and shift into fourth gear, in-
crease engine speed to approximately 900 revs/
min, then shift the power reversing lever to the
forward position. This will position the control
valve so as to direct high pressure oil to the front
clutch.
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

4. Ensure the brakes are firmly locked so the unit

will not move, gradually depress the foot acceler-
ator and note the maximum engine speed ob-
tained. Move the power reversing lever to the
neutral position. The stall speed should be:
STALL TORQUE:
Power Shift Transmission Models 110.2-200.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . .T.B.A
. . . . . revs/min
..
IMPORTANT: To prevent the transmission from

overheating, do not allow the engine to operate at
wide open throttle for more than fifteen seconds.
5. Allow the transmission oil to cool to 29°-35° C
(85°-95° F). Check the rear hydraulic clutch by
repeating Steps 3 and 4, but with the power re-
versing lever in the rearward position. Again,
cool the transmission oil by allowing the engine
to run at approximately 1000 revs/min for one
minute.
6. The engine speed noted in Step 4 (stall speed)
for both the front and rear clutch assemblies
should be within 150 revs/min of each other. If the
stall speed is not within these limits, refer to the
diagnosis guide for possible causes.
7. With the gearshift lever and power reversing
lever in neutral, set the engine speed at 600-800
revs/min, then shift into any gear ratio. If the
gears clash, either the front or rear hydraulic
clutch assembly is transmitting power, even
though the power reversing lever is in neutral.
NOTE:If the unit creeps forward and the gears clash,
the front clutch is at fault. The rear clutch is at fault
if the unit creeps backward. If the unit does not creep
and the gears still clash, use the stabilizers to raise
the rear wheels off the ground, move the power re-
versing lever to neutral and shift into first gear. Check
the rear wheels for rotational direction - if the wheel
rotate rearward, then the rear clutch is at fault.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

SECTION 21 – POWERSHUTTLE TRANSMISSION – CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 21 – TRANSMISSION
Chapter 1 – 4X4 Compact Shuttle
CONTENT
21 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Brake disc and calliper assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Four Wheel Drive Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Input shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Lubrication and Oil Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Main output shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Pressure Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Shimming procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
SPECIFICATIONS
Stall Speeds
92 hp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1929–1982 revs/min
108 hp Turbocharged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2009–2065 revs/min

Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34 : 1
Gear Ratios
Synchronized 4x4 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward 1st 4.824:1 Reverse 1st 4.020:1
Forward 2nd 2.998:1 Reverse 2nd 2.498:1
Forward 3rd 1.408:1 Reverse 3rd 1.173:1
Forward 4th 0.792:1 Reverse 4th 0.660:1
Lubricant
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Litres (3.4 US. gals) (Transmission only) – Two wheel Drive
.......................................... 14 Litres (3.7 US. gals) (Transmission only) – Four wheel Drive
.......................................... 17 Litres (4.5 US. gals) System –Two Wheel Drive
.......................................... 18 Litres (4.7 US. gals) System – Four Wheel Drive
Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MULTI G 10W30 – A.P.I. GL4 – ISO 32/46
Sealant
Gasket sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82995774
Thread sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82995768
Cold Start By–pass Valve Spring

Free length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53.4mm +/– 0.96mm (2.10in +/– 0.038in)
Fwd Clutch Spring
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 21 – POWERSHUTTLE TRANSMISSION – CHAPTER 1
Free length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76.6mm (3.017in)
Clutch Piston Spring

Free length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75.9mm (2.99in)
Detent Spring
Free length (Approximately) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.06mm (1.656in)
End Float
Input forward Primary Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0508–0.41mm (0.002–0.016in)
Input reverse Primary Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0508–0.41mm (0.002–0.016in)
Output shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1st Gear– 0.33–0.508mm (0.013–0.020in)
.......................................... 2nd Gear– 0.35–0.558mm (0.014–0.022in)
.......................................... 3rd Gear– 0.38–0.838mm (0.015–0.033in)
.......................................... 4th Gear– 0.20–0.558mm (0.008–0.022in)
Four Wheel Drive Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.050–0.28mm (0.002–0.011in)
Bearing End Floats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025–0.076mm (0.001–0.003in)
Bearing End Float Shims available . . . . . . . . . . 0.050/0.076/0.127/0.177/0.381/0.508mm
.......................................... (0.002/0.003/0.005/0.007/0.015/0.020in)
Hydraulic Tests
Cold Start Valve (For reference only) . . . . . . . . . 26 bar (377 psi)
System Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7–15.2 bar (198–220 psi)
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11 bar (101–159 psi)
Reverse Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7–15.2 bar (198–220 psi)
Forward Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7–15.2 bar (198–220 psi)
Four Wheel Drive Drive Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7–15.2 bar (198–220 psi)
Cooler Flow Test

Oil temperature 80–85°C (176–185°F) Revs/min Oil Flow Litres/min (gallons/min)
.......................................... 700 12.5 litres (3.3 US. gals)
.......................................... 1000 18.2 litres (4.8 US. gals)
.......................................... 1500 22.1 litres (5.8 US. gals)
.......................................... 2000 24.0 litres (6.3 US. gals)
.......................................... 2200 24.5 litres (6.5 US. gals)
.......................................... 2500 25.0 litres (6.6 US. gals)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SPECIAL TOOLS
DESCRIPTION APPLICATION
Bearing Cone Drift 40mm Counter Shaft, Rear Main Shaft and 4WD Bearing
Bearing Cone Drift 35mm Reverse Idler and Front Main Shaft Bearing
Bearing Cone Drift 40mm Front Input Shaft Bearing
Bearing Cone Drift 50mm Rear Input Shaft Bearing
Slide Hammer Bearing cone removal
Bush Insertion Tool 22mm Pump rod Insertion Tool
Welch Plug Drift Shim Adjustment Cover
Oil Seal Drift Pump Seal
*Spring Compressor Main Clutches Tool no 297394
Spring Compressor Detent Ball Spring
Circlip Pliers . Where applicable
Feeler Gauges Where applicable
*Dial Indicator Bolt Shaft end float Tool no 297395
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2


The transmission consists of a torque converter, an
internal rotor-type hydraulic pump, an oil distributor,
a solenoid control valve assembly, two hydraulically
operated clutches, a 4-speed synchromesh gear-
train, transmission case and oil cooler tubes.
GEAR RATIOS Synchronized 4x4 Transmission

Forward 1st – 4.824:1 . Reverse 1st – 4.020:1
Forward 2nd – 2.998:1 . Reverse 2nd – 2.498:1
Forward 3rd –1.408:1 . Reverse 3rd – 1.173:1
Forward 4th – 0.792:1 . Reverse 4th – 0.660:1
3
NOTE: A conventional clutch is not used with this
transmission.
The transmission case serves as an oil reservoir for
the torque converter and hydraulic clutch assem-
blies.
The gearbox receives power from the engine (1) by
a fluid coupling in the torque converter (2) and hy-
draulic clutch assemblies in the transmission (3).
TRANSMISSION CONTROL (Op 21 136)

4
The front clutch provides power for forward travel
and the rear clutch power for reverse travel. Engage-
ment of the front and rear clutch is controlled by the 2
operator through the movement of the hand oper-
ated power reversing lever (1). F 1
The gearshift lever (2) is used to select any one of 1 3
four speeds through an ‘H’ pattern synchronized
gear shift.
In any gear ratio the operator need only move the
shuttle lever to change direction of travel, forward or
reverse.
N
R 2
H 4
Transmission disconnect switches (Op 21 136)
5
Two finger operated button type switches (1) are pro-
vided. One on the gearshift lever knob, primarily to
change gear ratios and the second on the loader con-
trol lever knob for use during loader operations.
However, as a clutch is not used between the engine
1
and the transmission, the power flow from the engine
to the transmission must be interrupted to shift from
one gear ratio to another. This is accomplished by
using a transmission disconnect switch on the gear
lever.
Easy gear changes may be made with the fully syn-
chronized gearbox, simply by depressing the trans-
mission disconnect button on the gearshift lever
while moving the lever from one ratio to another. 6
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

TORQUE CONVERTER (OP 17 110)

NOTE: The torque converter is a sealed unit and can
not be serviced as individual parts.
The torque converter is the connection between the
engine and the transmission and is hydraulically
actuated.
The main parts of the torque converter are the im-
peller, the turbine, the stator and the front and rear
covers. The impeller is integral with the rear cover
and is driven by the engine flywheel by means of a
drive plate.
The stator, is splined to a stationary shaft (stator sup-
port) through a one-way clutch that permits the stator
to rotate only in the same direction as the impeller. All
of the converter parts are enclosed in an oil-filled
housing. The front and rear cover, being welded to-
gether, form the housing.
the housing.
7
peller speed.
When the turbine is rotating at approximately nine
the rear face of the stator unlocks the one-way
clutch, permitting the stator to rotate in the same
direction as the turbine (2) and impeller (1). Through
this action the converter becomes an efficient fluid
coupling by transmitting engine torque from the im-
peller to the turbine.
To achieve optimum operation the engine perform-
ance, transmission ratios, hydraulic power delivery
and converter torque multiplication are all ‘‘Matched’’
to provide the necessary vehicle drive torque when
required.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

When the turbine is rotating less than nine tenths im-

peller speed (1), the converter is multiplying torque
through the action of the stator (3). This action, pro-
duced by oil acting on the front face of the stator
blades, tends to rotate the stator in the opposite
direction of the impeller (1) and turbine (2). However,
the one-way clutch prevents this opposite rotation
and allows the stator to direct oil back to the impeller,
thereby producing torque multiplication. Maximum
torque multiplication is achieved when the impeller is
driven at stall speed and the turbine is stationary
8
GEAR TRAIN (Op. 21 146)
The front and rear cases of the transmission sand-
wich a series of parallel shafts which support the heli-
cally cut gears, between tapered roller bearings.
Polymer lip seals on the hydraulic pump output and
FWD shafts prevent leakage from the sump. A
breather at the top of the filler tube prevents pressure
damage to the seals.
9
GEAR SHIFT MECHANISM (Op. 21 136)
A mechanical arrangement of shift rails, forks and
synchronisers allows static or rolling engagement of
any of the 4 transmission ratios from a standard H
gate pattern lever.
The synchronisers prevent engagement of the se-
lected gear until its shaft speed is synchronised with 1
that of the output shaft. A detent interlock system
prevents gear jumpout and the simultaneous en-
gagement of 2 gears.
10
PARKING BRAKE (Op. 21 136)
At the rear of the transmission and on the output
coupling a cast iron disc acts as the mounting flange
and parking brake. The disc runs in a mechanical cal-
liper which reacts through a bracket connected to the
transmission rear housing. The calliper has replace-
able friction pads and is manually adjustable as the
pads wear
1
11
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CO–AXIAL DRIVE VEHICLE HYDRAULIC PUMP

(Op. 21 146)
A solid shaft connects the flywheel (via the torque
converter impeller) to the vehicle hydraulic pump
input shaft.
The pump drive shaft passes through the tubular
input shaft and is supported at the rear by a bush. Ac-
cordingly, the main pump will run at engine speed re-
gardless of the ratio or direction of the transmission.
An integral strainer in the transmission sump and
spin on filter mounted to the left of the transmission
at the top ensure that the oil remains clean between
service intervals.
12
The dipstick/oil filler tube (1) is used for monitoring
and maintenance of the oil level, in the transmission.
TAB21096
13
TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC PUMP OIL
SUPPLY (OP. 21 102 )
The transmission case serves as an oil reservoir for
the torque converter and clutch assemblies.
An integral hydraulic oil pump situated in the bell
draws oil from the transmission sump to provide a
pressurised flow which is continuously cooled by an
external cooler.
Oil is picked up from the sump, via an internal
strainer, through the inlet section of the pump plate
by the action of the rotors, and is forced through the
outlet section of the pump plate through the spin on
pressure filter to the oil distributor.
A temperature sender provides a signal to the instru-
ment panel warning light should the transmission oil
become to hot. 14
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

TRANSMISSION OIL FLOW AND SUPPLY
15
Pressure Oil Lubrication
Disengaged
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

OIL FLOW AND SUPPLY IN NEUTRAL POSITION 16
Pump Pressure Torque Convertor Flow Suction
Return to Sump Lubrication

1. Shuttle control solenoid valve oil 14 bar (203 psi). 6. Cold Start Pressure protection Valve – Prevents sys-
2. Torque Convertor – Receives low pressure circuit oil tem pressure exceeding 26 bar (377 psi) at initial
at maximum 10 bar (145 psi) and returns oil to port cold start.
(10). 7. Oil Pump Port OUT, to oil filter assembly through
3. Backhoe Boom Lock oil flow 14 bar (203 psi). internal drillings.
4. Pressure filter – Mounted to the left of the trans- 8. Oil returned from the oil cooler lubricates shafts,
mission viewed looking forward. gears and bearings and returns oil to reservoir.
5. FWD – Low pressure circuit oil supply received from
the filter at 14 bar (203 psi) and fed by external tube
to rear of transmission to the FWD.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

OIL FLOW AND SUPPLY IN FORWARD POSITION 17
Pump Pressure Torque Convertor Flow Suction
Return to Sump Lubrication

1. Returned lubrication oil from the pump shaft bush to 5. Oil pump suction port IN, from the reservoir.
reservoir. 6. Torque Converter oil OUT, to oil cooler
2. Torque Converter oil supply IN, received at maxi- 7. Torque Convertor pressure regulating valve, re-
mum 10 bar (145 psi). ceives oil from the sequencing valve (16) and re-
3. Transmission Reservoir/System Capacity: turns oil in excess of 10 bar (145 psi) to reservoir.
17 litres (2wd) 18 litres (4wd). 8. System pressure sequencing valve – Maintains cir-
4. Oil Cooler – Mounted below the engine coolant radi- cuit oil at 14 bar (203 psi) and supplies a continuous
ator. oil feed to the torque convertor regulating valve.
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

TRANSMISSION OIL SUPPLY PORTS
20
19
18
Viewed From Front and Rear Housings
1. Oil supply port to Reverse clutch pack, rear casing. 11. Torque convertor pressure regulating valve.
2. Oil supply port to forward clutch pack, rear casing. 12. Oil supply from pump to solenoid valve pack.
3. Oil supply port to pressure test reverse clutch pack. 13. Oil supply port to Reverse clutch pack, front casing.
4. Oil supply port too pressure test forward clutch pack. 14. Oil port to reservoir (dump) from solenoid.
5. Front Wheel Drive Solenoid. 15. Oil supply port to Reverse clutch pack, front casing.
6. System pressure test point, connected to test block. 16. Oil supply port to forward clutch pack, front casing.
7. Locating Dowel 17. Oil supply port to forward clutch pack, front casing.
8. Cold start oil pressure protection valve. 18. Manufacturing drilling only.
9. Torque convertor pressure test point, connected to 19. FWD oil supply port (front casing)
test block. 20. FWD oil supply port (rear casing)
10. System pressure sequencing valve.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

TRANSMISSION OIL FLOW THROUGH

SOLENOID VALVE
The solenoid valves forward (1) or reverse (2) fitted
at the top of the transmission housing controls the oil
flow to the forward/reverse clutch packs in the trans-
mission.
19
On the underside of the solenoid valve are the 4 ports
for directional oil flow to and from the solenoid valve.
1. Oil supply from the valve to the forward clutch pack.
2. Return oil to reservoir
3. Oil supply from the valve to the reverse clutch pack.
4. Oil supply from the pump into the valve.
5. Locating Pin
20
When the shuttle lever in the cab is in neutral position
the solenoid valve spool (1) will be static and oil (2)
will not flow into either reverse (3) or forward (4)
clutch pack oil gallery.
21
When forward direction is selected on the the shuttle
lever the solenoid valve spool (1) will move to the left
(as shown) and the oil (2) will flow into the forward
clutch pack oil gallery (4)
When reverse direction is selected on the the shuttle
lever the solenoid valve spool (1) will move to the
right (not shown) and the oil (2) will flow into the re-
verse clutch pack oil gallery (3).
22
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

OIL FLOW SOLENOID CONTROL VALVE

OPERATION (FORWARD DRIVE ONLY
SHOWN)
The solenoid valve when in neutral position dead

heads the oil flow at the spool (1) from the supply port
and no oil is allowed to pass through the valve.
Therefore the oil in the galleries beyond the spool at
the fill time metering valve (2) remains static.
23
Selection of the forward / reverse shuttle lever in the
cab directs a current flow to the forward or reverse
solenoid and the spool (1) will move in the direction
selected, reverse shown. The oil then flows past the
spool to the clutch pack and applies pressure to the
fill time metering valve (2), a small bore allows oil to
flow into the clutch feathering valve.
When valve (2) moves it partially uncovers a port to
the reservoir and also opens the control orifice within
the valve. Therefore a precisely metered flow of oil
is fed to the pressure regulating (feathering) piston
(3). As this piston is pushed back against its spring
the pressure at the clutch builds up gradually to give
a smooth jerk free clutch engagement.
24
When the piston reaches the end of its travel, clutch
pressure quickly builds up to full system pressure
either side of valve (2) so the the light spring pushes
the valve covering the port to the reservoir.
The oil is dead headed at system pressure at the
clutch so ensuring full torque can be transmitted by
the clutch.
25
NOTE: The control valve also includes a pressure
regulating (feathering) valve and a fill time metering
valve for the reverse clutch pack.
= Regulated Pressure Oil
= Return Oil
= Pressure Oil
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC VALVES AND PRESSURE TEST POINTS (OP. 21 102)
11
26
NOTE: All pressure test ports are 9/16 in UNF thread size
1. Cold Start oil pressure relief valve 10. Torque convertor pressure regulating valve
26 bar (377 psi) reference only 7–11 bar (101–159 psi)
2. Forward Solenoid valve 11. Oil in from cooler, test port
13.7–15.2 bar (198–220 psi) 3.5 bar (50 psi)
3. Test port for reverse clutch pack 12. Backhoe Boom Lock supply
13.7–15.2 bar (198–220 psi) 13.7–15.2 bar (198–220 psi)
4. Test port for forward clutch pack 13. System pressure test point
13.7–15.2 bar (198–220 psi) 13.7–15.2 bar (198–220 psi)
5. System pressure sequencing valve 14. Convertor pressure oil test port
13.7–15.2 bar (198–220 psi) 7–11 bar (101–159 psi)
6. Oil flow OUT to cooler 15. Front Wheel Drive Solenoid
13.7–15.2 bar (198–220 psi)
7. Oil OUT to cooler, test port 16. System Oil Filter
6.5 bar (94 psi)
8. Front Wheel Drive test point 17. Reverse Solenoid valve
13.7–15.2 bar (198–220 psi) 13.7–15.2 bar (198–220 psi)
9. Oil flow IN from cooler
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

TRANSMISSION POWER FLOWS (Op. 21 102)

When neutral is selected on the shuttle lever (1), the
transmission forward (3) and reverse hydraulic
clutch packs or (4) are free to rotate and hence there
is no drive in the transmission.
With Forward or Reverse selected on the shuttle

lever (1) power will be directed through the clutch
packs (3) or (4) to the gear train and selection of gear
on lever (2) will result in engagement of gears to the
output shafts.
Power for all four forward gear ratios is transmitted

from the front hydraulic clutch (3) on the input shaft.
The input shaft then transmits power to the counter-
shaft forward gear and the countershaft in turn trans-
mits power to the output shaft.
Power flow for all four reverse gear ratios is the same
as for all four forward gear ratios except that the rear
clutch (4) is engaged to transmit power to the reverse
idler gear. The reverse idler gear in turn transmits
power to the gear on the countershaft and in turn
transmits power to the output shaft .
Because power is being transmitted through the re-

verse idler gear, the countershaft and output shaft
will rotate in the opposite direction as for forward gear
ratios. The rear input shaft will also rotate in the oppo-
site direction. 27
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

TRANSMISSION POWER FLOW
28
Input Output
Intermediate
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

TRANSMISSION POWER FLOWS (FOUR WHEEL DRIVE VERSION SHOWN)
29
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

TRANSMISSION POWER FLOWS (FOUR WHEEL DRIVE VERSION SHOWN)
30
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FAULT FINDING
IMPORTANT: If a malfunction of the transmission is
suspected, a systematic checking procedure should
be followed in order to assist in determining the prob-
lem. When effecting a repair ensure the problem is
corrected to avoid repeat failures.
The following table lists problems and their possible
causes with recommended remedial action.
To assist in the diagnosis of suspected hydraulic sys-
tem failures, test ports have been included in the
transmission housing. The locations Shown in figure
26.
Each port accepts a 9/16in UNF ‘O’ ring connection.
A gauge is required that is capable of measuring to
20 bar (290 lbs in2).
Pressure checks are essential as a failure in the hy-
draulic system can be difficult to trace once the trans-
mission is stripped down on a bench. All pressure
checks should be carried out with the transmission
in neutral gear, engine speed set at 2000 revs/min 31
with oil temperature at 80–85°C (176–185°F).
The temperature can be raised by working the ma-
chine or following the stall procedure as follows
STALL PROCEDURE
Apply the brakes and block wheels. Place the trans-
mission in 4th gear and select forward. With the en-
gine running, gently increase speed to around half
throttle and hold until oil temperature reaches the op-
erating range. Do not stall for more than 30 seconds.
Select neutral for 15 seconds then repeat to reach
the temperature range.
Having achieved temperature, gently increase en-
gine speed to full throttle. Record engine speed. Re-
peat this test in reverse. Engine speed should be:
STALL SPEED:
Power Shuttle Transmission Models 90.2 (Outside of N/America) ..... 1980 revs/min
Power Shuttle Transmission Models 100.2 (Outside of N/America) ...... 2082 revs/min
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

FAULT FINDING
Low pump pressure reading 1. Low or no oil 1. Check on dipstick and top up
2. Pump or pump seal failure 2. Remove converter housing
inspection plate and check for
leaks. Dismantle and replace
pump or seals.
3. Regulator valve stuck open 3. Inspect regulator cartridge
4. Blockage at strainer or 4. Drain and flush the
between filter and pump transmission, clean strainer,
replace filter
5. Damaged convertor splines 5. Repair
6. Cold start valve stuck open 6. Remove and clean
High pump pressure reading 1. Test performed at low oil 1. Retest at 80–85°C
temperature
2. Sticking regulator valve 2. Inspect regulator cartridge

Low converter inlet pressure 1. Converter relief valve failure 1. Inspect converter relief
reading valve
2. Leak in converter, cooling or

cooler hoses 2. Remove converter housing
inspection plate and check for
leaks. Inspect the cooler
High converter inlet pressure 1. Relief valve sticking 1. Inspect converter relief
reading valve
2. Low Oil Temperature 2. Raise Temperature
Low or no clutch pressure 1. Wiring fault 1. Check voltage at directional
reading – Forward or Reverse valve.
Check that the resistance across
each coil is close to 5.0 ohms
2. Sticking directional valve 2. Inspect directional valve
3. Leakage at input shaft or 3. Dismantle and examine
clutch piston seals
Low or no FWD pressure reading 1. Wiring fault 1. Check voltage at FWD
valve.
Check that the resistance across
each coil is close to 7.0 ohms
2. Sticking FWD valve 2. Inspect FWD valve
3. Damage to FWD supply 3. Inspect tube for corrosion or
tube restrictions
4. Leakage at FWD shaft or 4. Dismantle and examine
clutch piston seals
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FAULT FINDING
High oil temperature (frequent 1. Restrictions in cooler 1. Back flush cooler and clean
warnings from temperature light) hoses
2. Binding foot or parking brake 2. Inspect and adjust brakes
3. Excessive stall operation 3. Change work cycles to avoid
stall for more than 30 seconds
4. Worn or slipping clutch 4. Dismantle and replace
plates
5. Worn transmission bearings 5. Dismantle and replace
6. Temperature sensor 6. Check
7. Oil cooler air flow restricted 7. Clean
Stall test inconclusive 1. Low stall speed Hydraulic clutch not releasing.
Stator support broken.
Low engine power.
is slipping.
Low line pressure.
Sealing rings on rear input shaft
broken.
FAULT FINDING – MECHANICAL SYSTEM CHECKS

Noise in neutral 1. Worn or damaged primary or 1. Dismantle and renew
reverse idler gears
2. Worn bearings 2. Dismantle and renew

Noise in gear 1. Worn or damaged 1. Dismantle and renew
countershaft or drive gears

Noise in FWD 1. Worn or damaged FWD 1. Dismantle and renew
clutch plates gears or bearings
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

FAULT FINDING
Gear selection – Hard shifting 1. Worn or bent shift rods 1. Dismantle and renew
2. Worn or chipped dog teeth 2. Dismantle and renew

on drive gears
3. Worn synchronizer cones or 3. Dismantle and renew

cups
4. Broken or missing detent 4. Dismantle and renew

spring or ball
5. Residual clutch pressure 5. Dismantle and renew

(clutch supply fault)
6. Corrosion at stud lever (boot 6. Dismantle and renew

damaged)
7. Clutch plates distorted 7.Replace

Gear jump out 1. Worn detent notches on shift 1. Dismantle and renew
rail
2. Worn or broken 2. Dismantle and renew

synchronizer cones or cups
3. Worn or loose shift forks 3. Dismantle and renew
Main vehicle pump no power 1. Main pump Failure 1. Dismantle and renew
2. Fractured transmission 2. Dismantle and renew

drive rod
3. Failed splines on converter, 3. Dismantle and renew

drive rod or pump
Erratic or noisy response from 1. Main pump Failure 1. Dismantle and renew
main pump
2. Out of balance transmission 2. Dismantle and renew

drive rod
3. Worn drive rod support bush 3. Dismantle and renew
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FORWARD / REVERSE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE (OP. 21 136)
32
Shuttle Valve Disassembled
1. Solenoid Retainer 12. Circlip *
2. Dirt Seal 13. Clutch fill metering valve *
3. Solenoid 14. Spring *
4. Washer 15. Spool
5. Solenoid Body 16. Piston Clutch fill
6. Guide 17. Spring
7. Spring 18. Retainer
8. Solenoid Pin 19. Spring
9. Seal 20. Seal
10. Support Body Solenoid 21. End Plug
11. End Cap *
NOTE: *These items are not serviceable other than for cleaning
SOLENOID VALVE – DISASSEMBLY
Mounted on the top of the transmission is the shuttle
solenoid valve of which is controlled by the forward
(2) and reverse (1) solenoids. Remove the 4 attach-
ing bolts and remove from the transmission.
Removal of the retaining ring and ‘O’ ring on the end
of each of the coil blocks allows removal of the coils
from the solenoid assembly.
Anti clockwise rotation of the solenoid sleeve disas-
sembles the sleeve from the body and allows re-
moval of the plungers, springs, spool supports and
spool. Clean and inspect parts for wear or scoring on
the friction areas, replace if in doubt. Fit new ‘O’ rings
before re–assembly.
33
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

RESISTANCE CHECKING OF COILS

Condition of the coils (1) and (2) can be checked by
the resistance of the coil field measured at the con-
nector which in good condition should read 5 ohms.
If the reading is zero then a short circuit in the coil has
occurred and a new one will be required.
Before re–assembly ensure the valve body is clean
and new ‘O’ rings are placed on the transmission
mounting face.
34
Re–assembly
Re–assemble in reverse order but observe the fol-
lowing:
The Coils must align with the pins on the body before
tightening the coil retaining rings, ensure the ‘O’ rings
are fitted.
Assembly of the valve onto the transmission must
align with the locating pin to ensure correct alignment
of oil feed ports and correct forward / reverse shuttle
operation.
Re–assemble the attaching bolts and torque to
20–27 Nm (15–20 lbf ft)
35
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SOLENOID VALVE
(OP. 21 136) DISASSEMBLY
Mounted to the left of the transmission is the FWD
solenoid valve (1). Remove the attaching bolt and
withdraw from the transmission.
The solenoid when removed consists of a coil sur-
rounding a spring and plunger
Condition of the coil can be checked by the resis-
tance of the coil field measured at the connector
which in good condition should read 7 ohms. If the re-
ading is zero then a short circuit in the coil has oc-
curred and a new one will be required.
36
Prior to re–assembly ensure all parts are clean and
checked for free movement
Re–assembly
Replace the spring then the spool valve and secure
the solenoid to a torque of 34–54Nm (25–40 lbf ft)
37
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

OIL PUMP DISASSEMBLY (Op. 21 102)

NOTE: The oil pump can only be removed when the
transmission is separated from the engine. Disas- 1
sembly of the oil pump is not generally recom-
mended since individual components are matched
and are non serviceable. However it may be dis-
mantled for cleaning purposes.
1. Place the transmission in an horizontal position
and remove the 4 attaching bolts (1) from the oil
pump body.
38
2. The ‘O’ ring (1) behind the pump body must be
replaced with new before re–assembly of the
pump. 1
2
3. Carefully separate the oil pump components and

clean, inspect the components for wear. If in any
doubt replace the pump.
39
IMPORTANT: A worn oil pump will reduce the effi-
ciency of the transmission and the machine if not cor-
rected.
4. A single lipped seal (1) is incorporated in the front
oil pump housing and should be changed when 1
ever a complete teardown has taken place. Push
out the old seal and replace with new, grease
outer seal and push in ensuring it is fully seated
into the housing.
Re–assemble the pump in reverse order, fit new
seals and copper washers under the bolt heads and
torque the retaining bolts to 20–27 Nm (15–20 lbf ft)
40
IMPORTANT: Ensure the pump outer ring face with
chamfer enters the pump body first.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

TRANSMISSION OVERVIEW
IMPORTANT: Before commencing any dismantling procedure it is essential to thoroughly clean the transmission
and work area.
41
4X4 POWER SHUTTLE (FWD VERSION SHOWN)
1. REVERSE IDLER SHAFT – Gear Teeth = 24 and 25
2. INPUT OR PRIMARY SHAFT – Gear Teeth = 24 and 30
3. COUNTER SHAFT – Gear Teeth = 35 29 18 and 13
4. OUTPUT SHAFT – Gear Teeth = 19 – 4th ratio, 28 – 3rd ratio, 37 – 2nd ratio, 43 – 1st ratio and 37 FWD output
5. FOUR WHEEL DRIVE – Gear Teeth = 35
Number of Gear Teeth
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL
IMPORTANT: Before commencing any dismantling procedure it is essential to thoroughly clean the transmission
and work area. If new clutch friction discs are to be installed it will be necessary to soak the discs in clean new
oil for a minimum of 3 hours before fitting.
42
4x4 Power Shuttle
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

Remove the transmission and engine as a complete

unit from the vehicle and place on a suitable stand for
disassembly.
NOTE: Prior to disassembly drain the oils into suit- 3
4
able containers for disposal.
Prior to separating the transmission from the engine
1
Remove the starter motor (1)

Engine timing tab (2)
Torque convertor backplate attaching bolts through
the starter motor aperture (1) 2
Bell housing attachment bolts (3) 5
43
IMPORTANT: Prior to positioning the transmission
vertically remove the vehicle system oil pump (4) and
torque converter unit (5) from the transmission bell
housing
Using eye bolts (1), 1 per side capable of lifting a
weight of 250 kgs (550 lbs) hoist the transmission
vertically and place in a safe, clean and suitable
workshop environment.
44
NOTE: To aid disassembly use the hand brake to
lock the shafts, to enable both the FWD coupling and
the disc bolts to be removed.
Loosen and remove the Four Wheel Drive coupling
where fitted (4).
Remove the transmission handbrake, loosen and
withdraw the output coupling and disc (1).
Remove the gear shift attaching bolts and withdraw
the gear lever (2).
Loosen and remove the control valve and oil filter as-
sembly, gaskets and adapters (3) if required.
Remove all pipes and connectors that may be easily
damaged or interfere with the disassembly.
45
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Remove the rear cover bolts (1) and using a right

angled bracket (2) attached to the center boss on the
cover, lift the cover clear of the transmission.
CAUTION: The bearing cup and cones may become
dislodged when the rear cover is removed from the
transmission. Ensure the the rear cover is shimmed
correctly upon re–assembly.
46
GEAR TRAIN REMOVAL
Disassemble the gear train in the following order:
1. Four Wheel Drive Shaft (Where fitted)

2. Output Shaft
3. Input Shaft
4. Counter Shaft
5. Reverse Idler Shaft
47
1. Lift out the FWD shaft assembly where fitted.
48
2. Remove the gear shift detent retaining bolt and
remove the outer spring and ball, replace bolt be-
fore remove rails.
NOTE: The inner rail detent balls and springs will no
longer be captive in position when the rails are re-
moved and may fly out with some force.
3. Using a right angled hexagonal key loosen the
selector forks on the rail. Angle the output shaft
and lift out the gear selector forks and rails.
Place all of the springs and balls to one side.
49
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

4. With the shift rails removed lift out the output

shaft and place on a clean bench for inspection
50
5. With the counter shaft and reverse idler shaft
held to one side remove the input shaft and place
on a bench for inspection.
51
6. Remove the counter shaft and reverse idler shaft
and place on a bench for inspection
52
Before attempting any disassembly of the gear train
ensure all the components are clean and inspect for
signs of wear, scoring, or chipping of the gear teeth
or wear on related components.
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OUTPUT SHAFT – DISASSEMBLY
53
Four Wheel Drive Output Shaft
1. ’O’ ring 8. Circlip
2. Sealing Ring 9. Bearing 2x places
3. Piston Body 10. 4WD Shaft
4. ‘O’ ring 11. ‘O’ ring
5. Sealing Ring 12. Output Gear
6. Spring 13. Thrust Washer
7. End Plate
FWD DRIVE SHAFT DISASSEMBLY
IMPORTANT: When using a bearing puller be very
careful to ensure it does not touch the tip of the gear
teeth as they may become chipped or broken.
1. Remove the old seal from the gear end of the
FWD shaft and place the shaft vertically (hold in
a soft jaw vice). Using a three legged puller under
the face of the gear and pull the gear and bearing
carefully from the shaft.
Inspect the shaft for scoring or wear patterns that
may be evident and check the gear thrust washer
and bearing.
54
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

2. Invert the shaft and place vertically (hold in a soft

jaw vice) with the splined shaft uppermost. Using
a bearing puller (2) positioned under the rear face
of the bearing withdraw the bearing from the
shaft (1).
55
3. Compress the clutch spring (1) sufficiently to
allow the release of the retaining circlip (2). Using
circlip pliers (3) remove the circlip and carefully
release the spring tension.
56
4. Disassemble the washer, spring, drive clutch and
seals from the shaft and inspect for damage,
scoring or wear marks that may be apparent, re-
place suspect parts as necessary.
57
PISTON SEALS
5. With the piston completely disassembled discard
the old ‘O’ ring and sealing ring and replace with
new. Place the new ‘O’ ring and seal in position
into the piston.
58
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

RE–ASSEMBLY OF SHAFT
IMPORTANT: Where new parts are fitted ensure a
coating of new transmission oil is liberally applied to
all mating surfaces before re–assembly.
1. Prior to re–assembly ensure a new clutch seal is
fitted onto the shaft. Place the seal (1) in warm
water prior to fitting, when pliable carefully seat
the seal in the groove on one side of the shaft and
pull the seal onto the shaft around the circumfer-
ence. Use a pliable PVC tube (2) or similar ma-
terial that will not damage the seal.
59
To size the seal in position place a band of tape
over the seal, a jubilee clip can then be placed
over the tape to compress the seal fully into the
groove prior to fitting the FWD piston.
2. Re–assemble the clutch housing along with
spring, washer and apply pressure as in, Figure
15, and refit the circlip. Using a 40mm bearing
tool (1) refit the bearing onto the shaft.
60
3. Ensure when the bearing is seated an end float
of gear to washer 0.05–0.28mm (0.002– 0.011
in) is maintained between the thrust washer and
gear (1).
61
4. Fit a new oil seal (1) to the end of the shaft, gear
end.
62
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

OUTPUT SHAFT – DISASSEMBLY
63
Output Shaft
1. 2nd GEAR 12. 3rd GEAR
2. Ouput Shaft 13. Gear Selection Fork ‘Lower’
3. Bearing 14. Gear Selection Fork ‘Upper’
4. Out put Gear to 4WD Shaft 15. Fork Locking Allen Key
5. 1st GEAR 16. Detent Ball
6. Spacer 17. Detent Spring
7. Bearing 2 places 18. Gear Selection Rail
8. Sleeve 19. Gear Selection Rail
9. Bulk Pin Synchronizer 2 places 20. Bearing
10. Synchronizer Hub 2 places 21. Thrust Washer
11. Circlip 22. 4th GEAR
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

OUTPUT SHAFT DISASSEMBLY (FRONT

SUPPORT END)
1. Place the shaft vertically and (hold in a soft jaw
vice). Using a three legged puller (1) under the
face of the front gear and pull the gear and bear-
ing carefully from the shaft.
64
2. With the bearing, washer and 4th gear removed,
withdraw the baulk ring synchroniser, circlip, hub
sleeve and 3rd gear. Inspect all parts for scoring
wear marks and discolouration, replace suspect
parts as necessary.
3. The baulk pin synchronizer assembly can be dis-
assembled for inspection for wear patterns or
scoring and for cracking of the outer cones, if in
any doubt replace with ‘new’.
65
The baulk pin synchroniser assembly consists of a
sliding clutch mounted on and splined to the ap-
propriate transmission shaft, with a friction synchro-
nising inner cone located on each side. The inner
cones are mounted on three locking pins which pass
through holes on the sliding clutch.
1. Outer Cone
2. Inner Friction Cone
3. Baulk Pin Assembly
4. Sliding Clutch
5. Locking Pin
6. Baulk Pin
66
The baulk pin synchroniser ensures the shaft speed
and the gear speed is equal before allowing the
sliding coupling to positively engage the shaft to the
gear.
1. Gear
2. Locking Pins
3. Outer Cone
67
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

As the sliding clutch moves, the inner friction cone

comes into contact with the outer cone allowing the
shaft speed and gear speed to become equal.
The three locking pins prevent the sliding clutch from
positively engaging the shaft to the gear. This is
achieved by the notches around the locking pins con-
tacting the edges of the three holes in the sliding
clutch.
1. Sliding Clutch
2. Inner Friction Cone
3. Leaf Springs
68
When the gear and shaft speeds are equal the lock-
ing pins become free and move to the centre of the
holes in the sliding clutch allowing the sliding clutch
to move connecting the shaft to the gear selected.
The three split sleeves are expanded by the inner
leaf springs, positively locking the sliding clutch into
position.
1. Locking Pin
2. Leaf Spring
69
OUTPUT SHAFT RE–ASSEMBLY (FRONT
SUPPORT END)
With the shaft supported vertically re–assembly is in
reverse order of disassembly, however ensure all
parts are liberally coated in clean transmission oil be-
fore fitting.
1. Refit the 3rd gear to the shoulder, place the hub-
sleeve in position and refit the circlip. Ensure a
minimum freeplay of 0.38–0.83mm
(0.015–0.033in) is maintained to enable 3rd gear
to rotate freely. Continue to refit the synchron-
izer, 4th gear, washer and bearing.
70
2. To refit the bearing use a 35mm bearing tool and
press the head of the tool until the bearing is
seated onto the washer.
71
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

3. When the bearing is fully seated ensure the

clearance between the 4th gear to washer is be-
tween 0.05–0.56mm (0.008–022 in).
72
OUTPUT SHAFT DISASSEMBLY (REAR
OUTPUT SHAFT END)
1. Support the shaft vertically (front support end) in
a soft jawed vice and attach a 3 legged puller to
the underside of the 1st gear, Remove the bear-
ing, output gear and 1st gear from the shaft.
73
2. With the 1st gear removed withdraw the needle
bearing, spacer, 2nd needle bearing, sleeve,
bulk ring synchronizer, hub sleeve and 2nd gear.
Inspect for scoring wear marks and or discolour-
ation, replace suspect parts as necessary.
74
OUTPUT SHAFT RE–ASSEMBLY (REAR
OUTPUT SHAFT END)
With the shaft supported vertically re–assembly is in
reverse order of disassembly, ensure all parts are lib-
erally coated in clean transmission oil before fitting.
3. Refit the 2nd gear to the shaft, along with the hub
sleeve. Fit the spacer onto the shaft and using a
sleeve tool press the sleeve down to the shoul-
der.
75
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

4. With the sleeve fully seated ensure the freeplay

between the 2nd gear and hub sleeve is a mini-
mum of 0.35–0.56mm ( 0.014–0.022in) to allow
free rotation of the 2nd gear.
76
5. Refit the needle bearing, spacer, 2nd needle
bearing, synchronizer assembly, 1st gear, output
gear and washer prior to fitting the bearing.
77
6. Refit the bearing, when fully seated ensure the
freeplay between the gears is at least 0.33–0.58
mm (0.013–0.020in) to allow free rotation of the
1st and output gears.
78
COUNTERSHAFT – Disassembly
1. The counter shaft support bearings can be re-
moved by using a suitable puller. Inspect for
scoring wear marks and or discolouration, re-
place suspect parts as necessary.
2. To refit the bearings use a 40mm press tool
79
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

INPUT SHAFT – DISASSEMBLY
80
Input Shaft
1. Input Shaft / Housing Assembly 14. Piston
2. Bearing – Oil pump drive shaft 15. Piston Seal Inner
3. Roller Bearing 16. Piston ‘O’ ring Inner
4. Circlip 17. Piston ‘O’ ring Outer
5. Thrust Washer 18. Roller Bearing
6. Thrust Bearing 19. Thrust Washer
7. Gear / Clutch Hub 20. Gear Hub
8. Bearing Spacer 21. Clutch Pack Retaining Circlip
9. Bearing 22. Clutch Pack Retaining Plate
10. Thrust Washer 23. Friction Disc (x6 Each Clutch)
11. Clutch Plates (6 per clutch) 24. Circlip
12. Spring 25. Spring Retainer
13. Piston Outer Seal
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

INPUT SHAFT DISASSEMBLY (FRONT

SUPPORT END)
1. Support the shaft vertically (rear support end) in
a soft jawed vice and remove the sealing ring. At-
tach a 3 legged puller (1), to the underside of the
forward primary gear (2) and remove the gear
hub, needle bearings and spacer, thrust washer,
and bearing from the shaft.
81
NOTE: Prior to removal of the snap ring the wear fac-
tor of the clutch plates should can be checked.
Measure the distance between the face of the top
plate to to underside of retainer, approx. dimensions:
When new Approx. 2.22–4.93mm (0.08–0.19in)

When run in Approx. 5.64–8.35mm (0.22–0.32in)
Anything exceeding or close to 8.35mm should be

considered as worn and replaced with new.
82
2. Release the snap ring (1), retaining the clutch
pack drive rings and remove from the clutch
housing.
The discs must be flat and not discoloured in any
way, if in doubt renew the discs.
83
3. Using a press and tool NH 21 102 (1), compress
the clutch piston spring (2) to enable release of
the circlip (3). Carefully release the press pres-
sure on the spring. Remove the circlip, washer
and spring.
84
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

4. To remove the piston blank off the oil feed holes

that are not required and carefully apply air pres-
sure to the forward clutch oil feed hole (1) in the
middle ring sufficiently to push the piston out
against seal resistance.
85
5. The piston seals should be removed and dis-
carded prior to re–assembly.
Inspect all parts for scoring wear marks and or discol-
ouration, replace suspect parts as necessary.
86
NOTE: The grove depth on the friction disc when
new is 0.38mm (0.014in) and is acceptable down to
0.10mm (0.004in). However any depth close to or
below 0.10mm (0.004in) when a teardown has taken
place should be considered as worn and replaced
with new.
87
INPUT SHAFT RE–ASSEMBLY (FRONT
SUPPORT END)
With the shaft supported vertically (in a soft jawed
vice), re–assembly is in reverse order of disassem-
bly, ensure all metallic parts are liberally coated in
clean transmission oil before fitting.
6. The internal and external piston seals require re-
placing, before assembly, soak seals in luke
warm water prior to fitting. Carefully refit the inner
‘O’– ring and then the gland seal. The outer ‘O’–
ring can now be fitted along with the outer gland
seal.
88
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

7. Lubricate the piston seal and carefully place the

piston back into the clutch housing until fully
seated. Re–assemble the piston spring, washer
and compress using tool no #297394 sufficiently
to allow refitting of the circlip and place the thrust
washer in position.
89
IMPORTANT: Soak new clutch friction discs in clean
new oil for a minimum of 3 hours
8. Continue to refit the clutch discs (6 thin steel with
1 thick retaining plate) and (6 friction plates) back
into the hub, steel first, followed by friction and
then repeat steel, friction. The final steel plate to
be fitted is the thicker retaining plate that the
snap ring seats onto. Refit the snap ring into the
groove of the clutch hub.
90
9. Once the gear is assembled into the clutch plates
the needle bearings and spacer can be as-
sembled into the bore of the gear without remov-
ing it from the clutch drum.
91
10. Place the thrust bearing (1) on the gear face with
the thrust washer and refit the bearing using a
press and tool #297402 (2).
92
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

11. With the bearing (1) fully seated ensure a free-

play of at least 0.0508–0.40mm (0.002–0.016in)
exists between the thrust washer and gear (2).
93
12. Fit a new sealing ring onto the shaft above the
bearing (1).
94
INPUT SHAFT DISASSEMBLY
(REAR SUPPORT END)
13. Support the shaft vertically (front support end) in
a soft jawed vice and remove the sealing rings
(1). Attach puller (2) to the underside of the bear-
ing (3) and remove. Remove the circlip which al-
lows the removal of the thrust washer, thrust
bearing, gear/hub, needle bearings with spacer.
95
14. Release the snap ring (1) retaining the clutch
pack drive discs and remove from the clutch
housing.
96
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

15. Using a press and tool # 297394 compress the

clutch piston spring to enable release of the cir-
clip. Carefully release the press pressure on the
spring. Remove the circlip, washer and spring.
97
IMPORTANT: When using compressed air always
wear safety goggles.
16. To remove the piston blank off the oil feed holes
that are not required and carefully apply air pres-
sure to the forward clutch oil feed hole (1) in the
third ring, sufficiently to push the piston out
against seal resistance.
The piston can also be removed by using a

hooked tool applied carefully to the land at the
rear of the piston
98
17. The piston seals should be removed and dis-
carded prior to re–assembly, refit new ones.
Inspect all parts for scoring wear marks and or discol-
ouration, replace suspect parts as necessary.
99
INPUT SHAFT RE–ASSEMBLY
(REAR SUPPORT END)
With the shaft supported vertically (in a soft jawed
vice), re–assembly is in reverse order of disassem-
bly, ensure all metallic parts are liberally coated in
clean transmission oil before fitting.
1. The piston seals require replacing, before as-
sembly, soak seals in luke warm water prior to fit-
ting. Carefully refit the inner ‘O’ ring and then the
gland seal. The outer ‘O’ ring can now be fitted
along with the outer gland seal.
100
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2. Lubricate the piston seal and carefully place the

piston back into the clutch housing until fully
seated. Re–assemble the piston spring, washer
and compress sufficiently using tool 297394 to
allow refitting of the circlip and place the thrust
washer in position.
101
IMPORTANT: Soak new clutch discs in clean new oil
for a minimum of 3 hours
3. Continue to refit the clutch discs (6 thin steel with
1 thick pressure plate) and (6 friction plates) back
into the hub, steel first, followed by friction and
then repeat steel, friction. The final steel plate to
be fitted is the thicker retaining plate that the
snap ring seats onto. Refit the snap ring into the
groove of the clutch hub.
102
4. Once the gear is assembled into the clutch plates
the needle bearings and spacer can be as-
sembled into the bore of the gear without remov-
ing it from the clutch drum.
103
5. Refit the thrust bearing (1), thrust washer (2) and
circlip (3).
104
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

6. With the circlip seated in position ensure that a

freeplay of 0.05–0.40mm (0.002–0.016in) exists
between the gear and thrust washer with the
bearing fully seated.
105
7. Using a suitable press and 50mm tool refit the
bearing onto the shaft.
NOTE: New seals must be fitted, however do not fit
the seals until the rear cover shimming procedure is
completed, as the seals may be damaged when the
cover is fitted and removed during the shimming pro-
cedure.
106
OIL PUMP DRIVE SHAFT SUPPORT
BEARING
1. Remove the soft bearing from the bore of the
shaft and discard. Ensure the bore is clean and
free of all residues.
107
2. Fit a new bearing into the shaft using a small drift
and tap gently into the bore until it is flush with the
end face of the shaft.
108
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

REVERSE IDLER SHAFT– DISASSEMBLY

1. The idler shaft support bearings can be removed
by using a bearing puller. Inspect for scoring
wear marks and or discolouration, replace sus-
pect parts as necessary.
2. To refit the bearings use a press and 35mm tool
109
GEAR TRAIN RE–ASSEMBLY
1 3
110
Gear train Re–assembly
1. Reverse Idler Shaft 4. Gear Selection Shafts and Forks
2. Counter Shaft 5. Output Gear Shaft
3. Input or Primary Shaft 6. Front Wheel Drive Shaft (where fitted)
Transmission Re–assembly
1 1
IMPORTANT: Prior to re–assembly of the trans-
mission ensure all parts are clean and oiled.
Where Four Wheel Drive is fitted change the lipped
oil seal (1) in the front cover while it is disassembled.
Push out the old seal and push in a new seal to seat
on the shoulder.
Change the double lipped oil seal in the rear cover on
the output shaft (2) while it is disassembled. Push out
the old seal and push in a new seal to seat on the
shoulder and fill the cavity between the seal double
lips with a silicone grease.
111
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

3. Place in the front cover the inner detent spring

and ball and retain by using a small piece of tube
18mm (0.709 in) diameter by 23mm (0.906 in)
long in lieu of the gear shift rail.
4. Re–assemble the gear train in the following
order:
D Counter Shaft
D Reverse Idler Shaft
D Input shaft (hold counter/idler shaft to one side)
D Output Shaft 23mm
D Gear Shift 1st rail and fork (push out tube).
Fit intermediate ball, 2nd rail and fork, ball and
18mm
spring and detent retaining plug, torque plug to
41 – 54 Nm (30–40 lbf ft).
112
D Four Wheel Drive Shaft where fitted
With the detent spring and balls in position fit the re-
taining bolt and torque to 40–54Nm (30–40 lbs ft)
With the gear train set in neutral position torque the
shift fork hexagonal head screws to 8 –16 Nm (6–12
lbf ft)
113
Gear Train End float – Shimming Procedure
The purpose of this procedure is to create an end
float of 0.025–0.076mm (0.001–0.003in) on each of
the gear shafts, this is achieved by adding or deleting
the shims (1) between the shaft bearing cone (2) and
spacer (3) in the rear cover on each shaft assembly.
To determine end float the rear cover is seated on the
transmission and securing with four bolts evenly
spread around the cover, checking the end float of
each shaft in turn.
114
IMPORTANT: The mating faces of the front and rear
transmission cases must be scraped clean and free
of dirt and gasket material. Any residue remaining on
theses faces may affect the endfloat shimming pro-
cedure when the cases are bolted together.
Before attempting to check the end float in any shaft

assemblies they must be rotated several times to
allow the taper bearing rollers to settle in tracks.
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Removal of the bearing cones is achieved by use of

a removal tool (1). When a new bearing cone is to be
fitted fit the spacer first (but less the shims) and then
fit the cone (gently tapping the cone into the counter
bore).
However if the old bearing and cone is to remain in
the transmission, leave the old cones installed until
the end float is checked and then remove and adjust
shims between the spacer and cone as required.
115
5. REVERSE IDLER GEAR SHAFT – Place Tool
297395 in the end of the shaft through the rear
cover and position a dial indicator onto the bolt
head.
Using a small block and lever gently lift the shaft
up (do not use excessive force) and record the
reading. If the result is not to the specification of
0.025–0.076mm (0.001–0.003in) it will be
necessary to add or delete the shims accordingly
beneath the bearing cone in the rear cover.
116
6. INPUT SHAFT – This shaft can raised by placing
a lever and block below the transmission and
levering the input end of the shaft where it pro-
trudes into the bell housing. Alteratively it can be
raised by placing the lever through the side cas-
ing access aperture and levering between the
clutch housings.
Position a dial indicator so the indicator rests on
the rear face of the shaft and gently lift the shaft
0.025–0.076mm (0.001–0.003in) it will be
117
7. COUNTER SHAFT – Place Tool NH 21 103 in
the end of the shaft through the rear cover and
position a dial indicator onto the bolt head.
0.025–0.076mm (0.001–0.003in) it will be
118
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

8. OUTPUT SHAFT – Place Tool 297395 in the end

of the shaft through the rear cover and position
a dial indicator onto the bolt head.
0.025–0.076mm (0.001–0.003in) it will be
119
9. FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SHAFT – It will be
necessary to place the tool 297395 into the bolt
hole on the rear cover before positioning the dial
indicator
This shaft can be raised by placing a lever and
block below the transmission and levering the
output end of the shaft where it protrudes from
the transmission.
Gently lift the shaft up (do not use excessive
force) and record the reading. If the result is not
to the specification of 0.025–0.076mm
(0.001–0.003in) it will be necessary to add or de-
lete the shims accordingly beneath the bearing
cone in the rear cover. 120
Upon completion of recording the results lift the rear
cover off and add or delete shims beneath the cones
on the relative shafts to achieve the required end
floats.
Refit the rear cover with 4 bolts evenly spread around
the cover and recheck end float through steps 1 to 5.
When all correct end floats are achieved, proceed to
rear cover attachment.
121
REAR COVER ATTACHMENT
Lift the rear cover and fit new seals to the end of the
input shaft.
122
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Replace the ‘O’ rings on the oil feed supply ports
123
Apply a 2mm wide band of sealer 82995770 to the
mating face of the front cover and carefully lower the
rear cover. Torque the cover bolts 45 – 64 Nm
(33–47 lbf ft), working out from the middle of the
cover, alternating each side of the cover, to the top
and bottom of the transmission.
124
Replace the 3 off, shaft end bolts and torque to
45–64Nm (33–47 lbf ft).
125
Replace oil drain plug torque to 34–54Nm
(25–40 lbf ft)
126
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

Control valve clean the mating faces and apply

sealer to joint face on the transmission and torque
bolts to 45–64Nm (33–47 lbf ft).
127
Replace oil drain plug torque to 34–54Nm
(25–40 lbf ft)
128
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

129
Brake Disc and Caliper Assembly
1. Lever 8. Fixing Spring
2. Cover 9. Outer Friction Pad
3. Fixing Bolt 10. Spacer
4. Outer Caliper 11. Actuator Plate
5. Bolt 12. Balls and Retainer Plate
6. Inner Caliper 13. Actuator Plate
7. Inner Friction Pad 14. Adjusting Nuts and washers
The transmission parking brake is fitted to all models

and incorporates two free floating friction pads.
2
If the brake assembly is fully dismantled upon re–as-
sembly the caliper fixing bolt spacer (1) must main-
tain a gap of 0.76mm (0.030in) to the transmission
body (2). 1
130
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

When operated by the cable (1) from the cab the ec-
centric cam forces the friction pads against the disc
(2), effecting a braking action on the output shaft
from the transmission, locking the drive shaft to the
rear axle and front axle when Four Wheel Drive is
fitted
Adjustment of the brake assembly is by tightening
the inner nut (3) which effectively pushes the pads
onto the disc. Once the disc is contacted by the pads
the nut should be loosened 1/2 a turn and the outer
locknut (3) tightened off.
Inspect the brake pad and disc for signs of wear be-
fore re–assembly and replace as required pads or
the disc if heavily scored 131
GEAR SHIFT SELECTOR ASSEMBLY
Refit the gear shift lever and spacer and torque the
bolts to 16.2–24.4Nm (12–18 lbs ft).
132
SPIN ON OIL FILTER
Replace the spin on filter with a new one and hand
tighten the filter plus 3/4 of a turn or as instructed on
the filter body.
TAB21096
133
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES PAGE
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

SECTION 21 – POWER SHIFT TRANSMISSION – CHAPTER 2 1
SECTION 21 – POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION
Chapter 2 – Introduction
CONTENT

21 200 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Description and Operation (Transmission Hydraulic Operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Removal from Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
SPECIFICATIONS
STALL SPEED
108hp Turbocharger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1950–2050 revs/min
TORQUE CONVERTER RATIO

Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54 : 1
GEAR RATIOS
Power shift 4x2 Transmission
LUBRICANT
Capacity...........................................17 Litres (4.4 US. gals) Trans–Only – 18 Litres (4.7 US. gals) System
Grade...............................................Ambra Hydrodex 3 – Specification ATF
TORQUES
Engine / transmission retaining bolts and nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Nm (70 lbf ft)
Engine coolant expansion tank retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Nm (18 lbf ft)
Engine / transmission mounting bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Nm (70 lbf ft)
Hydraulic pump pipe connection (small) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Nm (26 lbf ft)
Hydraulic pump pipe connection (large) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Nm (86 lbf ft)
Power steering outlet to tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Nm (41 lbf ft)
Hydraulic oil cooler to coolant radiator bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Nm (18 lbf ft)
Hose transport lock valve to gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Nm (11 lbf ft)
Hose transport lock valve to gearbox dipstick pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Nm (11 lbf ft)
Spicer universal couplings rear and front (when FWD fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Nm (28 lbf ft)
SPECIAL TOOLS
Engine / Transmission Lifting Bracket 297389
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 21 – POWER SHIFT TRANSMISSION – CHAPTER 2

The transmission consists of a torque converter, an
internal gerotor–type hydraulic pump, a solenoid
control valve assembly, three speed / directional
clutches, two range clutches and one four wheel
drive clutch. A parking brake is also fitted to the trans-
mission.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
The transmission is operated via a control lever
mounted on the left hand side of the steering column.
This includes the processor which monitors and con-
trols the clutch engagement. Directional changes are
made by moving the lever forward and backwards, 1
gears are selected by twisting the lever anti clock
wise for a higher gear, and clock wise for a lower
gear. The lever must always be twisted after a direc-
tion is selected if the lever has been in neutral for
longer than 3 seconds.
Kick down from 2nd to 1st is achieved by depressing
the button on the end of the control lever. This will
only operate when the transmission is in 2nd gear.
Transmission disconnect is operated by depressing
the red button on the loader lever, once the button is
released the transmission will drive.
NOTE: For full instructions on the operation of the
power shift transmission refer to the operators man-
ual. 2
TORQUE CONVERTER
NOTE: The torque converter is a sealed unit and can
not be serviced as individual parts.
The torque converter which is a fluid coupling trans-
mits drive from the engine to the transmission.
Attachment of the torque convertor to the flywheel is
through a flexi–plate using bolts (1) to convertor and
(2) bolts to flywheel.
The main parts of the torque converter are the im-
peller, the turbine, the stator and the front and rear
covers. The impeller is integrated with the rear cover
which is driven by the engine flywheel by means of
a drive plate.
The torque converter must be full of oil to operate
correctly. The oil must flow constantly through the
converter to the oil cooler to prevent over heating.
When the engine is running the impeller pumps oil to
the turbine this oil acts on the turbine and flows on to
the stator which is fixed. As the flow increases the
turbine starts to rotate at this point we get maximum 3
torque increase. As the turbine speed increases the
torque multiplication gradually decreases. When the
turbine rotates at the same speed as the impeller oil
now acts on the rear face of the stator blade. This un-
locks the one–way clutch, permitting the stator to ro-
tate in the same direction.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

BACKHOE HYDRAULIC PUMP DRIVE.

A solid shaft connects the engine (via the torque con-
verter impeller) to the main hydraulic pump input
shaft. The pumps are mounted on the rear of the
transmission the drive shaft passes through the
centre of the transmission input shaft.
4
TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.
The transmission case (1) serves as an oil reservoir
for the hydraulic pump which supplies oil to the sys-
tem.
The dipstick/oil filler tube is located on the right hand
side of the engine and can be accessed by removing
the side panel.
An integral strainer in the transmission sump and a
spin on oil filter mounted on the right hand side of the
transmission, ensure that the components life is ex-
tended due to good oil filtration.
The hydraulic gerotor oil pump is located in the bell
housing. Drive is taken via two drive tangs on the
torque converter housing. 5
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Basically the transmission is composed of five main assemblies:
6
4 Wheel Drive Transmission – 2 Wheel Steer
Converter and pump drive section Range clutches
Input or directional clutches Output section
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

7
4 Wheel Drive Transmission – 4 Wheel Steer
Converter and pump drive section Range clutches
Input or directional clutches Output section
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Converter And Pump Drive Section

Engine power is transmitted from the engine fly
wheel to the impeller through the impeller cover. The
rear of impeller cover has two drive tangs, which
drives the transmission hydraulic pump.
The main Backhoe loader hydraulic pumps are
mounted on the rear of the transmission. Drive is
taken from inside the impeller cover, where a shaft
takes the drive through the centre of the input shaft.
8
The converter and pump drive
section
The Input Shaft And Directional Clutches
The turbine shaft driven from the turbine transmits
power to the forward low, high or reverse clutches.
The clutch packs consists of housing, piston steel
disc and then friction disc and so on. Each clutch
pack has a different number of discs.
The clutches are pressure engaged, spring disen-
gaged. The forward high, low and reverse clutch
pack engagement is modulated by an electronic con-
trolled valve.
9
The input or directional clutches
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

The Range Clutches

Once a directional clutch is engaged power is trans-
mitted to the range clutches (1st or 2nd). Operation
and actuation of the clutch is similar to the directional
clutches.
The engagement of these clutches are modulated,
by means of a restriction valve fitted in the control
valve which is controlled electronically, which limits
oil flow to the clutch during shift. A Belleville plate is
fitted in the clutch pack, this also regulates the build
up of clamp force on the clutch plate.
10
The range clutches
The Output Section

With the range clutch engaged power is finally trans-
mitted to the output shafts.
The rear output is opposite to engine rotation, the
front output rotation is the same as engine rotation
when forward gear is selected.
The ratio from the front to the rear output is 0.951:1.
The front output is controlled by a clutch which is hy-
draulically engaged and spring disengaged. There is
no modulation on the 4WD clutch. With no electrical
signal to the control valve the clutch is engaged.
11
The output section
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Transmission gear Activated solenoids Activated clutches

Forward 4 Forward Forward high, 2nd
Forward 3 Forward, 2nd/1st Forward high, 1st
Forward 2 Forward, Forward Hi/Low Forward low, 2nd
Forward 1 Forward, Forward Hi/Low 1st/2nd Forward low, 1st
Reverse 1 Reverse, 2nd/1st Reverse, 1st
Reverse 2 Reverse Reverse, 2nd
Four wheel drive off Four wheel drive None
Four wheel drive on None Four wheel drive
GEAR AND CLUTCH LAY-OUT
12
Forward Low Input
Forward High 2nd
Reverse and 1st Disconnect
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

POWER FLOWS
1 2
1ST SPEED FORWARD 2ND SPEED FORWARD
3RD SPEED FORWARD 3 4TH SPEED FORWARD 4

13
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

POWER FLOWS
1ST SPEED REVERSE 5
14
2ND SPEED REVERSE 6
15
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

24 23 22
18 19 21
17
20
16
7
15 14 13 12
10
6 5 9 11
4
8
3 2
16
Operating Valves and Solenoids.
1. Transmission sump. 14. 1st gear clutch.
2. Transmission breather. 15. Accumulator.
3. Suction strainer. 16. Electronic modulation valve 0–5.5 bar(0 – 80 psi).
4. Gerotor oil pump. 17. Pressure reducing valve 5.5 bar (80 psi).
5. Pressure oil filter.
18. 2nd / 1st shift spool.
6. Filter by pass valve 4.3 bar (62.4 psi).
7. System pressure regulating valve 20 bar (290 psi) – 19. Range modulation spool.
Oil to converter circuit.. 20. Range modulation restriction.
8. Neutral reverse shift spool. 21. Four wheel drive shift spool.
9. Pressure booster 0 – 20 bar(0 –292 psi). 22. Four wheel drive solenoid.
10. Neutral forward solenoid. 23. Range modulation solenoid.
11. High / low shift spool. 24. 2nd / 1st Solenoid.
12. High / low solenoid.
13. Neutral reverse solenoid.
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Hydraulic Oil Flows

Oil flows to the pressure regulating valve, maintain-
ing system pressure to the control valve and clutches
at 20 bar (292 psi).
Excess oil flow is bleed off to the converter circuit
which is protected by a 10 bar (145 psi) safety valve.
Oil enters the converter through the converter blade
cavity and exits in the passage between the turbine
shaft and pump drive. Oil then flow to the external
cooler.
Across the converter and oil cooler circuit a by pass
valve is fitted if the pressure difference is more than
4 bar (58 psi) the valve will open. Directing excess oil
to the lubrication circuit. This protects the system
during start up from cold oil or at high revs/min.
After leaving the cooler the oil is directed via a single
fitting on the rear of the transmission to a series of
tubes and passages, to lubricate and cool the trans-
mission bearings and clutches.
Oil is drawn up from the sump, via an internal
strainer, through the inlet port of the hydraulic pump.
Oil is pumped out to the pressure filter. Across the oil
filter is a filter by pass valve which will open if the
pressure difference becomes higher than 4.3 bar
(62.5 psi).
Oil then drains back by gravity to the transmission
sump.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

17
Torque converter and cooler circuit
Suction Oil High Pressure Oil
Return to Reservoir Torque Converter and Lubrication Oil
1. Transmission sump. 11. Converter system pressure test port 5 bar (73 psi).
2. Transmission breather. 12. Torque converter.
3. Suction strainer. 13. Converter oil temperature port.
4. Gerotor oil pump. 14. Oil cooler pressure test port.
5. Pressure oil filter. 15. Converter pressure by pass valve
6. Filter by–pass valve. 4.3 bar (62.5 psi). 4 bar (58 psi).
7. System pressure test port 20 bar (292 psi). 16. Oil cooler.
8. Oil flow to control valve. 17. Oil temperature port after cooler.
9. System pressure regulating valve 20 bar (292 psi) 18. Lubrication pressure port.
10. Converter circuit safety valve 10 bar (145 psi). 19. Lubrication galleries.
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

TRANSMISSION CONTROL VALVE

When the unit has no electrical power it will default
to Neutral, 2nd gear with four wheel drive engaged
(if clutch pressure is active 20 bar (290 psi).
The control valve consists of 6 low pressure sole-
noids, 6 shift spools, a pressure reducer, an elec-
tronic controlled modulation valve, an accumulator,
a pressure booster, a speed/temperature sensor and
torque convertor bypass valve.
Transmission gear Activated solenoids Activated clutches

Forward 4 Forward Forward high, 2nd
Forward 3 Forward, 2nd/1st Forward high, 1st
Forward 2 Forward, Forward Hi/Low Forward low, 2nd
Forward 1 Forward, Forward Hi/Low 1st/2nd Forward low, 1st
Reverse 1 Reverse, 2nd/1st Reverse, 1st
Reverse 2 Reverse Reverse, 2nd
Four wheel drive off Four wheel drive None
Four wheel drive on None Four wheel drive
PILOT PRESSURE CIRCUIT. At start up none of the solenoids are energised.

Pressure oil from the system regulating valve flows There is no pilot oil pressure supplied to the shift
to the pressure reducing valve. The pressure drops spools.
to 5.5 bar (80 psi). This oil flows to the 6 solenoids.
Oil also supplies the modulation valve.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

18
Servo pilot pressure circuit
Suction Oil Return to Reservoir
High Pressure Oil Pilot Pressure
ÀÀÀ
1.
Torque Converter and Lubrication Oil
Transmission sump.
ÀÀÀ
12.
Modulated Pilot Oil
2nd / 1st Solenoid.

2. Transmission breather. 13. Range modulation solenoid.
3. Suction strainer. 14. Four wheel drive solenoid.
4. Pressure filter. 15. High / Low solenoid.
5. Gerotor oil pump. 16. Neutral reverse solenoid.
6. Filter by pass valve 4.3 bar (62.5 psi). 17. Neutral forward solenoid.
7. System pressure test port 20 bar (292 psi). 18. Electronic modulation valve 0 – 5.5 bar (0 –80 psi)
8. System pressure regulating valve 20 bar (292 psi). 19. Accumulator.
9. Oil flow to converter. 20. Pressure booster 0 – 20 bar (0 – 292 psi).
10. Oil flow to shift spools. 21. Modulated pressure to shift spools 0 – 20 bar (0 –
11. Pressure reducing valve 5.5 bar (80 psi). 292 psi).
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SERVO CONTROL FORWARD SECOND

GEAR FOUR WHEEL DRIVE ENGAGED.
System pressure is reduced to 5.5 bar (80 psi) by the
pressure reducer this oil then supplies the 6 sole-
noids and electronic modulation valve.
When the powershift lever is moved forward and
twisted anti clock wise an electrical signal is sent to:–
1. The high low solenoid which energises allowing
pilot oil to flow to the shift spool.
2. The neutral forward solenoid which energises al-
lowing pilot oil to flow to the shift spool.
3. The powershift lever will then reduce the current
to the modulation valve which gives an out put
pressure curve from 0 to 5.5 bar (0 to 80 psi) to
the pressure booster valve.
4. The modulation pressure curve is multiplied by 4
in the pressure booster so that a curve of 0 – 20
bar (0 – 292 psi) is available for the directional
clutches.
Between the modulation valve and the booster is
accumulator to dampen any hydraulic vibration.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

19
Servo control forward second gear, four wheel drive engaged.
ÀÀÀ
1.
Transmission sump.
ÀÀÀ
12.
Modulated Pilot Oil
2nd / 1st Solenoid.

4. Pressure filter. 20 bar (292 psi). 15. High / Low solenoid.
6. Filter by pass valve 4.3 bar (62.4 psi) 17. Neutral forward solenoid.
7. System pressure test port 18. Electronic modulation valve 0 – 5.5 bar (0 – 80 psi)
10. Oil flow to shift spools 0 – 20 bar (0 – 292 psi). 21. Modulated pressure to shift spools
11. Pressure reducing valve 5.5 bar (80 psi).
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CONTROL FORWARD THIRD GEAR FOUR

WHEEL DRIVE DISENGAGED.
When the powershift lever is moved forward and
twisted anti clock wise an electrical signal is sent to:–
1. The range modulation solenoid sending pilot
pressure to the spool.
2. The 1st 2nd solenoid sending pilot pressure to
the spool.
3. Once the 3rd gear has been engaged the range
modulation solenoid will be de–energised
4. The high/low solenoid prevents pilot oil to flow to
the shift spool.
5. The neutral forward solenoid allowing pilot oil to
flow to the shift spool.
6. The powershift electronics will then reduce the
current to the modulation valve which gives an
out put pressure curve from 0 – 5.5 bar (0 to 80
psi) to the pressure booster valve.
clutch.
8. The four wheel drive solenoid supplies pilot oil to
the shift spool
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

20
Servo control forward third gear, four wheel drive disengaged.
ÀÀÀ
1.
Transmission sump.
ÀÀÀ
12.
Modulated Pilot Oil
2nd / 1st Solenoid.

6. Filter by pass valve 4.3 bar (62.4 psi). 17. Neutral forward solenoid.
7. System pressure test port 20 bar (292 psi). 18. Electronic modulation valve 0 – 5.5 bar (0 –80 psi)
8. System pressure regulating valve20 bar (297 psi). 19. Accumulator.
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SERVO CONTROL REVERSE FIRST GEAR

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE ENGAGED.
When the powershift lever is moved rearward and
twisted clock wise a electrical signal is sent to:–
1. The range modulation solenoid sending pilot
pressure to the spool.
2. The 1st 2nd solenoid sending pilot pressure to
the spool.
3. Once the 1st gear has been engaged the range
modulation solenoid will be de–energised
4. The low/high solenoid sends pilot oil to the shift
spool.
5. The neutral reverse solenoid allowing pilot oil to
flow to the shift spool.
6. The powershift lever microprocessor will then re-
duce the current to the modulation valve which
gives an out put pressure curve from 0–5.5 bar
(0–80 psi) to the pressure booster valve.
clutches.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

21
Servo control reverse first gear, four wheel drive engaged.
ÀÀÀ
1.
Transmission sump.
ÀÀÀ
12.
Modulated Pilot Oil
2nd / 1st Solenoid.

6. Filter by pass valve 4.3 bar (62.4 psi) 17. Neutral forward solenoid.
7. System pressure test port 20 bar (292 psi). 18. Electronic modulation valve 0 – 5.5 bar(0 – 80 psi)
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CONTROL VALVE OPERATION FORWARD, 1. Transmission sump.

SECOND GEAR WITH FOUR WHEEL 2. Transmission breather.
DRIVE ENGAGED. 3. Suction strainer.
4. Gerotor oil pump.
Pressure oil from the system regulating valve flows
to the pressure reducing valve. The pressure drops
7. System pressure test port.
8. System pressure regulating valve20 bar (290 psi).
When the powershift lever lever is moved forward 9. Oil to converter circuit.
and twisted anti clock wise a electrical signal is sent 10. Pressure reducing valve 5.5 bar (80 psi).
to:– 11. 2nd / 1st Solenoid.
1. Oil flows from the system pressure regulating 12. 2nd / 1st shift spool.
valve at 20 bar through the four wheel drive spool 13. 2nd gear clutch.
to engage the 4WD clutch. 14. 1st gear clutch.
2. System pressure also flows through the range 15. Range modulation solenoid.
modulation valve, then through the 1st 2nd spool 16. Range modulation spool.
to engage the 2nd gear clutch. 17. Range modulation restriction.
3. The high low solenoid which energises allowing 18. Four wheel drive solenoid.
pilot oil to flow to the shift spool. this will allow oil 19. Four wheel drive shift spool.
to flow to the low clutch. 20. Four wheel drive clutch.
lows pilot pressure to flow to the shift spool this 22. High / low shift spool.
will allow oil to flow on to the forward low shift 23. Forward high clutch.
spool. 24. Forward low clutch.
5. The modulation valve has a reducing current
26. Neutral reverse shift spool.
from the microprocessor, pilot pressure gradual-
27. Reverse clutch.
ly increases acting on the boost valve and it
28. Neutral forward solenoid.
multiplies pilot pressure.
29. Neutral forward shift spool.
6. The oil from the boost valve is modulated allow- 30. Electronic modulation valve 0 – 5.5 bar
ing a steady increase of pressure to act on the (0 – 80 psi).
forward low clutch pack which gradually takes up 31. Accumulator.
drive until clutch pressure reaches 20 bar (292 32. Pressure booster 0 – 20 bar(0 –292 psi).
psi).
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

22
Control valve operation forward second gear with four wheel drive engaged.
Torque Converter and Lubrication Oil ÀÀÀ

ÀÀÀ
Modulated Pilot Oil
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CONTROL VALVE OPERATION FORWARD, 1. Transmission sump.

THIRD GEAR WITH FOUR WHEEL DRIVE 2. Transmission breather.
DISENGAGED. 3. Suction strainer.
8. System pressure regulating valve 20 bar (290 psi).
When the powershift lever is moved forward and 9. Oil to converter circuit.
twisted anti clock wise and the 4WD is switched off 10. Pressure reducing valve 5.5 bar (80 psi).
a electrical signal is sent to:– 11. 2nd / 1st Solenoid.
1. The 4WD solenoid, sending pilot pressure to the 12. 2nd / 1st shift spool.
shift spool. This will move the spool preventing oil 13. 2nd gear clutch.
flowing to the clutch disengaging 4WD. 14. 1st gear clutch.
2. The range modulation solenoid allowing pilot oil 15. Range modulation solenoid.
to the range modulation valve, which restricting 16. Range modulation spool.
oil flow to the 1st 2nd shift spool. 17. Range modulation restriction.
3. The 1st 2nd solenoid, sending pilot pressure to 18. Four wheel drive solenoid.
the 1st 2nd shift spool which directs oil to the 1st 19. Four wheel drive shift spool.
clutch. 20. Four wheel drive clutch.
4. Once the 1st gear clutch is engaged the range
solenoid is de–energised and full flow will go to 22. High / low shift spool.
the 1st gear clutch. 23. Forward high clutch.
24. Forward low clutch.
lows pilot pressure to flow to the shift spool this
26. Neutral reverse shift spool.
will allow oil to flow on to the forward high shift
27. Reverse clutch.
spool.
28. Neutral forward solenoid.
6. The modulation valve has a reducing current 29. Neutral forward shift spool.
from the microprocessor, pilot pressure gradual- 30. Electronic modulation valve 0 – 5.5 bar
ly increases acting on the boost valve and it (0 – 80 psi).
multiplies pilot pressure by 4. The oil from the 31. Accumulator.
boost valve is modulated allowing a steady in- 32. Pressure booster 0 – 20 bar(0 –292 psi).
crease of pressure to act on the forward high
clutch pack which gradually takes up drive until
clutch pressure reaches 20 bar (292 psi).
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

23
Control valve operation forward third gear with four wheel drive disengaged.

ÀÀÀ
Modulated Pilot Oil
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CONTROL VALVE OPERATION REVERSE, 1. Transmission sump.

FIRST GEAR WITH FOUR WHEEL DRIVE 2. Transmission breather.
ENGAGED. 3. Suction strainer.
8. System pressure regulating valve 20 bar
When the powershift lever is moved rearward, kick– (290 psi).
down button is depressed and the 4WD is switched 9. Oil to converter circuit.
off a electrical signal is sent to:– 10. Pressure reducing valve 5.5 bar (80 psi).
1. The range modulation solenoid allowing pilot oil 11. 2nd / 1st Solenoid.
to the range modulation valve, which restricting 12. 2nd / 1st shift spool.
oil flow to the 1st 2nd shift spool. 13. 2nd gear clutch.
2. The 1st 2nd solenoid, sending pilot pressure to 14. 1st gear clutch.
the 1st 2nd shift spool which directs oil to the 1st 15. Range modulation solenoid.
clutch. 16. Range modulation spool.
3. Once the 1st gear clutch is engaged the range 17. Four wheel drive solenoid.
solenoid is de–energised and full flow will go to 18. Range modulation restriction.
the 1st gear clutch. 19. Four wheel drive shift spool.
20. Four wheel drive clutch.
4. The neutral reverse solenoid which energises al-
lows pilot pressure to flow to the shift spool this
22. High / low shift spool.
will allow oil to flow on to the reverse shift spool.
23. Forward high clutch.
5. The modulation valve has a reducing current 24. Forward low clutch.
from the microprocessor, pilot pressure gradual- 25. Neutral reverse solenoid.
ly increases acting on the boost valve and it 26. Neutral reverse shift spool.
multiplies pilot pressure. 27. Reverse clutch.
6. The oil from the boost valve is modulated allow- 28. Neutral forward solenoid.
ing a steady increase of pressure to act on the re- 29. Neutral forward shift spool.
verse clutch pack which gradually takes up drive 30. Electronic modulation valve 0 – 5.5 bar
until clutch pressure reaches 20 bar (292 psi). (0 – 80 psi).
31. Accumulator.
32. Pressure booster 0 – 20 bar (0 –292 psi).
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

24
Control valve operation reverse first gear with four wheel drive engaged.

ÀÀÀ
Modulated Pilot Oil
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

PRESSURE TESTING TORQUE CON-

VERTER AND COOLER CIRCUIT.
All pressure and flow testing should be measured
with an oil temperature of 82–93 degrees Celsius
(180 – 200 F). For operating speed refer to each test.
Port 1 System pressure.
– Engine set to 750 revs/min minimum pressure15
bar (218 psi).
– Engine set to 2200 revs/min 19.6 – 23.1 bar
(290 – 333 psi).
Port 2 Torque converter in.
– Engine set to 2200 revs/min oil pressure range
5 – 11 bar (73 – 159 psi).
Port 3 Torque converter out.
– Engine speed 2000 revs/min minimum pressure 2
bar (29 psi).
– Engine speed 2200 revs/min maximum pressure 5
bar (73 psi).
Port 4 Oil temperature converter out.
– Normal operating temperature 80 – 90 degrees
Celsius. Maximum temperature 120 degrees Celsius
(284 F).
Port 5 Oil temperature cooler out.
– T.B.A
Port 6 Lubrication pressure
– Engine speed 2000 revs/min pressure range
0.8 – 2.0 bar (11.6 – 29 psi).
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

25
Torque converter and lubrication pressure test ports.
1. System pressure port. 4. Oil temperature converter out port.
2. Torque converter in port. 5. Oil temperature cooler out port.
3. Torque converter out port 6. Lubrication pressure port.
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

PRESSURE TESTING CLUTCH AND HIGH

PRESSURE CIRCUIT.
Port 1 System pressure.
– Engine set to 750 revs/min minimum pressure 15
bar (218 psi).
–Engine set to 2200 revs/min 19.6 – 23.1 bar (290 –
333 psi).
Port 2 2nd clutch.
– Engine set to 2200 revs/min pressure range clutch
activated 18.1 – 21.5 bar (262 – 312 psi). Clutch re-
leased 0 – 0.2 bar (0 – 3 psi).
Port 3 1st clutch.
leased 0 – 0.2 bar (0 – 3 psi).
Port 4 Four wheel drive clutch.
leased 0 – 0.2 bar (0 – 3 psi).
Port 5 Forward high clutch.
leased 0 – 0.2 bar (0 – 3 psi).
Port 6 Forward low clutch.
leased 0 – 0.2 bar (0 – 3 psi).
Port 7 Reverse clutch.
leased 0 – 0.2 bar (0 – 3 psi).
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

26
Pressure testing clutches and high pressure circuit.
1. System pressure port 5. Forward high clutch pressure port.
2. 2nd clutch pressure port. 6. Forward low clutch pressure port.
3. 1st clutch pressure port. 7. Reverse clutch pressure port.
4. Four wheel drive clutch port.
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

1
2
4
27
Left Hand Side View
1. Pressure Check Port Convertor in 3. Pressure Check Port Four Wheel Drive
5 – 11 bar (73 – 159 psi) 18.9 – 27.5 bar (270 – 397 psi)
2. To Cooler 4. Pressure Check Port 2nd Clutch (FWD 2nd, FWD
4th, Rev 2nd) 18.1 – 21.5 bar (265 – 312 psi)
2
1
28
Top View
1. Pressure Check, Regulator Pressure 2. Filter Plug M22 X 1.5
19.6 – 23.7 bar (290 – 340 psi)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

29
Front View
1. Dipstick Hole M27 X 25
30
Rear View
1. Pressure Port Hi Clutch 6. Pressure check port reverse clutch
18.1 – 21.5 bar (265 – 312 psi) 18.1 – 21.5 bar (265 – 312 psi)
2. Drain Plug 7. Oil out to cooler1. Pressure check port forward low
3. Oil Level Plug clutch
4. Oil return from cooler 18.1 – 21.5 bar (265 – 312 psi)
5. Pressure check port 1st Clutch, 8. Pressure check port from cooler
18.1 – 21.5 bar (265 – 312 psi)
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

31
Bottom View
1. Temperature check port convertor out to cooler – 2. Pressure check port convertor out to cooler –
Thread M10 X 1 ‘O’ ring port ISO 6149–1 1,0625–12 UN 2B SAE ‘O’ ring port
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

32
Transmission / Engine Removal from Backhoe Loader
Removal Remove the condenser from the front radiator and

WARNING place the condenser to one side of the chassis
Disconnect the air conditioning compressor attach-
Before performing any service
ing hardware and place the compressor to one side
or maintenance on the machine ensure the wheels
of the chassis.
are choked / blocked to prevent the machine from
moving. Disconnect the expansion bottle connections from
the radiator.
1. Lower the loader to the ground or raise and se- 7. Pull main hydraulic cooler over radiator tabs
cure (dependant upon lifting apparatus) and re- 8. Remove all attaching bolts from radiator
lease any pressure in the system as required.
9. Disconnect transmission cooler pipes.
Apply the handbrake and chock the wheels.
10. Remove radiator, taking care not to damage the
2. Drop the backhoe to the ground, switch off en- fan or hydraulic oil cooler.
gine and release any pressure in the system.
11. Remove Air Cleaner assembly
3. Isolate battery
12. Disconnect all electrical connections
4. Remove all engine panels.
13. Disconnect hydraulic pipe clamps
5. Remove front cast cowling
14. Disconnect the fuel tank feed and return pipes
6. Drain engine coolant and remove hoses pipes
IMPORTANT: Air Conditioning where fitted – Do not 15. Disconnect the foot throttle cable at the fuel injec-
disconnect the air conditioning hoses from the com- tion pump.
pressor or condenser unless a refrigerant reclaim
system is to be used. Engine / Transmission removal 16. Remove the cab mat
from the machine does not require the system to be 17. Remove the cab floor access panel
discharged
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

18. Disconnect the 12 pin connector from the trans-

mission valve chest mounted to the left hand side
of the of the transmission.
19. Disconnect the transmission to lock out valve
pipe
20. Disconnect lock out return pipe and plug the hole
(oil will leak out of transmission)
AP101008
33
21. Remove front drive shaft (where fitted) and re-
move rear drive shaft
22. Disconnect the hand brake cable
23. Disconnect and pull back hydraulic pump (leav-
ing all pipes attached). Check that the oil pump
drive shaft does not slide out with the pump
24. Check return from steering motor is on the out-
side of transmission oil level tube.
AP101009
34
25. With the engine supported and using a ‘hoist’ ca-
pable of supporting a total weight of 800 kgs
1760 lbs loosen and remove the Engine and
Transmission mounting bolts
IMPORTANT: If the hydraulic oil pump is removed
from the transmission/Engine assembly the balance
of the assembly when hoisted will be front end heavy.
26. Using lifting tool 297392 very carefully raise the
hoist and guide the engine/transmission assem-
bly from the vehicle
35
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Separating Engine From Transmission with

assembly removed from the vehicle
1. Place the engine/transmission assembly on a
suitable splitting stand
2. Remove the starter motor assembly
36
3. Remove the torque convertor attaching bolts ac-
cessed through the starter motor aperture (1)
4. Remove the engine timing tab (2)
5. Remove the bell housing bolts
6. Gently slide the transmission with the torque
convertor from the engine
37
Installation
Place a stud in one tang of the flexi plate and as the
transmission is offered upto the engine guide the
stud through a bolt hole of the flywheel – remove the
stud and refit a bolt.
Refit the attaching bolts transmission to engine
Turn the engine crankshaft using a torque bar to ex-
pose in turn each attaching bolt hole of the flywheel
through the flexi plate and refit all of the bolts
Hoist the engine / trans assembly back into the ve-
hicle and centralise in the machine using a measure
between the chassis and centre line of the crankshaft
pulley. This ensures the engine is centrally posi-
tioned before torque up of the engine / trans to chas- 38
sis bolts.
reconnect all ancillary equipment as previously de-
scribed
Ensure all attaching hardware is tightened to the cor-
rect torque value as detailed in the specifications.
Ensure after installation that all fluid levels are cor-
rect prior to start up. Start and run the engine until
correct operating temperature is achieved to purge
air from cooling system. Stop engine, check for
leaks, rectify as required and recheck fluid levels.
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

SECTION 21 – POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION – CHAPTER 3 1
SECTION 21 – POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION DRIVE CONTROL
Chapter 3 – Powershift Operating Lever
CONTENT
21 300 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Driving with Powershift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Powershift Microprocessor Test Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
SPECIFICATIONS
ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS AND LIMIT‘S
The Microprocessor is designed to operate continu-
ously under the environmental conditions which are
controlled by the various international authorities.
Subject Standard
Steady state voltage SAEJ 1455
Jump start requirements SAEJ 1455
Reverse polarity SAEJ 1455
Negative inductive transients ISO 7637–1/1 Class IV
Positive inductive transients ISO 7637 –1/2 Class IV
Commutation noise ISO 7637 – 1/3 Class IV
Voltage drop ISO 7637 – 1/4
Load dump ISO 7637 – 1/5 Class IV
Electrostatic discharge IEC 801 – 2 Class IV
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 21 – POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION – CHAPTER 3
1
4X2 Power Shift Transmission Operating Lever and Related Switches
POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION CONTROLS 2. Differential Lock Selection Switch

1. Powershift and Direction lever: 3. Horn button
4. Loader Lever
4 forward gears and 2 two reverse gears are se- 5. Transmission Disconnect Switch:
lectable at the Powershift Lever.
IMPORTANT: The gear changes and direction of Disengages transmission drive on the move
travel are governed by a microprocessor in the body when the vehicle speed is up to 3rd gear.
of the Powershift Lever. The processor only allows 6. Kick down Switch:
smooth and safe gear changes when the vehicle
conditions are correct when the vehicle is on the If the vehicle is in 2nd gear and 1st is required for
move, irrespective of gear selected. loader work engaging kickdown instantly drops
Therefore Upshifting, downshifting or direction of the gear from 2nd to 1st, below 4.0 km/hr. When
travel through the gears will only occur when the reverse is selected the transmission reverts to
monitored vehicle speed by the processor, deter- 2nd gear but will select 1st if the kickdown switch
mines it is safe to do so. is again selected.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

TRANSMISSION CONTROL
The transmission fitted to this machine is designed
to Powershift gear changes while supplying drive to
the vehicle wheels, dependant upon the gear and
direction selected.
The transmission is controlled by a microprocessor
in the Power Shift Lever unit (1) which is mounted
below and to the left of the steering column.
POWER SHIFT LEVER

NOTE: The powershift HANDGRIP (2) is the only
moving part of the power shift assembly
2
POWER SHIFT LEVER DISPLAY – WITH
LIGHT EMITTING DIODES (LEDS),
LEDs – Numbered 1 through 4 :

Indicate the direction of travel by the colour of the
LED: Forward = Green
Neutral = Red
Reverse = Orange
and also indicate the selected shift lever gear.

= 3rd Gear Forward selected
STEADY ILLUMINATED LED: Indicates selected 3

shift lever gear.
FLASHING LED: Indicates the actual transmission
gear engaged (when different from the shift lever due
to speed protection).
LEDs – Numbered 1 through 8: Used during test
modes,
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LED – Number 8: illuminates green when the ve-

hicle is at a standstill (in normal mode).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LED – Letter T = Self-diagnostic Mode: T

Used in self-diagnostic test mode and will illuminate
during self test.
In the event of a fault, (the light will flash).
LED – Letter N Indicates Neutral : N
Illuminates RED when the transmission is shifted to
neutral.
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

POWER SHIFT LEVER AND MICRO-

PROCESSOR FUNCTIONS
Power Up:
Immediately after starting up (ignition on) LEDs T &
N are switched on, in order to show they are oper-
ational.
The microprocessor controls the transmission and
self checks its own memory continuously to ensure
that gear selection and range changes are always
performed in a safe manner.
Should a fault occur in the wiring harness or in the
solenoid of the control valve the Powershift lever
microprocessor, will check if it is still safe to drive.
If not the processor will default to a safe mode or lock
state
Reset Mode:
When the microprocessor defaults to reset mode
both the T and N LED’s are displayed simultaneously
to indicate that a reset has taken place.
If no critical faults are active the microprocessor se-
lects N2 and goes to the Neutral lock state. Refer to,
DRIVING WITH POWER SHIFT.
4
Limp home:
If a fault is detected at power up (ignition on) the limp
home facility is automatically selected.
IMPORTANT: If limp home is active, only 1st and 2nd
gear will be selectable but without modulation. This
means that the take off will be abrupt.
Limp home active can be identified by the illumina-
tion of the following LEDs.
T – LED N – LED CONDITION

Flashing ON Currently shown on display will be the last fault
Flashing Flashes Slower Input Fault Detected
Flashing Flashes in Phase Non Critical Output Fault Detected
Flashing Flashes Faster Safety Critical Output Fault Detected
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

DRIVING WITH POWERSHIFT
Selecting Neutral
At power up, ‘‘Neutral and 2nd Gear’’ are automati-
cally selected regardless of the power shift lever
position (1). The LED 2 and the N–LED are illumi-
nated RED, (neutral 2nd), the microprocessor is in a
neutral lock state.
If after driving, neutral is selected and the shift lever
stays in neutral for more than 3 seconds (vehicle sta-
tionary) the microprocessor automatically defaults to
the neutral lock state for safety.
NOTE: In neutral an automatic shift routine takes ef-
fect to prevent damage to the transmission if over-
speeding.
6
Leaving Neutral
A feature of the power shift lever is the NEUTRAL
LOCK STATE, which does not allow forward or re-
verse direction drive to be selected. This feature pre-
vents the vehicle accidently moving should the lever
be knocked into forward or reverse. To leave the neu-
tral lock state, you select drive direction followed by
an upshift by rotating the shift lever.
NOTE: Vehicle speed must be below 15 KPH to
leave the neutral lock state if free wheeling.
Selecting Forward
To select forward travel push the lever away from you
and the LED will illuminate green.
NOTE: When forward is selected you are not given
any indication of gear selected, only the maximum
gear the transmission will shift too. In addition
whether forward actually engages at that time, de-
pends on the status of the vehicle, for example if on
the move, road speed and direction will be con-
sidered by the microprocessor before any shift
changes take place.
7
Selecting Reverse
To select reverse travel pull the lever towards you
and the reverse LED will illuminate orange.
NOTE: When reverse is selected actually engage-
ment depends on the status of the vehicle, that is if
on the move road speed and direction will be con-
sidered by the microprocessor.
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Up Shifting
Up shifting to a desired gear from neutral is achieved
by twisting the handgrip counter clockwise (+) in
single movements, If held in this position the pro-
cessor will advance the shift selection from 2 though
to 4 in 1.8 sec intervals.
NOTE: An upshift request after a downshift is
delayed for 2 seconds. Should an Fault occur with
the speed sensor the microprocessor will not allow
up shifts above 2nd gear and will be indicated by the
‘T’ LED flashing and the ‘N’ LED flashing slower.
NOTE: If ascending up a steep incline select 2nd
gear and proceed. Only if speed and power allow, up-
shift onto 3rd and 4th subject to the speed shift sens- 9
ing.
Down Shifting
WARNING
If descending a steep incline select 2nd and proceed,
upshifting only when safe to do so. YOU CAN NOT
DOWNSHIFT TO REDUCE SPEED IF THE VE-
HICLE SPEED IS ABOVE 15 km/h (9 mph) due to
transmission overspeeding protection.
Downshifting to the desired gear is achieved by twist-

ing the handgrip clockwise (–) in single movements,
If held in this position the processor will decrease the
shift from 4, if the shift lever was in this gear, though
to 1 in 1.5 sec intervals.
NOTE: If the gear requested and the shift attainable 10
are not the same because of torque convertor turbine
RPM being too high, the gear position LED(e.g. LED
4) will flash and the shift lever position will illuminate,
not flashing, (e.g. LED 2), until the requested gear is
reached. When a gear position LED is flashing this
indicates that the vehicle has to reduce speed to
reach the requested gear.
Direction Changes
Changing driving direction is achieved simply by
shuttling the power shift lever between forward and
reverse and vice versa which is allowed at any time.
The system response however depends on vehicle
speed and currently engaged gear. When driving in
1st or 2nd gear direction changes are unrestricted
and are granted immediately.
F1 – R1 F2 – R2
R1 – F1 R2 –F2
11
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

When driving forward in 3rd or 4th gear two re-

sponses are possible depending on vehicle speed.
RESPONSE 1: If the vehicle speed in forward is
above 15 km/h (9 m/h) and reverse is selected down-
shift engages but momentum forward remains, until
the speed drops sufficiently to allow reverse 2nd gear
to be achieved.
RESPONSE 2: If the vehicle speed in forward is less
than 15 km/h (9 mph) reverse takes place immedi-
ately into 2nd gear.
Should a speed sensor fault be detected while in F3
or F4 a downshift sequence to 2nd gear will take
place and is indicated by the LED ‘T’ flashing fast
and the LED ‘N’ flashing slowly.
NOTE: If the transmission Is in forward 1st gear due
to kick down the direction change will result in selec- 12
tion of reverse 2nd gear for efficient pull away. Refer
to Kickdown for more information.
Transmission Power Shifting 4
F
In the previous paragraphs shift changes have been
shown as precise movements and twist actions of 1 2 3 4
the power shift lever. However the transmission can
change gear automatically in forward or reverse as
described in the following paragraph:
Select forward and 4th gear on the power shift lever
and with the handbrake released apply pressure to
the foot accelerator. As the engine revs and vehicle
speed increase the transmission will start from 2nd
gear and change up through 3rd and 4th gears up to
maximum road speed.
When you require to slow down or stop release the
foot accelerator and apply the footbrakes, the trans- 13
mission will automatically downshift through 4th, 3rd
and 2nd gear as the vehicle speed decreases. Once
stopped apply the handbrake and neutral will be se-
lected by the microprocessor. If left for 3 seconds it
will return to neutral lock if the declutch input has
been activated.
To select drive again, simply twist the handgrip to se-
lect 4th and with the handbrake released apply pres-
sure to the foot accelerator.
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Kick Down
The kick down facility (2nd to 1st gear only) on this
transmission increases torque instantly to the driving
wheels and hence pushing power. For example
when the loader is pushing into a pile and more
torque is required at the wheels.
This is achieved by the instant gear change from 2nd
to 1st by the use of the button (1) without the need
to use the twist grip on the power shift lever.
NOTE: The kick down facility is only available when
the transmission is in 2nd gear and the kickdown but-
ton (1) is depressed. If kick down can not be achieved
(Vehicle speed is too high) the LED 1 will be illumi-
nated and LED 2 will be flashing. The instant change 14
is achieved if the speed is low enough (within 6 sec-
onds) of the kickdown request.
Transmission Disconnect
The disconnect feature is useful when loading, for 1
example; when pushing the loader into a pile and you
require higher digging force press the disconnect
switch which disengages the transmission which al-
lows the full power of the engine to be directed to the
hydraulic oil pump.
NOTE: Transmission disconnect is selectable, when
the vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h and by depres-
sing the button on the loader lever and remains ac-
tive until the switch is released.
15
Speed Ranges 16.9x24/19.5x24
The microprocessor controlling the power shift trans-
mission is pre programmed to control the speed at
1st 6.1 (5.6) [–]
which the gear changes take place.
This effectively protects the transmission from ex- 2nd 11.4 (10.5) [–]
cess forces, should gear changes be selected at
higher speeds than is desirable. 3rd 22.4 (21.1) [10.5]
Shown in the chart opposite (within 10%) maximum 4th 39.5 (–) [19.9]
speed available and at which speed an automatic
shift takes place in each gear. 7.2 1st (6.6) [–]
As can be seen when down shifting from 4th gear at
maximum speed 39.5 km/h the microprocessor will 13.6 2nd (–) [6.3]
not allow the down shift to take place until the speed
has dropped too approximately 19.9 km/h. Refer to 16
the chart, for complete upshift and downshift speed (...) = Automatic upshift speed
change details. [...] = Automatic downshift speed km/h
NOTE: In some countries the road speed of 40 km/h
is not allowed. In these circumstances the trans-
mission is governed to a maximum of 25 km/h and
the shift speed range will reduce accordingly.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

WARNING
These machines should not be allowed to exceed 40
km/h (25 mph). Over speeding or coasting downhill
may cause loss of control, personal injury, or failure
of the drive line. Keep the machine in the same gear
going downhill as would be used when going uphill.
Four Wheel Drive

A x3 position switch (1) mounted in the front instru-
ment panel controls selection of 2 or 4 wheel drive.
To select 4wd press the switch down and the switch
is illuminated indicating 4wd can be engaged. To re-
turn to 2wd drive switch off the 4WD switch. 17
NOTE: 4wd is operational under various conditions
but is subject to certain conditions as listed below.
2wd and 4wd Pre Conditions:

– Rear Wheel drive: is always available when drive
is selected
– All ‘4’ wheel drive: is available in 1st and 2nd gears
– In 3rd and 4th gear range: rear wheel only is
selected regardless of the 4wd switch position
– All ‘4’ wheel braking: is operational in all of the gear
range regardless of the 4wd switch position above 3
km/h.
IMPORTANT: 4WD braking is only active with both
brake pedals latched together.
18
Powershift Lever
The operating lever (2) as previously explained con-
trols all transmission related functions using a micro-
processor (1). Transmission control is achieved by
the electronic control of the transmission hydraulic
valves.
19
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Operating Valves and Sensors

The signals sent out from the microprocessor control
the speed and gear shifts by operation of valves and
sensors which are situated in the valve chest to the
left of the transmission.
Enclosed within the valve chest which requires re-
moval from the transmission if repairs are necessary
are: 1
Forward Solenoid
Reverse Solenoid
1/2 Solenoid
Lo/Hi solenoid
4WD/2WD Solenoid
Direction Modulator
Range Modulator
Speed / Temperature Sensor
20
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

21
Transmission Control Valve Chest as shown (mating face to transmission body)
1. VCS = Variable Current Solenoid 5. Four Wheel Drive Solenoid
(Direction Modulator Solenoid) 6. Speed and Temperature Sensor
2. Range Modulation Solenoid 7. Neutral Reverse
3. Hi / Lo Solenoid 8. Neutral Forward Solenoid
4. 1st and 2nd Solenoid
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Powershift Control Valve Transmission Connector

Wire Pin Function
CV04 M Control valve common plus
CV05 L Transmission temperature out Ground
CV06 K Range modulation solenoid
CV07 J Speed sensor, Temperature Sensor, Ground
CV08 H Control Valve Common Ground
CV09 G Direction Modulation Solenoid
CV10 F Reverse Neutral Solenoid
CV11 E 4WD / 2WD Solenoid
CV12 D Range 1/2 Solenoid
CV13 C Forward / Neutral Solenoid
CV14 B Forward Lo/Hi Solenoid
CV15 A Speed Sensor plus output
J A
H B
M K
G C
L
F D
E
22
Powershift Operating Lever Connector
The connector between the operating lever and the transmission harness is a 19 Pole – ITT Trident Neptune
Male Connector. The Input wires as listed identify all of the pins and their functions:
23
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

COMMON CONNECTION BETWEEN MICROPROCESSOR AND CONTROL VALVES
Wire Pin Function Type Comment Control Valve

E01 V Battery + Use 6A fuse
E02 U Ground Direct to battery GND CV08–H / CV07–J
E03 T VCS switch to ground Direction Modulation CV09–G

Solenoid
E04 S Solenoid 1 switch to plus output 1/2 selection Solenoid CV12–D
E05 R Solenoid 2 switch to plus output Forward Lo/Hi selection CV14–B

Solenoid
E06 P Forward Solenoid switch to plus output Forward/Neutral CV13–C

selection Solenoid
E07 N Reverse Solenoid switch to plus output Reverse/Neutral CV10–F

selection Solenoid
E08 M PWM1 switch to ground output Range Modulation CV06–K

Solenoid
E09 L Solenoid 3 switch to plus output 0=FWD CV11–E

12V = RWD
E10 K PWM Solenoid Supply Supply for E03 and E08 CV04–M
E11 J Not used
E12 H Not used
E13 G Analogue input 0 pull to ground input 5k Ohm Temperature CV05–L

sensor
E14 F Analogue input 1 pull to ground input Braking request Braking
E15 E Diagnostic Link Input RS232 RXD
E16 D Speedometer switch to plus output RS232 TXD

Output/Diagnosis. out
E17 C Disconnect request input pull to plus input Transmission Disconnect

request
E18 B Four Wheel Drive pull to plus input 4WD/2WD request

request input
E19 A Speed Sns + Speed sensor input CV15–A
pull to ground input = PTG Microprocessor

+
pull to plus input = PTP PTP STP
switch to ground output = STG Microprocessor
+
switch to plus output = STP
PTG STG
24
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FAULT FINDING
Before attempting any fault finding ensure you have
a suitable Multimeter for checking component conti-
nuity.
When fault finding remember that with an electrical
concern it is often a minor fault that may have oc-
curred and could be as simple as:
Poor continuity between connector pins

Condensation in the connectors
Disconnected cables
Damaged or broken wires all of which could result in
a no drive situation but easily remedied when found
and corrected.
It should also be remembered that mechanical prob-
lems could result in fault codes appearing on the LED
display
25
Indication of faults
In case a fault is present during normal operation and
is detected by the microproccesor, both the T–led
and N–led may be blinking in some way as shown in
the table below.
NOTE: That on an open circuit or connection to bat-
tery plus on ON/OFF outputs can only be detected
while the corresponding output is in the OFF posi-
tion. Also a short to ground is only detected while the
output is on.
26
T–LED N–LED Condition Situation

(Orange) (Red)
Off Off Normal operation –
Off On Normal operation – N selected –
Off Blinks Normal operation – N selected / speed too high –
On Off Diagnostic mode was activated at Power up –
On On Controller in RESET – malfunction Fault
On Blinks Self Calibration in Progress –
Blinks On Last fault is currently shown on display Fault
Blinks Blinks slower Input Fault detected Fault
Blinks Blinks in Phase Non critical Output Fault detected Fault
Blinks Blinks Faster Safety Critical Output Fault detected Fault
Blinks Fast Blinks out of phase System Shutdown – Neutral till Power Down Fault
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

LED Displayed Faults

If a fault is, or there have been (intermittent faults)
present, a detailed fault display can be selected by
placing: The Powershift lever in Neutral position and
pressing the Kickdown button. The indicated fault on
the LED display can then be localised by using the
table below, until power down.
27
Fault Group
The faults are displayed using 2 LEDs on the 8 LED
display. Faults are displayed as 3 subgroups –
Group A:
Fault Sub Group A Group Indication
Input related LED 1 blinks red
Output related LED 2 blinks red
Other LED 3 blinks red
Within each group several faults are possible. The

second LED’s position – Group B, indicates the fault
area, where the colour indicates the fault type. 28
Typically an open circuit condition is shown using an
orange LED where a short circuit condition is indi-
cated with a red LED.
Once the fault code has been determined proceed to
fault codes page 18.
Fault Group Fault Group Fault Fault

LED (A) LED (B) Code
None None No fault active –
1 Red 4 Orange Shift lever input fault F1
1 Red 5 Orange Speed sensor Open Circuit F2
1 Red 5 Red Speed sensor Short Circuit F3
1 Red 7 Green Battery Over voltage F4
2 Red 4 Orange Open circuit on one or both direction outputs F5

2 Red 4 Red Direction output forced to plus – Critical fault F6
2 Red 5 Orange Other output Open Circuit F7
2 Red 5 Red Other output Short Circuit F8
2 Red 6 Orange Modulation output Open Circuit F9
2 Red 6 Red Modulation output Short Circuit F10
3 Red 5 Red Startup Fault – Limp Home Mode Selected F11
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FAULT CODE – F1
SHIFT LEVER INPUT FAULT
Perform Input test:

This test is used to verify operation of the shiftlever
and its inputs.
In this mode driving is possible
NOTE: The gear position indicators on the Micropro-
cessor top cover are used to display the test informa-
tion.
29
INPUT TEST REQUIREMENTS: Powershift lever to
be in forward position, twist to upshift (keep the shift
lever in this position during power up) and turn the
ignition on, this will place the microprocessor in the
Input test mode.
As shown in the table below placing the shift lever in

different positions in this mode illuminates its re-
spective LED (only 2 at the same time).
IMPORTANT: Selftest modes can only be started
WHILE POWERING UP (ignition on). Leaving the
selftest mode is done by switching OFF the power of
the Microprocessor (ignition off).
30
POWERSHIFT LEVER POSITIONS – LED – LED COLOUR –

WITH UP AND DOWN SHIFT SELECTION NUMBER DISPLAYED = Okay
Neutral 2 RED
Neutral and Upshift 3 RED
Neutral and Downshift 1 RED
Forward 2 GREEN
Forward and Upshift 3 GREEN
Forward and Downshift 1 GREEN
Reverse 2 ORANGE
Reverse and Upshift 3 ORANGE
Reverse and Downshift 1 ORANGE
Operate Disconnect Button on loader lever 5 GREEN

Operate 4WD Switch on Instrument Panel and Foot brakes 6 GREEN
Foot Brake Test on later models 7 RED
Temperature and Speed Sensor: Too test disconnect lead 8 RED
on the sensor and short to ground
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

FAULT CODE – F1
Shift lever input Fault
Key Start ON
T–LED Blinks
No Input Fault
N–LED Blinks Slower
Select Neutral and push kickdown

button:
= LED 1 red
= LED 4 Orange Other Input Fault
Check through
Input Fault: Forward / Reverse
Replace the Powershift F2, F3, F4 or F11
Lever Unit
Test with new Powershift

lever unit fitted
31
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FAULT CODE – F2 & F3
SPEED SENSOR
A fault indication on the display is given to warn of
this problem.
If a speed sensor fault is detected the microprocce-
sor will modify its Behaviour in the following areas:
• no up shifts will be allowed above 2nd gear
• direction change while in F3 or F4: the actual re-
versal is preceded by a downshift sequence until
2nd gear is obtained.
• 4WD braking remains operative 32
NOTE: That the system response in this case is
identical to the response in case of a power supply
overvoltage
Speed Sensor Test Using The Turbine Speed Turbine Rev/Min LED
Display
NOTE: A lamp test is performed prior to the speed 0 1 blinks
sensor test and monitors all LEDs are operational 0 – 249 1 on
250 – 499 2 on
SPEED SENSOR TEST REQUIREMENTS: Power-
shift lever to be in reverse position, twist to upshift 500 – 749 3 on
(keep the shift lever in this position during power up) 750 – 999 4 on
turn the ignition on and start the engine. 1000 – 1249 5 on
With engine running return Powershift lever to neu-
tral position and then place lever in forward and twist 1250 – 1499 6 on
to upshift. Increase engine speed and compare with 1500 – 1749 7 on
the table opposite.
1750 – 1999 8 on
IMPORTANT: Selftest modes can only be started above 2000 8 blinks
selftest mode is done by switching OFF the power
to the Microprocessor (ignition off).
In this mode, driving is possible
The LED corresponding with the table opposite il-
luminates to indicate the torque converter turbine
speed and increases with engine revs.
NOTE: Application of the footbrakes during this test
will reduce the turbine speed to zero.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

FAULT CODE – F2 and F3

Speed Sensor Fault
Speed Sensor Test Key Start

Okay ––ON–––
End
T–LED Blinks No Input Fault
Select Neutral and push kickdown

button:
= LED 1 red
= LED 5 Orange (F2) = LED 1 red
Other Input Fault
= LED 5 Red (F3)
Refer to F1, F4
Check wires from speed sensor CV Pin A to Powershift
Repair lever unit Pin A or CV Pin J to Pin U, and continuity test. or F11
Does it test Okay
Check Speed Sensor has

it failed
Static 0.6–0.8 v
or 1.3–1.5v
CV15 (A) CV07 (J)
Change lever
unit
o o 100 ohms
If Static is 0.6–0.8 v
or 1.3–1.5v
+ 12 volts
Replace Sensor
If Static is not 0.6–0.8v
or 1.3–1.5v
33
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FAULT CODE – F4
BATTERY OVERVOLTAGE
– 17 VOLTS PLUS
Overvoltage
Even power supply levels up to 30V will not damage
circuit components.
Above a power supply of 17 Vdc:
Group Fault 1 – Fault code 7
NOTE: The speed sensor circuit will not operate
when an overvoltage is present 34
Above a power supply of 24 Vdc:

the analogue signals are not reliable to convert any-
more
Overvoltage: When the voltage exceeds 17 Vdc
Action of the Microprocessor:
• no upshifts above 2nd gear
• direction change while in Forward 3 or Forward
4: the actual reversal is preceded by a downshift
sequence until 2nd gear is obtained
35
• Brake switch activation always engages four
Wheel Drive
NOTE: Voltages below 8 volts D.C the microprocce-
sor enters the reset mode
Intermittent power loss

After power is restored, the Microprocessor goes
through the reset mode.
36
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

FAULT CODE – F4
Battery Overvoltage
Key Start
––ON–––
T–LED Blinks No Input Fault

Select Neutral and

Other Input
push Kickdown Button
Fault
Check through F1,F2,
1 Red – 7 Green
F3 or F11
Check battery voltage

above 17.7 volts
Check dual battery connection Disconnect and reconnect

is parallel and okay correctly
Repair or Check Alternator output

Replace is it correct
37
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FAULT CODE – F5 AND F6
OPEN CIRCUIT DIRECTION OUTPUTS
Direction selection related outputs (E06–Pin P,

E07–Pin N):
A short to plus is considered as a critical fault. Shorts
to plus usually result in being blocked in either For-
ward or Reverse. If both are on simultaneously, the
transmission Behaviour depends on the state of a
mechanical interlock inside the transmission
38
In this case the Microprocessor normally turns on the
pressure modulator (E03–Pin T). This results in im-
mediate selection of neutral regardless of the origin
of the fault. Indeed even in case the short to plus is
applied externally, this response effectively blocks
the transmission in neutral.
If however at the time the fault was detected a fault
was also present on the pressure modulator, the
Microprocessor reverts to shutdown mode and re-
mains this way until power is removed. Shutdown
mode is a state in which power is removed from the
Microprocessor outputs by opening the internal re-
dundant shutdown path.
This only helps if the fault was caused by the Micro- 39
processor internally.
Additionally, during program execution, critical vari-
ables are continuously checked for contents integ-
rity.
NOTE: To determine output faults proceed to pages
26 to 29.
Gear Shifts
low/high solenoid :
inactive ⇒ forward high is selected
active ⇒ forward low is selected
Shift diagram – Solenoids Forward Reverse.

1 2 3 4 1 2
rev/n
fwd/n
low/high
1st/2nd
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2


Example of Output Test results
During the output test LEDs 1234567 one by one are used and by Green =
colour identifies the possible component at fault. No fault
Red = short circuit yellow = open circuit or short to battery plus found
Identify component by LED Identify component by LED

1 – Forward solenoid 1 – Forward solenoid
2 – Reverse solenoid 2 – Reverse solenoid
3 – 1/2 Solenoid 3 – 1/2 Solenoid
4 – Forward Hi / Lo Solenoid 4 – Forward Hi / Lo Solenoid
5 – 4WD / RWD Solenoid 5 – 4WD / RWD Solenoid
6 – Direction modulation solenoid 6 – Direction modulation solenoid
7 – Range modulation solenoid 7 – Range modulation solenoid
Example : LED 1 Example : LED 2

(red) Forward (orange) Reverse
solenoid output Solenoid Output
shorted to ground open circuit or
or a component. shorted to battery
plus
Check component Check component
and continuity of and continuity of
the cables and the cables and
connectors connectors
Output Test
40
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

OUTPUT FAULT – STATUS BY LED CO-

LOUR
OUTPUT TEST REQUIREMENTS: Powershift
lever to be in forward position, twist clockwise to
downshift and turn ignition on.
In this mode, driving is not possible, since all
Microprocessor outputs remain off until the test
mode is left.
The colour and number of the LED indicates its
status:
COLOUR STATUS 41
GREEN Output OK
ORANGE Output not connected
or shorted to battery
plus
RED Output shorted to
ground (or to another
output)
Output test – Fault by LED Number

The LED numbers correspond to the connector out-
put wires as follows:
Example: LED 1 = Forward solenoid – colour
Orange = (Output not connected or shorted to bat-
tery plus)
LED OUTPUT OUTPUT
NUMBER WIRE FUNCTION
1 E06 Forward
solenoid
2 E07 Reverse
solenoid
42
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2


Output Fault – Status by LED Colour
Key Start
––ON–––
T–LED Blinks
Safety critical output
N–LED Blinks Faster
Select Neutral and

Other Output
Fault forced to
(F5) open circuit
plus (F6)
2 Red – 4 Orange
2 Red – 4 Red
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
All LEDs Green Perform output test –
and OK Fault Found ? Other LEDs are Orange
Led 1 Orange Led 2 Orange Proceed to F7, F8, F9 or F10
check Forward wire to check Reverse wire to

Power Shift Lever is it Power Shift Lever is it
faulty faulty
Repair or
Replace
check Forward Solenoid check Reverse Solenoid

Resistance – is it faulty Resistance – is it faulty
Repair or
Replace
Check internal wires in forward Check internal wires in reverse

solenoid is it faulty solenoid is it faulty
Repair or
Replace
Change Power Shift

Lever Unit
43
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

OUTPUT FAULT – STATUS BY LED CO-

LOUR
OUTPUT TEST REQUIREMENTS: Powershift
lever to be in forward position, twist clockwise to
downshift and turn ignition on.
In this mode, driving is not possible, since all
Microprocessor outputs remain off until the test
mode is left.
The colour and number of the LED indicates its
status:
COLOUR STATUS 44
GREEN Output OK
ORANGE Output not connected
or shorted to battery
plus
RED Output shorted to
ground (or to another
output)
Output test – Fault by LED Number

The LED numbers correspond to the connector out-
put wires as follows:
Example: LED colour Red and numbered 3 =
1/2 solenoid output shorted to ground.
LED OUTPUT OUTPUT
NUMBER WIRE FUNCTION
3 E04 1/2 Solenoid
4 E05 Forward Lo/Hi
solenoid
5 E09 AWD/RWD
Solenoid
45
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2


Open Circuit Direction Outputs
Key Start
––ON–––
T–LED Blinks Non Critical

N–LED Blinks in Phase Output Fault
Select Neutral and

push Kickdown Button Other Output
(F7) open circuit Fault (F8) short
2 Red – 5 Orange circuit
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
2 Red – 5 Red
All LEDs Green

and OK
Perform output test
– Fault Found ? Other LEDs are Orange
Led 3 Orange or Red Led 4 Orange or Red Led 5 Orange or Red Proceed to F9 or F10
check 1/2 check AWD/RWD

Solenoid Solenoid is it faulty
is it faulty check Lo/Hi
Repair or Solenoid is it
Replace faulty
check internal and external

wiring of affected solenoids
Repair or
are they faulty
Replace
Change Power Shift

Lever Unit
46
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

DIRECTION MODULATION OUTPUT

SHORT OR OPEN CIRCUIT
A fault on this output is considered as a problem po-
tentially reducing transmission life.
For this reason while a fault is persistent, the allow-
able direction change speed limit is decreased grad-
ually (10%) each time a direction change was in-
hibited, down to a minimum of 20% of the maximum
allowable shift speed.
After a while this can result in severely degraded per-
formance (only low speed reversals are possible), 47
but it has the advantage that the driver cannot be sur-
prised by a sudden performance loss which could
constitute a safety hazard in itself.
Direction Modulation Solenoid (E03) Pin T.
The variable Current solenoid for direction modula-
tion is connected to the modulation Common Plus
(Pin K) at one side and to (Pin T) at the other side.
A programmable current is increased or reduced to
the solenoid controlling the modulating pressure
No current corresponds to maximum pressure.
Approximately 1 Amp corresponds with no pressure
48
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2


Modulation Output Short or Open Circuit
Key Start
––ON–––
T–LED Blinks
N–LED Blinks in Phase No Fault
Select Neutral and

(F9) (F10) Other non critical
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
2 Red – 6 Orange 2 Red – 6 Red output fault, F7 or F8
All LEDs Green

and OK
Direction modulator
Open Circuit
Direction modulator
Short Circuit
check Solenoid check Solenoid

Resistance Resistance
Repair or – is it faulty – is it faulty
Replace
Repair or Check internal and external wiring of the

Replace direction modulation solenoid is it faulty
Change Power Shift

Lever Unit
49
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FAULT CODE – F11
START UP FAULT LIMP HOME SELECTED
Internal faults
At power up a series of integrity checks is done.
If a fault is detected:
• and the fault prevent operation as a transmission
controller : the Microprocessor locks itself in a
reset state.
• and controlling the transmission is still possible
: the Microprocessor reverts to limp home
mode. 50
Limp Home mode

Defaulted to if an internal problem is detected at
power up.
This mode is automatically selected at power up if the
integrity tests show that EPROM parameters are
corrupt, but the microprocessor can still function as
a transmission controller (other component’s integ-
rity are intact).
In this mode the user can operate the transmission
in either direction in 1st. and 2nd. There are no
protections; all shifts are unmodulated.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

FAULT CODE – F11

Start Up Fault Limp Home Selected
Key Start
––ON–––
T–LED Blinks
No Input Fault
Select Neutral and Other Output

push Kickdown Button Fault
(F11) 2 Red – 6 Red
3 Red – 5 Red Refer F1, F2, F3 or F4
Change Power Shift

Lever Unit
51
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FAULTS OTHER – F 12
NOT IDENTIFIED BY THE LEDS

There may be situations when an individual compo-
nent develops a fault but it is not highlighted by the
LEDs. If a component is in doubt proceed to Input
Test as follows:
Perform Input test:

This test is used to verify the inputs.
In this mode driving is possible
NOTE: The gear position indicators on the Micropro-
cessor top cover are used to display the test informa-
tion.
INPUT TEST REQUIREMENTS: Powershift lever to
be in forward position, twist to upshift and turn the
ignition on, this will place the microprocessor in the
Input test mode.
As shown in the table below placing the shift lever in

different positions in this mode illuminates its re-
spective LED.
IMPORTANT: Selftest modes can only be started
selftest mode is done by switching OFF the power of
the Microprocessor.
CHECKING OF INPUT REQUESTS LED – LED COLOUR –

NUMBER DISPLAYED
Confirm Input Test Is Okay (Lever Forward, Neutral, Reverse) and In Order Check As Below:
1. Operate Disconnect Button on loader lever 5 GREEN = OKAY
2. Operate 4WD Switch on Instrument Panel and Foot 6 GREEN = OKAY
brakes
3. Foot Brake Test on later models 7 RED = OKAY
4. Temperature and Speed Sensor: Too test disconnect lead 8 RED = OKAY
on the sensor and short to ground
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

FAULT CODE – F12
Key Start
––ON––
Perform Input Test and

analyse Faults if possible
Fault Found
Possible Input switch Faults:

4WD – Request
Brake – Request
Repair or
Replace Declutch – Request
Direction – Request
Speed/Temp sensor
52
FAULT CODE – F13
Key Start
––ON––
Perform output test and

check range modulation
LED 7 (wire E08)
Repair or
Replace
Green = Okay
Orange = Open circuit
Red = Short Circuit
53
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

LIMP HOME LEAD

In the event of a total failure of the microprocessor
1
such as a serious cab or loom fire the vehicle can be
moved by using the limp home lead to bypass the
microprocessor.
Tool No – 297406
54
Mounted to the left hand side and to the top of the
transmission is the microprocessor loom connector.
Disconnect the damaged loom and connect the limp 1
home lead in its place.
55
Connect the plug end into the 12 volt auxiliary socket
or any available 12 volt supply
56
When seated in the cab start the engine and ensuring
that all personnel are clear of the machine select
either forward or reverse on the switch and the ma-
chine will move as requested.
NOTE: When using the limp home lead only 2nd gear
(forward or reverse) is selectable no other gear
change or modulation is available.
57
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

SECTION 21 – POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION
Chapter 4 – Overhaul
CONTENT
21 300 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Input shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Forward Low High Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1st Reverse Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2nd Clutch Drum Output Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Four Wheel Drive Disconnect Output Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
SPECIFICATIONS
Weight, dimensions, oil capacity
Weight (dry) 290 kg (639 lb)
Maximum length 705,3 mm (27,8”)
Maximum width 465 mm (18,3”)
Maximum height 648 mm (25,35”)
Oil capacity: 14 Litres (3.7 US Gals) without cooler and hydraulic lines.
Stall Speed Test T.B.E
TOOLS
Transmission Drive Gear Locking tool 297397
Forward/Reverse Shaft Lift Hook 297398
Transmission Lift Bracket 297399
60mm thin wall Socket – Output yoke nuts 297400
Piston Spring Compressor 297401
Output Seal Installer 297402
Pressure Test Gauge Extension Connector 297403
Pressure Test Gauge Connector 297404
Test lead for Speed Sensor 297405
Limp Home Lead 297406
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

1
Torque Chart
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

2
Torque Chart
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

3
Tooling Chart
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

FAULT FINDING the engine and transmission. Air clean the radi-
When troubleshooting a ”transmission” problem, it ator, if necessary.
should be kept in mind that the transmission is only • The engine must be operating correctly. Be sure
the central unit of a group of related powertrain com- that it is correctly tuned and adjusted to the cor-
ponents. Proper operation of the transmission de- rect idle and maximum no–load governed speed
pends on the condition and correct functioning of the specifications.
other components of the group. Therefore, to proper-
ly diagnose a suspected problem in the transmission, Hydraulic check:
it is necessary to consider the transmission fluid, Also, before checking the transmission clutches,
charging pump, torque converter, transmission as- torque converter, charging pump, and hydraulic cir-
sembly, oil cooler, filter, connecting lines, and con- cuit for pressure and rate of oil flow, it is important to
trols, including the engine, as a complete system. make the following transmission fluid check:
Power shift with torque converter transmission Check oil level in the transmission. The transmission
troubles fall into three general categories: mechan- fluid must be at the correct (full level). All clutches
ical hydraulic and electrical problems. and the converter and its fluid circuit lines must be
In addition to the mechanical and electrical compo- fully charged (filled) at all times. See NOTE below.
nents, all of which must be in the proper condition NOTE: The transmission fluid must be at operating
and functioning correctly, the correct functioning of temperature of 82 – 93_ C (180 – 200 F) to obtain cor-
the hydraulic circuit is most important. Transmission rect fluid level and pressure readings.
fluid is the ”life blood” of the transmission. It must be DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MAKE THESE CHECKS
supplied in an adequate quantity and delivered to the WITH COLD OIL.
system at the correct pressures to ensure converter
operation, to engage and hold the clutches from slip- To raise the oil temperature to this specification it is
ping, and to cool and lubricate the working compo- necessary to either operate (work) the vehicle or run
nents. the engine with converter at ”stall”. (Refer to con-
verter stall procedure).
Stall Test: CAUTION
Use a stall test to identify transmission, converter, or Be careful that the vehicle does not move unexpect-
engine problems. edly when operating the engine and converter at stall
R.P.M.
Transmission pressure checks:
Transmission problems can be isolated by the use of
CONVERTER STALL PROCEDURE
pressure tests. When the stall test indicates slipping
1. Put the vehicle against a solid barrier, such as a
clutches, then measure clutch pack pressure to de- wall, and/or apply the parking brake and block
termine if the slippage is due to low pressure or clutch the wheels.
plate friction material failure.
In addition, converter charging pressure and trans- 2. Put the directional control lever in FORWARD (or
mission lubrication pressure may also be measured. REVERSE, as applicable).
Mechanical and electrical checks: 3. Select the highest speed. With the engine run-
ning, slowly increase engine speed to approxi-
Prior to checking any part of the system for hydraulic
mately one–half throttle and hold until transmis-
function (pressure testing), the following mechanical sion (converter outlet) oil temperature reaches
and electrical checks should be made: the operating range.
• Check the parking brake for correct adjustment.
• Be sure all lever linkage is properly connected CAUTION
and adjusted in each segment and at all connect-
Do not operate the converter at stall condition longer
ing points.
than 30 seconds at one time, shift to neutral for 15
• The controls are actuated electrically. Check the seconds and repeat the procedure until desired tem-
wiring and electrical components. perature is reached. Excessive temperature (120_
• Be sure that all components of the cooling sys- C) 250 F maximum) will cause damage to trans-
tem are in good condition and operating correct- mission clutches, fluid, converter, and seals.
ly. The radiator must be clean to maintain the
proper cooling and operating temperatures for
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FAULT FINDING
Refer to the following troubleshooting guide for the
diagnosis of typical transmission troubles.
LOW CLUTCH PRESSURE
CAUSE REMEDY
1. Low oil level 1.Fill to proper level
2. Clutch pressure regulating valve stuck open 2.Clean valve spool and housing
3. Faulty charging pump 3.Replace pump
4. Broken/worn clutch shaft/piston sealing rings 4.Replace sealing rings
LOW CHARGING PUMP OUTPUT
CAUSE REMEDY
2. Suction screen plugged 2.Clean section pump
3. Defective charging pump 3.Replace pump
OVERHEATING
CAUSE REMEDY
1. Worn oil sealing rings 1.Remove, disassemble, and rebuild converter
2. Worn charging pump 2.Replace
4. Dirty oil cooler 4.Clean cooler
5. Restriction in cooler lines 5.Change cooler lines
NOISY CONVERTER
CAUSE REMEDY
1. Worn charging pump 1.Replace
2. Worn or damaged bearings 2.A complete disassembly will be necessary to
determine what bearing is faulty
LACK OF POWER
CAUSE REMEDY
1. Low engine R.P.M. at converter stall 1.Tune engine check governor
2. See ”Overheating” and make same checks 2.Make corrections as explained in ”Overheating”
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

GENERAL INFORMATION Forward High:

Grease ’O’ rings before assembly. 4 separator plates, 3 friction plates and two 1–side
friction plates.
Add grease to piston rings before assembly slots of min. clearance = 1,24 mm
piston rings are not allowed to pass bores in housings max. clearance = 2,76 mm
Teflon seals must be sized prior to assembly, add
some grease to steel and friction dia of clutch drum 4WD Disconnect clutch:
before assembly. 12 separator plates, 11 friction plates and two 1–side
Pump must be filled up with test oil prior to assembly. friction plates.
Pump drive shaft must be installed after torque con- min. clearance = 3,66 mm
verter max. clearance = 6,78 mm
If clearance is more than 5,66 mm, add one separ-
ator plate upon last separator plate.
CLUTCH PACK ASSEMBLY CAUTION
Forward Low: Rev, 1st, and 2nd clutch: 9 separator Installation force of disc spring is 3280 N !
plates with steel splines. 8 friction plates (friction ma-
terial both sides) with friction splines, 2 1–side friction Be sure that shielded and sealed bearings are
plates (friction material 1 side) with friction splines. mounted as shown.
Start with one 1–side friction plate, metal against pis- Seals must be pressed in perpendicular upon shaft
ton, then alternately separator and friction plate. End axis from bearing side. Except lower rear output.
with a 1–side friction plate, metal side against end
plate or disc spring. Plug to be screwed in and torqued but without Loc-
Be sure disc spring is mounted as shown. tite.
Forward low and Reverse: First clutch springs concave side of first disc spring
min. clearance = 2,79 mm to be placed against clutch piston wear sleeve.
max. clearance = 5,21 mm Remaining 10 springs to be stacked alternately rev-
ersed as shown.
If clearance is more than 4,79 mm, add one separ-
ator plate upon last separator plate. Heat gears up to 150_ C (302 F) before assembling.
First and second: IMPORTANT: For disassembly and reassembly of
min. clearance = 2,54 mm this unit you will need, besides normal workshop
max. clearance = 5,41 mm tools and the special tools mentioned in the last
chapter of this manual, a press capable of minimum
If clearance is more than 4,54 mm, add one separ- 20 tons and an induction heater of minimum 3,5 kW
ator plate upon last separator plate. to heat gears up to 150_ C (302 F).
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

DISASSEMBLY OF FRONT EXTERNAL

PARTS
Remove filter adapter screws, filter adapter and ’O’

ring.
4
Remove drive plate screws, drive plates and remove
the torque converter as an assembly.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

OIL PUMP DISASSEMBLY

NOTE: The oil pump can only be removed when the
transmission is separated from the engine. Disas-
sembly of the oil pump is not generally recom-
mended since individual components are matched
and are non serviceable. However it may be dis-
mantled for cleaning purposes.
1. Remove the attaching bolts from the oil pump
body and withdraw pump from the bell housing.
IMPORTANT: The ‘O’ ring must be replaced with
new before re–assembly of the pump.
2. Carefully separate the oil pump components and
clean, inspect the components for wear. If in any
doubt replace the pump. 7
IMPORTANT: A worn oil pump will reduce the effi-
ciency of the transmission and the machine if not cor-
rected.
3. A single lipped seal (1) is incorporated in the front
oil pump housing and should be changed when 1
ever a complete teardown has taken place. Push
out the old seal and replace with new, grease fric-
tion seal and push in ensuring it is fully seated
into the housing.
Re–assemble the pump in reverse order, fit new
seals and copper washers under the bolt heads and
torque the retaining bolts to 20–27 Nm (15–20 lbf ft)
IMPORTANT: Ensure the pump friction ring face with
chamfer enters the pump body first.
8
Oil galleries in the transmission bell housing.
1. Output to valve chest.
2. Oil seal pressure relief to sump port. 2
3. Torque convertor in.
4. Intake port from sump to pump. 1
3
4
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Using Tool and a thin wall 60mm socket remove

upper output nut, washer, ’O’ ring and flange.
10
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

CONTROL VALVE – REMOVAL

Disconnect the wiring connector mounting nut (1),
control valve protection cover mounting screws (2).
and breather (3) from the side control cover.
11
Remove control valve protection cover and gasket.
Remove control valve as an assembly and remove
bypass valve spool and spring (1).
12
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CONTROL VALVE
13
With reference to Figure 13, listed below are the posi- 6. System pressure regulating valve
tions of solenoids, valves, ports and sensor 7. 1st and 2nd Solenoid
1. VCS = Variable Current Solenoid 8. Four Wheel Drive Solenoid
(Direction Modulator Solenoid) 9. Speed and Temperature Sensor
2. Range Modulation Solenoid 10. To Dump
3. Oil flow in from pump 11. Neutral Reverse
4. Oil to torque convertor 12. Neutral Forward Solenoid
5. Hi / Lo Solenoid
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

SPOOL VALVES
1 2 3 4
5
15
14
8
13
10
12
11
TAB21243
14
1. Forward High low Spring 9. Pressure Reducing Spring 5 bar

2. Booster Spool 10. Pressure Reducing Spool
3. Accumulator 11. Four Wheel Drive Spool
4. Range Modulation 12. Reverse Spool
5. System Pressure Regulator Valve 13. Forward Spool
6. System Pressure Regulator Spring 20 bar 14. Separator Plate
7. 2nd and 1st Clutch Spool 15. Forward High Low Spool
8. Separator Plate
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CONTROL VALVE – OPERATION

SYSTEM PRESSURE REGULATOR
Oil from the pump acts on the regulating valve port ACCUMULATOR SPOOL
(10). The spool moves down against spring pressure As the current drops to the variable force solenoid it
as the pressure increases in the system. The spool allows oil to flow through port (6) past the accumula-
then uncovers the lubrication port (11) which allows tor as pressure and flow increase from the solenoid
excess flow to go to lubrication and maintain 20 bar the accumulator is pushed down against spring pres-
in port (10). sure this allows an even and steady increase in pres-
PRESSURE REDUCER sure acting on the pressure booster valve.
Oil from the pressure regulator spool acts on the PRESSURE BOOSTER VALVE
pressure reducing spool through port (19) holding Oil is supplied from the VFS past the accumulator
the valve down. This supplies system pressure spool onto the pressure booster spool via port (5) as
through port (20). This port is connected internally to pressure increases on the spool it moves down al-
the pilot port (22) which acts against the spool. The lowing system pressure to flow from port (4) to port
spool then moves against spring pressure due to the (3) as the pressure increases on the directional
oil pressure acting on a larger surface area. This re- clutch, a sensing line senses the clutch pressure and
stricts the oil thus supplying a reduced pressure acts on the bottom of the spool pushing it upward re-
through port (20) at 5 bar. ducing flow and pressure to the directional clutches.
RANGE MODULATION Pressure then increases on the top side of the spool
In normal operation the spring holds the valve down pushing it down allowing an increase in flow and
allowing oil flow from port (8) to port (9) and onto 1st pressure to the directional clutches this repeats
and 2nd clutch with no modulation. When changing many times during clutch engagement enabling
1st to 2nd clutch or 2nd to 1st clutch an electrical sig- smooth modulation.
nal is sent to energise the range modulation sole- REVERSE SPOOL
noid, which opens. This allows oil pressure to act With the reverse solenoid energised pilot pressure is
through port (12) onto the spool, which moves up- supplied to port (30) pushing the spool upwards
wards. Oil can not flow from port (8) to port (9) but against spring pressure this also ensures the forward
flows up port (8) and into port (9) through a small ori- spool is pushed into the neutral position. Modulated
fice in the 1st and 2nd clutch spool thus modulating oil from the pressure boosting valve flows into port
the the oil supply via small orifices thus modulating (33) and out of port (32) to the reverse clutch. When
the oil supply. the solenoid is de–energised the spring returns the
1st and 2nd CLUTCH SPOOL spool to neutral allowing oil in the reverse clutch to
When the 1st clutch is selected the solenoids ener- return to tank via port (31).
gised allow pilot pressure to flow through port (28) FORWARD SPOOL
acting on the end of the spool pushing the spool up When the forward solenoid is energised pilot pres-
against spring pressure. Oil flow from the range mo- sure builds up in port (38) pushing the spool down-
dulation spool through the port (16) and out at port wards against spring pressure allowing modulated oil
(15) to engage the 1st clutch. pressure from the booster valve to flow from port (35)
When the 2nd clutch is selected the solenoid is de– to port (36) which supply oil to the forward low high
energised there is no pressure in port (28). The clutch spool. When the solenoid is de–energised the
spring pushes the spool down allowing oil from the spring returns the spool to neutral allowing oil to re-
range modulation to go through port (16) and out of turn to tank via port (37).
port (17) to the 2nd clutch. FORWARD HIGH LOW SPOOL
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SPOOL When the high low solenoid is de–energised the
With the solenoid de–energised there is no oil pres- spring holds the spool down. Oil from port (43) which
sure in port (26) the spring holds the spool up allow- comes from the forward spool can flow out of port
ing system pressure oil to flow from port (25) to port (44) to engage the high clutch. When the the high
(24) engaging the FWD clutch. When the solenoid is solenoid is energised pilot pressure acts on the end
energised pilot pressure acts through port (26) push- of the spool via port (40) thus pushing the spool up-
ing the spool down against spring pressure prevent- wards compressing the spring this allows oil from the
ing system pressure from flowing from port (25) to forward spool to enter through port (3) and flow out
port (24) and opening port (23) to drain to tank disen- of port (42) to the forward low clutch.
gaging FWD.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

OIL PORTS
15
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SPOOLS
1 2 3 4 5
10
9 8
TAB21245
16
1. Forward high Low Valve Spool 6. 2nd and 1st Clutch Spool
2. Pressure Booster Spool 7. Pressure Reducer Spool
3. Accumulator Spool 8. Four Wheel drive Spool
4. Range Modulation Spool 9. Reverse Spool
5. System Pressure Regulating Spool 10. Forward Spool
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

NOTES
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CONTROL VALVE – COMPONENTS
1. System Pressure Regulator Spool 25. 1st/2nd spool

2. Range Spool Spring 26. Spool Stop
3. Spool Cover Screw 27. Four Wheel Drive Spool
4. Spool Cover 28. Four Wheel Spool Spring
5. Electronic Controlled Modulation Valve 29. Booster Spool
6. Solenoid 30. Accumulator Spring
7. Plug 31. Accumulator Spool
8. Solenoid Plate 32. 1st and 2nd Spool Spring
9. Speed Sensor 33. Separator Plate
10. Speed Sensor ‘O’ ring 34. Range Modulation Spool
11. ‘O’ ring 35. Forward Low High Spool Spring
12. Nut 36. Forward Low High Spool
13. Wiring Harness ‘O’ rings and Speed Sensor 37. Spool Stop
assembly 38. Forward Spool
14. Wiring Clamp 39. Reverse Spool Spring
15. Clamp Screw Lock Washer 40. Reverse Spool
16. Clamp Screw 41. Spacer Plate
17. Spool Body to Solenoid Plate Screw 42. Separator Plate
18. Check Port Plugs 43. Wiring Strap
19. Spool Body 44. Solenoid Clamp
20. Pressure Reducer Spool 45. Solenoid Clamp Screw
21. Pressure reducer Spring 46. Bypass Valve Spool
22. Separator Plate 47. Bypass Valve Spring
23. System Pressure Regulator Spring 48. Solenoid Plate
24. Spool Stop 49. Separator Plate
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

CONTROL VALVE – COMPONENTS
49
17
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

DISASSEMBLY OF THE TRANSMISSION

Remove the hydraulic pump screws and gasket de-
tach the pump drive shaft rear bearing Circlip and re-
move the pump drive shaft and bearing as an assem-
bly.
18
Using Tool no 297397 to hold the flange steady re-
move the upper output nut, washer, ’O’ ring and
flange.
19
Remove converter housing to transmission case
screws and lockwashers.
20
To gain access to the output shaft circlip remove the
case plug and gasket.
21
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Using a spreading type snap ring plier, spread ears

on output shaft rear bearing snap ring. Holding snap
ring open, tap on output shaft and transmission case
to remove case from converter housing. Lift trans-
mission case from converter housing (using lifting
bracket number 297399).
22
Carefully raise transmission case to expose shaft as-
semblies and remove converter housing gasket.
23
Remove Four Wheel Drive (FWD) shaft sealing
rings.
24
Remove FWD shaft rear bearing circlip.
25
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Use bearing puller remove FWD shaft rear bearing.
26
Using bearing puller to remove Output shaft rear

bearing.
27
Using bearing puller remove input shaft rear bearing
28
Remove reverse Idler input and 1st Reverse shaft
sealing rings
29
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Use bearing puller to remove 1st reverse shaft and

bearing.
30
Remove Input shaft sealing rings
31
Using bearing puller to remove Input shaft rear bear-
ing.
32
Use bearing puller to remove forward high gear from
the input shaft.
33
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Remove upper baffle plates screws.
34
Remove lower oil baffle to converter housing screws,
you can not remove oil baffle from output shaft.
35
Using a suitable eye bolt remove output shaft, 2nd
shaft and oil baffle at the same time.
36
Remove suction tube retainer screw and lockwasher,
suction tube retainer ring, ’O’ ring and washer.
37
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Remove output shaft front bearing retainer ring and

remove output shaft front assembly.
38
Using lifting tool 297398 remove reverse and forward
shaft at the same time along with the input shaft.
39
Remove safety valve plug, spring and ball and by–
pass plug, spring and ball..
40
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

41
Powershift Transmission Operating Shafts
Disassembly of the above shafts can be found the
following pages as listed.
Shaft Page No
1 Input shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2 Forward Low High Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3 1st Reverse Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4 2nd Clutch Drum Output Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5 Four Wheel Drive Disconnect Output Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

42
Input shaft and integral Hydraulic pump Drive shaft
1. Input Shaft 11. Bearing
2. Circlip 12. Piston Ring
3. Forward High Drive gear 13. Pump drive shaft
4. Piston Ring 14. Forward Low and Reverse Drive Gear
5. Bearing 15. Piston Ring
6. Bolt 16. Bearing
7. Spring washer 17. Circlip
8. Oil Pump Gasket 18. Circlip
9. Circlip Large 19. Circlip
10. Circlip Small
NOTE: The hydraulic pump drive shaft can be re-
moved from the transmission assembly after remov-
ing the hydraulic pump. Without disassembly of the
transmission.
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Disassembly pump drive shaft

Remove rear bearing circlip.
43
Use bearing puller to remove rear bearing.
44
Remove sealing ring from shaft.
45
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Reassembly pump drive shaft

Install sealing ring on shaft.
46
Install rear bearing on shaft and tap bearing into
place.
47
Install rear bearing retainer ring.
48
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Disassembly input shaft

Remove input shaft rear sealing ring (1).
– forward high gear circlip (2).
– forward low gear circlip (3).
49
Remove input shaft front sealing ring.
50
Use bearing puller to remove input shaft front bear-
ing.
51
Remove input shaft front bearing circlip (1) and for-
ward low gear circlip (2).
52
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Press forward low gear from shaft.
53
Reassembly input shaft
Install forward low gear circlip.
54
Warm gear to 150_ C (302 F), install gear.
Install forward low gear circlip.
– input shaft front bearing circlip.
– Install input shaft front sealing ring.
55
Warm input shaft front bearing to 120_ C (248 F), in-
stall bearing.
Turn shaft and install input shaft
– forward high gear circlip
– input shaft rear sealing ring.
56
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Forward Low High Shaft
57
1. Gear Forward Low High 20. Roller Bearing
2. Snap Ring 21. Needle Bearing
3. Circlip 22. Thrust Washer
4. Bearing 23. Snap Ring
5. Circlip 24. Spacer
6. Circlip 25. Friction disc
7. Washer 26. Steel Disc
8. Snap Ring 27. Clutch Disc Backing plate
9. Clutch Disc Backing Plate 28. Spring Wear Ring
10. Circlip 29. Piston
11. Spacer 30. Piston Seal outer
12. Spring Retainer 31. Piston Seal Inner
13. Spring 32. Shaft / Drum Assembly
14. Sealing Rings 33. Bearing
15. Bearing 34. Gear Forward Driven
16. Thrust Washer 35. Circlip
17. Needle Bearing 36. Bearing
18. Roller Bearing 37. Circlip
19. Gear Forward High Clutch
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Disassembly forward high clutch

Remove clutch shaft sealing rings (1), thrust washer
(2), thrust bearing (3), clutch gear needle bearing (4).
58
Remove clutch gear.
59
Remove thrust washer (1), thrust needle bearing (2)
and clutch gear steel bearing.
60
Remove clutch plate snap ring.
61
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Remove 1x clutch plate spacer (1)

1x – clutch disc backing plate (2)
1x – one friction half disc (3).
3x – friction discs (4)
4x – steel discs (5).
1x – one friction half disc (6).
62
Compress spring using tool no 297401 and remove
spring retainer circlip
63
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Remove clutch spring spacer.

– clutch piston spring retainer (1).
– clutch piston spring (2).
– clutch piston wear plate (3).
– clutch piston assembly (4)
64
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Disassembly forward low clutch

Use bearing puller remove front bearing and gear.
65
Remove gear retainer ring.
66
Use a bearing puller and slice to remove clutch gear
and bearing.
67
Remove circlip and spacer.
68
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Remove spacer (1), backing plate (2) and snap ring

(3).
69
Remove 1x friction half disc (1).
9x – Steel Discs (2).
8x – Friction Discs (3)
1x – Half Friction Disc (4).
70
Use a bearing puller to remove clutch gear steel
bearing
71
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Remove clutch gear steel bearing locating ring
72
Compress spring to remove spring retainer circlip
297401.
73
Remove clutch piston spring retainer (1).
– clutch piston wear plate (3)
– clutch piston assembly (4).
74
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Reassembly forward low clutch

Install clutch piston friction seal. Note: Ring must
be sized before installing in clutch drum. Sealing ring
must be flush with friction diameter of piston. Install
clutch piston steel seal.
Reassemble in reverse order as for disassem-

bly:
Install clutch piston in clutch drum, use caution not to
damage sealing rings and install:
– clutch piston wear plate on piston
– Install clutch piston spring
– clutch piston spring retainer
– clutch spring retainer snap ring 75
Using tool no 297401 compress spring refit circlip.
76
Install one friction half disc, with friction material
away from the piston.
Install one steel disc. Alternate friction and steel

discs until the proper amount of discs are installed.
First and last discs are steel.
– Install one half disc with friction material down.

– backing plate snap ring.
– Spacer.
– Spacer snap ring.
– steel bearing snap ring.
– Clutch gear steel bearing.
Install clutch gear sealing ring. Install clutch gear in

clutch drum. Align splines on clutch gear with internal
teeth of steel discs. Do not force this operation. Gear
splines must be in full position with internal teeth of
all steel discs.
77
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Tap steel bearing into place.
78
Install clutch gear bearing locating rings.
79
Install clutch gear bearing. Be sure that bearing
shield is on the outside.
80
Tap bearing into place.
81
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Install bearing circlip.
82
Warm gear to 150_ C (302_ F), install gear.
83
Warm front bearing to 120_ C (248 F), install bearing.
84
Reassembly forward high clutch
Install clutch friction seal. Note: Ring must
be sized before installing in clutch drum. Sealing ring
must be flush with friction diameter of piston.
Install piston steel seal
85
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


bly:
Install clutch piston in clutch drum; use caution not to
damage sealing rings and install:
– piston wear plate on piston.
– clutch piston return spring.
– piston return spring retainer.
– spring retainer spacer.
– spring retainer snap ring.
Use a sleeve and press spring to refit (thick snap

ring).
Install one friction half disc with friction material away 86

from the piston.
– Install one steel disc.
– Alternate friction and steel discs until the proper
amount of discs are installed, first and last discs are
steel.
– Install one friction half disc with friction material
down.
Install backing plate.
– backing plate spacer.
– backing plate spacer retainer ring.
Install thrust washer and thrust bearing.
Install clutch gear steel needle bearing.
Install clutch gear in clutch drum. Align splines on
clutch gear with internal teeth of steel discs.
Do not force this operation. Gear splines must be in
full position with internal teeth of all steel discs.
Install clutch gear needle bearing.
Install thrust washer and thrust bearing.
Install bearing
Install clutch shaft sealing rings.
87
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

88
1st Reverse shaft
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

1st Reverse shaft

1. Gear Forward Low Clutch 20. Bearing
2. Snap Ring 21. Snap Ring
3. Circlip 22. Clutch Disc Backing Plate
4. Bearing 23. Modulation Spring
5. Circlip 24. Friction Disc
6. Circlip 25. Steel disc
7. Washer 26. Outer Half Disc
8. Snap Ring 27. Spring retainer
9. Clutch Disc Backing Plate 28. Circlip
10. Circlip 29. Spring
11. Belleville washers 30. Spring wear Ring
12. Spacer 31. Piston
13. Sealing Rings 32. Piston Outer Sealing Ring
14. Bearing 33. Piston Inner Sealing Ring
15. Circlip 34. Bearing
16. Bearing 35. Gear Reverse Driven
17. Circlip 36. Circlip
18. Gear 1st Clutch 37. Bearing
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Disassembly first clutch

Remove clutch shaft sealing rings (1).
– clutch gear bearing circlip (2).
89
Use a bearing puller and slice remove clutch gear
and bearing.
90
Remove backing plate retainer ring (1).
– backing plate (2).
– modulation spring (3).
91
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


8x – Friction Discs (3)
1x – Friction Half Disc (4)
92
Use bearing puller to remove clutch gear steel bear-
ing.
93
Compress clutch piston Belleville washer spring
using tool no 297401. Remove spring snap ring.
NOTE: Force of disc spring is 3.280N !
94
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

With circlip removed (1)

– remove Belleville washers (2)
– clutch piston wear sleeve (3).
– clutch piston assembly.
95
Disassembly reverse clutch
Use a bearing puller to remove gear and front bearing.
96
Remove clutch gear bearing circlip.
97
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Use a bearing puller to remove clutch gear and clutch

gear bearing.
98
Remove spacer snap ring
99
Remove spacer (1).
– backing plate snap ring (2)
– clutch disc backing plate.
100
Use a bearing puller to remove clutch gear steel
bearing.
101
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2


8x – Friction Discs (3).
1x– Friction Half Disc (4).
102
Remove steel bearing locating ring.
103
Compress spring using tool no 297401 to remove
spring retainer circlip.
104
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Remove clutch piston spring circlip (1).

– clutch piston wear plate (3).
– clutch piston (4)
105
Reassembly reverse clutch
Install a new clutch piston friction seal.
NOTE: Ring must be sized before installing in clutch
drum. Sealing ring must be flush with friction diameter
of piston. Install clutch piston steel seal.
106
bly:
Install clutch piston in clutch drum, use caution as not
to damage sealing rings and install:
– piston wear plate on piston (1).
– piston spring (2).
– piston spring retainer (3).
Install clutch spring circlip.
107
Using tool no 297401 press spring and seat to fit cir-
clip ring. Be sure ring is in full position in groove.
108
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Install one friction half disc, with friction material

away from the piston.
– Install one friction half disc with friction material

down.
– Install backing plate.
– Install backing plate snap ring.
– Install spacer.
– Install spacer snap ring.
109
Install steel bearing snap ring.
110
Install clutch gear sealing ring. Install clutch gear in
clutch drum. Align splines on clutch gear with internal
teeth of steel discs. Do not force this operation. Gear
splines must be in full position with internal teeth of
all steel discs.
111
Install clutch gear steel bearing and tap bearing into
place.
112
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Install clutch gear bearing locating rings.
113
Install clutch gear bearing.
IMPORTANT: Be sure that bearing shield is on the
outside.
114
115
Install bearing snap ring.
116
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

117
118
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Reassembly first clutch

Install clutch piston friction seal. Note: Ring must be
sized before installing in clutch drum. Sealing ring must
be flush with friction diameter of piston.
Install piston steel seal. Install clutch piston in clutch
drum. Use caution as not to damage sealing rings.
119
Install clutch piston wear sleeve (1) and Install piston
return disc springs (2).
IMPORTANT: Install first spring with large diameter
of bevel towards the wear sleeve. Alternate eleven
(11) Belleville washers.
Install disc Belleville washer spring circlip and com-
press the spring using 297401 to install spring . Be
sure ring is in full position in groove.
120
Install one Belleville washer facing downwards and
install one friction half disc with friction material away
from the Belleville washer. Install one steel disc.
Alternate friction and steel discs until the proper
amount of discs are installed. First and last discs are
steel.
– one friction half disc with friction material down.
– modulation spring with large diameter up to the
backing plate.
– backing plate.
– backing plate snap ring.
121
Install clutch hub bearing locating rings. Install clutch
gear in clutch drum. Align spines on clutch gear witch
internal teeth of steel discs. Do not force this oper-
ation. Gear spines must be in full position with inter-
nal teeth of all steel discs.
122
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Install clutch disc hub steel bearing and tap steel

bearing into place.
123
Install clutch hub bearing.
outside.
124
Tap friction bearing into clutch hub.
– Install friction bearing circlip.
– Install clutch shaft sealing rings.
125
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

126
2nd Clutch Drum Output Shaft
1. Gear 2nd Clutch 16. Output Yoke
3. Bearing 18. 2nd Shaft / Drum Assembly
4. Snap Ring 19. Piston Seal Inner
5. Outer Half Disc 20. Piston Seal Outer
6. Modulation Spring 21. Piston
7. Steel Disc 22. Spring Wear Ring
8. Steel Disc 23. Spring
9. Friction Disc 24. Spacer
10. Gear Upper Output 25. Circlip
11. Gear Lower Output Drive 26. Piston Rings
13. Retaining nut Output Yoke 28. Washer Bearing Support
14. Washer 29. Bearing
15. Sealing Ring 30. Circlip
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Disassembly 2nd clutch drum

Press upper output gear from 2nd shaft.
127
Press lower output gear from 2nd shaft.
128
Remove gear circlip.
129
Remove clutch shaft sealing rings.
130
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Use bearing puller to remove clutch hub and front

bearing.
131
Remove bearing washer (1), clutch hub (2) and
bearing (3).
132
Remove backing plate snap ring.
133
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Remove 1x backing plate (1).

1x – modulation spring (2).
1x – friction half disc (3).
9x – steel discs (4)
8x – friction discs (5)
1x – friction half disc (6)
134
Use a bearing puller to remove clutch hub steel bear-
ing.
135
Compress spring using tool no 297401 to remove
spring circlip.
136
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Remove spring circlip.

– spring retainer.
– clutch piston return spring.
– piston wear plate.
– Remove clutch piston assembly.
137
Reassembly 2nd clutch drum
Install piston friction seal.
NOTE: Ring must be sized before installing in clutch
drum. Sealing ring must be flush with friction diam-
eter of piston. Install clutch piston steel seal.
138
bly:
Install clutch piston in clutch drum.
Use caution as not to damage sealing rings and in-
stall:
– piston return spring.
– spring retainer .
– snap ring
Using tool no 297401 compress spring and seat re-
tainer ring. Be sure ring is in full position in groove.
139
Install one friction half disc with friction material away
from the piston.
Install one friction half disc with friction material
down.
Install Belleville with large diameter up to the backing
plate.
Install backing plate retainer ring.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Install clutch hub bearing locating rings. Install clutch

gear in clutch drum. Align splines on clutch gear with
internal teeth of steel discs. Do not force this oper-
ation. Gear splines must be in full position with inter-
nal teeth of all steel discs.
140
Install clutch hub steel bearing.
Tap clutch gear steel bearing into place.
141
Install clutch hub bearing.
outside.
142
143
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Install bearing washer.
144
145
Install clutch shaft sealing rings.
146
Install gear circlip
147
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

148
Warm upper output gear to 150_ C (302 F) install
gear.
149
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES PAGE
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

150
Four Wheel Drive Disconnect Output Shaft
1. Output Yoke 17. Circlip
2. Bearing 18. Sealing Rings
4. Disconnect Hub 20. Bearing
6. Front Output Shaft 22. Circlip
7. Bushing 23. Gear Lower Output
8. Snap Ring 24. Circlip
9. Spacer 25. Output Shaft / Drum
10. Clutch Disc Backing Plate 26. Outer Half Disc
11. Piston Seal Inner 27. Steel Disc
12. Piston Seal Outer 28. Friction Disc
13. Piston 29. Nut Output Yoke
14. Spring Wear Plate 30. Washer
15. Spring 31. ‘O’ Ring
16. Spring Retainer
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Disassembly output shaft

Remove oil baffle screws and nuts.
151
Remove oil baffle.
152
Remove output shaft sealing rings (1) and output
shaft gear circlip (2).
153
Press output gear from shaft
154
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Remove oil baffle from output shaft.
155
Remove gear circlip.
156
Remove backing plate snap ring.
157
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Remove 1x backing plate spacer (1).

1x – backing plate (2). 1
1x – friction half disc (3)
12x – steel discs (4) 2
11x – friction disc (5)
1x – friction half disc (6) 3
4
5
158
Compress spring to remove circlip.
159
Remove spring retainer (2).
– clutch piston spring (1)
– piston wear plate (3).
– piston assembly (4).
160
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Reassembly output shaft

Install piston friction seal. Note: Ring must be sized
before installing in clutch drum. Sealing ring must be
flush with friction diameter of piston.
161
bly:
Install clutch piston in clutch drum.
Use caution as not to damage sealing rings and in-
stall:
– piston return spring.
– spring retainer .
– snap ring
Install spring retainer snap ring. Compress spring
and seat retainer ring. Be sure ring is in full position
in groove.
Install one friction half disc with friction material away 162
from the piston.Install one steel disc.
Alternate friction and steel discs until the proper
amount of discs are installed.
Install one half disc with friction material down
Install backing plate spacer.
Install backing plate snap ring.
Install output gear circlip.
163
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Install oil baffle on output shaft.
164
Warm gear to 150_ C (302 F),
165
Install gear.Install output gear circlip.
166
Install output shaft sealing rings and rear oil baffle on
output shaft.
167
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Install oil baffle mounting screws, washer and nuts

and tighten nuts to specified torque (Use Loctite
243).
168
Disassembly disconnect shaft
Use bearing puller to remove disconnect shaft front
bearing.
169
Remove front bearing circlip.
170
Remove clutch hub from shaft.
171
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Remove clutch hub locating ring from shaft.
172
Reassembly disconnect shaft
Install bushing if necessary.
173
bly:
Install clutch hub locating ring and install:
– clutch hub on shaft.
– front bearing circlip.
– Install front bearing on shaft.
– tap bearing on shaft.
174
Reassembly converter housing
Install safety valve ball spring and plug. Install by–
pass valve ball spring and plug.
175
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Install input shaft into housing and in the meantime

install reverse and first shaft (they have to be in-
stalled together). Using caution as not to damage
any of the first shaft sealing rings.
176
Install forward low shaft and high shaft into housing.
Using caution as not to damage any sealing rings.
177
Install FWD shaft assembly into housing and open
bearing circlip. Tap shaft into place be sure ring is in
groove.
178
Install 2nd gear output shaft and FWD output at the
same time. Do not force this operation, be sure discs
of disconnect are in full position. Using caution as not
to damage any of the lower shaft sealing rings.
179
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Install baffle plate, mounting screws, washers and

nuts. Tighten nuts to specified torque. (Use Loctite
243).
180
Install ’O’ ring, spacer and snap ring on suction tube.
Install suction tube into housing. Be sure ring is in
groove. Install suction tube retainer, mounting screw
and lockwasher (Use Loctite 243).Tighten mounting
screw to specified torque.
181
Install FWD shaft rear bearing circlip.
182
Warm forward high gear to 150_ C (302 F), install
gear.
183
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Warm upper output rear bearing to 120_ C (248 F),

install bearing.
184
Warm reverse and 1st shaft rear bearing to 120_ C
(248 F), install bearing.
185
Warm input shaft rear bearing to 120_ C (248 F), in-
stall bearing.
186
Warm forward low and high shaft rear bearing to
120_ C (248 F), install bearing.
187
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Warm FWD shaft rear bearing to 120_ C (248 F), in-

stall bearing.
188
Install output shaft rear sealing rings.
189
Install gasket and ’O’ rings into ’O’ ring grooves.
190
Reassembly Powershift transmission
Remove lower output bore plug. Position transmission
case on converter housing (using lifting bracket).
Using spreading type snap ring pliers, spread ears
on FWD shaft rear bearing circlip. Holding snap ring
open. Tap transmission case into place.
191
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Tap dowel pin in transmission case and converter

housing and install transmission bolts and torque to
required specification.
192
Using spreading type snap ring plier, spread ears on
output shaft rear bearing circlip. Hold snap ring open,
pry or lift output shaft. Be sure circlip is complete in
bearing groove (Using a lifting eye or screw M12)
gently lift shaft.
193
Tighten plug to 13,6 – 20,3 Nm (10 –15 lb ft).
194
Position FWD bore plug and tap bore plug into place.
195
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Position upper output seal and tap seal into place.
196
Install upper output flange, ’O’ ring, washer and nut
and tighten nut to 339–407 Nm. (205–300 lb ft).
197
Install pump drive shaft assembly into housing and
Install pump drive shaft rear bearing circlip.
198
Install oil pump, ’O’ ring, gasket, screws and lock-
washers into converter housing and tighten bolts to
20–27 Nm (15–20 lbf ft).
199
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Install convertor assembly on input shaft.

Install drive plates on converter.
Install drive plates screws and lockwashers and
tighten screws to specified torque.
200
Install filter adapter, ’O’ ring, lockwashers and
mounting screws.
201
Install front seal and tap into the cover using tool no
297402.
202
Instal output shaft front flange, ’O’ ring, washer and
nut. Tighten nut to 339 – 407 Nm (250 – 300 lb ft).
203
LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Install oil filter and tighten to 30 – 38 Nm (22,1 – 28 lb

ft).
204
Reassembly of valve chest to transmission
Install pressure regulating valve spool into solenoid
housing and spring into transmission case, position
control valve on transmission case.
Install control valve mounting screws and lock-
washers, tighten screws to specified torque.
IMPORTANT: The torque procedure of the valve
chest to transmission should be carried out in the fol-
lowing manner.
Torque form the centre of the valve body and alter-

nate left to right of the centre line to the outside of the
edge of the valve chest. this ensures that there is
minimum distortion of the valve chest body. 205
Position wiring connector in valve protection
cover(1). Install gasket and valve protection cover
mounting screws (2) and tighten screws to specified
torque.
Install air breather (3) and tighten to 34 – 41 Nm
(25 – 30 lb ft). Install wiring connector nut and tighten
to 6 – 8 Nm (4,4 – 5,9 lbft).
206
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

SECTION 25 – FRONT AXLE 2 AND 4 WHEEL DRIVE – CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 25 – FRONT AXLE– FRONT WHEEL DRIVE
Chapter 1
CONTENT
25 100 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Differential Disassembly – Powershuttle / Powershift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
SPECIFICATIONS
Type Centre driven, double reduction (Crown wheel and pinion) and
integral steering cylinder
Overall width 1974 mm
Oil Capacities
Hubs (each) 1.0 litres (2 US. pints)
Axle differential 5.5 litres (1.45 US. gals)
Oil change period Every 1200 hours or annually
Lubricants Multi–G API GL4 ISO 32/46
CLEARANCES AND ADJUSTMENTS

Front wheel toe–in 0 – 2.0 mm
Axle hub bearing rolling resistance Non–adjustable pre–set
Swivel bearing freeplay Non–adjustable pre–set
Drive pinion bearing rolling resistance 2.0 Nm (18.0 lbs in)
Pinion to crown wheel backlash 0.17 – 0.23 mm (0.067 – 0.090 in)
Pinion to crown wheel tooth engagement 110.3 mm (4.301 in)
Differential bearing rolling resistance 0.9 Nm (8.2 lbs in)
SEALANTS
Thread sealant NH 82995773
Dowel fixative adhesive NH 82995772
Flange sealant NH 82995770
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 25 – FRONT AXLE 2 AND 4 WHEEL DRIVE – CHAPTER 1
Torque Specification
SPECIAL TOOLS
Pinion setting tool 297132 or 4775
Pinion nut tool 297511
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

DESCRIPTION
2
The 26.18 axle fitted to this unit incorporates
• integral steering cylinder
• centre drive
• double reduction (crown wheel & pinion plus
planetary hubs).
The four wheel drive is electrically operated by a

switch (1) mounted on the front instrument panel.
The four wheel drive should be disengaged for road

work.
NOTE: Four wheel drive will re-engage when both
brakes are applied giving four wheel braking.
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

1
4
The four wheel drive is engaged and disengaged by a clutch pack mounted in the transmission. Hydraulically
disengaged and mechanically engaged.
5
Drive Gear Number of Number of Formulae Ratio
Ratio Teeth (ISO) Teeth (NASO)
A 56 56 A+B x C =Rear axle ratio 18.5 : 1
B 16 16 B D
C 37 37
D 9 9
E 37 37 F =Transfer ratio 0.9459 : 1
F 35 35 E
I 15 18
J 32 37 L+K x J=Front axle ratio 12.8 : 1 (ISO)
K I 12.33 :1 (NASO)
K 15 15
L 75 75 FWD. factor 1.528 (ISO)
1.586 (NASO)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

Four wheel drive slip factor

To achieve the maximum tractor efficiency and tyre life, the four wheel drive system must have a minimum slip
factor of 0.5% (ie. front wheels drive faster than the rear).
The slip factor is calculated by a simple formula;
% slip= FWD factor x *Front wheel rolling circumference –1 x 100

*Rear wheel rolling circumference
* weighting and tyre pressures for site work
NOTE: where radial ply tyres are used, the rolling circumference must be multiplied by 1.015
FWD Factor= Rear axle ratio
Front axle ratio x Transfer ratio
To ensure correct front and rear tyre compatibility es-

tablish front and rear loaded wheel rolling circumfer-
ences on a hard level surface with tyre pressures and
weights as for normal operation.
• Mark the point where front and rear tyres contact
the ground using a plumb line.
• Ensure 4WD is disengaged.
• Drive slowly forward in 1st gear until the front and
rear wheels have made one complete revolution,
marking the ground again at the contact marks.
• Measure the distance between the two front
wheel marks and the two rear wheel marks, SMB25051
which are the respective loaded wheel rolling cir-
cumference. 6
• Use the figures in the above formula to calculate
% slip.
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

The data plate details the axle type, serial number,

total gear ratio, reference number, oil capacity, type
and grease type.
NOTE: When ordering parts, always quote the type,
reference and serial numbers. Refer to later sections
for oil and grease specifications.
1
TAP424011
7
Steering stops (1) are incorporated on the axle at
each end.
The stops are adjustable to prevent the tyres con-
tacting any part of the loader when on full left or right
lock and held by the lock nut (2).
8
When checking the toe in of the front wheels the
measurements should be through the centre of the
hub.
Measuring the front inner wheel rim to rim (1) and
then measuring the rear inner wheel rim to rim (2).
The variance between (1) and (2) should be:
2
Toe-in should measure: 0 – 2 mm (0 – 0.08 ins)
1
P424–1
9
To adjust front wheel toe-in slacken both lock nuts
and turn rams equally to correct toe-in measure-
ment. Re-tighten both lock nuts.
1. Clamp Bolt
2. Track Rod End
3. Adjuster
10
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

FRONT AXLE – Differential Housing

Oil capacity—5.5 litres (1.45 US. gals)
Check oil level every 50 hours, check using plug (2)
Change oil every 1200 hours, drain from plug (1).
11
HUBS
Oil capacity – 1 litre (2 US. pints)
Check oil level every 50 hours, with hub level (1) at
plug (2)
Change oil every 1200 hours, with plug (2) at lowest
point.
12
COMPONENT OVERHAUL – with Axle in situ
• Steering cylinder
• Planetary Reduction Hub Assembly
• Swivel Casing
• Swivel Pin Assembly
• Axle Drive Shaft Assemblies, Seals and Bushes
• Drive Pinion Oil Seal
13
COMPONENT OVERHAUL – with Axle removed
• Differential Assembly
• Pinion Assembly
Front Axle adjustments

• Pinion to Crown Wheel Tooth engagement
• Pinion Bearing Preload
• Crown Wheel to Pinion Backlash
• Differential Bearing Preload
14
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

1 3
2
9 4
10
15
Front Axle – Cutaway View
1. Axle Shaft Double Universal Joint 6. Rear Swivel Pin Assembly
2. Centre Casing Breather 7. Front Swivel Pin Assembly
3. Crown Wheel and Differential Assembly 8. Axle Centre Casing
4. Pinion 9. Track Rod
5. Steering Cylinder 10. Hub and Planetary Gear Assembly
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

FAULT FINDING
IMPORTANT: When making a repair, the cause of the failure must be corrected to avoid a repeat failure.

No steering or excessive effort 1. Incorrect oil level in 1. Fill with the correct grade
required to steer reservoir. and quantity of oil
2. Air in system 2. Check for loose
connections or damaged
tubing. Purge system of air
3. Pump relief valve faulty 3. Check system pressure
4. Worn pump 4. Inspect and repair
5. Leaking power cylinder 5. Inspect and repair
6. Damaged valve spool 6. Inspect and replace
7. Broken or damaged 7. Inspect and replace
steering column
8. Damaged or worn metering 8. Inspect and replace
element
Steering wanders 1. Excessive play in steering 1. Inspect and replace
linkage ball joints
3. Control valve spool sticking 3. Inspect and replace
or worn
4. Weak or broken torsion bar 4. Inspect and repair
5. Incorrect valve spool
shimming adjustment 5. Check and adjust
6. Damaged or worn metering
element 6. Inspect and replace
Front wheels surge when 1. Leaking power cylinder 1. Inspect and repair
steering
2. Control valve spool sticking 2. Inspect and repair
3. Weak or broken torsion bar
3. Inspect and replace
4. Damaged or worn metering
element
4. Inspect and replace
Noisy pump 1. Incorrect oil level in 1. Fill with the correct grade
reservoir and quantity of oil
2. Air in system 2. Check for loose
connections or damaged
tubing. Purge system of oil
3. Water in oil 3. Drain and replace the oil
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

OVERHAUL
Planetary Reduction Assembly and Wheel

Hubs
Turn the hub so that the filler/drain plug is at its lowest
point and drain the hub oil.
16
Remove the two 8mm socket screws and the two
shouldered wheel studs, securing the planetary
carrier assembly to the hub assembly.
17
Gently tap the planetary carrier with a soft face mallet
and, using the slots provided, lever the carrier from
the hub. Carefully withdraw the planetary carrier as-
sembly.
1. Planetary Assembly
18
Remove the three snap rings and remove the retain-
ing plate.
Remove planetary gears. Note: the needle roller
bearings will fall out.
Finally, remove the thrust washer.
1. Retaining Plate
2. Snap Ring
3. Planetary Gear
19
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

Check components for wear and replace worn or

damaged components and then reassemble.
1. Planetary Carrier
2. Thrust Pad
3. Retaining Plate
4. Snap Ring
5. Needle Roller Bearings
6. Planetary Gear
7. Thrust Washer
20
Remove the sun gear retaining snap ring (1) and re-
move the sun gear (2) from the axle shaft, followed
by the spacer and thrust washer.
21
Carrier assembly bolts removal.
1. Carrier Assembly
22
Remove the assembly by installing 4 of the bolts into
the threaded jacking holes in the rear gear. Tighten
the bolts evenly to draw off the planetary ring gear.
1. Carrier Assembly
2. Jacking Bolts
23
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Remove planetary ring gear.

NOTE: Observe master dowel.
1. Jacking Bolt
2. Planetary Ring Gear
3. Master Dowel
24
Planetary disassembly
Remove snap ring and disassemble planetary ring
gear.
1. Ring Gear
2. Carrier
3. Retaining Ring
25
Remove the hub assembly
Using a soft faced mallet carefully withdraw the hub
from the axle.
26
Final reduction hub assembly
Check oil seal and inner and outer bearing cups for
wear and damage.
1. Oil Seal
2. Inner Bearing Cup
3. Outer Bearing Cup
27
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

Inner Hub Bearing Removal

Remove the inner hub bearing (1) by prying off with
two suitable levers equally spaced on the bearing.
1. Inner Hub Bearing
IMPORTANT: Take care not to damage the bearing
during disassembly
28
Swivel Pin Removal
Remove the upper and lower swivel pins from the
axle hubs.
1. Upper Swivel Pin
2. Lower Swivel Pin
29
Hub Removal
Carefully remove the hub from the axle.
NOTE: When removing the hub there are two Belle-
ville washers between the hub and axle, the larger 1
washer (2) on the bottom and the smaller (1) on the
top.
30
AXLE SHAFT REMOVAL
Withdraw the shaft from the axle
31
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Axle shaft seal and bushing removal

Using tool 297111 remove the seal and bushing from
the housing.
1. Puller Tool
2. Oil Seal
32
Axle shaft seal and bush installation
Prior to fitting a new seal and bush thoroughly clean
the inner axle. Using tool 297103 gently tap with a
soft faced hammer the seal and bush into the axle.
1. Bushing Installation Tool
2. Driver Handle
33
Swivel hub seal removal
Remove the seal from swivel casing using special
tool 297101 in conjunction with slide hammer 297504
1. Swivel Casing
2. Seal
3. Slide Hammer
34
Install seal into swivel housing
Using tool 297111 refit the seal and bushing into the
housing.
1. Driver Handle Tool
2. Oil Seal Installer Tool
35
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

Swivel pin bearing cup removal

Remove the outer bearing cups with slide hammer
297111
1. Slide Hammer
2. Bearing Cup
36
Installation of swivel pin bearing outer cone.
Before assembly of a new cone, ensure the swivel
area is thoroughly clean. Using a driving tool gently
tap with a soft faced hammer.
1. Suitable Driving Tool
37
Removal of lower swivel pin bearing cone.
Hold the swivel in a soft jawed vice and using a suit-
able drift carefully remove the bearing cone from the
swivel.
38
Press on lower swivel pin bearing cone.
Thoroughly clean the swivel shaft and check for
damage or scoring. Carefully Stone any imperfec-
tions away before fitting a new cone. Using a suitable
spacer fit a new cone.
1. Spacer Block
2. Bearing Cone
3. Swivel Pin
39
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Reduction Hub, Swivel Housing and Axle Shaft

Re-assembly
40
Reduction Hub, Swivel Housing and Axle Shaft
Assembly
• Re-assembly is in the reverse sequence to the dis-
assembly illustrated.
• It is important to locate the axle shaft inner end
splines into the differential side gear before fitting
the swivel casings.
• Wrap protective tape over the axle shaft outer
end spline to protect the hub drive shaft oil seal,
before location of swivel casing assembly.
• There are no swivel pin freeplay adjustments. Two
Belleville washers are now installed to automati-
cally preset swivel free play. The small washer is
installed at the top of the swivel hub and the larger
washer installed on the bottom of the swivel hub
assembly.
1. Swivel Housing
2. Belleville Washer
41
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

Steering Cylinder Removal

The steering cylinder is located in lugs on the differ-
ential casing and is retained by four bolts.
The cylinder can be removed with the axle in situ or
with the axle removed. However the cylinder must
be removed for differential removal.
42
Steering Cylinder Removal with Axle in situ
• Loosen retaining bolts two turns, turn the steer-
ing wheel to the left to unseat cylinder assembly.
• Jack up and support front axle and remove left
hand front wheel.
• Slacken track rod clamps.
• Slacken ball joints from cylinder rod. (Note: High
production tightening torques!)
• Remove track rods from steering arms.
• Remove track rod end and ball joint assemblies
from the steering cylinder rod.
• Disconnect hydraulic hoses and right hand cylin-
der hose fitting. 43
• Remove cylinder retaining bolts and pull out the
complete assembly.
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

44
Steering Cylinder—Serviced Parts
1. Rod & Piston Assembly 5. End Plate
2. Track Rod Assembly 6. Track Rod Assembly
3. Cylinder A. Seal Kit Items
4. Differential Carrier
Serviced Parts • Replace end plate.

The cylinder rod and cylinder barrel are only serviced • Relocate cylinder.
as a complete steering cylinder assembly. • Rebuild steering connections in the reverse se-
The seals and wear rings will only be available as a quence to disassembly.
complete seal kit. • Adjust and set the front wheel toe-in 0 – 2 mm
(0 – 0.08 in). Ensure this measurement is made
Steering Cylinder Re-assembly at the inside of each wheel rim and at hub height.
• Replace all seals.
• Allow new piston seal, located on ‘O’ ring, to con-
tract before entering the piston and rod into the
cylinder barrel.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

Differential Assembly Removal

Remove both Reduction Hub Swivel Housings and
Axle Shafts.
Remove drive yoke (1) to allow access to the pinion
shaft oil seal.
Drain the differential housing of oil and discard into
a suitable container for disposal.
45
Remove pinion shaft oil seal housing.

1. Oil Seal and Housing
2. Pinion Shaft
46
Remove the differential support casing retaining
bolts and place in a suitable container.
47
Remove differential.
Mark the differential housing with felt pen, which side
the crown wheel is in relation to the assembly (1). 1
IMPORTANT: Use a Small hoist to support the differ-
ential when removing it from the axle, as its com-
bined weight is greater than for safe manual handl-
ing.
48
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Differential Disassembly
Before disassembly, mark each bearing cap (1) to
ensure they are not interchanged during re-assem- 2
bly. Also mark which side the crown wheel is in rela-
1
tion to the assembly (2).
x
49
NOTE: Before differential disassembly loosen the
pinion nut.
Place a bar (1) through the steering cylinder lugs to 1 2
support the assembly.
Put a screwdriver (2) between the crown wheel and
pinion teeth to hold the pinion still.
Loosen the pinion nut using special tool 297511 (3).
3
50
Remove the locking tabs (1) and cap retaining bolts
(2).
NOTE: Fit new locking tabs upon re–assembly
51
Remove the differential assembly from the housing
and place on a clean bench prior to disassembly.
52
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

Differential casing (1) and crown wheel assembly (2).

NOTE: Prior to disassembly mark with a felt pen the
two halves of the differential to ensure correct re–as-
sembly.
53
Differential Components
1. Thrust Washer
2. Side Gear
3. Spider Shaft
4. Differential Casing
54
Differential disassembly
NOTE: This is not a limited slip differential. The side
gear flange is extended and a single thrust washer is
fitted.
1. Differential Housing
2. Thrust Washer
3. Side Gear
4. Spider Shaft
5. Side Gear
6. Thrust Washer
7. Crown Wheel
8. Retaining Bolts
55
Pinion Identification marks
1. Pinion Height Measurement
2. Pinion to Crown Wheel Serial Number
56
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Drive pinion components

1. Pinion Shaft
2. Pinion Casing
3. Collapsible Spacer
4. Spacer
5. Retaining Nut
6. Inner Bearing
7. Washers
Differential Component Inspection

In addition to normal inspection of bearing assem-
blies, differential gear and crown wheel/pinion tooth
wear, and spline wear, check:
• Thrust washers 57
• Drive pinion nut
Differential re-assembly is in the reverse sequence
to disassembly. However, special attention should
be given to the following:
If the crown wheel and pinion are to be replaced,

carry out pinion engagement adjustment to deter-
mine pinion shim thickness required.
• Pinion bearing preload, differential bearing pre-
load and crown wheel to pinion backlash must be
correctly adjusted as described on the following
pages.
• Tighten bolts and nuts to specified tightening
torques listed in the specifications.
• Differential housing bearing cap nuts must be
tightened to specified torque before measuring
bore diameter.
• The collapsible spacer must be replaced on re-
assembly.
The crown wheel and pinion are a ‘matched’ set.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

Differential Adjustments
Pinion to Crown Wheel Tooth Engagement

To determine the shim thickness required to provide
the correct pinion to crown wheel tooth engagement,
the differential casing ‘pinion height’ dimension ‘C’,
must be calculated and compared to the dimension
etched on the pinion. This adjustment is only re-
quired if new components are being fitted.
• Install new pinion bearings in the differential cas-
ing and clamp in position with special tool
297132. Make sure bearing cones can just be
turned by hand.
• Measure dimension ‘A’ 58
• Calculate C=B–Bar Ø + 1/2 A Measuring dimension ‘A’
Differential housing bearing bore diameter
NOTE: 297132 Bar gauge 25mm dia.
Example:
Dimension A = 90 mm
Dimension B = 90.3 mm
Calculate dimension ‘C’
= 90.3 – 25 + 45 mm
= 110.3 mm
Pinion dimension
= 107 + 0.2 mm
= 107.2 mm
Required shim thickness
= 110.3 – 107.2 mm
= 3.1 mm 59
Measuring dimension ‘B’

1. Depth gauge
2. Bar gauge part of tool 297132
3. Pinion shaft bearing
4. Pinion setting gauge 297132
5. Differential Support Casing
60
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Pressing inner bearing onto pinion

1. Press
2. Protector
3. Pinion
4. Shim
5. Inner Bearing
61
Drive Pinion Re-assembly
1. Pinion & Bearing
2. Support Housing
3. Collapsible Spacer
4. Tab Washer
5. Pinion Nut
6. Outer Bearing
7. Washers
62
Differential Adjustments Pinion Bearing Pre-
load
110 mm
To check the preload of the bearing, it will be necess-
ary to fabricate a bracket to the dimensions shown.
Weld a nut of a size suitable to match a socket avail- 95 mm
able to you in the centre of the bracket.
NOTE: The adjustment can only be carried out with
a new collapsible spacer fitted to the pinion.
65 mm 45 mm 10 mm (x4)
5 mm ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
63
• Attach the bracket (2) to the yoke. Apply a torque
meter (1) to the centre nut and rotate the pinion
shaft to achieve a torque of:
1.6–2.3 Nm (14.1–20.9 lbs in)
1
• Tighten nut with special tool to just eliminate free
play
• Check pinion bearing rolling resistance as illus-
trated
• Tighten pinion nut progressively until correct
torque is indicated.
64
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

Crown Wheel to Pinion Backlash

Measure Crown Wheel to Pinion Backlash
1. Dial Indicator
2. Crown Wheel
3. Adjuster Ring
4. Pry Bars
= 0.17 – 0.23 mm (0.086 – 0.009 in)
Install differential assembly into the differential cas-
ing with crown wheel to the right hand side of the pin-
ion, the bearing cap nuts should be finger tight.
• Tighten adjusting ring (3) to just eliminate differen-
tial bearing free play.
• Adjust crown wheel to pinion backlash by adjusting
65
rings by equal amounts.
Differential Bearing Preload
Checking Pinion and Differential Bearing Rolling Re-
sistance
1. Installed Differential
2. Spring Balance
3. Pinion
Pre Load 0.75–1.0 Nm (6.6–9.7 lbs in)
To determine the differential (1) bearing preload, the
turning torque required to slowly turn both the pinion
and the differential is compared to the torque re-
corded to turn the pinion only.
• Tighten ring opposite crown wheel progressively
until indicated turning torque is within specifica-
tion. 66
Example:
Turn the torque meter slowly:
A. Pinion and differential:
2.98 Nm (26.5 lbs in)
B. Pinion only:
2.0 Nm (18.02 lbs in)
Differential bearing preload:
0.9 Nm (8.22 lbs in)
Resultant preload is within specification.
• Install adjusting ring locking tabs.
• Recheck differential bearing preload and crown
wheel to pinion backlash.
• Finally, tighten bearing cap nuts to 266 Nm
(196 lbf ft).
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Differential Disassembly
Whilst all dimensions and teardown operations re-
main the same for both front axles, it must be remem-
bered that on the the Powershuttle Front Axle the dif-
ferential is mounted to left of the front axle:
– POWERSHUTTLE SHOWN, Figure 67.
67
On Powershift Front Axles the differential is mounted
to the right of the front axle:
– POWERSHIFT SHOWN, Figure 68.
68
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

SECTION 25 – FRONT AXLE 4WS – CHAPTER 2 1
SECTION 25 – FRONT AXLE
Chapter 2 – 4 WHEEL STEER
CONTENT
25 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
SPECIFICATIONS
Component
Axle Type Modular
Planetary Reduction 6.923 : 1
Overall Ratio 18.5 : 1
Number of Planetary Gears 3
Load Carrying Capacity Dynamic 8000 kg (17636 lb) at 1890 mm track width
Overall Width 2304 mm
Oil Capacity 11 Litres (2.9 US. gals)
Oil Change Period 1 year or 1200 hours
Lubricants Multi–G API GL4 ISO32/46

Drive pinion preload 9.2–13.7 Nm
Steering Sensor to steering rod disc 1.5mm – 1.6mm
LB 115 / FH 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 25 – FRONT AXLE 4WS – CHAPTER 2
Torque Specification
SPECIAL TOOLS
Pinion setting tool 297132 or 4775
Pinion nut tool 297511
Slide hammer 297111
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FH 200.2

Axle Disassembly
Hub Disassembly
1. Remove the hub oil drain plug and drain the hub
oil. Remove the differential plug and drain the oil
from the centre housing.
2
2. Remove the hub outer casing allen screws
3
3. Remove the hub outer casing.
4
4. Remove the sun gear airclip and 3 spacers.
LB 115 / FH 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

5. Remove the eight ring gear fixing bolts.
6
6. Using two of the fixing bolts, fit these to the outer
threaded holes and tighten to push the ring gear
away from the hub.
7
7. With a soft faced mallet hammer off the hub
centre housing and also the outer conical bear-
ing.
8
8. Then remove the inner conical bearing by hand.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FH 200.2

9. Undo the nut which holds the steering rod to the

hub.
10
10. Use a set of bearing pullers to press the tapered
shaft from the hub assembly
11
11. Undo the bolts holding the top and bottom pivot
pins. Then remove the pivot pins and also the
belleville washers and spacers.
12
12. Remove the remainder of the hub assembly.
13
LB 115 / FH 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

13. Remove the axle drive shaft from the centre

housing.
14
Centre Housing Disassembly.
14. Remove the input shaft coupler fixing bolts and
remove the coupler.
15
15. By hand slide off the pivot bearing and housing
assembly.
16
16. Remove the pivot spacer ring.
17
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FH 200.2

17. Remove the differential to main housing fixing

bolts and withdraw the complete differential
housing.
18
18. Steering Cylinder Removal.
Remove the track rod ends from the steering cyl-
inder rods.
19
19. Undo and remove the 6 steering cylinder fixing
bolts and remove the steering angle sensor.
20
20. Lift off the steering cylinder assembly.
21
LB 115 / FH 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

21. Disassembly of the planetry housing.

Remove the bolt from each of the planet gears.
Then remove the Upper (1) and Lower (2)
washer. The gear can then be removed and also
the individual needle bearings.
22
22. Swivel hub seal and bush removal.
Remove the shaft seal and bush using a suitable
puller or drift.
23
23. Axle shaft seal and bush removal.
Use an internal puller and slide hammer to re-
move the seal and bush.
24
24. Pivot bush removal.
Remove the upper and lower pivot bushes using
an internal puller and slide hammer.
25
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FH 200.2

25. Swivel Housing Disassembly.

Firstly remove the bush retaining bolt (1) which
also houses the grease nipple. Then pull out the
bush (2) the bush has one ’O’ ring (3) which is
situated in the internal bush groove furthest from
the axle.
26
26. Steering Cylinder Disassembly
The gland ends of the steering cylinder are not
retained by any circlips, bolts, etc. Therefore to
remove the gland ends simply stroke the rod and
piston to the end of its travel in both directions
and this action will knock out the glands.
27
27. The gland consists of a number of seals.
1. Dust Seal
2. Friction Ring
3. Oil Seal
4. Back–up Oil Seal
5. Friction Seal
6. Gland Block
7. Gland Block to Cylinder Seal
28
28. The Piston contains 3 seals, 2 outer slip seals
and the central main seal.
29
LB 115 / FH 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

29. Differential disassembly and set up.

Undo the seal housing fixing bolts and remove
the housing.
30
30. Lock the differential and bend back the locking
tabs on the pinion nut. Then using tool number
297511 and a 3/4“ drive socket, undo the pinion
nut.
31
Pinion Assembly
32
1. Pinion Nut 5. Collapsable Bush
2. Washer 6. Pinion
3. Bearing 7. Bearing
4. Washer
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FH 200.2

Crown Wheel and Differential Assembly
33
1. Differential Housing 5. Crown Wheel
2. Thrust Washer 6. Fixing Bolts
3. Planet Gears 7. Thrust Washer
4. Shaft 8. Side Gears
Before reassembly inspect all components for wear

and damage.
LB 115 / FH 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Pinion Reassembly
If any new components have been fitted then the fol-
lowing set–up procedure must be followed.
Measure the differential housing bearing bore diam-

eter. This is dimension A.
Install the new pinion bearings into the housing and
clamp into position using tool number 297132. En-
sure the bearings can still be turned by hand after
clamping.
34
Dimension C is the valve required, to find this use the
following equation.
C = B – Bar ∅ + 1/2 A.
NOTE: Bar ∅ (297132) = 25mm.

1. Depth Gauge.
2. Bar Gauge tool 297132.
3. Pinion Shaft Bearing.
4. Pinion Bearing Clamp 297132.
5. Differential Support Housing.
35
Example of Calculation
Dimension A = 90mm
Dimension B = 90.3mm
C = B – Bar ∅ + 1/2 A
C = 90.3 – 25 + 45
C = 110.3mm
Calculation of Shim Requirement
Pinion Dimension = 107.00

(See end of pinion). 36
Required Shim Thickness = 110.3 – 107.0 = 3.3
Shims are available from 2.5mm – 3.4mm in 0.1mm

increments.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FH 200.2

Fit the calculated shim to the pinion head with the

champered face towards the pinion gear.
1. Press
2. Protector
3. Pinion
4. Shim
5. Inner Bearing
37
Fit the Pinion with the two new washers and a new
collapsable bush.
Position the pinion into its housing and place the

other bearing over the pinion shaft. Using a suitable
drift and hammer fit the bearing or alternatively use
a press.
38
Fit a new washer and ring nut on to the pinion.
39
Pinion Preload
Tighten the ring nut (using tool no. 297511) in incre-
mental steps to eliminate any bearing end freeplay.
Using a spring torque meter with a piece of string

wrapped around the pinion shaft, ensure the preload
is within 9.2 – 13.7N.
Adjustment is carried out by gradually increasing the

tightening torque of the ring nut.
40
LB 115 / FH 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Once the correct preload is obtained lock the pinion

ring nut to the pinion shaft.
41
Crown Wheel Backlash
Position a magentic–base dial gauge on the differen-
tial carrier and record the backlash. Ensure the stylus
touches the crown wheel teeth at 90° angle.
Backlash should be 0.18mm – 0.23mm.
42
If the backlash is too small, loosen the locknut on the
same side as the crown wheel and tighten the locknut
on the opposite side by the same amount.
If the backlash is too big, loosen the locknut on the

opposite side to the crown wheel and tighten the
locknut on the same side as the crown wheel.
To check the combined differential and pinion pre-

load perform the same test as before using the spring
balance and string on the pinion shaft.
The combined preload should be Pinion Preload +

(1.53 – 2.29N). 43
If the combined preload is below the minimum then

tighten the locknuts on each side. If the combined
preload is above the maximum, loosen both locknuts
by equal amounts.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FH 200.2

SECTION 27 – REAR AXLE WITH POWERSHUTTLE TRANSMISSION – CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 27 – REAR AXLE WITH MECHANICAL DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
Chapter 1 – Rear Axle Overhaul with Foot Operated

Differential Lock
CONTENT
27 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SPECIFICATIONS
Component
Axle Type Modular
Differential Lock Mechanical
Crown Wheel & Pinion Ratio 4.11 : 1
Brake Operation Hydraulic
Brakes Wet Disc, Piston Operated
Brake Discs (per side) 4
Brake Disc Total Friction Area 2735 cm2
Load Carrying Capacity Dynamic 9250 kg (20400 lb) at 1696 –1727 mm track width
SPECIFICATIONS
Overall width 1740mm (67.86 in)
Oil capacity 26 Litres (6.8 US. Gals)
Oil change period 1 year or 1200 hours
Thread sealant Pt. No. 82995768
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 27 – REAR AXLE WITH POWERSHUTTLE TRANSMISSION – CHAPTER 1

Drive pinion preload 1.3–4.1 Nm (10 – 40 lb in)
Rolling resistance 2.3–10 Nm (20–90 lb in)
TORQUE VALUES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

SPECIAL TOOLS
APPLICATION
Splitting Tool 297471 Axle removal
Half axle lifting bracket Half shaft removal
Sliding Hammer Axle bearing cup removal
Ratchet Tool 297457 Axle housing bearing/seal
Puller Tool No 297101 Axle housing bearing/seal
Pulling Attachment Tool No 297504 Axle housing bearing/seal
SEALANTS
Code Number Name
82995768 Sealer Anaerobic Low strength
82995776 Sealer Silicone
82995774 Sealer Polyester Urethane
82995773 Sealer Anaerobic
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

DESCRIPTION
The rear axle (1) is of modular design and is fixed by
4 bolts to the chassis with a torque value of 1000 Nm 1
(737lbf ft). It incorporates the following features:
Mechanically operated diff-lock
Hydraulically operated oil immersed foot brakes
fitted with four disc brakes
Three planetary reduction carrier
3
Operation, Figure 4.
Power from the transmission output shaft is trans-
mitted to the rear axle through (1) the brake disc (2)
and onto the half shaft (3).
The spiral bevel pinion is located in preloaded taper
roller bearings.
The differential is located on two taper roller bear-
ings, the right hand bearing supported by an internal
web of the axle centre housing.
The crown wheel is rivetted to the differential hous-

ing. Drive from the housing is transmitted through a
conventional four pinion differential to sun gear
4
shafts which are splined into the differential side
gears.
NOTE: If repaired in service the rivets are replaced
by grade 8 bolts and must be torqued to: 115 Nm (85
lbf ft)
The differential lock sliding coupling is located on the

splines of the right hand differential side gear. The
coupling has dog teeth which engage with the dog
teeth on the differential housing lock adaptor.
If the dog teeth are not aligned, the spring engage-
ment link will be preloaded, ensuring rapid and full
tooth engagement when the dog teeth align.
The differential lock will remain engaged due to dog
tooth side loading as long as the rear wheels have
unequal traction.
The return spring disengages the lock when both
wheels have equal traction or drive is disengaged.
The brakes are mounted on the final reduction sun
gears. These brakes are wet disc type with hydraulic
piston actuator operated by foot pedals, indepen-
dently for turning assistance, or together for trans-
port.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

The planetary gears (1) are mounted in a carrier and

are positioned around the sun gear and within the
planetary ring gear (2). The rear axle shafts (3) lo-
cate into the internal splines in the carriers.
As the sun gear is driven by the differential, the re-
duction planet gears revolve inside the stationary
planetary ring gear and drive the carrier and axle
shaft at reduced speed.
5
The rear axle shaft is supported on taper roller bear-
ings (1). Preload is adjusted by means of selective
shims held under the retaining plate and bolts.
FAULT FINDING
Differential Lock not engaging 1. External linkage damaged or 1. Replace/repair as required.

(mechanically engaged) broken.
2, Internal linkage, cross shaft 2. Remove and inspect.

rod, fork or pivot shaft
damaged/broken.
3. Damaged or broken teeth on 3. Remove differential and

differential lock adaptor or inspect differential lock
coupling. assembly.
Differential Lock not 1. Spring broken between 1. Remove differential and

disengaged adaptor and coupling replace spring.
(mechanically engaged)
2. Teeth of adaptor or coupling 2. Remove differential and

damaged/ burred. replace damaged parts.
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

7
OVERHAUL
Rear Axle Removal

For servicing of any rear axle component the axle
must be removed.
Prior to removal of the axle place a suitable clean
container under the axle, capable of holding 26 litres
(6.86 US. gals) and drain the oil from the plug at the
base of the axle (1).
Disconnect the differential Lock lever(2)
1 2
8
Accessed from the top of the rear axle disconnect
and drain the residual brake oil into a suitable clean
container. Remove the pipes from both sides of the
axle half shafts. Plug the brake pipes to prevent any
1
dirt or contamination entering the brake system.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

Remove the 4 attaching bolts (1) from the drive shaft

coupling and remove from the axle
10
Before removal of the axle make sure the machine
is on level ground with the loader fully lowered and
backhoe resting on the ground. The stabilisers must
be lowered to the ground and the front wheels
chocked.
IMPORTANT: Do not rely on the stabilisers, install
axle stands to support the unit.
With the axle (1) supported using a suitable support
plate (2) and attached to splitting stand (3), Tool No
297471. Remove the retaining bolts and gently lower
the axle to the ground.
Place the axle onto a suitable axle stand to facilitate
repairs
11
Differential Removal
NOTE: Remove the left hand axle housing using lift-
ing tool 297413 and the differential will be removed
with the axle housing.
12
1. Centre Housing
2. Differential Assembly
3. Lifting Tool
4. Half Shaft Axle Housing
13
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Pinion location in axle housing

1. Pinion Shaft
2. Differential Lock Actuator
3. Half Shaft
14
Loosen the pinion nut using a pre fabricated tool, the
dimensions being:
1. 46mm (1.811in)
2. 65mm (2.559in)
3. 9mm (0.354)
4. 40mm (1.575in)
5. 220mm (8.66in)
6. 140mm (5.51in)
7. 95mm (3.74in)
8. 10mm (0.394in)
9. 110mm (4.33in)
15
Using the special tool (1) hold the coupling steady
while loosening the coupling retaining nut. Loosen
the pinion housing bolts.
16
Leave 2 bolts in the position shown removing the re-
maining bolts and jack the pinion out evenly.
17
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

18
Pinion Shaft Layout
1. Pinion Housing 9. Bearing
2. Seal 10. Shim Various Sizes
3. Retainer 11. Bearing
4. Nut 12. Pinion Shaft
5. Lock Pin 13. Bearing
6. Washer 14. Lock Ring
7. Seal 15. Seal
8. Flange 16. Seal Assembly
NOTE: the pinion and crown wheel are a matched

pair and must always be replaced together.
Differential assembly.
1.Differential Lock Return Spring
2.Differential Housing
3.Crown Wheel
19
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

20
Differential Assembly Exploded View
1. Lock Ring 8. Thrust Washer
2. Washer 9. Side Gear
3. Dog Gear 10. Spider Assembly
4. Spring 11. Side Gear
5. Dog Gear 12. Thrust Washer
6. Bearing 13. Differential Housing
7. Crown Wheel 14. Bearing
Differential lock.
Prior to separating the differential, mark the two half
housings (1) to ensure correct re-assembly.
Replace the differential lock coupling and adaptor if
worn or damaged.
The crown wheel is rivetted to the differential housing
in production.
Replacement crown wheels are secured with nuts
and bolts for easier field service.
21
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

The differential lock consists of a sliding dog type

coupling splined to the right hand side of the differen-
tial and a fixed adaptor located to the differential
housing.
The differential lock can be disassembled by com-
pressing the spring and carefully detaching the snap
ring (1).
With the snap ring removed disassemble the:
Washer (6), Outer Dog (2), Spring (5), Inner Dog (3),
from the housing (4).
Carefully inspect all moving parts for signs of scor-
ing, wear, or damage, if evident replace with new
parts.
22
Differential lock fork & actuator.
1. Differential Lock Fork
2. Retaining Pin
3. Lever and Shaft
4. Sprung Engagement Rod
5. Engagement Rod
6. Bush
7. Washer
23
Axle Shaft Component Removal
Remove the fork and shaft (right hand side housing
only). With either of the left or right brake housings
(1) exposed remove the attaching nuts and lift the
outer housing over the axle half shaft (2).
Inspect the housing scoring damage or distortion, re-
pair as required.
24
Lift the brake discs (3) over the half shaft (2) to ex-
pose the inner brake housing (1).
Inspect the steel separator plates and rotating brake
discs for wear or distortion. Replace the brake discs
if worn to a thickness of less than 4.23 mm (0.170in).
Maximum allowable warpage is 0.08mm (0.003in)
Reassemble in reverse order to disassembly.
25
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

The brake pipe fitting (1) can be removed by loosen-

ing and removal of the attaching Allen screws (2).
Before re–assembly fit a new ‘O’ ring (1) to the fitting
and new ‘O’ rings (3) that seal the oil galleries. On re–
assembly torque the attaching bolts to 8–13.5Nm
(6–10lbs ft). 2
3
26
Remove the brake housing (3) and brake piston (1)
and inspect all moving parts for wear or scoring. If in
any doubt replace suspect parts with new.
27
To remove the planetary gear (2) from the carrier (1)
remove the lock washer (3) and retaining bolt (4).
28
Remove the planetary gear carrier.
29
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

The planetary gear assembly can be disassembled

by rotating the retaining ring (2) to allow the slot to
align with the individual gear shafts (8) which allows
them to be withdrawn from the body.
Carefully inspect the shafts, gears, bearings and
washers and housing for wear, scoring or damage
and ensure new are parts fitted or repairs performed.
1. Planetary Gear
2. Retaining Ring
3. Thrust Washer
4. Roller Bearings
5. Thrust Washer
6. Roller Bearings
7. Thrust Washer 30
8. Planet Gear Shaft
9. Carrier
Position the axle housing to allow removal of the axle
shaft.
The planetary ring gear (1) can be removed from the
axle (3) with the aid of Tool (2), No 297326. Position
the tool beneath the ring gear, expand the plates and
tighten the bolts. Invert the axle and press out the
gear form the wheel hub side
Inspect the gear for wear scoring or damage and re-
pair or replace.
31
Refitting the ring gear (1) is the reverse procedure
but using Tool (2) the ring gear is pressed back into
the axle (3) from the brake side. If fitting a new ring
gear ensure the gear is seated equally in the axle by
placing a feeler gauge between the gear and hous-
ing.
IMPORTANT: If a new ring gear has been fitted in the
left hand axle housing, the differential bearing pre-
load must be checked.
32
Axle housing bearing cup removal.
1. Puller Tool No 297101
2. Slide Hammer Tool No 297504
3. Axle Housing
4. Bearing Cup
33
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

The half shaft axle seal (1) is retained in position by

the axle bearing (2). To remove the seal it is necess-
ary to remove the bearing.
34
To remove the bearing, stand the half axle (4) upright
and attach the bearing removal tool as shown.
1. Ratchet Tool No 297457

3. Pulling Attachment Tool No 297391
4. Axle Shaft
5. Bearing
6. Shaft Protector
7. Legs
35
Applying gradual pressure to the puller tool the bear-
ing will separate from the half axle.
Inspect the bearing for wear, scoring or damage and
replace if in any doubt.
IMPORTANT: Always fit a new axle seal if the axle
bearing is removed for any reason.
Re–assembly of the seal and bearing is the reverse

procedure. Locate the seal and using an induction
heater, heat the bearing sufficiently to expand it
enough to allow it to easily seat onto the half shaft.
36
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

37
Rear Axle Shaft Components
1. Axle Housing 10. Bolt
2. Brake Fitting 11. Lock Washer
3. Bearing 12. Shaft
4. Seal 13. Inner Brake Housing
5. Half Shaft 14. Seals
6. Bearing 15. Brake Piston
7. Planetary Reduction Assembly 16. Friction Discs
8. Shim 17. Outer Brake Housing
9. Washer 18. Discs
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

ADJUSTMENTS
Drive pinion preload
Axle shaft bearing preload
Differential bearing preload
NOTE: Crown wheel to pinion backlash is preset by
manufacturing tolerances in production.
The pinion bearing preload is set by selecting the cor-
rect shim (spacer) which is placed between the bear-
ings.
Re–assemble the pinion assembly, attach the fabri-
cated spanner (1) to the assembly (2) and torque to
271–813 Nm (200–600 lbf ft) with spanner (4) to the
locknut.
Shims Available:
' 31.852/31.864 '31.902/31.915
' 31.953/31.966 '32.004/32.017
' 32.055/32.068 '32.106/32.32.118
'32.156/32.169 '32.207/32.220 38
'32.258/32.271 '32.309/32.322
'32.360/32.372 '32.410/32.423
'32.461/32.474 '32.512/32.525
'32.563/32.576
Use a torque meter (1) to check rolling resistance
when the assembly is fitted back into the axle.
The rolling resistance should be: 1.3 Nm (10–40 lb in)
Leave pinion retainer bolts loose for this check.
If under specification, fit a smaller shim
If over specification, fit a larger shim
NOTE: Make sure both bearings are well lubricated
and, once preload is set, lock nut to pinion.
39
Adjustable shims (1) are located between the inner
end of the axle shaft and carrier retainer.
40
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

Adjustment procedure
To achieve the correct preload proceed through
steps 1 to 7
1. Fit a shim 2.06mm (0.081in) thus reducing end
float and possible damage to the seal.
2. Replace the planetary gear assembly.
3. Tighten the retaining bolt to 217–745 Nm
(160–550 lb ft).
4. Position the dial gauge and measure end float
eg. 0.562mm (0.022in).
5. To ensure correct preload, subtract endfloat from
shims already fitted for example
2.06 – 0.562mm=1.498mm.
6. Select shim from table to provide specified
preload of 1.72mm (0.067in).
IMPORTANT: Increasing shim thickness will reduce

preload.
Decreasing shim thickness will increase preload.
7. Fit selected shim and re-tighten retained bolt to

correct torque and allow lock plate to locate. 41
Shim Selection Table
Resultant Figure Shim to be Installed

1.24 – 1.32mm A13 81803491
(0.049 – 0.052in) 1.14mm (0.045in)
1.35 – 1.42mm A13 81803502
(0.053 – 0.056in) 1.24mm (0.049in)
1.45 – 1.54mm A13 81803503
(0.057 – 0.060in) 1.35mm (0.053in)
1.55 – 1.64mm A13 81803504
(0.061 – 0.064in) 1.45mm (0.057in)
1.65 – 1.74mm A13 81803505
(0.065 – 0.068in) 1.55mm (0.061in)
1.75 – 1.84mm A13 81803506
(0.069 – 0.072in) 1.65mm (0.065in)
1.85 – 1.94mm A13 81803507
(0.073 – 0.076in) 1.75mm (0.069in)
1.96 – 2.04mm A13 81803508
(0.077–0.080in) 1.85mm (0.073in)
2.06 – 2.14mm A13 81803509
(0.081 – 0.084in) 1.96mm (0.077in)
2.16 – 2.24mm A13 81803510
(0.085 – 0.088in) 2.06mm (0.081in)
2.26 – 2.34mm A13 81803511
(0.089 – 0.092in) 2.16mm (0.085in)
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Axle Shaft Rolling Resistance

After fitting the correct shim to set the preload:
Manufacture a bridging bar to span opposing bolt
holes to the dimensions shown.
42
Fit bridging bar (1) across the rear axle housing
flange and use a torque meter (2) to check rolling re-
sistance which should be 2.3–10 Nm (20–80 lb in).
NOTE: The brake housing, brake discs and 1/4 shaft
should not be installed but all bearings well lubri-
cated.
If out of specification the shim should be adjusted
and rolling resistance rechecked.

This adjustment is made by shimming the right hand
differential bearing cone using two methods:
If the left hand axle housing, ring gear or brake hous-
43
ing are replaced the following checks should be
made:
Method 1
Remove the differential bearing cone and shim from
the outer brake housing.
Place the gauge ring of tool 297146 (1) into the va-
cant bearing location.
Bolt bridge tool 297146 (1) across the rear axle hous-
ing flange with spacers (2) located between the axle
housing flange and the tool.
Measure the gap between the bridge tool and the
gauge ring using a feeler gauge (3).
Refer to the following table to determine the correct
size shim which should be installed between the
brake housing and bearing cone, thus preloading the
44
bearing back to specifications.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

Method 2
When the differential bearings are not changed the
differential rolling resistance must be checked.
Remove the right hand axle bearing.
Remove the left hand axle housing and differential
Remove pinion.
Compress the differential Lock Spring and install
shim stock to constantly engaged differential lock.
Refit differential and left hand axle housing but less
the 1/4 shaft and brake discs.
Fit the 1/4 shaft in from the right hand side and fit
adaptor tool onto shaft.
1. Differential Lock
2. 1/4 Shaft
3. Adapter Tool
4. Torque Meter
5. Right Hand Brake Housing
Check rolling resistance is between 2.3–10 Nm
(20–90 lb in)
and bearing preload rechecked.
45
Differential Bearing Preload Adjustment Shims
Gap Reading Part Number of Shim Shim Thickness

0.86 – 0.99mm 1803515 0.097 – 10.2mm
0.034 – 0.039in 0.038 – 0.040in
1.02 – 1.14mm 1803516 1.12 – 1.18mm
0.040 – 0.045in 0.044 – 0.046in
1.17 – 1.13mm 1803517 1.28 – 1.33mm
0.046 – 0.051in 0.050 – 0.052in
1.32 – 1.45mm 1803518 1.43 – 1.48mm
0.052 – 0.057in 0.056 – 0.058in
1.47 – 1.60mm 1803519 1.59 – 1.64mm
0.058 – 0.063in 0.062 – 0.064in
1.63 – 1.75mm 1803520 1.74 – 1.79mm
0.064 – 0.069in 0.068 – 0.070in
1.78 – 1.90mm 1803521 1.89 – 1.95mm
0.070 – 0.075in 0.074 – 0.076in
1.93 – 2.06mm 1803522 2.05 – 2.10mm
0.076 – 0.081in 0.080 – 0.082in
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

SECTION 27 – REAR AXLE WITH POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION – CHAPTER 2 1
SECTION 27 – REAR AXLE WITH POWER SHIFT TRANSMISSION
Chapter 2 – Rear Axle Overhaul with Electrically Operated

Differential Lock
CONTENT
27 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Component
Axle Type Modular
Differential Lock Mechanical – Electrically Operated
Crown Wheel & Pinion Ratio 4.11 : 1
Number pf Planetary Gears 3
Load Carrying Capacity Dynamic 9250 kg (20400 lb) at 1696 –1727 mm track width
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 27 – REAR AXLE WITH POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION – CHAPTER 2
SPECIFICATIONS
Overall width 1740mm (67.86 in)
Oil capacity 26 Litres (6.8 US. Gals)
Oil change period 1 year or 1200 hours
Thread sealant Pt. No. 82995768

Drive pinion preload 1.3–4.1 Nm (10 – 40 lb in)
Rolling resistance 2.3–10 Nm (20–90 lb in)
TORQUE VALUES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

SPECIAL TOOLS
APPLICATION
Splitting Tool No 297471 Axle removal
Ratchet Tool 297457 Axle housing bearing/seal
SEALANTS
Code Number Name
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


The rear axle (1) is of modular design and is fixed by
1
4 bolts to the chassis with a torque value of 1000 Nm
(737lbf ft). It incorporates the following features:
3
Differential Lock (Electrically operated)
WARNING
Never use the differential lock at speeds above
8 km/h (5 miles/h) or when turning the machine.
When engaged the lock will prevent the machine
turning and personal injury could result.
The differential lock fitted to this machine is operated

by oil pressure and controlled by an electrically oper-
ated solenoid. The solenoid is energised when the
1
switch (1) mounted in the front console is depressed.
The differential lock effectively places both rear
wheels into a direct drive when selected, this action
stops one rear wheel spinning.
In conditions inducing wheel slip (differential lock not
yet engaged), press down the differential lock switch
and the lock will engage giving direct drive to both
rear wheels.
The lock will remain engaged until traction at the rear
wheels equalises or until either of the foot brakes are
applied and the vehicle stops. The warning light on 4
the instrument panel will go out when the differential
lock has disengaged.
Operating System
When the instrument panel switch is selected the dif-
ferential is operated by the pressure of the oil it re-
ceives from the transmission, acting on the differen-
tial operating piston.
This oil pressure 13 – 14 bar (188 – 203 psi) which
is constantly available when the engine is running is
controlled by a solenoid operated valve. When the
switch is deselected (differential lock not required)
the oil is diverted back to the dipstick tube (dump)
and the differential piston spring releases the lock.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

1
2
3
6
5
Differential Schematic Control
1. Powershift Transmission 4. Rear Axle
2. Dipstick Tube 5. Actuating Valve
3. Return Line to Sump 6. Operating Solenoid Valve
1
3
6
Differential Schematic Operation
1. Actuating Valve 3. Actuating Fork
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Hydraulically operated oil immersed foot brakes

fitted with four disc brakes
three planetary reduction carrier
Operation
Power from the transmission output shaft is trans-
mitted to the rear axle through (1) the brake disc (2)
and onto the half shaft (3).
The spiral bevel pinion is located in preloaded taper
roller bearings.
The differential is located on two taper roller bear-
ings, the right hand bearing supported by an internal
web of the axle centre housing.
The crown wheel is rivetted to the differential hous-
ing. Drive from the housing is transmitted through a
conventional four pinion differential to sun gear
shafts which are splined into the differential side
gears.
The differential lock sliding coupling is located on the 7
splines of the left hand differential side gear. The
coupling has dog teeth which engage with the dog
teeth on the differential housing lock adaptor.
If the dog teeth are not aligned, the spring engage-
ment link will be preloaded, ensuring rapid and full
tooth engagement when the dog teeth align.
The differential lock will remain engaged due to dog
tooth side loading as long as the rear wheels have
unequal traction.
The return spring disengages the lock when both
wheels have equal traction or drive is disengaged.
The brakes are mounted on the final reduction sun
gears. These brakes are wet disc type with hydraulic
piston actuator operated by foot pedals, indepen-
dently for turning assistance, or together for trans-
port.
The planetary gears (1) are mounted in a carrier and
are positioned around the sun gear and within the
planetary ring gear (2). The rear axle shafts (3) lo-
cate into the internal splines in the carriers.
As the sun gear is driven by the differential, the re-
duction planet gears revolve inside the stationary
planetary ring gear and drive the carrier and axle
shaft at reduced speed.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

The rear axle shaft is supported on taper roller bear-

ings (1). Preload is adjusted by means of selective
shims held under the retaining plate and bolts.
FAULT FINDING
Differential Lock 1, Internal linkage, cross shaft 4. 1. Remove inspect and repair.
Not Engaging rod, fork or pivot shaft
damaged/broken.
2. Damaged or broken teeth on 5. 2. Remove differential and

coupling. assembly.
3. Solenoid valve sticking not 6. 3. Replace/repair as required.

operating.
4. Solenoid valve Electrical 7. 4. Replace/repair as required.

connection poor or coil not
energising.
Differential Lock 1. Spring broken between 8. 1. Remove differential and
Not Disengaging adaptor and coupling replace spring.
2. Teeth of adaptor or coupling 9. 2. Remove differential and

damaged/burred. replace damaged parts.
2, Internal linkage, cross shaft 10.3. Remove and inspect.

rod, fork or pivot shaft
damaged/broken.
4. Damaged or broken teeth on 11. 4. Remove differential and

coupling. assembly.
5. Solenoid valve Electrical 12.5. Replace/repair as required.

connection poor or coil not
energising.
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

10
OVERHAUL
Rear Axle Removal

For servicing of any rear axle component the axle
must be removed.
Prior to removal of the axle place a suitable clean
container under the axle, capable of holding 26 litres
(6.86 US. gals) and drain the oil from the plug at the
base of the axle (1).
Disconnect the differential Lock hydraulic hose
11
Accessed from the top of the rear axle disconnect
and drain the residual brake oil into a suitable clean
container. Remove the pipes from both sides of the
axle half shafts. Plug the brake pipes to prevent any
dirt or contamination entering the brake system. 1
12
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Remove the 4 attaching bolts (1) from the drive shaft

coupling and remove from the axle
13
Before removal of the axle make sure the machine
is on level ground with the loader fully lowered and
backhoe resting on the ground. The stabilisers must
be lowered to the ground and the front wheels
chocked.
14
IMPORTANT: Do not rely on the stabilisers, install
axle stands to support the unit.
With the axle (1) supported using a suitable support
plate (2) and attached to splitting stand (3), Tool No
297471. Remove the retaining bolts and gently lower
the axle to the ground.
Place the axle onto a suitable axle stand to facilitate
repairs
15
Differential Removal
NOTE: Remove the right hand axle housing using
lifting tool 297413 and the differential will be removed
with the axle housing.
1. Centre Housing
3. Lifting Tool
4. Half Shaft Axle Housing
16
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Pinion location in axle housing

1. Pinion Shaft
2. Differential Lock Actuator
3. Half Shaft
17
Loosen the pinion nut using a pre fabricated tool, the
dimensions being:
1. 46mm (1.811in)
2. 65mm (2.559in)
3. 9mm (0.354)
4. 40mm (1.575in)
5. 220mm (8.66in)
6. 140mm (5.51in)
7. 95mm (3.74in)
8. 10mm (0.394in)
9. 110mm (4.33in)
18
Using the special tool (1) hold the coupling steady
while loosening the coupling retaining nut. Loosen
the pinion housing bolts.
19
Leave 2 bolts in the position shown removing the re-
maining bolts and jack the pinion out evenly.
20
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

21
Pinion Shaft Layout
1. Pinion Housing 9. Bearing
2. Seal 10. Shim Various Sizes
3. Retainer 11. Bearing
4. Nut 12. Pinion Shaft
5. Lock Pin 13. Bearing
6. Washer 14. Lock Ring
7. Seal 15. Seal
8. Flange 16. Seal Assembly
NOTE: the pinion and crown wheel are a matched

pair and must always be replaced together.
Differential assembly.
1. Differential Lock Return Spring
2. Differential Housing
3. Crown Wheel
22
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

23
Differential Assembly Exploded View
1. Lock Ring 8. Thrust Washer
2. Washer 9. Side Gear
3. Dog Gear 10. Spider Assembly
4. Spring 11. Side Gear
5. Dog Gear 12. Thrust Washer
6. Bearing 13. Differential Housing
7. Crown Wheel 14. Bearing
Differential lock.
Prior to separating the differential, mark the two half
housings (1) to ensure correct re-assembly.
Replace the differential lock coupling and adaptor if
worn or damaged.
The crown wheel is rivetted to the differential housing
in production.
Replacement crown wheels are secured with nuts
and bolts for easier field service.
24
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

The differential lock consists of a sliding dog type

coupling splined to the right hand side of the differen-
tial and a fixed adaptor located to the differential
housing.
The differential lock can be disassembled by com-
pressing the spring and carefully detaching the snap
ring (1).
With the snap ring removed disassemble the:
Washer (6), Outer Dog (2), Spring (5), Inner Dog (3),
from the housing (4).
Carefully inspect all moving parts for signs of scor-
ing, wear, or damage, if evident replace with new
parts.
25
Axle Shaft Component Removal
Remove the fork and shaft (right hand side housing
only). With either of the left or right brake housings
(1) exposed remove the attaching nuts and lift the
outer housing over the axle half shaft (2).
Inspect the housing scoring damage or distortion, re-
pair as required.
26
Lift the brake discs (3) over the half shaft (2) to ex-
pose the inner brake housing (1).
Inspect the steel separator plates and rotating brake
discs for wear or distortion. Replace the brake discs
if worn to a thickness of less than 4.23 mm (0.170in).
Maximum allowable warpage is 0.08mm (0.003in)
Reassemble in reverse order to disassembly.
27
The brake pipe fitting (1) can be removed by loosen-
ing and removal of the attaching Allen screws (2).
Before re–assembly fit a new ‘O’ ring (1) to the fitting
and new ‘O’ rings (3) that seal the oil galleries. On re–
assembly torque the attaching bolts to 8–13.5Nm
(6–10lbs ft). 2
3
28
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Remove the brake housing (3) and brake piston (1)

and inspect all moving parts for wear or scoring. If in
any doubt replace suspect parts with new.
29
To remove the planetary gear (2) from the carrier (1)
remove the lock washer (3) and retaining bolt (4).
30
Remove the planetary gear carrier.
31
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

The planetary gear assembly can be disassembled

by rotating the retaining ring (2) to allow the slot to
align with the individual gear shafts (8) which allows
them to be withdrawn from the body.
Carefully inspect the shafts, gears, bearings and
washers and housing for wear, scoring or damage
and ensure new are parts fitted or repairs performed.
1. Planetary Gear
2. Retaining Ring
3. Thrust Washer
4. Roller Bearings
5. Thrust Washer
6. Roller Bearings
7. Thrust Washer 32
8. Planet Gear Shaft
9. Carrier
Position the axle housing to allow removal of the axle

shaft.
The planetary ring gear (1) can be removed from the
axle (3) with the aid of Tool (2), No 297326. Position
the tool beneath the ring gear, expand the plates and
tighten the bolts. Invert the axle and press out the
gear form the wheel hub side
Inspect the gear for wear scoring or damage and re-
pair or replace.
33
Refitting the ring gear (1) is the reverse procedure
using Tool (2) the ring gear is pressed back into the
axle (3) from the brake side. If fitting a new ring gear
ensure the gear is seated equally in the axle by plac-
ing a feeler gauge between the gear and housing.
IMPORTANT: If a new ring gear has been fitted in the
left hand axle housing, the differential bearing pre-
load must be checked.
34
Axle housing bearing cup removal.
2. Slide Hammer Tool No 297504
3. Axle Housing
4. Bearing Cup
35
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

The half shaft axle seal (1) is retained in position by

the axle bearing (2). To remove the seal it is necess-
ary to remove the bearing.
36
To remove the bearing, stand the half axle (4) upright
and attach the bearing removal tool as shown.
1. Ratchet Tool No 297457

3. Pulling Attachment Tool No 297391
4. Axle Shaft
5. Bearing
6. Shaft Protector
7. Legs
37
Applying gradual pressure to the puller tool the bear-
ing will separate from the half axle.
Inspect the bearing for wear, scoring or damage and

replace if in any doubt.
IMPORTANT: Always fit a new axle seal if the axle

bearing is removed for any reason.
Re–assembly of the seal and bearing is the reverse

procedure. Locate the seal and using an induction
heater, heat the bearing sufficiently to expand it
enough to allow it to easily seat onto the half shaft.
38
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

39
Rear Axle Shaft Components
1. Axle Housing 10. Bolt
2. Brake Fitting 11. Lock Washer
3. Bearing 12. Shaft
4. Seal 13. Inner Brake Housing
5. Half Shaft 14. Seals
6. Bearing 15. Brake Piston
7. Planetary Reduction Assembly 16. Friction Discs
8. Shim 17. Outer Brake Housing
9. Washer 18. Discs
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

ADJUSTMENTS
Drive pinion preload
NOTE: Crown wheel to pinion backlash is preset by
manufacturing tolerances in production.
The pinion bearing preload is set by selecting the cor-
rect shim (spacer) which is placed between the bear-
ings.
Re–assemble the pinion assembly, attach the fabri-
cated spanner (1) to the assembly (2) and torque to
271–813 Nm (200–600 lbf ft) with spanner (4) to the
locknut.
Shims Available:
' 31.852/31.864 '31.902/31.915
' 31.953/31.966 '32.004/32.017
' 32.055/32.068 '32.106/32.32.118
'32.156/32.169 '32.207/32.220 40
'32.258/32.271 '32.309/32.322
'32.360/32.372 '32.410/32.423
'32.461/32.474 '32.512/32.525
'32.563/32.576
Use a torque meter (1) to check rolling resistance

when the assembly is fitted back into the axle.
The rolling resistance should be: 1.3 Nm (10–40 lb in)
Leave pinion retainer bolts loose for this check.
If under specification, fit a smaller shim
If over specification, fit a larger shim
NOTE: Make sure both bearings are well lubricated
and, once preload is set, lock nut to pinion.
41
Adjustable shims (1) are located between the inner
end of the axle shaft and carrier retainer.
42
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Adjustment procedure
To achieve the correct preload proceed through
steps 1 to 7
1. Fit a shim 2.06mm (0.081in) thus reducing end
float and possible damage to the seal.
2. Replace the planetary gear assembly.
3. Tighten the retaining bolt to 217–745 Nm
(160–550 lb ft).
4. Position the dial gauge and measure end float
eg. 0.562mm (0.022in).
5. To ensure correct preload, subtract endfloat from
shims already fitted for example
2.06 – 0.562mm=1.498mm.
6. Select shim from table to provide specified
preload of 1.72mm (0.067in).
IMPORTANT: Increasing shim thickness will reduce
preload.
Decreasing shim thickness will increase preload.
7. Fit selected shim and re-tighten retained bolt to
correct torque and allow lock plate to locate.
43
SHIM SELECTION TABLE

Resultant Figure Shim to be Installed
1.24 – 1.32mm A13 81803491
(0.049 – 0.052in) 1.14mm (0.045in)
1.35 – 1.42mm A13 81803502
(0.053 – 0.056in) 1.24mm (0.049in)
1.45 – 1.54mm A13 81803503
(0.057 – 0.060in) 1.35mm (0.053in)
1.55 – 1.64mm A13 81803504
(0.061 – 0.064in) 1.45mm (0.057in)
1.65 – 1.74mm A13 81803505
(0.065 – 0.068in) 1.55mm (0.061in)
1.75 – 1.84mm A13 81803506
(0.069 – 0.072in) 1.65mm (0.065in)
1.85 – 1.94mm A13 81803507
(0.073 – 0.076in) 1.75mm (0.069in)
1.96 – 2.04mm A13 81803508
(0.077–0.080in) 1.85mm (0.073in)
2.06 – 2.14mm A13 81803509
(0.081 – 0.084in) 1.96mm (0.077in)
2.16 – 2.24mm A13 81803510
(0.085 – 0.088in) 2.06mm (0.081in)
2.26 – 2.34mm A13 81803511
(0.089 – 0.092in) 2.16mm (0.085in)
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Axle Shaft Rolling Resistance

After fitting the correct shim to set the preload:
Manufacture a bridging bar to span opposing bolt
holes to the dimensions shown.
44
Fit bridging bar (1) across the rear axle housing
flange and use a torque meter (2) to check rolling re-
sistance which should be 2.3–10 Nm (20–80 lb in).
NOTE: The brake housing, brake discs and 1/4 shaft
should not be installed but all bearings well lubri-
cated.
and rolling resistance rechecked.

This adjustment is made by shimming the right hand
differential bearing cone using two methods:
If the right hand axle housing, ring gear or brake
45
housing are replaced the following checks should be
made:
Method 1
Remove the differential bearing cone and shim from
the outer brake housing.
Place the gauge ring of tool 297146 (1) into the va-
cant bearing location.
Bolt bridge tool 297146 (1) across the rear axle
housing flange with spacers (2) located between the
axle housing flange and the tool.
Measure the gap between the bridge tool and the
gauge ring using a feeler gauge (3).
Refer to the following table to determine the correct
size shim which should be installed between the
brake housing and bearing cone, thus preloading the
46
bearing back to specifications.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Method 2
When the differential bearings are not changed the
differential rolling resistance must be checked.
Remove the left hand axle bearing.
Remove the left hand axle housing and differential
Remove pinion.
Compress the differential Lock Spring and install
shim stock to constantly engaged differential lock.
Refit differential and right hand axle housing but less
the 1/4 shaft and brake discs.
Fit the 1/4 shaft in from the left hand side and fit
adaptor tool onto shaft.
1. Differential Lock – Left Hand Brake Housing
2. 1/4 Shaft
3. Adapter Tool
4. Torque Meter
Check rolling resistance is between 2.3–10 Nm
(20–90 lb in)
and bearing preload rechecked.
47
DIFFERENTIAL BEARING PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT SHIMS
Gap Reading Part Number of Shim Shim Thickness

0.86 – 0.99mm 1803515 0.097 – 10.2mm
0.034 – 0.039in 0.038 – 0.040in
1.02 – 1.14mm 1803516 1.12 – 1.18mm
0.040 – 0.045in 0.044 – 0.046in
1.17 – 1.13mm 1803517 1.28 – 1.33mm
0.046 – 0.051in 0.050 – 0.052in
1.32 – 1.45mm 1803518 1.43 – 1.48mm
0.052 – 0.057in 0.056 – 0.058in
1.47 – 1.60mm 1803519 1.59 – 1.64mm
0.058 – 0.063in 0.062 – 0.064in
1.63 – 1.75mm 1803520 1.74 – 1.79mm
0.064 – 0.069in 0.068 – 0.070in
1.78 – 1.90mm 1803521 1.89 – 1.95mm
0.070 – 0.075in 0.074 – 0.076in
1.93 – 2.06mm 1803522 2.05 – 2.10mm
0.076 – 0.081in 0.080 – 0.082in
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Operating Solenoid Valve

The solenoid valve is located at the rear of the ma-
chine to the right of the backhoe valve block.
This valve is not serviceable, however if the valve
operation is in question the coil can be tested and
valve block cleaned.
48
Disconnect and plug the attaching hydraulic pipes
and remove the valve from the machine.
Clean and flush the manifold block ports with a suit-
able cleaning fluid.
49
Remove the solenoid coil attaching knob and clean
the parts with lint free cloth.
1. Spool 1
2. ‘O’ ring
3. Solenoid Coil
4. ‘O’ ring
5. Plastic Retainer
2
Upon reassembly apply 12 volts to the solenoid and
observe its function if in any doubt replace with new
parts. 3
50
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

SECTION 27 – REAR AXLE WITH 4 WHEEL STEER – CHAPTER 3 1
SECTION 27 – REAR AXLE
Chapter 3 – FOUR WHEEL STEER
CONTENT
27 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SPECIFICATIONS
Component
Axle Type Modular
Load Carrying Capacity Dynamic 10000 kg (22000 lb) at 1890 mm track width
Overall Width 2304 mm
Oil Capacity 11 Litres (2.9 US. gals)
Oil Change Period 1 year or 1200 hours

Drive pinion preload 9.2–13.8 N
Steering Sensor to steering rod disc 1.5mm – 1.6mm
LB 115 / FH 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 27 – REAR AXLE WITH 4 WHEEL STEER – CHAPTER 3
Axle Disassembly
Hub Disassembly
1. Remove the hub oil drain plug and drain the hub
oil. Remove the differential plug and drain the oil
1
2. Remove the hub outer casing allen screws
2
3. Remove the hub outer casing.
3
4. Remove the sun gear circlip and 3 spacers.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FH 200.2

5. Remove the eight ring gear fixing bolts.
5
6. Using two of the fixing bolts, fit these to the outer
threaded holes and tighten to push the ring gear
away from the hub.
6
7. With a soft faced mallet hammer off the hub
centre housing and also the outer conical bear-
ing.
7
8. Then remove the inner conical bearing by hand.
LB 115 / FH 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

9. Undo the nut which holds the steering rod to the

hub.
9
10. Use a set of bearing pullers to press the tapered
shaft from the hub assembly
10
11. Undo the bolts holding the top and bottom pivot
pins. Then remove the pivot pins and also the
belleville washers and spacers.
11
12. Remove the remainder of the hub assembly.
12
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FH 200.2

13. Remove the axle drive shaft from the centre

housing.
13
14. Disassembly of the planetary housing.
Remove the bolt from each of the planet gears.
Then remove the Upper (1) and Lower (2)
washer. The gear can then be removed and also
the individual needle bearings.
14
15. Swivel hub seal and bush removal.
Remove the shaft seal and bush using a suitable
puller or drift.
15
16. Axle shaft seal and bush removal.
Use an internal puller and slide hammer to re-
move the seal and bush.
16
LB 115 / FH 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

17. Pivot bush removal.

Remove the upper and lower pivot bushes using
an internal puller and slide hammer.
17
STEERING CYLINDER REMOVAL
Undo the track rod ends from each side of the steer-
ing cylinder.
Remove the four retaining bolts.
18
Using a slide hammer with threaded end M18, re-
move the upper and lower bushes (1) on the left side.
19
Lift off the complete assembly.
To disassemble the cylinder remove the circlip from

each end then slide the piston to one end and tap out
one gland, then slide it to the other end to remove the
remaining gland block.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FH 200.2

SIDE CASING REMOVAL

Undo the ring of bolts which hold the side casing to
the centre housing.
NOTE: Ensure both the side casing and centre hous-
ing are held securely. Swing the side casing away
20
Remove the brake discs and central hub.
21
To disassemble the brake housing, remove the abler
bolts which secure it to the central housing. Remove
the complete brake housing.
22
Remove the three piston retaining bolts.
To assist in removing the brake piston from the hous-
ing, undo the brake bleed nipple and blow com-
pressed air down to eject the piston.
1. Brake Piston
2. Return Belleville Washers
3. Piston Retaining Nuts
4. Piston Seals
23
LB 115 / FH 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

With both brake housings removed, the differential

and crown wheel can then be removed.
24
CROWN WHEEL AND DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
25
1. Differential Housing 5. Crown Wheel
2. Thrust Washer 6. Fixing Bolts
3. Planet Gears 7. Thrust Washer
4. Shaft 8. Side Gear
Before reassembly inspect all components for wear

and damage.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FH 200.2

PINION DISASSEMBLY
Remove the coupler retaining ring using suitable cir-
clip pliers.
26
Then remove the coupler and ‘O’ ring.
Lever out the oil seal and dispose of it. Then slide off
the steel ring, ‘O’ ring and washer.
27
Using tool no. 297511 lock the shaft and undo the
pinion nut.
Withdraw the pinion shaft and bearings.
28
LB 115 / FH 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

29
heading
1. Ring 8. Shaft
2. Inner seal 9. Washer
3. Outer Seal 10. Bearing
4. Ring 11. Washer
5. Washer 12. Shaft Guide
6. Adjusting Nut 13. Circlip
7. Tab Washer 14. Coupling
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FH 200.2

DIFFERENTIAL REASSEMBLY
Before reassembly, inspect all components for wear
and damage.
If any components have been changed then the fol-
lowing set-up procedure must be followed.
Correct set-up of the differential is only possible
using tool no. 297414.
Firstly insert the false pinion (297414) into the hous-
ing with the new bearings fitted. Tighten the lock nut
so the bearings can still be rotated by hand.
30
Then fit the false differential (297414) with the hous-
ing complete with side brake housing.
31
Record the A dimension using a depth gauge.
X is the dimension needed to calculate the pinion
shams.
Carry out the following calculation:
C
X = (A + C) – B X
Example: A = 164.9
therefore X = (164.9 + 45) – 100 B
A
X = 109.9
B = 100 mm
C = 45 mm
SHK35013
32
LB 115 / FH 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

To determine the shims required, check the pinion di-

mension on the end of the pinion (V).
Shim thickness = X – V
Example:
Shim thickness = 109.9 – 107.00
= 2.9
Shim are available from 2.5 mm to 3.4 mm in 0.1 in-
crements.
33
Remove the false pinion and differentials and also
the side brake housings.
Reassemble the pinion with the calculated shim be-
tween the pinion head and conical bearing.
Ensure the chamfered side of the shim is toward the
pinion head. Press on the first bearing.
34
Replace the pinion, shim and bearing into the hous-
ing complete with new collapsible bush and washers.
Fit the other bearing onto the end of the shaft and
using a suitable drift hammer on the bearing. Oppose
hammer force by holding a heavy hammer against
the pinion head.
35
Fit the rest of the components to the shaft and tighten
the pinion nut in incremented steps until the correct
rolling pull is achieved:
9.2 – 13.8 N
36
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FH 200.2

When the desired rolling resistance is achieved,

hammer the locking tabs on the pinion nut so the nut
cannot turn on the shaft.
Fit the differential and crown wheel into the housing
and fit the locally made tool to the pinion shaft and
tighten the locknut.
37
Measure the crown wheel to pinion backlash by plac-
ing the magnetic base of a dial gauge on the housing
and placing the stylus of the dial gauge on to the flat
surface of the tool. The stylus of the tool should be
approximately 39mm from the pinions centre radius.
The backlash should be 0.17 – 0.22 mm.
If the measured backlash is too large, tighten the ad-
juster ring nearest the crown wheel and loosen the
ring on the opposite side equal amounts.
If the backlash is too small, loosen the adjuster ring
on the same side as the crown wheel and tighten the
ring on the opposite side.
38
Recheck the rolling resistance of the pinion with the
differential fitted.
The valve should now be the original pinion valve
plus
(2.59 – 3.88) N.
If the rolling resistance is too high then loosen each
of the adjuster rings by equal amounts.
If the rolling resistance is too low then tighten both
adjuster rings by equal amounts until the desired re-
sistance is achieved.
39
LB 115 / FH 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Fit the adjusting ring locks when all backlashes and

rolling resistances are correct.
40
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FH 200.2

SECTION 33 – BRAKE SYSTEM (NOT 4WS) – CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 33 – BRAKES
Chapter 1 – Brake Overhaul
CONTENT
33 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Brake Oil NH 610

Drive pinion preload 10 – 40 lb in
Axle shaft bearing preload 1.72mm (0.067 in)
Differential bearing preload 0.09 – 0.11 mm (0.0035 – 0.044in)
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 33 – BRAKE SYSTEM (NOT 4WS) – CHAPTER 1
TORQUE VALUES
1
TOOL APPLICATION
Splitting Tool No MS 2700 C Axle removal
Ratchet Tool P61 Axle housing bearing/seal
SEALANTS
Code Number Name
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

2
Braking System
1. Brake Piston Assembly 5. Master Cylinders
2. Brake Discs 6. Hand Brake
3. Brake Reservoir 7. Trumpet Housing
4. Brake Pressure Switch
Description and Operation
The machines have two braking systems, a hand op-

erated brake, braking the drive on the rear of the
transmission, and hydraulically operated inboard wet
disc brakes in the rear axle.
The rear axle brakes are hydraulically operated by
two pistons thus improved performance and low
pedal effort.
Four friction discs are fitted each side giving total
brake disc area of 71992mm2 / side.
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Brake Reservoir
1. Brake Reservoir
2. Low Level Test Switch
NOTE: Depressing the low level switch test button
mounted in the middle of the brake filler reservoir
cap, the warning light circuit can be tested. The light
that is illuminated is the handbrake warning light
mounted on the right hand instument console, en-
sure handbrake is in the ‘off ’ position.
Brake Master Cylinders (1) in situ are accessible
from the engine compartment. 2
3
The brake cylinders are linked by a balance pipe (1)
situated below the cylinders to maintain equal oil
pressure between the two cylinders
1
5
Master Brake Cylinder Exploded View
1. Fitting 7. Seal
2. Pressure Switch 8. Clevis
3. Reservoir Adapter 9. Seals
4. Body 10. Second Spool
5. Main Spool 11. Spring
6. End Cap 12. Balance Pipe
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

6
Master Cylinder With Brakes Released
Trapped Oil Reservoir Oil (no pressure)
1. Oil To Brake Piston (Right Hand Side) 6. Master Cylinder Body

2. Pressure Switch 7. Master Cylinder Body
3. Second Spool 8. Main Spool Stop
4. Reservoir Inlet 9. Balancing Tube
5. Main Spool 10. Oil to Brake Piston (Left Hand Side)
With the brakes released the brake lines are open to

the reservoir to allow the brakes to release. The
master cylinders are also open to reservoir through
the centre of the valve.
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

7
Master Cylinder With Brake Pedals Depressed
Pressurised Brake Fluid Reservoir Oil (no pressure)

As the brake pedals are depressed initial movement

of the cylinder plunger closes the centre port to iso-
late the reservoir.
Further plunger movement creates brake fluid pres-
sure to apply the brakes. The equal pressure ports
are both open as the two seals on both master cylin-
ders have exposed the two ports, therefore allowing
equal pressure in both master cylinders.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

8
Master Cylinder With One Brake Pedal Depressed
Pressurised Brake Fluid Reservoir Oil (no pressure)

When using one brake to assist turning, the brake

master cylinder being applied operates only one
brake. This is achieved by the equal pressure port
being blocked by the two seals on the master cylinder
not being operated.
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Brake Discs and Piston Layout

1. Steel Plates
2. Outer Brake Housing
3. Seals
4. Brake Piston
5. Friction Plates
9
Brake Piston and Seals
1. Brake Piston
2. Brake Pipe fitting
10
The brakes hydraulically operated are supplied oil
from the brake pedal reservoir and into the axle by
tubes into each half axle (1) through the mounted
brake pipe fitting (2) which is sealed to the piston by
two ‘O’ rings.
11
When the brake pipe fitting (1) is removed ensure the
‘O’ rings (2) are replaced with new
12
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

BRAKE BLEEDING PROCEDURE

1
1. Ensure reservoir is full (1)
13
2. Open left hand brake bleed valve (2)
14
3. Pump both brakes to purge the system (3)
3
4. Hold pedals down
5. Lock bleed valve (2)
6. Release pedals
7. Repeat steps 3–7
8. Repeat steps 4–7 on right hand brake
9. Test brakes repeat if necessary
15
NOTE: When the brake pedals are operated, both to-
gether, the electrical supply to the front wheel drive
switch is cut allowing the clutch to denergise thus en-
gaging the front wheel drive, providing four wheel
braking.
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

TRANSMISSION HAND BRAKE

The transmission hand brake is fitted to all models
When operated the eccentric cam forces the friction
pads against the disc, effecting a braking action on
the output shaft from the transmission, locking the
drive shaft to the rear and front axle.
16
17
Component Layout
3. Fixing Bolts 10. Spacer
7. Inner Friction Pad 14. Adjusting Nuts
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

HAND BRAKE ADJUSTMENT.

The transmission hand brake is located on the trans-
mission out put shaft on 4x4 transmission and rear
axle on the 4x2 transmission.
The 4x2 transmission hand brake is located on the
rear axle brake disc splined to pinion shaft (1), hy-
draulic oil filter (2), hand brake cable (3), hand brake
caliper (4).
18
When refitting the caliper unit (2) Insert the two bolts
(1) through the caliper, it will be necessary to apply
Loctite 270 to the locknuts (3). Tighten the bolts while
holding the locknuts. Once the bolts are tightened
down back them off by 3 bolt head flat, and then
torque the locknuts to 150 Nm. Ensure that the tubes
can move.
19
Adjust the clearance between the brake pads and
disc to 0.5mm using the nut and lock nut (1).
20
Adjust the cable clevis and lock the nut to get 5 to 7
clicks on the hand brake lever.
21
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES PAGE
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2

SECTION 33 – BRAKE SYSTEM (4WS ONLY) – CHAPTER 2 1
SECTION 33 – BRAKES
Chapter 2
CONTENT

33 000 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Brake Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Hand brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Brake operation Hydraulic
Brakes Wet disc, piston operated
Brake oil Ambra LHM
Brake discs, per side 3
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 33 – BRAKE SYSTEM (4WS ONLY) – CHAPTER 2
1
Braking System
1. Brake Piston Assembly 5. Master Cylinder
2. Brake Discs 6. Hand Brake
3. Brake Reservoir 7. Trumpet Housing
4. Brake Pressure Switch
Operation of the foot brake pressurises the brake The hand brake, when pulled, locks the brake disc on
fluid in the master cylinders which feeds the brake the rear of the transmission.
pistons in the axle housing. The brake pistons then
compress the brake friction discs and seperator
discs, which locks the axle shaft to the axle housing.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

NOTES
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Y Z
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
SHK33001
2
Brake Cylinder in Neutral
12–80 bar Pressure Return to Reservoir
0–12 bar Pressure
1. Pressure to Piston Port 8. Actuator

2. ’O’ Ring Seal 9. Seal
3. Seal 10. Seal
4. Reservoir Port 11. Switch Over Pin
5. Relief Valve 12. Brake Sleeve
6. Master Cylinder Body 13. One Way Valve
7. Brake Piston 14. Piston Return Spring
Neutral pedal is being used. Immediately the pedal is moved

With the brake pedal released oil in the Y and Z gal- from the neutral position seal (10) blocks the reser-
lery is free to go to the reservoir. Oil from gallery X voir from galleries X and Y.
also is free to flow to the reservoir past the ’O’ ring (2)
into gallery Y. Braking (2nd Phase)
When the pressure in the X gallery reaches 12 bar
Braking (1st Phase) this pressure acts on the switch over pin (11) and
Oil is compressed in galleries X and Y, the oil from pushes on the relief valve ball (5), opening gallery Y
gallery Y passing through the central part of the to reservoir.
sleeve (12) and past seal (3). As the sleeve moves During this phase the pedal pressure is acting on the
to the left it also opens up the one way valve (13) al- smaller diameter sleeve creating maximum pressure
lowing the balancing system to operate if the other of 80 bar.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

Y Z
SHK33002
3
Braking (1st Phase)
Y Z
SHK33003
4
Braking (2nd Phase)
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Overhaul
Brake Reservoir
1. Brake Reservoir
2. Low Level Test Switch
To test the low level switch on the reservoir cap place

the handbrake in the OFF position and then press the
button on the reservoir cap, the handbrake light
should come on.
5
Brake master cylinders are accessible from the en-
gine compartment.
The brake cylinders are linked by a balance pipe
which supplies equal pressure to both brake pistons
when both pedals are pressed.
1 2
3
4
12
11 10 9 8 7 6 5
SHK33005
7
1. Master Cylinder Body 7. Seal Retainer
2. Piston Return Spring 8. Sleeve to Piston Retaining Ring
3. Circlip 9. Sleeve
4. Piston and Lip Seal 10. One Way Valve
5. Relief Valve Assembly 11. Relief Valve Actuator
6. Piston Seal 12. Balancer One Way Valve
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

Brake Disc and Piston Layout

1. Brake Piston
2. Steel Seperator Plates
3. Steel Back Plate
4. Sleeve
5. Brake Housing
8
Brake Piston
1. Brake Piston
2. Return Belleville Washers
3. Piston Retaining Nuts
4. Piston Seals
9
NOTE: The belleville washers must always be fitted
in pairs as shown.
10
The brakes are operated by supply oil from the
master cylinder which enters at fitting (1) on each
side of the axle.
11
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Brake Bleeding Procedure
10. Ensure the reservoir is full (1).
12
11. Open the left hand brake bleed valve (2).
13
12. Pump both brakes to purge the system (3), en-
suring the reservoir is kept topped up. 3
13. When the bubbles cease coming from the bleed

screw hold both pedals down and lock the screw.
14
14. Release the pedals and repeat procedure items
1 to 4 for the right hand brake bleed valve.
15. Test the brakes and repeat if necessary.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

TRANSMISSION HAND BRAKE

The transmission hand brake is fitted to all models
When operated the eccentric cam forces the friction
pads against the disc, effecting a braking action on
the output shaft from the transmission, locking the
drive shaft to the rear and front axles.
15
16
Component Layout
3. Fixing Bolts 10. Spacer
7. Inner Friction Pad 14. Adjusting Nuts
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

HAND BRAKE ADJUSTMENT
The transmission hand brake is located on the trans-

mission output shaft on 4x4 transmission and on the
rear axle on the 4x2 transmission.
The 4x2 transmission hand brake is located on the

rear axle, brake disc splined to pinion shaft (1), hy-
draulic oil filter (2), hand brake cable (3), hand brake
caliper (4).
17
When refitting the caliper unit (2), insert the two bolts
(1) through the caliper, it will be necessary to apply
Loctite 270 to the locknuts (3). Tighten the bolts while
holding the locknuts. Once the bolts are tightened
down back them off by 3 bolt heads flats, and then
torque the locknuts to 150 Nm. Ensure that the tubes
can move.
18
Adjust the clearance between the brake pads and
disc to 0.5mm using the nut and lock nut (1).
19
Adjust the cable clevis and lock the nut to get 5 to 7
clicks on the hand brake lever.
20
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

SECTION 35 – HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (REXROTH) – CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 35 – HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Chapter 1 – Hydraulic Circuit and Components
CONTENT

35 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Hydraulic Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Load Sensing Flow Sharing Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
35 701 Loader and Backhoe Control Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 35 – HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (REXROTH) – CHAPTER 1
SPECIFICATIONS
HYDRAULIC OIL
Specification Ambra Multi G API GL4, ISO 32/46
Capacity Total System 137 Litres (36.3 US. gals)
Reservoir Capacity 75 Litres (19.8 US. gals)
Change Interval 1200 Hours
Oil Filter Change 600 Hours
PUMP
Tandem Gear Pump Operating Steering and Hydraulic Circuits
Rear Pump (Steering Pump)
Output
N/ASP New Pump 75.5 L/min (20 US. gals/min)
@ 2200 rev/min @175 bar (2500 psi)
Worn Pump (minimum) 63 L/min (16.6 US. gals/min)
@ 2200 rev/min @175 bar (2500 psi)
Turbo New Pump 79.5 L/min (21 US. gals/min)
@ 2070 rev/min @175 bar (2500 psi)
@ 2070 rev/min @175 bar (2500 psi)
Steering Circuit Relief Valve Not 4WS 136.5 – 150 bar (1980 – 2175 psi)
Steering Circuit Relief Valve 4WS 177 – 190 bar (2566 – 2755 psi)
Steering Circuit Standby Pressure 7 bar (101.5 psi)
Rear Pump Relief Valve Pressure
(Located in Stabiliser Valve Section) 196 – 202 bar (2842 – 2929 psi)
Front Pump
Output
N/ASP New Pump 75.5 L/min (20 US. gals/min)
@ 2200 rev/min @175 bar (2500 psi)
@ 2200 rev/min @175 bar (2500 psi)
Turbo New Pump 79.5 L/min (21 US. gals/min)
@ 2070 rev/min @175 bar (2500 psi)
@ 2070 rev/min @175 bar (2500 psi)
Combined Output (minimum)
N/ASP 151 L/min (40 US. gals/min) @ 2200 rev/min
Turbo 159 L/min (42 US. gals/min) @ 2070 rev/min
Loader Control Valve

Type Load Sensing Flow Sharing Sectional Valve
Incorporating Rear Pump Relief Valve in Inlet End Cover
Backhoe Control Valve

Type Load Sensing Flow Sharing Sectional Valve
Incorporating Load Sense Circuit Pressure relief valve
in inlet end cover
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

CIRCUIT RELIEF VALVES AND PRESSURE

SETTINGS
1
Backhoe Control Valve Assembly
1. End Plate with Sideshift Clamp Cylinder Solenoid
2. Stabiliser Valve Section
3. Stabiliser Valve Section
4. Dipperstick Valve Section
5. Bucket Valve Section
6. Swing Cylinder Valve Section
7. Boom Control Valve Section
8. Extendible Dipperstick Control Valve Section
9. Inlet Housing
10. Swing Cylinder Cushioning Circuit Relief Valve (Left Swing) 205 bar
11. Lift Cylinder (Piston end) Circuit Relief Valve 204 bar
12. Extendible Dipperstick Cylinder (Piston end) Circuit Relief Valve 240 bar
13. Load Sense Limiter (System Pressure Relief Valve) 210 bar
14. Load Sense Return to Reservoir Control Orifice
15. Pump Flow Balancer Valve
16. Lift Cylinder (Rod End) Circuit Relief Valve 315 bar
17. Swing Cylinder Cushioning Circuit Relief Valve (Right Swing) 205 bar
18. Bucket Cylinder (Rod End) Circuit Relief Valve 220 bar
19. Dipper Cylinder (Piston End) Circuit Relief Valve 240 bar
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

Loader Control Valve Assembly

1. End Cover
2. Loader Valve Section
3. Bucket (Crowd) Valve Section
4. Auxiliary Valve Section (Where Fitted)
5. End Plate
6. Loader Bucket Relief Valve (Rod End)
230 bar (3336 psi)
7. Loader Bucket Relief Valve (Piston End)
160 bar (2320 psi)
2
TIGHTENING TORQUES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

‘O’ Ring Face Seal (ORFS) Tightening Torques

Ensure that the correct ‘O’ ring seal (2) is properly
placed in the face seal ‘O’ ring groove on the con-
nector (1). Place the tube assembly against the fit- mm
ting body so that the flat face of the sleeve comes in
full contact with the ‘O’ ring. Thread the nut by hand
and tighten to the specified torque.
Do Not Overtighten ‘0’ Ring Face Seal Connectors’
4
Steel Tube Outside Diameter
(mm) Nm lbf ft
10 36 27
12 54 40
14–16 85 63
18–20 122 90
22–25 162 120
SPECIAL TOOLS
Quick Release Coupler New Holland Part No 291924
Universal Pressure Test Kit New Holland Part No 292870
or
Pressure Test Kit PT 100–45 Procure from Webster Instruments
or
0–300 bar Pressure Gauge Procure Locally
Flowmeter 0–200 Litres/min Procure Locally
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

INTRODUCTION
5
Oil Pump and Loader Control Valve Installation
1. Hydraulic Pump 6. Supply to Backhoe Control Valve
2. To Steering Test Port 7. Load Sense Line to Backhoe Control Valve
3. Loader Control Valve 8. Front Pump Supply to Hydraulic Circuit
4. Rear Pump Supply to Hydraulic Circuit 9. Steering Load Sense Line
5. Return to Reservoir 10. To Steering Motor
The location of the principal components shown in hydrostatic steering system with remaining flow sup-
the hydraulic circuits in Figure 8 and Figure 13 are as plementing the output from the front pump to the
follows. loader and backhoe hydraulic circuits.
A more detailed description and operation of each
component follows the circuit diagrams. Loader Control Valve
The loader control valve is mounted on the right hand
Hydraulic Pump Assembly side of the machine adjacent to the pump.
Mounted on the rear of the transmission the pump The valve assembly consists of a maximum of three
comprises of two pumping elements. spool operated sections and provides oil flow to the
A front pump suppling oil for operation of front loader loader boom, bucket and auxiliary services where
and backhoe. fitted.
A rear pump which incorporates a load sensing flow
divider valve to direct priority flow to the load sensed
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Backhoe Control Valve

The backhoe control valve is located at the rear of
the chassis.
The valve consists of a maximum of seven spool op-
erated valve sections and provides oil flow for oper-
ation of the boom, dipper, bucket, swing, stabiliser
and sideshift clamp elements of the backhoe assem-
bly.
7
Located within the inlet cover (3) of the backhoe con- cess flow back to reservoir. The valve also maintains
trol valve are the load sense limiter (system pressure a back pressure of 17 bar in the circuit when all valve
relief valve) (2) and load sense return to reservoir ori- sections are in neutral and engine speed is 1000 rev/
fice (1) which allows load sense pressure to vent to min.
reservoir when hydraulic circuits are in neutral or Back pressure will increase to 23 bar at an engine
load sense pressure exceeds the 210 bar maximum speed of 2200 rev/min
value due to a malfunction in the system.
The pump flow balancer valve, items (4–8) controls
the flow of oil from the hydraulic pump and diverts ex-
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT leries of the loader and backhoe control valves as-
The hydraulic circuit is a load sensing flow sharing semblies.
system working in conjunction with a fixed displace- Flow from the rear section of the pump passes
ment gear type hydraulic pump. This system has the through the load sensing flow divider valve mounted
advantage that at any time the distribution of flow to on the pump and gives priority flow to the steering cir-
the services being operated is in proportion to the cuit with remaining flow directed to supplement the
openings of the control valve spools. flow from the front pump for the loader and backhoe
The flow distribution to the backhoe and loader con- circuits.
trol valves is load independent and it is therefore The centre gallery of both the loader and backhoe
possible to satisfactorily operate two or more spools control valves are blocked by the end plate. Pressure
at the same time. in the supply circuit is controlled by the pump flow ba-
The principal components of the load sensing flow lancer valve in accordance with the pressure in the
sharing system are the pressure compensator load sense line. Consequently the higher the load
valves in each control valve section, refer to Fig- sense pressure the less flow is returned to reservoir
ure 15, together with the load sense line which con- with corresponding increase in flow/pressure to the
nects all the spool sections in both the loader and hydraulic circuits.
backhoe control valve assemblies. Maximum system pressure is limited by the load
Because the hydraulic pump is a fixed displacement sense pressure relief valve which relieves pressure
gear type pump it should be noted that the load sense in the load sense line when it reaches 210 bar. Be-
line only connects the loader and backhoe control cause the pump flow balancer valve is influenced by
valve assemblies and does not have any connection load sense pressure the valve diverts sufficient flow
to the hydraulic pump. back to reservoir to maintain the maximum system
pressure of 210 bar.
The hydraulic pump draws oil from the reservoir and
flow from the front pump is directed to the centre gal-
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

8
Hydraulic Circuit Schematic
Hydraulic Circuit Oil Suction Oil
Steering Circuit Oil Return to Reservoir
Load Sense Oil
1. Hydraulic Reservoir 8. Backhoe Hammer

2. Hydraulic Pump 9. Backhoe Control Valve
3. Steering Motor 10. Return Line Distributor Block
4. Hand Hammer Control Valve 11. Filter
5. Hand Hammer 12. Oil Cooler By–Pass Valve
6. Loader Control Valve 13. Oil Cooler
7. Backhoe Hammer Control Valve
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

MAIN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (LESS OPTIONS)

2 AND 4 WHEEL DRIVE – OUTSIDE NORTH AMERICA
1. Front Axle
2. Boom
3. Crowd
4. Boom
5. Swing
6. Bucket
7. Dipper
8. LH Stabiliser
9. RH Stabiliser
10. Clamps
11. Pump Output–
38+38 for Machine with Turbo Engine
34+34 for Machine with Normally Aspirated Engine
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

2 3
P2 M
P
T LS P
L R 15 bar
200 bar 200 bar LS
(2900 PSI) (2900 PSI) T2 P2
210 bar M
T1
T 315 bar
T3
230 160
bar bar 4
T2 T1 240 bar
205 bar
P LS T 5
205 bar
220 bar
240 bar
EF P LS
8
7 BAR
(101.5 PSI)
140+/–3.5 BAR
(1050+/–50.75 PSI)
C
10
11
T3
5 bar
(72.5 PSI)
3.5 bar
(51 PSI)
9
Main Hydraulic System – 2 and 4 Wheel Drive (LESS options) – Outside North America
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

MAIN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (WITH OPTIONS)

2 AND 4 WHEEL DRIVE – OUTSIDE NORTH AMERICA
1. Front Axle
2. Boom
3. Crowd
4. Bucket 4x1–6x1
5. Glide Ride
6. Telescopic
7. Boom
8. Swing
9. Bucket
10. Dipper
11. LH Stabiliser
12. RH Stabiliser
13. Clamps
14. Backhoe Hammer
15. Hand Hammer
16. Pump Output–
38+38 for Machine with Turbo Engine
34+34 for Machine with Normally Aspirated Engine
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

PT
2 3 4 5
Y
X2
B
1
MX MA A T
P2 M
P
L OSPC125LS R LS
200 bar 200 bar
(2900 PSI) (2900 PSI)
T LS P
15 bar
T T2 P2
T3
230 160
bar bar 240 bar M
T1
210 bar
T2 T1
A
P LS T 165 bar
315 bar
B A
7
B P 10 bar
240 bar
(145 PSI)
B P 205 bar
B A
8
E T
205 bar
E T
220 bar
B
9
15
240 bar
14 10
B
EF P LS
7 bar
16 (101.5 PSI)
140+/– 3.5 bar
(1050+/–50.75 PSI)
11
AIR OUT 0.35 + 0.06
AIR IN 0.03 + 0.008
12
5 bar
(72.5 PSI) 13
C
3.5 bar
(51 PSI) T3
10
Main Hydraulic System – 2 and 4 Wheel Drive (with options) – Outside North America
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

MAIN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

4 WHEEL STEER (LESS OPTIONS) – OUTSIDE NORTH AMERICA
1. Rear Axle
2. Boom
3. Crowd
4. Boom
5. Swing
6. Bucket
7. Dipper
8. Stabiliser
9. Stabiliser
10. Clamps
11. Pump–38.5cc+38.5cc
12. Front Axle
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

1 2 3
A B
12
P T
P2 M
P
T LS P
L R 15 bar
240 bar 240 bar
LS
(3480 PSI) (3480 PSI) T2 P2
210 bar M
T1
T 315 bar
T3
230 160
bar bar 4
T2 T1 240 bar
205 bar
P LS T 5
205 bar
220 bar
240 bar
EF P LS
7 bar 9
(101.5 PSI)
180+/–3.5 bar
11 (2610+/–50.75 PSI)
10
T3
5 bar
(72.5 PSI)
3.5 bar
(51 PSI)
13
Main Hydraulic System – 4 Wheel Steer (LESS Options) – Outside North America
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

MAIN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

4 WHEEL STEER (WITH OPTIONS) – OUTSIDE NORTH AMERICA
1. Rear Axle
2. Boom
3. Crowd
4. Bucket 4x1 – 6x1
5. Glide Ride
6. Telescopic
7. Boom
8. Swing
9. Bucket
10. Dipper
11. Stabiliser
12. Stabiliser
13. Clamps
14. Backhoe Hammer
15. Hand Hammer
16. Pump–38.5cc+38.5cc
17. Front Axle
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

1
A 2 3 4
B 5
Y
X2
B
P T MX MA A T
P2 M
P
17
A OSPC160LS R LS
240 bar 240 bar
(3480 PSI) (3480 PSI)
T LS P
15 bar
T T2 P2
T3
230 160 240
bar bar 210 bar M
bar T1
T2 T1
6
P LS T 165 bar
315 bar
7
10 bar
B P (145 PSI) 240 bar
B P
205 bar
E T 8
205 bar
E T
220 bar
9
15
204 bar
14 10
EF P LS
7 bar
16 (101.5 PSI)
180+/–3.5 bar
(2610+/–50.75 PSI)
11
12
5 bar
(72.5 PSI)
3.5 bar
(51 PSI)
13
T3
14
Main Hydraulic System – 4 Wheel Steer (With Options) – Outside North America
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

LOAD SENSING FLOW SHARING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
15
Hydraulic Control Valve Section
1. Spool Cap 8. Plate
2. Centralising Spring 9. ‘O’ Ring Seal
3. Spool 10. Plug
4. Plug 11. Pressure Compensator Spool
5. Spring 12. Pressure Compensator Metering Element
6. Check Valve 13. Valve Section
7. Wiper 14. Relief Valve
Reference should be made to the above illustration ponents shown in the colour diagrams on Pages 25
to understand the location and function of the com- to 29.
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

All Loader/Backhoe Circuits in Neutral Because there is no load sense pressure being
Each control valve section within the backhoe or applied to the rear face of the flow balancer valve the
loader control valve assemblies contains a spool, valve will move against the spring and off its seat
two check valves and a load sensing pressure when pump pressure reaches 15 bar. Pump flow is
compensator. now diverted back to reservoir and the balancer
valve maintains a standby pressure of 15 bar while
A load sense gallery connects the compensators in
the circuits are in neutral.
each control valve section.
When all control valves are in neutral the spools
prevent the flow of oil in each circuit and pressure in
the load sense line can bleed to reservoir through the
1 litre/min load sense return to reservoir orifice in the
backhoe control valve inlet cover.
16
Flow Balancer Valve Operation – All Spools In Neutral
Return to Reservoir Pump Standby Pressure 15 bar

4. Load Sense Line
1. Load Sense Bleed Orifice 1 ltr/min 5. Pump Flow Balancer (Unload) Valve
2. Load Sense Limiter (System Relief Valve) 6. Pump Flow IN
3. Return to Reservoir 7. To Backhoe Control Valves
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

17
Load Sensing Flow Sharing – All Spools in Neutral
Pump Pressure Return to Reservoir
Trapped Oil
1. Load Check Valve 3. Pressure Compensating Valve

2. Load Sense Line 4. Spool
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

One Hydraulic Circuit Operating

When a single hydraulic circuit is operated the spool required to operate the flow balancer valve and pump
in the control valve section is moved allowing oil to pressure increase accordingly.
flow past the lands of the spool and apply pressure When pump pressure overcomes the pressure
to the metering element of the pressure behind the load check valve, the valve opens
compensating valve. allowing oil to flow into the cylinder port.
The metering element moves upwards to allow oil to Exhaust oil from the cylinder returns to reservoir
flow to the load check valve and at the same time through the other port in the control valve section.
uncovers the drilling in the spool portion of the
If the load sense pressure in a circuit reaches 195 bar
pressure compensator valve enabling operating
the load sense relief valve in the backhoe control
pressure to be sensed in the load sense gallery.
valve end cover will operate. Pump pressure is now
As pressure increases to open the load check valve, limited to 210 bar. This being the pressure required
load sense pressure is applied to the spring side of to overcome the pressure of the flow balancing valve
the flow balancer valve in the backhoe control valve spring (15 bar) plus the load sense pressure
end cover, Figure 18. A higher pressure is now controlled at 195 bar.
18
Flow Balancer Valve Operation – Hydraulic Circuits Operating
Return to Reservoir Load Sense Pressure
Pump Pressure
4. Load Sense Line
1. Load Sense Bleed Orifice – 1 ltr/min 5. Pump Flow Balancer (Unload) Valve
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

19
Load Sensing Flow Sharing – One Spool Operating
Pump Pressure Return to Reservoir
Trapped Oil

LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

Two or More Hydraulic Circuits Operating operating pressure to be sensed in the load sense
When two or more hydraulic circuits are operated gallery.
each circuit will operate at a different pressure. Pump pressure will rise until it overcomes the
If pump flow to a specific circuit is not controlled the pressure behind the load check valve of the heaviest
circuit requiring a lower operating pressure will work loaded circuit and the pressure in the load sense line
faster than that requiring the higher pressure is similarly at this high pressure.
because flow will take the path of least resistance. The pressure required to operate the lower loaded
To overcome this situation the pressure circuit is now too high and if not restricted will result
compensating valve regulates the flow of oil to the in the lower loaded circuit operating in preference to
circuit operating at a lower load. and faster than the higher loaded circuit.
When two spools are operated simultaneously pump To compensate for this condition the load sense
pressure is applied to the metering element of the pressure moves the metering element of the
pressure compensating valve in both valve sections. pressure compensating valve in the lower loaded
Both metering elements therefore move upwards circuit downwards and restricts the flow to the circuit.
allowing oil to flow to the load check valves. At the This balancing of flow and pressure according to load
same time the drilling in the spool portion of the ensures that both circuits operate simultaneously
pressure compensating valve is uncovered to allow and at a balanced flow rate.
20
Load Sense Relief Valve Operating
Return to Reservoir Load Sense Pressure @ 195 bar
Pump Pressure @210 bar

4. Load Sense Line
1. Load Sense Bleed Orifice 1 ltr/min 5. Pump Flow Balancer (Unload) Valve
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

21
Load Sensing Flow Sharing – Two Spools Operating
1st Spool Operating Pressure Trapped Oil
2nd Spool Operating Pressure Return to Reservoir

LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

NOTES PAGE
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

LOADER AND BACKHOE CONTROL

VALVE OVERHAUL
The overhaul procedure for both the loader and
backhoe control valve assemblies are similar.
Loader Control Valve Removal
(Op No 35 701)
1. Lower loader to ground and position the dipstick
in the vertical plane with bucket positioned firmly
on the ground.
22
2. Stop the engine and relieve any residual pres-
sure in the backhoe and loader circuits by moving
the loader and backhoe control levers through all
operating positions.
23
3. Disconnect the battery
24
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

25
Hydraulic Pump and Loader Control Valve Installation
1. Hydraulic Pump 6. Supply to Backhoe Control Valve
2. To Steering Test Port 7. Load Sense Line to Backhoe Control Valve
3. Loader Control Valve 8. Front Pump Supply to Hydraulic Circuit
4. Rear Pump Supply to Hydraulic Circuit 9. Steering Load Sense Line
5. Return to Reservoir 10. To Steering Motor
4. Identify and disconnect hydraulic connections

and linkage to control valve.
5. Remove valve assembly from machine.
6. For disassembly of control valve refer to
Page 34.
26
7. Installation is removal procedure in reverse.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Backhoe Control Valve Removal
(Op No 35 702)
1. Position the unit on hard level surface.
2. Lower loader to the ground
3. Lower stabilisers
4. Offset swing frame on sideshift models to the left
or right.
5. Position dipstick in the vertical plane with bucket
positioned firmly on the ground.
27
6. Stop the engine and relieve any residual pres-
sure in the backhoe and loader circuits by moving
the loader and backhoe control levers through all
operating positions.
28
7. Disconnect the battery
29
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

8. Clean area around control valve.

9. Tag and identify position of all hydraulic hoses.
10. Disconnect and cap hoses.
11. Disconnect control lever linkage.
12. On sideshift models disconnect connector to
sideshift clamp solenoid.
30
13. Support the weight of the valve using a suitable
lift.
31
14. Remove valve retaining bolts which are located
on the rear of the control valve mounting plate
and carefully withdraw and lower valve from ma-
chine.
15. Installation is removal procedure in reverse.
32
Control Valve Disassembly
Disassembly of the loader and backhoe control valve
assemblies are similar.
For reference the individual valve sections and relief
valves are identified as follows.
Loader Control Valve
1. End Plate
2. Loader Arm Control Valve
3. Bucket Cylinder Control Valve
4. Auxiliary Circuit Control Valve
5. End Block
6. Loader Bucket Relief Valve (Rod End)
7. Loader Bucket Relief Valve (Piston End)
33
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

1. Prior to disassembly the valves should be thor-

oughly cleaned using an approved degreaser.
2. Scribe a diagonal line across the valve sections
to aid re–assembly.
3. Remove tie rod nuts and separate components.
34
35
Hydraulic Control Valve Section – Typical
1. Spool Cap 8. Plate
2. Centralising Spring 9. ‘O’ Ring Seal
3. Spool 10. Plug
4. Plug 11. Pressure Compensator Spool
5. Spring 12. Pressure Compensator Collar
6. Check Valve 13. Valve Section
7. Wiper 14. Relief Valve
LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

36
Backhoe Control Valve Inlet Housing
1. Exhaust Regulator Valve 5. ‘O’ Ring
2. Load Sense Circuit Relief Valve 200 bar 6. Spring
3. Inlet Housing 7. Spring
4. Plug 8. Flow Balancer Valve
NOTE: The items shown in Figure 36 are not

installed in the inlet housing of the loader control
valve assembly
Inspection
1. Wash all components in an approved degreaser.
2. Inspect spools and bores for scoring and dam-
age. If spool is badly scored or worn the valve
must be replaced.
Re–assembly
1. Re–assembly follows the removal procedure in
reverse.
37
2. Progressively tighten spool tie rods to a torque of
25 Nm.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 85–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 35 – PRESSURE TESTING (REXROTH) – CHAPTER 2 1
Chapter 2 – Fault Finding, Pressure and Flow Testing
CONTENT

35 000 Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Fault Finding Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Pressure Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Steering Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Steering Circuit Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
System Pressure Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Loader Bucket Relief Valve (Piston End) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Extendible Dipper Relief Valve (Piston End) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Swing System Relief Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Dipperstick Bucket and Boom Relief Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Flow Testing (Pump Performance Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 35 – PRESSURE TESTING (REXROTH) – CHAPTER 2
FAULT FINDING AND PRESSURE TESTING
Preliminary Checks
If fault finding, pressure and flow testing is carried out EXAMPLE:
in a systematic manner and the results analyzed, the Backhoe lift circuit slow to raise, all other circuits ap-
malfunction can be readily and accurately identified. pear to work normally.
If short cuts, assumptions and guesses are made,
Listed in the column under “Malfunction” in the “Fault
unnecessary strip-down or component replacement
Finding Chart”, the description would be “lift fails to
could result. Follow the step-by-step procedures out-
operate, is slow or has loss of power”.
lined below.
• The column headed “Malfunction” lists the ob-
As a first step in the fault finding procedure, several
served malfunctions when the backhoe or loader
preliminary checks should be made. These checks
is operated.
are important in that once performed, they need no
longer be considered as a possible cause of the im- • The column headed “Possible Cause” lists all the
mediate or reported malfunction. items in the circuit which could cause the ob-
served malfunction.
• Check that the hydraulic oil is at the correct level
and of the correct specification. • The column headed “Test/Repair” lists the test
which should be used to determine the item
• Check the loader, backhoe or any additional ac-
causing the observed malfunction.
cessory such as hydraulic bucket, hammers etc.,
for correct assembly or installation and addition- Refer to “Test/Repair” column and perform the rec-
ally for signs of external damage that might ommended tests. Systematic and logical testing will
cause gross misalignment of structural reduce the time required in locating the cause of the
members. malfunction and provide a more accurate indication
of the malfunction. If adequate test equipment is not
• Check in more detail for other mechanical dam-
available, disassembly and inspection of the items
age such as kinked, twisted, worn or decayed
listed under “Possible Causes” must be undertaken.
hoses, damaged cylinders and bent elements.
Do not forget to check underneath the unit for Before pressure testing the machine ensure the hy-
damaged steel tubes, particularly if the unit has draulic oil is at normal operating temperature of
been known to have operated in arduous condi- 75°C.
tions, been grounded, or bogged down. Pressure testing is performed using the two pressure
• Ensure optimum operating temperature of the test ports on the left hand side of the machine.
hydraulic oil is achieved. The upper port tests the hydraulic system and the
The preceding preliminary checks assume that the lower port the steering system.
engine performance is not in question. Having per- Install 0–200 bar (0–3000 psi) pressure gauge in
formed these checks and failed to locate the cause this port using quick release coupler, Part No
of the malfunction, the following procedures should 291924, when pressure testing the steering system.
be adopted:
• If possible, operate the backhoe and make notes
of the operating characteristics. Cycle each con-
trol lever to operate each of the cylinders to the
fully extended and retracted positions.
• Compare the operating characteristics in the pre-
ceding stage with the malfunctions listed in the
“Fault Finding Chart”.
38
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

FAULT FINDING - GENERAL

All circuits fail to operate. Pump drive inoperative. Investigate and repair as
necessary.
Low oil level. Check and add oil.
Restricted pump suction line. Inspect suction line and
reservoir, repair as necessary.
Slow operation or loss of power Pump worn. Perform pump performance
in all circuits. test and replace/reseal as
necessary.
Restricted pump suction line. Inspect suction line and
reservoir, repair as necessary.
Load Sense Pressure Relief Pressure test system
Valve incorrectly adjusted
FAULT FINDING - LOADER

Lift fails to operate, is slow or Valve spool leakage. Examine lift section of loader
has loss of power. control valve assembly for wear
or scoring.
Piston seals leaking or cylinder Examine/reseal piston and
barrel damaged. gland.
Bucket fails to operate, is slow Circuit relief valves stuck open, Bucket circuit relief valve test.
or has loss of power. set too low or seat leaking.
Valve spool leakage. Examine bucket section of
loader control valve assembly
for wear or scoring.
Piston seals leaking or cylinder Examine/reseal piston and
Cylinder leak down (spools in Piston barrel damaged. Examine/reseal piston and
neutral). gland.
Internal valve leakage.
Examine appropriate valve
section of loader control valve
assembly for wear or scoring.
Hesitation in loader lift or Load check valve between Disassemble and inspect.
bucket cylinders when control control valve sections
initially moved. damaged.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

FAULT FINDING - BACKHOE

Refer to the following backhoe fault finding chart after first considering the preceding charts. The backhoe chart
should only be referred to if the supply circuit is performing normally, thereby confirming that the pump and hy-
draulic supply circuits are functioning to specification. See also “Fault Finding Hydraulic Pump”.

Lift fails to operate, is slow, has Lift circuit relief valve stuck Pressure test lift circuit relief
loss of power or is not holding. open, set too low or seat is valve.
leaking.
Valve spool leakage. Examine lift section of backhoe
control valve assembly for wear
and scoring.
Piston seal leaking or cylinder Examine/reseal piston and
Crowd fails to operate, is slow, Crowd circuit relief valve Pressure test crowd circuit
has loss of power. (piston end) stuck open, set too relief valve.
low or seat is leaking.
Valve spool leakage. Examine crowd section of
backhoe control valve
assembly for wear and scoring.
Bucket fails to operate, is slow, Bucket circuit relief valve (rod Pressure test bucket circuit
has loss of power. end) stuck open, set too low, or relief valve.
seat is leaking.
Valve spool leakage. Examine bucket section of
Extendible dipstick fails to Extendible dipperstick circuit Pressure test bucket circuit
operate, is slow, has loss of relief valve (piston end) stuck relief valve.
power or is not holding. open, set too low, or seat is
leaking.
Valve spool leakage. Examine extendible dipperstick
section of control valve
Stabiliser leg leaks down Stabiliser lock valve leaking Examine/overhaul stabiliser
lock valve.
barrel damaged gland.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

FAULT FINDING - BACKHOE (CONT.)

Right or left direction swing fails Swing circuit relief valves not Swing circuit relief valve test.
to operate, is slow, or has loss seating, set too low or seat is
of power. leaking.
Valve spool leakage. Examine swing section of
Swing fails to slow (cushion Integral sliding restrictor Disassemble and inspect.
arrest) at end of travel. damaged.
barrel damage. gland.
Swing continues to move when Circuit relief valve (return side) Swing circuit relief valve test.
control lever returned to neutral stuck open, set too low or seat
(one direction only). leaking.
Valve spool leakage. Examine swing section of
Cylinders leak down (spools in Internal valve leakage. Examine appropriate valve
neutral). section of backhoe control
valve assembly for wear or
scoring.
Any one circuit drops Load check valves in control Disassemble and inspect.
momentarily when signalled to valve sections damaged.
raise.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

FAULT FINDING - HYDRAULIC PUMP

System noisy. Worn or damaged pump gears Hydraulic pump performance
or pressure plates. test.
Aeration: Air entering the Hydraulic pump performance
systems at: suction tube, pump test.
shaft, fittings, or cylinder
glands.
Cavitation: Restrictions in the Visual and/or hydraulic pump
system at the suction line or at performance test.
the suction screen in the
reservoir.
Water in the system. Visual.
Tubing vibration. Visual.
Cold hydraulic oil. Check hydraulic oil operating
temperature.
Wrong type oil being used. Investigate/drain and refill.
Hydraulic oil exhausts from Reservoir overfilled. Check hydraulic oil level.
breather at the reservoir.
Aeration: Air entering the Hydraulic pump performance
system at: suction tube, pump test.
shaft, fittings, or cylinder
glands.
Cavitation: Restriction in the Visual and/or hydraulic pump
system at the suction screen in performance test.
the reservoir.
Oil heating. Oil supply low. Fill reservoir.
Contaminated oil. Drain reservoir and refill with
clean oil.
Setting of relief valve too high Drain reservoir and refill with
or too low. clean oil. Test relief valves.
Oil in system too light. Drain reservoir and refill with
correct viscosity oil.
Oil cooler fins blocked. Clean oil cooler.
Shaft seal oil leakage. Worn shaft seal. Replace shaft seal and inspect
pump.
Foaming oil. Low oil level. Fill reservoir.
Air drawn into suction line. Check/tighten suction line.
Wrong oil grade. Drain and refill with correct oil.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

PRESSURE TESTING
Steering Standby
3. install 0–40 bar (0–600 psi) pressure gauge into
the lower test port on left hand side of machine.
4. Set engine speed to 1000 rev/min
39
5. Ensure no turning force is being applied to the
steering wheel and observe pressure on gauge.
The pressure gauge should read approximately
17 bar (250 psi) and is the steering standby pres-
sure.
6. If pressure incorrect remove and examine flow
divider spool on end of pump
40
Steering Circuit Relief Valve
1. install 0–200 bar (0–3000 psi) pressure gauge
into the lower test port on left hand side of ma-
chine.
2. Set engine speed to 2000 rev/min and fully turn
and hold steering on either full left or right hand
turn and observe pressure gauge. The gauge re-
ading should rise to 175–183 bar
(2560–2660 psi) and is the steering circuit relief
valve setting.
41
3. If reading is not to specification stop engine, re-
move blanking plug on pump flow divider and
using screwdriver turn relief valve adjusting
screw to increase or decrease setting.
4. Retest steering and when pressure correct peen
end of adjuster to prevent movement and re–in-
stall blanking plug.
42
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

System Pressure Relief Valve

1. Install 0–300 bar pressure gauge into upper test
port.
2. Set engine speed to 2200 rev/min.
3. Raise loader until bucket is approximately
0.5 metres from the ground. This ensures that
self levelling device does restrict movement of
bucket during this test.
43
4. Hold the loader bucket control lever to the left
causing the bucket to roll back.
44
5. Observe the reading on the upper gauge which
will display the system pressure relief valve set-
ting.
Pressure reading should be 210 bar
(3040 psi)
6. If relief valve is away from specification adjust to
Specification.
45
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Loader Bucket Relief Valve (Piston End)

2. Hold the loader bucket control lever to the right
causing the bucket to dump.
46
3. Observe the upper gauge which should read
160 bar (2300 psi) minimum and is the operating
pressure of the loader bucket, piston end, relief
valve. Values up to 190 bar are acceptable
4. Adjust valve if not to specification.
5. To test rod end circuit relief valve hold lever to the
left and curl in the bucket. If pressure reading is
210 bar the system relief valve is operating and
it is an indication that relief valve which is set at
230 bar is set correctly.
47
Extendible Dipper Relief Valve (Piston End)
2. Fully extend the extendible dipper and continue
to depress the control pedal.
48
3. Observe the reading on the gauge in the lower
test port (3).
4. Pressure recorded is the extendible dipper relief
valve setting and should read 165 bar (2375 psi)
minimum. Values up to 200 bar are acceptable
49
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

Swing System Relief Valves

2. Hold dipperstick fully left until relief valve oper-
ates and blow relief valve.
3. Observe the upper gauge which should read
205 bar (3000 psi) minimum.
4. Repeat procedure with dipperstick held to the
right.
50
6. Observe the reading on the gauge in the lower
test port (3).
7. Pressure recorded is the extendible dipper relief
valve setting and should read 165 bar (2375 psi)
minimum. Values up to 200 bar are acceptable
51
Dipperstick Bucket and Boom Relief Valves
Valves
These relief valve are set to a higher pressure than
the main system relief valve setting of 210 bar.
To test these circuit relief valves operate each ser-
vice until the corresponding relief valve operates.
If pressure reading in each incidence is 210 bar the
system relief valve is operating and it is an indication
that relief valves are set correctly.
Dipperstick bucket circuit relief valve (rod end) seci-
fication is 220 bar.
Dipperstick boom circuit relief valve setting (piston
end) is 240 bar.
To accurately test the dipperstick bucket (rod end)
and boom (piston end) relief valves the main system
pressure can be temporarly increased to 240 bar.
Do Not increase pressure setting to higher than 240
bar and reset system relief valve to 210 bar on
completion of test.
NOTE: Dipperstick boom circuit relief valve setting
(rod end) is 315 bar and can not be checked using
this system. Replace this valve if considred faulty.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Flow Testing
Pump Performance Test

The following pump performance test must be per-
formed after pressure testing the system and rear
pump relief valves and when the hydraulic oil is at
normal operating temperature of 75° C.
1. Disconnect inlet and outlet hoses to backhoe
control valve and install 0–200L/min flowmeter
2. Open flowmeter valve.
3. Slowly turn flow control valve and increase pres-
sure to 175 bar (2550 psi) Measure pump flow
which should be 69–81 Litres/min.
Analysis
If flow recorded in step 3 is less than 69 Litres/min
the pump is worn and requires overhaul.
NOTE: If the machine has a history of poor service
intervals replace the hydraulic system filter and clean
pump intake filter in the reservoir.
52
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 35 – CYLINDERS – CHAPTER 3 1
Chapter 3 – Swing System and Hydraulic Cylinders
CONTENT

35 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Swing System Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Hydraulic Cylinders
Backhoe and Loader Cylinders – Removal and Installation
35 702 Backhoe Lift, Crowd and Bucket Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
35 702 Extendible Dipstick Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
35 701 Loader Lift Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
35 701 Loader Bucket Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
35 703 Stabiliser Cylinder – Sideshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
35 703 Stabiliser Cylinder – Centre Pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
35 703 Sideshift Clamp Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
35 701 Backhoe and Loader Cylinder Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
35 702 Swing Cylinders Removal and Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
SPECIFICATIONS
Grease Ambra GR9 – NH710 A
Thread Sealant Part No 82995773137
TORQUES
Cylinder Piston Bolt Torque Gland Torque
Nm lbf. ft Nm lbf. ft
Loader Lift Cylinder/ 705–855 520–630 670–830 500–600
Loader Bucket Cylinder 705–855 520–630 Wired Gland Wired Gland
Backhoe Lift Cylinder 1930–2075 1425–1530 670–830 500–600
Backhoe Crowd Cylinder 1930–2075 1425–1530 670–830 500–600
Backhoe Bucket Cylinder 1430–1570 1050–1150 670–830 500–600
Extendible Dipper Cylinder 705–855 520–630 Wired Gland Wired Gland
Sideshift Stabiliser Cylinder 705–855 520–630 Wired Gland Wired Gland
Centre Pivot Stabiliser Cylinder 1430–1570 1050–1150 670–830 500–600
Swing Cylinder 1430–1575 1050–1150 670–830 500–600
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 35 – CYLINDERS – CHAPTER 3
TORQUES Continued
1 2
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool No. Application
297190 (Peg wrench) Backhoe Lift Cylinder Gland
297190 (Peg wrench) Backhoe Crowd Cylinder Gland
297191 (Peg wrench) Backhoe Bucket Cylinder Gland
297191 (Peg wrench) Swing Cylinder Gland
297191 (Peg wrench) Loader Lift Cylinder Gland
297192 (Peg wrench) Centre Pivot Stabiliser Cylinder Gland
297188 (“C” wrench) Loader Bucket Cylinder Gland
297185 (“C” wrench) Sideshift Stabiliser Cylinder Gland
297185 (“C” wrench) Extendible Dipper Cylinder Gland
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

SWING SYSTEM
– DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The backhoe boom and digging elements can be
moved in an arc about the mainframe of 180 de-
grees.
3
This movement is obtained by the use of two inter-
connected hydraulic cylinders coupled between the
mainframe and swing post.
The cylinders act directly on the swing post, without

the use of any connecting links or bellcranks.
4
Each cylinder incorporates a headstock consisting of
two large trunnions (1) positioned near the gland
carrier (2).
As each cylinder extends or retracts and the swing

post rotates, the cylinders turn in a horizontal plate,
pivoting on the headstocks within the carriage.
Each cylinder is double acting and as hydraulic oil is

fed to a cylinder to turn the swing post, one cylinder
pushes and the other cylinder pulls to perform the
swing cycle.
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

Hydraulic Oil Flow through Swing System The spool in the swing control valve assembly (1) is
Hydraulic feed to the swing cylinders is controlled by designed such that during operation oil can flow
the swing section of the backhoe control valve which freely through the port directing oil flow to the swing
contains pilot operated relief valves with anti cavita- cylinders but restricts the flow returning oil back to
tion feature to protect the circuit and cylinders should reservoir.
an overload condition occur.
This restriction is achieved using metering lands ma-
Figure 156 illustrates operation of the swing circuit chined into the lands of the spool and creates a sec-
when retracting the right hand cylinder (4) and ex- ondary back pressure (2nd Stage Restricted Return
tending the left hand cylinder (5) in order to swing the Oil) in the rod end of the cylinder.
backhoe to the right.
By allowing oil to flow unrestricted to the power side
When swinging the backhoe to the left the oil flows of the cylinder and be restricted on the exhaust side
are reversed and exactly the same principal of oper- a smooth controlled swing of the backhoe at opti-
ation applies. mum speed is achieved.
Oil flow for a right hand swing is as follows:– When the swing system reaches the last 20–25° of
travel the sliding restrictor in the end of the piston rod
touches the outlet port in the cylinder barrel. This
When the swing control is operated the control valve
further restricts the flow of oil exhausted from the cyl-
directs oil flow to the rod end of the right hand cylin-
inder and as the piston moves towards the end of its
der. The flow of oil at pump pressure lifts the one way
stroke the sliding restrictor is gently pushed down the
restrictor (2) of its seat allowing the flow to continue
centre of the cylinder rod allowing a progressive and
unrestricted to the inlet port of the piston end of the
controlled halt to the swing cycle.
left hand cylinder.
If the swing control valve is suddenly returned to neu-

System pressure increases causing the right hand
tral mid–way through a full power swing the supply
cylinder to retract and the left hand cylinder to ex-
and exhaust ports in the main control valve are totally
tend.
blocked.
As the cylinders move, displaced oil on the piston

The momentum of the swinging backhoe assembly
side of the left hand cylinder flows towards the one
if not controlled will make the machine extremely un-
way restrictor (7) in the inlet port on the rod end of the
stable. To prevent this from occurring the circuit relief
right hand cylinder.
valves operate and dumps oil to exhaust until the ex-
cess pressure is relieved. When the relief valve oper-
The oil flow moves the restrictor to the restrict posi- ates the cylinder rod will move and a void will be
tion which limits the flow of oil and creates a back created in the low pressure side of the cylinder. The
pressure (1st stage restricted return oil) in the right anti–cavitation feature in the relief valves prevent the
hand cylinder. void from occurring by transferring exhaust oil from
the excess pressure side of the circuit to the low
The restricted flow of oil passes through restrictor (7) pressure side. For further details on the operation of
into the rod end of the left hand cylinder before re- the anti–cavitation circuit relief valves refer to Circuit
turning to the control valve and back to reservoir. Relief Valves Principle of Operation in Chapter 1.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

6
Swing Cylinder Operation – Right Hand Swing
Pump Pressure Oil 2nd Stage Restricted Return Oil
1st Stage Restricted Return Oil Return to Reservoir Oil
1. Control Valve Swing Section 5. Left Hand Cylinder

2. One Way Restrictor 6. Cushioning Rod
3. Cushioning Rod 7. One Way Restrictor
4. Right Hand Cylinder
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
– DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
7
Typical Double Acting Cylinder Assembly
(Backhoe Lift Cylinder Shown)
1. Decelerator* 5. Barrel
2. Piston 6. Piston Bolt
3. Rod 7. Washer *
4. Gland Assembly
*Only Fitted on specific cylinders refer to Figure 161

for further details.
All cylinders with the exception of the sideshift back-
hoe clamp cylinders are double acting, designed to
extend and retract under hydraulic pressure.
The decelerator installed in the backhoe lift cylinder,
restricts flow from the cylinder to act as a cushioning
device when the cylinder is fully retracted.
The piston component and type of gland differs ac-
cording to application and are further described on
the following pages.
The grease retention seals (2), are only fitted to the
backhoe cylinders and the combination of barrel and
rod bushings (1) differs according to cylinder applica-
tion. Refer to the spare parts catalogue for further de-
tails. 8
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Cylinder Glands
Rod sealing on all cylinders is achieved using a a
“snap-in” polyurethane “U” cup seal facing the inter-
nal pressure and positioned in a machined groove in
the cylinder gland.
A loose fitting polyurethane buffer seal is fitted in a
groove immediately in front of the “U” seal and pro-
tects the seal during operating pressures. A single
small groove moulded across the face of one side of
the buffer seal and positioned facing the pressure
side of the cylinder permits the escape of oil from be-
tween the buffer and “U” seal during cylinder retrac-
tion to prevent ballooning and leaking of the seals.
To prevent the entrance of foreign material to the cyl- 9
inders, a wiper seal is positioned in the outer edge of Threaded Type Gland Assembly
the gland. 1. Gland
The cylinder gland is attached to the cylinder barrel 2. Wiper Seal
using either a threaded or wired method of retention. 3. Rod Bearing Sleeve
The threaded gland is used on:– 4. ‘U’ Seal
5. Back-up Ring
Swing Cylinders
6. O’ Ring
Backhoe Lift Cylinder 7. Buffer Seal
Bucket Crowd Cylinder
Backhoe Bucket Cylinder
Loader Lift Cylinder
Centre Pivot Stabiliser Cylinder
The wire retained gland uses a locking wire which is

fed into a mating semicircular annuli machined into
the barrel and gland. Installation of this locking wire
is achieved by rotating the gland within the barrel
while feeding the wire into the groove at the same
time. A short piece of wire is left exposed on the cylin-
der barrel outer surface, to be pulled while the gland
is counter-rotated during removal of the gland.
The wire retained gland is used on:–
Loader Bucket Cylinder
Sideshift Stabiliser Cylinder
Extendible Dipper Cylinder.
10
Wired Type Gland Assembly
1. Gland
2. Wiper Seal
3. ‘U’ Seal
4. Locking Wire
5. Back-up Ring
6. ’O’ Ring Seal
7. Buffer Seal
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

Cylinder Pistons
11
Hydraulic Cylinder Piston design and Application
1. Decelerator Ring 4. Nylon Bonded Coated Bearing
2. Piston Seals 5. Decelerator
3. Washer 6. Bolt
All cylinder pistons utilize a one piece leaded steel Figure 161 illustrates the various pistons used to-
piston with either one or two glass filled nylon bonded gether with the appropriate method of attaching the
coating bearings on the outer diameter to prevent piston to the cylinder rod.
metal-to-metal contact with the cylinder barrel. The Piston Design Cylinder
piston bearings are not serviced separately, if dam-
A Backhoe Lift
aged the piston must be replaced.
B Backhoe Crowd
Piston sealing is accomplished using two ring seals
positioned on top of each other. The bottom, or inner C Backhoe Bucket
seal, is soft rubber and has pre-determined side play D Loader Bucket
within the ring groove. When the cylinder is pres- Loader Lift
sured, oil acts on the seal and expands it against the Extendible Dipper
outer, rigid, glass-filled PTFE seal, forcing it outward Sideshift Stabiliser
against the barrel wall and against the piston groove, Centre Pivot Stabiliser
ensuring efficient sealing with minimum friction. E Backhoe Swing
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

CYLINDER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Backhoe Lift, Crowd And Bucket Cylinders

(Op No 35 702)
The principal of cylinder removal is similar for all
three backhoe cylinders
1. Park the machine on a level, firm surface and
position the backhoe on the ground. Support the
backhoe elements for cylinder removal using a
suitable stand.
12
WARNING
Always support the structural members so that they
will be stable and safe to work around.
2. If the bucket cylinder is to be removed ensure the

bucket is firmly positioned on the ground.
13
3. Stop the engine and move the backhoe control
levers through all operating positions to relieve
all residual pressures in the system.
14
4. If the cylinder is to be disassembled following re-
moval loosen the cylinder gland approximately
1/4 of a turn using the special peg wrench listed
under special tools on Page 1. DO Not complete-
ly unscrew the gland. This operation will assist in
removing the gland during subsequent cylinder
disassembly.
If necessary gently heat the gland carrier to
soften the thread sealant applied during manu-
facture.
15
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

5. Position a sling or other suitable lifting equipment

around the cylinder to be removed.
6. Remove the cylinder rod end pivot pin (2) and if
necessary use hydraulic power to very slowly re-
tract the cylinder so that the rod comes clear of
the attaching point.
16
NOTE: The rod end of the crowd cylinder and piston
end of the lift cylinder use a common attaching pin.
When either cylinder is being removed, the other cyl-
inder must be securely supported and the dipstick
positioned in such a way that no movement is poss-
ible.
17
7. Disconnect the hydraulic connections to the cyl-
inder ports and cap or plug all openings.
8. Remove the cylinder pivot barrel pivot pin (1) and
remove the cylinder.
9. Drive the attaching pins from the cylinder using
a brass drift and hammer. Accurate positioning of
the cylinder prior to hose disconnection will aid
pin removal.
10. Remove the cylinder, drain the contained oil and
recap the openings.
18
11. Installation follows the removal procedure in re-
verse.
12. If necessary carefully use hydraulic power to ex-
tend or retract cylinder and align cylinder for pivot
pin installation.
13. During installation ensure the grease retention
seals are correctly fitted.
14. Grease the pivot points with the specified
grease.
19
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Extendible Dipstick Cylinder

(Op No 35 702)
1. Park machine on a firm level surface and extend
dipper sufficiently to gain access to the cylinder
rod end pivot pin and position backhoe backhoe
as shown. Support the backhoe elements for cyl-
inder removal using a suitable stand.
WARNING
20
2. Stop the engine and move the backhoe control
levers and extendible dipper control pedal
through all operating positions to relieve all resid-
ual pressures in the system.
21
3. Remove pivot pin (1) from dipper using a suitable
drift.
22
4. Disconnect hydraulic connections (1), at dipper
cylinder and support cylinder using suitable
hoist.
5. Remove pivot pin (2) at top of cylinder and care-
fully withdraw cylinder.
6. Installation follows removal procedure in re-
verse. Use an additional strap around the barrel
of the cylinder to hold the cylinder in position
when installing the lower pivot pin.
7. If necessary carefully extend or retract the cylin-
der using hydraulic power to align cylinder for
pivot pin installation.
23
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

Loader Lift Cylinder

(Op No 35 701)
1. Park machine on a firm level surface and position
the bucket as for bucket dump.
2. Raise the loader sufficiently to allow the lift cylin-
der pivot pin to be removed and using axle stands
securely support the front and rear of bucket to
prevent the loader arms lowering when the cylin-
der is disconnected
24
IMPORTANT: If the bucket cannot be safely sup-
ported it must be removed and the loader arms sup-
ported using a suitable stand or hoist.
WARNING
Always ensure loader is fully supported. Do Not work
under or near an unsupported loader or personal
injury may occur
25
3. Relieve the residual pressure in the system by
moving the loader control lever through all oper-
ating positions and recheck loader is fully sup-
ported.
26
4. If cylinder is to be overhauled use peg wrench
297191 to loosen cylinder gland by approximate-
ly 1/4 of a turn and break the thread seal. Do Not
completely unscrew the gland.
5. If necessary gently heat the gland carrier to
soften the thread sealant applied during manu-
facture.
27
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

6. Support the cylinder using sling and suitable

hoist.
7. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses. Cap or plug all
exposed openings.
8. Remove cylinder rod end retaining pin and lower
cylinder from pivot point.
9. Remove the snap ring and washer from the cylin-
der barrel pivot point and remove cylinder.
verse.
28
Loader Bucket Cylinder
(Op No 35 701)
1. Position loader bucket firmly on the ground and
position a suitable support below the bucket cyl-
inder tie rod (1).
2. Use a suitable block to support the cylinder re-
move idler (2) and tipping link (3).
29
3. Remove engine side cover and withdraw cylinder
barrel pivot pin (1).
4. Remove the cylinder.
verse. If necessary carefully use hydraulic power
to extend or retract cylinder to align cylinder for
pivot pin installation.
30
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

Stabiliser Cylinder - Side Shift

(Op No 35 703)
1. Position the unit on a hard level surface and rest
the digging elements on the ground in a safe
position.
31
2. Remove the stabiliser pad. Lower the stabiliser
to the ground and with the engine stopped, re-
lieve residual pressures.
3. Disconnect the hydraulic feed tubes at the top of
the stabiliser leg
32
4. Remove the cylinder pin locking bolt (1).
5. Fit a 1/2 inch–13 x 1.50 threaded eye bolt and
shackle in the threaded hole on the top of the cyl-
inder. Ensure that the threaded portion of the eye
bolt does not screw into the waisted section of
the locating pin (2)
33
6. Drive out the locating pin and lift the cylinder from
the casing.
verse. Tighten locking bolt to a torque of
108–130 Nm (80–96 lbf ft).
34
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Stabiliser Cylinder - Center Pivot

(Op No 35 703)
1. Ensure the backhoe is locked in the transport
position or positioned on the ground in a safe
working position.
2. Lower the stabilisers to the ground
35
3. If cylinder is to be overhauled after removal use
peg wrench 297192 to loosen cylinder gland nut.
4. Securely support the cylinder using a suitable
strap and hoist.
5. Remove the cylinder rod end pivot pin (1) and
using hydraulic power very slowly retract the cyl-
inder.
6. With the engine stopped, relieve any residual
pressures by moving the stabiliser control levers.
36
7. Disconnect and cap the hydraulic hoses at the
lock valve (1).
8. Remove the cylinder barrel pivot pin (2) and re-
move cylinder.
37
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

Sideshift Clamp Cylinder

(Op No 35 702)
IMPORTANT: The following procedure describes
overhaul of the clamp cylinders without removing the
boom and dipper from the carriage. If the workshop
does not have adequate lifting equipment to securely
support both the bakhoe assembly and carriage the
boom and dipper must be removed before
attempting to separate the carriage from the frame.
See Section 84.
1. Park the machine on a level, firm surface. Posi-

tion the carriage in the centre of the machine and
the backhoe on the ground.
2. Support the backhoe elements using a suitable
stand and hoist capable of carrying 1500 Kg.
WARNING
38
3. Position a trolley jack beneath the carriage.
39
4. Remove the 6 clamp bolts on the bottom of the
carriage followed by the 6 bolts (1) on top of the
carriage.
40
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

5. Use the trolley jack to raise the carriage from the

frame and carefully move the machine forward
sufficiently to allow access to the clamp cylin-
ders. Do not allow the hydraulic hoses to be
stretched when moving the machine forward.
WARNING
Before moving machine forward check that backhoe
is still fully supported by the hoist and remains stable.
41
6. Using an M10 bolt or adaptor and slide hammer
remove piston (1) from bore.
7. Replace piston seals (2) and examine cylinder
bore. The cylinder is spot welded to the carriage
but can be replaced if damaged.
8. Installation follows the disassembly procedure in
reverse. When installing carriage onto frame en-
sure piston cups (3) are fitted.
42
9. Torque all carriage clamp bolts to a torque of
1030 Nm (760 lbf ft).
43
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

CYLINDER OVERHAUL
Backhoe and Loader Cylinders

(Op No 35 701 and 35 702)
1. Thoroughly drain oil from cylinder. Cap the ports
and thoroughly clean the exterior so that the in-
ternal parts will not become contaminated.
2. Using the correct wrench as detailed on Page 1
remove the cylinder gland.
NOTE: A high torque is required to loosen the
threaded type gland, It is therefore recommended
that the attaching points on the machine are used to
secure the cylinder when loosening the gland as de-
scribed in cylinder removal
44
3. If the gland is the wired type rotate rotate the
gland and withdraw the locking wire.
45
4. Pull the cylinder rod gland and piston assembly
from the barrel.
5. Secure the cylinder rod trunnion in a vice or pre-
ferably secure to the cylinder anchor point on the
machine and using a high quality socket and
drive system unscrew the piston retaining bolt. A
considerable torque may be required to loosen
the bolt.
46
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

47
Typical Double Acting Cylinder Assembly
(Backhoe Lift Cylinder Shown)
1. Decelerator* 5. Barrel
2. Piston 6. Piston Bolt
3. Rod 7. Washer *
4. Gland Assembly
*Only Fitted on specific cylinders refer to Figure 161

for further details.
6. Separate piston components. The piston design
and components vary according to application
and reference should be made to Figure 161 on
Page 8 for further details.
7. The decelerator is only installed on the backhoe
lift cylinder and is assembled as shown.
Backhoe Lift Cylinder
Piston and Decelerator Assembly
1. Cylinder Rod
2. Piston Assembly
3. Decelerator Spacer
4. Decelerator Ring
5. Washer
6. Retaining Bolt 48
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

8. Thoroughly clean all parts in an approved cleans-

ing agent and inspect for damage.
9. Small nicks, burrs or other damage may be
hidden by oil film. It is therefore essential that a
thorough cleaning process be adopted.
10. Replace the gland seals.
Threaded Type Gland Assembly

1. Gland
2. Wiper Seal
3. Rod Bearing Sleeve
4. ‘U’ Seal
5. Back-up Ring
6. O’ Ring
7. Buffer Seal
49
Wired Type Gland Assembly
1. Gland
2. Wiper Seal
3. Buffer Seal
4. Locking Wire
5. Back-up Ring
6. ’O’ ring seal
7. ‘U’ Seal
50
11. When re–assembling the gland assemblies en-
sure that:–
The concave face of the back–up ring touches
the ‘O’ ring.
The groove moulded in the face of the buffer seal
is positioned towards the cylinder barrel.
12. Inspect the piston wear rings. These rings are not
removable and if damaged a new piston assem-
bly must be installed.
13. If damage on cylinder rods cannot be repaired by
buffing with a very fine abrasive a new rod should
be installed.
14. Inspect cylinder bushes (1) for wear and replace
51
seals (2).
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Re–Assembly and Installation

Re–assembly follows disassembly procedure in re-
verse while observing the following.
1. Apply 4 drops of thread seal to the piston retain-
ing bolt before installing and tightening to speci-
fied torque.
2. Threaded Glands
Apply 6 drops of thread seal, New Holland Part
No 82995773, to the threads of the gland and
tighten gland nut to the specified torque using
torque meter (1) and peg wrench (2). Use a suit-
able vice or the attaching point on the machine
to hold the cylinder pivot point while tightening
the gland nut.
52
3. Wired Glands
On wire retained glands lightly coat the outer sur-
face of the gland and lead in area of the cylinder
barrel with a lithium base high melting point type
grease and gently tap the gland into the barrel.
4. Slowly rotate the gland until the small hole in the
locking wire groove aligns with the hole in the
barrel. Install the short right angled bend of the
locking wire into the gland hole and rotate the
gland in a clockwise direction until the wire has
been installed . Ensure 8 mm of wire is exposed
for future disassembly.
5. Apply sealant New Holland Part No 82995776 to
the wire entry hole to prevent the ingress of wire. 53
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

Swing Cylinder – Removal and Overhaul

(Op No 35 702)
1. Position the unit on a hard level surface and rest
the digging elements on the ground in a safe
position.
54
2. With the engine stopped, relieve residual pres-
sures by moving all control levers in all directions.
55
3. Disconnect the feed and return hose to the cylin-
ders and cap all exposed openings.
4. Remove the locking pin (3) and pivot pin (2).
5. Remove bolts securing the retaining plate (1).
56
6. Using a suitable sling lift the plate from the swing
cylinder trunnions. Retrieve and identify the
shims (2) used on each side of the plate to en-
sure correct re–assembly.
7. Carefully lift the cylinder from the swing post.
57
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

Disassembly
1. Release locking tab on the headstock
2. Position the headstock/gland trunnion in a vice.
and using Tool 297191, unscrew barrel from the
headstock.
58
3. Remove Piston and rod assembly from barrel.
59
4. Secure end of cylinder rod in a vice and using
high quality deep welled socket and drive system
unscrew piston retaining bolt (1), taking care not
to damage the sliding restrictor (2).
5. Remove piston and withdraw rod from heads-
tock.
60
6. Disassemble sliding restrictor.
Sliding Restrictor
1. Bush
2. Piston Bolt
3. Retaining Pin
4. Spring
5. Sliding Restrictor
61
LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000

7. Remove seals from headstock

Swing Cylinder Gland Assembly
1. Back up ring
2. ‘O’ ring seal
3. Buffer seal
4. Wiper seal
5. Rod seal
6. Trunnion
7. Wear ring
When installing new seals ensure the groove
moulded in the face of the buffer seal is posi-
tioned towards the cylinder barrel.
8. Examine piston and if damaged or worn replace
the piston assembly. 62
9. Examine trunnion bushes and grease retaining
seals on headstock and mating bushes in the
swing cylinder retaining plate and carriage.
63
Re–assembly and Installation
Re–assembly follows the disassembly procedure in

reverse while observing the following.
1. Tighten the piston retaining bolt to a torque of
1470–1570 Nm (1084–1157 lbf ft.)
2. Apply 6 drops of thread sealant New Holland Part
No 82995773 to the gland threads and tighten to
a torque of 670–830 Nm (494–612 lbf ft).
3. Bend locking tab into groove in the gland.
4. Tighten swing cylinder plate retaining bolts to a
torque of 607 Nm .
64
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–200.2

SECTION 39 – FRAME – CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 39 – VEHICLE CHASSIS

Chapter 1 – Frame, Chassis and Attachments
CONTENTS
39 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications are listed for the individual components at the beginning of each section of the Repair Manual for
your guidance.
TORQUES
Torque figures for individual components are listed at the beginning of each section of the Repair Manual.
This section specifies the torques of the attachment of components to the vehicle and interlinking parts hoses
and tubes. Below are general torque figures for hydraulic hoses, tubes and ORS Connections that you may find
on your machine.
Thread Size: 9/
16 in – 18 .................... 13.5 – 16.5 Nm . . . . . . ( 10 – 12 lbf ft)
11/ in – 16 .................... 23 – 28 Nm . . . . . . . . . (17 – 20 lbf ft)
16
13/ in – 16 .................... 45 – 53 Nm . . . . . . . . . (32 – 39 lbf ft)
16
1 in – 14 .................... 62 – 77 Nm . . . . . . . . . (46 – 57 lbf ft)
13/16 in – 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 – 107 Nm . . . . . . . (63 – 79 lbf ft)
17/16 in– 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 – 142 Nm . . . . . . (93 – 105 lbf ft)
111/16 in– 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 – 190 Nm . . . . . . (125 – 140 lbf ft)
2 in– 12 .................... 203 – 246 Nm . . . . . . (150 – 182 lbf ft)
SPECIAL TOOLS
Special Tools are listed in the Repair Manual introduction and at the beginning of each section of the Repair
Manual for your guidance.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 39 – FRAME – CHAPTER 1
SEALANTS
Part No.
Description NH
Typical Applications
THREAD LOCK & • General locking and sealing of metallic

SEAL 24ml 82995773 threads–medium strength
• Oil tolerant
• Resists vibration, seals against corrosion and
leakage
• Can be dismantled with standard tools
SUPER GLUE GEL • General purpose instant non drip gel adhesive Ideal
20gm 82995778 for repair of cab trim, mats, external trim etc.
• Bonds most materials including wood, rubber,
metals, most plastics
• Not absorbed by porous materials
FLEXIBLE 50ml 82995770 • Replaces pre cut gasket materials

GASKET • Use on hydraulic lift cover joint, transmission to
SEALANT 300ml 82995771 axle joint and all rigid machined faces
• Anaerobic sealant cures on assembly
• Will not cure and block oil ways etc.
THREAD SEAL • General purpose metallic thread and pipe sealant

50ml 82995768 • Use on fuel system, hydraulics, air lines etc.
• Replaces pastes, hemp, pipe tape etc.
CLEAR • Clear, flexible adhesive and sealant
ADHESIVE 50ml 82995775 • Suitable for glass, metal, wood etc., seals and
AND bonds gaps to 6mm
SEALANT 310ml 82995776 • Use to seal glazing and windscreens, vehicle
lamps, electrical boxes, sump joints etc.
GASKET DRESSING • Non hardening sealant–enhances sealing of all

60ml 82995774 types of pre cut gaskets
• Holds gasket in place–assists assembly
• Dries slowly, sets to pliable film for easy dismantling
STUD & BEARING • General high strength metallic locking and

LOCK 24ml 82995772 sealing of all threaded fasteners and studs
• Retains cylindrical parts, e.g. bushes, bearings,
gears to shafts etc.
• Resists severe vibration loosening. Seals
against corrosion
SOLVENT CLEANER • All purpose cleaner & degreaser

& DEGREASER 400ml 82995779 • Specially designed for parts to be lubricated,
bonded or sealed leaving no film or residue
• Removes grease, oil and dirt from electrical
parts, tools etc.
FLAMMABLE. Do not smoke, use only in well
ventilated areas
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

MISCELLANEOUS
Part No.
Description NH
Typical Applications
STRIPPED THREAD • Use for fast repair of most stripped or damaged

REPAIR KIT threaded metallic parts (see pack)
82995777
• Complete kit, no additional special tools required
Withstands temperature to 150°C
GASKET REMOVER • Spray on fast action foaming gasket remover

300ml 82995782 • Removes old heat hardened gasket residue
without damaging metal surfaces
• Removes all Loctite gaskets and gasket residue.
• Removes carbon deposits from cylinder heads etc.
CITRUS HAND • Natural hand cleaner made from citrus oil

CLEANER 400ml 82995780 • Removes ground in dirt, grease, grime, paint,
glue oil and tar
3 litre 82995781 • Contains premium skin conditioners
• Use with or without water
PENETRATING OIL • General purpose penetrating lubricant

330ml • Frees corroded fasteners, mechanisms etc.
82995769
• Lubricates cables, locks, linkages etc.
• Cleans, displaces moisture, prevents corrosion
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


This section can be used as a quick reference for
general disassembly of the machine and its
components.
Where disassembly of a specific component is

required refer to the relevant Repair Manual Section.
REPAIR MANUAL BY SECTION

10 Engine
17 Torque Convertor
21 Power Shuttle Transmission
25 Front Axle – Four Wheel Drive
27 Rear Axle
33 Brake System
35 Hydraulic System
39 Frame And Chassis
41 Steering System Overhaul
44 Front Axle – Two Wheel Drive
50 Cab Heat And Air Conditioning
55 Electrical System Overhaul
82 Loader Bucket
84 Backhoe Bucket
90 Chassis Cab
VEHICLE CHASSIS TYPE

The chassis of the Backhoe Loader is manufactured
as a one piece unit on which the major assemblies
are attached or supported from. Two chassis type’s
are available:
SIDESHIFT – Figure 1.
The backhoe on sideshift models is attached to a

frame that is attached to the vehicle and can traverse
the rear of the machine. For disassembly purposes
the backhoe and its support frame can be removed
from the machine.
CENTRE PIVOT – Figure 2.
On centre pivot models the backhoe is connected

directly to the chassis and can be removed from the
machine at that point.
In the following pages are the torque figures for the 1

various assemblies that will may removed to affect
repairs
IMPORTANT: Always ensure prior to carrying out
repairs on the machine that the vehicle parking brake
is on and the wheels are chocked.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

10 000 Engine / 17 000 Torque Convertor / 21 000 Transmission
Major Components within the chassis 4
ENGINE 10 000 – Supported by 2 rubber bushes and To remove the engine/transmission from the
held in position by 2 support brackets. The brackets, machine it will be necessary to remove or disconnect
which are welded to the frame one either side of the the following:
engine are positioned just ahead of the loader posts.
REMOVE:
WARNING: The engine and transmission Air Cleaner bowl
bolted together act as a one piece unit. If Engine side and top panels
separated in the machine they are not self supporting Radiator‘s and related hoses (Or pivot forward where
and will collapse causing injury or damage to the possible)
machine. Front support cowling (if required)
TORQUE CONVERTOR 17 000 – Fitted between DISCONNECT:

the engine and transmission can only be removed Fuel pump throttle cable and electric shut off
when the engine/transmission assembly are Engine harness
separated. Fuel tank connection and leak off return pipes
Hydraulic Pump and related pipework (plug all ports
TRANSMISSION 21 000 – Attached to the rear of as required)
the engine and supported in rubber bushes in fixed Transmission Lever
brackets and held within the frame just at the rear of Transmission harness connectors
the loader post. Engine supports (with engine supported by hoist)
Transmission supports
To make repairs that require disassembly of the
transmission or engine it will be necessary to remove
the engine/transmission as a complete unit from the
chassis.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

10 000 Engine, 17 000 Torque Convertor and 21 000 Transmission

COMPONENTS TORQUES
ENGINE
Engine / transmission retaining bolts and nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Nm (70 lbf ft)
Engine coolant expansion tank retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Nm (18 lbf ft)
Engine / transmission mounting bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Nm (70 lbf ft)
Engine top panel to support bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Nm (59 lbf ft)
Air cleaner retaining bolts to frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Nm (18 lbf ft)
Air cleaner bowl to pipe clamp connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Nm (3.6 lbf ft)
Coolant radiator bolts to frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Nm (70 lbf ft)
Radiator hose connections (small) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Nm (3.6 lbf ft)
Radiator hose connections (large) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Nm (3.6 lbf ft)
Radiator retaining bolts to frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Nm (70 lbf ft)
Fuel tank connecting hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Nm (3.6 lbf ft)
Front support cowling to frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Nm (158 lbf ft)
Front bonnet to frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Nm (125 lbf ft)
Upper and front bonnet to frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Nm (59 lbf ft)
TRANSMISSION
Transmission gear lever clamp bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Nm (66 lbf ft)
Hydraulic pump pipe connection (small) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Nm (26 lbf ft)
Hydraulic pump pipe connection (large) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Nm (86 lbf ft)
Power steering outlet to tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Nm (41 lbf ft)
Hydraulic oil cooler to coolant radiator bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Nm (18 lbf ft)
Hose transport lock valve to gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Nm (11 lbf ft)
Hose transport lock valve to gearbox dipstick pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Nm (11 lbf ft)
Spicer universal couplings rear and front (when FWD fitted) . . . . . . . . . . 38 Nm (28 lbf ft)
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

25 000 4WD Front Axle, 44 000 2WD Front Axle and 27 000 Rear Axle
Major Components attached below the chassis 5
FRONT AXLE 4WD – 25 000 Mounted below the REMOVE:

front of the chassis and held in position by the swivel Rear Wheels
pin trunnion supports. The axle is attached to the
underside of the chassis by 8 through bolts. DISCONNECT:
Brake piston hoses (cap all exposed ports)
To remove the front axle it will be necessary to Spicer coupling
disconnect or remove the following with the vehicle Differential Lock pedal
suitably supported: Axle attaching bolts
REMOVE: FRONT AXLE 2WD 44 000 – Mounted below the

Front Wheels front of the chassis and held in position by the swivel
pin trunnion supports attached to the underside of
DISCONNECT: the chassis by 8 through bolts.
Steering piston hoses
Axle swivel pin attaching bolts To remove the front axle it will be necessary to
Spicer coupling disconnect or remove the following with the vehicle
suitably supported:
REAR AXLE 27 000 – Attached to the frame at the
rear of the machine by 4 through bolts. REMOVE:
Front Wheels
To remove the Rear axle it will be necessary to
disconnect or remove the following with the vehicle DISCONNECT:
suitably supported: Steering piston hoses
Axle swivel pin attaching bolts
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

25 000 4WD, 44 000 2WD Front Axle and 27 000 Rear Axle
COMPONENTS TORQUES
1. FRONT AXLE
Font axle retaining bolts to frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 Nm (447 lbf ft)
Front Wheel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700 Nm (516 lbf ft)
Front axle power steering hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Nm (1.8 lbf ft)
Spicer coupling to transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Nm (28 lbf ft)
2. REAR AXLE
Rear axle to frame retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950 Nm (700 lbf ft)
Rear Wheel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700 Nm (516 lbf ft)
Front axle power steering hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Nm (1.8 lbf ft)
Spicer coupling to transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Nm (28 lbf ft)
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

35 000 Hydraulics
2 3 4 5
1
16
6
15
7
14
13 12 11 10 9
Hydraulic Components attached within the chassis 6

Contained within the chassis are the hydraulic valve Loader, Backhoe and related components,
slices, steering motor connections all of which are Stabilisers, Backhoe Hammer, Hand Hammer and
interconnected by pipes and tubing to the pump and Steering Motor
reservoir for the operation of:
In general the hydraulic components can easily be
IMPORTANT: Before disconnecting any hoses
removed from the machine. However to gain access
relieve all pressure in the hydraulic system and have
for the removal of several items at the same time it
ready suitable clean containers to drain the oil into. may be beneficial to consider removal of the cab.
Ensure all ports and hoses are plugged or capped to
prevent dirt ingress during overhaul.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

35 000 Hydraulics
COMPONENTS TORQUES
1. Power steering hoses to support frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Nm (41 lbf ft)
1. Power steering outlet to tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Nm (41 lbf ft)
2. Backhoe hammer valve connections (large) 85803431 . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Nm (140 lbf ft)
2. Backhoe hammer valve connections (medium) 85803428/30 . . . . . . . 160 Nm (118 lbf ft)
2. Backhoe hammer valve connections (small) 85803429 . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Nm (25 lbf ft)
4. Backhoe Clamp Valve Retaining Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Nm (7 lbf ft)
5. Hose backhoe control valve to hydraulic oil tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Nm (18 lbf ft)
5. Hoses loader valve to pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Nm (88 lbf ft)
5. Hoses backhoe control valve to swing cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Nm (40 lbf ft)
5. Hoses backhoe control valve to hydraulic reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Nm (18 lbf ft)
5. Backhoe control valve to frame bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Nm (67 lbf ft)
6. Hoses loader control valve to return line distributor block . . . . . . . . . 160 Nm (118 lbf ft)
6. Return Line Distributor Block Retaining Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Nm (44 lbf ft)
6. Hoses hydraulic oil filter to return line distributor block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Nm (140 lbf ft)
6. Hoses loader control valve to return line distributor block . . . . . . . . . . 160 Nm (118 lbf ft)
6. Hoses backhoe control valve to return line distributor block . . . . . . . . 160 Nm (118 lbf ft)
6. Hoses stabiliser control valve to return line distributor block . . . . . . . . 120 Nm (88 lbf ft)
7. Hoses loader control valve to stabilisers control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Nm (88 lbf ft)
8. Hose connections to hand hammer valve (large) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Nm (63 lbf ft)
8. Hose connections to hand hammer valve (small) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Nm (26 lbf ft)
10. Hoses oil filter to oil reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Nm (140 lbf ft)
11. Hose transport lock valve to gearbox dipstick pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Nm (11 lbf ft)
12. Hoses to pressure ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Nm (35 lbf ft)
12.Pressure ports plate retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Nm (18 lbf ft)
13. Hoses hydraulic heat exchanger to oil tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Nm (118 lbf ft)
14. Oil reservoir hose connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Nm (369 lbf ft)
15. Loader control pipes clamp to frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Nm (18 lbf ft)
15. Hoses loader control valve to backhoe control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Nm (118 lbf ft)
15. Hydraulic pump to transmission attaching nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Nm (67 lbf ft)
15. Hoses loader valve to pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Nm (88 lbf ft)
15. Hoses loader valve to pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Nm (63 lbf ft)
16. Hoses stabilisers valve to pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Nm (63 lbf ft)
– Pipes lockout valves to stabiliser cylinder (where fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Nm (41 lbf ft)
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

– Hoses lockout valve (where fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Nm (41 lbf ft)

– Hoses backhoe control valve to swing cylinder retaining clamps . . . . 50 Nm (37 lbf ft)
– Hoses backhoe control valve to swing post 5/8” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Nm (88 lbf ft)
– Hoses backhoe control valve to swing post 1/2” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Nm (63 lbf ft)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

39 000 Frame and Chassis
Components attached to chassis exterior 7
RESERVOIR TANKS – Attached to the chassis

below the cab are the tanks for the Hydraulic system
mounted to the right hand side of the machine and
the fuel tank mounted to the left hand side of the
machine.
Both tanks when drained of there contents can be
removed from the machine by removal of the
attaching pipe work and supporting bolts.
IMPORTANT: Ensure all ports and pipes are plugged
or blanked off to prevent dirt ingress.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

39 000 Frame and Chassis

COMPONENTS TORQUES
OIL RESERVOIR (1)

Holding bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Nm (63 lbf ft)
Step attaching bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Nm (36 lbf ft)
Filter retaining plate to tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Nm (8.8 lbf ft)
Drain plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Nm (184 lbf ft)
Hose backhoe control valve to hydraulic oil reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Nm (18 lbf ft)
Hoses oil filter to oil reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Nm (140 lbf ft)
Hoses heat exchanger to oil reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Nm (118 lbf ft)
Filler tube plate retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Nm (8.8 lbf ft)
Power steering outlet to reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Nm (40 lbf ft)
FUEL TANK (2)

Holding bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Nm (63 lbf ft)
Step attaching bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Nm (36 lbf ft)
Fuel sender to tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 Nm (15 lbf in)
Fuel drain plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Nm (184 lbf ft)
Hose connections to tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Nm (369 lbf ft)
BALLAST
Chin weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Nm (369 lbf ft)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

82 000 Loader
Loader 9
LOADER 82 000 – Attached in position by pins and DISCONNECT:

retained by bolts the loader frame can be removed
as an assembly from the machine. Leveling Arm
Pivot Pins
Removal of the loader is achieved by disconnection Loader pivot cross shaft upper
or removal of the following with the loader fully Lift cylinder hoses
supported: Bucket cylinder hoses
loader pivot support shafts lower
IMPORTANT: Before disconnecting any hoses or
cylinders relieve all pressure in the hydraulic system
and have ready suitable clean containers to drain the REMOVE:
oil into. Ensure all ports and hoses are plugged or
capped to prevent dirt ingress during overhaul. Bucket
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

82 000 Loader
COMPONENTS TORQUES
LOADER HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

1. Loader control pipe bracket to frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Nm (18 lbf ft)
2. Loader lifting cylinders elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Nm (41 lbf ft)
3. Loader bucket cylinder elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Nm (41 lbf ft)
4. Bucket cylinder hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Nm (41 lbf ft)
Hoses loader valve to pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Nm (63 lbf ft)
Loader Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Nm (41 lbf ft)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

84 000 Backhoe
1 2
Backhoe 10
BACKHOE 84 000 – Disassembly of the backhoe is Sideshift Backhoe

similar for both sideshift and centre pivot models
upto the swing post. The backhoe on sideshift models is attached to a
frame that is attached to the vehicle and can traverse
IMPORTANT: Before disconnecting any hoses or the rear of the machine. For disassembly purposes
cylinders relieve all pressure in the hydraulic system the backhoe and its support frame can be removed
and have ready suitable clean containers to drain the from the machine.
oil into. Ensure all ports and hoses are plugged or
capped to prevent dirt ingress during overhaul. Centre Pivot Backhoe
To remove the backhoe it will be necessary to On centre pivot models the backhoe is connected
disconnect or remove the following with the backhoe directly to the chassis and can be removed from the
fully supported: machine at that point.
In the following pages are the torque figures for the

DISCONNECT;
various assemblies that will may removed to affect
repairs
Hoses (de–pressurise the system first)
REMOVE:
Sideshift only – Backhoe support frame to chassis
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

84 000 Backhoe
COMPONENTS TORQUES
BACKHOE
1. Backhoe sideshift to frame retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 Nm (590 lbf ft)
2. Backhoe to frame hose retaining clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Nm (38 lbf ft)
Backhoe Clamp Valve Retaining Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Nm (7 lbf ft)
Pipes lockout valves to stabiliser cylinder (where fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Nm (41 lbf ft)
Transport lock cylinder retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Nm (18 lbf ft)
BACKHOE HOSES
Hose transport lock valve to transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Nm (11 lbf ft)
Hose transport lock valve to transmission dipstick pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Nm (11 lbf ft)
Hoses backhoe control valve to boom (large) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Nm (88 lbf ft)
Hoses backhoe control valve to boom (small) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Nm (63 lbf ft)
Hoses backhoe control valve to swing cylinders retaining clamps . . . 50 Nm (37 lbf ft)
Hoses backhoe control valve to swing post 5/8in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Nm (86 lbf ft)
Hoses backhoe control valve to swing post 1/2in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Nm (63 lbf ft)
Hoses backhoe control valve to swing cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Nm (40 lbf ft)
STABILISERS
3. Stabilisers Upper Pins Retaining Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Nm (59 lbf ft)
Stabiliser elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Nm (60 lbf ft)
Hoses lockout valves (where fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Nm (41 lbf ft)
MISCELLANEOUS
4. Rear Shield to frame bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Nm (38 lbf ft)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

90 000 Chassis / Cab
Major Components attached above the chassis 11
CAB 90 000 – the cab frame being a one piece unit IMPORTANT: When lifting the cab ensure the
is mounted on top of the chassis and retained by 4 hydraulic brake reservoirs are not caught and
fixing bolts between the cab mounts to the chassis. damaged on the loader support frame.
Removal of the cab requires disconnection or

removal of the following with the cab fully supported
by a hoist:
Cab skirts
Throttle cable to Fuel Pump
Differential lock pedal
Hydraulic Brake Pipes
Loader Lever linkage
Transmission Gear Lever
Main harness connections
Cab attaching bolts
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

90 000 Chassis / Cab

COMPONENTS TORQUES
CAB
Cab support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Nm (332 lbf ft)
Front cab retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Nm (158 lbf ft)
Rear cab retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Nm (133 lbf ft)
SHEET METAL
Bonnet Front casting to frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Nm (158 lbf ft)
Upper and front bonnet retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Nm (59 lbf ft)
Front bonnet to frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Nm (125 lbf ft)
NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 41 – STEERING (NOT 4WS) – CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 41 – STEERING
Chapter 1 – Control
CONTENT
41 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Pump
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi G API GL4, ISO 32/46
Output at 2200 revs/min @ Standby Pressure . . . . . 62.7 litres/min (16.6 US.gals/min )
Steering Motor
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydrostatic Load Sensing
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 cc / rev
Steering Wheel Turns Lock to Lock
Four-Wheel Drive Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0
Two Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
Steering Pressure Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136.5 – 143.5 bar (999.25 – 1100.75 psi)
Standby Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 bar ( 101.5 psi)
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 41 – STEERING (NOT 4WS) – CHAPTER 1
TIGHTENING TORQUES
ft. lbs. N·m kgf.m
Steering Wheel Nut 41.0 55.0 5.6
Steering Motor to Steering Column Bracket 17.0 23.0 2.3
Steering Motor End Cover 22.0 30.0 3.0
Steering Motor Pipe Connections 35.0 45.0 4.5
Steering Motor Pipe Adaptors 40.0 55.0 4.0
Steering Cylinder Ball-joint Clamps 32.0 43.0 4.4
Steering Cylinder Ball-joint Nuts 130.0 176.0 18.0
Steering Cylinder Extension Tube to Cylinder 200.0 271.0 27.5
Steering Pump Body Through Bolts 26.0 35.3 3.6
Steering Pump Drive Gear Nut 31.0 42.0 4.3
Steering Pump to Front Cover Bolt 23.0 31.2 3.2
Steering Pump Reservoir Bolt 12.0 16.3 1.7
Steering Pump Relief Valve 31.0 42.0 4.2
Check Valve Bolt 22.0 30.0 4.0
SPECIAL TOOLS
DESCRIPTION
Seal Installer Danfoss No. SJ.
Pressure Test Quick Release Coupler Part No 291924
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–110.2

1
Steering System Layout
1. Hydraulic System Reservoir 4. Hydraulic System Filter
2. Steering Pump 5. Flow Divider
3. Steering Motor 6. Hydraulic Oil Cooler
The hydrostatic steering system features; • Steering pump located on the rear of the trans-
• Double acting, balanced type steering cylinder mission which has a priority valve giving up to
on both 2 and 4WD axles. 62.7 L/min (16.6 US.gals) at 2200 rev/min.
• Common hydraulic reservoir with the main hy- • Oil cooler and filter is an integral part of the hy-
draulic system. draulic system.
• A closed centre steering motor is used.
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

The backhoe loader is fitted with two hydraulic

pumps mounted on the rear of the transmission.
Both pumps are driven by a shaft running directly off
the flywheel. Oil is drawn through the common inlet
port into both pumping elements. The front pump
flow is directed to the loader and backhoe control
valves and side shift clamping system.
Rear pump flow passes through the flow divider
valve which maintains priority oil flow to the steering
system with remaining flow directed for stabilisers,
loader and backhoe elements.
The flow divider, located on the rear of the pump,
comprises a load sensing valve and steering system
pressure relief valve. 2
The valve ensures a priority oil flow to the steering
system while the steering is operated, with the re-
maining flow directed to the stabiliser, loader and
backhoe circuits.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–110.2

Flow Divider
3
Steering Flow Divider
1. Housing 8. Cap
2. Valve 9. Adjuster
3. O Ring 10. O Ring
4. Spool 11. Relief Valve
5. Adjuster 12. Spring
6. Spring Seat 13. Seat
7. Spring
The flow divider located on the rear of the pump com- Pump flow also passes into centre of spool enabling
prises of a load sensed priority valve and steering pump pressure to be sensed through the orifice on
system pressure relief valve. the left hand end of the spool. A smaller orifice in the
The load sense valve ensures that a priority oil flow right hand end of the spool also senses pump pres-
to the steering system is maintained while steering sure but acts as a damper to prevent erratic move-
the vehicle, with remaining flow directed to the stabi- ment of the spool.
liser, loader and backhoe circuits. When the steering system is in neutral the spring
NOTE: Flow from the rear pump on entering the holds the spool to the right until pump pressure re-
loader and backhoe circuits combines with the flow aches a minimum of 7 bar. The pump pressure
from the front pump to provide increased flow. sensed through orifice (12) can now overcome
spring pressure and move the spool to the right re-
stricting flow to the steering motor.
Operation
Flow from the rear pump is now directed to the stabi-
Flow from the rear pump enters the flow divider at
liser and loader/backhoe circuits through port (2)
inlet port (1).
whilst maintaining the 7 bar standby pressure to the
The spring force on the end of the spool holds the steering circuit.
spool to the left enabling flow to pass into steering
port (3).
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

LOAD SENSING VALVE
9
1
10
2
7
3 13
11
4 14
12
4
Load Sensing Valve (with pump not running)
1. Orifice 8. Steering Relief Valve
2. To steering priority flow (EF) 9. Relief Valve Adjuster
3. Filter 10. Poppet
4. Spool 11. Return to Inlet Pump Port
5. Backhoe Circuits (CF) 12. Lock Plug
6. Orifice 13. Load Sensing Signal (LS)
7. Inlet Port from Rear Pump (IN) 14. Orifice
When the steering is in neutral the LS port is con-

nected to the unload (through the steering) and the
steering inlet port (CF) is open.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–110.2

LOAD SENSING VALVE
1 7
6
BRC0706B
5
Load Sensing Valve with Pump Running – Steering in Neutral
Pressure Oil Return to Reservoir Oil
Trapped Oil
1. Orifice 5. Backhoe circuits (CF)

2. To steering priority flow 6. Oifice
3. Filter 7. Inlet Port (from rear port)
4. Spool
The pressure on (CF) increases until the pressure value (standby pressure) is sufficient to move the spool valve
in a way to divert the flow toward (EF).
1 7
6
BRC0706C
6
Load Sensing Valve with Pump Running – Steering working
4. Spool
During steering two actions are performed:
1. The fluid moves to the steering through (CF)
2. The (LS) signal is in communication to the steering
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FAULT FINDING - STEERING

2. Air in system 2. Check for loose connections
or damaged tubing. Purge
system of air
7. Broken or damaged steering 7. Inspect and replace
column
element
linkage ball joints
or worn
element
steering
element
system of oil
4. Worn Pump 4. Replace Pump
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–110.2

7
Rear Pump Assembly
1. Pump Body 6. Pump Gears
2. ’O’ Ring Seal 7. Bearing Block
3. Back–up Seal 8. Back–up Seal
4. Pressure Seal (Rubber) 9. Pressure Seal (Rubber)
5. Bearing Block
OVERHAUL
Steering pump overhaul (rear pump), refer to the hy-

draulic pump section.
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

9
Steering Motor – Neutral
Pump Pressure Trapped Oil
Standby Pressure Return to Reservoir
When the steering wheel is held still, the leaf springs

return and hold the spool and sleeve in the neutral
position.
This ensures no more oil is supplied to the steering

cylinder. The sleeve also traps the oil in the steering
cylinder and allows oil in the sensing lines to return
to tank therefore allowing the priority flow divider to
move to the left.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–110.2

10
Steering Motor – Turning Right
Metered Pressure Return to Reservoir
When the steering wheel is turned, the movement of

the control valve spool in its sleeve forms a series of
passages. During right turn, oil flows through the
sleeve along a groove in the valve spool and into a
passage in the steering motor housing which leads
to the metering unit. A gallery is also lined up to allow
pressure oil to flow down the sensing line to the
priority flow divider.
As the metering unit is turned by the drive shaft, it

directs a measured quantity of oil along another set
of passages in the spool and sleeve then from these
to the steering cylinder.
Return oil from the other side of the cylinder is

directed through the valve spool and sleeve to a
return passage in the housing.
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

System Overhaul
To gain access to the steering motor the bonnet and
air cleaner should be removed.
11
Removing Steering Motor
Disconnect the four connectors and collect the ‘O’
ring seals, noting the connector positions.
12
Remove the four Allen screws from within the cab.
The motor can be removed from the front of the cab
through the engine compartment.
13
Steering motor ports.
1. Left hand of cylinder

2. Pump in
3. Pump return
4. Right hand of cylinder
14
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–110.2

Supply line non return valve.
1. Non return valve
15
End plate removal
NOTE: The position of the pin bolt must remain the

same upon re–assembly of the end cap.
1. End plate
2. Pump body
16
Metering unit removal
1. Steering motor
2. Driving link
3. Stator
4. Rotor
17
Drive link removal
1. Steering motor body

2. Drive link
18
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Valve plate removal
1. Body
2. Valve Plate
19
Check valve removal
1. Retainer cap
2. Check valve
20
Suction and check valves
1. Suction valve balls

2. Suction valve rods
3. Retainer cap
4. Check valve
21
Cylinder Relief Valves
IMPORTANT: Before removal of the cylinder relief 2
1
for cleaning valves if necessary remove the end plug
and seal. Measure at, (x) using a depth gauge, the
distance from the outer body to the head of the ad-
juster (5) and record the results. Upon re–assembly 3
reset the adjuster to the exact depth previously re-
4
corded.
5
1. Ball 6
2. Seat x
3. End Plug
4. Seal
5. Adjuster
6. Spring 22
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–110.2

Control valve removal
1. Control valve
2. Housing
NOTE: When removing the control valve spool and

sleeve, ensure drive pin is in a horizontal position so
that it cannot fall into an integral gallery and make re-
moval difficult.
23
Control valve
1. Control valve sleeve

2. Washer
3. Thrust bearing
4. Washer
5. Spool
6. Centring springs retainer
7. Centring springs
NOTE: The thick washer must be reinstated with in-

ternal diameter chamfer toward the valve sleeve.
24
Drive pin and centring springs
1. Control valve
2. Drive pin
3. Spool
4. Centring springs
25
Oil seal location
1. Seal seat
2. Seal
26
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

27
Hydrostatic Steering Motor
1. Valve Thrust Washers and Bearings 9. ‘O’ Ring
2. Drive Pin 10. End Plate
3. Spring Retaining Ring 11. Metering Unit
4. Valve Spool 12. Distributor Port
5. Suction Valves 13. Check Valve Bolt
6. Retaining Bolts 14. Non Return Valve
7. Valve Sleeve 15. Motor Body
8. Drive Link 16. Cylinder Relief Valve
Component Inspection • Ensure thrust washers are not warped or

Check for signs of wear in the following areas: cracked
• Rotor and stator of metering unit move freely • Ensure check valve ball is free to move
• Check the drive pin is not cracked or bent • Check control valve, spool and sleeve for wear
or scoring
• Check the rollers in thrust bearing are free to ro-
tate • Replace all seals and ‘O’ rings
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–110.2

Oil seal installation

• Lightly coat sleeve with clean hydraulic oil and
place in steering motor body
• Place oil seal on seal guide and coat with oil
• Insert seal guide and seal, push downward with
a twisting action
• When seal is seated remove tool
28
Oil seal installation
1. Oil seal
2. Outer tool sleeve
3. Inner Tool shaft
29
Re–assembly
NOTE: Great care should be taken during re–as-
sembly. Coat all components in hydraulic oil.
• Ensure drive pin is horizontal before installation.
• Ensure thick thrust washer internal diameter
chamfer is towards the valve sleeve.
• Do not over torque end plate.
• This motor does not have to be timed due to a
master spline.
• Finally, check motor turns freely.
30
LB 75–110 / FH 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Replace The End cover

Refit the bolts and torque up in sequence to an initial
6 4
setting of 10.8 Nm (8 lbf ft)
Torque up the bolts in sequence to a second setting
of 30.0 Nm (21 lbf ft) 1 2
3 7
31
Pressure Testing
Connect a suitable pressure gauge capable of read-
ing up to 200 bar (2900 psi) to the centre connector
inside the left hand loader support.
• Start engine. A standby pressure of 6–7 bar
(87–101 psi) should be observed.
• Turn steering to the left or right to the stop. A
maximum pressure of 140 bar (2030 psi) should
be seen.
NOTE: Engine speed should be set to 1000 rev/min.
For settings and adjustment procedure refer to the
pressure testing section.
32
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FH 90.2–110.2

SECTION 41 – STEERING (4WS ONLY) – CHAPTER 2 1
SECTION 41 – STEERING
Chapter 2
CONTENT

41 000 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
SPECIFICATIONS
Pump
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ambra Multi G
Output at 2200 rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 ltr/min (19 US. gals/min)
Steering Motor
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydrostatic Load Sensing
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 cm3/rev
Steering Pressure Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 bar +/– 3.5 bar (2610 +/– 50 psi)
Standby Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7bar (101.5 psi)
Shock Valve Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 bar (3480 psi)
TIGHTENING TORQUES
ft.lbs Nm kgf.m
Steering Wheel Nut 41.0 55.0 5.6
Steering Motor to Steering Column Bracket 17.0 23.0 2.3
Steering Motor End Cover 22.0 30.0 3.0
Steering Motor Pipe Connections 35.0 45.0 4.5
Steering Motor Pipe Adaptors 40.0 55.0 4.0
Steering Cylinder Ball–joint Clamps 32.0 43.0 4.4
Steering Cylinder Ball–joint Nuts 130.0 176.0 18.0
Steering Cylinder Extension Tube to Cylinder 200.0 271.0 27.5
Steering Pump Body Through Bolts 26.0 35.3 3.6
Steering Pump Drive Gear Nut 31.0 42.0 4.3
Steering Pump to Front Cover Bolt 23.0 31.2 3.2
Steering Pump Reservoir Bolt 12.0 16.3 1.7
Steering Pump Relief Valve 31.0 42.0 4.2
Check Valve Bolt 22.0 30.0 4.0
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 41 – STEERING (4WS ONLY) – CHAPTER 2
SPECIAL TOOLS
Pressure Test Quick Release Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291924
1
Steering System
1. Hydraulic System Reservoir 4. Hydraulic System Filter
2. Steering Pump 5. Flow Divider
3. Steering Motor 6. Hydraulic Oil Cooler
The hydrostatic steering features
• Double acting balanced steering cylinders on • Oil is cooled and filtered during every cycle.
both the front and rear axles.
• Oil flow from the steering motor to axles is elec-
• Common hydraulic reservoir with the main hy- tronically controlled using a 4 wheel steer valve
draulic reservoir. which diverts oil in various directions depending
on the choice selected by the operator.
• Steering pump located on the rear of the trans-
mission.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

2
Steering Valve Schematic
In the position shown both spools have been moved

by solenoids (2b) and (3b), the detents on the (a) side 3a 3b 2a 2b
of the solenoid hold the spool in this position until
another solenoid is pulsed 2WS O O O O
4WS X O O O
4WS
TO O X O O
2WS
CRAB X O X O
CRAB
TO O X O X
2WS
3
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Valve 3
a b
P
A B
SHK41001
4
The spool in valve 3 above was last moved by sole- port T. Oil cannot exit at A or B, cutting off flow to the
noid 3b, as can be seen oil flowing in from P flows rear steering cylinder, the spool is only in this position
through the internal gallerys of the spool and exits at in the standard front wheel steer mode.
Valve 2.
A B
P
a b
2
SHK41001
5
The spool in valve 2 above was last moved by sole- enters from valve 3 at port B and exits at port T which
noid 2b. Oil enters at port P and exits at port A. Oil enters the front steering cylinder.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

The backhoe loader is fitted with two hydraulic

pumps mounted on the rear of the transmission.
Both pumps are driven by a shaft running directly off
the flywheel. Oil is drawn through the common inlet
port into both pumping elements. The front pump
flow is directed to the loader and backhoe control
valves and side shift clamping system.
Rear pump flow passes through the flow divider

valve which maintains priority oil flow to the steering
system with remaining flow directed for stabilisers,
loader and backhoe elements.
The flow divider, located on the rear of the pump, 6

comprises a load sensing valve and steering system
pressure relief valve.
The valve ensures a priority oil flow to the steering

system while the steering is operated, with the re-
maining flow directed to the stabiliser, loader and
backhoe circuits.
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Flow Divider
7
Steering Flow Divider
1. Housing 8. Cap
2. Valve 9. Adjuster
3. O Ring 10. O Ring
4. Spool 11. Relief Valve
5. Adjuster 12. Spring
6. Spring Seat 13. Seat
7. Spring
The flow divider located on the rear of the pump com- Pump flow also passes into centre of spool enabling
prises of a load sensed priority valve and steering pump pressure to be sensed through the orifice on
system pressure relief valve. the left hand end of the spool. A smaller orifice in the
The load sense valve ensures that a priority oil flow right hand end of the spool also senses pump pres-
to the steering system is maintained while steering sure but acts as a damper to prevent erratic move-
the vehicle, with remaining flow directed to the stabi- ment of the spool.
liser, loader and backhoe circuits. When the steering system is in neutral the spring
NOTE: Flow from the rear pump on entering the holds the spool to the right until pump pressure re-
loader and backhoe circuits combines with the flow aches a minimum of 7 bar. The pump pressure
from the front pump to provide increased flow. sensed through orifice (12) can now overcome
spring pressure and move the spool to the right re-
stricting flow to the steering motor.
Operation
Flow from the rear pump is now directed to the stabi-
Flow from the rear pump enters the flow divider at
liser and loader/backhoe circuits through port (2)
inlet port (1).
whilst maintaining the 7 bar standby pressure to the
The spring force on the end of the spool holds the steering circuit.
spool to the left enabling flow to pass into steering
port (3).
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

LOAD SENSING VALVE
9
1
10
2
7
3 13
11
4 14
12
8
Load Sensing Valve (with pump not running)
1. Orifice 8. Steering Relief Valve
2. To steering priority flow (EF) 9. Relief Valve Adjuster
3. Filter 10. Poppet
4. Spool 11. Return to Inlet Pump Port
5. Backhoe Circuits (CF) 12. Lock Plug
6. Orifice 13. Load Sensing Signal (LS)
7. Inlet Port from Rear Pump (IN) 14. Orifice
When the steering is in neutral the LS port is con-

nected to the unload (through the steering) and the
steering inlet port (CF) is open.
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

LOAD SENSING VALVE
1 7
6
BRC0706B
9
Load Sensing Valve with Pump Running – Steering in Neutral
Pressure Oil Return to Reservoir Oil
Trapped Oil

4. Spool
The pressure on (CF) increases until the pressure value (standby pressure) is sufficient to move the spool valve
in a way to divert the flow toward (EF).
1 7
6
BRC0706C
10
Load Sensing Valve with Pump Running – Steering working
4. Spool
During steering two actions are performed:
1. The fluid moves to the steering through (CF)
2. The (LS) signal is in communication to the steering
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

FAULT FIINDING – STEERING

system of air
7. Broken or damaged steering 7. Inspect and replace
column
element
linkage ball joints
or worn
element
steering
element
system of oil
4. Worn Pump 4. Replace Pump
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

11
Steering Motor – Neutral
Standby Pressure Return to Reservoir
When the steering wheel is held still, the leaf springs

return and hold the spool and sleeve in the neutral
position.
This ensures no more oil is supplied to the steering

cylinder. The sleeve also traps the oil in the steering
cylinder and allows oil in the sensing lines to return
to tank therefore allowing the priority flow divider to
move to the left.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

12
Steering Motor – Turning Right
Metered Oil Return to Reservoir
As the metering unit is turned by the drive shaft, it

When the steering wheel is turned, the movement of directs a measured quantity of oil along another set
the control valve spool in its sleeve forms a series of of passages in the spool and sleeve then from these
passages. During right turn, oil flows through the to the steering cylinder.
sleeve along a groove in the valve spool and into a
passage in the steering motor housing which leads Return oil from the other side of the cylinder is
to the metering unit. A gallery is also lined up to allow directed through the valve spool and sleeve to a
pressure oil to flow down the sensing line to the return passage in the housing.
priority flow divider.
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

The three modes of steering are as follows:
• Front wheel only steering
• Front and rear wheel steer
• Front and rear wheel crab
The solenoids energised are shown in the table op-

posite. These are also the pins which need to be 3a 3b 2a 2b
pressed when changing steering mode manually in
an emergency. 2WS O O O O
X = Energised 4WS X O O O
O = Not Energised
4WS
TO O X O O
2WS
CRAB X O X O
CRAB
TO O X O X
2WS
13
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

Steering Control Valve
The steering control valve is located just above the

rear axle attached to the main chassis.
Remove the four pipes and then the 2 chassis fixing
bolts, then withdraw the valve for overhaul.
Draw a diagonal line accross the complete valve
block this will assist in the corect reassembly later.
14
The valve consists of a central manifold block which are only energised momentarily to move the spool.
all input and output pipes are attached to. On each On the end of each solenoid is an emergency hand
side of this block is a solenoid valve. The solenoid operating pin which moves the control spool without
valves have two positions, both of these positions energising the solenoid. The switching of the steer-
are working positions and there is no neutral point. ing valve is normally controlled by a microprocessor
Each spool is detented and therefore the solenoids located underneath the right hand side console.
15
Steering Control Valve
1. Solenoid fixing screw 6. Fixing screws
2. Solenoid 7. Plunger
3. Control spool 8. O rings
4. Spool block 9. O ring
5. Central manifold block
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Steering Motor Overhaul
To gain access to the steering motor the bonnet and

air cleaner should be removed.
16
Removing Steering Motor
Disconnect the four connectors and collect the O ring

seals, noting the connector positions.
17
Remove the four Allen screws from within the cab.
The motor can be removed from the front of the cab

through the engine compartment.
18
Steering Motor Ports
1. Left hand of cylinder
2. Pump in
3. Pump return
4. Right hand of cylinder
19
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

Supply line non return valve.
1. Non return valve
20
End plate removal
NOTE: The position of the pin bolt must remain the

same upon re–assembly of the end cap.
1. End plate
2. Pump body
21
Metering unit removal
1. Steering motor
2. Driving link
3. Stator
4. Rotor
22
Drive link removal
1. Steering motor body

2. Drive link
23
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Valve plate removal
1. Body
2. Valve plate
24
Check valve removal
1. Retainer cap
2. Check valve
25
Suction and check valves
1. Suction valve balls

2. Suction valve rods
3. Retainer cap
4. Check valve
26
Cylinder relief valves
IMPORTANT: Before removal of the cylinder relief 2
1
for cleaning valves if necessary remove the end plug
and seal. Measure at, (x) using a depth gauge, the
distance from the outer body to the head of the ad-
juster (5) and record the results. Upon re–assembly 3
reset the adjuster to the exact depth previously re-
4
corded.
5
1. Ball 6
2. Seat x
3. End Plug
4. Seal
5. Adjuster
6. Spring 27
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

Control valve removal
1. Control valve
2. Housing
NOTE: When removing the control valve spool and

sleeve, ensure drive pin is in a horizontal position so
that it cannot fall into an integral gallery and make re-
moval difficult.
28
Control valve
1. Control valve sleeve

2. Washer
3. Thrust bearing
4. Washer
5. Spool
6. Centring springs retainer
7. Centring springs
NOTE: The thick washer must be reinstated with in-

ternal diameter chamfer toward the valve sleeve.
29
Drive pin and centring springs
1. Control valve
2. Drive pin
3. Spool
4. Centring springs
30
Oil seal location
1. Seal seat
2. Seal
31
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

32
Hydrostatic Steering Motor
1. Valve Thrust Washers and Bearings 9. ‘O’ Ring
2. Drive Pin 10. End Plate
3. Spring Retaining Ring 11. Metering Unit
4. Valve Spool 12. Distributor Port
5. Suction Valves 13. Check Valve Bolt
6. Retaining Bolts 14. Non Return Valve
7. Valve Sleeve 15. Motor Body
8. Drive Link 16. Cylinder Relief Valve
Component Inspection • Ensure thrust washers are not warped or

cracked
• Check for signs of wear in the following areas:
• Ensure check valve ball is free to move
• Rotor and stator of metering unit move freely
• Check control valve, spool and sleeve for wear
• Check the drive pin is not cracked or bent or scoring
• Check the rollers in thrust bearing are free to ro- • Replace all seals and ‘O’ rings
tate
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

Re–assembly
NOTE: Great care should be taken during re–as-

sembly. Coat all components in hydraulic oil.
• Ensure drive pin is horizontal before installation.
• Ensure thick thrust washer internal diameter

chamfer is towards the valve sleeve.
• Do not over torque end plate.
• This motor does not have to be timed due to a

33
master spline.
• Finally, check motor turns freely.
Replace the end cover
6 4
Refit the bolts and torque up in sequence to an initial
setting of 10.8 Nm (8 lbf ft)
1 2
Torque up the bolts in sequence to a second setting
of 30.0 Nm (21 lbf ft) 1
3 7
34
Pressure Testing
Connect a suitable pressure gauge capable of read-

ing up to 200 bar (2900 psi) to the connector inside
the left hand loader support.
• Start engine. A standby pressure of 6–7 bar

(87–101 psi) should be observed.
• Turn steering to the left or right to the stop. A

maximum pressure of 180 bar (2030 psi) should
be seen.
NOTE: Engine speed should be set to 1000 rev/min. 35
For settings and adjustment procedure refer to the

pressure testing section.
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

SECTION 50 – CAB HEATING – CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 50 – CAB HEATING
CONTENT
50 100 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine Radiator Coolant:
Antifreeze – Ambra Agriflu 12 Litres (3.1 US. gals)
Water 12 Litres (3.1 US. gals)
System Type Pressurized Full Flow By–pass
with Expansion Chamber
Naturally Aspirated 13 – 19mm (0.50 in. – 0.75 in)
Thermostat:
Radiator Cap 0.90 bar (13 psi)
TORQUE VALUES
Coolant/Hot water hose connections 5 Nm (3.6 lbf ft)
Air hose ducting connections 5 Nm (3.6 lbf ft)
Heater housing to floor mounting bolts 6.2 Nm (4.6 lbf ft)
SEALANTS
Code Number Name
82995768 Sealer–Anaerobic Low strength
82995776 Sealer–Silicone
82995774 Sealer–Polyester Urethane
82995773 Sealer–Anaerobic
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 50 – CAB HEATING – CHAPTER 1
Cab Heating
The cab is heated by a radiator mounted below the
cab seat, which is supplied hot water from the engine
coolant system. A blower motor mounted behind the
cab radiator is used to transfer the heat into the cab.
Heater Blower Control, Figure 1

The three speed blower is controlled by switch (1)
mounted in the instrument console to the right of the
cab seat. Turn the switch clockwise to the first position
for slow speed. Further rotation of the switch in a
clockwise direction selects medium and fast speeds.
The blower draws outside air from beneath the cab
floor and through a filter medium into the cab.
Heater Temperature Control, Figure 1

The temperature of the air from the radiator is ad-
justed by rotation of the control knob (2) which opens
or closes the radiator valve increasing or decreasing
the water flow as required. Turn the control clockwise
to increase the temperature of air from the heater 1
and counter clockwise to reduce the temperature.
WARNING
The cab air filters are designed to remove dust from the
air but may not exclude chemical vapour. When work-
ing in an enclosed area ensure there is adequate ven-
tilation as exhaust fumes can suffocate you.
Cab Air Filter

Before servicing the air filter situated under the drivers
seat, switch off the blower and close all windows and
one door. Forcibly close the other door. The resulting
back pressure will dislodge loose dirt from the under-
side of the filters.
To remove the filter (1) release the retaining straps (2)
and remove the filter element. Ensure the element, and
sealing faces are not damaged on removal.
IMPORTANT: In humid conditions, such as occur on
most early mornings, do not switch on the blower
prior to servicing the filters. Damp particles drawn
into the filter may solidify and prove difficult to re-
move without washing. 2
The filter elements are made of specially treated
paper with a sealing strip bonded to the outer face.
Clean all of the elements by blowing with compressed
air from the clean side through to the dirty side. The
compressed air should not exceed 2 bar (30 psi) and
the air line nozzle should be at least 300 mm (12 in)
from the element.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Heater Radiator
The heater radiator (1) is fitted in a housing under the
cab seat for central displacement of warm or cold air
flow. 1
IMPORTANT: Too ensure a good flow of air through
the heater radiator the filter should be cleaned more
frequently when operating in extremely dusty condi-
tions.
3
Air Flow Vents
Air flow vents are connected to the heater housing
and receive air from the blower motor, to direct warm
or cold air onto the windscreen and side windows or
to the cab interior as required.
Each vent may be swivelled and adjusted to control
the flow of air.
To open a vent, press one side of the disc and turn
it, as required, to direct the air flow.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

3
2 4
5
Schematic – Heater system
1. Heater Valve mounted to the right of the heater housing 4. Air ducting to the rear windscreen
below the cab floor 5. Air intake to the heater housing from below the cab floor
2. Air ducting to the front windscreen 6. Heater pipes to and from heater taken from the engine oil
3. Heater control panel cooler pipes
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

FAULT FINDING – GENERAL

Items that may cause a concern are suggested in the Hoses are unrestricted and not leaking.
fault finding chart but as a general rule apply the fol- Check the electrical connections are good and the
lowing steps: blower motor is operational.
Ensure water flow to the heater radiator is steady The operating cable to the heater valve and valve is
and all air has been removed from the system. operational.
FAULT FINDING
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION
Dust enters the cab Improper seal around filter element Check seal condition
Blocked filter Clean or replace filter
Defective filter Replace filter
Excessive air leak (s) around doors Repair and Seal air leak (s)
and windows
Blower motor air flow low Blocked filter or recirculation filter Clean or replace filter(s)
Heater radiator core blocked Clean radiator core thoroughly
Blower motor not working Fuse blown Replace fuse
Cab does not heat up Engine not reaching operating Replace thermostat
temperature. Thermostat stuck
open
Heater hose from engine to cab Ensure water flow to heater radiator
radiator, kinked or blocked is adequate and not restricted
Cab does not cool Heater control turned on Turn temperature control knob fully
counterclockwise for maximum
cooling
Heater control valve stuck in open Free up valve or change as

position required
Temperature not stable Low engine coolant Top up coolant recovery tank
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

OVERHAUL
IMPORTANT: When overhauling the heating system
remember that with the engine running or shortly
after it is turned off that the system will be at engine
temperature and therefore the water will be hot and
under pressure.
To effect repairs to the heater core or blower motor,
it will be necessary to remove the attaching bolts
1
from the seat and remove seat from the heater hous-
ing.
6
Draining the System
Too drain the cooling system down disconnect either
hose at the ‘T’ junction found at the rear of the engine
oil filter mounted to the right hand side of the engine.
7
Heater Radiator
With the system drained remove the heater radiator
hose connections, attaching bolts and remove from
the vehicle.
Inspect the Heater Radiator: 1
Check water flow through the heater pipe which
should be free running, if not clear any blockage.
Fins should be free of all debris and not damaged
clean and or repair.
Clean the heater radiator using compressed air not
exceeding 7 bar (100 psi) taking care not to damage
the radiator fins.
Ensure tbe radiator is not leaking under pressure, re- 8
pair or replace as required.
Clean the chamber with a damp, cloth and re–as-
semble the housing filter element with the seal facing
the inside of the cover.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Blower Motor
The blower motor can be removed by removal of the
attaching hardware and disconnection of the wiring
connector.
Check the blower is working, if not check fuse and
continuity of blower motor. If defective replace the
blower unit as an assembly.
9
Heater Control Valve
To service the control valve disconnect the hoses
and the control cable and remove. Check the oper-
ation of the valve and if tight or worn replace. 1
10
Heater Control Panel
The blower motor is operated by a 3 position switch
which through a variable potentiometer increases or
decreases voltage to the blower motor.
The heater valve is operated by a control cable
which will push or pull the valve into an open or
closed position.
11
Both of the above are mounted to the right of the
drivers seat and can be accessed by removal of the
control panel for repair or replacement.
12
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 50 – AIR CONDITIONING – CHAPTER 2 1
SECTION 50 – AIR CONDITIONING
CONTENT
50 200 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Fault Finding and System Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Leak Testing, Charging, Discharging and System Flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Component Overhaul (excluding compressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Compressor Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Compressor Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
SPECIFICATIONS
Refrigerant Specification R134a
Refrigerant Charge 1.3 kg (2.86 lbs)
Compressor Oil Specifications SP20 (PAG Type = Viscosity Index 231)
Refrigerant Oil Capacity

System (approximately) 135 cc (4.7 Fluid Ounces, Imperial)
Cooling capacity @ 22° C – 49° C (75° F – 120°F) ambient. 4.5 kW, 29,000 BTU/hr Typical
(Actual capacity dependent on system control operator settings)
Low Pressure Cut Out Switch (Mounted behind the front radiator grille behind the battery and attached to the
receiver drier)
On 2.1 +/– 0.3 bar (30.4 psi)
Off 2.0 +/– 0.2 bar (29.0 psi)
Temperature Cycling Control Switch (Mounted under the seat pod in the right hand side)
Switch Setting On Off
Minimum Cooling 14 +/– 2 ° C 10° C
Maximum Cooling 4 +/– 1° C 1 +/– 1° C
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 50 – AIR CONDITIONING – CHAPTER 2
COMPRESSOR
Manufacturer and Type Sanden SD7H15
Compressor Clutch and Pulley Air Gap 0.4–0.8 mm (0.016–0.031in)
Drive Belt Tension (measured at the widest gap) 10 mm (0.4in) deflection with 1kg (2.2lb) force
applied midway between the pulleys
TORQUES – COMPRESSOR
Cylinder Head Bolts M6 10.8–16.6 Nm (7.8–12.2 lbf.ft)
M8 29.4–39.2 Nm (21.7–28.9 lbf ft)
Clutch Front Plate Retaining Bolt M5 x6 7–11 Nm (5.1–7.9 lbf.ft)
Armature Retaining Nut M8 14.8–20.6 Nm (10.8–15.2 lbf ft)
Compressor Mounting Bolts 43 Nm ( 32 lbf.ft)
ADJUSTMENT – COMPRESSOR
Air Conditioning Compressor Assembly
(where fitted) – 75 hp
A correctly tensioned belt can be deflected
13–19mm (0.50–0.75 in) when hand pressure is ap-
plied midway between the alternator and crankshaft
pulley
Once adjusted re–torque the tension arm bolt to
33.9Nm (25 lbf ft).
13
Air Conditioning Compressor Assembly
(where fitted) – 92 to 108 hp
The compressor drive belt (1) can be tensioned by
rotation of the idler arm (2). Slacken the idler arm bolt
and adjust the arm to a belt deflection of 16mm
(3/8in).
Once adjusted re–torque the tension arm bolt to
33.9Nm (25 lbf ft).
1
14
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SPECIAL TOOLS
Only Certified Refrigerant Recovery, Recycling and Recharge Equipment suitable for the type of refrigerant gas
R134a should be used on these vehicles when servicing the air conditioning system.
This special equipment is available through recognised suppliers of air conditioning equipment. Refer to the Tool
supplier for details on the latest equipment available for servicing the air conditioning system.
General Tools
Vacuum/charge Portable system Tool No NH 294030
Recovery/recharge Portable System Tool No NH 294048
Evaporator and Condenser Cleaner Tool No NH 293831
Expansion Valve Tape Tool No NH 293826
Electronic Gas Leak Detector Tool No NH294036
Manifold Gauge Set (Where required) OTC/V.L Churchill Ltd Part No NH00172
Compressor Tools
Sanden Compressor SD7H15 Tool No 297423
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS refrigerant recovery unit operated by a certified

technician must be used.
WARNING
Before overhauling an air conditioning system read
• When discharging the refrigerant in the system
and observe the following Safety Precautions If a re-
make sure you are operating in well–ventilated
pair or replacement becomes necessary, ensure that
premises with good air circulation and far away
only certified Air Conditioning technicians are em-
from open flames.
ployed, using approved equipment to effect repairs.
Do not attempt to disassemble the air conditioning
system, It is possible to be severely frostbitten or in- • When charging and discharging the system al-
jured by escaping refrigerant. ways wear goggles and take suitable precau-
tions to protect the face in general and the eyes
IMPORTANT: Do not allow refrigerant to escape into in particular, from accidental spillage of the re-
the atmosphere. frigerant fluid.
Refrigerant must be handled with care in order to • The oil and refrigerant mixture inside the air
AVOID HAZARDS. conditioning system is pressurized.
Consequently, never loosen fittings or tamper
with lines unless the system has been properly
Undue direct contact with liquid refrigerant can pro- discharged.
duce freezing of skin and eyes.
• Before loosening any connection, cover the fit-
Keep the refrigerant container and air conditioning ting in question with a cloth and wear gloves and
system away from flame or heat sources, the result- goggles in order to prevent refrigerant from re-
ing pressure increase can cause the container or aching the skin or eyes.
system to explode.
• In the event of an accident, proceed as follows:–
If in direct contact with open flames or heated metal
surfaces, the refrigerant will decompose and pro-
duce products that are toxic and acidic. If the refrigerant has reached the eyes, wash
them immediately with copious amounts of steri-
lised water or mains pressure tap water and
Make sure to comply with the following indications transfer to hospital for immediate medical help.
and simple precautions to avoid any risk of injury:
If the refrigerant has touched the skin, wash with
• Never discharge refrigerant into the atmosphere. cold water and transfer to hospital for immediate
When servicing air conditioning units a certified medical help.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Description and Operation

NOTE: The Air Conditioning compressor will only run
when the cab blower motor is operating.
To operate push the button (1), which will engage the
air conditioning compressor
A three speed blower is used for the air circulation
and operates by turning the switch (2) Figure 1,
mounted to the right of the operator seat.
1st Position – Low Speed
2nd Position – Medium Speed
3rd Position – Fast Speed
The air–conditioner filter is located on the left hand
side of the seat pod.
1
WARNING
The air filter is designed to remove dust from the air
but may not exclude chemical vapour. Refer to
chemical manufacturers directions regarding protec-
tion from dangerous chemicals.
If the machine has been parked in the sun, quicken

the cooling by operating the air–conditioning for 2–3
minutes at its coldest setting. Set maximum blower
speed with a window left partially open to force most
of the warm air from the cab.
With the air cooled sufficiently, close the window and
adjust the controls to the desired temperature. To en-
sure proper operation of the system be sure the cab
filter is regularly serviced. Refer to filter mainten-
ance.
It is the normal function of the air–conditioner to ex-
tract water from the air. As such it is possible pools
of water will collect beneath the drain hose outlets
under the cab when the machine is stationary.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

REFRIGERANT R–134a
WARNING
R–134a can be dangerous if improperly handled.
Therefore it is important the following warning and
directions are adhered to.
R–134a has a boiling point of 10°F (–12°C).
Never expose any part of the air–conditioner system
to flame or excessive heat because of risk of fire or
explosion, and the production of phosgene gas.
Never disconnect or disassemble any part of the air–
conditioning system as escaping refrigerant can
cause frostbite.
WARNING
If refrigerant should contact the skin use the same
treatment as for frostbite.
Warm the area with your hand or lukewarm water
90°F (32°C), cover the area loosely with a bandage
to protect affected area against infection and consult
a doctor immediately.
If refrigerant should contact the eyes wash immedi-
ately in cold clean water for at least 5 minutes and
consult a doctor immediately.
Air Flow Vents

Air flow vents are conveniently positioned in the cab
and may be independently adjusted, as required, to
direct warm or cold air onto the windscreen and side
windows or to the cab interior as required.
Each vent may be swivelled and adjusted to control
the flow of air.
To open a vent, press one side of the disc and turn
it, as required, to direct the air flow.
A = Standard Layout
B = When Air Conditioning is fitted
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

PRINCIPALS OF AIR CONDITIONING

The function of the air conditioning system is to im-
prove the operator’s comfort by cooling the air tem-
perature inside the cab and reducing the humidity
level.
In order to achieve this heat transfer the following
principals of heat generation and transfer are applied
within the air conditioning system.
1. When two bodies of different temperature come
together heat is transferred from one to another.
On air conditioning systems an evaporator is
used to hold the low temperature refrigerant 60–50–001 TI
which absorbs the heat from the air within the
cab. 4
2. When a gas is pressurised the temperature of the
gas will rise. In air conditioning systems the in-
crease in pressure is achieved using a com-
pressor.
60–50–002 TI
5
3. When a gas is cooled it will condense into a
liquid. In the air conditioning system a condenser
is used to cool the gas and the resulting liquid is
stored in a receiver dryer.
60–50–003 TI
6
4. When a liquid is atomized through an orifice, the
temperature of the resultant vapour will drop.
The low temperature of the atomized liquid will
then absorb heat from its surroundings. On air
conditioning systems the refrigerant is atomized
using an expansion valve.
C°
60–50–004 TI
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

8
Air Conditioning Principle of Operation
1. Expansion Valve – Atomizes Liquid Refrigerant Before Passing to Evaporator
2. Evaporator– Absorbs Heat From Air In Cab
3. Compressor – Compresses and Raises Temperature Of Refrigerant Gas
4. Condenser and Receiver Dryer – Converts Refrigerant from Gas to a Liquid
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

LOW PRESSURE SIDE HIGH PRESSURE SIDE
EXPANSION VALVE
LOW TEMPERATURE
HIGH PRESSURE LIQUID
FILTERED AND MOISTURE REMOVED
LOWER TEMPERATURE
LOW PRESSURE
ATOMIZED LIQUID
RECEIVER DRYER
LOWER TEMPERATURE
EVAPORATOR HIGH PRESSURE LIQUID
CONDENSER
WARM
LOW PRESSURE VAPOUR
HIGH TEMPERATURE
HIGH PRESSURE VAPOUR
COMPRESSOR
HEAT FROM INSIDE CAB HEAT MOVES TO OUTSIDE AIR
MOVES TO REFRIGERANT FROM REFRIGERANT
9
Air Conditioning Flow Diagram
It can now be seen that the principal components of By giving off heat to the outside air, the vapour is con-
an air conditioning system are:– densed to a liquid which moves under high pressure
• Refrigerant to the receiver dryer where it is stored until released
to the evaporator by the temperature sensing expan-
• Evaporator
sion valve.
• Compressor
As liquid refrigerant passes through the metered ori-
• Condenser fice in the expansion valve the refrigerant changes
• Receiver Dryer from a high pressure liquid to a low pressure atom-
• Expansion Valve ized liquid with a lower temperature.
Figure 8, uses the examples above to illustrate the This low pressure, low temperature, atomized liquid
air conditioning cycle. enters the evaporator coils and absorbs heat from
the cab warm air blown across the coils and fins by
Figure 9, shows in schematic form the flow of re-
the cab blower motor. The refrigerant now changes
frigerant through the five major components of an air
from a cold low pressure atomized liquid to a warm
conditioning system.
low pressure vapour and leaves the evaporator
Refrigerant is drawn into the compressor as a cool, outlet, moving to the suction (low pressure) side of
low pressure vapour which is compressed and then the compressor to repeat the cycle.
pumped out as a hot, high pressure vapour to the
As this heat loss is taking place, moisture (humidity)
condenser.
in the cab air will condense on the outside of the
As the hot, high pressure vapour passes through the evaporator and drain off as water through the drain
condenser core it gives off heat to the cooler outside hoses attached to the evaporator drain pan, thereby
air, being drawn past the fins by the engine cooling reducing the humidity level of the cab.
fan.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Refrigerant
To achieve the absorption and the release of heat
which is, in essence, the function of an air condition-
ing system, requires the use of a suitable “refriger-
ant” - a liquid that has a relatively low temperature
boiling point, plus certain desirable safety and stabil-
ity features.
The refrigerant used in the air conditioning system is
refrigerant R134a.
NOTE: To help protect the environment legislation
has been introduced in most territories banning the
release into the atmosphere of refrigerants,including
R134a. All service procedures contained in this man-
ual can be carried out without the need to release re-
frigerant into the atmosphere.
In order to prevent the incorrect type of refrigerant
being charged to the system the service valves fitted
to the Backhoe Loader and necessary to connect up
refrigerant recovery, evacuation and recycling/re-
charging equipment will be of two different sizes as
recognised and specified by the air conditioning in-
dustry.
WARNING
R134a refrigerant is not compatible with R–12 re-
frigerant. Do not attempt to replace R134a refriger-
ant with R–12 refrigerant or test the system using
gauges or equipment previously used with R12 as
damage to the system will result.
R-134a refrigerant is stable at all operating tempera-

tures and able to absorb great quantities of heat.
The boiling point of R-134a is -22° C (-15° F) at at-
mospheric pressure.
If the pressure is increased, R-134a will readily va-
porize to absorb heat at temperatures between
-11.7° C (11° F) at 1.9 bar (27.5 psi) and 0°C (32°
F) at 2.9 bar (42 psi) in the evaporator.
At higher pressures, R-134a will condense and give
off heat at temperatures between 48° C (118° F) at
12.4 bar (180 psi) and 58° C (136° F) at 15.85 bar
(230 psi) in the condenser.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

10
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Compressor
1. Discharge Chamber 6. Wobble Plate
2. Pistons 7. Pulley/Electro–magnetic Clutch
3. Reed Valve Plate Assembly 8. Pulley Bearing
4. Cylinder Head 9. Cam Plate
5. Static Gear
Compressor Pump
The air conditioning compressor pump is mounted Refrigerant is drawn in on the downward stroke of a
on the left hand side of the engine and is belt driven piston through the reed valves located either end of
from the crankshaft pulley. the cylinder assembly. Refrigerant enters the cylin-
The compressor separates the low and high pres- der assembly through a gallery in the outer circum-
sure sides of the system and is basically a pump ference of the cylinder assembly.
which has two functions: The upwards stroke of the piston compresses the re-
(1) To raise the refrigerant temperature by compres- frigerant and expels it through another reed valve
sion to a higher degree of temperature than the ambi- into an inner gallery in the cylinder assembly and out
ent (outside air) temperature. into the refrigerant circuit.
(2) To circulate the required volume of refrigerant The compressor is lubricated with a Polyalklene Gly-
through the system. col (PAG) oil Type SP20. This oil is miscible with the
refrigerant and is carried around the refrigerant cir-
The refrigerant compressor is a seven cylinder
cuit.
wobble plate unit housed in a die cast aluminium
housing. The compressor is activated by an electro-magnetic
clutch which functions to engage or disengage the
Drive to the wobble plate is from the pulley, through
compressor as required in the operation of the air
the electro – magnetic clutch to the main driveshaft.
conditioning system.
Attached to the driveshaft is a cam rotor which oscil-
lates the wobble plate. The wobble plate is prevented The clutch is primarily activated by the:–
from rotating by a static gear engaging with teeth • Temperature control switch
formed in the face of the plate. The seven pistons are • Low pressure cut–out switch
connected to the wobble plate by rods located in ball
sockets.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Temperature Control Switch

The air conditioner temperature control switch (1) is
mounted beneath the cab seat to the right hand side
of the blower motor assembly.
11
The switch is a device which turns the compressor
clutch on and off to maintain a constant average
evaporator temperature and senses the evaporator
temperature using a thermistor (2) attached to the
larger evaporator tube.
The temperature control switch compares the volt-
age of the thermistor, which is dependent on the tem-
perature of the evaporator, with the voltage across
the potentiometer of the ‘in cab’ temperature control
switch.
The switch upon comparing the two voltages deter-
mines whether the compressor clutch should be
switched ‘on’ or ‘off’ in order to maintain the desired
in cab temperature control. 12
Low Pressure Cut-out Switch

The low pressure switch (1) is mounted in the top of
the filter (2) mounted in front the radiator behind the
battery.
The purpose of the switch is to shut off the com-
pressor pump in the event of low pressure in the re-
frigerant system.
Low refrigerant pressure may occur due to a faulty
expansion valve, icing up of the expansion valve ori-
fice or refrigerant loss. Low refrigerant pressure may
result in damage to the compressor pump.
The low pressure switch is factory set and cannot be
adjusted.
13
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Condenser
The condenser, (1) located at the front of the
machine in front of the engine radiator consists of a
number of turns of continuous coil mounted in a
series of thin cooling fins to provide a maximum of
heat transfer in a minimum amount of space.
NOTE: The condenser after removal of the attaching

bolts can be slid out for cleaning.
The condenser receives the hot, high pressure re-
frigerant vapour from the compressor. The hot va-
pour passes through the condenser coils and outside
air is drawn through the condenser by the engine
cooling fan.
14
Heat moves from the hot refrigerant vapour into the
cooler outside air flowing across the condenser coils
and fins.
When the refrigerant vapour reaches the pressure
and temperature that will induce a change of state,
a large quantity of heat is transferred to the outside
air and the refrigerant changes to a high pressure
warm liquid.
The warm liquid refrigerant continues onto the re-
ceiver/drier where it is filtered and desiccated, to re-
move any moisture, before passing through an outlet
line to the thermostatic expansion valve.
15
Receiver Dryer
The receiver/dryer (1) situated behind the battery

stores the liquid refrigerant to be sure a steady flow
to the thermostatic expansion valve is maintained
under widely different operating conditions.
The drier section contains a desiccant (Molecular
sieve) to absorb any moisture within the system and
a filter prevents the entry of foreign particles.
NOTE: Any moisture in the air conditioning system
is extremely harmful. Moisture not absorbed by the
dehydrator will circulate with the refrigerant and
droplets may collect and freeze in the thermostatic
expansion valve orifice. This action will block the re-
16
frigerant flow and stop the cooling action. Moisture
will also react with refrigerant R-134a and the lubric-
ant to form a corrosive acid.
The desiccant can only absorb a limited amount of
moisture before reaching saturation point. Because
of this, after any system component replacement or
repairs requiring entry into the system, the receiver/
dryer should be replaced.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Expansion Valve
The expansion valve is located underneath the evap-
orator in the pressure line leading from the receiver/
dryer and performs the following functions:
1. METERING ACTION -
A metered orifice changes the liquid refrigerant
from a high pressure low temperature liquid to a
low pressure, lower temperature atomized liquid.
2. MODULATING ACTION -
A thermostatically controlled valve within the ex-
pansion valve body controls the volume of liquid
refrigerant passing through the orifice and
makes sure the refrigerant is fully vaporized with-
in the evaporator. Liquid refrigerant would dam- 17
age the compressor reed valves or freeze the
pistons.
3. CONTROLLING ACTION -
The valve responds to changes in the cooling re-
quirements. When increased cooling is required,
the valve opens to increase the refrigerant flow
and when less cooling is required the valve
closes and decreases the refrigerant flow.
Expansion Valve - Operation

All of the needed temperature sensing and pressure
sensing functions are consolidated into this basic
unit and no external tubes are required for these pur-
poses.
The refrigerant from the condenser and receiver
dryer enters the thermostatic expansion valve as a
high pressure warm liquid. Upon passing through the
ball and spring controlled metering orifice, the pres-
sure and temperature of the refrigerant is reduced
and the refrigerant leaves the thermostatic expan-
sion valve as a low pressure, lower temperature
atomized liquid. 60–50–014 TI
The atomized liquid now passes through the evapor- 18
ator where it absorbs heat before returning via the
expansion valve to the compressor as a warm low
pressure vapour.
There are two refrigerant passages in the valve. One
passage is in the refrigerant line from the condenser
to the evaporator and contains the ball and spring
type orifice valve. The other passage is in the re-
frigerant line from the evaporator to the compressor
and contains the valve’s temperature sensing el-
ement.
Liquid refrigerant flow from the condenser and
receiver dryer is controlled by a push-rod forcing the
orifice valve ball off its seat and the spring exerting
pressure on the ball to keep it on its seat.
During stabilized (vehicle shutdown) conditions, the
pressure on the bottom of the expansion valve
diaphragm rises above the pressure on the top of the
diaphragm allowing the valve spring to close the
orifice.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

When the system is started, the pressure on the bot-

tom of the diaphragm drops rapidly, allowing the ori-
fice to open and meter atomized liquid refrigerant to
the evaporator where it begins to vaporize.
Suction from the compressor draws the vaporized
refrigerant out of the evaporator and back through a
gallery in the top of the valve which passes the tem-
perature sensor.
The temperature sensor reacts to variations in re-
frigerant gas pressure returning from the evaporator.
When heat from the passenger compartment is ab-
sorbed by the refrigerant the pressure of the gas in-
creases causing a differential pressure above and
below the temperature sensor diaphragm. The dia-
phragm reacts to this pressure differential and a push
rod forces the ball in the expansion valve orifice
further off its seat. This reaction allows an increase
in the atomized refrigerant to flow through the valve,
to the evaporator, so that more heat can be absorbed
by the air conditioning system.
Similarly when the temperature of the gas returning
from the evaporator decreases the pressure of the
gas decreases. This causes the diaphragm to react
accordingly and allow the ball in the orifice to move
closer towards its seat thus reducing the flow of re-
frigerant through the valve to the evaporator.
Evaporator
The evaporator is located beneath the cab seat and
consists of a number of turns of continuous coils
mounted in a series of thin cooling fins to provide a
maximum of heat transfer in a minimum amount of
space.
Low temperature refrigerant in the evaporator ab-
sorbs heat from the hotter air in the operator’s com-
partment, thereby cooling the air.
19
Air Recirculation
An intake grille is located on the left side of the seat
base. A portion of the air flow will recirculate through
the evaporator.
20
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Filter General
The blower fan, draws warm air from outside the cab
through the intake filter (2) below the cab floor and al-
ready cooled dehumidified air through the recircula-
tion grille (1). The air passes over the evaporator
then into the cab through the six louvered vents.
Two vents are located on the front instrument panel
to direct air onto the windshield. Two are located at
the base of the rear posts to direct air onto the rear
window. Two additional vents are located at the front
and rear of the seat base to direct air at the operators
feet.
21
Blower Fan
The blower motor is controlled by a three-speed
switch (2) the switch uses a variable resistor to
change the fan speed.
High blower speed provides the greatest volume of
circulated air, however, a slower speed will allow the
air to contact the cooling fins and coils of the evapor-
ator for a longer period resulting in the warm air giving
up more heat to the cooler refrigerant. Therefore, the
coldest air temperature is obtained when the blower
fan is operated at the lowest speed.
22
FAULT FINDING AND TESTING THE AIR To prevent the entry of any foreign material, observe
CONDITIONING SYSTEM the following points:
Overhaul of the air conditioning system should only • Ensure all tools, gauges, hoses and replacement
be undertaken by a certified specialist refrigeration parts are kept clean and dry and are suitable for
engineer using a comprehensive air conditioning test the type of refrigerant gas used in the system.
kit, including a gas leak detector, suitable for R134a • Clean all hoses and fittings before disconnect-
refrigerant gas. ing. Cap or plug all openings when disconnected.
WARNING • When adding lubricating oil to the system always
Before dismantling an air conditioning system for re- uncap and re-cap the oil container immediately
pair the gas within the system must be discharged before and after use. Always ensure the oil re-
and recovered using a certified recovery unit de- mains free of moisture.
signed for the type of refrigerant gas used in the sys-
tem.
NEVER release refrigerant gas into the atmosphere.
ALWAYS wear safety goggles and gloves when serv-

icing any part of the air conditioning system.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Preliminary Fault Finding cates the clutch is engaging. If the clutch fails to
Always conduct the preliminary fault finding checks operate it may indicate an electrical problem in
before performance testing the system. the high low pressure cut out switches or mal-
function of the electric drive clutch on the com-
pressor.
1. Run the engine at 1000-1200 rev/min for 10 min-
utes with the air conditioner set at maximum 5. Check the engine cooling fan is drawing cool air
cooling and the blower on high speed. through the condenser
2. Check that the heater temperature control is 6. Check the compressor drive belt tension.
switched OFF. 7. Check the condenser core and grid is clean and
3. Check that the blower fan is operating at all free of obstruction.
speeds. 8. Check the cab air filter is clean and free of ob-
4. Check that the compressor clutch engages when struction.
the temperature control switch is turned from 9. Check the evaporator fins are not plugged or ex-
“OFF” to “ON” position. A clicking sound indi- cessively dirty.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

23
Attaching Manifold Gauge Set to the Tractor
1. Low Side Gauge 6. Test Hose to Low Side Service Connector
2. High Side Gauge 7. Shut-off Valve
3. Shut-off Valve 8. Low Pressure (Suction) Side Service Valve
4. Test Hose to High Side Service Connector 9. High Pressure (Discharge) Side Service Valve
5. Centre Hose (Not Used)
Performance Testing The Air Conditioning

System
The manifold gauge set is the most important tool manifold gauge set is connected into a system, pres-
used in testing and servicing the air conditioning sys- sure is registered on both gauges.
tem. • NEVER open the HIGH SIDE shut off valve when
NOTE: For Dealers who posses the latest design the system is operating.
level of refrigerant recovery, recycling and recharg- • ALWAYS open the LOW SIDE shutoff valve
ing station, these gauges are an integral part of the when adding refrigerant.
machine.
The following instructions for performance testing Attaching The Gauge Set To The Tractor
the air conditioning system is based on the use of the
gauge set shown. The principal of operation is how- WARNING
ever similar when testing the system using a recov- To avoid personal injury, stop the tractor engine dur-
ery and recharging station with integral gauges. ing connection of the manifold gauge set.
When using this type of equipment always consult
the manufacturers operating instructions. 1. Check that the gauge set shut off valves are
closed (turned fully clockwise).
Operating Precautions 2. Connect the high side gauge hose (normally red)
to the high pressure (discharge) side service
IMPORTANT: Always ensure the shut–off valves are
valve and the low side gauge hose (normally
closed (turn clockwise until seated) during all test
blue) to the low pressure (suction) side service
operations.
valve on the tractor. Ensure the hose connec-
In the closed position, refrigerant circulates around tions are fully tightened.
the valve stems to the gauges. Therefore, when the
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

IMPORTANT: Prior to connection of the manifold 5. Operate the system at maximum cooling, with
gauge set, identify the suction (low pressure) and the blower fan at high speed for 10 minutes to
discharge (high pressure) service gauge ports. The stabilize all components.
high pressure service valve is always in the line from 6. Check the manifold low pressure gauge reading
the compressor to the condenser. is within the specified range of approximately
0.28-2.48 bar (4-36 psi).
The high and low pressure service valves on the trac- 7. Check the manifold high pressure gauge reading
tor are spring loaded valve and will be automatically and compare the reading to the pressure indi-
opened when the test hose is connected. cated on the pressure temperature chart below.
8. Measure and compare the temperature of condi-
NOTE: The test hose must incorporate a valve de- tioned air entering the cab through the louvered
pressor to actuate this type of valve. air vents with the ambient air at the air intake
The service valves have a protective cap. This cap filters on the outside of the cab.
must be removed for test gauge connections and re- If the system is operating correctly the condi-
placed when service operations are completed. tioned air entering the cab should be 6–9° C
(10–15° F) cooler than the ambient temperature
Test Procedure of the outside air.
After the manifold gauge set has been connected 9. If it is confirmed that the system is not operating
and before pressure tests can be made, the system correctly refer to the fault diagnostic charts and
must be stabilized as follows: performance test gauge reading examples on
the following pages for possible corrective ac-
1. Apply the parking brake, check the gear shift tion.
levers are in neutral and close the cab windows
and doors. WARNING
2. Re–check that both the high and low side shut off A significant amount of refrigerant vapour may have
valves on the manifold gauge set are fully condensed to a liquid at the service fitting at the high
closed. side of the compressor. Use a cloth or other protec-
3. Run the engine at 1000-1200 rev/min. tive material when disconnecting the manifold hose
from this fitting to prevent personal injury to hands
4. Turn the heater temperature control ‘off’ and face.
APPROXIMATE HIGH PRESSURE GAUGE READINGS
Ambient Air Temperature High Pressure Gauge Reading

Degrees F Degrees C bar kgf/cm2 lb/in2
80 27 10.0/11.6 10.3/11.8 147/168
85 29 11.2/12.7 11.4/12.9 162/184
90 32 12.3/13.8 12.5/14.0 179/200
95 35 13.3/15.2 13.6/15.5 194/221
100 38 14.5/16.7 14.8/17.0 210/242
105 41 16.0/18.3 16.3/18.6 231/265
110 43 17.3/20.0 17.7/20.3 252/289
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSIS

Gauge Readings:– Low Pressure - Low
High Pressure - Low
Evaporator air not cold Low refrigerant charge. Perform leak tests and repair
Evacuate system
Charge system, re–test system
Evaporator air warm Extremely low refrigerant Perform leak tests and repair
charge.
Evacuate system
Charge system, re–test system
Expansion valve not permitting Check expansion valve as

Evaporator air cool but not follows:
sufficiently cold . sufficient flow.
Low pressure switch cutting Stuck valve
Set a for maximum cooling
out
Expansion valve to Low pressure gauge should
evaporator tube shows drop slowly
considerable condensation
or frost. If expansion valve is defective:
Too cold to touch
Discharge system
Replace expansion valve
Evacuate system
Charge system
Re–test
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSIS CHART

Gauge Readings:– Low Pressure - High
High Pressure - High
Evaporator air warm Improper operation of condenser Inspect for dirty condenser
Liquid line hot (condenser restricting air flow and cooling
outlet to expansion valve
tube) Check operation of condenser
cooling fans. Repair or replace
as needed.
High pressure switch Overcharged with refrigerant Check for overcharge as follows:
Stop the engine. Recover and
cutting out Air in system recycle the charge using correct
recovery equipment.
Recharge the the system with
the correct quantity of
refrigerant, replacing any lost
lubricant. Recheck performance
of air conditioning system.
Evaporator air not cold Expansion valve allowing too much Check expansion valve as
refrigerant to flow through the follows:
evaporator Set for maximum cooling.
Low pressure gauge should drop
slowly
If expansion valve is defective:

Discharge System
Replace Expansion Valve
Evacuate System
Charge System
Re–test
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


Gauge Readings:– Low Pressure - Low
High Pressure - High

Insufficient cooling Restriction in liquid line Discharge the system
Replace the receiver/drier.
Inspect all lines and tubing from
compressor outlet to expansion
valve.
Replace if needed.
Evacuate the system
Charge the system
Re–test

High Pressure - Low

Evaporator air not cold Internal leak in compressor. (reed Discharge the system
valves, gasket, worn or scored Replace the compressor
piston rings or cylinder) Evacuate the system
Charge the system
Re–test

Gauge Readings:– Low Pressure - Normal
High Pressure - Normal

Insufficient cooling Low System low on charge. Air or Perform leak test
pressure reading does not moisture present in system Discharge system
fluctuate with changes in Repair leaks
temperature control switch Replace receiver/drier
(pressure should drop until Check oil level
compressor cycles) Evacuate system
Evaporator air not cold. Charge the system
Re–test

High Pressure - Normal
Compressor cycles “on” Defective temperature control Stop engine and shut off A/C
and “off” too frequently (thermostatic) switch Replace temperature control
switch
Re–test system and check
compressor cycling
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

EXAMPLES OF MANIFOLD GAUGE

READINGS AND INTERPRETATIONS
The following examples show typical low and high
pressure gauge readings obtained when perform-
ance testing the air conditioning system with an
ambient temperature of 35° C (95° F).
The recommended corrective action is based on a
similar fault as identified in the performance test di-
agnosis charts.
PERFORMANCE TEST EXAMPLE 1
7 1
6 2
5 4 3
60–50–019
24
Performance Test Example 1
1. High Side Low 5. Low Side Hose Connected to
2. High Side Hand Valve Closed Low Side Service Connector
3. High Side Hose Connected to 6. Low Side Hand Valve Closed
High Side Service Connector 7. Low Side Low
4. Not Used
PROBLEM: CORRECTIVE PROCEDURES
Little or no cooling. 1. Leak test the system.
2. Repair leaks. (Discharge and recover the re-
CAUSE: frigerant from the system; replace lines or com-
Refrigerant slightly low. ponents).
3. Check compressor oil to ensure no loss.
CONDITIONS* 4. Evacuate the system.
Low side pressure too low. 5. Charge the system.
Gauge should read 1–2 bar (15-30 psi). 6. Performance test the system.
High side pressure too low. DIAGNOSIS: System refrigerant is low. May be
Gauge should read 13.3–14.8 bar caused by a small leak.
(194–215 psi).
Evaporator air not cold.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTE: * Test procedure based upon ambient tem-

perature of 355C (955 F). For proper high side gauge
reading for other ambient temperatures, refer to the
pressure temperature chart.
7 1
6 2
5 4 3
60–50–020
25
High Side Service Connector 7. Low Side Normal
4. Not Used
Insufficient cooling. 1. Leak test the system.
2. Discharge and recover the refrigerant from the
CAUSE: system.
Refrigerant excessively low. 3. Repair leaks.
4. Check compressor oil to ensure no loss.
CONDITIONS* 5. Evacuate the system.
Low side pressure very low. 6. Charge the system.
Gauge should read 1–2 bar (15-30 psi)
7. Performance test the system.
DIAGNOSIS: System refrigerant is extremely low. A
High side pressure too low.
serious leak is indicated.
Gauge should read 13.3–14.8 bar
(194–215 psi). NOTE: * Test procedure based upon ambient tem-
perature of 955 F. For proper high side gauge reading
for other ambient temperatures, refer to the pressure
Evaporator air warm.
temperature chart.
Low pressure switch cutting out
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

7 1
6 2
5 4 3
60–50–021
26
1. High Side Normal 5. Low Side Hose Connected to
4. Not Used
Insufficient cooling. 1. Leak test the system. Give special attention to
the compressor seal area.
CAUSE: 2. Discharge and recover the refrigerant from the
Air in system. system.
3. Repair leaks.
CONDITIONS* 4. Replace the receiver/dryer.
Low side pressure reading does not change when 5. Check compressor oil to ensure no loss.
compressor cycles “on” and “off”. 6. Evacuate the system.
7. Charge the system.
High side pressure slightly high or slightly low. Gauge
should read 13.3–14.8 bar (194–215 psi).
DIAGNOSIS: Air or moisture in system. System not
fully charged.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

7 1
6 2
5 4 3
60–50–022
27
High Side Service Connector 7. Low Side High
4. Not Used
Insufficient cooling. 1. Replace the compressor.
CAUSE: DIAGNOSIS: Internal leak in compressor caused by

Compressor malfunction. worn or scored pistons, rings, or cylinders.
CONDITIONS*
Low side pressure too high. Gauge should read
1–2 bar (15-30 psi).
High side pressure too low. Gauge should read pressure temperature chart.
13.3–14.8 bar (194–215 psi).
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

7 1
6 2
5 4 3
60–50–023
28
1. High Side High 5. Low Side Hose Connected to
High Side Service Connector 7. Low Side High
4. Not Used
PROBLEM: 3. If engine is overheating replace engine thermo-
Insufficient or no cooling. Engine overheats in some stat and radiator pressure cap.
cases. At this point, operate the system and check its per-
formance. If still unsatisfactory, proceed as follows:–
CAUSE: 4. Discharge and recover the refrigerant from the
Condenser not functioning properly. system.
5. Remove the condenser and clean and flush it to
CONDITIONS* ensure a free flow of refrigerant. Or, if the con-
denser appears to be unduly dirty or plugged, re-
place it.
1–2 bar (15-30 psi).
6. Replace the receiver/dryer.
High side pressure too high. Gauge should read
13.3–14.8 bar (194–215 psi). 7. Evacuate the system, and recharge it with the
correct quantity of refrigerant.
Liquid line hot.
Evaporator air warm.
DIAGNOSIS: Lack of cooling caused by pressure
High pressure switch cutting out.
that is too high on the high side, resulting from im-
proper operation of condenser. (Refrigerant charge
CORRECTIVE PROCEDURES may be normal or excessive).
1. Check belt. Loose or worn drive belts could
cause excessive pressures in the compressor NOTE: * Test procedure based upon ambient tem-
head. perature of 355C (955 F). For proper high side gauge
2. Look for clogged passages between the con- reading for other ambient temperatures, refer to the
denser fins and coil, or other obstructions that pressure temperature chart.
could reduce condenser airflow.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

7 1
6 2
5 4 3
60–50–024
29
High Side Service Connector 7. Low Side Normal
4. Not Used
Insufficient or no cooling. 1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant from the
system.
CAUSE: 2. Replace the receiver/dryer.
Large amount of air in system. 3. Evacuate the system.
4. Charge the system.
CONDITIONS* 5. Performance test the system.
1–2 bar (15-30 psi). DIAGNOSIS: Air in system. This, and the moisture
High side pressure too high. Gauge should read in the air, is contaminating the refrigerant, causing
13.3–14.8 bar (194–215 psi). the system to operate improperly.
Evaporator air not cool.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

7 1
6 2
5 4 3
60–50–025
30
1. High Side High 5. Low Side Hose Connected to
High Side Service Connector 7. Low Side Hide
4. Not Used
PROBLEM: Check the low side gauge. The pressure should
Insufficient or no cooling. drop slowly.
2. If the test indicates that the expansion valve is
CAUSE: defective, proceed as follows:
Improper operation of thermostatic expansion valve Discharge and recover the refrigerant from the
(stuck open) system.
CONDITIONS* Replace the expansion valve.
Evacuate the system.
Low side pressure too high. gauge should read
1–2 bar (15-30 psi). Charge the system.
High side pressure too high. Gauge should read Performance test the system.
13.3–14.8 bar (194–215 psi).
Evaporator air warm. DIAGNOSIS: Thermostatic expansion valve is al-
lowing too much refrigerant to flow through the evap-
Evaporator and suction hose (to compressor) sur- orator coils. Valve may be stuck open.
faces show considerable moisture.
CORRECTIVE PROCEDURES
1. Check for sticking expansion valve as follows:– reading for other ambient temperatures, refer to the
Operate the system at maximum cooling. pressure temperature chart.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

7 1
6 2
5 4 3
60–50–026
31
4. Not Used
PROBLEM: Operate the system at maximum cooling.
Insufficient cooling. Check the low side gauge. The pressure should
drop slowly.
CAUSE: 2. If the procedure outlined in Step 1 shows that the
Improper operation of thermostatic expansion valve expansion valve is defective, proceed as follows:
(stuck closed). Discharge system
Replace expansion valve
CONDITIONS* Evacuate the system.
Low side pressure too low (zero or vacuum). Gauge Charge the system.
should read 1–2 bar (15-30 psi).
Performance test the system.
High side pressure low. Gauge should read
13.3–14.8 bar (194–215 psi).
DIAGNOSIS: Expansion valve is not permitting a
Evaporator air cool, but not sufficiently cold. sufficient flow of refrigerant. May be caused by valve
Evaporator inlet pipe surface shows considerable stuck in restricted or closed position.
moisture or frost.
Low pressure switch cutting out. NOTE: * Test procedure based upon ambient tem-
CORRECTIVE PROCEDURES reading for other ambient temperatures, refer to the
1. Place finger on expansion valve to evaporator
tube. If too cold to touch, proceed as follows:
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

7 1
6 2
5 4 3
60–50–027
32
4. Not Used
Insufficient cooling. 1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant from the
system.
CAUSE: 2. Replace the liquid lines, receiver/dryer, or other
Restriction in high side of system. obstructed components.
3. Evacuate the system.
CONDITIONS* 4. Charge the system.
Low side pressure too low. Gauge should read 5. Performance test the system.
1–2 bar (15-30 psi). 6.
High side pressure too low. Gauge should read DIAGNOSIS: Restriction in the liquid line and/or re-
13.3–14.8 bar (194–215 psi). ceiver/dryer resulting in a “starved” evaporator (com-
NOTE: A normal or high reading of the high side pressor moving refrigerant from the evaporator
pressure gauge under these conditions indicates the faster than it can enter).
system is overcharged or the condenser or receiver/
dryer is too small.
Evaporator only slightly cool. perature of 955 F. For proper high side gauge reading
Liquid line and receiver/dryer are cool to touch and for other ambient temperatures, refer to the pressure
show frost or considerable moisture. temperature chart.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

7 B A 1
6 2
5 4 3
60–50–028
33
High Side Service Connector 7. Low Side Gauge
4. Not Used Compressor Cycles on at 2.3 bar (34 psi)
Compressor Cycles off at 1.9 bar (28 psi)
Compressor cycles (cuts in and out) too rapidly. 1. Stop the engine and shut off A/C system.
2. Replace thermostatic switch with switch of same
CAUSE: type.
Thermostatic switch defective. 3. Make sure the switch’s temperature sensor is in-
stalled in the same position and depth (in evapor-
CONDITIONS* ator core) as previous.
Low side pressure readings too high during both “on” 4. Performance test the system.
and “off” compressor cycles and between cycles.
Readings should be: DIAGNOSIS: Defective thermostatic switch.
0.8–1.0 bar (12-15 psi) - cycle “off”
2.5–2.7 bar (36-39 psi) - cycle “on” NOTE: * Test procedure based upon ambient tem-
1.7–1.9 bar (24-27 psi) - between cycles perature of 355C (955 F). For proper high side gauge
High side pressure normal. Gauge should read
13.3–14.8 bar (194–215 psi).
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

LEAK TESTING, DISCHARGING AND

CHARGING THE AIR CONDITIONING
SYSTEM
Leak Testing
To perform a leak test if refrigerant leakage is sus-
pected, use a leak detector following the manufac-
turer’s instructions.
leak detectors use light or sound dependant upon the
type used to alert the operator of a leak. If the leak
detector’s sensitivity is adjustable, be sure you cali-
brate the detector according to the manufacturer’s
instructions before use.
When using a leak detector, keep in mind that a very
slight amount of leakage in the compressor pulley
area is normal and does not necessarily indicate a re-
pair is required.
When a leak is located, follow these steps. 60–50–029 TI
• Discharge the system using a certified refriger- 34

ant recovery system.
• Repair the leak.
• Evacuate the system.
• Partially charge system with 400 grammes
(14 ozs) of refrigerant.
• Check system for leaks.
• Fully charge the system.
Always check the system for leaks as a final test after
evacuating and before recharging. Refer to Evacuat-
ing the system.
Discharging The System

Legislation has been introduced banning the release
of refrigerant into the atmosphere.
Whenever overhauling the air conditioning system or
performing other tasks which require the air condi-
tioning system to be dismantled it is necessary to
discharge the refrigerant gas before commencing re-
pair.
Before you can dismantle an air conditioning system
for repairs, you must discharge and recover the re-
frigerant using a certified recovery unit in accord-
ance with the manufacturers instructions.
Shown is a combined refrigerant recovery, evacu-
ation and recycling/charging station. This equipment
removes R–134a refrigerant from the air conditioning
system, recycles and recharges all in one hook up.
The unit is designed to be used with the manifold
gauge set built into the control panel.
60–50–030 TI
35
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

36
Connecting Recovery Evacuation and Recycling/Charging Station to the Tractor
1. Built In Manifold Gauge Set 3. Low Side (Suction) Service Valve (Blue Hose)
2. Recovery/Recharging Unit 4. High Side (Discharge) Service Valve (Red Hose)
Other recovery systems are available where the hose is connected to the high side (discharge) fit-
manifold gauges are not an integral part of the mating and the blue (low side) hose to the low side
chine. When this type of equipment is used a separ- (suction) fitting.
ate manifold gauge set must be used. NOTE: If a unit requiring the manifold gauge set is
The following is a summary of the steps for discharg- being used, the low and high sides of the manifold set
ing the system using a recovery/recycling unit are connected to the low and high sides of the tractor
WARNING air conditioning system. The hose from the recovery
unit is then connected to the manifold centre port. .
Never discharge refrigerant gas into the atmos-
3. To recover refrigerant, open both high and low
phere. Always wear safety goggles and gloves when
side valves on the control panel or the valves on
working with refrigerant. Only use authorised refrig-
the manifold gauge set if being used.
erant tanks.
4. Open the valves labelled “gas” and “liquid” on the
IMPORTANT: Always follow the manufactures in- recovery unit refrigerant tank.
structions when operating recovery equipment. 5. Plug in the unit’s power cord
1. Run the vehicle’s air conditioning system for a 6. Operate the recovery system in accordance with
few minutes. the manufacturers instructions.
2. Set up the recovery unit following manufacturer’s The compressor will shut off automatically when the
instructions. Ensure that the units red (high side) recovery is complete.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

FLUSHING THE SYSTEM A B

7 1
Air conditioning systems may occasionally become
contaminated with solid particles. This contamina-
tion may be the result of allowing dirt to enter the sys- 6
tem while it was open, from aluminium corrosion or
sludge, or from disintegrated compressor reed 2
plates. Contamination of this nature can result in 5
plugged evaporators, condensers and expansion
valves.
4 3
Flush System with dry nitrogen
60–50–032 TI
Each individual component must be flushed after dis- 37

connecting every hose fitting. Manifold Gauge Set
1. High Side Gauge
The compressor and expansion valve can not be 2. High Side Shut–off Valve
flushed, therefore, the compressor should be disas- 3. High Side Hose
sembled and cleaned or replaced and the expansion 4. Centre Service Hose
valve should be replaced. When flushing the system 5. Low Side Hose
always replace the receiver/drier. 6. Low Side Shut–off Valve
7. Low Side Gauge
NOTE: Never use any solvent for flushing an air

conditioning system other than a special flush sol-
vent made specifically for air conditioning systems.
Always follow the manufacturer’s recommendations
and directions for using the flushing equipment and
solvent.
Re–assemble and evacuate the system to remove

air and moisture as described in “Evacuating the
System”.
60–50–033 TI
38
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

EVACUATING THE SYSTEM and high sides of the vehicle air conditioning sys-
IMPORTANT: A system in which the refrigerant has tem as described for discharging the system.
been recovered to facilitate repairs, must be evacu- Connect the manifold centre hose to the vacuum
ated before new refrigerant is installed. pump suction port as per the manufacturers in-
Air and moisture are removed by evacuating the sys- structions.
tem using a vacuum pump. Fully open both the low and high side gauge shu-
The automatic recycling, recharge and evacuation toff valves.
stations or evacuating and charging stations avail- 2. If a combined recovery/evacuation unit is to be
able throughout the air conditioning industry incor- used attach the unit to the air conditioning sys-
porate a vacuum pump within the assembly. If this tem in accordance with the manufacturers in-
type of equipment is not available a separate vacuum structions. Be sure to read all installation and op-
pump and manifold gauge set must be used. erating instructions carefully before starting the
As the system is evacuated the boiling point of any unit.
moisture within the system is similarly lowered. As 3. After starting the evacuation cycle, note the low
the vacuum increases the boiling reduces to below side gauge to be sure the system pulls down into
that of the ambient temperate and the moisture is a vacuum.
subsequently boiled away. 4. Time the evacuation for a minimum of 30 minutes
The relationship of system vacuum to the boiling from the point when lowest vacuum is attained.
temperature at which the water vapour is removed 5. Thirty minutes later when the low side gauge at-
from the system is as follows: tains the lowest steady vacuum, stop the evacu-
System Vacuum Temperature ation process.
NOTE: The vacuum pump achieves ultimate vac-
In Cm. of °F °C uum with the vented exhaust valve closed. Do not
Mercury Mercury evacuate too quickly as oil may be drawn from the
28.0 71.0 100 38 system.
28.9 73.4 80 27 6. Check the system by closing the gauge shut–off
29.4 74.6 60 16 valves, turning the vacuum pump off and noting
29.7 75.4 40 5 the low side gauge reading. A loss of more than
29.8 75.7 20 -7 2″ (5 cm) of vacuum in 5 minutes indicates either
29.9 75.9 0 -18 a leak or moisture in the system.
7. If the gauge needle remains stationary and the
vacuum is maintained for 3-5 minutes, close both
the high and low side manifold hand valves, turn
NOTE: For every 1000 feet (305 m) above sea level, off and disconnect the center hose from the
the vacuum gauge reading must be corrected by ad- pump. The system is now ready for charging.
ding 1, (2.54 cm) of mercury to compensate for the
change in atmospheric pressure. 8. If a leak is detected, charge the system with ap-
proximately 14 ozs (400 g) of refrigerant, see
IMPORTANT: Be sure the system is completely discharging the system and locate the leak using a
charged as refrigerant will damage the vacuum leak detector.
pump.
9. Once the leak is located discharge and recover
1. If the manifold gauge set is being used connect the refrigerant in the system, repair the leak, then
the low and high sides of the manifold to the low repeat the evacuation procedure.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

CHARGING THE SYSTEM 5. If the refrigerant charge will not completely

IMPORTANT: Be sure there are no leaks in the sys- transfer to the air conditioning system, recover
tem and the system has been fully evacuated. and recharge the system.
Observe all safety recommendations when handling 6. Close the high and low side valves on the units
refrigerant R-134a, see “Precautions when Handling control panel, or manifold gauge set if being used
Refrigerant R-134a” in this Section. and test the air conditioning as detailed in Per-
1. Ensure the charging unit is correctly connected formance Testing The Air Conditioning System
to the tractor air conditioning system in accord- on Page 15.
ance with the manufacturers instructions. NOTE: After charging a system use the following
2. If a charging unit, in conjunction with the manifold start up procedure to ensure the lubricating oil is
gauge set is used, open the high and low side properly dispersed around the system:
hand valves on the manifold. • Ensure air conditioning is switched OFF.
3. Charge the system with 0.75 kg (1.65 lbs) of re- • Start the engine and bring speed down to idle.
frigerant as per the manufacturers instructions. • Turn the air conditioning ON and allow system to
4. If the charging rate becomes very slow close the operate for at least one minute before increasing
high side valve carefully, start the tractor and engine speed.
set engine speed to idle. Turn ‘ON’ the air condi-
tioning so that the compressor can pull the re-
mainder of the refrigerant into the system.
39
Connecting Recovery Evacuation and Recycling/Charging Station to the Tractor
1. Built In Manifold Gauge Set 3. Low Side (Suction) Service Valve (Blue Hose)
2. Recovery/Recharging Unit 4. High Side (Discharge) Service Valve (Red Hose)
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

COMPONENT OVERHAUL (EXCLUDING

COMPRESSOR)
GENERAL
WARNING
Before disconnecting components in the air condi-
tioning system the refrigerant gas must be dis-
charged and recovered using a certified recovery
system. Refer to Discharging the system on Page
31. Do Not discharge the gas into the atmosphere.
If an air conditioning component is to be replaced

during a system overhaul it is necessary to drain any
refrigerant oil that has collected in the component
being replaced into a clean calibrated container.
A volume of clean refrigerant oil equivalent to that re-
moved from the replaced component must then be
added to the new item before being installed onto the
tractor.
Upon completion of the repair evacuate, recharge,
leak test and performance test the system to ensure
correct operation.
EXPANSION VALVE
The expansion valve is not a serviceable item and
must be replaced if defective.
1. Fully discharge the air conditioning system.
2. Remove the seat to gain access to the valve.
3. To gain access to the expansion valve partially lift
the evaporator core from its position in the cab
floor.
4. Remove the Allen screw securing the inlet and
outlet connections to the valve and pull valve
from tubing.
5. Replace the ‘O’ ring seals and lubricate with re-
frigerant oil prior to installing the valve using dis-
assembly procedure in reverse.
40
6. Evacuate, leak test and recharge the system.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

EVAPORATOR
1. Discharge and reclaim refrigerant gas using
certified recovery systems.
2. Remove the seat and cover plate to reveal evap-
orator assembly.
3. Remove temperature cycling control thermocou-
ple.
4. Disconnect tubing to expansion valve.
5. Remove evaporator.
6. Check the evaporator assembly fins for damage.
Straighten fins if necessary.
7. Clean the evaporator core of all foreign material
to be sure it is free of obstructions.
8. Check the evaporator assembly for indications of
refrigerant leakage. If damage or leaks are evi-
dent, replace the evaporator core.
9. If a new evaporator is to be installed drain the re-
frigerant oil in the evaporator into a clean cali-
brated container. Measure the quantity of oil ob-
tained and add the same quantity of new
refrigerant oil directly into the replacement evap-
orator core.
10. Install evaporator using disassembly procedure
in reverse.
11. Evacuate, leak test and recharge the system. 41
AIR CONDITIONER TEMPERATURE CYCLING

CONTROL SWITCH
1. Remove the seat mounting plate.
2. The temperature cycling switch is mounted to the
side of the blower motor assembly.
3. Carefully pull and disconnect the switch wiring at
the connector.
4. Remove temperature control switch and replace
as required.
42
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

LOW PRESSURE CUT–OUT SWITCH

1. With the engine ‘Off’ check continuity across the
switch contacts. If the switch shows ‘Open Cir-
cuit’ replace as detailed below.
IMPORTANT: The pressure switch can not be re-
placed without discharging the system.
2. Remove switch by unscrewing from self sealing
schrader valve.
3. Replace with new switch and connect to har-
ness.
43
BLOWER MOTOR ASSEMBLY
The blower motor can if required be removed without
discharging the system as follows:–
1. Remove the cab seat mounting plate.

NOTE: Take care not to damage hoses during this
operation. If the cab heater hoses restrict movement
of the housing drain the heater assembly and discon-
nect the hoses.
2. Disconnect the motor wiring connector block.
3. Remove the remaining motor securing screws
and withdraw motor.
4. Re–assembly follows the disassembly pro-
cedure in reverse. 44
RECEIVER DRYER
The receiver/dryer cannot be overhauled and must
be replaced as an assembly. The receiver/dryer as-
sembly should be replaced if it is suspected that
moisture is in the system.
The receiver dryer must also be replaced if the sys-
tem has been discharged and the air conditioning
joints disconnected.
certified recovery systems.
2. Disconnect the hoses and switch and remove the
dryer from the tractor.
3. Drain the refrigerant oil from the receiver dryer
45
into a clean calibrated container. Measure the
quantity of oil obtained and add the same quan-
tity of new refrigerant oil directly into the new
item.
4. Cap and plug all fittings to prevent any dirt enter-
ing the system.
5. Install a new receiver dryer.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

CONDENSER
1. Disconnect the connections to the condenser.
2. Remove condenser from machine.
3. Inspect the condenser assembly fins for damage
and be sure they are not plugged.
4. Check the condenser for signs of leakage. If the
condenser is damaged or leaking, install a new
condenser assembly.
5. If the condenser is to be replaced, drain the re-
frigerant oil from the condenser into a clean cali-
brated container. Measure the quantity of oil ob-
tained and add the same quantity of new
refrigerant oil directly into the new condenser.
46
6. Soak new tubing connector ‘O’ rings in clean re-
frigerant lubrication oil and install onto tubing
7. Evacuate, leak test and recharge the system.
CAB AIR FILTER

1. Before servicing the filters, switch off the blower
and close all windows and one door. Slam the
final door closed and the resulting back pressure
will dislodge most of the loose dirt from the un-
derside of the filters.
2. Remove filter element(s) and clean by blowing
with compressed air not exceeding 2 bar (30 lbf/
in2).
Blow the dust from the upper surface through the
element to the underside. Hold the nozzle at
least 12 in (300 mm) from the element to prevent
damage to the paper pleats.
3. Clean both filter chambers with a damp, lint free 47
cloth.
4. Replace the filter elements with the rubber seal
uppermost and re–install the covers.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

COMPRESSOR – OVERHAUL
Compressor Removal
certified recovery systems. Record the amount
of oil discharged into the collector as (X). CC
2. Disconnect tubing to compressor. X=
3. Disconnect wiring to compressor clutch.
4. Disconnect drive belt, remove the four mounting
bolts and remove compressor from tractor.
5. Drain the refrigerant oil from the old compressor
into a clean calibrated container. Measure and
record the quantity of oil as (Y). This information 48
is required during installation of the new or over-
hauled unit.
NOTE: It is necessary to rotate the compressor drive
shaft several times to completely expel all the oil.
Compressor Installation
6. Installation is the reversal of the removal but the
following points should be noted:–
• Torque the mounting bolts to 40–51Nm
(29–38lbf.ft).
NOTE: It is recommended that a new receiver / drier
assembly is installed after any system component
replacement or any repair that requires entry into the
system.
49
• Drain the oil from the new compressor to be fitted
into a clean container, or if the old compressor is
to be refitted, obtain a new can of refrigerant oil.
• Calculate the amount of oil to be installed as,
(x)+(y) and refill the compressor.
• Reconnect the hoses to the compressor and
tighten all bolts and hoses.
50
After charging a system use the following start up
procedure to ensure the lubricating oil is properly
dispersed around the system:
• Ensure air conditioning is switched OFF.
• Start the engine and bring speed down to idle.
• Turn the air conditioning ON and allow system to
operate for at least five minutes before increas-
ing engine speed.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Oil Retained in System Components

After replacement of individual system components
it will be necessary to add some oil to the system to
make up the amount lost in the removed component.
The table below shows some typical volumes for the
components. It is, however, still recommended that
the oil level measurement, described previously is
carried out after a new component has been installed
to establish correct oil quantity.
Component Typical oil amount

fl.oz. cc
Compressor 2 57
Evaporator 1.15 33
Condenser 0.5 14
Receiver / drier 0.25 7
Hoses 0.14 4
Preliminary Inspection
1. Rotate the compressor shaft. Use a suitable
socket on the hub centre bolt or by hand using
the rubber dampers.
If severe roughness is felt while rotating the hub,
the compressor should be disassembled.
2. Using a 12 volt battery check current drawn by
the field coil which should be between 3.6– 4.2
Amps.
Very high current readings indicate a short circuit
in the field coil and no current reading indicate an
open circuit. Replace coil with either fault. Resis-
tance of the coil using an ohmmeter should be 51
approximately 3.0Ω at 20°C.
A poor earth (ground) connection of the field coil
will result in a low voltage.
3. Ensure clutch is disengaged and rotate pulley by
hand. If roughness in the bearing is felt, it will be
necessary to replace the pulley and bearing as
an assembly.
52
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Clutch Disassembly – Removal

All clutch servicing should be done with the com-
pressor removed from the vehicle:
1. Support the compressor. If using a vice, do not
hold on to the housing.
1
2. Attach tool (1) number297423 to the cover on the
front of the clutch plate and placing a socket and
ratchet through the tool remove the the cover at-
taching nut.
53
3. Using the front plate tool, insert tool number
JD166/3 into 297423 and place a tommy bar
through both hold the clutch plate stationary.
4. Place the bolt into the tool JD166/3 and by
tightening the bolt onto the end of the shaft the
front plate will be extracted from the shaft.
54
5. Remove the pulley bearing external snap ring (1)
and lift the pulley assembly from the compressor.
1
TA605064
55
6. Inspect the pulley bearing assembly for wear and
replace the assembly as necessary.
1
56
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

7. Remove the field coil wire retaining clip.
TA605067
57
8. Remove the field coil retaining snap ring.
TA605068
58
9. Lift the coil from the housing and replace as re-
quired.
TA605071
59
Clutch Reassembly
1. Install the field coil, ensuring that the wire is lo-
cated back at cable clip on the outside of the
body and snap ring is placed in the groove.
TA605067
60
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2. Position the pulley on the housing hub and care-

fully slide the pulley down the shaft. 1
61
3. Install the bearing snap ring.
TA605064
62
4. Replace the front plate and retaining nut and
tighten to a torque of 18Nm (13lbf.ft).
63
5. Check the clearance between the clutch front
plate and pulley. This should be consistent
around the circumference and be between
0.4–0.8mm (0.016–0.031in.)
NOTE: If the air gap is not consistent, lightly pry up
on the counter weighted front plate at the low spots
or lightly tap down at the high spots.
64
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

6. If the clearance is not within specification the

shims under the front plate should be added to or 1
subtracted from, until the correct clearance is ob-
tained.
NOTE: New shims are available in sizes 1.00, 0.50
and 0.13 mm, (0.040, 0.020 and 0.005 in.).
65
Shaft Seal Replacement
The refrigerant must be discharged from the system
and the compressor removed from the vehicle prior
to replacing the shaft seal.
Removal 1
1. Remove the clutch front plate, as detailed in the
steps of clutch disassembly.
2. Remove the woodruff key, shims and felt lubrica-
tion ring to expose the snap ring.
3. Remove the shaft seal retaining snap ring.
TA605075
66
4. Insert the seal remover/installer tool 297423.
Twist the tool to engage the slots in the seal. Pull
up to remove and discard the seal. 1
6050095TAG
67
Installation
1. Thoroughly clean the seal cavity in the hub. Use
‘lint free’ cloth only.
2. Ensure the new shaft seal ‘O’ ring is installed
onto the seal assembly. Dip the new seal assem-
bly in clean refrigerant oil and attach to the seal
remover/installer tool.
TA605079
68
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

3. Insert the new seal fully into the hub.

NOTE: If remover/installer tool is not available, posi-
tion the seal squarely in the hub and tap gently until 1
fully seated.
6050095TAG
69
4. Install the seal snap ring. If the snap ring has a
bevelled edge this should face outwards.
TA605075
70
5. Install a new felt seal and push into position.
71
6. Position the shims over the shaft and refit the
woodruff key.
7. Reinstall the clutch front plate as described in
clutch reassembly.
72
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

CYLINDER HEAD SERVICING
Disassembly
1. Drain the refrigerant oil from the compressor into
a clean calibrated container. Measure and record
the quantity of oil obtained. This information is re-
quired during installation of the new or over-
hauled unit.
2. Remove the six cylinder head bolts and using a
hide mallet, gently tap the cylinder head free. The
use of a gasket scraper may also be required to
free the cylinder head from the compressor body.
73
3. If the valve plate and/or cylinder head are to be
reused, carefully remove the gasket using a suit-
able scraper.
4. Gently pry the valve plate free from the cylinder
block and remove the gasket.
5. Inspect the valve plate for damage.
TA605085
74
Reassembly
1. Coat the top of the valve plate with clean refriger-
ant oil and reassemble the cylinder head using
the reverse of the disassembly procedure.
2. When installing the gaskets and valve plate en-
sure they are correctly positioned over the locat-
ing pins in the cylinder block.
TA605086
75
3. Install the cylinder head bolts and tighten using
the sequence shown. Torque initially to 20Nm
(14lbf.ft) then finally to 32Nm (24 lbf.ft).
4. When the overhaul is complete add to the com-
pressor a volume of oil equivalent to that drained
prior to disassembly, or as the reclaim measured
fill.
TA605087
76
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 55 – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM – CHAPTER 1 1
Chapter 1 – Electrical System General
CONTENT
55 000 Electrical Equipment Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

55 100 Electrical System and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
55 512 Controls and Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
55 514 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
55 000 System Precautions For Battery Charging and Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
55 000 Starting the Machine Using Jump Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
55 100 Temporary Wiring Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
55 000 Electrical System General Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
55 000 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS

Alternator
70 amp on Models 80, 95, 100, 110, 115, 200
95 amp hr (12v/900 CCA) SAE
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 55 – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM – CHAPTER 1
55100 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AND FUSES

The electrical system of all tractors consists of vari-
ous wiring harnesses, instrument clusters, and
switches. Micro–processors are also used to control
the powershift transmission and steering systems.
There are two instrument consoles, a front mounted
panel and a side mounted panel.
The Key start switch has five positions:

1 = Not used
2 = Off
3 = Ignition ‘‘ON’’
4 = Thermostart (Engine pre–heat)
5 = Engine Start (cranking)
1
The battery is located behind the front radiator grille.
The battery type is 12volt , 95 amp. hr (12V/960
CCA) SAE. There is an isolator switch located on the
negative cable to provide a battery disconnect facil-
ity.
1
2
The alternator is a 70 amp. unit for all models.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

The Starting motor is a Bosch unit 3.0 kw for the

model 75 and 3.1 kw for the other models.
4
Fuses and Relays
The fuse panel is situated in the side console and can
be accessed through a small panel after removal of
the attaching cover screws. The fuses are numbered
and reference to the diagram and the following table
will permit rapid identification of the circuits they
protect.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace a blown fuse with

another of a different rating. Certain optional items of
equipment may not be installed on your machine.
However, the fuses are still installed and may be
used as spares.
5
In addition to the fuses some circuits are protected
or controlled by the items listed below, these are
mounted on the left hand front cab face behind the
engine and consist of the following:
3
1. FUSIBLE LINK: Main Circuit Protection between
the battery and the machine electrical system
2. RELAY: Starter Motor Circuit
3. RELAY: Air Conditioning (Where fitted)
6
Blower Motor Fuse
Where air conditioning is fitted a 25 ampere fuse has

been fitted inline for the 3rd speed on the blower
motor.
This fuse is located beneath the seat pod and can be

accessed once the seat is removed.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

ROPS – POWER SHUTTLE, 92 – 108 hp K7 Rear Work Lamps 2 off – Internal

(Worldwide) K8 Front Work Lights 4 off – External
K9 Rear Work Lamps 4 off– External
Fuse K10 Shuttle Control Reverse
No. Rating Colour Circuit
K11 Shuttle Control Forward
F1/A
K12 Flashers
F1/B 7.5A Brown Fuel Shut Off, Anti – Theft,
Fuel Pump, Thermostart BUZZER
F1/C 10A Red Brake Stop Switch
BZ1 Audible Warning Buzzer
F2/A 15A Blue Instruments, Switches,
Brake Oil, Pneumatic Seat CONNECTORS
F2/B CN Main Harness Connections into Fuse Board
F2/C 20A Yellow Engine Glow Plug
F3/A 3A Violet Rear right / Front Left side
Instrument
F3/B 3A Violet Rear left / Front right side, K12
K10 K11
licence plate light
F3/C 10A Red Rapid connect, Glide Ride,
Hand Hammer, Cold Start K1
+BZ1
F4/A 5A Orange Shuttle Lever, Reverse CN/1 CN/2 K2
Buzzer, Speed switch
F4/B 10A Red Backhoe Hammer Valve,
Loader Self Levelling, F1/C F2/C
Transmission Disconnect
F1/B F2/B CN/6
F4/C 10A Red Sideshift Lock, Boom Lock
F5/A 15A Blue Front Working lamps
Internal CN/3 F1/A F2/A
F5/B 10A Red Dip Beam (not N/America) F3/C F4/C
F5/C 15A Blue Main Beam (not N/America) K3
F6/A 7.5A Brown Rotating Beacon
F3/B F4/B
K4
F6/B 7.5A Brown Flashers F3/A F4/A
F6/C 7.5A Brown Hand Hammer Valve, 4WD
F7/A 10A Red + 30 Warning and Horn
Fuse
CN/4 F5/C
F7/B K5
CN/5
F7/C F5/B
F8/A 15A Blue Rear Work Lamps External K6
F5/A
F8/B 15A Blue Front Work Lamps External
F8/C 15A Blue Rear Work Lamps Internal F6/C F7/C F8/C K7
* Special Bi Metal, re–setting Fuse K8
F6/B F7/B F8/B
RELAYS F6/A F7/A F8/A K9
K1 Transmission Forward / Reverse
K2 Handbrake on Alarm / Speed Alarm +15V +30V GND
K3 Starting Relay
K4 Loader Self Levelling
K5 Headlamp Main Beam (not N/America) TA424497 Powershuttle
K6 Front Work Lights 2 off – Internal
10
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

CAB – POWER SHUTTLE, 92 – 108 hp K7 Rear Work Lamps 2 off – Internal

Fuse K9 Rear Work Lamps 4 off– External
No. Rating Colour Circuit K10 Shuttle Control Reverse
F1/A 15A Blue Rear Windshield Motor K11 Shuttle Control Forward
and Washer Motor
K12 Flashers
F1/B 7.5A Brown Fuel Shut Off, Anti – Theft,
Fuel Pump, Thermostart BUZZER
F1/C 10A Red Brake Stop Switch BZ1 Audible Warning Buzzer
F2/A 15A Blue Instruments, Switches,
Brake Oil, Pneumatic Seat CONNECTORS
F2/B 15A Blue Blower Motor CN Main Harness Connections into Fuse Board
light, Instrument, Air
Conditioning light K12
K10 K11
F3/B 3A Violet Rear left / Front right side,
licence plate light
F3/C 10A Red Rapid connect, Glide Ride, K1
+BZ1
Hand Hammer, Cold Start CN/1 CN/2 K2
F4/A 5A Orange Shuttle Lever, Reverse
Buzzer, Speed switch
F4/B 10A Red Backhoe Hammer Valve, F1/C F2/C
Loader Self Levelling,
F1/B F2/B CN/6
Transmission Dissconnect
F5/A 15A Blue Front Working lamps CN/3 F1/A F2/A
Internal F3/C F4/C
F5/B 10A Red Dip Beam (not N/America) K3
F5/C 15A Blue Main Beam (not N/America) F3/B F4/B
F6/A 7.5A Brown Rotating Beacon
K4
F3/A F4/A
F6/B 7.5A Brown Flashers
F6/C 7.5A Brown Hand Hammer Valve, 4WD
F7/A 10A Red + 30 Warning and Horn
CN/4 F5/C
Fuse
CN/5 K5
F7/B 10A Red Auxiliary 12v socket, Radio, F5/B
Cab interior light
K6
F7/C 6A Black* Front Windshield Wiper F5/A
F8/A 15A Blue Rear Work Lamps External K7
F6/C F7/C F8/C
F8/C 15A Blue Rear Work Lamps Internal F6/B F7/B F8/B K8
* Special Bi Metal, re–setting Fuse K9
F6/A F7/A F8/A
RELAYS
+15V +30V GND
K1 Transmission Forward / Reverse
K2 Handbrake on Alarm / Speed Alarm
K3 Starting Relay
K4 Loader Self Levelling TA424497 Powershuttle
K5 Headlamp Main Beam (not N/America) 11
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CAB – POWER SHIFT, 92 – 108 hp K7 Rear Work Lamps 2 off – Internal

Fuse K10 Differential lock Relay
K11 not used
F1/A 15A Blue Rear Windshield Motor
and Washer Motor K12 Flashers
F1/B 7.5A Brown Fuel Shut Off, Anti – Theft, BUZZER
Fuel Pump, Thermostart
F1/C 10A Red Brake Stop Switch
F2/A 15A Blue Instruments, Switches, CONNECTORS
Brake Oil, Seat, Buzzer
CN Main Harness Connections into Fuse Board
F2/B 15A Blue Blower Motor
light, Instrument, Air K12
Conditioning light K10 K11
licence plate light
+BZ1
Hand Hammer, Cold Start CN/1 CN/2 K2
F4/A 5A Orange EGS Shift Lever, 4WD
Transmission disconnect
F1/C F2/C
Loader Self Levelling F1/B F2/B CN/6
(not N/America)
CN/3 F1/A F2/A
Internal F3/C F4/C
K3
F5/B 10A Red Dip Beam (not N/America) F3/B F4/B
F6/A 7.5A Brown Rotating Beacon F3/A F4/A
F6/C 7.5A Brown Hand Hammer Valve, 4WD,
Differential Lock CN/4 F5/C
F7/A 10A Red + 30 Warning and Horn CN/5 K5
Fuse F5/B
F7/B 10A Red Auxiliary 12v socket, Radio, K6
Cab interior light
F5/A
F7/C 6A Black* Front Windshield Wiper F6/C F7/C F8/C K7
F8/A 15A Blue Rear Work Lamps External
F8/B 15A Blue Front Work Lamps External F6/B F7/B F8/B K8
F8/C 15A Blue Rear Work Lamps Internal K9
F6/A F7/A F8/A
* Special Bi Metal, re–setting Fuse
+15V +30V GND
RELAYS
K1 Not used
K2 Handbrake on Alarm / Speed Alarm Powershift
TA424497
K3 Starting Relay
12
K5 Headlamp Main Beam (not N/America)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

CAB – POWERSHIFT 4 WHEEL STEER, 108 hp K7 Rear Work Lamps 2 off – Internal
Fuse K10 Optional
K11 not used
F1/A 15A Blue Rear Windshield Motor
and Washer Motor K12 Flashers
F1/B 7.5A Brown Fuel Shut Off, Anti – Theft, BUZZER
Fuel Pump, Thermostart
F1/C 10A Red All Wheel Steer
F2/A 15A Blue Stop Light Instruments, CONNECTORS
Switches, Brake Oil, Seat,
Buzzer CN Main Harness Connections into Fuse Board
F2/B 15A Blue Blower Motor
F3/A 3A Violet Rear right / Front Left side K12
Instrument, Air Cond light K10 K11
licence plate light
+BZ1
Hand Hammer, Cold Start
CN/1 CN/2 K2
F4/A 5A Orange EGS Lever, 4WD,
Transmission disconnect F1/C F2/C
Loader Self Levelling F1/B F2/B CN/6
(not N/America) CN/3 F1/A F2/A
F3/C F4/C
Internal K3
F5/B 10A Red Dip Beam (not N/America) F3/B F4/B
F6/A 7.5A Brown Rotating Beacon F3/A F4/A
F6/C 7.5A Brown Hand Hammer Valve, 4WD,
Differential Lock CN/4 F5/C
F7/A 10A Red + 30 Warning and Horn CN/5 K5
Fuse F5/B
F7/B 10A Red Auxiliary 12v socket, Radio, K6
F5/A
Cab interior light
F7/C 6A Black* Front Windshield Wiper F6/C F7/C F8/C K7
F8/A 15A Blue Rear Work Lamps External
F6/B F7/B F8/B K8
F8/C 15A Blue Rear Work Lamps Internal F6/A F7/A F8/A K9
* Special Bi Metal, re–setting Fuse
+15V +30V GND
RELAYS
K1 Not Used
K2 Handbrake on Alarm / Speed Alarm TA424497 Powershift
K3 Starting Relay
13
K5 Headlamp Main Beam (not N/America)
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

55 000 PROTECTING THE ELECTRICAL SYS- 55 000 STARTING THE MACHINE WITH JUMP
TEMS DURING CHARGING OR WELDING LEADS
To avoid damage to the electronic/electrical sys- WARNING
tems, always observe the following:
Operate the starting motor only from the operator’s
4. Never make or break any of the charging circuit seat. If the neutral start switch is by–passed the en-
connections, including the battery connections, gine may be started inadvertently with the transmis-
when the engine is running. sion in gear.
5. Never short any of the charging components to
earth (ground). Wear eye protection when charging the battery or start-
6. Do not use a slave battery of higher than 12 volts ing the machine engine with a slave battery.
nominal voltage. If it is necessary to use jump leads from an external
7. Always observe correct polarity when installing battery to start the machine, proceed as follows:
the batteries or using a slave battery to jump start • Connect one end of the jump lead to the machine
the engine. Follow the instructions in the oper- 12 volt battery positive (+) terminal and the other
ator’s manual when jump starting the machine. to the auxiliary 12 volt battery positive (+) ter-
Connect positive to positive and negative to minal.
negative. • Connect one end of the second jump lead to the
8. Always disconnect the negative cable from the auxiliary 12 volt battery negative (–) terminal and
batteries before carrying out arc welding on the the other end to the machine engine block, follow-
machine or on any implement attached to the ing this procedure will prevent sparks occurring
machine. near the batteries. Follow the starting procedure
• Position the welder ground cable clamp as close previously described.
to the welding area as possible. NOTE: When using a slave battery to start the en-
• If welding is to be carried out in close proximity to gine ensure that the polarity is correct otherwise the
a computer module, then the module should be re- alternator may be damaged.
moved from the machine. It is recommended that • When the engine starts allow it to run at idle speed,
this procedure be carried out by an authorised turn on all electrical equipment (lights, etc.) then
dealer. disconnect the jump leads in reverse order to the
• Never allow welding cables to lay on, near or connecting procedure. This will help protect the al-
across any electrical wiring or electronic compo- ternator from damage due to extreme load
nent while welding is in progress. changes.
9. Always disconnect the negative cable from the NOTE: Your machine has an electro–magnetic fuel
batteries when charging the batteries in the ma- shut–off, it is therefore not possible to operate the
chine with a battery charger. machine without a battery installed. The machine will
shut down when the power supply to the fuel shut–off
WARNING solenoid is disconnected (battery removed).
Batteries contain sulphuric acid. In case of contact
with skin, flush the affected area with water for five
minutes. Seek medical attention immediately. Avoid
contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear eye
protection when working near batteries.
IMPORTANT: Failure to disconnect the two earth

cable connections at the battery prior to charging the
batteries or welding on the machine or attached im-
plement will result in damage to the electronic and
electrical systems.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

55 512 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS,

Figure 14.
25. Direction Indicators, Main Beam Selection, Front 39. Hammer Operating Pedal (Optional Equipment)
Windscreen Wiper Stalk and Front Windscreen 40. Air Flow Direction Outlet
Washer Control 41. De Luxe Seat
26. Gear Lever (with integrated Transmission Discon- 42. Backhoe Boom Lock Operating Lever (where fitted)
nect Switch) 43. Radio Placement / Miscellaneous Objects Holder
27. Foot Throttle Pedal 44. Drink Holder
28. Loader Lever (with integrated Transmission Discon- 45. Cigar Lighter/12 volt Auxiliary Outlet (where fitted)
nect Switch)
46. Windscreen Washer Fluid Reservoir
29. Anti Theft Key (optional)
47. Mechanical Differential Lock Pedal (where fitted)
30. Heater Control Panel / Air Conditioning (when fitted)
48. Independent Brake Pedals and Pedal Latch
31. Side Mounted Instrument Panel
32. Key Start WARNING
NOTE: When the key–start/stop switch is turned off When travelling on the road the brake pedals must
gauge needles may assume a random position. be latched together for straight line braking.
33. Parking Brake If the pedals are not latched pressure applied to one
34. Hand Throttle Lever pedal only, could result in the machine veering se-
35. Stabiliser Leg Operating Levers verely to the left or right hand side.
36. Air Flow Direction Outlet
37. Hydraulically Extendible Dipper, H.E.D Operating 49. Hazard Flasher Button
Pedal (Optional Equipment) 50. POWER SHIFT 4X4 – Transmission Forward / Re-
38. Backhoe Control Lever Patterns verse Lever with Integral Horn Button
Standard: 52. Front Instrument Panel
2 Lever – Cross Pattern with Horn Button 53. Speedometer Optional
54. –Key Operated – Steering Selection Switch:
Optional: 1= Standard Steering
2 Lever – Cross Pattern – ISO 2= Double steering
2 Lever – Diagonal Pattern 3= Crab Steering
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

14
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT PANEL FUNCTIONS
15
Front Instrument Panel

1. Direction Indicator Warning Lamp 11. Lights ON Switch
2. Brake reservoir oil level indicator 12. Hazard flasher button
3. Dipped beam warning 13. Independent Hand Hammer Switch (Optional)
4. Main beam warning 14. Four Wheel Drive Switch ( x3 position)
5. 2 Wheel Steer Indicator (4WS only) Off = Rear Wheel Drive with all Wheel Braking
6. Crab Steer Indicator (4WS only) On 1st = All Wheel Drive
7. All Wheel Steer Indicator (4WS only) On 2nd = Rear Wheel Drive only
8. Speedometer (where fitted) 15. Power Shift Transmission Only – Override to Manual
selection
9. Differential Lock Switch (spring return type)
10. Rotating Beacon Switch
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FRONT INSTRUMENT PANEL
This section details the location and function of the

instruments and related switches on your machine.
Before attempting to drive or operate the machine,
study this section carefully.
IMPORTANT: The Backhoe Loader gauge’s and

switches mounted in the Instrument panels may vary
in position from that shown in this manual,
dependent upon model and options fitted. Ensure
you are familiar with all functions before operation.
1. Differential Lock Switch (spring return)

This switch activates the differential lock electrically
with action of the diff lock as previously described.
2. Rotating Beacon Switch (Optional) 16

The slow moving machine warning beacon must be
connected to the external 12 volt connector mounted
above each door. When the switch is selected the
connector is live and will operate the beacon.
3. Main Light Switch

When selected the lights will come ‘ON’ and the
switch will be illuminated.
1st position = Instrument and Side Lights ‘ON’
2nd positron = Front Road Lights ‘ON’
4. Hand Hammer Operating Switch (Optional)
WARNING
WARNING: Do not attempt to connect or disconnect
the hammer with the switch ‘on’ with engine running
as the couplers and hoses will be pressurised
When selected the external couplings mounted to

the left of the machine are hydraulically pressurised
to power ‘Company Recommended’ hand hammers.
17
5. Four Wheel Drive Switch
This switch engages and disengages four wheel
drive. When the four wheel drive switch is in the ‘Off’
position and both brake pedals are operated together
the four wheel drive, will automatically be engaged
(above 3 Km/h) to give four wheel drive braking and
disengage with brake pedals released.
6. Power Shift Transmission Override

When activated the Powershift transmission will not
be allowed to progress through the gear range. To
change gears it will be necessary to twist the hand
control to select the required gear.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

18
Side Mounted Instrument Panel

1. Rear Work Lamp Switch 16. Front work lights
2. Sideshift Carriage Clamp Switch 17. Quick Coupling Attachment Switch (Optional Equip-
(Side Shift Only) On = Carriage Unlocked ment)
3. Backhoe Boom Lock (where fitted) 18. Cold Start (optional)
4. Loader lockout switch 19. Glide Ride control (optional)
5. Rear Window Wash and Wipe Switch
6. Warning Light for Optional Equipment WARNING
7. Park Brake and Oil Level Indicator If the machine is raised using the loader bucket do
8. Transmission Oil Pressure Indicator not operate the glide switch, ensure it is switched
9. Transmission Oil Temperature Indicator OFF. If the switch is ON upon engine start up the
10. Key Start: vehicle will fall to the ground without any control.
1 = Accessories,
2 = Off,
3 = Ignition ‘‘ON’’ 20. Fuel level gauge
4 = Thermostart,
21. Service indicator
5 = Engine Start (cranking) Front Work Lamp Switch
22. Rev counter
11. Cold Start Indicator
23. Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator (where appli-
12. Air Cleaner restriction Indicator
cable for diagnostics
13. Engine Oil Temperature indicator
24. Engine Coolant temperature gauge
14. Alternator / Battery indicator
15. Backhoe Hydraulic Oil Flow Reduction Switch
(optional)
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SIDE MOUNTED PANEL INSTRUMENTS AND

WARNING LIGHTS
NOTE:The machine gauge’s and switches mounted

in the Instrument panel, are all illuminated internally
when the machine lights are switched ‘on’.
Fuel Level Gauge
This gauge indicates the level of fuel in the tank on

a continuous basis but is only operative with the
key–start/stop switch in the ‘‘ON’’ position.
NOTE: When the key–start/stop switch is turned off

the gauge needle may assume a random position.
19
Tachometer and Hour Meter
The Tachometer (1) graduated to 3000 rev/min is

driven from the alternator and reflects true engine
speed.
The hourmeter (2) situated in the lower half of the

tachometer reflects hours of engine operation and is
driven from the alternator when running.
20
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Gauge
with Warning alarm
The engine coolant temperature indicator responds

to a sensor fitted in the engine. During normal
operations the indicator will tend to rise from the low
point of the green segment to the centre of the
gauge. When operating under heavy load conditions
the indicator may continue to rise to just below the
red segment and return to a lower position when
normal machine operation is resumed.
Should the indicator rise into the red segment a

warning alarm will sound. Stop the engine 21
immediately and investigate the cause. Normal
operations can be resumed once the engine has
cooled sufficiently or the cause corrected.
NOTE: When the key–start/stop switch is turned off

the gauge needle assumes a random position.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

WARNING LIGHTS
1. Alternator Charge Warning Light:
The alternator charge warning light illuminates when

the key start is turned on and will remain on until the
engine is started. Once started the battery is being
charged by the alternator and the lamp will be
extinguished.
2. Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light with Warning

alarm:
Indicates low oil pressure and should extinguish 22

immediately after the engine starts. Should the oil
pressure drop the warning light will illuminate and an
audible alarm will sound.
Stop the engine immediately if the lamp illuminates.

and Investigate and correct the cause before
restarting.
WARNING
WARNING: Corrective action must be taken
immediately when this lamp illuminates. If not failure
of the engine system could occur
3. Air Filter Restriction Light:
During operation of the machine dirt may enter the

Air Cleaner Body but will be prevented from the
entering the engine. As the build up of dirt increases
on the filter the restriction (vacuum) is felt by a
sensor switch and the warning lamp is illuminated.
When illuminated the engine must be stopped as

soon as possible and the filter serviced.
IMPORTANT: If the machine is left to run with the

warning light ‘on’ engine performance and fuel
consumption will suffer.
4. Thermostart Light; (Refer to Engine Start)
5. Service Indicator Light (Optional):
This lamp illuminates and a buzzer will sound at 300

hour intervals to identify that a scheduled service is
required (the light will remain “ON” for 10 hours).
Service the machine as outlined in maintenance.
6. Engine Coolant Indicator (optional diagnostics):
The indicator lamp illuminates when the operating

temperature exceeds its limits. Stop engine as soon
as possible and investigate cause or consult your
dealer 23
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

WARNING LIGHTS 2nd Segment
1. Transmission Oil Temperature Warning Light
Should the transmission oil temperature exceed a

predetermined level the warning light will illuminate.
WARNING
WARNING: If the light stays ‘‘on’’ stop the engine as
soon as possible and investigate the cause. Do not
continue to drive the machine as failure of the
transmission could occur and result in serious injury
to you or bystanders.
24
2. Transmission Oil Pressure Warning Light with

alarm:
Should the transmission oil pressure drop to a

predetermined level the warning light will illuminate
and the alarm will sound.
If the warning light illuminates, place the

transmission in neutral and stop the engine
immediately. Check that the oil level is correct and
adjust as required. If the transmission oil is lost or
extremely low DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DRIVE THE
MACHINE. Contact your Dealer to investigate the
cause and consult the manual as for towing the
machine as necessary.
3. Park Brake Warning Light:
The warning light is illuminated when the parking

brake is applied and the ignition is switched ON.
An ‘alarm’ will sound when the ignition is ON and the

parking brake applied.
WARNING
WARNING: Do not attempt to disconnect the
warning apparatus in any way. Do not attempt to
drive the machine with the parking brake applied, as
serious damage to the machine brakes with possible
failure will occur. This could result in serious injury to
you and other people.
4. Warning Lamp for Optional Equipment
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SIDE MOUNTED PANEL ROCKER

SWITCHES (ALL MODELS)
NOTE:The rocker switch positions may vary slightly

from that shown, dependant upon the model and
options fitted to your machine. Thoroughly
familiarise yourself with the layout of your machine
1. Front Work Lamps
2. Hydraulic Speed Control Switch (Optional)
3. Switch for optional equipment
4. Cold Start (optional
5. Glide Ride Control (optional equipment) 25
6. Rear Work Lamps
7. Sideshift Lock Clamps
8. Transport Backhoe Lock
9. Rear Windscreen Washer and Wiper
10. Hydraulic Quick – Bucket Attach (Optional)
NOTE:All switches are internally illuminated with
ignition ‘On’ and will become brighter when each
individual function switch is selected
26
SWITCH 1. Front Work Lights.
The rocker switch (1) is of the 3–way type

1st position = ‘Off’
2nd position = Two front Work lamps ‘On’.
3rd position = Four front work lamps ‘On’ (when fitted).
27
SWITCH 2. Hydraulic Speed Control (where
fitted)
When the hydraulic speed control switch (2) is

selected a percentage of hydraulic oil is diverted from
the system and into the reservoir reducing the flow
and hence speed of the loader and backhoe. When
the tortoise is selected, slow precise hydraulic
operation for delicate work is possible.
Selection of the tortoise can also be utilised for

travelling on the road and allow more engine power
to the driving wheels.
28
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SWITCH 3. Used only for operation of optional

equipment.
29
SWITCH 4. Cold Start (optional)
Where a cold start facility is required this switch

activates this (optional system).
30
SWITCH 5. Glide Ride Control (optional)
The function of Glide control when actuated is to

absorb the vibration normally felt from the loader
when driving along a road. It is not recommended for
use during loader operations
WARNING
If the machine is raised using the loader bucket do
not operate the glide switch ensure it is switched
OFF. If the switch is ON upon engine start up the
vehicle will fall to the ground without any control.
31
SWITCH 6. Rear Worklamp Switch
The switch (5) when actuated the rear worklamps will

operate independently of the side or headlights.
NOTE:Do not use the rear worklamps when

travelling on the public highway.
32
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SWITCH 7. Side Shift Carriage Clamps

When the switch is in the ‘OFF’ position hydraulic oil
is directed to the clamps (1) in 4 positions which lock
the carriage solid to the frame. To release the clamps
for side shifting press the switch ‘ON’. The switch will
illuminate and the pressure to the clamps is released
allowing the carriage to be moved on the frame.
NOTE:After moving the carriage, position the boom

along the centre line of the machine before
re–clamping the carriage to the frame. This will
ensure the carriage is squarely seated onto the
sideshift frame.
33
WARNING
WARNING: Ensure the carriage clamp switch is
‘OFF’ whenever the machine is driven on the road.
Failure to observe this action could result in injury or
accident to bystanders or yourself.
SWITCH 8. Backhoe Transport Lock
When driving the machine on the highway the

backhoe must be ‘locked’ in the transport position.
This is achieved by fully crowding the dipper to the
boom and fully raising the boom to allow the plate
using switch (7) to engage onto the boom pins.
NOTE:On sideshift machines swing the backhoe to

the cab where the bucket can be chained to the right
hand stabiliser leg, Refer to Section 1, On Road
Requirements.
With the transport lock applied and the warning light 34

(1) illuminated slew the boom around to the transport
position when an additional pin (2) where fitted, can
be placed through the lock plate to frame to prevent
the boom from swinging during machine
transportation.
To release the lock for normal operation activate
switch (7) to ‘off’ the boom lock plate (1) will release.
WARNING
WARNING: Do not attempt to operate the backhoe
with the lock plate engaged.
35
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SWITCH 9. Rear Windscreen Wash/Wipe
The wiper is activated when the switch (8) is

depressed and will remain functional until the switch
is returned to the ‘Off’ position
The washer is operated by further depressing and

holding switch (8). When the switch is released the
wash will stop and return to the wipe position.
36
SWITCH 10. Loader Lock Valve (optional)
The loader lock when actuated is designed to

prevent movement of the front loader during
transport.
37
55 514 BULB REPLACEMENT
Work lamp Bulb Replacement, Front and Rear,
To gain access to the bulb, extract the securing

screws (1) gently remove the lens cover and remove
the bulb. Replacement of the bulb follows the
removal procedure in reverse.
NOTE:Modern headlights and worklamps tend to

have halogen bulbs fitted. Never touch a halogen
bulb with the fingers. Natural moisture in the skin will
cause the bulb to burn out when the lamp is switched
on. Always use a clean cloth or tissue when handling
halogen bulbs. 38
Headlight and Indicator Bulb Replacement,
To gain access to the headlight bulbs, extract the four

securing screws (1) remove lens cover and remove
the plug from the rear of the bulb, release the
retaining spring and extract the bulb. The sidelight
bulb is removed by pulling the bulb carrier out of the
reflector assembly. The indicator bulb can be
accessed by removal of the lens cover retaining
screw (2)
The headlight beam may be adjusted vertically and

laterally by adjustment of the recessed slotted
screws (3). 39
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Rear, Stop and Indicator (Sideshift only),
All bulbs are accessible after the moulded plastic

lens assembly screw’s have been removed.
The bulbs have a bayonet cap fitting with offset pins

for the brake light bulb and parallel pins for the flasher
bulb. Both bulbs may be removed by depressing
slightly and rotating approximately 20°
anti–clockwise.
Replacement of the bulbs follows the removal

procedure in reverse, however ensure the brake light
offset pins align with the socket correctly. 40
Interior Lamp Bulb Replacement
The interior lamp bulb is accessible after removal of

the moulded plastic lens cover (2). The bulb (1) may
be removed by sliding the opposite end of the bulb
from its retaining tang. Installation of the bulb and
lens cover follow the removal procedure in reverse.
To replace the map reading spot light it is necessary

to undo the 2 assembly attaching screws (3), which
are exposed when the interior lens cover is removed.
With the rear of the spot light exposed withdraw the
bulb and replace as required.
41
Instrument Panel Bulb Replacement
The warning and panel light bulbs are removable

from the rear of the instrument panel. To gain access,
remove the securing screws and withdraw the
instrument panel. The bulb is of the capless type,
rated at 1.2W and is a push fit into the retainer.
42
Rocker Switch Bulb Replacement
The rocker switches are internally illuminated by a

1
bulb which can be removed from the rear of the
switch assembly.
To gain access to the switch remove the four console

attaching screws and rotate the console.
The bulb is of the capless type, rated at 1.2w and is

a push fit in the retainer. After changing the bulb,
push the retainer into the back of switch.
43
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

IMMOBILISER
44
Immobiliser Connections
A. M38 Immobiliser E. Starter motor
B. Electronic key socket with LED F. Engine control wire
C. 2 piece electronic key G. Plug connecting electronic key socket to immobiliser
D. +50 to ignition
Wire Function Connection

No.
1 (+15) Key positive Connect to a +12V full ignition supply
2 (+30) Permanent +12V power supply Connect to the wire from the battery positive
3 (–31) Negative power supply Connect to the vehicle negative at two independent
points
5 & 6 Immobolisation relay No.2 Connect in line with the wire controlling the starter motor
relay/solenoid – min.500mA. max.10A capacity
7, 8, Immobilisation relay No.1 Connect in line with the wire controlling the ignition or fuel
9 circuit – min.500mA. max.10A capacity
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Temporary Wiring Harness Repair

(Op No 55 100)
The following method to repair wiring is a temporary
expedient only. Wiring should be replaced as soon
as possible. Replacement of temporary repaired
cables with new is particularly important if the tractor
is to be used for spraying as chemicals can enter the
repaired area, travel up the cable and damage elec-
trical components. Do not attempt to repair the wire
on any system sensors as these are sealed and
should only be replaced with a new component.
NOTE: When conducting a cable repair it is import-
ant that only RESIN CORED SOLDER is used. Use
of other types of solder may result in further cable 45
damage.
To carry out a temporary repair, proceed as follows:–
1. Locate damaged portion of cable then cut away
outer protective cover on both sides of the dam-
aged area, Figure 45.
2. Peel back the cable from both ends of the dam-
aged area and carefully cut away the inner cable
cover at the damaged area and strip about 13
mm (1/2 inch) of insulation from the wires. Do not
cut away any wire strands.
3. Using a suitable solvent, clean about 2 inches
(50 mm) from each cover end. Clean the grey
cable cover and the individual leads.
46
4. Twist two bare leads together for each damaged
lead, being careful to match wire colours, then
solder the leads using resin cored solder. Tape
each repaired lead with vinyl insulation tape, Fig-
ure 46.
5. Wind a layer of vinyl insulation tape up to the grey
cable cover at each end of the repair section.
Make a paper trough, Figure 47, then apply sili-
con rubber compound (non hardening sealant)
over the repaired section up to the cover ends.
Sufficient sealant must be used to fill the ends of
the cut away area.
47
6. Allow the compound to cure then cover the area
with insulating tape taking the tape well over
each end of the repair. An overlap of at least 2
inches (50 mm) of tape at each end is necessary,
Figure 48.
7. Check to ensure the repair is satisfactory and se-
cure the repaired cable so that repeat damage is
avoided.
NOTE: This is a temporary repair only. Ensure the
damaged cable is replaced as soon as possible to
prevent ingress of water or chemicals.
48
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

55 000 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM – GENERAL FAULT FINDING
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION
Electrical system is inoperative Loose or corroded battery Clean and tighten connections
connections
Sulphated batteries Check battery open circuit voltage

for 12.6 volts minimum. Check
electrolyte level and specific
gravity.
Battery Isolator switch turned ‘off’ Re–instate isolator switch
Main machine fuse link blown Establish reason of failure and

replace fuse link
Starter speed low and engine Loose or corroded connections Clean and tighten loose
cranks slowly connections
Low battery output Check battery open circuit voltage

gravity.
Incorrect viscosity engine oil Use correct viscosity oil for

temperature conditions
Starter inoperative Transmission shift lever in gear Place shift lever in neutral
Loose or corroded connections Clean and tighten loose

connections
Dead batteries Charge or replace batteries.

Charge indicator lamp stays on Low engine idle speed Increase idle speed
with engine running
Loose belt Check belt tension
Malfunctioning battery Check battery open circuit voltage

gravity.
Malfunctioning alternator Check alternator
Batteries will not charge Loose or corroded terminal Clean and tighten connections
connections
sulphated batteries Check battery open circuit voltage

gravity.
Loose or worn belt Check automatic belt tensioner.

Replace belt if required.
Charge indicator flashing Malfunctioning alternator Check alternator

indicating excessive charging
voltage
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 55 – ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
Chapter 2 – Wiring Diagrams
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page
How to use the wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Circuit Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Universal Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Wiring Diagrams and Connectors – ROPS Powershuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Circuit 1 – System from key start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Circuit 2 – Electric solenoid valve systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Circuit 4 – Front lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Circuit 5 – Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Circuit 6 – Working lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Circuit 7 – Miscellaneous Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Circuit 8 – Miscellaneous items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Circuit 9 – Instrument panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
CIRCUITS AND CONNECTORS – OUTSIDE OF N/AMERICA

Wiring Diagrams and Connectors – ROPS Powershuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Wiring Diagrams and Connectors – Powershuttle 92 to 108 hp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Wiring Diagrams and Connectors – Powershift 92 to 108 hp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Wiring Diagrams and Connectors – Powershift (4WS) 108 hp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 55 – ROPS POWERSHUTTLE (OUTSIDE N/AM) – CHAPTER 2
HOW TO USE THE WIRING DIAGRAMS

The wiring harnesses have been drawn in a linear
format, meaning that the complete vehicle system is
drawn over a number of pages.
Here are a number of explanations to the layout and
references contained within the diagrams:–
References are used to link the diagrams, where
applicable, and the flow of power is generally
speaking, from top, positive, to bottom, negative.
All indexes are located on the left hand page 1.4 1.5
identifying Model numbers and Serial numbers for
your guidance, with diagrams located on the
S20 S21 A
R2 R3 1
S24 S25
1
opposite right hand pages. S20 S21
X4
R3
X5
R2
Along the top of each diagram is a box reference (1) p p
t
p t
that is used when following the path of a wire and at B

X4
2
X5
the bottom of each diagram is a symbol. (2).
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
31 2.1
These symbols provide an indication of the
component at that point in the diagram. A key to
these symbols is located on page 4 ‘UNIVERSAL
SYMBOLS’. 2
1
To use the diagrams refer to the example in Figure 1.4 1.5
2, opposite.
C/N1
S1
R–N1 3.1
For example S1, is the hand brake switch on the 1st 1 0
1 9
diagram (refer to the diagrams applicable to your 5 10 1

machine) and shows two wires (colours C/N1 and
B1.5
R–N1) leaving the switch S1 which can be found at

1
3.1. X65
B1.5
M1.5
This identifies that you should go to the 3rd diagram

and look in column box reference 3.1.
2
At the 3rd diagram at box reference 3.1, you can 3.1 3.2
identify the wires by their colour and see they enter
into switch S4. 1.5
R–N1
C/N1
1.5
Simply follow this process when tracing wire paths

1
1 9
1 0
through out the vehicle system using the (diagrams 5 10

S4
S4
applicable to your machine).
L–G1
N1
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

SECTION 55 – ROPS POWERSHUTTLE (OUTSIDE N/AM) – CHAPTER 2 3
As can be seen also is an example of a symbol of a 3.1 3.2

switch (1), and on the following page are examples
of the symbols you will see through this manual. 1.5
R–N1
C/N1
1.5
1 9
1 0
S4 S4
5 10
L–G1
1
N1
4
When tracing wire paths on the diagrams and you 3.1 3.2
see a number with an X number (1) this denotes that:
Pin 6 located in connector X15 is in the path you are 1.5
R–N1
C/N1
1.5
tracing.
1 9
1 0
S4 S4
5 10
L–G1
1
6
X15
5
Key Start
Pin functions of the key start switch as viewed from
the rear of the switch
30 – 58 . . . . . No connection
30 – 15/54 . . . OFF
30 – 19 . . . . . Accessories
30– 17 . . . . . . Preheat & Engine run
30 – 50a . . . . Engine start
6
In the following circuit diagrams the key start is
shown as opposite with an input at terminal 30 and
outputs as shown above.
15/54 19 17 50a 58
01 2
P 3
30
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CIRCUIT SYMBOLS
3 Alternator Fluid Level Sender Unit

Switch
Buzzer
Starter Pressure Switch
Motor
Horn Connector
Wiper
Motor
Buzzer Solenoid Valve
Washer Diode Momentary

Motor Switch
86 87a 87
12Vcc
Battery
Relay
85 30
Lamp
Radio Cam Operated

Switch
Speaker
Roof
Beacon
86 87
Relay
Connector
85 30
1 9
1 0
Switch
5 10
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

UNIVERSAL SYMBOLS
Thermostart Side lamps 2 Wheel Steer

Turn signals
starting aid Engaged
Slow or
Alternator Front windscreen low setting
charge wipe 4 Wheel Steer
Engaged
Front windscreen Ground
Fuel level wash speed
Rear windscreen Crab Steer

Engine speed wash/wipe Engaged
Rear axle
(rev/min x 100) Heater oil temperature
temperature
control
Hydraulic and Hazard
Hours recorded warning lights
Heater fan transmission
filters
Engine oil Horn
pressure Transmission
oil pressure Malfunction!
See Operator’s
Transmission Air conditioner Manual
Oil temperature Manual
Air filter Override
Engine coolant blocked
temperature Read Operators
FWD Manual
Parking brake engaged
Coolant
level Variable
control
Stop lamps Brake reservoir
oil level
Machine Pressurised!
lights Open carefully
Transport lock Differential
Lock
Headlamp Warning!
main beam Corrosive
Sideshift Warning! substance
Headlamp Lock
dipped beam
Transmission Hammer
Accessory in neutral Attachment
Roof
Beacon socket
Transmission Glide Ride
Work lights Manual Hammer in Forward Control
Transmission
Licence plate External tools in Reverse Loader Level
Light connection
Transmission Speedo
Interior light
Tools Rapid Disconnect Sensor
Disconnect
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SYSTEM FROM KEY START –
Serial number from 031026803

Components and their (Connectors)
EV7 – Fuel Shut Off Solenoid Valve WIRE COLOURS:

EV13 – Wax Plug A = LIGHT BLUE . . . . . . . . . . M = BROWN
B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
G1 – Battery
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
G2 – Generator G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
K01 – Starter Relay H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
K3 – . Starting Relay L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
K13 – Antitheft Unit (Optional) Example of mixed colours
. . . . . . X17 = 11 Pin G/V = Yellow/Green (Transverse colours)
KC – Fuse & Relay Board G–V = Yellow–Green (Longitudinal Colours)
. . . . . . XC6 = 13 Pin
M1 – Starter Motor
. . . . . . XA = 1 Pin
M2 – Fuel Pump
. . . . . . X3 = 3 Pin
. . . . . . X11 = 1 Pin
R1 – Heating Start
R2 – Engine Water Temperature Sender
R3 – Fuel Level Sender
. . . . . . X5 = 2 Pin
ST1 – Side Instrument Panel
. . . . . . X22 = 20 Pin
. . . . . . X75 = 5 Pin Diagnostics
S1 – Cold Start Switch – Optional
. . . . . . X65 = 1 pin
S17 – Key Start Switch
. . . . . . X71 = 10 pin
S18 – Handbrake Switch
S19 – Wax Plug Thermostat
. . . . . . X2 = 2 Pin
S20 – Engine Oil Low Pressure Switch
S21 – Air Filter Blocked Switch
. . . . . . X4 = 2 Pin
S24 – Transmission Oil Pressure Switch
S25 – Transmission Oil High Temperature Switch
X1 = Engine Harness Connector 18 Pin
X14 = Side Dashboard Connector 9 Pin
X64 = Optional Connector 1 Pin
X76 = 13 Pin Diagnostics
XD = 2 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
S17
X76 1
2 ST1
58 15/54 19 17 50a 3 C/N1
3.1
P
0 1 2
3 4 15 R–N1
3.1
5 10 20 S1
30
6 V–B1
X75 1
5 25
7 Z1 2 1 0
1 9
8 G–R1 3 RPM x 100 30
9 A–G1 4
electronic
5 10
10 L–B1 5
00000 00 h
11
12
5 6 1 7 2 4 9 13 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
X71 X71 X71 X71 X71 X71 X71 X65
X22
M/N1.5
G–R1
Z–B1
M/N1
G/R1
R1
B/N1
V–B1
B1
S1
R–N1.5
M1.5
B–G1
Z1
B1.5
G/N1
S–N1
V–N1
M/N1
M/N1.5
R–N1.5
G/N1
8.1
8.4
G/R1
5 20 9 18
X14 X16 3 S18 X16 X16
6 7 7 7 X14 19 8 17 4 6 21
X16 X15 X16 X14 X16 X16 X16 X15 X14 X16
V–B1
G/R1
B/N1
R1.5
B1
A2.5 5 2
A2.5 XC6 XC6
A2.5
+15
3
R6 2.5
+30
1
2.3
86 87a 87
K3 2
L–N1
R1.5
N1.5
4.3
L–N1.5
N1.5
85 30
+15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
X17
N1.5
N1.5
F1B F2C
7,5A 20A
K13 KC
6 13 3 9 10 7
XC6 XC6 XC6 XC6 XC6 XC6
M–N1.5
B1.5
B/N1
S1
Z–B1
S–N1
R10
G–R1
Z1
B–G1
V–N1
M1.5
L1.5
B1
1 11 1 12 9 16 7 10 15 2 14 5 3
X1 X1 X64 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
R1.5
G–R1
Z–B1
R10
Z1
B/N1
L1.5
V–N1
B1
B–G1
M1.5
l
XD
86 87
K01
85 30
-
-
R2.5
X2
XD
S19
t
FG1 FG2
80A 70A
B2.5
l
X2
N1
A–G1
R10
L–N1
L–N1
S–N1
A–R1
R10
S1
R50
A 1
1 2 X4 X5
1
XA
3
30 50
D+
R1 X3 S20 S21 R2 R3 S24 S25
G1 12Vcc
M
G2 3
30
G
W M
p p p t
U X11 1
EV7 EV13 t
M1
31
M2 B 2
X4 X5
N1.5
N2.5
N1
N50
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
31
2.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SOLENOID VALVES
EV2 – Hand Hammer Solenoid Valve (Optional) WIRE COLOURS:

. . . . . . X35 = 2 Pin A = LIGHT BLUE . . . . . . . . . . M = BROWN
EV6 – Grab Level Solenoid Valve B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
. . . . . . X29 = 2 Pin C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
EV8 – 4WD Solenoid Valve (Optional)
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
. . . . . . X8 = 2 Pin
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
EV9 – Reverse Solenoid Valve (Optional)
Example of mixed colours
. . . . . . X7 =2 Pin
G/V = Yellow/Green (Transverse colours)
EV10 – Forward Solenoid Valve (Optional)
. . . . . . X6 = 2 Pin G–V = Yellow–Green (Longitudinal Colours)
HA1 – Reverse Buzzer
. . . . . . X19 = 2 Pin
K1 – . Transmission Forward/Reverse
K2 – . Handbrake On Alarm/Speed Alarm
K4 – . Loader Self Levelling
K10 – Shuttle Control Reverse
K11 – Shuttle Control Forward
KC – Fuse & Relay Board
. . . . . . XC1 = 11 Pin
. . . . . . XC3 = 21 Pin
. . . . . . XC4 = 21 Pin
. . . . . . XC6 = 13 Pin
S2 – 4WD Switch (Optional)
S3 – Hand Hammer Switch (Optional)
S26 – Clutch Shut Off Button
. . . . . . X28 = 2 Pin
. . . . . . X23 = 2 Pin
S28 – Grab Sender
. . . . . . X26 = 3 Pin
S29 – Horn Button
. . . . . . X27 = 2 Pin
S40 – Gear Shift
. . . . . . X62 = 6 Pin
X1 = . Engine Harness Connector 18 Pin
X9 = Front Dashboard Connector 9 Pin
X10 = Solenoid Valves Connector 24 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
R/N1
4.1
R/N1
M–V1
2 6 1 5 9 1 9 I II F N R NO
1 1 0
2 0 I II F
0
R
4 8 3 7 10 5 10 + + NI
S2 S3 S40
M/B1 1 2 3 4 5 6
M–V1
X62
R–N1
N1
N1
L/G1
M–N1
M–B1
C1
C1
4.4
N1
4.1
R–N1 5.1
1
X9
L/G1
H–N1
M–B1
M/B1
M–N1
M–V1
C1
2 6
XC2 XC2
7 11 5 9 3 1
3
1.4
F6C
7,5A +15 +15
+15 F4B F4A
10A 5A
K1 K4 1 K10 K11 K2
1.4
86 87a 87 86 87a 87 86 87a 87 86 87a 87 86 87a 87
85 30 85 30 85 30 85 30 85 30
KC
1 6 9 19 16 8 5 8 1 11
XC3 XC3 XC3 XC3 XC3 XC3 XC3 XC6 XC6 XC3
R–V1 R–V1
3.5
B–R1
A–R1
A–G1
R–V1
H–R1
M–N1
H–N1
M–B1
M–V1
C–N1
B–R1
A–R1
17 10
X10 X10
18 6 20 23 4 13 12 22 4 17 8
X1 X1 X10 X10 X10 X10 X10 X10 X1 X1 X10
C–N1
M–B1
M–B1
M–N1
M–V1
B–R1
A–R1
A–R1
R–V1
A–G1
H–R1
B–R1
H–N1
M–V1
C–N1
M–B1
M–B1
M–N1
B–R1
A–R1
A–R1
R–V1
H–N1
A–G1
H–R1
B–R1
2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 C A B 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
X8 X8 X35 X35 X28 X28 X23 X26 X29 X29 X7 X7 X19 X6 X6 X27
S29
1
HA1
2
S28
1 1
EV8 EV6 EV9 EV10 X27
N2.5
N2.5
EV2 S26 S27 X19

N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
31 31
1.5 3.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SOLENOID VALVES
EV1 – Double Delivery Solenoid Valve (Optional) WIRE COLOURS:

EV3 – Rear Hammer Solenoid Valve (Optional) B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
EV4 – Rear Translation Solenoid Valve (Optional)
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
. . . . . . X24 = 2 Pin
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
EV5 – Excavator Rear Lock Solenoid Valve
. . . . . . (Optional)
EV11 – Ride Control Solenoid Valve (Optional) G–V = Yellow–Green (Longitudinal Colours)
. . . . . . X34 = 2 Pin
EV12 – Tools Rapid Connection Solenoid Valve
. . . . . . (Optional)
. . . . . . X31 = 2 Pin
H1 – . Excavator Rear Lock Warning Light
. . . . . . (Optional)
S4 – Double Delivery Switch (Optional)
S5 – Ride Control Switch (Optional)
S6 – Tools Rapid Connection Switch (Optional)
S7 – . Rear Translation Lock Switch (Optional)
S8 – Excavator Rear Lock Switch (Optional)
S30 – Rear Hammer Button
. . . . . . X36 = 2 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5
R–N1 R–N1 R–N1

1.5 C/N1 C/N1 6.1
C/N1
1.5 6.1
C/N1 C/B1
6.2
H1
1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 7 2 8 10
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 6 9
S4 S5 S6 S7 S8
N1
V1
L–G1
A–N1
B–N1
N1
6.1
L/G1
C–B1
6 9 5 15 6 8
X15 X14 X15 X16 X15 X14
A–N1
B–N1
C–B1
L–G1
L/G1
V1
R–V1
2.5
9 15 11 1 21 14
X10 X10 X10 X10 X10 X10
R–V1
2
X36
S30
B–N1
A–N1
C–B1
L–G1
V1
1
X36
R–V1
1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2
X30 X30 X34 X34 X31 X31 X24 X24 X25 X25 X32 X32
1
1
2
EV1 EV11 EV12 EV4 EV5 EV3

N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
31 31
2.5 4.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FRONT LIGHTS
BZ1 – Audible Warning Buzzer WIRE COLOURS:

H2 – . Front Left Light A = LIGHT BLUE . . . . . . . . . . M = BROWN
B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
H3 – . Front Right Light
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
HA2 – Horn G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
K5 – . Headlamp Main Beam H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
K12 – Flashers L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
KC – Fuse and Relay Board Example of mixed colours
...... XC1 = 11 Pin G/V = Yellow/Green (Transverse colours)
...... XC2 = 7 Pin G–V = Yellow–Green (Longitudinal Colours)
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
...... XC4 = 21 Pin
...... XC5 = 17 Pin
S9 – Lights Switch
S10 – Hazard Switch
S31 – Brake Oil Level Sender
S42 – Speedometer (Optional)
...... X33 = 2 Pin
ST2 – Front Panel
...... X70 = 12 Pin
X10 = Solenoid Valve Connector 24 Pin
X59 = Right Lights Connector 5 Pin
X60 = Horn & Left Lights Connector 7 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
R/N1 R/N1 R/N1

2.5 7.4
ST2 S10 S9
20 15 30
20
10
40
10
5 25 15/1 30/3 R/7 1 6 8 9
0 1 0 1 2
30
50
MPH
49/4 30b/2 49a/5 L/6 3 2 10
Km/h
electronic
A1
L/N1
L1
R2.5
H–N1.5
R1.5
G1.5
L/N1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 7.1
X70 L1
R–V1 7.1
G–R1
A–B1
G–N1
V1
G1
A1
7.1
G/R1 G/R1
7.1
N1
2.5
V–N1.5
7.1
S31
H–N1.5
R1.5
V–N1.5
R2.5
H1
R/N1
H/R1
H–R1
G1.5
H–L1
R–V1
L/N1
13
8 16 20 5 2 XC4
3 18 6 21 10 10 9 3 4 4 2
XC2 XC4 XC1 XC4 XC4 XC4 XC4 XC1 XC5
F5B +30 +15 +15

10A
11
5.1 F6B F2A F7A L1
5.1
10 7,5A 15A 10A A1
5.1 F5C 5.1
+15 15A +30
K12 K5
F3B F3A +
86 87a 87
3A 3A 51
L C
8.3
85 30
–
BZ1
KC 50
2
1.4 7.5
10
XC3
C1
2.5
A–B1
A1
H1
N1
H/R1
C1
N1
H1
L1
V1
V1
G1
3 6 7 1 4 5 2 3 1 4 5 2 3
X10 X60 X59
A1
C1
N1
H1
N1
V1
V1
H1
L1
G1
A–B1
1
X33
2
X33
56b
56a
56b
56a
L
58
58
R
S42 HA2
N1
31
31
H2 H3
31 31
3.5 5.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

REAR LIGHTS
All Models Except North America
H4 – Rear Left Light WIRE COLOURS:

H5 – Number Plate Lamp A = LIGHT BLUE . . . . . . . . . . M = BROWN
...... X63 = 2 Pin B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
H6 – Rear Right Light
G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
KC – Fuse and Relay Board H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
...... XC1 = 11 Pin L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
...... XC4 = 21 Pin
S32 – Stop Light Switch G–V = Yellow–Green (Longitudinal Colours)
S33 – Stop Light Switch
X18 = Rear Lamps Connector 12 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5
R–N1
2.5
S32 S33
L1
4.5
A1
4.5
R1
R–N1
B/R1
7 8
XC5 XC5
19 17 9 6 8 2 7 17
XC4 XC4 XC5 XC5 XC1 XC1 XC1 XC5
F1C
10A
+15
11
4.2
10 52
4.2 8.4
KC
2 13 12 20 21
XC3 XC3 XC3 XC3 XC3
R–N1
G1
R–N1
R–N1
G–N1
A1
L1
G–N1
1
5 2 6 4 3 9 8 10 7 X18
N1
R–N1
A1
G1
G–N1
N1
R–N1
L1
G–N1
N1
G–N1
N1
2 1
X63 X63
L
59c
59c
58
58
R
31
31
H4 H5 H6
N1
31 31
4.5 6.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

WORKING LIGHTS
H11 – External Front Left Working Light WIRE COLOURS:

...... X51 = 4 Pin A = LIGHT BLUE . . . . . . . . . . M = BROWN
H12 – External Front Right Working Light B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
...... X44 = 4 Pin C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
H13 – External Rear Left Working Light
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
...... X47 = 4 Pin
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
H14 – External Rear Right Working Light
...... X38 = 4 Pin
H19 – Internal Front Left Working Light (Optional)
...... X50 = 4 Pin G–V = Yellow–Green (Longitudinal Colours)
H20 – Internal Front Right Working Light (Optional)
...... X45 = 4 Pin
H21 – Internal Rear Left Working Light (Optional)
...... X46 = 4 Pin
H22 – Internal Rear Right Working Light (Optional)
...... X40 = 4 Pin
K6 – . Front Work Lights – Internal
K7 – . Rear Work Lights – Internal
K8 – . Front Work Lights – External
K9 – . Rear Work Lights – External
KC – Fuse and Relay Board
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
...... XC5 = 17 Pin
S11 – Front Working Light Switch
S12 – Rear Working Light Switch
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5
R–N1 R–N1
3.5 7.1
3.5 C/N1 C/N1
7.1
C/B1
3.5
1 6 8 9 1 6 8 9
0 1 2 0 1 2
3 2 10 3 2 10
S11 S12
N1 N1
3.5 7.1
A–V1
Z–N1
G–V1
C/B1
S–G1
3 1 3 5 14
X15 X15 X16 X16 X16
A–V1
Z–N1
C/B1
G–V1
S–G1
3 14 11 12 14 13 15 11 18
F4C
F5A F8B F8C F8A 10A
15A 15A 15A 15A
H–N1
V1
V–N1
H1
+15
+30 K8 +30 +30 K9 +30
K6 K7
K7
86 87a 87 86 87a 87 86 87a 87 86 87a 87
85 30 85 30 85 30 85 30
KC
H–N1
H1
H1
V–N1
H–N1
V1
V1
N1
N1
N1
N1
V–N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
X51 X50 X44 X45 X47 X46 X38 X40
H11 H19 H12 H20 H13 H21 H14 H22

N1
31 31
5.5 7.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
H15 – Beacon Lamp WIRE COLOURS:

H16 – Beacon Lamp B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
...... XC2 = 7 Pin
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
...... XC4 = 21 Pin Example of mixed colours
S15 – Beacon Lamp Switch G–V = Yellow–Green (Longitudinal Colours)
...... X61 = 12 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5
R–N1 R–N1 R/N1

6.5 8.1 4.5
C/N1
6.5
S41
S15 H15 H16
57/58 56b 56a 54S 54D 53 31b 49
0 1 2 R
0 1 9
1 0 M M
L
NOT CONNECTED SW
56 30 L 15 31
5 10
A–V1.5
A–G1.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 - l - l
X61 X80 X80 X81 X81
V–N1.5
G/R1
L/N1
A1
L1
N1
6.5
A1
4.5
L/N1
4.5 L1
4.5
G/R1
4.5
V–N1.5
4.5
C/N1
A/N1
L/B1
A/R1
A/B1
13 2 1 12 4
X16 X16 X16 X16 X16
A–G1.5
A–G1.5
A–V1.5
C/N1
Z1
Z1
4 1 3 14 15 12
1 1 16 5 7 4 7
XC4 XC2 XC5 XC2 XC2 XC2 XC3
F7C
6A F6A F3C
A.R 7,5A 10A
+15 +15 +15
+15
F1A
15A
50
KC 4.4
17
XC3
6
16 X10
X10
N1.5
N1.5
N1.5
N1
31 31
6.5 8.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
KC – . Fuse & Relay Board WIRE COLOURS:

...... XC5 = 17 Pin A = LIGHT BLUE . . . . . . . . . . M = BROWN
...... XC6 = 13 Pin B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
S44 – Seat (Optional) C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
...... X21 = 4 Pin G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
G–V = Yellow–Green (Longitudinal Colours)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5
R–N1 G/N1
7.2 R–N1.5
1.5
1.5
2 1 4
X14 X14 X14
G/N1
R–N1.5
12 10 11 4
R–N1
N1
XC6 XC5 XC6 XC6
1 2 3 4
X21
S44 F7B F2B

10A 15A
+30 +15
51 52
4.4 5.2
KC
N1.5
N1.5
31
7.5
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

INSTRUMENT PANELS
SIDE INSTRUMENT PANEL FRONT INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pos Pin Function Signal Pos Pin Function Signal

L3 1 Air Cleaner Lamp – +12 1 Positive (+12V)
L2 2 Engine Oil Pressure Lamp – Gnd 2 Negative
L1 3 Generator Lamp – S1 3 Speedometer Hz
S4 4 Water Temperature Gauge ohm L4 4 Driving Beam Lamp +
S1 5 Fuel Level Gauge ohm L3 5 Position Lights Lamp +
S2 6 Tachometer Hz +ILL 6 Instrument Lighting +Luci
+ILL 6 Instrument Lighting +Luci L8 7 NC
Gnd 8 Negative L7 8 NC
+15 9 Positive L6 9 NC
10 NC L5 10 NC
L10 Service Lamp Int. L1 11 Direction Lamp +
11 NC L2 12 Brake Oil Level Lamp +
+30 12 Permanent Supply Voltage
WIRE COLOURS:
L7 13 Handbrake Lamp A = LIGHT BLUE . . . . . . . . . . M = BROWN
14 NC B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
B 15 External Buzzer Driving G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
L8 16 Neutral Red Lamp +/– H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
L8 17 Neutral Red Lamp +/–
L6 18 Transmission Oil Pressure –
Lamp
L5 19 Transm. Oil Temp. Lamp –
L4 20 Engine Preheating Lamp +
L12 High Water Temp. Lamp Int.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

L10 S2 L12
5 6 4 3 2 1 20 11
+15
15 9
10 20 S2 L1 L2 L3 L4
S1 S4
S1 S4
5 25
L10 17
RPM x 100 30 S3
Gnd L12 L8
electronic
8
L5 L6 L7
00000 00 h +ILL B
NC 7 15 19 18 13 14 16
10
12
+30
L1 L2 L3 L4 S3 L5 L6 L7 L8
S1
3 11 12 5 4
+12
1
L1 L1 L2 L3 L4
S1
20 15 30
10 20
L2 40
10
5 25
L3 30
50
MPH
Gnd
L4 Km/h 2
L5 L6 L7 L8
electronic
+ILL
6 10 9 8 7
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

SECTION 55 – POWERSHUTTLE (OUTSIDE N/AMERICA) – CHAPTER 2 41
CONTENT
Wiring Diagrams and Connectors – Powershuttle 92 to 108 hp
Circuit 1 – System from key start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Circuit 7 – Windshield wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Circuit 8 – Cab radio, heater blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Circuit 9 – Instrument panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

42 SECTION 55 – POWERSHUTTLE (OUTSIDE N/AMERICA) – CHAPTER 2

B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
G1 – . Battery
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
K13 – Anti Theft Unit (Optional) Example of mixed colours
. . . . . . XC6 = 13 Pin
. . . . . . XA = 1 Pin
M2 – . Fuel Pump
. . . . . . X3 = 3 Pin
. . . . . . X11 = 1 Pin
. . . . . . X5 = 2 Pin
. . . . . . X22 = 20 Pin
. . . . . . X65 = 1 pin
. . . . . . X71 = 10 pin
. . . . . . X2 = 2 Pin
. . . . . . X4 = 2 Pin
X64 = 1 Pin
X76 = Diagnostics 13 Pin
XD = 2 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

X76 1
2
58 15/54 19 17 50a 3 ST1 C/N1
3.1
P
0 1 2
3 4 15 R–N1 3.1
5
10 20
S1
S17 30
6 V–B1 X75 1
5 25
7 Z1 2 1 0
1 9
8 G–R1 3 RPM x 100 30

9 A–G1 4 electronic
5 10
10 L–B1 5 00000 00 h
B1.5
11
12
5 6 1 7 2 4 9
X71 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1920 1
X71 X71 X71 X71 X71 X71 X65
M–N1.5
X22
B1.5
M/N1
M1.5
M–N1.5
V–B1
Z–B1
M/N1
G/N1
R–N1.5
R1
G/R1
B1
S1
G–R1
Z1
B/N1
B–G1
V–N1
S–N1
R–N1.5
8.1
G/N1 8.4
G/R1
5 7 3 19 8 17 4 6
X14 X16 X14 X16 X16 X16 X15 X14
6 7 7 S18 9 18 21
X16 X15 20 X14
X16 X16 X16
R1.5
V–B1
G/R1
B1
B/N1
X16
A2.5 5 2
A2.5 XC6 XC6
A2.5
+15
3
R6 2.5
+30
1
2.3
86 87a 87
K3 2
4.3
R1.5
L–N1
B–N1.5
B–N1.5
L–N1.5
85 30
+15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 F1B F2C
7,5A 20A
N1.5
N1.5
X17
K13
KC
6 13 3 9 10 7
M–N1.5
B1.5
Z–B1
L1.5
S1
B1
G–R1
B/N1
M1.5
Z1
B–G1
R10
S–N1
V–N1
1 11 12 9 16 7 10 15 2 14 5 3
1 X1
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
X64
L–N1.5
R1.5
Z–B1
B1
G–R1
B/N1
M1.5
B–G1
Z1
R10
V–N1
l
XD
86 87
KO1
85 30
-
R2.5
-
XD X2
S19
t
FG1 FG2
80A 70A l
B2.5
R10 X2
L–N1
A–G1
L–N1
N1
S1
R10
S–N1
A–R1
R50
3
1 A 1
1 2 X3 S24 S25
XA X3 S20 S21 X4 X5
R1 X3 EV13
30 50
D+
R2 R3
M M
G1 12Vcc
M1 G2 3
30
G W
p p p t
U 1 - X11
t
31
EV7 M2 B 2
N2.5
N1.5
X4 X5
N50
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
31
2.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SOLENOID VALVES

G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
EV8 – 4WD Solenoid Valve (Optional)
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
. . . . . . X8 = 2 Pin
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
EV9 – Reverse Speed Solenoid Valve
. . . . . . X7 = 2 Pin
EV10 – Forward Speed Solenoid Valve
. . . . . . X6 = 2 Pin G–V = Yellow–Green (Longitudinal Colours)
HA1 – Reverse Speed Buzzer
. . . . . . X19 = 2 Pin
K1 – . Transmission Forward/Reverse
K10 – Shuttle Control Reverse
K11 – Shuttle Control Forward
. . . . . . XC1 = 11 Pin
. . . . . . XC2 = 7 Pin
. . . . . . XC3 = 21 Pin
. . . . . . XC4 = 21 Pin
. . . . . . XC6 = 13 Pin
. . . . . . X28 = 2 Pin
. . . . . . X23 = 2 Pin
S28 – Grab Sender
. . . . . . X26 = 3 Pin
S29 – Horn Button
. . . . . . X27 = 2 Pin
S40 – Gear Shift
. . . . . . X62 = 6 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
R/N1
4.1
S2 S3
R/N1
M–V1
S40
2 6 1 5 9 1 9 I II F N R NO
1 1 0
2 0 I II F
0
R
4 8 3 7 10 5 10
+ + NI
M/B1
1 2 3 4 5 6
X62
R–N1
M–V1
M–B1
M–N1
N1
N1
C1
L/G1
C1
4.4
N1
4.1
R–N1 5.1
3
X9
H–N1
M–V1
M–B1
M–N1
C1
L/G1
M/B1
7 2 6 11 5 9 3 1
XC4 XC2 XC2 XC4 XC1 XC1 XC1 XC1
3
1.4
F6C
7,5A +15
+15
+15 F4A
F4B
10A 5A
K1 K4 K10 K11 K2
1
1.4
86 87a 87 86 87a 87 86 87a 87 86 87a 87 86 87a 87
85 30 85 30 85 30 85 30 85 30
KC
1 6 9 19 16 8 5 8 1 11
R–V1 R–V1
3.5
A–G1
H–R1
M–B1
B–R1
A–R1
B–R1
A–R1
R–V1
H–N1
C–N1
M–V1
M–N1
18 6 20 23 4 10 12 22 4 17 8
X1 X1 X10 X10 X10 17 X10 13 X10 X10 X1 X1 X10
X10 X10
H–N1
C–N1
M–V1
M–N1
A–G1
H–R1
M–B1
M–B1
B–R1
A–R1
B–R1
A–R1
R–V1
A–G1
H–R1
M–B1
M–B1
B–R1
A–R1
B–R1
A–R1
R–V1
H–N1
C–N1
M–N1
1 2 A
X23 X23 X26 2 2
1 2
2 1 1 2 1 2 C B 1 2 1 2 X19 X6 X6 X27
X8 X8 X35 X35 X28 X28 X26 X26 X29 X29 X7 X7
HA1
1
2
S29
1 1
N2.5
N2.5
EV8 S28 EV6 EV9 X19 EV10 X27

EV2 S26 S27
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
31 31
1.5 3.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SOLENOID VALVES

G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
EV4 – Rear Translation Solenoid Valve
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
. . . . . . X24 = 2 Pin
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
. . . . . . (Optional)
. . . . . . X34 = 2 Pin
. . . . . . (Optional)
. . . . . . X31 = 2 Pin
H1 – Excavator Rear Lock Warning Light
. . . . . . (Optional)
S7 – Rear Translation Lock Switch
. . . . . . X36 = 2 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5

1.5 6.1
C/N1 C/N1 C/N1 C/N1
1.5 6.1
C/B1 C/B1 6.2
H1
1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 7 2 8 10
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 6 9
S4 S5 S6 S7 S8
V1
L–G1
A–N1
B–N1
N1
N1
6.1
L/G1
C–B1
6 9 5 15 16 8
X15 X14 X15 X16 X16 X14
V1
L/G1
L–G1
A–N1
B–N1
C–B1
R–V1
2.5
R–V1
9 15 11 1 21 14
X10 X10 X10 X10 X10 X10
R–V1
2
X36
S30
V1
L–G1
A–N1
B–N1
C–B1
1
X36
R–V1
1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2
X30 X30 X34 X34 X31 X31 X24 X24 X25 X25 X32 X32
1
1
2

N1
N1
N1
N1
31 31
2.5 4.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FRONT LIGHTS

H2 – Front Left Light A = LIGHT BLUE . . . . . . . . . . M = BROWN
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
H3 – Front Right Light
G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
...... X59 = 5 Pin
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
HA2 – Horn L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
...... X60 = 7 Pin
K5 – . Headlamp Main Beam
K12 – Flashers
...... XC1 = 11 Pin
...... XC2 = 7 Pin
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
...... XC4 = 21 Pin
...... XC5 = 17 Pin
S42 – Speedometer Sender (Optional)
...... X33 = 2 Pin
ST2 – Front Panel
...... X70 = 12 Pin
X58 = Flasher Unit Connector 13 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5

R/N1 R/N1 R/N1
2.5 7.4
ST2
20 15 30
10 20
40
10
5 25 15/1 30/3 R/7 1 6 8 9
0 1 0 1 2
30
50
MPH
49/4 30b/2 49a/5 L/6 3 2 10
Km/h
electronic
S10 S9
N1
N1
H–R1
A–G1
L/B1
L/R1
R1.5
R2.5
A/V1
G1.5
S–N1
H–N1.5
N1
N1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 X58
X70
H–L1
L–N1
L–G1
A–V1
G–N1
G–R1
V1
G1
A–B1
R–V1
A–V1
7.1
L–N1
7.1
L–G1
7.1
G/R1 G/R1
7.1
N1
2.5
V–N1.5
7.1
S31
V–N1.5
H–N1.5
H–R1
L/R1
R1.5
R2.5
G1.5
R/N1
H/R1
H–L1
R–V1
H1
3 18 6 21 10 10 9 3 8 16 20 5 2 4 4 13 2
F5C +30 +15 +15

15A
11 F6B F2A F7A L1
5.1 15A 5.1
7,5A 10A
10 A1
5.1 F5B 5.1
+15 10A +30
F3B F3A +
3A 3A 86 87a 87
51
L C 8.3
85 30
–
K12
K5
BZ1
KC 2 50
1.4 7.5
10
XC3
C1
2.5
L1
V1
V1
A1
C1
H1
H1
G1
H/R1
A–B1
3 6 7 1 4 5 2 3 1 4 5 2 3
X10 X60 X59
L1
V1
V1
A1
C1
N1
H1
N1
H1
G1
H/R1
A–B1
1 2
X33 X33
HA2
N1
56b
56a
56b
56a
L
58
58
R
S42
31
31
H2 H3
31 31
3.5 5.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

REAR LIGHTS

H5 – Number Plate Light A = LIGHT BLUE . . . . . . . . . . M = BROWN
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
KC – Fuse & Relay Board H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
...... XC4 = 21 Pin
S32 – Stop Light Switch G–V = Yellow–Green (Longitudinal Colours)
X37 = Rear Right Light 4 Pin (Optional)
X42 = Front Right Indicator 4 Pin (Optional)
X48 = Rear Left Light 4 Pin (Optional)
X52 = Front Left Indicator 4 Pin (Optional)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5
R–N1
2.5
S32 S33
4.5 L1
4.5 A1
R1
L1
L1
A1
G–N1
B/R1
R–N1
R–N1
G1
A1
19 17 7 8 9 6 8 2 7 17
F1C
10A
+15
4.2 11
4.2 10 52
8.4
KC
2 13 12 20 21
XC3 XC3 XC3 XC3 XC3
R–N1
G1
A1
L1
G1
8.3
L1
L1
L1
G1
G1
N1
N1
N1
N1
A1
A1
A1
G–N1
G–N1
G–N1
R–N1
R–N1
R–N1
R–N1
5 2 6 4 3 9 8 10 7 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
X18 X52 X48 X42 X37
L1
G1
N1
N1
N1
A1
G–N1
G–N1
R–N1
R–N1
G–N1
N1
2 1
X63 X63
59c
59c
58
R
L
58
31
31
H4 H6
H5
N1
N1
31 31
4.5 6.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

WORKING LIGHTS

G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
...... X47 = 4 Pin
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
...... X38 = 4 Pin
...... X45 = 4 Pin
...... X46 = 4 Pin
...... X40 = 4 Pin
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
...... XC5 = 17 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5

3.5 7.1
3.5 C/N1 C/N1 C/N1
7.1
C/B1
3.5
1 6 8 9 1 6 8 9
0 1 2 0 1 2
3 2 10 3 2 10
S11 S12
N1 N1 N1 7.1
3.5
A–V1
Z–N1
G–V1
C/B1
S–G1
3 1 3 5 14
X15 X15 X16 X16 X16
A–V1
Z–N1
G–V1
C/B1
S–G1
3 14 4 12 14 13 15 11 18
F4C
F5A F8B F8C F8A 10A
15A 15A 15A 15A
H1
V1
H–N1
V–N1
+15
K6 +30 +30 K7 +30 K9 +30

K8
86 87a 87 86 87a 87 86 87a 87 86 87a 87
85 30 85 30 85 30 85 30
KC
N1
H1
N1
H1
N1
N1
V1
H–N1
H–N1
V–N1
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
X51 X50 X44 X45 X47 X46 X38 X40
H11 H19 H12 H20 H13 H21 H14 H22

N1
31 31
5.5 7.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

WINDSHIELD WIPER WASHER

G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
...... XC2 = 7 Pin
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
M4 – Rear Windshield Wiper Motor G–V = Yellow–Green (Longitudinal Colours)
...... X39 = 4 Pin
M5 – Front Windshield Wiper Motor
...... X49 = 6 Pin
M6 – Rear Windshield Washer Motor
...... X57 = 2 Pin
M7 – Front Windshield Washer Motor
...... X56 = 2 Pin
M9 – Optional Blower Motor
...... X41 = 2 Pin
S14 – Windshield Wiper Switch
S15 – Beacon Lamp Switch
S41 – Windshield Wiper – Lights Switch
...... X61 = 12 Pin
X12 = Cabin Connector 5 Pin
X43 = Beacon Lamp Connector 4 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5

R–N1 R–N1 R–N1 R/N1
6.5 8.1 4.5
C/N1
6.5
S14 S41
0 1
2
57/58 56b 56a 54S 54D 53 31b 49
R
S15 H15 H16
2 6 7 9 0 1 9
I 1 0
II 0
L
56 30 L 15 31
3 5 10 5 10
A–V1.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 - l - l
X61 X80 X80 X81 X81
V–N1.5
L–G1
A–V1
G/R1
A/B1
L–N1
A/N1
A/R1
N1
L1
M1
6.5
4.5 A–V1
L–N1
4.5 1 2 3 4
A–G1.5
L–G1
4.5 X43
G/R1
4.5
4.5 V–N1.5
L/B1
L–B1
C/N1
A/N1
A/R1
A/B1
13 2 1 12 1 4
X16 X16 X16 X16 X9 X16
A–G1.5
A–G1.5
A–V1.5
R/N1
A/N1
A/R1
A/N1
A/B1
A/B1
C/N1
Z1
Z1
4 1 3 14 15 12 1 1 16 5 7 4 7
XC5 XC5 XC5 XC4 XC4 XC4 XC4 XC2 XC5 XC2 XC2 XC2 XC3
F7C
F6A F3C
6A
7,5A 10A
A.R.
+15 +15 +15
+15
F1A
15A
50
KC 4.4
17
XC3
A/N1
L/B1
L–B1
A/N1
A/R1
A/B1
16 6 5 4 1 2 3
X10 X12 X12 X12 X12 X12
L/B1
L–B1
R/N1
A/N1
A/N1
A/R1
A/N1
A/B1
A/B1
- l - l - l
X41 X41 4 1 2 3 X57 X57 X56 X56 6 3 4 1
X39 X49
53a 53a
M9 53
M 53b
31b
M M 53
M 53b
31b
31 31
M4 M6 M7 M5
N1.5
N1.5
N1.5
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
31 31
6.5 8.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CAB RADIO, HEATER BLOWER,
BS1 – Right Speaker (Optional) WIRE COLOURS:

BS2 – Left Speaker (Optional) A = LIGHT BLUE . . . . . . . . . . M = BROWN
B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
H17 – Current Intake Illumination
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
H18 – Cabin Lamp G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
M8 – Blower Motor G/V = Yellow/Green (Transverse colours)
...... X13 = 4 Pin
S34 – Roof Lamp Left Switch
S35 – Roof Lamp Right Switch
S43 – Radio (Optional)
...... X53 = 8 Pin
...... X54 = 8 Pin
S44 – Seat (Optional)
...... X21 = 4 Pin
S45 – Conditioner & Blower Motor Switch
...... X20 = 2 Pin
S46 – Current Intake
...... X55 = 2 Pin
X1 = Engine Cable Connector 18 Pin
X77 = Blower Motor Third Speed Connector 1 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5
G1 H17
5.5 H18
BS2 S46
S43
G1
S45
BS1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X53 X54 l l -
-
N1
N1
R–N1
R–N1
R–N1
X55 X55 X20 X20
N0.5
R0.5
N0.5
R0.5
C2.5
R1.5
Z2.5
G/N1
N1
G1.5
M–N1
B/R1
R–N1
N1
N1
R–N1 G/N1
7.2 1.5
R–N1.5
1.5
R2.5
R–N1.5
R–N1
N2.5
G/N1
2 1 4 4 3 2 1 1
X14 X14 X14 X13 X77
M
G/N1
R–N1.5
R–N1.5
S34 S35 M8
R–N1
12 10 11 4
XC6 XC5 XC6 XC6
R–N1
N1
1 2 3 4
X21
S44 F7B F2B

10A 15A
+30 +15 +30
51 52
4.4 5.2
KC
13
X1
N1.5
N1.5
7.5 31
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

INSTRUMENT PANELS

S2 6 Tachometer Hz +ILL 6 Instrument Lighting +Lights
+ILL 6 Instrument Lighting +Lights L8 7 NC
10 NC L5 10 NC
WIRE COLOURS:
14 NC B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
Lamp
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

L10 S2 L12
5 6 4 3 2 1 20 11
+15
15 9
10 20 S2 L1 L2 L3 L4
S1 S4
S1 S4
5 25
L10 17
RPM x 100 30 S3
Gnd L12 L8
electronic
8
L5 L6 L7
00000 00 h +ILL B
NC 7 15 19 18 13 14 16
10
12
+30
L1 L2 L3 L4 S3 L5 L6 L7 L8
S1
3 11 12 5 4
+12
1
L1 L1 L2 L3 L4
S1
20 15 30
10 20
L2 40
10
5 25
L3 30
50
MPH
Gnd
L4 Km/h 2
L5 L6 L7 L8
electronic
+ILL
6 10 9 8 7
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

SECTION 55 – POWERSHIFT (OUTSIDE N/AMERICA) – CHAPTER 2 77
CONTENT
Wiring Diagrams and Connectors – Powershift 92 to 108 hp
Circuit 1 – System from key start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Circuit 7 – Windshield wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Circuit 8 – Cab radio, heater blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Circuit 9 – Instrument panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

78 SECTION 55 – POWERSHIFT (OUTSIDE N/AMERICA) – CHAPTER 2

B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
G1 – Battery
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
. . . . . . XC6 = 13 Pin
. . . . . . XA = 1 Pin
M2 – Fuel Pump
. . . . . . X3 = 3 Pin
. . . . . . X11 = 1 Pin
. . . . . . X5 = 2 Pin
. . . . . . X65 = 1 pin
. . . . . . X71 = 10 pin
. . . . . . X2 = 2 Pin
. . . . . . X4 = 2 Pin
. . . . . . X22 = 20 Pin
X64 = 1 Pin
XD = 2 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

X76 1
2
58 15/54 19 17 50a 3 ST1 C/N1
3.1
P
0 1 2
3 4 15 R–N1 3.1
5
10 20
S1
S17 30
6 V–B1 X75 1
5 25
7 Z1 2 1 0
1 9
8 G–R1 3 RPM x 100 30

5 10
10 L–B1 5 00000 00 h
B1.5
11
12
5 6 1 7 2 4 9
X71 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1920 1
X71 X71 X71 X71 X71 X71 X65
M–N1.5
X22
B1.5
M/N1
M1.5
M–N1.5
V–B1
Z–B1
M/N1
G/N1
R–N1.5
R1
G/R1
B1
S1
G–R1
Z1
B/N1
B–G1
V–N1
S–N1
R–N1.5
8.1
G/N1 8.4
G/R1
5 7 3 19 8 17 4 6
X14 X16 X14 X16 X16 X16 X15 X14
6 7 7 S18 9 18 21
X16 X15 20 X14
X16 X16 X16
R1.5
V–B1
G/R1
B1
B/N1
X16
4.1
A2.5 5 2
A2.5 XC6 XC6
A2.5
+15
3
R6 2.5
+30
1
2.3
86 87a 87
K3 2
4.3
R1.5
L–N1
B–N1.5
B–N1.5
L–N1.5
85 30
+15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 F1B F2C
7,5A 20A
N1.5
N1.5
X17
K13
KC
6 13 3 9 10 7
M–N1.5
B1.5
Z–B1
L1.5
S1
B1
G–R1
B/N1
M1.5
Z1
B–G1
R10
S–N1
V–N1
1 11 12 9 16 7 10 15 2 14 5 3
1 X1
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
X64
L–N1.5
R1.5
Z–B1
B1
G–R1
B/N1
M1.5
B–G1
Z1
R10
V–N1
l
XD
86 87
K01
85 30
-
R2.5
-
XD X2
S19
t
FG1 FG2
80A 70A l
B2.5
R10 X2
L–N1
A–G1
L–N1
N1
S1
R10
S–N1
A–R1
R50
3
1 A 1
1 2 X3 S24 S25
G1 XA X3 S20 S21 X4 X5
R1 X3 EV13
30 50
D+
R2 R3
M M
12Vcc
M1 G2 3
30
G W
p p p t
U 1 - X11
t
31
EV0 M2 B 2
N2.5
N1.5
X4 X5
N50
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
31
2.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SOLENOID VALVES

G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
EV7 – Differential Lock Solenoid Valve
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
...... X8 = 2 Pin
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
HA1 – Horn
...... X19 = 2 Pin
K10 – Differential Lock Relay
...... XC1 = 11 Pin
...... XC2 = 7 Pin
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
...... XC4 = 21 Pin
...... XC6 = 13 Pin
...... X28 = 4 Pin
S27 – Horn Button
...... X27 = 2 Pin
S28 – Grab Sender
...... X26 = 3 Pin
S29 – Horn Button
...... X28 = 4 Pin
S47 – Differential Lock Switch
S48 – EGS Manual/Auto Switch
S50 – EGS Switch
...... X83 = 19 Pin
X1 = . Engine Harness Connector 18 Pin
X82 = EGS System Connector 9 Pin
X84 = Gear Box Extension 13 Pin
X85 = Gear Box Connector 12 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5

R–N1
5.1
R/N1
4.1
N1 4.1
R/N1 C1
M/B1 Z/N1 4.4
M–V1
2 6 1 5 9 1 9 1 9 1 7 2 8 10
1 1 0 1 0 1 0
2 0
EGS
4 8 3 7 10 5 10 5 10 5 6 9 S50
S2 S3 S47 S48
A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S T U V
N1 X83
B–G0.5
L0.5
H–B0.5
R0.5
L–B0.5
B–V0.5
S0.5
B0.5
B–M0.5
B–S0.5
M0.5
G0.5
N0.5
H0.5
V0.5
Z0.5
C–B1
R–N1
6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 1 2 X9 X82
X9
B–R1
M–V1
M–B1
A–B1
M–N1
Z/N1
C1
M/B1
H–N1
B–R1
C–L1
A–B1
4.1
7 2 6 11 6 11 5 1 9 3
70
F6C 5.2
7,5A +15 +15 1
1.4
F4A F4B
+15 5A 10A 3
1.4
K10
K4 K2
86 87a 87 86 87a 87 86 87a 87
85 30 85 30 85 30
KC
1 6 9 19 16 5 8 11 8 1
R–V1
3.5
B–R1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
H–N1
A–R1
H–R1
C–N1
C–N1
A–G1
R–V1
C–L1
X84
19 20 6 23 10 13 14 22 24 8
X10 X10 X1 X10 X10 X10 X10 X10 X10 X10
C–N1
C–N1
M–B1
G0.5
M–B0.5
Z0.5
B–V0.5
R0.5
N0.5
S0.5
L0.5
M0.5
H0.5
V0.5
B0.5
H–N1
H–R1
C–L1
M L K J H G F E D C B A
X85
GEAR BOX
B–R1
A–R1
A–G1
H–R1
R–V1
2 1 1 2 2 2
X8 X35 X35 2 1 X27
X8 C A B 1 2 X19
X28 X28 4 3
X26 X29 X29
S27 X28 X28
1
HA1
2
1
N2.5
N2.5
X27 1
EV7 EV6
N1
S29
N1
EV2 S26 S28 X19

N1
N1
N1
N1
31 31
1.5 3.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SOLENOID VALVES

G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
EV4 – Rear Translation Solenoid Valve
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
. . . . . . X24 = 2 Pin
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
. . . . . . (Optional)
. . . . . . X34 = 2 Pin
. . . . . . (Optional)
. . . . . . X31 = 2 Pin
. . . . . . (Optional)
. . . . . . X36 – 2 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5

1.5 6.1
C/N1 C/N1 C/N1 C/N1
1.5 6.1
C/B1 C/B1 6.2
H1
1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 7 2 8 10
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 6 9
S4 S5 S6 S7 S8
V1
L–G1
A–N1
B–N1
N1
N1
6.1
L/G1
C–B1
6 9 5 15 16 8
X15 X14 X15 X16 X16 X14
V1
L/G1
L–G1
A–N1
B–N1
C–B1
R–V1
2.3
R–V1
9 15 11 1 21 12
X10 X10 X10 X10 X10 X10
R–V1
2
X36
S30
V1
L–G1
A–N1
B–N1
C–B1
1
X36
R–V1
1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2
X30 X30 X34 X34 X31 X31 X24 X24 X25 X25 X32 X32
1
1
2

N1
N1
N1
N1
31 31
2.5 4.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FRONT LIGHTS

B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
...... XC4 = 21 Pin
...... XC5 = 17 Pin
ST2 – Front Panel
...... X70 = 12 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5

R/N1 R/N1 R/N1
2.5 7.4
ST2
20 15 30
10 20
40
10
5 25 15/1 30/3 R/7 1 6 8 9
0 1 0 1 2
30
50
MPH
49/4 30b/2 49a/5 L/6 3 2 10
Km/h
electronic
S10 S9
N1
N1
H–R1
A–G1
L/B1
L/R1
R1.5
R2.5
A/V1
G1.5
S–N1
H–N1.5
N1
N1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 X58
X70
H–L1
L–N1
L–G1
A–V1
G–N1
G–R1
V1
G1
A–B1
R–V1
A–V1
7.1
L–N1
7.1
L–G1
7.1
G/R1 G/R1
7.1
N1
2.5
V–N1.5
7.1
S31
V–N1.5
H–N1.5
H–R1
L/R1
R1.5
R2.5
G1.5
R/N1
H/R1
H–L1
R–V1
H1
3 18 6 21 10 10 9 3 8 16 20 5 2 4 4 13 2
F5C +30 +15 +15

15A
11 F6B F2A F7A L1
5.1 15A 5.1
7,5A 10A
10 A1
5.1 F5B 5.1
+15 10A +30
F3B F3A +
3A 3A 86 87a 87
51
L C 8.3
85 30
–
K12
K5
BZ1
KC 2 50
1.4 7.5
10
XC3
C1
A–B1 2.5
2.5
L1
V1
V1
A1
C1
H1
H1
G1
H/R1
6 7 1 4 5 2 3 1 4 5 2 3
X60 X59
L1
V1
V1
A1
C1
N1
H1
N1
H1
G1
H/R1
HA2
56b
56a
56b
56a
L
58
58
R
31
31
H2 H3
31 31
3.5 5.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

REAR LIGHTS

C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
K11 – Not Used H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
KC – Fuse and Relay Board L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
...... XC4 = 21 Pin
X37 = Rear Right Light Connector 4 Pin (Optional)
X42 = Front Right Indicator Connector 4 Pin
...... (Optional)
X48 = Rear Left Light Connector 4 Pin (Optional)
X52 = Front Left Indicator Connector 4 Pin
...... (Optional)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5
R–N1
2.5
S32 S33
4.5 L1
4.5 A1
R1
L1
L1
A1
G–N1
B/R1
R–N1
R–N1
G1
A1
19 17 7 8 9 6 8 2 7 17
F1C
10A
11 +15
4.2 70
2.2
71 7.5
K11
10 52
4.2 8.4
KC
2 13 12 20 21
XC3 XC3 XC3 XC3 XC3
R–N1
G1
A1
L1
G1
8.3
L1
L1
L1
G1
G1
N1
N1
N1
N1
A1
A1
A1
G–N1
G–N1
G–N1
R–N1
R–N1
R–N1
R–N1
5 2 6 4 3 9 8 10 7 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
X18 X52 X48 X42 X37
L1
G1
N1
N1
N1
A1
G–N1
G–N1
R–N1
R–N1
G–N1
N1
2 1
X63 X63
59c
59c
58
R
L
58
31
31
H4 H6
H5
N1
N1
31 31
4.5 6.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

WORKING LIGHTS

G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
...... X47 = 4 Pin
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
...... X38 = 4 Pin
...... X45 = 4 Pin
...... X46 = 4 Pin
...... X40 = 4 Pin
K8 – . Front Work Lights – External
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
...... XC5 = 17 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5

3.5 7.1
3.5 C/N1 C/N1 C/N1
7.1
C/B1
3.5
1 6 8 9 1 6 8 9
0 1 2 0 1 2
3 2 10 3 2 10
S11 S12
N1 N1 N1 7.1
3.5
A–V1
Z–N1
G–V1
C/B1
S–G1
3 1 3 5 14
X15 X15 X16 X16 X16
A–V1
Z–N1
G–V1
C/B1
S–G1
3 14 4 12 14 13 15 11 18
F4C
F5A F8B F8C F8A 10A
15A 15A 15A 15A
H1
V1
H–N1
V–N1
+15
K6 +30 +30 K7 +30 K9 +30

K8
86 87a 87 86 87a 87 86 87a 87 86 87a 87
85 30 85 30 85 30 85 30
KC
N1
H1
N1
H1
N1
N1
V1
H–N1
H–N1
V–N1
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
X51 X50 X44 X45 X47 X46 X38 X40
H11 H19 H12 H20 H13 H21 H14 H22

N1
31 31
5.5 7.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
...... XC2 = 7 Pin
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
M4 – . Rear Windshield Wiper Motor G–V = Yellow–Green (Longitudinal Colours)
...... X39 = 4 Pin
M5 – . Front Windshield Wiper Motor
...... X49 = 6 Pin
M6 – . Rear Windshield Washer
...... X57 = 2 Pin
M7 – . Front Windshield Washer
...... X56 = 2 Pin
M9 – . Optional Blower Motor
...... X41 = 2 Pin
S41 – Windshield Wiper/Lights Switch
...... X61 = 12 Pin
X12 = Cabin Cable Connector 5 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5

6.5 8.1 4.5
C/N1
6.5
S14 S41
0 1
2
57/58 56b 56a 54S 54D 53 31b 49
R
S15 H15 H16
2 6 7 9 0 1 9
I 1 0
II 0
L
56 30 L 15 31
3 5 10 5 10
A–V1.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 - l - l
X61 X80 X80 X81 X81
V–N1.5
L–G1
A–V1
G/R1
A/B1
L–N1
A/N1
A/R1
N1
L1
M1
6.5
4.5 A–V1
L–N1
4.5 1 2 3 4
A–G1.5
L–G1
4.5 X43
G/R1
4.5
4.5 V–N1.5
L/B1
L–B1
C/N1
A/N1
A/R1
A/B1
13 2 1 12 1 4
X16 X16 X16 X16 X9 X16
A–G1.5
A–G1.5
A–V1.5
R/N1
A/N1
A/R1
A/N1
A/B1
A/B1
C/N1
Z1
Z1
4 1 3 14 15 12 1 1 16 5 7 4 7
F7C
F6A F3C
6A
7,5A 10A
A.R.
+15 +15 +15
5.3 71
+15
F1A
15A
50
KC 4.4
17
XC3
A/N1
L/B1
L–B1
A/N1
A/R1
A/B1
16 6 5 4 1 2 3
X10 X12 X12 X12 X12 X12
L/B1
L–B1
R/N1
A/N1
A/N1
A/R1
A/N1
A/B1
A/B1
- l - l - l
X41 X41 4 1 2 3 X57 X57 X56 X56 6 3 4 1
X39 X49
53a 53a
M9 53
M 53b
31b
M M 53
M 53b
31b
31 31
M4 M6 M7 M5
N1.5
N1.5
N1.5
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
31 31
6.5 8.1
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
...... X13 = 4 Pin
...... X53 = 8 Pin
...... X54 = 8 Pin
...... X21 = 4 Pin
...... X20 = 2 Pin
...... X55 = 2 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5
G1 H17
5.5 H18
BS2 S46
S43
G1
S45
BS1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X53 X54 l l -
-
N1
N1
R–N1
R–N1
R–N1
X55 X55 X20 X20
N0.5
R0.5
N0.5
R0.5
C2.5
R1.5
Z2.5
G/N1
N1
G1.5
M–N1
B/R1
R–N1
N1
N1
R–N1 G/N1
7.2 1.5
R–N1.5
1.5
R2.5
R–N1.5
R–N1
N2.5
G/N1
2 1 4 4 3 2 1 1
X14 X14 X14 X13 X77
M
G/N1
R–N1.5
R–N1.5
S34 S35 M8
12 10 11 4
XC6 XC5 XC6 XC6
R–N1
N1
1 2 3 4
X21
S44 F7B F2B

10A 15A
+30 +15 +30
51 52
4.4 5.2
KC
N1.5
N1.5
7.5 31
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

INSTRUMENT PANELS

+ILL 6 Instrument Lighting +Lights L8 7 NC
10 NC L5 10 NC
WIRE COLOURS:
14 NC B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
Lamp
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

L10 S2 L12
5 6 4 3 2 1 20 11
+15
15 9
10 20 S2 L1 L2 L3 L4
S1 S4
S1 S4
5 25
L10 17
RPM x 100 30 S3
Gnd L12 L8
electronic
8
L5 L6 L7
00000 00 h +ILL B
NC 7 15 19 18 13 14 16
10
12
+30
L1 L2 L3 L4 S3 L5 L6 L7 L8
S1
3 11 12 5 4
+12
1
L1 L1 L2 L3 L4
S1
20 15 30
10 20
L2 40
10
5 25
L3 30
50
MPH
Gnd
L4 Km/h 2
L5 L6 L7 L8
electronic
+ILL
6 10 9 8 7
LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 85–110 / FB 90.2–110.2

SECTION 55 – 4WS POWERSHIFT (OUTSIDE N/AMERICA) – CHAPTER 2 113
CONTENT
Wiring Diagrams and Connectors – Powershift (4WS) 108 hp
Circuit 1 – System from key start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Circuit 2 – Electric solenoid valve systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Circuit 3 – Electric solenoid valve systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Circuit 4 – Front lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Circuit 5 – Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Circuit 6 – Working lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Circuit 7 – Windshield wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Circuit 8 – Cab radio, heater blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Circuit 9 – Instrument panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

114 SECTION 55 – 4WS POWERSHIFT (OUTSIDE N/AMERICA) – CHAPTER 2

B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
G1 – Battery
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
. . . . . . XC6 = 13 Pin
. . . . . . XA = 1 Pin
M2 – Fuel Pump
. . . . . . X3 = 3 Pin
. . . . . . X11 = 1 Pin
. . . . . . X5 = 2 Pin
. . . . . . X65 = 1 pin
. . . . . . X71 = 10 pin
. . . . . . X2 = 2 Pin
. . . . . . X4 = 2 Pin
. . . . . . X22 = 20 Pin
X64 = 1 Pin
XD = 2 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

X76 1
2
58 15/54 19 17 50a 3 ST1 C/N1
3.1
P
0 1 2
3 4 15 R–N1 3.1
5
10 20
S1
S17 30
6 V–B1 X75 1
5 25
7 Z1 2 1 0
1 9
8 G–R1 3 RPM x 100 30

5 10
10 L–B1 5 00000 00 h
B1.5
11
12
5 6 1 7 2 4 9
X71 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1920 1
X71 X71 X71 X71 X71 X71 X65
M–N1.5
X22
B1.5
M/N1
M1.5
M–N1.5
V–B1
Z–B1
M/N1
G/N1
R–N1.5
R1
G/R1
B1
S1
G–R1
Z1
B/N1
B–G1
V–N1
S–N1
R–N1.5
8.1
G/N1 8.4
G/R1
5 7 3 19 8 17 4 6
X14 X16 X14 X16 X16 X16 X15 X14
6 7 7 S18 9 18 21
X16 X15 20 X14
X16 X16 X16
R1.5
V–B1
G/R1
B1
B/N1
X16
4.1
A2.5 5 2
A2.5 XC6 XC6
A2.5
+15
3
R6 2.5
+30
1
2.3
86 87a 87
K3 2
4.3
R1.5
L–N1
B–N1.5
B–N1.5
L–N1.5
85 30
+15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 F1B F2C
7,5A 20A
N1.5
N1.5
X17
K13
KC
6 13 3 9 10 7
M–N1.5
B1.5
Z–B1
L1.5
S1
B1
G–R1
B/N1
M1.5
Z1
B–G1
R10
S–N1
V–N1
1 11 12 9 16 7 10 15 2 14 5 3
1 X1
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
X64
L–N1.5
R1.5
Z–B1
B1
G–R1
B/N1
M1.5
B–G1
Z1
R10
V–N1
l
XD
86 87
K01
85 30
-
R2.5
-
XD X2
S19
t
FG1 FG2
80A 70A l
B2.5
R10 X2
L–N1
A–G1
L–N1
N1
S1
R10
S–N1
A–R1
R50
3
1 A 1
1 2 X3 S24 S25
XA S20 S21 X4 X5
G1 R1 X3 X3 EV13
30 50
D+
R2 R3
M M
12Vcc
M1 G2 3
30
G W
p p p t
U 1 - X11
t
31
EV0 M2 B 2
N2.5
N1.5
X4 X5
N50
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
31
2.1
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SOLENOID VALVES

G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
EV6 – Grab Level Solenoid Valve
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
. . . . . . X29 = 2 Pin
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
HA1 – Horn
. . . . . . X19 = 2 Pin
K10 – Optional
. . . . . . XC1 = 11 Pin
. . . . . . XC2 = 7 Pin
. . . . . . XC3 = 21 Pin
. . . . . . XC4 = 21 Pin
. . . . . . XC6 = 13 Pin
. . . . . . X28 = 4 Pin
S27 – Horn Button
. . . . . . X27 = 2 Pin
S28 – Grab Sender
. . . . . . X26 = 3 Pin
S29 – Horn Button
. . . . . . X28 = 4 Pin
. . . . . . X36 = 2 Pin
S48 – EGS Manual/Auto Switch
S50 – EGS Switch
. . . . . . X83 = 19 Pin
X82 = EGS System Connector 9 Pin
X84 = Gear Box Extension 13 Pin
X85 = Gear Box Connector 12 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5

R–N1
5.1
R/N1
4.1
N1 4.1
R/N1 C1
Z/N1 4.4
M–V1
2 6 1 5 9 1 9 1 7 2 8 10
1 1 0 1 0
2 0
EGS
4 8 3 7 10 5 10 5 6 9 S50
S2 S3 S48
A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S T U V
N1 X83
B–G0.5
L0.5
H–B0.5
R0.5
L–B0.5
B–V0.5
S0.5
B0.5
B–M0.5
B–S0.5
M0.5
G0.5
N0.5
H0.5
V0.5
Z0.5
R–N1
6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 1 X9 X82
X9
B–R1
M–V1
M–B1
A–B1
M–N1
Z/N1
C1
M/B1
H–N1
B–R1
A–B1
4.1
7 2 6 11 6 11 5 1 9 3
70
F6C 5.2
7,5A +15 +15 1
1.4
F4A F4B
+15 5A 10A 3
1.4
K10
K4 K2
86 87a 87 86 87a 87 86 87a 87
85 30 85 30 85 30
KC
1 6 9 19 16 5 8 11 8 1
B–R1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
H–N1
A–R1
H–R1
C–N1
C–N1
A–G1
R–V1
R–V1
X84
12 20 6 23 10 13 14 22 24 8
X10 X10 X1 X10 X10 X10 X10 X10 X10 X10
R–V1
C–N1
C–N1
M–B1
G0.5
M–B0.5
Z0.5
B–V0.5
R0.5
N0.5
S0.5
L0.5
M0.5
H0.5
V0.5
B0.5
H–N1
H–R1
2
X36
S30
1
X36
M L K J H G F E D C B A
X85
GEAR BOX
B–R1
A–R1
A–G1
H–R1
R–V1
R–V1
1 2 1 2 2 2
X32 X35 X35 2 1 X27
X32 C A B 1 2 X19
X28 X28 4 3
X26 X29 X29
S27 X28 X28
1
HA1
2
1
N2.5
N2.5
X27 1
EV3 EV6
N1
S29
N1
EV2 S26 S28 X19

N1
N1
N1
N1
31 31
1.5 3.1
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SOLENOID VALVES

EV4 – Rear Translation Solenoid Valve B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
. . . . . . X25 = 2 Pin
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
EV11 – Ride Control Solenoid Valve (Optional)
. . . . . . X34 = 2 Pin
. . . . . . (Optional) G–V = Yellow–Green (Longitudinal Colours)
. . . . . . X31 = 2 Pin
EVA2 –4WS Selection Solenoid Valve
. . . . . . X91 = 2 Pin
EVA3– 4WS Enable Solenoid Valve
. . . . . . X93 = 2 Pin
EVB2– Crab Steering Solenoid Valve
. . . . . . X92 = 2 Pin
EVB3– 2WS Enable Solenoid Valve
. . . . . . X94 = 2 Pin
S47 – Steering Switch
X9 = . Front Dashboard Connector 13 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5

1.5 6.1
C/N1 C/N1 C/N1 C/N1
1.5 6.1
C/B1 C/B1 6.2
H1
1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 7 2 8 10 B C F
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 2
5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 6 9
A E
S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S47
L–G1
V1
A–N1
B–N1
L–R1
R–G1
V/N1
N1
R–G1
4.1
N1
6.1
8 9
X9 X9
V/N1
A–R1
L/G1
C–B1
6 9 5 15 16 8
X15 X14 X15 X16 X16 X14
L–G1
V1
L/G1
A–N1
B–N1
C–B1
A–R1 4.1
V/N1
4.1
L/R1
4.2
S/N1
4.2
H/N1
4.2
M/B1
4.3
L/R1
M/B1
H/N1
S/N1
9 19 11 1 21 7 17 4 5
X10 X10 X10 X10 X10 X10 X10 X10 X10
L–G1
L/R1
M/B1
V1
H/N1
S/N1
A–N1
B–N1
C–B1
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
X30 X34 X31 X24 X25 X91 X92 X93 X94
1
1
2
N1
EV1 EV11 EV12 EV4 EV5 EVA2 EVB2 EVA3 EVB3

N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
31 31
2.5 4.1
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FRONT LIGHTS
BZ1 – Audible warning Buzzer WIRE COLOURS:

B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
...... XC4 = 21 Pin
...... XC5 = 17 Pin
KS – . Steering Unit
...... X95 = 12 Pin
...... X96 = 8 Pin
S40 – Front Axle Sensor
...... X97 = 3 Pin
S42 – Rear Axle Sensor
...... X98 = 3 Pin
ST2 – Front Panel
...... X70 = 12 Pin
X9 = . Front Dashboard Connector13 Pin
X33 = Bridge Connector 2 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
2.5 R/N1 R/N1 R/N1

7.4
ST2
20 15 30
10 20
40
10
5 25 15/1 30/3 R/7 1 6 8 9
0 1 0 1 2
30
50
MPH
49/4 30b/2 49a/5 L/6 3 2 10
Km/h
electronic
S10 S9
L/R1
R1.5
R2.5
L/B1
H–N1.5
N1
H–R1
A–G1
A/V1
G1.5
S–N1
N1
N1
N1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
X58
L–G1
A–V1
H–L1
L–N1
X70
A–B1
Z/B1
M1
G1
V1
G–N1
G–R1
V/B1
A–N1
A–V1
7.1
L–N1
N1 7.1
2.5
L–G1 7.1
G/R1 G/R1 7.1
S31 V–N1.5 7.1
3.5 R–G1
B/R1
5.1
7 10 12 11
X9
H–N1.5
V–N1.5
R/N1
H/R1
B/R1
R2.5
R1.5
L/R1
H–R1
G1.5
H–L1
R–G1
R–G1
2
H1
XC1
8 3 18 6 21 10 10 9 3 8 16 20 5 2 4 4 13 2
F6B +30 +15 +15

F1C 7,5A
10A 11 5.1 F5C F2A F7A L1
5.1
15A 15A 10A
10 F5B A1
5.1 5.1
+15 +15 10A +30
K5
K12
F3B F3A
3A 3A
+
86 87a 87
51
L C 8.3
85 30
–
BZ1
KC 2 50
1.4 7.5
10
XC3
C1
M/B1
A–B1
3.5
2 1
A–B1 X33
2.3 C1
H/N1 2.5
V–B1 3.5
1.4 3.5
S/N1
V/N1 3.5 L/R1
3.5
L1
G1
C1
H1
H1
H/R1
V1
V1
A1
6 7 1 4 5 2 3 1 4 5 2 3
X60 X59
L1
G1
C1
N1
H1
N1
H1
H/R1
V1
V1
A1
2 15 3 18
X10 X10 X10 X10
A–R1
3.5
L/N1
H–L1
R/N1
A/V1
Z/B1
V–B1
A–B1
L/N1
L/R1
M1
H–L1
L–N1
C1
N1
M/B1
R–G1
H/N1
R/N1
V/N1
S/N1
V/B1
A/V1
A–R1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X95 X96
C B A C B A
X97 X98
56b
56a
56b
56a
L
58
58
R
STEERING UNIT
31
31
H2 H3
KS
N1
S40 S42 HA2

3.5 31 31
5.1
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

REAR LIGHTS

C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
K11 – Not Used H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
KC – Fuse and Relay Board L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
...... XC4 = 21 Pin
X37 = Rear Right Light Connector 4 Pin (Optional)
X42 = Front Right Indicator Connector 4 Pin
...... (Optional)
X48 = Rear Left Light Connector 4 Pin (Optional)
X52 = Front Left Indicator Connector 4 Pin
...... (Optional)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5
R–N1
2.5
B/R1
4.5
S32 S33
4.5 L1
4.5 A1
R1
L1
L1
A1
G–N1
R–N1
R–N1
G1
A1
19 17 7 8 9 6 7 17
4.2 11
70
2.2
71 7.5
K11
10 52
4.2 8.4
KC
2 13 12 20 21
XC3 XC3 XC3 XC3 XC3
R–N1
G1
A1
L1
G1
8.3
L1
L1
L1
G1
G1
N1
N1
N1
N1
A1
A1
A1
G–N1
G–N1
G–N1
R–N1
R–N1
R–N1
R–N1
5 2 6 4 3 9 8 10 7 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
X18 X52 X48 X42 X37
L1
G1
N1
N1
N1
A1
G–N1
G–N1
R–N1
R–N1
G–N1
N1
2 1
X63 X63
59c
59c
58
R
L
58
31
31
H4 H6
H5
N1
N1
31 31
4.5 6.1
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

WORKING LIGHTS

G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
...... X47 = 4 Pin
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
...... X38 = 4 Pin
...... X45 = 4 Pin
...... X46 = 4 Pin
...... X40 = 4 Pin
K8 – . Front Wotk Lights – External
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
...... XC5 = 17 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5

3.5 7.1
3.5 C/N1 C/N1 C/N1
7.1
C/B1
3.5
1 6 8 9 1 6 8 9
0 1 2 0 1 2
3 2 10 3 2 10
S11 S12
N1 N1 N1 7.1
3.5
A–V1
Z–N1
G–V1
C/B1
S–G1
3 1 3 5 14
X15 X15 X16 X16 X16
A–V1
Z–N1
G–V1
C/B1
S–G1
3 14 4 12 14 13 15 11 18
F4C
F5A F8B F8C F8A 10A
15A 15A 15A 15A
H1
V1
H–N1
V–N1
+15
K6 +30 +30 K7 +30 K9 +30

K8
86 87a 87 86 87a 87 86 87a 87 86 87a 87
85 30 85 30 85 30 85 30
KC
N1
H1
N1
H1
N1
N1
V1
H–N1
H–N1
V–N1
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
X51 X50 X44 X45 X47 X46 X38 X40
H11 H19 H12 H20 H13 H21 H14 H22

N1
31 31
5.5 7.1
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


G = YELLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . S = PINK
H = GREY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = GREEN
...... XC2 = 7 Pin
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
...... XC3 = 21 Pin
M4 – . Rear Windshield Wiper Motor G–V = Yellow–Green (Longitudinal Colours)
...... X39 = 4 Pin
M5 – . Front Windshield Wiper Motor
...... X49 = 6 Pin
M6 – . Rear Windshield Washer
...... X57 = 2 Pin
M7 – . Front Windshield Washer
...... X56 = 2 Pin
M9 – . Optional Blower Motor
...... X41 = 2 Pin
S41 – Windshield Wiper/Lights Switch
...... X61 = 12 Pin
X9 = . Front Dashboard Connector 9 Pin
X12 = Cabin Cable Connector 5 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5

6.5 8.1 4.5
C/N1
6.5
S14 S41
0 1
2
57/58 56b 56a 54S 54D 53 31b 49
R
S15 H15 H16
2 6 7 9 0 1 9
I 1 0
II 0
L
56 30 L 15 31
3 5 10 5 10
A–V1.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 - l - l
X61 X80 X80 X81 X81
V–N1.5
L–G1
A–V1
G/R1
A/B1
L–N1
A/N1
A/R1
N1
L1
M1
6.5
4.5 A–V1
L–N1
4.5 1 2 3 4
A–G1.5
L–G1
4.5 X43
G/R1
4.5
4.5 V–N1.5
L/B1
L–B1
C/N1
A/N1
A/R1
A/B1
13 2 1 12 5 4
X16 X16 X16 X16 X9 X16
A–G1.5
A–G1.5
A–V1.5
R/N1
A/N1
A/R1
A/N1
A/B1
A/B1
C/N1
Z1
Z1
4 1 3 14 15 12 1 1 16 5 7 4 7
F7C
F6A F3C
6A
7,5A 10A
A.R.
+15 +15 +15
5.3 71
+15
F1A
15A
50
KC 4.4
17
XC3
A/N1
L/B1
L–B1
A/N1
A/R1
A/B1
16 6 5 4 1 2 3
X10 X12 X12 X12 X12 X12
L/B1
L–B1
R/N1
A/N1
A/N1
A/R1
A/N1
A/B1
A/B1
- l - l - l
X41 X41 4 1 2 3 X57 X57 X56 X56 6 3 4 1
X39 X49
53a 53a
M9 53
M 53b
31b
M M 53
M 53b
31b
31 31
M4 M6 M7 M5
N1.5
N1.5
N1.5
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
31 31
6.5 8.1
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
...... X13 = 4 Pin
...... X53 = 8 Pin
...... X54 = 8 Pin
...... X21 = 4 Pin
...... X20 = 2 Pin
...... X55 = 2 Pin
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5
G1 H17
5.5 H18
BS2 S46
S43
G1
S45
BS1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X53 X54 l l -
-
N1
N1
R–N1
R–N1
R–N1
X55 X55 X20 X20
N0.5
R0.5
N0.5
R0.5
C2.5
R1.5
Z2.5
G/N1
N1
G1.5
M–N1
B/R1
R–N1
N1
N1
R–N1 G/N1
7.2 1.5
R–N1.5
1.5
R2.5
R–N1.5
R–N1
N2.5
G/N1
2 1 4 4 3 2 1 1
X14 X14 X14 X13 X77
M
G/N1
R–N1.5
R–N1.5
S34 S35 M8
12 10 11 4
XC6 XC5 XC6 XC6
R–N1
N1
1 2 3 4
X21
S44 F7B F2B

10A 15A
+30 +15 +30
51 52
4.4 5.2
KC
N1.5
N1.5
7.5 31
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

INSTRUMENT PANELS

+ILL 6 Instrument Lighting +Lights L8 7 Neutral Green Lamp +
Gnd 8 Negative L7 8 Crab Steering Lamp +
+15 9 Positive L6 9 Front Steering Lamp +
10 NC L5 10 Circular Steering Lamp +
WIRE COLOURS:
14 NC B = WHITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = BLACK
C= ORANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = RED
L = BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z = VIOLET
Lamp
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

L10 S2 L12
5 6 4 3 2 1 20 11
+15
15 9
10 20 S2 L1 L2 L3 L4
S1 S4
S1 S4
5 25
L10 17
RPM x 100 30 S3
Gnd L12 L8
electronic
8
L5 L6 L7
00000 00 h +ILL B
NC 7 15 19 18 13 14 16
10
12
+30
L1 L2 L3 L4 S3 L5 L6 L7 L8
S1
3 11 12 5 4
+12
1
L1 L5 L1 L2 L3 L4
S1
20 15 30
10 20
L2 40 L6
10
5 25
L3 30 L7
50
MPH
Gnd
L4 Km/h L8 2
L5 L6 L7 L8
electronic
+ILL
6 10 9 8 7
LB 115 / FB 200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 115 / FB 200.2

Chapter 3 – Starting System
CONTENT
55 201 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
System Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Bench Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SPECIFICATIONS
Starter Type Bosch 3.1 Kw
Maximum No Load Current Draw at 11.5 volts
and 8000 rev/min. 160 amps
Minimum Brush Length 7.00 mm (0.28 in)
Minimum Commutator Diameter 42.5 mm
Maximum Armature Shaft End Play 0.4 mm (0.015 in)
lbf.ft Nm
Starting Motor to Engine Block Retaining Bolts 25 34
Solenoid Cable Nuts 5 7
Starting Motor End Housing Nuts 7 10
Solenoid Retaining Bolts 4 5
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

OPERATION
The system consists of a key start switch, heavy duty
wiring, starter motor, relay and solenoid assembly.
The starting motor is a four pole four brush type with
integral solenoid and positive engagement drive as-
sembly.
The integral solenoid incorporates two windings con-
nected in parallel. One winding is the low resistance
‘pull–in’ coil, grounded through the motor, while the
other is the high resistance ‘hold–in’ coil grounded
via the solenoid body.
When the key start switch is operated with the trans-
mission forward/reverse shuttle lever in neutral the
solenoid coils are energised and the solenoid
plunger is magnetically attracted into the solenoid
core.
This movement, transmitted through a pivoted link-
age mechanism forces the drive pinion into mesh
with the flywheel ring gear. At ring gear to pinion en-
gagement, the solenoid plunger closes a set of con-
tacts to give a direct feed from the battery to all four
field coils, providing full power to the starting motor.
At this point one end of the ‘pull–in’ coil is connected
to battery positive through the starter switch while the
other end is connected to positive through the sole-
noid contacts. The ‘pull–in’ coil is thus by–passed,
drawing no current and the ‘hold–in’ coil alone keeps
the solenoid plunger engaged.
The starter incorporates a single set of contacts and
a two piece solenoid plunger which completely
closes the contacts even if the pinion and ring gear
teeth are misaligned. When this happens, an en-
gagement spring is compressed which forces the
pinion into full engagement as soon as the starter be-
gins to turn.
When the key start switch is released, power to the
solenoid and motor is removed. The solenoid return
spring acting through the pivoted linkage mechanism
pulls the drive pinion out of mesh and reopens the
solenoid contacts.
Incorporated in the drive pinion assembly is a roller
clutch device. This device prevents the armature
from rotating excessively if the pinion remains in
mesh with the flywheel ring gear after the engine has
started.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

FAULT FINDING
Engine Does Not Turn Over When Key Start Is Operated, Transmission In Neutral
Is the battery Charge or replace
fully charged? NO battery. Does engine
turn over OK?
Inspect starter circuit wiring. Are all

connections tight, is the battery Repair wiring
negative to ground connection O.K, are as required
any wires broken or frayed, possibly
causing a short circuit?
Is the engine Investigate

seized? engine failure
Operate key start switch, is there Can the Suspect faulty motor
+12v at the starter solenoid input solenoid be windings, brushes or
wire (white) heard mechanical failure
‘clicking’?
Inspect starter relay (R3),
operate key start switch, can the Replace Suspect faulty starter
relay be felt/heard operating? relay solenoid, remove
starter and inspect
Remove connector to relay is there +12v on terminal

Replace relay
86, when the key start switch is operated (white/black)
Inspect starter relay (K0), operate key start switch, Replace relay
can the relay be felt/heard operating?
Remove connector to relay is there

+12v on, pin 4, when the key start Replace relay
switch is operated (white/black)
Inspect wiring to transmission shuttle Reconnect wiring

NO
lever, are wires connected? to switch
Check operation of shuttle lever is it NO Replace switch

working
Do the displays in the instrument panel Check the main feed to the key
NO start switch from the battery.
illuminate when the key start is operated?
Pin 2 (Red wire) of key start
connector.
Inspect the key start switch,
if wiring to switch is O.K.
replace switch
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

STARTER SYSTEM TESTING ON TRACTOR

For easier and rapid diagnosis and for most conclus-
ive test results, it is recommended that a battery–
starter tester (high rate discharge tester) incorporat-
ing a 0–20 volt voltmeter and a 0–500 amp ammeter
be used to diagnose starting system problems.
When using test equipment follow the manufacturers
recommended test procedures. If test equipment is
not available the following test procedure, using a
standard 0–20 volt voltmeter and 0–500 amp am-
meter can be used to determine the correct operation
of the starter without removing it from the engine.
Before testing:
• Check that the battery is fully charged.
• Check the complete starting system wiring circuit
for frayed or broken wires or loose terminal con-
nections.
• Check the engine is not seized.
Starter Motor Circuit Current Draw

1. Disconnect the Battery (3) ground (negative)
cable from the battery.
2. Disconnect the battery positive cable from the
starter solenoid. Connect the ammeter(1) posi-
tive lead to the battery positive terminal and the
negative lead to the solenoid input terminal.
3. Reconnect the battery ground (negative) cable to
the battery negative terminal.
4. Connect the voltmeter(2) positive lead to the bat-
tery positive terminal and the voltmeter negative
lead to the battery negative terminal.
5. Disconnect the wire from the fuel injection pump
9
shut off solenoid.
6. Crank the engine while observing the voltmeter
and ammeter readings. The voltage should re-
main steady at around 12 volts with between
250–300 amps being drawn.
• If the current draw is within specification the
starting motor (4) is functioning correctly. If the
voltage drops during the test proceed to ‘Starting
System Circuit Resistance’.
• If the current draw is greater than specified,
check the circuit as outlined below. If the starting
system circuit tests are satisfactory the starting
motor is defective and must be disassembled to
determine the cause.
• If the current draw is less than specified, the
starting motor is defective and must be disas-
sembled to determine the cause.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Starting System Circuit Resistance

(Voltage Drop)
If there is an excessive current draw the circuit
should be checked by recording voltage drops
across the individual components in the circuit
IMPORTANT: Disconnect the fuel injection pump
fuel shut off solenoid wire.
Battery Positive Cable:
1. Connect the voltmeter positive lead to the battery
V
positive terminal.
2. Connect the voltmeter negative lead to the start-
ing motor solenoid battery terminal.
reading. If the voltage exceeds 0.2 volts, check
and tighten the cable connections. Recheck the
voltage, if still excessive install a new cable.
60–55–002 mm
10
Starting Motor Ground Connections:
1. Connect the voltmeter positive lead to the start-
ing motor frame.
2. Connect the voltmeter negative lead to the en-
gine block.
reading. If the voltmeter reading exceeds 0.2
volts check the ground connections between the
starting motor flange and the chassis.
60–55–003 mm
11
Battery Ground Cable:
1. Connect the voltmeter positive lead to the engine
block. V
2. Connect the voltmeter negative lead to the bat-
tery negative terminal.
reading. If the reading exceeds 0.2 volts, check
and tighten the ground cable connections. Re-
check the voltage, if it is still excessive install a
new ground cable.
60–55–004 mm
12
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

10 201 STARTER MOTOR REMOVAL

AND INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the battery ground (negative) cable
from the battery.
2. Remove the protective cover from the solenoid
assembly and disconnect the positive cables to
the solenoid and the solenoid coil feed wire.
3. Remove the three starting motor mounting bolts
and remove the starting motor.
4. Installation is the reverse of the removal pro-
cedure.
13
14
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Starter Motor – Exploded View

1. Stud and Bolt Kit 11. Housing Assembly
2. End Cap 12. Solenoid Assembly
3. Collar and Ring Assembly, Drive Thrust 13. Solenoid Hardware Kit
4. Brush End Plate Assembly 14. Lever Assembly
5. Brush Assembly 15. Brush Spring
6. Brush Assembly 16. Brush Holder Assembly
7. Field Coils and Housing Assembly 17. Washer
8. Armature 18. Nut
9. Centre Bearing Plate 19. Drive Assembly
10. Bushing
DISASSEMBLY RE–ASSEMBLY
1. Re–assembly of the starting motor follows the
With reference to Figure 14. disassembly procedure in reverse.
1. Support the starting motor in a soft jawed vice. Prior to installation, the armature end play must be
2. Disconnect the thick braided wire from the field checked and the starting motor no load function must
coil housing to the solenoid assembly. be tested.
3. Remove the three screws from the front housing
assembly and withdraw the solenoid assembly.
Note that the plunger will remain in the drive en-
gagement lever.
4. Remove the solenoid plunger from the drive en-
gagement lever by gripping the plunger and lift-
ing up the front end and releasing it from the drive
engagement lever.
5. Remove the two end housing nuts and the two
screws retaining the end cap and brush plate to
the end housing. Remove the ‘C’ clip and arma-
ture shaft end play shims and withdraw the end
housing, leaving the brush gear on the commuta-
tor. Remove the thin metal washer from the
commutator end of the armature.
6. At this stage of disassembly inspect the brushes
and commutator. Check for sticking brushes. If
necessary, clean brushes and brush channels
with a petrol moistened cloth. Check brushes for
wear. If worn below the minimum length speci-
fied, of 7.00mm, it will be necessary to replace
the complete starter motor.
NOTE: The brushes are not serviced separately..
They are spot welded into position and not intended
to be replaced during the starter motors service life.
7. Withdraw the motor casing from the armature
and drive end bracket.
8. Withdraw the drive engagement lever pivot pin
from the drive end housing.
9. Remove the drive assembly and inner plate re-
taining snap ring from the armature shaft by driv-
ing the securing thrust collar squarely off the
snap ring with a suitable diameter tube and then
levering the snap ring from the groove.
10. Withdraw the armature and drive assembly.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Checking the Armature End Play:

1. Secure the starting motor in a vice equipped with
soft jaws and attach a dial indicator to the drive
end housing flange. Locate the dial indicator
pointer on the end of the armature shaft.
2. Lever the armature fully forward and zero the dial
indicator. Lever the shaft fully rearwards and re-
cord the gauge reading.
3. The gauge reading should not exceed 0.4mm
(0.015in). If the reading is greater, inspect the ar-
mature assembly and the brush end plate as-
sembly for wear. Replace worn components as
required and recheck the end play.
15
Starting Motor No–Load Test:
NOTE: A fully charged battery and a battery starter

tester (high rate discharge tester) with a carbon pile
(variable load resistor) should be used to perform this
test.
1. Secure the starting motor in a vice equipped with
soft jaws.
2. Connect the battery negative cable (4) to the
starting motor mounting flange.
3. Connect a short jumper lead (6) between the
solenoid battery and solenoid switch terminals.
4. Connect a voltmeter (3) positive lead to the bat-
16
tery positive terminal, the voltmeter negative
lead to the battery negative terminal, the am-
meter (1) positive lead to the battery positive ter-
minal and the ammeter negative lead to the sole-
noid battery or starting motor terminal.
5. Hold a hand tachometer (5) on the end of the ar-
mature shaft. Actuate the starting motor by ad-
justing the carbon pile (2) to give 11.7 volts.
When the armature rotates between 7500 and
8500 rev/min. the maximum current draw should
not exceed 160 amperes.
6. If the starting motor does not perform to specifi-
cation, check for grounded field coils, a rubbing
armature or a distorted armature shaft.
BENCH TESTS
Armature
1. The commutator face should be clean and free
from burnt spots. If necessary remove any burnt
spots using fine glass paper, not emery cloth. Fi-
nally clean the commutator with a petrol
moistened cloth.
2. If it is necessary to skim the commutator ensure
the diameter is not reduced below the minimum
specified diameter of 42.5mm. Following skim-
ming the commutator should be polished with a
fine glass paper and then wiped clean with a pet-
rol moistened cloth.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

NOTE: Do not cut into the commutator metal when

re–cutting insulation slots.
3. Armature insulation can be checked by connect-
ing an ohmmeter between the commutator seg-
ments and the armature shaft. There should be
an infinity reading, i.e, no continuity.
4. To test the armature for short circuits it is necess-
ary to use suitable armature testing equipment,
the only alternative is to check the armature by
substitution.
5. If there is evidence that the armature circumfer-
ence has been in contact with the pole pieces,
then the armature bearings are probably excess-
ively worn. First check that the pole pieces are 17
tight and that the armature runs true in a lathe,
then if necessary renew the armature bearings.
Field Coils
1. To test the insulation of the field coils connect an
ohmmeter in turn between each of the field wind-
ing brushes and a clean unpainted part of the
housing. There should be no reading, i.e, no
continuity.
2. To test the field winding continuity connect an
ohmmeter in turn between each of the field wind-
ing brushes and the main feed terminal (thick
braided wire). A reading of 1 MΩ should be indi-
cated.
3. If a fault is indicated in the field windings it will be
necessary to replace the complete field coils and
housing assembly. 18
Bearing Bushes Drive Pinion Assembly

1. Inspect the bushes in the brush end plate assem- 1. Check the operation of the roller clutch. The pin-
bly and pinion drive end housing for wear. Install ion should rotate clockwise only. If the pinion is
the armature shaft and observe stuck or rotates in both directions, or if the pinion
2. the free play, replace bushes where free play ap- teeth are damaged install a new drive assembly.
pears excessive. Inspect the field poles for signs If damaged pinion teeth are evident, check the fly-
of rubbing by the armature which may also have wheel ring gear teeth as described in Section 10, En-
been caused by worn bushes. gine Systems.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Chapter 4 – Charging System
CONTENT
55 301 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Removal, Installation and Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SPECIFICATIONS
A127–70
Polarity Negative Ground
Nominal Voltage 12.0 v
Maximum Rev/Min. 15,000–18000
Maximum Output 70 Amps
Regulator Controlled Voltage 13.6 – 14.4 v
Rotor Field Winding Resistance 2.9Ω
Stator Field Winding Resistance 0.2Ω
New Brush Length 20.0 mm
Minimum Brush Length 5.0 mm
Brush Spring Pressure 1.3–2.7 N (4.7–9.8 oz)
lbf.ft Nm
Alternator Through Bolts 4.0 5.5
Pulley Retaining Nut 52.0 70
Rectifier Attaching Screws 3.0 4.0
Regulator and Brushbox Screws 2.0 2.7
Terminal Nuts 2.0 2.7
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000


The alternator is mounted high at the front of the en- 5 3 4
gine and is driven from a crankshaft pulley via a ‘vee’
drive belt. The alternator contains integral regulators
70 Amp Alternator
1. Earth (Ground) Connection 2
2. Engine Speed Sensor Connection (W Terminal)
3. Warning Lamp (D+ terminal)
4. Output Connection (B+ Terminal)
5. Protective Terminal Sleeve
1
Alternator Operation
With reference to Figure 2.
When the key start switch is turned on a small current
flows from the battery through the rotor field wiring.
The circuit is made via the charge indicator warning
lamp, alternator terminal ‘D+’ the rotor field winding,
the alternator regulator and ground.
At this stage the warning light is illuminated and the
rotor partially magnetised.
When the engine is started and the partially magne-
tised rotor revolves within the stator windings a
3–phase alternating current is generated. A constant
portion of the generated current is converted to direct
current by the three field diodes incorporated in the
rectifier pack.
This direct current is fed back to supplement the cur-
rent flowing through the rotor field winding.
This action results in an ever increasing magnetic in-
fluence of the rotor along with an associated rapid
rise in generated output current and voltage.
During the rise in generated output voltage (reflected
at the ‘D+’ terminal) the brilliance of the warning lamp
is reduced and when the voltage at the ‘D+’ terminal
equates to that at the battery side of the warning light
the lamp is extinquished.
The voltage continues to rise until the predetermined
regulated voltage level is reached.
In the event of drive belt breakage the voltage will not
build up within the alternator and so the charge indi-
cator light will remain on to indicate failure.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

1
7 8 9
6
A
B+
B
D+
W
C + 2
–
3
5 4
2
Alternator Charging Circuit (70 Amp)
A. To Starter Motor 4. Regulator
B. To Starter Relay 5. Alternator Frame
C. Speed Sensor 6. Stator Output Windings
1. Starter Solenoid 7. Rectifier Pack
2. Battery 8. Charge Indicator Lamp
3. Rotor Field Winding 9. Key Start Switch
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SYSTEM TESTING AND FAULT FINDING

Service Precautions Re–Assembly
To avoid damage to the components of the alternator 1. Refitment of the fan belt is the reverse of the re-
charging system, service precautions must be ob- moval procedure, but ensure the ‘‘V’’ belt, is posi-
served as follows: tioned correctly onto all of the pulleys twist out
• NEVER make or break any of the charging circuit the alternator to achieve a 10mm (0.39in) free-
connections, including the battery, when the en- play on the belt at its longest length and tighten
gine is running. the bolts to 5 Nm (4.4 lbf ft).
• NEVER short any of the charging components to
ground. Check the Warning Lamp
• ALWAYS disconnect the battery ground cable Turn on the key start switch and check that the warn-
(negative) when charging the battery on the tracing lamp is fully illuminated.
tor using a battery charger. If the warning lamp is not fully illuminated check the
• ALWAYS observe correct polarity when instal- bulb. If the bulb is not the cause of the fault carry out
ling the battery or using a slave battery to start the Alternator wiring connections test as detailed
the engine. under ‘initial tests’ in this section.
CONNECT POSITIVE TO POSITIVE AND NEGA- If the warning lamp is illuminated start the engine and
TIVE TO NEGATIVE run above idling speed. The lamp should go out.
If the lamp does not go out, stop the engine and re-
Preliminary Checks move the wire from the D+ terminal. If the lamp now
goes out a faulty alternator component is indicated.
Prior to electrical testing thoroughly inspect the
Conduct the ‘Alternator components tests’ as de-
charging and electrical system.
tailed in this section.
Check all leads and connections for continuity and
If the warning lamp remains illuminated, check for a
tightness.
short circuit to earth (ground) between the ‘D+’ cable
1. Check the battery end and the warning lamp.
Using a hydrometer check the individual battery
cells. The battery should be at least 70% charged INITIAL TESTS
and in good condition. The initial tests may be performed without removing
any of the charging circuit components from the trac-
2. Check the drive belt
tor and enable the following items to be checked:
Inspect the alternator drive belt and pulley, ensuring
• Alternator wire connections
that both are clean, free from oil and grease and in
good condition. • Alternator charging current and controlled volt-
age
Fan Belt • Alternator charging circuit volt drops
1. The fan belt should be removed in the following • Alternator maximum output performance
manner.
2. Loosen the alternator 3 attaching bolts, twist the Test equipment required:
alternator towards the engine and remove the • Voltmeter (0–30 volts moving coil type
fan belt from the pulley. • Millivoltmeter (0–1 volt)
• Ammeter (0–110 Amperes moving coil type)
• 1.5 Ohm 110 Amperes variable load resistor
1. Check the fan belt for evidence of fraying or wear
NOTE: Most commercial test equipment incorpor-
and replace if in any doubt.
ates several testing devices within a single unit . Use
such equipment in accordance with the manufac-
turers instructions.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Alternator Wiring Connections Test

4
1. Disconnect the battery 1
2. Disconnect the B+(2) and D+(3) terminals from V
the alternator. + –
3. Reconnect the battery and turn the key start on
but do not start the engine. Connect a voltme- 3
ter(4) between each terminal and earth (ground),
(1). Battery voltage should be registered.
If battery voltage is not registered a continuity fault
in the external cable circuitry must be traced and
remedied, refer to the circuit diagram shown in Fig-
ure 2. 2
4. Connect the D+ terminal, warning lamp (brown/
3
yellow) wire, to earth (ground). The warning lamp
should illuminate.
5. Disconnect the battery and reconnect the re-
moved alternator cable connections to the alter-
nator.
NOTE: If the warning lamp fails to illuminate when
the cable is reconnected to the alternator, a fault is
indicated in the alternator regulator or rotor circuits.
Ensure that the D+ terminal is clean and then con-
duct the alternator component tests as detailed in
this section.
Charging Current And Controlled Voltage Tests

1. Ensure all of the machine electrical components
are switched off and the key start switch is in the
‘off’ position. 4
2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and dis-
connect the B+ terminal(4) of the alternator.
3. Connect an ammeter(1), between the removed 3
(brown) cable(3) and the B+ alternator terminal. 1
4. Connect a voltmeter(2) between the alternator
B+ terminal and earth (ground) – + – +
5. Reconnect the battery. Start and run the engine
2
at 2000 rev/min. and observe the ammeter and V A
voltmeter readings.
4
The voltmeter should register in excess of battery
voltage and when the ammeter reading falls below
10 Amperes the voltmeter reading should stabilise
at 13.6–14.4 volts.
If the voltmeter reading exceeds 14.4 volts the alter-
nator regulator must be replaced as described in this
section. (when a new regulator has been installed
conduct tests 4 and 5).
If the voltmeter reading is below 13.6 volts a faulty al-
ternator component or a high resistance fault in the
external connections of the charging system is indi-
cated.
If the ammeter registers zero amperes a faulty alter-
nator component is indicated. Turn off the engine and
conduct the ‘alternator component tests’ as detailed
in this chapter.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Charging Circuit Volt Drop Tests

4
(a) Insulated–Side Volt Drop Tests
Ensure the key start switch is in the ‘off’ position. +
–
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and dis- 5
connect the B+ cable(1) from the alternator V
1
2. Connect a milli voltmeter(4) between the battery
positive terminal and the B+ cable(5). (Positive
– 2
side to cable). – +
3. Securely connect an ammeter(2) between the
B+ terminal of the alternator and the B+ cable A
(negative side to cable) 3 Figure 1
4. Reconnect the battery negative cable and con- 5
nect a variable load resistor(3), with the slider in
the minimum current draw position (maximum
resistance), across the battery terminals.
5. Start the engine and increase the speed to 2000
rev/min.
6. Slowly increase the current loading of the resis-
tor (decrease resistance) until the ammeter reg-
isters 70 Amperes.
7. Observe the millivoltmeter reading which should
not exceed 400 millivolts.
If the reading is in excess of 400 millivolts, a high re-
sistance fault is indicated in the external circuitry.
If the required alternator output cannot be achieved
and the millivoltmeter reading is less than 400 mil-
livolts, then a faulty alternator component is indi-
cated. Conduct the‘ alternator component tests’ as
detailed in this section.
8. Stop the engine.
(b) Ground–Side Volt Drop Test

1. Ensure the key start switch is in the ‘off’ position.
2. The circuit is the same as that used in the previ- – +
ous test except for the millivoltmeter(4) which is
now connected between the battery negative ter- V
minal and the alternator frame (negative side to 5
frame). 4 1
NOTE: Ensure the variable load resistor(3) is in the
minimum current draw position (maximum resis- – 2
– +
tance).
3. Start the engine and increase the speed to A
2000rev/min.
3
4. Slowly increase the current loading of the resis-
6
tor (decrease resistance) until the ammeter(2)
registers 70 Amperes.
5. Observe the voltmeter reading which should not
exceed 200 millivolts.
If the reading is in excess of 200 millivolts a high re-
sistance fault is indicated in the external circuitry.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

If the required alternator output cannot be achieved

and the millivoltmeter reading is less than 200 mil-
livolts then a faulty alternator component is indi-
cated. Conduct the alternator component tests as
detailed in this section.
6. Stop the engine.
Alternator Maximum Output Performance Test

1. Ensure the key start switch is in the ‘off’ position.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable and dis-
connect the B+ cable (5) from the alternator. – +
3. Securely connect an ammeter(2) between the 4 5
B+ terminal(1) of the alternator and the B+ cable V
1
(negative side to cable).
4. Connect a voltmeter(4) between the alternator – +
– 2
B+ terminal and earth (ground). 5.
5. Reconnect the battery, start and increase the en- A
gine speed to 2000 rev/min. 3
6. Slowly increase the the current loading of the re-
sistor(3) (decrease resistance) until the ammeter 7
registers either 70 Amperes.
7. Observe the voltmeter reading which should not
fall below 13.6 volts.
If the reading falls below 13.6 volts a faulty alternator
component is indicated. Conduct the ‘alternator
component tests’ as detailed in this section.
ALTERNATOR COMPONENT TESTS

The component tests which should only be con-
ducted if the INITIAL TESTS have indicated a faulty
alternator component, will enable the following items
to be checked:
• Regulator
• Rotor Field Winding Continuity
• Brushes and Springs and Rotor Slip Rings
NOTE: The component tests detailed previously
may be performed with the alternator installed on the
tractor. Testing of the other alternator components
will necessitate removal of the alternator from the
tractor. Refer to the ‘Overhaul’ section of this
Chapter.
IMPORTANT: Prior to removal of the alternator
cables from the alternator ensure that the key start
switch is in the ‘off’ position and the battery negative
cable is disconnected.
Test equipment required:
• 12 volt battery
• Multimeter
• 2.2 Watt Test Lamp
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Regulator and Rotor Field Circuit Test

1. Disconnect all of the alternator cables. –
2. Connect a 12 volt battery and a 2.2 Watt test
lamp(2) in series between the D+(1) and the al-
ternator frame (negative side to frame).
3. The test lamp should illuminate.
2
If the test lamp is not illuminated a fault is indicated
in the rotor circuit. Check brushes, slip rings and con-
tinuity of rotor field windings.
If examination indicates these parts to be satisfac-
tory the regulator may be suspect. 1
8
Rotor Field Winding Continuity Test
1. Remove the regulator and brushbox assembly
as described in this chapter.
2. Connect an ohmmeter(3) between the two slip
rings(2). The resistance should read 2.6 ohms at
20°C.
If the resistance is outside of the specification renew
the rotor(1) as detailed in the following overhaul sec-
tion.
9
Brushes–and–Springs and Rotor Slip Rings
1. Remove the regulator and brushbox assembly 5 mm
as described in this Chapter.
2. Ensure the brushes and slip rings are clean and
check for freedom of movement of the brushes
in the brushbox moulding.
3. Check the brush spring pressure with a push
type spring gauge and record the spring pres-
sure when the brush end face is flush with the
moulding. Install a new regulator and brushbox
assembly if the pressure is less than specified.
If the visible length of the brushes(1) in the free posi-
tion is less than 0.25 in. (5mm) this is a probable
cause of open circuit in the field circuit and the regu- 10
lator and brushbox assembly should be renewed.
NOTE: The brushes are an integral part of the regu-
lator and brushbox assembly and cannot be replaced
as individual items.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

55 301 ALTERNATOR REMOVAL, OVERHAUL

AND COMPONENT TESTING
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
2. Disconnect the four cables from the rear of the al-
ternator.
3. Remove the alternator drive belt by loosening
and removing the mounting through bolts and
engine top bracket and remove the alternator(1)
from the engine bracket.
2 2
2
2 4
4
3
2
2
3
TA424049
11
Fan Belt Tension
A. Fan Belt Less Air Conditioning B. Fan Belt With Air Conditioning
1. Alternator 1. Alternator
2. Adjusting Bolts 2. Adjusting Bolts
3. Drive Belt 3. Drive Belt
4. Drive Belt Freeplay 10mm 4. Drive Belt Freeplay 10mm
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

12
70 Amp Alternator Components
1. Rectifier Assembly 6. Stator
2. Pulley Retaining Nut 7. Rotor
3. ‘V’ Pulley 8. Regulator and Brushbox Assembly
4. Cooling Fan 9. Rear End Housing
5. Front End Housing
Disassembly – 70 Amp Alternator 6. Gently tap the rear face of the alternator front end
bracket to separate the front end bracket and
With reference to Figure 12.
rotor assembly from the rear end bracket, stator
1. Remove the four nuts securing the terminal block and rectifier assembly.
to the alternator. 7. Remove the nuts, washers and insulators from
2. Remove the nut from the temperature sensor ter- the stud terminals on the alternator rear end
minal block. bracket and the two rectifier retaining screws.
3. Remove the three securing bolts and withdraw Remove the stator and rectifier from the rear end
the regulator/brushbox assembly. bracket.
4. Unscrew and remove the remaining three nuts 8. Unsolder the stator leads from the tags on the
from the alternator through bolts. With a soft rectifier, using a pair of pliers as a heat sink to
mallet tap the threaded end of the through bolts prevent the diodes from overheating.
to release the spline at the hexagon head end. 9. Remove the nut, washer, pulley, fan and spacer
5. Mark the alternator front end bracket, stator and from the rotor shaft.
rear end bracket to ensure correct alignment on 10. Press the rotor shaft out of the front end bracket
reassembly. bearing.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Rectifier Assembly – Positive / Negative Diode

Testing 70 Amp Alternators
Test each of the six diodes separately as follows:
1. Connect a multimeter(2) in series with one of the
diodes. One test lead is applied to the diode con-
necting pin(1) and the other lead to the plate into
which the diode is mounted.
2. Note the resistance shown on the multimeter.
Reverse the test lead connections.
3. The multimeter should indicate an open circuit
(infinity ohms) during one half of the test only. If
any one diode fails this test the complete rectifier
will need replacing.
13
Rectifier Assembly – Field Diode Testing
Test each field diode separately as follows:

1. Connect a multimeter(2) in series with the field
diode module. Apply the negative test lead to the
D+ terminal connection(1) and the other lead in
turn to each of the field diode connections(3).
2. Note the resistance shown on the multimeter.
Reverse the test lead connections.
3. The multimeter should indicate an open circuit
(infinity ohms) during one half of the test only. If
any one diode fails this test the complete rectifier
will need replacing.
14
Stator Test – Winding Continuity
1
1. Connect the ohmmeter(3) test leads between
the A, B and C wires(2). There should be a small
resistance of 0.1Ω, between each of the wires. If
a resistance higher than this is registered it will
indicate a possible break within the winding, i.e, A
an open circuit. A lower reading, for example B
0.0Ω will indicate a short circuit within the wind-
ing. If the test proves unsatisfactory a new sta- C
tor(1) and housing assembly will be required. – +
Ω
3 2
15
Stator Test – Insulation
70 Amp Alternators Figure 2 1
1. Check the insulation of each winding to the alter-
nator casing. There should be no continuity be-
tween the winding and the casing. If any ohmme-
ter(2) reading other than open circuit is indicated
A
it will be necessary to replace the stator(1) as-
sembly. B
C
– +
Ω 2
16
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Rotor Test
Prior to performing component tests on the rotor the
following slip ring inspection should be carried out.
1. Ensure the slip rings are clean and smooth. If
necessary the slip rings may be cleaned with a
petrol moistened cloth. If the slip rings are burnt
and require re–finishing use very fine glass paper
(not emery cloth) and wipe clean.
NOTE: Ensure the re–finishing glass paper is suffi-
ciently fine to produce a highly polished slip ring sur-
face otherwise excessive brush wear will occur.
2. If the slip rings are excessively worn a new rotor
must be installed.
Rotor Field winding Continuity

1. Connect an ohmmeter(3) between the two slip
rings(2). The resistance should read 2.6 ohms at
20°C.
If the resistance is outside of the specification renew
the rotor(1).
17
Rotor Field Winding Insulation
1. Using an ohmmeter(3) test between each of the
slip rings(2) and the rotor poles(1). An infinity
reading should be indicated in each case. If any
resistance reading is indicated the rotor assem-
bly must be replaced.
18
1. Inspect the rotor poles and stator for signs of rub-
bing. Areas of rubbing indicates possible worn
bearings, misaligned housings or a bent rotor as-
sembly shaft.
NOTE: Bearings of the 70 Amp alternator are not
serviced separately. It will be necessary to either ob-
tain a new rectifier and housing or stator assembly to
renew worn bearings.
19
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

2. Inspect the roller bearing(1) of the 70 Amp alter-

nator located in the rear (slip ring) end bracket(2)
for wear and damage
3. If bearing replacement is necessary support the
housing (rear end bracket) and using a suitable
size mandrel carefully drive out the bearing, Fig-
ure 19.
4. Clean and examine all components.
5. Press the new bearing(2) into the housing(1).
The bearing should be positioned .020–.028in
(0.50–0.70mm) proud of the inner face of the
bearing boss as shown at item (3), Figure 20.
20
RE–ASSEMBLY
1. Re–assembly of the alternator follows the disas-
sembly procedure in reverse.
On reassembly of the 70 Amp alternators observe
the following:
• To avoid misalignment of the end brackets, in-
stall the stator assembly in the drive end bracket
then assemble the slip ring end bracket to the
stator laminations.
INSTALLATION
1. Installation of the alternator is the removal proce-
dure in reverse.
On installation observe the following:
• Ensure the battery ground (negative) cable is
disconnected from the battery when installing the
alternator.
• Adjust the alternator drive belt as previously de-
scribed in this Chapter.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Chapter 5 – BATTERY
CONTENT
55 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
55 300 Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Battery Maintenance and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Battery Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Common Causes of Battery Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
55 000 SPECIFICATIONS
Standard
Capacity 95
Cold Cranking Ampere Rating 960
Voltage 12
Cells 6
Ground Terminal Negative
55 000 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

All models feature one 12 volt, negative ground, • To support quiescent loads from radio and micro
‘maintenance free’ lead calcium (Pb–Ca) type bat- processor memory.
tery, of six cell construction. The battery is constructed in such a manner that
NOTE: ‘Maintenance Free’ means that under normal each cell contains positive and negative plates
charging conditions the battery does not lose water placed alternatively next to each other. Each positive
from the electrolyte. Conditions that may cause plate is separated from a negative plate by a non–
water loss include prolonged charging above conducting porous envelope separator. If any of the
14.4volts where gassing occurs as it approaches full positive plates should make contact with negative
charge. This can be caused by a faulty charging sys- plates within a cell, the cell will short circuit and suffer
tem or boost/recovery charging equipment. irreparable damage. All of the positive plates are
The battery is mounted behind the right hand side welded to a bus–bar, forming a positive terminal and
panel of the unit. all of the negative plates are welded to a similar bus–
bar forming a negative terminal.
The battery has four major functions:
Each positive plate is composed of a lead grid with
• To provide a source of current for starting, light-
lead peroxide pasted into the grid openings. The
ing and instrumentation.
negative plates are composed of a lead grid with
• To help control the voltage in the electrical sys- spongy lead pasted into the grid openings.
tem.
The plates are submerged in a liquid electrolyte sol-
• To furnish current when the electrical demands ution of diluted sulphuric acid.
exceed the alternator output.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OP. 55 300

1
Removal
1. Tilt the side panel up on its support gas struts.
2. Remove the negative lead and then the positive
lead from the battery.
3. Remove battery securing bracket.
4. Using the lifting handles, remove the battery.
1
Installation
5. Installation of the battery, (1), is the removal pro-
cedure in reverse, observing the following points:
• Ensure that the battery is clean and dry and that
the vent caps are fully installed. Smear the termi-
nals with petroleum jelly (vaseline or equivalent),
do not use conventional lubricating greases as
these can promote electrolytic corrosion.
• Ensure the battery tray and clamps are clean and
free from stones or small objects which may
puncture the battery casing.
• Ensure that the battery terminal polarity is cor- 1
rect and that the terminal connections are suffi-
ciently tight, but not overtightened. 2
• The radio, if fitted, will lose its stored information
and will require re–programming.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

BATTERY MAINTENANCE AND TESTS

Maximum battery life will be obtained if the correct
Specific Gravity care and periodic inspection is given. It is important
The specific gravity of the battery electrolyte indi- that output capacity should not be exceeded by con-
cates the state of charge. Fully charged the specific stant and excessive overloading and that charging
gravity of the electrolyte is 1.280 minimum at 25°C. requirements are maintained.
Alternatively the approximate state of charge can be
measured by using an accurate digital volt meter (+/– Servicing The Battery
0.01V) as follows:– WARNING
Less than 10.5V Battery un–serviceable* Batteries contain sulphuric acid and during charging
Less than 11.8V Battery discharged generate a highly explosive mixture of hydrogen and
Less than 12.3V Battery 1/2 charged oxygen gases.
Better than 12.6V Battery fully charged • Never use equipment that generates flames or
* See note under tests for possible recovery of a sparks in order to control electrolyte level
mildly sulphated battery. • Do not remove the battery cover plugs without
Battery voltage to be taken with the battery unloaded protection for eyes and hands.
and:–
A) After the battery has rested unloaded for at least When servicing a battery the following steps should
4 hours. be observed:
B) If the vehicle has recently run or battery has re- 1. Maintain the electrolyte to the recommended
cently been charged, switch on headlamps for 2 min- level of 6 mm (0.25 in.) above the plates. If this
utes. is not observed the acid will reach a high con-
When a battery discharges, sulphuric acid in the centration that will damage the separators and
electrolyte combines chemically with the plates and impair the performance of the plates.
this action lowers the specific gravity of the solution. 2. Use only distilled or de–mineralised water, do not
A battery hydrometer will determine the specific overfill and never use tap water or water from a
gravity of the electrolyte in a cell and the amount of rain barrel or other source.
unused sulphuric acid in the solution is a measure of 3. Always keep the battery at least 75% charged
the degree of charge of that cell. otherwise the plates will become sulphated and
The lower the temperature at which a battery is re- loss of efficiency will result with possible damage
quired to operate, the more necessary it is that the from freezing at low temperatures.
battery is maintained in a fully charged condition. For 4. Avoid overcharging the battery as excessive
example a battery with a low specific gravity of 1.225 charging will create high internal heat that will
at 27°C (80°F) will operate the starting motor at warm cause plate grid deterioration and produce water
ambient temperatures but may not, due to lower bat- loss.
tery efficiency at a low temperature. 5. When fast charging ensure the battery tempera-
Table 1 shows the effect of temperature on the effi- ture does not exceed 50°C.
ciency of a typical battery. 6. Do not add sulphuric acid to a cell unless the
Table 1 electrolyte has been lost through spilling. Before
Efficiency of a Fully replenishing ensure the solution is at the correct
Temperature Charged Battery specific gravity. A slow charge is the only method
to be employed to fully charge a battery. A high
25.0°C (77.0°F) 100% rate charger can be used to quickly boost the bat-
–4.5°C (23.9°F) 82% tery capacity but this must be followed by a slow
–24.0°C (–11.2°F) 64% charge rate to bring the battery to full capacity.
–27.5°C (–17.5°F) 58%
–31.0°C (–23.8°C) 50%
–34.5°C (–30.1°C) 40%
–37.5°C (–35.5°C) 33%
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Dry Charged Batteries 3. Re–check the level of electrolyte in each cell and
1. Remove the battery cell vent plugs. add distilled water as necessary.
2. Fill each cell to the recommended level with elec- WARNING
trolyte of 1.260 specific gravity. When a battery is being charged an explosive gas is
Dry charged batteries must be prepared for service produced. Do not smoke or use an exposed flame
as follows: when checking the electrolyte level and ensure the
NOTE: The electrolyte must be diluted sulphuric acid charger is switched off before connecting or discon-
preferably at a temperature of 215–325C necting to avoid sparks which could ignite the gas.
(705–905F).
3. After filling, allow the battery to stand for 15 min- Recharging Deeply Discharged Batteries
utes then re–check the electrolyte level and top
The recommended method to recharge a mainten-
up if necessary.
ance free Pb–Ca battery is to use a constant voltage
4. Charge the battery for 4 hours at a rate of 5–8 charger. For deeply discharged batteries a 48 hours
amperes and check that all cells are gassing charging period at 16volts is recommended, with cur-
freely. rent limitation, (47.5A for 95Ah).
5. Install the battery cell vent plugs. This system is self regulating: high current is deliv-
ered at the beginning (when battery voltage is low),
Charging The Battery lower and lower current is then absorbed when bat-
Before charging a battery: tery reaches full charge (and its voltage is high).
1. Thoroughly clean the battery casing and cell cov- If only constant current chargers are available it is
ers with dilute ammonia or hot water and clean recommended to use the current levels and times
the terminals. shown Table 2 below. The figures are intended for
deeply discharged batteries. If the battery is only
2. Check the level of the electrolyte in each cell and,
50% discharged use one half of the time listed (slow
if below plates, add distilled water to bring above
charge programs). For other states of discharge re-
plate level.
duce proportionally the time of charge. Whenever
possible use the slowest charge program to increase
Normal (Top–up) Charging the battery’s life.
1. With a slow charger use a rate of 3 to 6 amperes If when charging the battery, violent gassing or spew-
for the time necessary to bring the battery to full ing of electrolyte occurs, or the battery case feels hot
charge. This may take 36 hours or more if the (50°C or greater), reduce or temporarily halt charg-
battery is heavily discharged. A severely sul- ing to avoid damaging the battery.
phated battery might not accept a charge. When
Table 2
the battery is fully charged the cells will gas freely
and the specific gravity will remain constant. Re- Battery Type
move the charger after three consecutive hy-
drometer readings taken at hourly intervals indi- 95Ah
cate that the specific gravity has stopped rising.
2. When using a fast or high rate of charge carefully
Slow Charge 18hrs at 5A
follow the manufacturers instructions. High rate
Programs 9hrs at 10A
charging raises the temperature of the electro-
lyte and unless the charger is equipped with an
Fast charge 5hrs at 18A
automatic time or temperature device, the elec-
Program
trolyte temperature could exceed 50°C , which (emergencies only)
may cause violent battery gassing and damage
to internal components.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Tests NOTE: Specific gravity should not vary more than

Before commencing battery tests check the battery 0.025 points between cells.
for clogged vents, corrosion, raised vent plugs or a 4. If the specific gravity is 1.280 or more the battery
cracked case. is fully charged and in good operating condition.5
Test equipment required: 5. Should the corrected specific gravity be below
• Hydrometer 1.280, charge the battery and inspect the charg-
ing system to determine the cause of the low bat-
• Battery starter tester (High rate discharge tester)
tery charge.
• Thermometer
NOTE: If distilled water has recently been added the
• Battery Charger battery should be recharged for a short period other-
Specific Gravity: wise accurate hydrometer readings will not be ob-
This test will determine the state of battery charge. tained.
1. With the float in the vertical position take the If the battery has been charged under static condi-
reading. tions, denser electrolyte will accumulate at the bot-
tom of the cells. The battery should be shaken peri-
2. Adjust the hydrometer reading for electrolyte
odically to mix the electrolyte, this will improve the
temperature variations by subtracting 4 points
charge rate and provide a more accurate hydrometer
(0.004 specific gravity) for every 5.5°C (10°F) reading when tested.
below the temperature at which the hydrometer
is calibrated and by adding 4 points (0.004 spe-
Performance Test:
cific gravity) for every 5.5°C (10°F) above this
temperature. The performance test is to determine if the battery
has adequate capacity to turn the engine. The volt-
The following examples are calculated using a hy- age reading obtained is used to determine the bat-
drometer calibrated at 30°C (86°F). tery condition. Prior to testing, ensure the electrolyte
level is correct and the open circuit voltage is 12.5V
Example 1: or more. The battery may be tested on or off the trac-
Temperature below 30°C (86°F) tor.
Electrolyte temperature 19°C (66°F) 6. Set the current control switch of the battery
Hydrometer reading 1.2 starter tester (high rate discharge tester) to the
70 ‘off’ position and the voltage selector switch
Subtract 11.0 x 0.004 0.008 equal to, or slightly higher than, the rated battery
5.5 voltage. Connect the tester positive leads to the
Corrected specific gravity = 1.262 battery positive terminal and the negative leads
to the negative battery terminal.
Example 2: 7. Turn the current control knob until the ammeter
Temperature above 30°C (86°F) reading is half the CCA rating of the battery and
Electrolyte temperature 40°C (104°F) take the voltage reading.
Hydrometer reading 1.2 • If the reading is 9.6 volts or more after 15 sec-
20 onds, the battery has an acceptable output ca-
Add 10.0 x 0.004 0.0 pacity and will readily accept a normal charge.
07
If however the reading is below 9.6 volts, the battery
5.5
is considered unsatisfactory for service and should
Corrected specific gravity = 1.227
be test charged as described below.
3. Use the following table to determine the state of CAUTION

charge. Do not leave the high discharge load on the battery
for periods longer than 15 seconds.
Corrected Corrected
Specific Specific Average
State of Gravity Gravity Battery
Charge @15°C @25°C Voltage
100% 1.295 1.287 12.76

75% 1.253 1.246 12.52
50% 1.217 1.210 12.30
25% 1.177 1.170 12.06
Discharged 1.137 1.130 11.84
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Test Charging: Common Causes of Battery Failures

This test is designed only for batteries that have 1. Internal open circuit.
failed the previous capacity test. 2. Internal short circuit.
1. Attach the battery starter (high rate discharge 3. Loss of electrolyte.
tester) positive leads to the battery positive ter-
4. Separation of active materials from grids.
minal and the negative leads to the battery nega-
tive terminal. 5. Accumulation of sulphate crystals too large to
disperse.
2. Connect the battery charger positive lead to the
battery positive terminal and the negative lead to These failures are normally caused by the following:
the battery negative terminal. 1. Failure of inter cell components.
3. Turn the charger timer past a ‘3 minutes’ charge 2. Excessive crystal growth may puncture the sep-
indication and then back to the ‘3 minutes’ mark. arators and cause short circuits.
3. Excessive over charging (charging system mal-
4. Set the charging rate as close as possible to 40 function, boost/recovery techniques with high
amperes. voltage, operation in very high temperatures.
5. After 3 minutes at this fast charge take the volt- 4. Freezing of electrolyte.
meter reading. A fully charged battery does not freeze until
• If the total voltage is over 15.5 volts the battery –65°C. A 50% charged battery freezes between
is unsatisfactory and is probably sulphated or –17°C and –27°C. Fully discharged electrolyte
worn out and should be replaced. freezes at –3°C to –11°C.
NOTE: A mildly sulphated battery can be recovered Excessively high boost charging and gassing will
by using a multiple battery type charger, with an open also cause separation of active materials from
circuit upper voltage limit of 50 volts. Owing to the the grids. Separation destroys the chemical
high resistance of a sulphated battery, it will primarily function of the battery.
require a high voltage setting to overcome the resis- 5. Crystal growth occurs whenever batteries are
tance of the sulphation. initially there may be no vis- left discharged. High temperatures and ex-
ible acceptance of the charge. After a few minutes of tended discharged periods increase this condi-
inactivity a small charge will be apparent, followed by tion. At room temperature after one week the bat-
a rapid increase in the charge rate. The charge rate tery is unlikely to recover on the vehicle.
must not exceed 14.0 amperes or the electrolyte Recharge will require a higher constant voltage.
temperature 505C. When the ampere rate has stabi- After 3 weeks the battery will have suffered per-
lised, reset the volts until the charge rate is a steady manent degradation and the procedure detailed
5 amperes. Continue at this rate until the electrolyte previously for charging a ‘Deeply Discharged’
specific gravity stops rising at approximately battery should be followed.
1.275–1.280 at 205C (685F), this can take up to 48 When fully charged, batteries have a long shelf life.
hours of charging. Stand the battery for 24 hours and The lead calcium type battery self discharges at 3%
then conduct the capacity test detailed previously. per month. This means that it will take 16 months to
• If the total voltage is under 15.5 volts, test the drop to 50% charged. On the tractor the quiescent
specific gravity of each cell and re–charge the load is about 50mA. To predict rundown on a static
battery to the following scale: vehicle this should be added as approximately 8Ah
Specific Gravity Fast charge up to: per week.
1.150 or less 60 minutes It is worth stressing that when cranking, if a battery
1.151 to 1.175 45 minutes starts to fade, it is beneficial to stop and allow two
1.176 to 1.200 30 minutes minutes for the battery to recover. The recovery time
1.201 to 1.225 15 minutes should be increased as the temperature decreases.
(Slow charge only)
NOTE: When battery problems are experienced the
fan belt tension and the complete charging system
should be checked.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 55 – DIAGNOSTICS / SETTINGS / IMMOBILISER – CHAPTER 6 1
Chapter 6 – Service Diagnostics, Instruments and Immobiliser
CONTENT
55 000 Service Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

55 100 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SERVICE INDICATOR (WHERE FITTED)

The Service warning light (1) “from new” will
illuminate after the first 50 hours of work along with
the buzzer. 1
It will then come on again after 250 hours “from new”
2
and then every 300 working hours along with the
buzzer.
Every time it illuminates the buzzer will sound
intermittently for 6 secs at a frequency of 1 hertz (hz)
and then turn itself off.
The warning will remain on for 10 hours or until turned
off by:
S A special bridged connector tool, or turned off by
1
a Laptop PC using a link connected at the fuse
panel location.
S At each successive Key Start the buzzer will

sound intermittently for 6 secs if it has not been
reset to Zero. This cycle repeats itself every 300
hours
Fuse Panel Location
The fuse panel is situated in the side console and can
be accessed through a small panel after removal of
the attaching cover screws. The lap link or bridging
tool is then connected to the diagnostic connector
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 55 – DIAGNOSTICS / SETTINGS / IMMOBILISER – CHAPTER 6
NOTE: When the warning lamps are not turned off

OFF
ie maintenance not carried out the counting of the LAPTOP
next 300 hours always begins again from the time the
3
signalling began.
The light (2) can only be turned off via a laptop or

bridging tool. The reading of the diagnostics pro-
gramming must be done through the connector on
the instrument panel and with the display key in the
3 ON
off position and NOT turned to the on +15 position.
+15v
When the connector with U Bolt is used the key must
be turned to the ON +15, any lamps and the buzzer U
are turned off, but the cells recording the times of ev-
ents cannot be reset to zero 3
ALARMS AND DIAGNOSTIC SIGNALLING

NOTE: For all machines fitted with diagnostic
capability.
The malfunctioning data for the functions being
diagnosed will be memorised on the micro processor
and can be displayed by the technician through a
serial line accessible through the 5 way 5238 molex
connector (3).
The time of the malfunctioning of each individual
function will be memorised in four cells in the
following way.
The first malfunction will be memorised in the fourth
cell and will remain there until the user cancels it by
computer.
The next malfunction will be displayed in the first cell
and then slip into the second cell when the third
malfunction occurs until all 3 cells have been filled.
When the fifth malfunction occurs the data moves
down, cancelling the second occurrence and
memorising the most recent one in the first cell.
In twos way the very first and last three malfunctions
remain in the memory.
Each malfunction is memorised when it appears for
the first time at successive Key offs and Key on if the
same event occurs it will not be memorised as a new
malfunction.
The time will be memorised only if there has been a
rework of the service and a later anomaly
NOTE: The data can only be cancelled while the
events are being visualised on the computer. There
may be a small variance between times shown on the
hour meter and those displayed by the diagnostics
programming
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

TOTAL HOURS
0.0h
Engine Oil Engine Oil Trans Oil Engine Cool

* Filter Pressure Temperature Pressure Temperature
Last Record 0h 0h 0h 0h 0h
Penultimate 0h 0h 0h 0h 0h
3rd Record 0h 0h 0h 0h 0h
1st Record 0h 0h 0h 0h 0h
SAVE
ERROR
START MENU
Error Out Time Out
CANCEL
MALFUNCTION EXAMPLE
* FILTER
1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH 1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH
10 h 20 h 30 h 40 h
10 h
10 h 10 h
10 h 10 h 10 h
4
FUNCTION Check Service Diagnostics Note
Air Filter yes yes
Transmission Oil Temperature yes yes
Transmission Oil Pressure yes yes
Engine Coolant Temperature yes yes
Service 1 yes yes
Battery Autocheck
Engine Oil Pressure Autocheck yes
Engine Cold Start Autocheck Only on Iveco
Brake yes
Buzzer yes
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CALIBRATION OF SPEEDOMETER
Dependant upon the model and tyres fitted it may be

a requirement to set the calibration of the front
console.
This setting is required if fitting a new instrument or

a change of tyres takes place, and can be performed
by adjusting the settings of the switch block,
mounted at the rear of the console.
5
Each switch numbered 1 to 8 mounted in the block
should be turned ON = or OFF as
shown in the opposite example, to suit the require- 8
ment and as shown in the following tables. 7
6
Switch Positions: 5
1 = ON 4
0 = OFF 3
2
on 1
6
POWER SHUTTLE
AXLE RATIO TYRE – ROLLING FREQUENCY AT SWITCH POSITIONS

CIRCUMFERENCE 50 Km/hr 1–2–3–4–5–6–7–8
18.5 4065 – 4335 2055 1–1–1–1–0–1–0–0
18.5 3810 – 3911 2245 1–1–1–0–1–0–1–0
20.8 4065 – 4335 2310 1–1–1–0–1–1–1–0
20.8 3810 – 3911 2522 1–1–0–0–0–0–0–1
POWER SHIFT
EGS FREQUENCY TYRE – ROLLING FREQUENCY AT SWITCH POSITIONS

CIRCUMFERENCE 50 Km/hr 1–2–3–4–5–6–7–8
6.53 – 6.13 4065 – 4335 315 Hz 0–0–0–0–0–0–0–0
6.97 – 6.79 3810 – 3911 345 Hz 0–1–0–0–0–1–0–0
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

IMMOBILISER CIRCUIT
7
Immobiliser Connections
C. M38 Immobiliser G. Starter motor
D. Electronic key socket with LED H. Engine control wire
E. 2 piece electronic key I. Plug connecting electronic key socket to immobiliser
F. +50 to ignition
Wire Function Connection

No.
1 (+15) Key positive Connected to the +12V full ignition supply
2 (+30) Permanent +12V power supply Connected to the wire from the battery positive
3 (–31) Negative power supply Connected to the vehicle negative at two independent
points
5 & 6 Immobolisation relay No.2 Connected in line with the wire controlling the starter
motor relay/solenoid – min.500mA. max.10A capacity
7, 8, Immobilisation relay No.1 Connect in line with the wire controlling the ignition or fuel
9 circuit – min.500mA. max.10A capacity
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Chapter 7 – Component Testing

CONTENT

55 700 General introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Batteries and Isolater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Key Start and Stop Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Earthing points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Key Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Starter Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Alternater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
ENGINE 92 to 108 hp – Engine Thermostart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Fuel Lift Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Engine Oil Pressure / Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Air Filter Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
TRANSMISSIONS – Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Powershift EGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Powershift Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
EGS Override / Transmission Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Instrument Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
CAB – 4WD Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Brake Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Light Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4 Wheel Steer (when applicable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Differential Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Bucket return to Dig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Glide Ride (where fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Loader Lock (where fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Hand Hammer (where fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Accessories (where fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Reversing Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Fuel Level sender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

GENERAL
No special tools are required to remove or replace
electrical components. Refer to the appropriate sec-
tion of this Service Manual for overhaul procedures
to cover the starter motor and alternator.
Fault Finding of electrical systems should be carried
out in a logical and methodical fashion. A few min-
utes spent understanding the system and analyzing
the symptoms can save considerable time.
An essential piece of equipment for checking electri-
cal systems is a good quality Multimeter with a high
impedance which can measure voltage, current and
resistance.
NOTE: Labelling of connectors prior to disassembly
will greatly assist when reconnecting any harness. 1
Where it is necessary to clean the multiple con-
nectors, a contact spray should be used.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use a cleaner that contains
trichlorethylene which will dissolve the plastic con-
nectors. Do not use any other method for cleaning
the terminals.
The wiring harnesses contain wires which are colour
coded for identification. Each harness can be re-
moved and replaced, but certain precautions must
be observed:
• Disconnect or isolate the battery, negative ter-
minal first, prior to disconnection or removal of
any wiring harness.
• Prior to removal, note the harness routing,
clamping positions and terminal connections.
• On replacement, be sure that the harness rout-
ing is not in contact with sharp edges, the ex-
haust system or moving parts.
• Check connections for wire colour matching.
• Use a light coating of di-electric grease on the
connector pins to prevent corrosion.
• Be sure that all connectors are fully engaged and
no conductor is exposed.
• Tape back unused connectors.
• Be sure that ground connections are clean with
metal-to-metal contact. Use toothed lock
washers for good ground connections.
• Be sure that fuses are of the specified rating.
• Check the circuit current draw before connecting
power to the harness.
• Check polarity of the battery before connecting
power to the harness.
• When it is necessary to remove or partially dis-
connect a wiring harness, label each connector
before removal from its mating instrument.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

COMPONENT TESTING
In general with the key start on there should be 12
Volts found at the component connections.
Where 12V is not present check fuses, relays and
wiring for breaks.
BATTERY
The battery fitted to the machines are LEAD/CAD-

MIUM batteries.
WARNING
Battery gasses can be corrosive and explosive
handle with care
1
2
If the battery becomes discharged to such an extent

that the voltage is less 7 volts then they should be re
charged using the procedure outlined in the following
table or replaced if not chargeable / serviceable.
BATTERY CHARGING RATES

Battery Type
BATTERY
CHARGING 95Ah
Slow Charge 18hrs at 5A

Programs 9hrs at 10A
Fast charge 5hrs at 18A

Program
(emergencies only)
BATTERY ISOLATER
The battery isolater is found on the negative side of
the battery and can be used to islolate all circuits of
the machine (no earth no circuits).
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

COMPONENT EARTH POINTS

IMPORTANT: Always ensure the earth/ground
points are clean and functional. A poor earth will
cause the electrics to fail
Earth Point A – Starter Motor (Engine harness)

Earth Point A is also linked to Earth Point B.
4
Earth Point B – Right hand Console (front con-
sole harness)
This is also linked to earth points A, C, and D.
5
Earth Point C – Rear of Chassis (Chassis har-
ness)
This is also linked to Earth point E.
6
Earth Point D – Fuse board
XC5 R5
F5/B
Air Seat R6
This is also a back-up earth point for Location E. F5/A
F6/C F7/C F8/C R7
F6/B F7/B F8/B R8

F6/A F7/A F8/A R9
1
15v 30v GND
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Earth Point E – Right hand console (Cab main

harness)
This is also a link to earth point B and C.
8
Earth Point F – Top right hand B pillar (roof
harness)
This is also linked to earth point G.
9
Earth Point G – Interior lamp
This is also linked to earth point F.
10
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

KEY–START AND STOP SWITCH – S17
NOTE: When the key–start/stop switch is turned to

the ‘‘ON’’ position the audible alarm will be activated
until the engine is started or the key returned to the
off position.
Key Start
1 = Not used
2 = Off
3 = Ignition ‘‘ON’’ 11
4 = Thermostart (Engine pre–heat)
5 = Engine Start (cranking)
SWITCH – X71
Test Procedure
Voltage:
Pin Key Switch Position
No. OFF Pos. I Pos. II Pos.III
9 0v 0v 12v 12v
7 0v 0v 0v 12v
4 0v 0v 12v 12v
5&
0v 12v 12v 12v
6
2 12v 12v 12v 12v
12
Continuity:
Pin Key Switch Position
No. OFF Pos. I Pos. II Pos.III
9 n n
7 n
4 n n
5&
n n n
6
2 n n n
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

STARTER MOTOR – M1
Test Procedure
Key Switch Position
OFF AUX ON START
0v 0v 0v 12v
Resistance 0.3 ohms
13
STARTER RELAY – KO1
Test Procedure
Pin No. Key Switch Position
OFF AUX ON START
1 0v 0v 0v 12v
2 0v 0v 0v 0v
3 12v 12v 12v 12v
4 0v 0v 0v 12v
14
FUSES – 70 amp and 80 amp – R10
The main fuses have been designed to protect the
whole electrical system. Fuses fitted are dependant
on models
Test Procedure
Battery voltage should be found both sides of fuse at
all times.
15
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SAFETY START RELAY – K3
Power Shuttle lever in Forward or Reverse (Engine

will not start) Park brake ON, Claxon sounds
Power Shift lever in Forward up–shift or reverse up–

shift. (Engine will start) Park Brake ON, Klaxon
Sounds.
Pin Key Switch Position Voltage Check K12

No. OFF Pos. I Pos. II Pos.III K10 K11
9 0v 0v 12v 12v
K1
7 0v 0v 0v 12v +BZ1
4 0v 0v 12v 12v CN/1 CN/2 K2

5&
0v 12v 12v 12v
6 F1/C F2/C
2 12v 12v 12v 12v
F1/B F2/B CN/6
Pin Key Switch Position Continuity Check
No. OFF Pos. I Pos. II Pos.III CN/3 F1/A F2/A
9 n n F3/C F4/C
K3
7 n
F3/B F4/B
4 n n K4
5&
n n n 16
6
2 n n n
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

ALTERNATOR – G2
This sends a square wave signal, the frequency of

which varies between 142.52 855Hz (480–3060rpm)
to the instrument panel.
With the engine running, the warning light should go
out. If not, disconnect the wire connected to the ter-
minal D+ (pink wire).
When D+ is not connected and the warning light goes
out, there is a fault with the alternator. If it does not
go out, then check the bulb and the wiring loom.
17
Test Procedure, at G2 (W terminal)
Type Frequency
(Hz)
65 amp – 75hp 580
70 amp – 92 to 108hp 780
NOTE: Refer to charging section for full alternator

testing.
18
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

ENGINE 92 TO 108 HP
THERMOSTART – R1
The Thermostart which is efficient at ambient tem-

perature of –18°C, comprises a heating element
fitted in the intake manifold. When the Thermostart
is switched on it heats/ignites fuel in the manifold,
thus heating the air before it enters the combustion
chamber. The thermostart is activated when the key
is turned to start and is enabled for 15 seconds.
29
Test Procedure
Pin
Thermostart Resistance
No.
1 0V Cold 1.2 Ω
1 12V Hot 12v Off − 8 Ω
30
FUEL LIFT PUMP – M2
X
Fuel pump is energised at Key Start at 12 volts
31
Test Procedure
Pin
Lift Pump Resistance
No.
1 0V 2Ω
Check continuity12 V Blue/Black To Earth.
32
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

ENGINE 92 TO 108 HP
FUEL PUMP TEMPERATURE SWITCH / WAX
MOTOR EV13
EV13
The temperature switch is normally open when cold
and closed when hot. Supply voltage of 12v at the
light blue / red wire
33
Test Procedure
Pin
Sender Resistance
No.
1 0V Cold 6 Ω
1 12V Hot 12v Off 10 Ω
34
SHUT-OFF SOLENOID – EV0
EV0
X
The solenoid opens at 12 volts and closes at key off
35
Test Procedure
Pin
Shut off resistance
No.
1 0V 1.6 Ω
36
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

ENGINE 92 TO 108 HP
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENDER – S20
The resistance of the oil pressure sensor varies pro-

portionally with the engine oil pressure, which makes
it possible to change the current flow to ground.
37
Test Procedure
Pin
Sender Resistance
No.
1 0V Cold 1 Ω
1 12V at low pressure 96 Ω
1 12V Upto 163 Ω
38
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR –
R2
Sender when energised at 12 volt is temperature

sensitive.
39
Test Procedure
Pin
Sender Resistance
No.
1 0V Cold 4500 – 6000 Ω
1 12V Hot <650 Ω
40
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

ENGINE 92 TO 108 HP
AIR FILTER RESTRICTION SWITCH 92 TO 108

HP – S21
Vacuum switch energised at 12 volts
41
Test Procedure
Pin
Switch Resistance
No.
1 12V 0Ω
Filter not restricted:

no continuity between pin A and B.
Filter restricted:
continuity should be found between Pin A and B.
42
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

TRANSMISSIONS
POWERSHUTLE DISCONNECT – X23 / X28
Energises the transmission dump solenoid at 12

volts
43
Test Procedure
Continuity should be found between Pin 1 and Pin 2
when switch is operated.
44
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

POWERSHIFT EGS CONNECTOR

The EGS receives input from the FWD Switch,
brakes, switches, transmission disconnect switch,
temperature sensor and speed sensor. The EGS
also sends signals to the transmission control valve.
For input and output tests to check correct operation
of the EGS , refer to Section 21 chapter 1.
Test Procedure.
Test procedure of the speed sensor refer to the next
page.
45
POWERSHIFT CONTROL VALVE
The control valve receives signals switching ON or
OFF the solenoids allowing the desired gears to be
selected. A variable current solenoid receives a re-
ducing signal from the EGS controlling modulator.
The control valve is fitted with a combined tempera-
ture and speed sensor which sends signals back to
the EGS.
Test Procedure
Test between pin indicated in the left hand column
and either pin H or M as detailed in the table below.
46
Description
Pin
H M
No.
A 27.5Ω ––––
B 27.5Ω ––––
C 27.5Ω ––––
D 27.5Ω ––––
E 27.5Ω ––––
F 27.5Ω ––––
G –––– 14Ω
K –––– 31Ω
47
* A Speed sensor plus output
B Forward Lo/Hi solenoid
C Forward/neutral solenoid
D Range 1/2 solenoid
E FWD solenoid
F Reverse neutral solenoid
G Direction modulation solenoid
K Range modulation solenoid
L Transmission temperature out ground
M Control valve common plus
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

POWERSHIFT SPEED SENSOR TEST
Disconnect from control valve and fit the 12 pin con-

nector from special tool. Connect the power socket
into the 12volt power socket . Install the probes from
a Multimeter into the tool. Raise the unit off the
ground and observe voltage (V1). Turn the rear
wheel which inturn rotates the transmission output
shaft, observe the second voltage (V2).
48
Test Procedure
Pin
V1 V2
No.
A 0.6–0.8 1.3–1.5
The special tool connects to pin A speed sensor plus

out put, and pin J speed sensor / temperature sensor
ground.
49
Description
A Speed sensor +
B FWD request
C Disconnect request input
D Speedometer output
E Diagnostic link input
F Analogue Input 1
G Analogue Input 0
H –
J –
K PWM solenoid supply
L Solenoid 3
M PWM 1
N Range solenoid
50
P Forward solenoid
R Solenoid 2
S Solenoid 1
T VCS
U Ground
V Battery +
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

POWERSHIFT EGS OVERRIDE – S48
In situations where a “MANUAL” gear change (up or

downshift) is required the powershift auto change
can be overridden by selection of this console
mounted switch.
51
Test Procedure
Continuity should be found between Pin 1 and Pin 2
when switch is operated.
52
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH – POWERSHIFT
Energised at 12 volts If the transmission pressure is

to low, the warning lamp will flash.
53
Test procedure
The voltage measured between Pin 1 and Pin 2
should be 12V.
With Transmission oil pressure continuity should be
found.
Pin
Sender Resistance
No.
1 12V at low pressure 0.3 Ω
54
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

OIL PRESSURE SWITCH – POWERSHUTTLE
If the transmission pressure is to low, the warning

lamp to flash.
55
Test procedure
The voltage measured between Pin 1 and Pin 2
should be 12V.
With Transmission oil pressure continuity should be
found.
Pin
Sender Resistance
No.
1 12V at low pressure 0.3 Ω
56
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
When the handbrake has been applied, the switch

will be closed and the warning lamp is illuminated.
An alarm / klaxon will sound if the handbrake is on
with the transmission shuttle lever applied. 1
57
Test Procedure
Brake Engaged: 18
switch closed warning light illuminated
Brake Disengaged:
switch open warning light off
58
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FRONT INSTRUMENT PANEL – X70 12 PIN

The front instrument panel is sent signals from the
brake oil level sender, transmission speed sensor,
light switch and indicator switch.
At the rear of the panels are connectors that are at-

tached to the vehicle harness system.
These connectors and functions are listed on the fol-

lowing pages
59
SIDE INSTRUMENT PANEL – X22 20 PIN
Receives signal from sensors to display, hours, en-
gine RPM, oil pressure, fuel level and signals to
warning and indicator lights.
60
INSTRUMENT PANEL TYPES
POWER SHUTTLE CLUSTERS ENGINE FEATURES
Side panel P 424 Tacho 8,1 imp/g
”Compact (BSD engine) 770 Hz end of scale
without 75 HP Tacho 11,46 imp/g
Diagnostics” (Iveco engine) 585 Hz end of scale
Front panel 4 w/l + Logo

”Standard”
Front panel 4 w/l + Speedo
”Optional” (Turner sensor)
POWER SHIFT Side panel P 424 Tacho 8,1 imp/g

”Compact with (BSD engine) 770 Hz end of scale
Diagnostics” Diagnostics
Front panel P 424 4 w/l + Speedo

”Optional” (BSD engine) (EGS sensor)
POWER SHIFT (4ws) Side panel P 424 Tacho 8,1 imp/g

”Compact with (BSD engine) 770 Hz end of scale
Diagnostics” Diagnostics
Front panel P 424 8 w/l + Speedo

“Plus” (BSD engine) (EGS sensor)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

FRONT PANEL CONNECTOR –

CONNECTOR – AMP 070 12 VIE – X70
POWERSHUTTLE:
Pin Functions and Test Procedure

Listed below are the pin numbers,warning lights, and
gauges. 5
1
1. 12 volt Key Start
2. Earth: Check continuity
3. Tachometer:
With engine running drive signal from W output
of the alternator is at scale frequency
75 hp = 585 hz, 92 &108 = 770 hz
4. Dipped Beam:
Green warning light illuminates at 12v with multi
function light switch on. 6
12
5. High Beam – Blue warning light illuminates at 12v
with multi function switch on.
61
6. 12 volt and Instrument Backlighting
7. Not used
8. Not Used
9. Not Used
10. Not Used
11. Direction indicators:
Green warning light illuminates at 12v with light
switch on.
12. Brake Oil Level;
Red warning light when the input is connected to
earth with Ignition on 12V
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SIDE PANEL CONNECTOR –

CONNECTOR AMP 070 20 VIE – X22
POWERSHUTTLE:

gauges. 9
1. Air filter: 1
The Red warning light is illuminated if the input is
connected to earth with Ignition on 12V
2. Engine Oil Pressure:
3. Battery:
Low battery charging the Red warning light
comes on when the input is connected to +V dc. 20 10
Ignition on 0V or Engine running 12V.
4. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge:
The Red warning light is illuminated if the input is 62
connected to earth with Ignition on 12V (At 75°C
Indicator is on Red the warning Buzzer sounds
at 107°C)
5. Fuel Level Gauge:
When the input is connected to earth with Ignition
on 12V
6. Tachometer Gauge:
75 hp = 585 hz, 92 &108 = 770 hz
7. 12 volt and Backlighting
8. Earth – Check continuity
9. 12 volt key Start
10. Not Used
11. Not used
12. Not Used
13. Park brake – Red warning light Hand brake on
0V, hand brake off 12V
14. 24 volt Option
15. Buzzer
16. Options
17. Options
18. Transmission Low Oil Pressure – Red warning
light is illuminated and buzzer sounds if the input
is connected to earth. Ignition on 0V, Engine run-
ning 12V.
19. Transmission Oil Temperature – Red warning
light illuminates if the input is connected to earth.
Ignition on 12V.
20. Engine Cold start The yellow warning light
comes on when the input is connected to 12V.
Ignition on 0V Preheat engaged 12V
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

FRONT PANEL CONNECTOR –

CONNECTOR – AMP 070 12 VIE – X70
POWERSHIFT:

gauges. 5
1
1. 12 volt Key Start
2. Earth: Check continuity
3. Tachometer:
75 hp = 585 hz, 92 &108 = 770 hz
4. Dipped Beam:
Green warning light illuminates at 12v with multi
function light switch on. 6
12
5. High Beam – Blue warning light illuminates at 12v
with mullti function switch on.
63
6. 12 volt and Instrument Backlighting
7. Not used
8. 4 Wheel Steer – Green warning light Four wheel
input. With Ignition ON and 4WS selected 0.5V
should be indicated. With 2WS or Crab steer se-
lected 0V should be indicated.
9. Crab Steer – Green warning light
10. 2 Wheel Steer – Green warning light
Two wheel steer input. With Ignition ON and
2WS selected 1.5V should be indicated. With
4WS or crab steer selected 12V should be indi-
cated.
11. Direction indicators:
Green warning light illuminates at 12v with light
switch on.
12. Brake Oil Level;
Red warning light when the input is connected to
earth with Ignition on 12V
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SIDE PANEL CONNECTOR –

CONNECTOR AMP 070 20 VIE – X22
POWERSHIFT:

gauges. 9
1. Air filter: 1
2. Engine Oil Pressure:
3. Battery:
Low battery charging the Red warning light
comes on when the input is connected to +V dc. 20 10
Ignition on 0V or Engine running 12V.
4. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge:
The Red warning light is illuminated if the input is 64
connected to earth with Ignition on 12V (At 75°C
Indicator is on Red the warning Buzzer sounds
at 107°C)
5. Fuel Level Gauge:
When the input is connected to earth with Ignition
on 12V
6. Tachometer Gauge:
75 hp = 585 hz, 92 &108 = 770 hz
7. 12 volt and Backlighting
8. Earth – Check continuity
9. 12 volt key Start
10. Not Used
11. Not used
12. 30 volt battery
13. Park brake – Red warning light Hand brake on
0V, hand brake off 12V
14. 24 volt Option
15. Buzzer
16. Options
17. Options
18. Transmission Low Oil Pressure – Red warning
light is illuminated and buzzer sounds if the input
is connected to earth. Ignition on 0V, Engine run-
ning 12V.
19. Transmission Oil Temperature – Red warning
light illuminates if the input is connected to earth.
Ignition on 12V.
20. Engine Cold start The yellow warning light
comes on when the input is connected to 12V.
Ignition on 0V Preheat engaged 12V
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

CAB
4WD SWITCH
65
Test Procedure
Continuity
Switch OFF Position 1 Position 2
Pin 7 to Pin 5 Pin 5 to Pin 3 Pin 1 to Pin 3
Pin 6 to Pin 8 Pin 4 to Pin 6 Pin 2 to Pin 4
Voltage:
Ignition ON: Pin 3 = 12v
Pin 6 = 9v
66
BRAKE PEDAL SWITCHES S32 / S33
Test Procedure
Continuity:
Brakes not applied: no continuity.
Brakes applied: continuity, between the two centre
pins of each switch.
Both brake pedals must be applied to allow 12V to
relay.
67
Voltage:
Left Switch:
White/Red wire – 12V Continuous with Ignition ON
Red Wire – 12V Pedal depressed,
0V pedal released.
Right Switch:
Red wire – 12V Pedal depressed
0V Pedal released
Red–Black wire – 12V Pedal depressed
0V Pedal released
68
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

BRAKE OIL LEVEL SWITCH
When the switch is activated due to low oil level this

sends a signal to the instrument cluster to illuminate
the low brake fluid level warning lamp.
69
Test procedure:
Continuity:
With the fluid level correct there should be no conti-
nuity through the switch. Continuity should be seen
when the level is low or the test button pushed.
Voltage:
With the Ignition ON there should be 12V at the Red/
Black terminal.
70
MAIN LIGHT SWITCH
12 volts should be found at the switch at all times ir-

repsective of keystart position
71
Test Procedure
(Switch Off)
Continuity should not be found between any pins
(Switch Side)
Continuity should be found between pins 1 and 3.
(Switch Main)
72
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

FRONT WORK LAMP SWITCH (1)
REAR WORK LAMP SWITCH (2)MAIN LIGHT

SWITCH
12 volts should be found at the switch only after main

light switch is on and key start activated
73
Test Procedure
(Switch Off)
(Switch On)
Continuity should be found between pins 1 and 3 and
2 and 8.
74
HAZARD SWITCH
12 volts should be found at this switch at all times re-

gardless of key start position
75
Test Procedure
Pin No. Switch OFF Switch ON

1 to Pin 4 ––––
3 –––– to Pins 5/6/7
4 to PIn 1 ––––
5 –––– to Pins 2/3/6/7
6 –––– to Pins 2/3/5/7
7 –––– to Pins 2/3/5/6
76
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

FLASHER MODULE
Operational at all times in conjunction with the haz-

ard switch R10 K1
R11
+BZ1
XC1 XC2 R2
F1/C F2/C
77
CONTINUITY
Hazard/Indicator
Pin No.
Switch OFF Switch ON
CL 12v 12v
+ –––– 12v–0v–12v–0v–
31 –––– 12v–0v–12v–0v–
PR –––– ––––
78
MULTI FUNCTION SWITCH
Switch Continuity.
wind-
All Indicator Beam Wiper
scree
Pin Switc
n
No. hes
wash- Left Right Low High On
OFF
er
1
2 Pin7
3 Pin4
4 Pin5 Pin3
5 Pin4 79
6 Pin8
7 Pin2 Pin8
8 Pin6 Pin7
Pin
9
11
Pin
10
11
Pin
11 Pin9
10
12
80
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

FRONT WIPER MOTOR (1)
REAR WIPER MOTOR (2)
Energised at key start at 12 volts
81
Test Procedure
Pin No. Continuity Continuity

1 Pin 3 Pin 5 2Ω.
3 Pin 5 2Ω. ––––
82
4WS – STEERING SELECTOR SWITCH
– S47
At key start 12 volts should be found at the switch and

is directed to the steering sensors when a switch
selection is made.
83
Test Procedure
With Ignition ON
Pin 2WS 4WS CRAB

A 12v 12v 12v
B – – 12v B
C – 12v –
C
84
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

STEERING CONTROL UNIT

The Steering Control Unit controls the different steer-
ing functions that can be selected from the switch
S47.
When changing steering mode, the light for the cur-
rent mode is extinguished and the light for the new
mode starts to flash. When movement of the steering
wheel is detected, the light for the new mode remains
steady.
85
Connector Pin Out Description
12 pin connector – X95:
Pin Function Signal
1 Crab steering warning light –
2 Buzzer configuration –
3 Front alignment sensor input +12
4 Crab steering control +12
5 Buzzer output –
6 Rod iron steering control +12
7 Control unit supply +12
8 Ground –
9 Speed sensor input – 86
10 Rear alignment sensor input +12
11 2WS warning light –
12 4WS warning light –
8 pin connector – X96:

Pin Function Signal
1 EV2A output +12
2 EV2B output +12
3 EV3A output +12
4 Ground –
5 Front sensor supply output +12
6 Rear sensor supply output +12
7 Available optional output +12
8 EV3B output +12
87
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Solenoid Valve Operation Solenoid Valve Output

Crab/4WS > 2WS
Solenoid 2WS 4WS CRAB
When the rear axle sensor detects alignment of its
axis, the control unit de–energises the active steer- EVA2 X
ing solenoid valves and activates the solenoid valves EVA3 X X
for 2WS.
EVB2 X X
2WS > Crab/4WS
EVB3 X
When the rear axle sensor detects bridge alignment,
all the solenoid valves for 2WS are de–activated and
the solenoid valves for the selected mode are ener-
gised.
Crab > 4WS and 4WS > Crab
When the rear axle sensor detects alignment the
2WS temporarily activates (energising the corre-
sponding solenoid valves) until, after overcoming the
condition of rear bridge alignment, the desired steer-
ing type activates when, by reversing the steering
swing direction, the rear axle sensor detects align-
ment.
Solenoid Valve Failure Speed Pulses

The operation condition of any solenoid valve output Speed pulses are drawn from EGS–CLARK control
is tested each time the selected steering requires its unit. Output reference values of Clark gearbox are;
supply. Even when only one solenoid valve output is • 7 Hz for 1 kmÆ
short circuited or open, the control unit provides to
• 14 Hz for 2 kmÆ
cut the supply to all the solenoid valves by means of
the self protection (the control unit is locked) and to • 35 Hz for 5 kmÆ
signal this condition (short– or open– circuit) by values in volts –8 and +8.
means of the three warning lights relative to steering The speed calculation has been determined with a
flashing at the same time. Once the solenoid valve tyre having a circumference of 4.165m.
causing the failure has been de–energised or the
correct operation has been reset.
Steering Type Storage

The steering type is stored in a non–volatile memory
Buzzer Operation each time the machine is turned off. This information
Buzzer operation depends on setting of pin 2 of the is therefore stored for an indefinite time even with the
12 way connector: supply cut off.
• Pin 2 not connected (North America only) If 12
km/h is exceeded in crab mode, the buzzer
sounds.
• pin 2 grounded (Outside of N/America). If 12 Start–up and Axle Recovery
km/h is exceeded in crab or 4WS mode, the buz- The control units are supplied with a storage of the
zer sounds. last steering selected at two wheels. With this steer-
Buzzer operation is intermittent, 250ms on and ing type selected, it is always possible to recover the
250ms off. axle alignment; “short–circuit” the sensor or front and
rear axles, supply the machine (with the switch in 2
The control unit is set at 9 km/h; steering mode wheel position) and select the type of 4 wheel steer-
change is not possible when this speed is exceeded. ing enabling the bridge alignment.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

4WS REAR AXLE STEERING SENSOR – S42

is directed to the steering sensor when the switch
selection is made.
88
TEST PROCEDURE – X98
Pin 2WS 4WS CRAB

A 12v 12v 12v
B – – –
C – – –
89
4WS FRONT AXLE STEERING SENSOR – S40

is directed to the steering sensor when a switch
selection is made.
90
TEST PROCEDURE – X97
Pin 2WS 4WS CRAB

A 12v 12v 12v
B – – –
C – – –
91
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

STEERING SOLENOIDS
Energised at 12 volts but governed by the steering

processor.
92
Solenoid connections, viewed from the top. Arrow
denotes front of tractor EVA2 – X91 EVB2 – X92
Solenoid 2WS 4WS CRAB
EVA2 0v 0v 12v
EVA3 0v 12v 12v
EVB2 12v 12v 0v
EVB3 12v 0v 0v
EVA3 – X93 EVB3 – X94

93
TEST PROCEDURE
Pin
Solenoid resistance
No.
1 0V 5.0 Ω
94
TEST PROCEDURE
Pin
Solenoid resistance
No.
1 0V 5.0 Ω
95
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SWITCH – S47
At key start the spring loaded switch has 12 volts and

when operated energises the differential solenoid
valve
96
Test Procedure
(Switch Off)
(Switch On)
Continuity should be found between pins 1 and 5
97
TEST PROCEDURE –EV7
Pin
Solenoid resistance
No.
1 0V 5.0 Ω
98
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

RETURN TO DIG SENSOR (not 4WS)

Return to dig is an electrically activated feature which
enables the operator to automatically return the
bucket to a level digging position movement of the
loader control lever.
The return to dig system consists of an electro-

magnet mounted on the bucket spool, a sensor
mounted on top of the loader arm and a pointer at-
tached to the tube of the bucket self levelling linkage.
Whenever the bucket is rolled forward to dump the
return to dig electrical circuit is completed and the
solenoid on the bucket spool is energised.
99
1 2
Ensure adjustments are correct to facilitate oper-
ation
3–6mm
100
Resistance:
Pin 1 to Pin 2 = 1.7 MW
Pin 1 to Pin 3 = 31.9 KW
101
TEST PROCEDURE
With the loader lifted and bucket tipped
Pin
Solenoid resistance
No.
1 12V 19.6 Ω
102
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

108 hp (4WS only)
Return to dig is an electrically activated feature which 1

bucket to a level digging position movement of the
loader control lever.

magnet mounted on the bucket spool, a sensor
mounted on top of the loader arm and a pointer at-
tached to the tube of the bucket self levelling linkage.

3 4
SM009LB110
103
Ensure adjustments are correct to facilitate oper-

ation
88.5 mm 7.5 mm
6 mm
SM060LB110
104
TEST PROCEDURE
Pin
Solenoid resistance
No.
1 0V 23 Ω
105
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

GLIDE RIDE CONTROL – S5
Designed to reduce loader bounce when travelling

with an unladen bucket
WARNING
If the machine is raised using the loader bucket do
not operate the glide switch ensure it is switched
OFF.
If the switch is ON, upon engine start up the vehicle 106

will fall to the ground without any control.
Test Procedure
(Switch Off)
(Switch On)
107
TEST PROCEDURE – EV11
Pin
Solenoid resistance
No.
1 0V 5.0 Ω
108
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

LOADER LOCK VALVE
The loader lock when actuated is designed to pre-

vent movement of the front loader.during road travel.
109
Continuity should be found between Pin 1 and 3.
110
TEST PROCEDURE
Pin
Solenoid resistance
No.
1 0V 5.0 Ω
111
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

DOUBLE DELIVERY CONNECTION – S4
Auxillary hydraulic line for external tool operation.
112
Test Procedure
(Switch Off)
(Switch On)
113
Pin
Solenoid resistance
No.
1 0V 5.0 Ω
114
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

BACKHOE
SIDE SHIFT LOCK SWITCH – S7
At key start switch should have 12 volts to release/

engage sideshift clamps.
115
Test Procedure
(Switch Off)
(Switch On)
116
SIDE SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID LINK
Pin
Solenoid resistance
No.
1 12V 9.7 Ω
117
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

BOOM LOCK SWITCH (1) – S8
At key start switch should have 12 volts for operation

of the boom lock
118
Test Procedure
(Switch Off) – X25
(Switch On)
119
BOOM LOCK SOLENOID – EV5
Pin
Solenoid resistance
No.
1 12V 7.5 Ω
120
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

BACKHOE HAMMER SWITCH – S30
At key start the foot switch should have 12 volts for

operation of an attachment.
121
When switch is operated 12V should be found at Pin
2. X–36
122
BACKHOE HAMMER SOLENOID – EV3
Pin
Solenoid resistance
No.
1 12V 7.5 Ω
123
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

HAND HAMMER SWITCH – S3
At key start 12 volts should be found at the switch for

operation of a hammer.
124
1. – X35
125
HAND HAMMER SOLENOID VALVE – EV2
Pin
Solenoid resistance
No.
1 12V 7.5 Ω
126
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

BUCKET/TOOLS QUICK HITCH – S6
An accessory for attachment of buckets and tools

activated at 12 volts.
127
5.
128
QUICK HITCH SOLENOID – EV12
Positioned on the backhoe frame.
129
1. – X36
Solenoid resistance should be 9.7 W
130
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

REVERSING BUZZER
Activated by 12 volts at key start when reverse gear
is selected.
131
With reverse selected 12v should be found at pin

connector .
Resistance of the buzzer 162Ω
132
FUEL LEVEL SENDER
The signal from the fuel sender potentiometer deter-

mining the fuel level displayed on the instrument
cluster gauge.
133
Test Procedure
Approximate Resistance:
Gauge Indication Sensor Resistance
Full 9Ω
Half 129 Ω
Empty 333 Ω
134
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SECTION 82 – LOADER – CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 82 – LOADER
Chapter 1 – Loader Frame, Controls and Buckets
CONTENT

00 000 Tightening Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
00 000 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
82 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
00 000 Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
00 000 Overhaul–Loader Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
00 000 Self Levelling Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
00 000 Return to Dig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
00 000 Loader Bucket Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
00 000 Loader Arms Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
TORQUES
Loader arm Pivot retaining bolt
500 Nm (368 lbf.ft)
SPECIAL TOOLS
Loader Pivot Shaft Bolt Retainer 297189
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 82 – LOADER – CHAPTER 1
SIDESHIFT LOADER – DIMENSIONS AND PERFORMANCE – MODELS 85, 90, 90.2
3
(PER SAE J 732 C) WITH TYRES 2WD FRONT = 11L–16 F REAR = 18.4–26
With Two or Four wheel drive and 1.0m3 bucket. 4WD FRONT = 12.5/80–18 REAR = 18.4–26
E. Dump Angle 45°
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SIDESHIFT LOADER – DIMENSIONS AND PERFORMANCE – MODELS 95, 110, 100.2, 110.2
4
(PER SAE J 732 C) WITH TYRES 2WD FRONT = 11L–16 F3 REAR = 18.4–26 R4
With Two or Four wheel drive & 1.0m3 bucket. 4WD FRONT = 12.5/80–18 REAR = 18.4–26 R4
E. Dump Angle 45°
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

CONTROLS
The loader arms pivot on supports welded to the
chassis and have a safe working load of 1000 Kgs
(2204 lbs)
5
A single lever controls the lowering and raising of the
lift arms, roll–back and dumping of the bucket and
opening and closing of the multi–purpose bucket
where fitted.
In addition to these movements a ‘float’ and ‘‘Return
to dig’’ position is also available.
The ‘‘float’’ position enables the loader lift arms and
bucket to follow the contour of the ground and is ob-
tained by moving the loader control lever fully for-
ward into the detent position. The lever will remain in
the ‘‘float’’ position until it is moved manually towards
neutral.
6
Loader Lever (Standard) Shift Pattern
NOTE: Position of levers is with the operator seated
looking forward, unless otherwise stated.
Lever back (1) – loader arms lift
Lever forward (2) – loader arms lower
Lever fully forward (2) – loader arms ‘‘float’’
Lever left (3) – loader bucket roll–back
Lever fully left (3) – loader bucket ‘‘return to dig’’
Lever right (4) – loader bucket dump
NOTE: Combinations of loader lift arm and bucket
action can be obtained by moving the lever in a diag-
onal direction and/or rotating the knob to obtain
movements simultaneously. 7
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

When a multi purpose bucket is fitted the loader lever

can be twisted clockwise or counter clockwise to
open and close the bucket clam.
8
OVERHAUL–LOADER CONTROLS
1. Remove covers at base of control lever.
2. Disassemble and examine linkage with refer-
ence to Figures 3 and 4.
9
Loader Control Lever Linkage
(With Auxiliary Multi Purpose Bucket Option)
1. Control Lever
2. Multi Purpose Bucket Control Linkage
3. Auxiliary Bucket Control Cable
4. Bucket Control Link
5. Bucket Spool Link
6. Connection to Self Leveling Linkage
7. Transmission Dump Switch Connector
8. Loader Spool Link
3. Inspect linkage for wear and replace/adjust as

necessary.
4. On re–assembly adjust auxiliary multi purpose
bucket control cable to obtain full movement of
the spool when the control lever is twisted clock-
wise or counter clockwise.
5. Adjust self levelling linkage as previously de-
scribed.
10
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

7 1
11
Loader Control Linkage
1. Loader Control Lever 5. Connection to Self Leveling Linkage
2. Bucket Control Link 6. Bucket Spool Link
3. Multi Purpose Bucket Control Cable 7. Loader Spool Link
4. Linkage to Multi Purpose Bucket Spool
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SELF LEVELLING LINKAGE

1 2
A self levelling linkage mounted on the right hand
loader arm and frame automatically controls the
angle of the loader bucket during the raising cycle of
the lift arms to maintain a constant bucket level.
There is no self levelling during lowering.
Self levelling begins at the point where the tube (2)
on the loader arm contacts the washer on the bell
crank (1) and lifts the vertical linkage rod (3).
The linkage then moves the bucket control valve into 3
the roll out position to level the bucket.
12
Self Levelling Linkage Adjustment
1. Lower the loader to the ground.
2. Disconnect vertical linkage (3) at upper bell
crank (1).
3. Raise loader arms so that the bottom pin is
800 mm (31.5in) above the ground and fully roll
back the bucket.
13
4. Rotate the bell crank (1) to touch the tube (2) on
1 2
the loader arm.
5. Adjust the length of the vertical rod (3) so that
when re–connected, the end of the loader arm
tube remains in contact with bell crank.
6. Securely tighten locknuts on vertical rod.
3
14
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

RETURN TO DIG
The electrically activated ’Return to Dig’ feature en-
ables the operator to automatically return the bucket
to a level digging position after dumping with one
simple movement of the loader control lever.
magnet mounted on the end of the loader bucket
control spool. a sensor (1) mounted on top of the
loader arm, and a pointer (2) attached to the tube of
the bucket self levelling linkage.
When the bucket is rolled forward to dump the pointer
(2) no longer aligns with the face of the sensor(1) and
causes the sensor to complete the return to dig elec-
trical circuit and engergise the electromagnet. 15
The electro magnet remains energised until such
time as the bucket is returned to the level digging
position and the pointer re–aligns with the face of the
sensor.
Consequently when the loader bucket control lever
is moved either fully left to the return to dig position
or diagonally left to simultaneously lower the loader
arms using ‘float’ the bucket spool is held in the roll
back position by the electromagnet. When the
bucket reaches the level digging position the pointer
aligns with the face of the sensor and de–energises
the solenoid allowing the spool to automatically
spring back to the neutral position.
16
Return To Dig Sensor Adjustment
1 2
1. Place the bucket on the ground in the preferred
digging position.
2. Adjust the position of the sensor so that when the
bucket is in digging position and loader arms are
lowered, 50% (half) of the sensor face is ob-
scured by the self levelling linkage pointer.
3. Ensure the face of the sensor (1) is 3–6 mm from
the pointer (2) on the self levelling linkage. 3–6mm
As a visual aid for the operator, while seated in
the cab, the pointer mounted on the loader arm
can be seen to align with the pointer on the self
levelling linkage, when the loader arms are low-
ered and the bucket is in the level digging posi- 17
tion.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

LOADER BUCKET REMOVAL AND

INSTALLATION
1. Position the loader bucket on the ground fully 1
rolled forward prior to removal. Remove the pivot
pin securing bolts (1) and (2) and drive out the
pivot pins.
WARNING
When it is necessary to remove pins from the loader
that require a hammer and drift use only a brass ham-
mer and brass drift and wear safety glasses.
2. If a multi purpose bucket is installed plug hy-

2
draulic hoses prior to removal.
18
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, shut off the engine, relieve
all hydraulic pressure before any hydraulic
connection is disconnected.
3. Inspect all bushings for dirt and foreign matter

and clean before installing the pivot pins. In-
stallation of a bucket follows the removal pro-
cedure in reverse.
LOADER ARM REMOVAL
1 2
1. Remove loader bucket
2. Disconnect self levelling linkage rod (3) from bell-
crank (1).
3. Strap linkage rod (2) to loader arm.
19
4. Disconnect loader lift cylinder rod end retaining
pin.
5. Disconnect and cap hoses to bucket cylinder and
multipurpose bucket pipework where fitted.
IMPORTANT: Examine pipework to ensure that any
clamps securing the hoses to the loader arms have
also been released
20
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

6. Support loader arms using a suitable sling.
21
7. nstall loader pivot shaft bolt retainer V. L. Chur-
chill Tool No 297189
22
8. Using heavy duty socket remove pivot bolt.
23
9. Ensure loader arms are properly supported and
remove pivot bar.
24
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

10. Remove loader arms from machine.
25
11. Installation folllows removal procedure in re-
verse. When installing the pivot rod retaining
bolts tighten retaining retaining bolt to 500 Nm
(368 lbf.ft)
26
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

21199
7
SECTION 82 – LOADER (4WS ONLY) – CHAPTER 2 1
SECTION 82 – LOADER
Chapter 2 – Loader Frame, Controls and Buckets
CONTENT

82 100 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Overhaul – Loader Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Return to Dig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Loader Bucket Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Loader Arms Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 82 – LOADER (4WS ONLY) – CHAPTER 2
SPECIFICATIONS
SIDESHIFT LOADER – DIMENSIONS AND PERFORMANCE – MODELS 115, 200.2
(PER SAE J 732 C) WITH TYRES FRONT AND REAR = 440/80 R28

A. Overall Operating Height 4347mm (14ft 1in) 4653mm (15ft 1in) 4653 (15ft 1in)
B. Height to Hinge Pin Full Raise 3491mm (11ft 3in) 3491mm (11ft 3in) 3491mm (11ft 3in)
C. Dump Height 2717mm (8.8 ft) 2717mm (8.8 ft) 2717mm (8.8 ft)
H. Peel Depth 113mm (4.4 in) 113mm (4.4 in) 113mm (4.4 in)
I. Centre line of axle to Lift Fork Tip at ground level – 1.375 m (4.5 ft)
K. Rear axle to Centre of swing post 1324mm (4ft 3in) 1324mm (4ft 3in) 1324mm (4ft 3in)
M. Overall Length 5783mm (18.8 ft) 5783mm (18.8 ft) 5783mm (18.8 ft)
P. Overall Width With Bucket 2400 m (7ft 8in) 2400 m (7ft 8in) 2400 m (7ft 8in)
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2


CONTROLS
The loader arms pivot on supports welded to the
chassis and have a safe working load of 1000 kgs
(2204 lbs).
A single lever controls the lowering and raising of the

lift arms, roll–back and dumping of the bucket and
opening and closing of the multi–purpose bucket
where fitted.
In addition to these movements a ‘float’ and ‘‘Return
to dig’’ position is also available.
The ‘‘float’’ position enables the loader lift arms and
bucket to follow the contour of the ground and is ob-
tained by moving the loader control lever fully for-
ward into the detent position. The lever will remain in
the ‘‘float’’ position until it is moved manually towards
neutral.
2
Loader Lever (Standard) Shift Pattern
NOTE: Position of levers is with the operator seated

looking forward, unless otherwise stated.
Lever back (1) – loader arms lift
Lever forward (2) – loader arms lower
Lever fully forward (2) – loader arms ‘‘float’’
Lever left (3) – loader bucket roll–back

3
Lever fully left (3) – loader bucket ‘‘return to dig’’
Lever right (4) – loader bucket dump
NOTE: Combinations of loader lift arm and bucket

action can be obtained by moving the lever in a diag-
onal direction and/or rotating the knob to obtain
movements simultaneously.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

When a multi purpose bucket is fitted the loader lever

can be twisted clockwise or counter clockwise to
open and close the bucket clam.
4
OVERHAUL – LOADER CONTROLS
1. Remove covers at base of control lever (1).
2. Disassemble and examine linkage with refer-
ence to Figures 6 and 7.
5
Loader Control Lever Linkage
(with Auxiliary Multi Purpose Bucket Option)
1. Control Lever
2. Bucket Control Link
3. Transmission Dump Switch Connector
4. Bucket Spool Link
5. Multi Purpose Bucket Control Cable
6. Loader Spool Link
7. Multi Purpose Bucket Control Linkage
3. Inspect linkage for wear and replace/adjust as

necessary.
4. On re–assembly adjust auxiliary multi purpose
bucket control cable to obtain full movement of
the spool when the control lever is twisted clock-
wise or counter clockwise.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

7
Loader Control Linkage
1. Loader Control Lever 4. Loader Spool Link
2. Bucket Control Link 5. Linkage to Multi Purpose Bucket Spool
3. Multi Purpose Bucket Control Cable 6. Bucket Spool Link
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Return To Dig Sensor

Return to dig is an electrically activated feature which
bucket to a level digging position for a further work 1
cycle with one simple movement of the loader control
lever (3).
magnet mounted on the bucket spool, a sensor (1)
mounted on top of the loader arm and attached to the
cylinder.
When the loader bucket control lever (3) is moved di-
agonally left to the return to dig position (4) the elec-
tromagnet will hold the bucket spool in the roll back
position until the bucket is in the level digging position
at which time the indicator on the rod of the bucket
linkage will pass in front of the sensor which de–en-
ergises the electromagnet on the bucket spool enab-
ling the spool to return to the neutral position.
3 4
SM009LB110
Adjustment of the return to dig sensor is as follows

1. Place the bucket on the ground in the preferred
digging position.
2. Check the dimensions of 88.5 mm and 7.5 mm
are maintained as shown.
3. Ensure the face of the sensor (1) is 6 mm from
the rod (2). 88.5 mm 7.5 mm
As a visual aid for the operator, while seated in the
cab, the pointer mounted on the loader arm can be 6 mm
seen to align with the pointer on the return to dig link-
age, when the loader arms are lowered and the
bucket is in the level digging position. SM060LB110
9
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

LOADER BUCKET REMOVAL AND

INSTALLATION
1. Position the loader bucket on the ground fully
rolled forward prior to removal. Remove the re-
taining rings (1) and locking pins (2) and drive out
the pivot pins (3) at four locations (4).
WARNING
When it is necessary to remove pins from the loader
that require a hammer and drift use only a brass ham-
mer and brass drift and wear safety glasses.
2. If a multi purpose bucket is installed disconnect

and plug hydraulic hoses prior to removal.
10
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, shut off the engine, relieve
all hydraulic pressure before any hydraulic
connection is disconnected.
3. Inspect all bushings for dirt and foreign matter

and clean before installing the pivot pins. In-
stallation of a bucket follows the removal pro-
cedure in reverse.
LOADER ARM REMOVAL
1. Remove loader bucket as above.
2. Fully retract bucket cylinders and raise arm until
lift cylinder pivots can be seen above engine
cover. Place a suitable stand under the end of the
arm to take the weight while disconnecting the lift
cylinder pivots.
3. Switch off the engine and relieve hydraulic pres-
sure.
11
4. Remove the retaining rings and the locking pins
and then drive out the pivot pins. Lower the lift
cylinders carefully onto the chassis.
12
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

5. Release the retainers and drive out the pivot pins

from the self levelling arms. Lower the arms onto
the lift cylinders.
13
6. Disconnect and cap the lift cylinder hoses (1) at
the top of the loader arm on each side of the ma-
chine and disconnect the return to dig sensor
cable (3) on the right hand side. If the multi pur-
pose bucket is fitted disconnect and cap hose (2)
on each side of the loader arm
14
7. Support loader arm using a suitable sling.
15
8. Remove the retaining ring and locking pin and
then pull out the pivot pin.
16
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

9. Remove loader arm from machine.
17
verse.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 84 – BACKHOE – CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 84 – BACKHOE
Chapter 1 – Backhoe, Boom and Dipperstick Assembly
CONTENT

84 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Backhoe Control Linkage–Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
84 100 Component Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Dipperstick and Boom–Complete Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Dipperstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
84 114 Swing Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
84 114 Carriage Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
84 100 Extendible Dipperstick–Overhaul and Wear Pad Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
SPECIFICATIONS
Grease Ambra GR9 – NH710 A
Thread Sealant Part No 82995773
Wear Pad Limits Refer to Wear Pad Adjustment
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 84 – BACKHOE – CHAPTER 1
SIDESHIFT BACKHOE – DIMENSIONS AND PERFORMANCE MODELS 85, 90, 90.2
2
E. Reach from rear axle centre line 6890mm (22ft 6in) 8000mm (26ft 3in)
J. Maximum Digging Depth 4270mm (14ft 0in) 5485mm (18ft)
– Swing Arc 180° 180°
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SIDESHIFT BACKHOE – GENERAL DIMENSIONS – MODELS 95, 110, 100.2, 110.2
3
E. Reach from rear axle centre line 7913mm (25ft 7in) 8278mm (26ft 9in)
– Swing Arc 180° 180°
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SIDESHIFT BACKHOE – DIMENSIONS AND PERFORMANCE MODELS 115, 200.2
(Per SAE J 49) WITH TYRES FRONT AND REAR = 440/80R28
Backhoe Standard Dipper HED Extended

A. Loading Reach 1877mm (6ft .1in) 2818mm (9ft 2in)
G. Max Length Surface Excavation 6492mm (21ft 1in) 7500mm (25ft 0in)
J. Maximum Digging Depth 4302mm (14ft 1) 5527mm (18ft 1in)
L. Stabilizer Spread (pads reversed) 2790mm (9ft 2in) 2790mm (9ft 2in)
– Swing Arc 180° 180°
– Max digging force (general purpose bucket)
crowd cylinder (ICED) 3621 kg (7983 lbs) 2592 (5714 lbs)
– Lift capacity at 4.2m (14ft) above ground 1500 kg (3305 lbs) 995 kg (2195 lbs)
– Extendible dipper extension length– 1.2m (3.9 ft)
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

TORQUES
4 5
6 7
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

DESCRIPTION and OPERATION

Loader backhoes are available with a centre pivot or
sideshift backhoe assembly.
On centre pivot machines the backhoe pivots on a
fixed central point at the rear of the machine.
Independently operated stabilisers are attached to
the base of the frame and pivot about an arc to raise
or lower each side of the machine
8
On sideshift machines the backhoe is attached to a
carriage hydraulically clamped to a frame at the rear
of the machine. This allows the operator to reposi-
tioning the carriage on the frame and adjust the pivot
point of the backhoe to suit operating conditions.
The machine is raised using two vertical stabilisers
attached to each side of the machine.
9
Each stabiliser is independently operated using
levers (1) and (2).
10
The backhoe is locked in position during transporta-
tion using a hydraulically operated boom lock(1). The
lock is operated by a switch (3) which illuminates a
warning light (2) whenever the lock is activated.
11
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

The backhoe digging elements are controlled using

two main control levers.
Three types of control pattern for 2 lever systems are
available as shown on the following pages. A four
lever dealer installed system is also available as a
Dealer installed accessory.
Always familiarise yourself with the backhoe lever
control pattern before operating the backhoe.
12
Machines may be fitted with an optional extendible
dipperstick which can be operated simultaneously
with other boom, dipperstick and bucket movements.
13
The extendible dipperstick is controlled using a foot
operated pedal at the rear of the cab.
14
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

BACKHOE CONTROL LEVERS OVERVIEW (STANDARD PATTERN), FIGURE 15
IMPORTANT: Ensure the Sideshift Carriage Clamp switch (3) is ON before operating the backhoe and the
backhoe boom plate is disengaged either by lever or switch (4)
RIGHT HAND – BACKHOE Operating Lever (1), is with the operator seated in the cab facing rearward.
INDIVIDUAL OPERATION – DUAL OPERATION –

Straight line movement of the backhoe Diagonal movement of the backhoe
lever (1) operates dipstick and bucket. lever (1) allows dual operation of
dipstick and bucket.
DIPSTICK CROWDS OUT
BUCKET CURLS IN BUCKET CURLS OUT
DIPSTICK CROWDS IN
LEFT HAND – BACKHOE Operating Lever (2), is with the operator seated in the cab facing rearward.

lever (2) operates boom and swing. lever (2) allows dual operation of
boom and swing.
BOOM LOWERS
BOOM SWINGS LEFT BOOM SWINGS RIGHT
BOOM LIFTS
FEATHERING CAPABILITY –
Operating both backhoe Levers and the H.E.D foot pedal (1)
together (when fitted) allows multiple feathering operations.
1
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

15
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

BACKHOE CONTROL LEVERS OVERVIEW (OPTIONAL ISO PATTERN), FIGURE 16

lever (1) operates boom and bucket. lever (1) allows dual operation of
boom and bucket.
BOOM LOWERS
BUCKET CURLS IN BUCKET CURLS OUT
BOOM LIFTS

lever (2) operates dipstick and boom. lever (2) allows dual operation of
dipstick and boom.
DIPSTICK CROWDS OUT
BOOM SWINGS LEFT BOOM SWINGS RIGHT
DIPSTICK CROWDS IN
1
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

16
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

BACKHOE CONTROL LEVERS OVERVIEW (OPTIONAL PATTERN), FIGURE 17

Diagonal movement of the backhoe Straight line movement of the
lever (1) operates dipstick and bucket. backhoe lever (1) allows dual
operation of dipstick and bucket.
DIPSTICK CROWDS OUT BUCKET CURLS OUT
BUCKET CURLS IN DIPSTICK CROWDS IN

Diagonal movement of the backhoe Straight line movement of the
lever (2) operates boom and swing. backhoe lever (2) allows dual
operation of boom and swing.
BOOM SWINGS LEFT BOOM LOWERS
BOOM LIFTS BOOM SWINGS RIGHT
1
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

17
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

BACKHOE CONTROL LINKAGE–OVERHAUL

1. Remove control lever cover and Inspect and dis-
assemble linkage with reference to Figures 19
to 21.
2. When overhauling linkage adjust each control
rod to the correct length and check that levers au-
tomatically return to neutral position when re-
leased.
IMPORTANT: If levers Do Not return to neutral re–
examine installation of control rods.
18
Standard 2 Lever Control Linkage
1. Dipperstick Control Rod Length 298mm
2. Bucket Control Rod Length 298mm
3. Swing Control Rod Length 298mm
4. Boom Control Rod Length 298mm
19
Backhoe Control Levers
Standard Pattern
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Optional ISO 2 Lever Control Linkage

1. Boom Control Rod – Length 179mm
2. Bucket Control Rod – Length 298mm
3. Swing Control Rod – Length 298mm
4. Dipperstick Control Rod – Length 214mm
5. Boom Control Rod – Length 120mm
6. Dipperstick Control Rod – Length 85mm
20
Backhoe Control Levers
Optional ISO Pattern
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

21
Backhoe Control Levers Optional Pattern

1. Control Lever 6. Bucket Control Rod (127mm)
2. Control Lever 7. Dipperstick Control Rod (297mm)
3. Swing Control Rod (175mm) 8. Bucket Control Rod (175mm)
4. Boom Control Rod (297mm) 9. Bracket and Bellcrank Assembly
5. Swing Control Rod (127mm)
Control rod lengths shown for this pattern are ap-

proximate and minor adjustment may be required
after installation.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

COMPONENT REMOVAL
Dipperstick and Boom–Complete Assembly

WARNING
1. Park the machine on a level surface and position

loader bucket on the ground
22
2. Lower stabilisers sufficiently to remove the
weight from the rear wheels.
IMPORTANT: The rear wheels must remain in con-
tact with the ground.
23
3. Fully retract extendible dipperstick, where fitted.
24
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

4. On machines fitted with extendible dipperstick

install locking pin in transport hole (1).
25
5. Fully retract dipperstick cylinder and lower boom
until bucket is firmly resting on the ground.
6. Support the backhoe using suitable stand and
hoist capable of carrying 1500 Kg.
26
7. Turn off engine, then move backhoe control lev-
ers through all operating positions to relieve
pressure in the system.
8. Re–check that backhoe elements are fully sup-
ported.
27
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

28
Backhoe Boom Removal
1. Boom Cylinder Pivot Pin 3. Boom Pivot Pin (2 off)
2. Boom Cylinder Hydraulic Connection 4. Boom Hydraulic Tube and Hose Connections
9. Disconnect boom cylinder hydraulic connection Installation

at swing post (4). Installation follows removal procedure in reverse.
10. Remove boom cylinder retaining pin and care- During installation observe the following:–
fully lower cylinder onto boom. Use suitable • Tighten boom pivot pin retaining bolt (3) to torque
packing to ensure weight of cylinder does not of 190Nm (140 lbf.ft).
damage hydraulic tubes and hoses.
• Check all hoses for leaks.
11. Remove boom pivot pins and lower boom and
• Check hydraulic reservoir oil level and add
dipperstick assembly to the ground.
Ambra multi G 10W30 oil to specification
IMPORTANT: Ensure boom and dipper is fully sup- NH410B or Hydrosystem bio–degradable oil to
ported and will not fall over and cause injury. NH Specification NH646 H if applicable.
• Lubricate grease fittings.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Dipperstick Removal
1. Park the machine on a level surface and position
loader bucket on the ground.
29
30
BOOM LOCK MECHANICAL (where fitted)
3. Disengage the boom lock
31
BACKHOE TRANSPORT BOOM LOCK
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED (where fitted)
4. Disengage the boom lock
32
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

5. Remove bucket.
33
6. Fully retract extendible dipperstick where fitted
and instal locking pin in transport hole (1).
34
7. Lower the backhoe to the ground and support us-
ing a suitable stand.
35
8. Turn off engine, then move backhoe control lev-
ers through all operating positions to relieve
pressure in the system.
36
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

9. Disconnect hoses to dipperstick cylinders.
Extendible dipperstick hoses installation.
37
Standard dipperstick hose installation.
38
10. Support dipperstick cylinder and remove pivot
pin (1). Lower cylinder onto boom. Use suitable
packing to ensure weight of cylinder does not
damage hydraulic tubes attached to dipperstick.
39
11. Support dipperstick using suitable hoist, remove
pivot pin and carefully lower dipperstick to the
ground.
40
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Installation
Installation follows removal procedure in reverse.
During installation observe the following:–
• Tighten pivot pin retaining bolts to torque of
288Nm (212 lbf.ft).
• Check all hoses for leaks.
• Check hydraulic reservoir oil level and add
Ambra multi G 10W30 oil to specification
NH410B or Hydrosystem bio–degradable oil to
NH Specification NH646 H if applicable.
• Lubricate grease fittings.
41
Swing Post Removal
1. Remove dipperstick and boom as described on
Pages 13–15.
42
2. Disconnect control rod (1) and remove boom
lock (2).
43
3. Disconnect hoses (1) from each side of swing
post.
4. Remove swing post hose clamp (2).
5. Disconnect hose to boom lock valve (3)
or mechanical lock linkage (where fitted)
6. Cap all hoses to prevent ingress of dirt.
44
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

7. Remove locking pins (2) and drive out trunnion

pins (1) from swing cylinders.
45
8. Support swing post with suitable hoist and re-
move pivot pins.
46
9. Remove swing post from frame and collect lock-
ing washers (1) and shim(s) (2) where fitted.
47
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Inspection
Examine swing post and seals for wear or damage
and replace as necessary.
Installation
Installation follows removal procedure in reverse. On
installation tighten pivot pin retaining bolt to a torque
of 190Nm (140 lbf.ft).
48
Carriage Removal
NOTE: If carriage is being removed for overhaul of
sideshift clamp cylinders refer to Section 35 Chapter
3 before proceeding.
1. Remove dipperstick and boom as described on
Page 15 of this Chapter and cap all hoses.
2. Disconnect control rod (1) and remove boom
lock (2).
49
3. Disconnect carriage hose clamps (2).
4. Disconnect supply to clamp cylinders (1).
50
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

5. Remove hose clamps (1) and (3).

6. Disconnect hoses (2) from swing post (one each
side of swing post).
7. Disconnect boom lock valve hose (4).
8. Disconnect the upper hose (5) from each swing
cylinder.
9. Recheck that all hose clamps have been discon-
nected and that hoses will not catch on swing
post or carriage during removal.
51
10. Attach suitable hoist to carriage as shown in Fig-
ure 52.
11. Remove the 6 clamp bolts (1) on the top of the
carriage.
52
12. Carefully remove carriage.
53
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTE: It is not normally necessary to remove the

lower clamp bar (1) to perform step 12. If difficulty is
experienced remove the clamp bar.
54
Installation
• Installation follows the disassembly procedure in
reverse.
• Torque all carriage clamp bolts to a torque of
800 Nm (592 lbf ft).
• Check that all hoses are correctly routed and
clamped.
55
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Extendible Dipperstick Overhaul
56
Extendible Dipperstick
1. Inner Section 6. Lower Wear Pad
2. Outer Section 7. Threaded Insert
3. Shims 8. Wear Pad Installation
4. Adjusting Bolt 9. Cylinder Assembly
5. Upper Wear Pad
The extendible dipperstick comprises of two sliding served between the inner and outer sections of the
sections. The inner and outer sections are supported dipperstick.
and guided using four sets of adjustable nylon wear When the wear pads have worn and can no longer be
pads. adjusted they should be replaced as complete sets.
The wear pads should be inspected every 300 hours
or whenever unacceptable vertical movement is ob-
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Inspection of Wear Pads

1. Park the machine on level ground and retract the
extendible dipperstick.
2. Position the dipperstick on a suitable stand with
the bucket raised from the ground.
3. Clean the area around the pads.
57
4. Inspect each upper wear pad and if the cham-
fered edge (1) on the corner of the pads is no lon-
ger visible the pads have worn beyond their limit
and must be replaced.
5. If pads do not require replacement visually check
if the gap between the inner section of the dip-
perstick and upper wear pad is greater than
1.5mm.
6. If the gap is greater than 1.5mm the wear pads
must be adjusted as follows:–
58
Adjustment of Wear Pads
1. Position the dipperstick in the vertical position.
59
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

2. Count the number of shims behind the adjusting

bolts on the left and right hand sides of the dip-
perstick to determine which side has the most
shims.
3. Remove one shim from behind an adjusting bolt
on the side of the dipperstick which contains the
most shims.
4. Refit the bolt and tighten to a torque of
350–400Nm. DO Not over torque the bolt.
5. Repeat the procedure for the remaining three
bolts on the same side of the dipperstick.
6. Recheck the gap as described in step 5.
7. If the gap remains greater than 1.5mm remove
a shim from behind each of the adjusting bolts on
the opposite side of the dipperstick.
8. After performing an adjustment apply a coat of
Dry Moly–coat grease to the slide rails of the dip-
perstick.
NOTE: When all shims have been removed the
wear pads must be replaced.
60
Replacement of Wear Pads
To replace the wear pads it is necessary to separate
the inner and outer sections of the dipperstick using
either of the following procedures which are depen-
dant on workshop facilities.
Procedure 1
1. Park the machine on level ground and lower
loader bucket.
61
3. Position dipperstick on a suitable stand.
4. Attach hoist to inner section of dipperstick.
5. Disconnect hose connections to bucket and ex-
tendible dipperstick cylinders.
6. Remove extendible dipperstick cylinder retaining
pin and separate inner and outer sections of dip-
perstick.
7. Remove and replace wear pads as described on
Page 27.
62
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Procedure 2
This procedure requires the use of a loading bay or
service pit.
1. Park the machine with backhoe positioned over
loading bay or service pit.
2. Place the loader bucket on the ground and lower
stabilisers sufficiently to remove the weight from
the rear wheels.
3. Attach suitable hoist to top of inner section of
dipperstick and position boom so that dipperstick
is hanging vertically.
4. Disconnect hose connections at bucket and ex-
tendible dipperstick cylinders.
5. Remove extendible dipperstick cylinder retaining
pin.
6. Slowly lower hoist allowing inner and outer sec-
tions of dipperstick to separate.
7. Remove and replace wear pads as described on
Page 27.
63
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

64
Extendible Dipperstick
1. Inner Section 6. Lower Wear Pad
2. Outer Section 7. Threaded Insert
3. Shims 8. Wear Pad Installation
4. Adjusting Bolt 9. Cylinder Assembly
5. Upper Wear Pad
8. Remove and install new upper wear pads and 10. Re–assemble inner and outer sections of dipper-
apply thread sealant Part No 82995773 to the re- stick.
taining bolts. Tighten to a torque of 29–31 Nm. 11. Place 5 shims beneath the heads of each adjust-
Do Not over tighten or damage to the threaded ing bolt.
inserts may occur.
12. Adjust wear pads as described on Page 26.
9. Position new lower wear pads in the outer section
of the dipperstick
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SECTION 90 – CAB – CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 90 – CAB
Chapter 3 – Safety Cab and Roll Over Protection (ROPS)
CONTENT
90 100 Tightening Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cab Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TORQUES
Torque figures for individual components are listed at the beginning of each section of the Repair Manual and
can also be found in Section 39 Chapter 1.
Front cab retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Nm (158 lbf ft)
Rear cab retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Nm (133 lbf ft)
Cab support to Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Nm (332 lbf ft)
Bonnet Front casting to frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Nm (158 lbf ft)
Upper and front bonnet retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Nm (59 lbf ft)
Front bonnet to frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Nm (125 lbf ft)
Below are general torque figures for hydraulic hoses, tubes and ORS Connections that you may find on your
machine.
Thread Size: 9/
16 in – 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 – 16.5 Nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (10 – 12 lbf ft)
11/ in – 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 – 28 Nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (17 – 20 lbf ft)
16
13/ in – 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 – 53 Nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (32 – 39 lbf ft)
16
1 in – 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 – 77 Nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (46 – 57 lbf ft)
13/16 in – 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 – 107 Nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (63 – 79 lbf ft)
17/16 in – 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 – 142 Nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . (93 – 105 lbf ft)
111/16 in – 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 – 190 Nm . . . . . . . . . . . . (125 – 140 lbf ft)
2 in – 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 – 246 Nm . . . . . . . . . . . . (150 – 182 lbf ft)
SPECIAL TOOLS
Special Tools are listed in the Repair Manual introduction and at the beginning of each section of the Repair Man-
ual for your guidance.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

2 SECTION 90 – CAB – CHAPTER 1
10 41 55 90 84
39
35
10 33
27
82
21
17
10
50 44 25
1
Repair Manual Sections by numbers
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2


NOTE: Description of the disassembly procedure is
‘‘general’’ for most models. Disassembly therefore
may vary slightly dependent upon model and options
fitted.
Safety Cabs are of a steel monocoque construction,
with an integral 6 post roll over protective structure
and trimmed with a flame retardent material for oper-
ator safety.
The side and rear windows of the cab can be opened
and locked in position to suit operator requirements.
Low windows either side of the steering console and
a large front screen allow excellent vision. Both Cab
and Platform, offer a flat deck layout designed for op- 2
erator ease of use.
Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS) are of a steel
monocoque construction, with an integral 4 post roll
over protective structure and are trimmed the same
as for cab but with weather protection over the instru-
ments and a non cloth seat.
The cab and ROPS are isolated from the tractor by
rubber bushes, mounted towards the front and rear
of the structure.
The bushes are designed to absorb vibration and
noise and improve the ride characteristics and oper-
ator comfort.
Various access panels are provided in the floor to ac-
cess below the floor pan and steering console to
allow servicing of the brake reservoirs
Anti slip steps and hand grips are provided for ease
of cab or platform entry and exit.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SERVICING OF MAJOR COMPONENTS

In the following text lifting and removal of the cab and
platform from the vehicle is described for reference
when access to components is required that are diffi-
cult to access.
WARNING
Prior to removing the cab the refrigerant in the Air
Conditioning System ( if fitted) must be evacuated
into an Air Conditioning reclaim/recharge unit, refer
to Section 50 Part 2. Do not attempt to disassemble
the air conditioning system It is possible to be se-
verely frostbitten or injured by escaping refriger-
ant. Do not allow refrigerant to escape into the atmo-
sphere.
Listed are the components that may require removal

of the cab or platform to allow repairs, or would facili-
tate repair of components difficult to access.
CAB REMOVAL TO:

– Repair of underside of cab
– Removal of Loader cylinder steel cross pipes
CAB REMOVAL FACILITATES ACCESS TO:

– Hydraulic valve packs
– Front Transmission
– Main Harness / Transmission Harness
– Rear Transmission
– Hydraulic Pipework
IMPORTANT: Before Cab or ROPS removal discon-
nect the battery earth lead first to prevent damage to
the electrical components, and disconnect the fuel
cut off loom. Chock the front wheels (rear wheels can
be removed providing the rear axle is supported on
stands and the stabilisers are on the ground).
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

x4
4
Cab Attachment to the Chassis
5
View with Cab removed
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CAB DISASSEMBLY (INTERNAL)

1. Remove the floor mat
2. Gear Shift Lever (Power Shuttle) Remove the
gearshift gaiter from the assembly
3. Loader Lever gaiter remove
4. Backhoe lever gaiter
5. Differential lock pedal (if fitted)
6
CAB (FRONT)
6. Power Assist Steering Pipes – Disconnect and
tape back to avoid leakage and damage.
NOTE: To minimise leakage, plug all open pipes and
ports to prevent leaks and dirt ingress.
7
VEHICLE LEFT HAND SIDE
1. Heater Pipes – Disconnect hose clamps left
hand side of the engine and strap hoses out of
the way.
2. Cab side valance
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

VEHICLE RIGHT HAND SIDE

1. Throttle cable at the Fuel Pump
9
2. Cab side valence
3. Cab Looms – Disconnect at the harness con-
nectors to the right of the cab below ‘B’ pillar.
10
CAB REAR
1. Rear harness connector
11
2. Rear skirt
2
12
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

VEHICLE UNDERSIDE
1. Brake Pipes – Disconnect the rubber pipes at the
top of the rear axle (both half shafts) and plug
open ends to prevent dirt ingress. 1
NOTE: To minimise leakage, plug all open pipes and
ports to prevent leaks or dirt ingress.
2
2. Cab Earth Strap – Loosen and detach from the
chassis.
13
3. Air Conditioning (when fitted). After evacuation
of the refrigerant gas disconnect the Air Condi-
tioning Expansion Valve which is mounted below 3
and at the rear of the cab heater pod .
14
4. Disconnect the heater control cable
15
5. Disconnect the handbrake at the caliper.
5
16
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

LIFTING THE CAB

1. Prior to using the universal lifting bracket 295027
open the cab door and rear windows and remove
the ‘B’ Pillar trim. Place around the ‘B’ pillars
strops capable of supporting a weight of at least
500 kgs and attach them to the spreader bar.
IMPORTANT: The spreader bar must be used to en-
sure even weight distribution on the cab, if this pro-
cedure is not adhered to injury to personnel or dam-
age to the cab may occur.
2. Slowly raise the hoist sufficiently to take out any
slack in the lifting chains and stop the hoist.
17
3. Rear Mounting – With the nuts removed, the cab
through bolts can remain in position as the cab
is lifted
4. Front Mounting Bolts – With the nuts removed,
the cab through bolts can remain in position as
the cab is lifted
18
1
NOTE: When lifting the cab ensure the hydraulic
brake reservoirs are not caught and damaged on the
loader support frame.
5. Slowly raise the cab from the chassis ensuring
that all cables, rods and hoses etc, are free mov-
ing.
6. With the cab safely clear of the chassis the ve-
hicle can be repaired as required.
19
Re–assembly Of Cab To Chassis
1. After completion of repairs re–assemble in re-
verse order of disassembly, ensuring all torque
values are to specification, refer to relevant re-
pair manual chapters.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Lifting the Platform

1. When using the universal lifting bracket 295027
place around the ‘A’ and ‘C’ pillars strops capable
of supporting a weight of at least 350 kgs and at-
tach them to the spreader bar.
NOTE: The procedure for ROPS removal is the
same as for cab and all items to be disconnected or
removed must be performed in the same manner.
2. Slowly raise the hoist sufficiently to take out any
slack in the lifting chains and stop the hoist.
3. Rear Mounting – With the nuts removed, the cab
through bolts can remain in position as the cab
is lifted
20
4. Front Mounting Bolts – With the nuts removed,
the cab through bolts can remain in position as
the cab is lifted
With the platform safely clear of the vehicle repairs
can be performed as required.
Re–assembly Of Platform To Chassis

When re–assembling, slowly lower the platform onto
the chassis ensuring all looms, pipes and ancillary
equipment is clear of the chassis.
With the platform decked re–attach pipes, hoses,
looms and levers in the reverse order to disassembly.
Refer to ‘specifications’ section for torque values of
the platform attaching hardware and relevant sec-
tions of the repair manual for setting and adjustment
procedures.
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

GLASS REPLACEMENT
The following instructions detail the procedure for the
replacement of any direct glazed (bonded) glass.
The bonding kit, Figure 25, available from the Parts
Depot should be used when replacing any direct
glazed glass. If the bonding kit is not available use
only a reputable auto glazing company to perform re-
pairs.
REMOVAL – GLASS INTACT

WARNING
Always wear gloves and eye protectors to avoid in- TA6090018
jury from small fragments of glass. 21
1. Remove exterior trim mouldings – as required.

2. Remove interior trim mouldings – as required.
3. Where possible remove glass support blocks as
they can restrict the action of the cutting wire. In-
sert the cutting wire into the inner end of the tool
and secure.
4. From inside the cab use a pair of pliers to push
the wire (1) through the adhesive (2) between
glass and frame.
5. Secure cutting wire (1) in external handle (2), see
Figure 22.
TA6090019
22
6. Anchor end of tool in adhesive and pull handle,
see Figure 23 (A), guiding wire close to glass
edge. Pull end of tool (1) from the adhesive bead
(2) and reposition further along the bead, Figure
23 (B). Use long cutting strokes on straight
edges to reduce risk of wire breakage and short
cutting strokes at corners to avoid breaking glass
(two man operation).
7. Using suction cups, lift out glass. Place outer sur-
face of glass face down on a protected surface.
8. Taking care not to damage the frame, cut away
adhesive (1) to leave a smooth bevel of approxi-
mately 2.0 mm, see Figure 24. TA6090020
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove all residual ma- 23

terial from the frame.
9. Repeat Number 8, above, for glass clean up pro-
cedure.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

REMOVAL – GLASS BROKEN

1. Remove exterior trim mouldings – as required.
2. Remove interior trim mouldings – as required.
3. Where possible remove glass support blocks as
they can restrict the action of the cutting knife.
4. Taking care not to damage frame cut away ad-
hesive to leave a smooth bevel of approximately
2.0 mm, see Figure 24.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove all residual ma-
terial from the frame.
TA6090021
24
REPLACEMENT – NEW GLASS
Kit Contents (Figure 25)
1. Applicator Nozle
2. Adhesive
3. Tissue
4. Felt Pad
5. Applicator
6. Activator
7. Primer
8. Applicator Bottle
TA6090022
25
1. Apply the activator to the edge of the glass (ad-
hesive contact area) with the clean tissue pro-
vided. Allow to dry.
2. Shake the bottle of glass primer for 60 seconds.
Pour into applicator bottle.
3. Trim the applicator to dimension ’C’ in Figure 26,
and insert the felt pad.
TA6090023
26
4. Screw the applicator to the applicator bottle.
5. Apply the primer (2) to the previously prepared
area of glass (1), Figure 27.
6. Allow 15 mins to dry.
TA6090024
27
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

60
7. Using a sharp knife, cut off the end of the adhes-

ive applicator (1) and cut a ’V’ (2) in the end of the
nozzle, as shown in Figure 28. All dimensions
shown in millimetres. 65
8. Apply a smooth continuous bead of adhesive to
the glass (or Frame) 7.0
NOTE: It is difficult to fill in spaces to the correct pro-
file. Ensure that joints are formed correctly to avoid 3.0
water leaks.
TA6090025
28
9. Fit glass support blocks in position.
10. Lift glass into position with suction cups.
11. Fit lower glass support blocks.
12. Press glass into frame to ensure good contact of
adhesive bead.
13. Replace exterior trim mouldings – as required.
14. Replace interior trim mouldings – as required.
REPLACEMENT – EXISTING GLASS

1. Using a sharp knife, cut off the end of the adhes-
ive applicator (1) and cut a ’V’ (2) in the end of the
nozzle, as shown in Figure 28. All dimensions
shown in millimetres.
2. Apply a smooth, continuous bead of adhesive to
glass (or frame).
NOTE: It is difficult to fill in spaces to the correct pro-
file. Ensure that joints are formed correctly to avoid
water leaks.
3. Fit glass support blocks in position.
4. Lift glass into position with suction cups.
5. Fit lower glass support blocks.
6. Press glass into frame to ensure good contact of
adhesive bead.
7. Replace exterior trim mouldings – as required.
8. Replace interior trim mouldings – as required.
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

CAB TRIM
CONTENTS
1. Direction Indicators, Main Beam Selection, Front 15. Hammer Operating Pedal (Optional Equipment)
Windscreen Wiper Stalk and Front Windscreen 16. Air Flow Direction Outlet
Washer Control 17. De Luxe Seat
2. Gear Lever (with integrated Transmission Discon- 18. Backhoe Boom Lock Operating Lever (where fitted)
nect Switch) 19. Radio Placement / Miscellaneous Objects Holder
3. Foot Throttle Pedal 20. Drink Holder
4. Loader Lever (with integrated Transmission Discon- 21. Cigar Lighter/12 volt Auxiliary Outlet (where fitted)
nect Switch)
22. Windscreen Washer Fluid Reservoir
5. Anti Theft Key (optional)
23. Mechanical Differential Lock Pedal (where fitted)
6. Heater Control Panel / Air Conditioning (when fitted)
24. Independent Brake Pedals and Pedal Latch
7. Side Mounted Instrument Panel
8. Key Start WARNING
NOTE: When the key–start/stop switch is turned off When travelling on the road the brake pedals must
gauge needles may assume a random position. be latched together for straight line braking.
9. Parking Brake If the pedals are not latched pressure applied to one
10. Hand Throttle Lever pedal only, could result in the machine veering se-
11. Stabiliser Leg Operating Levers verely to the left or right hand side.
13. Hydraulically Extendible Dipper, H.E.D Operating 25. Hazard Flasher Button
Pedal (Optional Equipment) 26. POWER SHIFT 4X4 – Transmission Forward / Re-
14. Backhoe Control Lever Patterns verse Lever with Integral Horn Button
Standard: 28. Front Instrument Panel
2 Lever – Cross Pattern with Horn Button 29. Speedometer Optional
30. –Key Operated – Steering Selection Switch:
Optional: 1= Standard Steering
2 Lever – Cross Pattern – ISO 2= Double steering
2 Lever – Diagonal Pattern 3= Crab Steering
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

29
Power Shuttle Machines with Analogue Instruments, Figure 29
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

OVERHAUL – SEATS
Seats – Retained to the floor mount with bolts.
30
1.Seat Assembly with ROPS frame fitted – As de-
picted many parts are serviceable and assembled
with standard hardware. Serviceable parts include
rails, sliders, supports and levers.
IMPORTANT: Be very careful when dissembling
sprung seats (when fitted), releasing hardware with-
out releasing spring pressure could result in sudden
movement of the mechanism injuring yourself or
others
31
2.Seat Assembly (Standard Type) with Cab Fitted –
As depicted many parts are serviceable and as-
sembled with standard hardware. Serviceable parts
include rails, sliders, supports, levers and skirt.
IMPORTANT: Be very careful when disassembling
sprung seats, releasing hardware without releasing
spring pressure could result in sudden movement of
the mechanism injuring yourself or others
32
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

3. Seat Assembly (Deluxe Type) with Cab Fitted – As

depicted many parts are serviceable and assembled
with standard hardware. Serviceable parts include
rails, sliders, supports, levers, skirt, air bellow and
electric motor.
Before removing the assembly from the vehicle re-
member to detach the harness connector.
IMPORTANT: Be very careful when disassembling
sprung seats, releasing hardware without releasing
spring pressure could result in sudden movement of
the mechanism injuring yourself or others
33
OVERHAUL – GENERAL PARTS
Sun Visor – Mounted above the front windscreen and
retained by a bolt either end of the assembly, the unit
houses a sprung steel mechanism that returns the
blind to its rest position.
34
IMPORTANT: Before removal of the following com-
ponents disconnect the battery by use of the isolator
switch mounted below the engine fuel pump.
Key Start – Fitted in the right ‘B’ Pillar and retained
by a locking nut. Take off ‘B’ Pillar, disconnect har-
ness connector and locknut and remove.
Courtesy Light – Mounted in the roof panel and re-
tained by screws inside the lens cover. Remove lens
and attaching screws to disassemble
12 Volt Auxiliary Socket – Fitted in the left hand trim
panel and which can be removed by the loosening of
the locknut and detachment of cable connector
35
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

OVERHAUL – FRONT CONSOLE

Front Console Harness – Attached by harness con-
nectors to the instruments and fuse panel and re-
quires disconnection before the instruments can be
removed.
36
Upper Front Console – Attached to the machine by
attaching screws. Dependant upon the type of repair
required, switches, indicator lamps and gauges can
all be removed independently or retained in the con-
sole when removing the console but ensure the har-
ness connectors are detached.
37
Lower Front Console – Retained by attaching screws
to support brackets. Removal of this part will require
detachment of the upper console and related har-
ness connectors, steering column gaiter, Steering
wheel, Power Shift/Shuttle lever and Direction Indi-
cator stalk.
38
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Washer Bottle Assembly – Enclosed behind the right

hand lower front console is the washer bottle that
supplies water to both front and rear screens. Re-
moval of the 2 attaching screws allows this part to be
detached.
39
OVERHAUL – STEERING COLUMN
Levers Mounted to the Steering Column – On the left
is the Transmission Control Lever and on the right the
Multifunction Indicator Lever. These levers are at-
tached together by mounting screws and will separ-
ate when the screws are removed.
40
Steering Column Assembly Standard Type – Re-
moval of this part will require all attaching parts to be
removed prior to removing from the machine. The
column to chassis is retained by 4 bolts.
41
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Steering Column Assembly Adjustable Type – Re-

moval of this part will require all attaching parts to be
removed prior to removing from the machine. The
column to chassis is retained by 4 bolts.
42
OVERHAUL – SIDE CONSOLES
Side Mounted Harness – Attached by harness con-
nectors to the instruments and fuse panel this re-
quires disconnection before the instruments can be
removed.
43
Side Mounted Console – Attached to the machine by
attaching screws. Dependant upon the type of repair
required, switches, indicator lamps and gauges can
all be removed independently or retained in the con-
sole when removing the console but ensure the har-
ness connectors are detached.
44
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Right Hand Side Mounted Console – Retained by at-

taching screws to support brackets. Removal of this
part will require detachment of the upper console and
related harness connectors.
45
Right Hand Lower Side Mounted Trim.
46
Rear Mounted Trim – As with the trim in general
these are attached by mounting screws to support
brackets and can be easily removed as required pro-
viding attaching parts and trim are removed.
47
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

Left Hand Lower Side Mounted Trim – As with the

other trim these are attached by mounting screws to
support brackets and can be easily removed as re-
quired providing attaching parts and trim are re-
moved. For example ensure harnesses to the auxili-
ary socket and radio are detached before
disassembly.
48
OVERHAUL – ROOF PANELS
Inner Roof Panel – The roof panel is attached to the
cab by use of plastic captive retainers, the 2 bolts that
retain the rear windscreen stop buffers and the at-
tachment of the interior light. Removal of these bolts,
plastic retainers and interior light allow the panel to
be removed, providing the harness connectors to the
speakers and related circuits are detached.
49
Outer Roof Panel – Attached to the cab frame by
bolts and concealed by plugs
50
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

OVERHAUL – WINDSCREEN WIPERS

Front Windscreen Wiper – Mounted at the top of the
windscreen and behind the inner roof panel which will
require removal.
51
Rear Windscreen Wiper – Mounted on the ‘c’ Pillar
by attaching bolts can be removed easily once the
bolts are removed.
52
Cab External Trim Panels – These trim panels are at-
tached by screws to support brackets and when re-
moved expose the gap between cab and chassis.
53
LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

NOTES
604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Fiat Hitachi Fb90 2 Fb100 2 Fb110 2 Fb200 2 Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fiat Hitachi Fb90 2 Fb100 2 Fb110 2 Fb200 2 Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fiat Hitachi Fb90 2 Fb100 2 Fb110 2 Fb200 2 Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MODELS

FB90.2 FB100.2 FB110.2

Print 604.13.028 edition 09/2000

ADDITIONAL REFERENCE MANUALS

• In addition to this Workshop Manual, refer also

- Operation and maintenance instruction

DESCRIPTION OF THE COMPLETE

FB90.2 FB100.2 FB110.2FB200.2 4WS - • The complete Workshop Manual FB90.2

VOLUME MACHINE TYPE PRINT No.

Most accidents, whether they occur in industry, on the farm, at home or

On machines having hydraulically, mechanically and/or cable

COPYRIGHT BY FIAT-HITACHI EXCAVATORS S.p.A.

All rights reserved. Reproduction of text and illustrations in whole or in part,

SECTION 00 – HEALTH, SAFETY, MAINTENANCE

General Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Tooling and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SECTION 10 – ENGINE – NEW HOLLAND 92 to 108 hp

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 17 – TORQUE CONVERTER

LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SECTION 25 – FRONT AXLES

SECTION 27 – REAR AXLES

SECTION 33 – BRAKE SYSTEMS

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 35 – HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS

CHAPTER 2 – Fault Finding, Pressure and Flow Testing

Preliminary Checks ......................................................................2

CHAPTER 3 – Hydraulic Cylinders

LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SECTION 39 – VEHICLE CHASSIS

SECTION 41 – STEERING SYSTEMS

SECTION 50 – CAB HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

SECTION 55 – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

CHAPTER 3 – Starter Motor

LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2 604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000

SECTION 82 – LOADER REMOVAL

CHAPTER 2 – OVERHAUL (4 Wheel Steer Only)

SECTION 84 – BACKHOE REMOVAL

SECTION 90 – CAB PARTS

Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

604.56.061.00 / 604.13.028.00 – 09/2000 LB 75–115 / FB 90.2–200.2

Chapter 1 – General Instructions

ROTATING SHAFT SEALS

NOTES FOR SPARE PARTS

USE EXCLUSIVELY GENUINE SPARE PARTS

NOTES FOR EQUIPMENT

HOW TO MOVE THE MACHINE WITH THE BATTERY REMOVED

PAY ATTENTION TO THIS SYMBOL

WHEELS AND TYRES

VEHICLE SERIAL NUMBER (1), Figure 1.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE’S (2), Figure

UNIT SERIAL NO.

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE IDENTIFICATION

CAB IDENTIFICATION PLATES, Figure 7

The cab serial number and details are printed on the

IMPORTANT ECOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS

GENERAL A hose with a chafed outer cover will allow water